《Traveling To The World Of Anime With The Dark Souls System》


 Chapter 1

    Huh? Where am I? Why am I here?


    In a place covered only in a white fog, you can see the silhouette of a male teen standing in the middle of the place.


    Hikaru Hiroaki, this is the teen''s name. He is 16 years old, lives with his parents previously, a big fan of Dark Souls, a high school student. He has a black hair that reaches to his neck, coal-black eyes, 5''11 in height, wears a high school uniform, and slightly pale skin.


    Now, you might be asking why he is here, well, let me tell you.


    Previously, while walking in the road towards his school, he got hit directly by a red lamborghini and he died instantly.


    Hikaru tries to walk around the fog, but he was stopped by some kind of invisible barrier.


    "That''s weird, " he said.


    Then suddenly, an old disembodied voice sounded everywhere.


    "Hmm, thou shall be the inheritor of Dark Souls. Please use it wisely."


    "Who''s there!?" Hikaru shouted as he looks around vigilantly but it did not do much because the place is covered by the white fog.


    "I cannot answer thou question right now, but I will tell thou this, the olden gods have come out of their respective seals and it''s thou''s job to seal them back again or yet, destroy them, " the old disembodied voice replied.


    Hikaru lets the words of the disembodied voice sink in his head before he reacted, "Wait, what?! Why is it my job to seal them back?! Are you trying to kill me?!"


    The disembodied voice chuckles a little before It said, "Yes, indeed, thee will die in this adventure, but, thee will revive again and again after thee dies. Thou shalt be reincarnated as an undead in which world thee will choose."


    Hikaru thinks about everything the voice said before he nodded in agreement and said, "Okay, as long I have the Dark Souls System."


    "Of course, " the voice replied.


    Hikaru seems to be overjoyed when he heard that, he really love Dark Souls.


    "First I will tell thee what this place is. This place will serve as thou''s bonfire after thee dies. You get to choose your worlds but remember, once you pick a world, you will have to finish it, " the disembodied voice explained.


    Hikaru nodded, "Okay."


    "Alright, here are the worlds you can choose from, " the voice showed a transparent screen in front of him with the names of the worlds on it.


    ________


    Shinobi World


    Swords and Magic World With A Little Twist


    VRMMORPG World


    Modern Sword and Magic World


    Crisis Core


    World Filled With Aragamis


    ...


    ....


    .....


    ________


    Hikaru carefully looks at the screen carefully for the worlds he is going to go to and finally decided to go to the Shinobi World. He didn''t recognize most of the names he saw on the screen, The Shinobi World is the only one he got and he knew it''s the world of Naruto.


    "I pick the Shinobi World, " he said to the disembodied voice.


    "Very well, " the screen disappeared and a white portal appeared in front of Hikaru, "This portal shall take thee to the world thou has chosen. I wish thee good luck., " the voice said.


    Hikaru takes a deep breath before walking towards the white portal. As soon as he went inside the portal, he immediately lost consciousness.


    The fog covered place stayed eerily silent.


    ***********


    In a tree near the left door of Konoha''s gate, you can see a child, no older than 9, sleeping peacefully on the bottom of the tree. He has long black hair that reaches to his back, he is 130 centimeters, he wears a normal black t-shirt and black shorts. In the back of his hand, you can see the Darksign. A symbol forcibly engraved into humans to become undead.


    One jounin that has a gravity-defying white hair has just come back from a very hard mission and he wishes to read his icha-icha after he gets back home. He is wearing a green flak jacket and has three scroll pouches on each side of their chest, a neck guard, extra padding over the shoulders, and a zipper down the middle. The Uzushiogakure symbol is integrated onto the back of the jacket, symbolizing the ties between the two villages.


    He was about to enter the gate when he saw a child laying on the bottom of the tree near the gate.


    "Huh, weird, " he said. He walks towards the boy and he knelt down on one knee before trying to wake up the boy via shaking him.


    The boy slowly opened his eyes, and it revealed his coal-black eyes. When he fully opened his eyes, it took a few minutes but his eyes widen up when he saw the man in front of him.


    Hatake Kakashi, son of the White Fang of Konoha.

 Chapter 2

    He was right, the world he went into is the world of Naruto. The man in front of him is the very proof of that. Hatake Kakashi, one of his favorite characters in Naruto.


    He is knocked out of his stupor when Kakashi spoke to him.


    "Hey kid, what''re you doing outside here?" Kakashi asked with his mouth covered in his lower face mask.


    "Uh, I don''t know, " Hikaru lied. He just can''t tell them, "Hey I''m from another world on a quest to seal an ancient god that has gotten out of its seal" ya know?


    Kakashi looks at him suspiciously and said, " What do you mean you don''t know? You''re out here, all alone without anyone to accompany you."


    Hikaru then decided to tell him another lie but, "I don''t know how I really got here, but I can tell you a bit of my land if you would lead me to your leader."


    Kakashi contemplated it and said menacingly, "Fine, but if you do anything funny, I''ll dispose of you."


    Hikaru, terrified, said, "D-don''t worry, I won''t, " while waving his hand in front of him.


    Kakashi put his hand on Hikaru''s shoulder without any warnings and felt it was a little cold but he ignored it before using shunshin to go to the Hokage tower.


    *********


    (Hokage Tower Office)


    Hiruzen sat behind the desk full of papers while stamping them one by one with his stamper, when he suddenly sensed Kakashi and a unknown individual coming towards his office via shunshin.


    Hiruzen wears his Hokage robe, his skin is light, his hair is grey, his face is gaunter, and he has the wrinkles and liver spots of old age.


    He stops what he was doing and he looks in front of him before Kakashi and an unknown child appeared in front of him.


    Just after the child lands on the office floor, he immediately threw up.


    "Yare, yare, I think I should''ve warned you I was gonna use shunshin to get you here" Kakashi scratches the back of his head when he saw that.


    After finishing, Hikaru glared at Kakashi and said angrily, "Can''t you just warn me about that?"


    Kakashi eye smiled and said, "Then it wouldn''t have been fun."


    "You!"


    "Ahem! Tell me, what is this child doing here with you?" the Hokage asked sternly.


    "Uh, you see, I was just returning from a mission when I saw this kid laying right next to the village''s gate. He was kind of suspicious and he told me that he will tell us about his land if I bring him to you, " Kakashi explained.


    Hiruzen seems interested in what Kakashi''s talking about, he looks at Hikaru and asks, "So, what land did you come from, boy?"


    Hikaru got a little annoyed that Hiruzen called him a boy, when he is over 16 years old, but he just ignored it and replied with a lie to his question, "I came from the land of Lordran that was ruled by the Lord Of Sunlight, Gwyn. In my land, eternal dragons once ruled it before Lord Gwyn came."


    "Wait, dragons? Aren''t they just myths?" Kakashi asked him.


    "No, they weren''t. Wars were fought before the three lords managed to destroy them--" Hikaru continued but Hiruzen cuts him off.


    "What do you mean they destroy them, aren''t they eternal? Then how did they got destroyed?" Hiruzen asked.


    Hikaru was getting annoyed with all their questions, but he kept his calm and continued explaining.


    "Because one of their own betrayed them, Seath the Scaleless. The eternal dragons were able to live eternal because of their immortal scales, but there was a secret they were hiding, their weakness. Lightning. Their scales were extremely weak to lightning and Seath being jealous of his brethren'' immortal scales, told Gwyn on how to defeat the eternal dragons. So Gwyn used his divine lightning to pierce their scales, Nito, The First Of The Undead, spread disease to their ranks, and the Witch Of Izalith and her seven daughter of chaos destroyed their archtrees."


    Kakashi then asks, "Then what happened after?"


    Hikaru looks at Kakashi and said, "Then Gwyn''s light came, instead of just killing Seath right in from of him, he gave him rewards. Being a duke in his kingdom, the hand of his first daughter, Gwyenevere, and a part of his very own lord soul--" Hiruzen, again, cuts him off.


    "You kept saying lord soul, what are they?" Hiruzen asked curiously.


    "It''s hard to explain, but I''ll do my best. The lord souls came from the fire. The fire which Gwyn greatly desired. He became the hope of his entire race because of this fire. This fire is a part of the great nature itself, that''s why the powers that came from it was so powerful."


    "So what happened to the fire?" Hiruzen asked.


    "The fire burned out and darkness was spreading to the land, but it was all part of the great nature for humanity to rise up, unfortunately, Gwyn decided to go against mother nature herself. He lit the flame using himself as the fuel, " Hikaru explained.


    Now, Hiruzen is greatly confused. "Weren''t Gwyn a human?"


    Hikaru shook his head and said, "No, Gwyn wasn''t a human, I don''t know what race he is but I think he was a part of the race called Gods. Gwyn and his race were literal gods, I think."

 Chapter 3

    After explaining the things about the land of Dark Souls to the Hokage, the Hokage decided to give him refuge in the village. He didn''t tell them the reason why he was here though, he just told them that he fell unconscious for some reason and the next thing he knew, he was here.


    Fortunately, the Hokage didn''t ask for his personal information, maybe because he is a child?


    The Hokage also told him if he wanted to join the Academy and he said he will think about it. After Kakashi brought him to his small flat, he gave him 3000 Ryo for him to live a few weeks on it. By the estimation he did, 1 Ryo equals to 10 yen in modern Japan, this would mean he has around 30,000 yen in his hands. He has to make this money last for a few weeks and find a job because Kakashi told him they wouldn''t give him money anymore.


    Fortunately for him, he doesn''t need to eat because he is undead.


    Now, he just needs to figure out how the Dark Souls System works, it still hasn''t activated yet for some reason.


    Hikaru sat on his tatami floor near his small table as he thinks about what to do.


    The Dark Souls System hasn''t activated yet, and he has to figure out how to. Because this would be his only hope of surviving in this world.


    As he thought about the Dark Souls System, a transparent screen appeared in front of him.


    It said: [I apologize for the delay, some technical difficulties happened but don''t worry, it has been solved. Now, I won''t explain the functions because I really don''t have time, but to call out the Dark Souls System, thee will have to say "Praise the sun" for it to show up. Okay, goodbye]


    The message ended there and Hikaru was left bamboozled by this message.


    He did as the message told him and said enthusiastically, "Praise the sun, " while also doing the ''V'' pose that Solaire did after being summoned.


    A blue transparent screen appeared in front of him after he said that.


    [Functions:


    -Level Up-


    -Stats-


    -Challenge-


    -Souls Shop-


    -Upgrade Equipment-


    -Repair Equipment-


    -Kindle-


    -Reverse Hollowing-


    Estus Flask - 10


    Souls - 0


    !Starter Gift!]


    The only thing Hikaru doesn''t recognize there is the -Challenge Option- and the -Souls Shop-, maybe they are new functions?


    "Let''s see, ooh! A starter gift, wonder what''s inside it, " Hikaru said while looking at the screen.


    He pressed the !Starter Gift! and one small gift box appeared in the ground with a puff of smoke.


    Hikaru knelt down on one knee to open the box. Once he opened the gift box, he saw three items inside it.


    A dagger, 5 golden pine resins, and 10 Humanity.


    "Wow, that''s some starting items, " Hikaru said amazed. I mean, 10 humanities at the start? How awesome is that? And 5 golden pine resins? He could use it to increase his weapon''s attack for a few minutes. But the dagger... meh.


    He picks up the three items but he wondered where he would put them because, from the functions of the system, he doesn''t have an inventory.


    As he thought about it, he suddenly got an idea. What if he could sell stuff in the Souls Shop?


    He pressed the Souls Shop on the screen and it showed him another screen just on the left of the main screen.


    [Buy - Sell]


    He was overjoyed when he saw that he could sell his items, because, from the game, humanities cost around 5000 souls and if his calculations are right, he could sell 1 humanity for 500 - 2500 souls.


    He immediately pressed sell, and his items showed from the screen, even though they were in his hands.


    And he was right, humanities could be sold for 2000 souls. He decided to sell 5 of them and kept the rest for rainy days. Once he pressed -Sell-, 5 humanities on his hand were gone and only the other five remained.


    And on the main screen, his soul bar rose up and his souls are now 10,000. This means he could finally level up a few times and buy something good in the store.


    First, he leveled up 8 times and it all cost 5869 souls. He put all his stat points in strength before he bought the Drake Sword for 4000 souls in the shop for a good starter weapon. He now only has 131 souls. He became rich for just a few moments and lost it all just seconds ago.


    This is now his Stats:


    [Stats:


    Endurance - 10


    Attunement - 10


    Strength - 18


    Dex - 10


    Int - 10


    Faith - 10


    Resistance - (Pfft, yeah right)

 Chapter 4

    Hikaru was quite curious about the -Challenge- option back on the main screen. He pressed it and the shop screen on his left was replaced with the Challenge options.


    There were many options in the -Challenge-. There was an option to battle lower undead, like those peasant-like undeads. There was also an option to battle a black knight. Which he will ignore for now.


    "Hmm, maybe this is like a dungeon where I would beat enemies and advance to a higher stage, " Hikaru thought out loud.


    The long-haired child sat on the tatami floor inside his small flat as he explored the Dark Souls System.


    *********


    Meanwhile, back in the Hokage tower. Hiruzen and Kakashi talk about what Hikaru said to them earlier.


    "Kakashi, do you think what that child said is true?" Hiruzen asked Kakashi.


    "I don''t know, Lord Hokage, but I think he is probably talking about the truth, " Kakashi replied while kneeling on one knee towards the Hokage.


    "Hmm, that land, it''s quite sad. A ruler going against nature and his citizens had to pay for all his mistakes by turning undead or being manipulated by the remaining ''gods''. I think his light was never meant to be ''his'', " Hiruzen said with sorrow towards the dying land.


    Kakashi kept quiet and listened to his leader''s words. The Anbus who were hiding in the shadows felt it was wrong that the light had to go to the wrong hands.


    *********


    (2 Days Later, Morning)


    Hikaru agreed to join the Academy for two reasons. 1. He would be able to train his skills by being a shinobi. 2. And lastly, he would be able to meet the main cast of Naruto.


    He just figured out that the timeline he is in is two years before the series started. Naruto and the co'' are 9 years old this year, except maybe, Tenten, Lee, and Neji.


    Right now, he is getting ready for the start of school. This is his first day in the Academy, so he has to make a great appearance in the Academy, call it childish, but you know you would too.


    He sold 2 of his Humanities to buy the Thief Set but for his current child''s appearance. It cost him, 1000 souls, for each part of the whole set.


    Once he finished putting them all on, a screen appeared in front of him, saying:


    [Mask of sinners. They hide their faces, stifle their voices, and hide in the shadows. It does not provide much in the way of defense.


    This armor is made of smooth black leather is extremely quiet, a good thing for those who hide in the shadows. The leather itself is thick, offering a decent level of protection.]


    After reading it, he dismissed the screen before going out of his small flat to got the Academy. He lives in an apartment building and it has four floors each, having 5 flats each floor. He also had his Drake Sword covered in white cloth on his back. It''s quite weird to look at because the Drake Sword is almost as tall as his entire body.


    Two days ago, he realized that his physical strength goes beyond superhuman. He could destroy trees by just punching it once. That''s how strong he is now. He still doesn''t know how to perfectly control his strength and that makes it dangerous for him to fight someone right now. He could easily kill them and what frightens him the most is, his emotion has been lacking lately.


    *********


    (A Few Minutes Later)


    After just arriving at the Academy, he immediately knew he was late for the welcome ceremony. The class was already starting when he arrived at the gate, he saw it through the open windows of the classrooms.


    He doesn''t need the welcome ceremony because he had the paper from the Hokage himself that tells the teacher that he will be joining the class. The Hokage also told him he could pick any classroom he wants, guess who''s getting special treatment here?


    Hikaru walks into the doors of the Academy and saw the female receptionist doing her work. Hikaru walks towards her and asks, "Hey miss, can you lead me towards the classroom where most of the clan heirs are?"


    The lady looks at him and he showed her the doc.u.ment that the Hokage gave him. She widens her eyes before calming down and said, "Come with me, I''ll lead you there."

 Chapter 5

    The two of them, Hikaru and the female receptionist, awkwardly walks in the hallway towards the classroom where most of the clan heirs are. The two of them haven''t spoken since earlier and it really bothers Hikaru because of the awkwardness it''s creating.


    Hikaru just tried to endure the awareness by listening to the sounds that the other classrooms make.


    Teachers yelling, children laughing, lectures, and... a thud? He didn''t realize it but he has already arrived at the door of the classroom he is looking for. He slightly bumps into the receptionist because he wasn''t paying any attention to his surroundings.


    The receptionist looks at him and he scratches his head sheepishly and apologized towards the female receptionist.


    The receptionist ignored it and knocks on the door three times before she slides the door and enters the room with the nine-year-old Hikaru.


    When they entered the room, they saw Iruka covered in orange paint berating a yellow-haired child.


    "Naruto! Your pranks have gone too far!" Iruka yelled angrily.


    But Naruto just crossed his arms and said with smugness, "You should''ve paid more attention towards your surroundings if you don''t want to be pranked by yours truly, Iruka-sensei."


    Iruka knocks the top of Naruto''s head with his left first and Naruto clutches his head in pain.


    "That''s what you get for playing a prank, Naruto. Detention for you, " Iruka said.


    "You, Baka-sensei!" Naruto yelled while still clutching his head in pain before running away towards the back of the classroom.


    "What did you say?!" Iruka tries to run after Naruto but the lady receptionist cuts him off.


    "Ahem!"


    Iruka turned his head towards the door and saw the receptionist from the entrance.


    "O-oh, Ayami-san, what brings you here?" Iruka said weirdly with a flush on his face.


    "I brought a child, he got Hokage-sama''s approval to join any classroom he wants to go in, and this is the classroom he picked, " Ayami said stoically. She pointed at Hikaru who''s right beside her.


    Iruka looks at the child and noticed something really strange, first of all, why is this child wearing that leather made armor from head to tow? And secondly, why does he have his hood on and third, is that a freaking sword on his back?! Even though it''s covered in white cloth, but the tip of the sword is cutting the cloth!


    He looks back at Ayami and asks, "What''s his name?"


    Ayami replied, "Hikaru Hiroaki, 9 years old. He just arrived here from another land, the Hokage said in the doc.u.ments Hikaru gave me."


    (Note: Normally this would be his name, Hiroaki Hikaru. The first name is in the right and the last name is on the left).


    Iruka looks at Hikaru again and asks, "Hiroaki-kun, what is that on your back?"


    Hikaru stared at Iruka before taking the sword on his back.


    "This? This is the Drake Sword. I can''t show it to you for many reasons, but I can tell you what this thing is made of. If you want, " Hikaru explained.


    "No that''s not what I mean. What I meant is, why did you bring a sword in the school?" Iruka asked sternly.


    "To protect myself, of course. I just arrived in this unknown land and do you think I would go around walking while I ignore my safety?" Hikaru retorted to Iruka.


    "No, of course not. It''s just that I think some students might try to steal it from you, they might try to play with it and hurt themselves very badly, " Iruka explained.


    "Is that it? You''re wasting time here, and I think I need to find my seat, " Hikaru said because Iruka is indeed wasting time.


    Iruka just gave up and said, "Fine, I''ll talk to you later. Anyway, your seat is right there, right beside Sasuke, " he pointed at a raven-haired child in the back, who is brooding his life away.


    "Okay, thanks, " Hikaru said while putting the sword back on his, well, back before walking towards his seat.


    When he got there, he saw child Sasuke staring at him with his brooding eyes.


    "Yo, can I sit here?" Hikaru asked as he greeted him.


    Sasuke replied, "Do what you want, " before he turned back into his brooding.


    "Okay then, " Hikaru sat beside Sasuke. But as he sat down, he noticed that there were many students glaring at him. Mainly, the female ones. He wondered why and came out of the conclusion that it must be because of his long hair.


    He looked at them, "Don''t worry, I''m a boy, not a girl, " and said that to calm them down. Which worked.


    They all sighed in relief and came back to what they''re doing before.

 Chapter 6

    In the classroom where most of the clan heirs are, many students listen to the teacher, Iruka, as he lectured them about the history of the Shinobi world. But, even though he is enthusiastic about teaching them, many students are bored with his lectures. And most of them are the clan heirs.


    The super lazy genius, Shikamaru Nara, son of Shikaku Nara, the clan head. He has narrow brown eyes and an expression suggesting he is either bored or irritated. He has shoulder length black hair tied in a spiky ponytail. He is currently napping on his desk.


    On the other seat next to him is Choji Akimichi, son of Choza Akimichi. He has a rotund build and markings on his cheeks in the form of swirls. He has spiky, brown hair that sticks upward and On his left hand was a bag of ch.i.p.s and on the other hand, is another bag of ch.i.p.s. He has been best friends with Shikamaru since he was a child.


    Ino Yamanaka, daughter of Inochi Yamanaka. Ino has fair skin, light blue eyes, and long platinum blonde hair worn in a ponytail, with bangs framing the right side of her face.  She is also a childhood friend of the two clan heirs.


    Kiba Inuzuka, son of the Inuzuka clan head, Tsume Inuzuka. His attire consisted of dark greyish pants reaching to his calves and a grey, hooded fur-lined coat, with the hood placed on his head. He is currently playing with Akamaru on his desk.


    Next is Sasuke Uchiha, the lone survivor of the Uchiha Clan massacre done by his older brother, Uchiha Itachi. He has black eyes and spiky black hair with a blue tint. He wears a typical Uchiha long neck t-shirt with a white ninja shorts. He had vowed to kill his elder brother once they meet again, which is nothing but a pipe dream.


    He is currently being annoyed by Hikaru, his seatmate, because he keeps poking his face with a short thin stick.


    He turned his head towards Hikaru and said, "Can you stop? It''s getting really annoying!"


    "I''ve been trying to get your attention because I want to ask you something, " Hikaru said.


    "What?" Sasuke said annoyed.


    "Are you rich?" Hikaru asked him seriously.


    Sasuke seems to think about it before he replied, "No, I''m not, yet. The Hokage is the one holding my clan''s money because I''m still too young to take it for myself."


    "Hmm, shame. Could''ve been used for my plans, " Hikaru muttered.


    "Did you say something?"


    "Hahaha, it''s nothing, " Hikaru laughed it away before thinking about his plans again.


    Sasuke ignored him again and kept brooding.


    Hikaru''s plan is to hire mercenaries to find a seal indicating the olden god''s seal. He figured out earlier that he needs to find where the god is and continue to grow stronger while at it. But the problem is, he doesn''t have any funds. That''s why he wanted to see if Sasuke has his clan''s money, but unfortunately, his clan''s money is still under the hands of the Hokage.


    It''s easy to bribe Sasuke for the money, all he has to do is give him a special weapon from the Dark Souls System and give it to him in exchange for his money. But he doesn''t have a single penny on him right now.


    Now, he needs changes in his plans. First, he needs a business that will fund him for the rest of the time he will stay here.


    ''Hmm, but what kind of business?'' He thought about it but he couldn''t find any ideas.


    As he thought and thought about it, he suddenly figured out a way to get a business that would sustain him.


    "Aha!" He shouted as he stood up from his chair. Everybody in the classroom looks at him, startled.


    "Hiroaki-kun, since you''ve already stood up, answer this question: Who are the three legendary sannins?" Iruka asked.


    Because he wasn''t paying any attention to the lesson, he did not hear that Iruka had asked students to raise their hands if any of them wanted to answer this sudden question. But nobody wanted to raise their hands, that''s why, when Hikaru suddenly stood up, he was automatically selected as the one answering the question.


    Hikaru did not want to waste any time and just answered it perfectly, "The three legendary sannins are Jiraiya The Gallant, Tsunade Senju, Orochimaru, The Traitor. They were trained by the third Hokage, Hiruzen Sarutobi. They earned their title ''sannin'' when they were defeated by Hanzo Of The Salamander."


    At this point, all the students are staring at him in amazement. Even Sasuke.


    After answering the question, Hikaru sat down and continued thinking about his plans. While Iruka is thinking.


    ''I only said their names, not their history, '' he sweatdrop.


    In the end, he was the one who wasted his time...

 Chapter 7 - Trouble

    (At The Hokage Tower)


    Hiruzen sat in his chair, dealing with the worst enemy created by mankind, paperwork! It is a never-ending cycle of stamping and stamping. An enemy that no one could beat, not even he, the Third Hokage. He would even bet that Hashirama, the First Hokage, couldn''t defeat it either.


    So, he took a break from the paperwork and took out an orange book from one of his drawers.


    Not even a minute later, he is already laughing like a pervert with his face covered in blush.


    "Kairi-chan, you''re so naughty, hehe, " he laughed perversely.


    All of his anbu hiding in the shadows sweatdrops at their leader''s perverseness.


    Suddenly, a knock came from the door. Hiruzen quickly put away his book under the drawers after he heard the knock.


    "Hokage-sama, can I come in?" a male voice asked behind the door.


    "Come in, " Hiruzen said.


    The door opened and it revealed Iruka. He seems to be in distress.


    "So, what is it, Iruka-kun?" The Hokage asked in an old and wise voice.


    He walks towards the front of the desk before asking, "Hokage-sama, can you please stop Hikaru-kun? I tried everything I could do but for some reason, his physical strength is stronger than mine and he just swatted me away."


    Hiruzen''s face grew serious when he heard that, something must''ve happened for Iruka not able to stop him.


    "What happened?" The Hokage asked.


    "Well..."


    (30 Minutes Ago)


    Ding-Ding-Ding!


    The school bell rang, signaling that it was already break time for the students. Everybody in the classroom cheered as they could finally get out of that stupid and boring lesson and eat.


    Iruka wraps up his things and said, "Okay, you guys eat responsibly now, okay? No fighting and definitely, no bullying, got it?"


    ""Yes Sensei!"" they all yelled at the same time.


    Iruka nodded in satisfaction for his students before walking out of the classroom. But, in the corner of the classroom, you can see a blond-haired boy rubbing his stomach because of hunger.


    Naruto haven''t been able to buy food for himself because his monthly allowance is already gone. His allowance wasn''t even enough to pay for his rent, food, and other necessities. Since that day from the orphanage, his Jii-jii said that he will be living alone from that day.


    Hikaru notices this and knew that making friends with the protagonist of an anime is always the best idea. I mean, Naruto will be the strongest Hokage in the world in the future. He can probably use his help for the battle against the olden god that resides here in the future.


    He stood up from his seat and walked towards Naruto. When he neared him, Hikaru opened his mouth.


    "Yo, I''m Hikaru Hiroaki, what''s your name? " he asked him.


    Naruto looks at Hikaru and looked around before asking, "Are you... talking to me?" he pointed at himself.


    "Hahaha, " Hikaru laughed before saying, "Of course, who am I supposed to talk around this corner?"


    Naruto''s face brightens up before he stood up and introduces himself, "I''m Uzumaki Naruto, and I''m gonna be the next Hokage! Believe it!"


    "Hahaha, of course, of course, I believe you. So, wanna eat some ramen?" Hikaru asked.


    This time, Naruto frowned and looks down, "But I don''t have any money, " he said.


    Hikaru simply smiled and said, "Don''t worry, I''ll be the one paying for it, I''ll treat you."


    "Really?!" his eyes were all shiny and bright when he heard that


    "Of course, let''s go, " Hikaru holds Naruto''s left hand before walking towards the door.


    He didn''t notice it but Naruto was blushing.


    (On The Courtyard Of The School)


    After buying three cups of seafood ramen, Naruto and Hikari went out of the door of the building of the school to sit down under a nearby tree.


    The shades of the tree block the sun from getting in under the tree where Naruto and Hikaru sat on as they ate their food.


    Hikaru gave Naruto the other two cups of ramen while he kept the other one for himself.


    Naruto slurps down the noodles furiously while rapidly moving his chopsticks. Meanwhile, Hikaru slowly ate his Ramen without any rush, unlike Naruto.


    Hikaru turns his head towards Naruto and said, "You know Naruto, you should really slow down. You might choke on those noodles."


    Naruto looks at Hikaru with his mouth still full and replied, "I won''tsh shoke onsh it."


    Hikaru got annoyed at his mouth full talking, so he said, "Naruto, don''t talk with your mouth full either!"


    "But..."


    On the school door, you can see 5 third years watch the two of them silently.


    "Is that the demon boy?"


    "Yes, I from it from my parents that 9 years ago, he was the one who killed everyone in the village."


    "Really?! That prankster?"


    "Yes, they said that he is the Kyuubi itself."


    "Tch, then why does he get to live inside the village? We should kick him out and let him be eaten by the chakra beast outside the village."


    "It doesn''t matter, my parents said that the Hokage is a demon lover and he would rather keep the demon here inside the village, rather than kick it out."


    "Then what do we do?"


    "My parents also said that the Kyuubi is currently weaken and he could die from a single mortal blow, that''s why I''ve devised a plan to kill him."


    "What do we do with that other guy right beside the demon?"


    "Let''s ignore him, he''s probably just a weak little shit."


    ""Yeah!""

 Chapter 8 - Trouble 2

    As both of them are their ramens under the tree, they didn''t notice 5 individuals silently sneaking behind them. Although the other four don''t have a weapon, the other one had a Kunai on his right hand. He was behind the other four, ready to throw it. The four immediately ganged up on Hikaru from behind and held both of his arms back and the other two held his waist so that he could not move.


    Hikaru, of course, was startled.


    "Hey, what is the meaning of this?!" Hikaru yelled.


    One of the four replied with disdain, "Hmph, we are here to kill the demon. Just relax and watch the demon get killed, demon lover."


    Naruto quickly drops his ramen and tried to help Hikaru by trying to get their grips out of Hikaru.


    "Oi, lose your grips off of him!" Naruto shouted while pulling their hands off Hikaru.


    The other one on the back smirks before throwing the Kunai directly at Naruto''s head. Hikaru saw this and knew it would be fatal once it reaches Naruto.


    As if the time had slow down, Hikaru back headbutts the third year behind him and the guy releases his grip on his right arm. He used that to punch the other one on his left arm, the punch was so hard that when it hit his face, his fist dug onto it. The boy holding his left arm was blown away by 10 meters.


    He was instantly knocked out.


    Hikaru quickly tries to catch the kunai, but it was futile because it was already too late. But he had another idea, just before the kunai reaches Naruto''s head, he blocks it with his left palm. It then pierced it through behind.


    All of this happened in just a single span of a second, a miracle I would say.


    "F.u.c.k!" Hikaru held his left hand down where the kunai pierced. Even though he is an undead, he still feels pain. And the excruciating pain of the kunai piercing his left hand is definitely not what he wanted to experience.


    "Hikaru, are you okay?!" Naruto quickly kicks off the other two on Hikaru''s waist before he kneels down to his side to see his injury.


    "I''m fine, this is just a scratch. Just stay here, I''ll deal with them, " Hikaru pulls the kunai out of his hand before throwing at the right leg of the kid he punched before. The third-year didn''t wake up and seems to be unconscious.


    Hikaru slightly pushes Naruto away to get him out of his way, lest he gets hurt.


    Hikaru stared coldly at the kid who threw the kunai at Naruto before dashing off so fast towards the kid, that even Naruto couldn''t see him.


    The kid didn''t have enough time to react before Hikaru kicks him in the stomach with his right foot so hard, that he spits out his saliva. He was blown away from Hikaru but not even less than a second, Hikaru grabs his collar before he could truly get blown away and smashed his head on the ground. The ground cracked and his face was deep inside it.


    Hikaru slightly leaned over his ear and whispered, "You dare to hurt my friend? For that, you deserve nothing less than... death."


    Hikaru was about to finish him off, when Iruka arrives at the scene.


    "Hiroaki Hikaru! What are you doing?!" Iruka was there, near the tree where he and Naruto were eating before. He walks over towards Hikaru and tried to grab his shoulder only for him to be flung away when Hikaru simply slaps him away with his right hand.


    Hikaru turns his head to look towards Iruka and said coldly, "Don''t disturb me, sensei."


    Iruka felt chills all over his body when Hikari said that, and that''s when he knew, he was not a match for this boy. He needed someone to help him.


    Iruka stood up and quickly used shunshin to get to the Hokage Tower.


    (Current Time)


    Hiruzen and Iruka quickly ran towards the Academy to stop Hikaru from killing those children.


    When he arrived, he saw five students with all of their limbs broken. Naruto sat there with wide eyes, completely terrified. In the middle of it was Hikaru, standing like a shadow under the sun, with his Drake Sword about to stab the troublemaker who planned all this.


    "Stop!!"

 Chapter 9 - Granddaughter?

    "Stop!!" the Third Hokage moved away from his spot and appeared behind Hikaru before taking the Drake Sword away from him to stop him from killing the boy down under him.


    Hikaru looks at the Hokage in surprise and ask, "Hokage-dono, what are you doing here?"


    Hiruzen then replied angrily, "Why are you trying to kill this boy?! What has he done to you?!"


    Hikaru then pointed at the group of boys lying on the ground, twitching, and said, "They tried to kill Naruto, I was only protecting him from them."


    Hiruzen widened his eyes and immediately knew why this happened. His eyes were as cold as ice because he knew, someone had just broken the rule he put on Naruto.


    "Hikaru, return to your home for now. I will take care of the rest, " Hiruzen said with his voice seemingly cold.


    Hikaru felt like he was staring at a beast, a huge beast. A colossal gorilla ready to tear through everything. Hikaru didn''t notice it but sweat was dripping off his face due to being nervous. But he still did not go away.


    Iruka, on the other hand, couldn''t move a single muscle because of the aura that the Third Hokage is emitting.


    "Iruka, " Hiruzen called.


    His body stiffened as he replied, "H-hai?"


    "Take these group of boys to be interrogated by Ibiki and get answers from them, why did they try to kill Naruto-kun, " Hiruzen ordered.


    "H-hai!" Iruka quickly dragged away all the boys with his arms to take them to Ibiki. And he knew, these boys would have a hard time. If they didn''t get enough from Hikaru, because, to be honest, almost all of their limbs are broken and when they wake up, a lot of screaming would occur.


    Hiruzen looks at Naruto with his grandfatherly eyes, unlike his previous cold one, and said, "Naruto, you will come with me, you may get hurt by someone if I don''t look after you."


    Hiruzen saw that Naruto was still frightening and he waited for the time to past.


    After some time past, Naruto was able to calm down and is able to reply normally. Well, as normal as he could.


    Naruto, as if was in some deep conflict, replied, "No, I''ll go with Hikaru."


    Hiruzen seems to be interested when he heard that. This is the first time Naruto decided to with someone she just met.


    "Why do you want to go with him, Naruto?" Hiruzen asked curiously.


    "I-I don''t know, it''s just that, when I''m near him, I feel safe, dattebayo, " Naruto replied with her verbal tic acting up.


    Hiruzen simply smiled and looked at Hikaru before asking him, "Do you want to go with us, Hikaru-kun?"


    At this, Hikaru was confused as to why he decided to invite him, but, nonetheless, he agreed.


    Naruto had stars all over his face when she heard Hiruzen asking Hikaru that.


    "Really, jii-jii?!" She asked.


    He chuckled and said, "Yes, of course. He''s your friend, isn''t he?"


    Naruto ran over to Hikaru and held hot of his hands, "Yatta! Did you hear that Hikaru? We get to be together!"


    ''Why is he so excited? We are just going to the Hokage Tower and talk about something. Hmm, '' he thought.


    Hiruzen rubs his goatee on his chin and said, "Let''s go, we are going to the Tower, " he then looks at Hikaru seriously and said, "And Hikaru-kun, we have something to talk about if you want to stay friends with Naruto-kun."


    Hikaru nodded with his sweat dripping off his face.


    (At The Hokage Tower)


    Hiruzen said to Naruto to wait at the door but he didn''t forget to give her some protection. He ordered his Anbu guards to protect her as he and Hikaru talks.


    Hiruzen sat in his chair, looking at Hikaru, who''s in front of him. He then said, "Now, I''m not mad at you for beating those kids to pulp, but you should learn on how to hold back. You could''ve killed them if I hadn''t come at the right time."


    Hikaru looks down and he knew it was his fault too. If his emotions didn''t get in the way, those kids would still be conscious and probably not in a coma-like state right now.


    "Now, don''t look so down. You saved my precious granddaughter, you should be happy, " Hiruzen said with a grandfatherly smile.


    Hikaru''s face brightens up when he heard him, but suddenly, he noticed something strange in his words.


    "Granddaughter?" he blurted out.


    Hiruzen''s face grew serious and he said, "This is what I really want to talk about. Yes, Naruto Uzumaki is a girl."


    "Eh?"


    Outside the Hokage''s office, Naruto sat in a chair with four anbus guarding her against all sides.

 Chapter 10 - Maybe A Little Bit Too Bloodthirsty?

    (Flashback - 9 Years Ago, October 10, 980)


    After the fourth Hokage and Kushina Uzumaki sacrificed themselves to seal the Kyuubi again, they left a single baby to Hiruzen and informed him to protect her at any cost.


    Hiruzen agreed and took the newborn to his house, where she would be cared for, for a few days before deciding where she would go.


    Inside the council meeting room, Hiruzen held the baby, Naruto, as he stood in front of the village council. The table was a long rectangular table. On each side of it was 7 seats each, with the right being where the clan heads and the village elders are and on the left is the civilian council.


    Looking sternly at the council, Hirizen announced, "From now on, since our beloved Yondaime died protecting our village, I shall retake the mantle of being the Hokage!"


    The council nodded in agreement because it was within the laws that if the current Hokage died and the previous is still alive, he/she will retake the mantle of being the Hokage. But, if all the previous Hokages are dead, the council would choose a candidate that would take the mantle of being the Hokage.


    One of the clan heads, Shikaku Nara, then spoke, "If I may be bold, Hokage-sama, whose child is that in your arms?"


    Hiruzen looks at Shikaku before looking again at the council directly and sternly announced, "This is Uzumaki Naruto, he bears the burden of being the Kyuubi''s prison! You all shall treat him as a hero who saved our village from the mighty Kyuubi!"


    Almost all of them were shocked, but some clan heads understood what''s going on. From the sun-kissed blond hair and an almost similar face to their friend Kushina, that child has got to be Minato''s daughter.


    Then suddenly, a shout came from the civilian council.


    "What do you mean, Hokage-sama?! If that thing has the Kyuubi inside it, we should kill it!" It was Tsubaki, the civilian councilor.


    The clan heads turned their heads towards her, they were disgusted that someone would really tell the Hokage to kill a newborn child.


    Hiruzen never expected that someone would tell him that and asked, "What do you mean by that, Tsubaki-dono?"


    "That''s exactly what I mean! Kill t-that thing!" she looked at the child as if she was disgusted by it.


    Then, everyone on the civilian council''s side stood up and started to follow her. They yelled, argued, but they all had something in common, they want Naruto dead.


    Having enough of their useless yelling, Hiruzen slams his left hand at the table *bang!* and all of them quieted down before he said to them with rage, "If you worthless people even try to lay a single finger on Naruto''s hair, I shall slaughter you myself!"


    The heavy pressure of his chakra kept all the people in the room quiet. You can even hear a needle drop somewhere.


    Tsubaki''s sweated as she experiences the full extent of the third Hokage''s power.


    Then Hiruzen declared, "From now on! You can never say a single word about Naruto''s true identity, you say something, I will kill you myself. Not even a child will be spared! But, if you indeed try to do something to Naruto, all seven generations of your family will be slaughtered like lambs! Do you understand?"


    Every people in the room gulped in deep nervousness. Even the clan heads can feel the seriousness of the situation, the Hokage is really serious about this rule. Once a person quacks, they''re dead. No, not just them, their entire family too will be dead.


    Danzo, on the other hand, is secretly smirking, ''This is my best friend! The previous Hiruzen is returning! A true God Of Shinobi!"


    From then on, countless civilian families were slaughtered to the bone, not even a child was spared but for some reason, none of them stopped. They continued on and on, they would even bribe the matron of the orphanage where Naruto is staying to treat him badly. This, of course, got to Hiruzen. The next day, the matron disappeared mysteriously. Not even her shadow can be seen, as if she just vanished like a bubble when it''s popped.


    But, as time goes on, Hiruzen got tired. And his enemies took this to their advantage, bribing the merchants not to sell anything to Naruto, and if they did sell him anything, it would be overpriced to the point that a normal family couldn''t even afford something like his prices. The academy was rigged for him not to pass, shinobis were paid not to tell anything to Hiruzen, in short, Hiruzen got old. Old enough that his enemies can even take it to their advantage.


    (Flashback End)


    After finishing his explanation, Hiruzen looks at Hikaru''s reaction to see if he would be scared.


    Hikaru seems to be thinking and he asked calmly, "Why are you telling me this, Hokage-dono? I''m just a child, nothing more, nothing less."


    Hiruzen smiled because he was not scared of his actions, so he said the reason, "The reason is that I know I can trust you, from my experience that is."


    Hikaru looks surprised because he just arrived in the village a few days ago, yet, this old man already trusts him.


    Hiruzen spoke again, "Not only that, do you know why I believed your story from our previous conversation?"


    Hikaru suddenly realized that this old man could have figured it out that he is not really from lordran and kick him out of the village, so why did he believe him?


    "Why did you believe me? If I may ask?"


    "That is because of the darksign in your left hand is a very noticeable evidence of your words, " Hiruzen said.

 Chapter 11 - Protect

    Hikaru looks surprised when he heard the Hokage. He forgot that his darksign is in the back of his left hand, even though it''s covered with blood because of the Kunai piercing it earlier, the fiery look of the darksign is still quite noticeable.


    He also wonders why the Darksign is in his left hand, in the game you can see the darksign in the chest of your character, the appearance was like dozens of worms decided to stick together and become one. But his darksign in his left hand is nothing like that, it''s a red fiery-like circle on the back of his palm, as the picture design of the darksign in the game.


    Hikaru looks at the Third Hokage and said, "But you still haven''t told me why you kept Naruto''s gender a secret, and honestly, I''m quite curious."


    Then Hiruzen''s face grew serious and he said, "Hikaru, the other reason why I kept Naruto''s gender a secret is because of the law that was put by the First'' Council: Once a clan is down to a few numbers, they will have to breed to other people once they reach a certain age for the clan''s bloodline to go on. And I can''t have Naruto to breed to other men like rabbits just to continue this vile law, because she is the last heir of Uzugakure."


    Even though Hikaru already knows about Naruto being the heir of Uzugakure because of her mother being the princess of that land, but he did not know that such a vulgar law was placed in this village. And quite frankly, he did not like it.


    "What?! Such a worthless and vile law was actually put in this village?! How dare they!" Hikaru lost his cool for a sec and said that.


    Hikaru calmed down after a few moments and he apologized, "I''m sorry, I lost my cool for a moment there."


    "It''s understandable why you would react like that, but you should keep quiet for Naruto is just outside this door and she doesn''t know that her gender is a female, I will only tell her that once she becomes a genin and be put under the Hokage''s instead of the civilian council," Hiruzen admitted.


    ''What? Even she herself doesn''t know she is a girl? It''s not that I''m blaming the Hokage here, but Naruto is really quite dumb for not seeing it herself, for god sake, it''s her own freaking body! '' Hikaru thought incredulously.


    "Is that gonna be all, Hokage-dono?" Hikaru asked.


    "No, I still have something to tell you. Since you''re the only friend of Naruto right now, I will give you an S-Class mission to protect her at all costs. I can''t trust my shinobis at the moment, and that goes for everyone. Even I can''t trust Kakashi, almost everyone in the village currently bears some hatred against Naruto for holding the Kyuubi and I can''t be there for her because of my duty as a Hokage. So, can you do it? Of course, I''ll give you allowance as your pay for this mission, " Hiruzen told to Hikaru.


    Hikaru thought about it and finally came to an agreement with the Hokage, "I''m Naruto''s friend at the moment, so please, let me protect her as a friend, " he bows to prove his point.


    As Hiruzen looks at the boy in front of him, he couldn''t help but tear up, ''Ah, Minato, Kushina, your daughter will finally have a friend that could protect her. A friend that will stay with her, so please, help me live a little bit longer so I can see what future both of them hold, '' he said in his thoughts.


    After agreeing to the Hokage''s request, he told Naruto to come in. Hiruzen decided that both of them will live together from now on, so Hikaru could be close to her at all times.


    Naruto jumped up and down when she learned that, she was really excited about them living together, and still is.


    As the two of them walks to her house, Hikaru smiles at her enthusiasm. He is really liking this world and he wish that this is not a dream. A boring life is something he do not want, only people with dull ambition would like that.


    All of this is a plan created by Hiruzen for the future of Naruto. He made a promise with her parents to protect her, so he will keep his promise to both of them. After all, he''s just a old geezer right now. Hah hah hah!

 Chapter 12 - Will He Win?

    (5 Days Later)


    After that conversation with the Hokage, Hikaru decided to transfer all his stuff in Naruto''s house, since they would be living together. It wasn''t much, he just had a dagger, Gold Pine Resin, his thief set, and his last remaining humanities, which he isn''t going to show to Naruto.


    He bought new clothes to replace his armor. It was too hot inside it and some of his movements are restricted because of the weight. He bought 4 new pair of clothes and some for Naruto, I mean, if he''s gonna live there, he might as well buy something for Naruto. All of it cost 500 Ryo. Now, he only has 2500 Ryo on his hands and he''s going to share it with Naruto.


    Unlike her, Hikaru doesn''t need to eat for sustainment. Meanwhile, she will die if she were to starve herself. Since transferring to Naruto''s house, Hikaru has been buying ingredients to cook Naruto food. He had some experience with cooking since he was always left alone in the house while his parents were out working.


    Naruto was overjoyed when she saw his gift for her, an orange cloak similar to the Fourth Hokage''s cloak. She has always been a fan of the Fourth Hokage, and ironically, he is her father. Hikaru felt his face heating up when Naruto hugged him because of his gift to her. He didn''t notice it but at that time, Naruto was tearing up.


    It was the first time that someone, besides the old man, bought her a gift and a precious one at that too. She couldn''t wait to parade it all over the village. She''s going to brag it to the kids in school, and maybe, just maybe, she could make friends with them too.


    Hikaru felt like he was babysitting his little sister because Naruto is like the epitome of a very lazy person. When he first arrived there, he saw her place covered in many kinds of trash. He could even see a cup ramen, still full, on the ground.


    Hikaru just decided to clean it all up, and by the time the sun had set, the entire apartment was good as new.


    After his fight in the school, the five boys'' families mysteriously disappeared by the next day. Like, poof! The boys were never seen again either, and he was sure that the Third Hokage was the one who did that.


    ''Anyway, it''s not my problem. They could die for all I care they''re just assholes anyway, '' Hikaru though as he sat through the class trying not to fall asleep from the boring lesson of his teacher.


    All this time, he still hasn''t made any progress and that''s bothering him. He needs to gather souls to level up and prepare for his battle against the Olden God that resides in this world. So he decided, tonight he would farm lots and lots of souls. But first, he will have to equip all his stuff.


    Also, since the day he fought with those kids, if you could call it like that, he was never allowed to bring his Drake Sword to school. The Third Hokage himself said so.


    Hikaru looks at Sasuke, who''s right beside him sitting in his part of the chair. He seems to be listening to this boring lecture, guess having an older brother you''re supposed to kill for revenge is a very good motivation for a nine-year-old child. Itachi you should be proud of your brother. He''s actually listening to this boring lesson.


    Ah, wait, I take that back. He''s not listening to the lesson, he''s just sleeping with his eyes open! Holy f.u.c.k! I didn''t know anyone could do that! This boy is a genius! I think I can get him to teach me that, it would be quite useful here for these stupid boring lessons.


    (Midnight, At 12 Am)


    It''s now midnight and Naruto is sleeping in her bed quietly. Hikaru decided to challenge a Black Knight, but just one. It may be very dumb of him to do this, but he will reap great rewards from this. It''s said in -Challenge- option that he can acquire 20,000 Souls if he were able to defeat this Black Knight. Once he defeats that thing, he would be able to advance to a new stage, where 2 Black Knights await him. And so on.


    He sat on his futon on the ground while the main screen of the Dark Souls System is in front of him. He told Naruto that he would just sleep on the ground and she will stay on the bed, she tried to refuse but in the end, he won.


    Anyway, he is now laying on his futon. For this to work, he would have to let his physical body to sleep while he goes to the stage where he would be fighting the Black Knight. In short, it''s just like a VR but he will be unconscious in the real world while his mind goes on to the stage.


    His physical body will also take damage if he takes damage while fighting the Black Knight and that''s why he needs to be fast. If Naruto saw it, she will immediately go to the Hokage and tell it to him, and by that time, he would have no explanations for it.


    He taps the yes button on the screen and his body went limp almost immediately right just after pressing it.


    He arrived in an empty world. A w blank white world where he can''t see anything but four white walls. The whole surroundings were lit but it was quite strange because there was nothing in this place that could light it.


    Suddenly, he notices white particles gathering in front of him, 10 meters away. It started to become a humanoid shape figure until it turned black before becoming a black knight. It was menacing, a tall fully armored knight, standing in front of him with its giant sword ready to strike him.


    Hikaru grew serious and he readied his Drake Sword on his right hand, his face is covered with a hood. He is wearing the thief set. A pretty weak armor that normally no beginners in Dark Souls would use to fight a real Black Knight.


    His armor is weak while the Black Knight... well... let''s just say it''s very sturdy.


    Such a disadvantage from the start, will Hikaru win or will he die a gruesome death?

 Chapter 13 - Who Will Win?

    Hikaru looks at the Black Knight with his fierce coal gaze. His long black hair fluttered as the wind around the whole stage blows. The entire white room is 1 mile in length and 1 mile wide. The white room''s ceiling is around a kilometer tall. The point is, the entire stage is huge.


    The Black Knight grips its greatsword tightly before rushing towards Hikaru. The Black Knight was the first to attack!


    Hikaru prepared for the incoming attack and the Black Knight used his greatsword to stab the floor before he drags it towards up Hikaru, thus performing the uppercut strike!


    Hikaru rolled backward almost immediately after he saw the attack. The sword grazes his arm slightly but he was fine. This time, he brought out his dagger that he brought here in case of an emergency. He threw it towards the Black Knight''s head but the Black Knight just blocks it with his armguard, deflecting it away.


    When the Black Knight looks at Hikaru again, he was gone. There was no sight of him, it tried to look around, only for it to be stabbed in its back.


    Hikaru used the dagger as a diversion and his real goal is to backstab the guy, and it worked!


    After backstabbing the Black Knight, he kicks him down and it falls down face flat on the ground. Hikaru didn''t give the Black Knight a chance to stand up and he jumps to the Black Knight''s back before stabbing it repeatedly.


    After a dozen or so strikes, Hikaru ran out of stamina and he backs away 10 meters away from the Black Knight.


    He kneeled down on one knee to recover his stamina, but the Black Knight was already trying to stand up.


    "Tch!" Hikaru could''ve increased his stabs if his stamina weren''t depleted right away.


    He saw his dagger, which the Black Knight deflected a moment ago, on his right side and he picks it up to use it again later.


    He took out his Estus Flask in case of emergency and put it in his waist, so he could take it out immediately if he''s low on health.


    His stamina is now full, and the Black Knight is already standing up.


    The Black Knight rushes again towards Hikaru while raising its greatsword, ready to bring it down towards Hikaru.


    Hikaru dodges it but the impact that the greatsword made was enough to make him crashing to the ground, meters away from the Black Knight.


    "Guh!" he spat some saliva and he felt a few of his ribs break when the impact force of the greatsword hit him. He took the Estus Flask from his waist and took a few sips from it before he felt his body heal instantly.


    When he was finished, the Black Knight was already in front of him, ready to stab him down to death. He rolls down to the right, completely dodging its attack. He slashes the Black Knight''s left leg before rolling away farther away from the Black Knight.


    "This thing is strong and my equipment is nowhere enough to defeat it in a full front battle, I need to defeat it shinobi style!" Hikaru said with a smirk.


    Shinobis hides in the shadow, waiting for their prey to fall for their traps and that''s what exactly he is going to do.


    He stood his ground and waited for the Black Knight to close in. The Black Knight rushes towards him with its greatsword hanging on its shoulders on its right hand.


    Hikaru took a deep breath for the move he is going to do, this move is a risk but doing it will surely kill this thing if he succeeds.


    The Black Knight raises its greatsword again before bringing it downwards on Hikaru. Hikaru smirks and he held the Drake Sword with two hands before using it block the attack. He knelt down on one knee when the impact of the greatsword hit the Drake Sword but right now, the Black Knight is fully open!


    He parried the greatsword away, making it flew away from the Black Knight''s hand.


    "Yes!" Without its weapon, Hikaru is now able to stab the Black Knight in its stomach. Blood splattered on the white floor as he stabs the Black Knight directly in its bowel. He took it out before slashing it again on the Black Knight''s legs, thus cutting both of its legs.


    The Black Knight fell down but Hikaru held the Black Knight''s helmet horns before looking at it straight in the eyes and he said, "Bye-bye, " he cuts off the Black Knight''s head and it flew away from its body.


    Hikaru won!

 Chapter 14 - I Will Fight You Soon!

    Just after he killed the Black Knight, the main screen suddenly appeared in front of him. In it, it says:


    [Congratulations on killing the Basic Black Knight. From now on, as you proceed to the next level, you will face two stronger Black Knights. They will be 2 times stronger than this one, be prepared for the next time you try to challenge them again, there''s a 90% chance that you will die]


    Hikaru felt dizzy after he read that. The Black Knight he just fought was a basic one like the Black Knight in the Undead Burg? What the f*ck? Is the system toying with me?


    Nevertheless, he just accepted the fact and tried to move on. He exited the arena and returned to his physical body and he notices it was still night. Though, it''s only natural because he fought that Dark Knight for less than ten minutes, which was the most thrilling thing he had ever done.


    But he noticed something in the fight, he never lost his cool. If it was him in the past, he would''ve pissed himself right there. He ignored it for now, cause'' he is really feeling sleepy.


    He lays on his futon on his back, ready to sleep. He took one last glance at Naruto, who is currently sleeping, and just smiled at her cute sleeping form before closing his eyes and he drifted to his dream world.


    (6 AM in the morning, June 8, year 989)


    The morning birds sang as the cold wind passed by through them. Trees rustled noisily when the cold gust stirred them.


    Naruto woke up and rubs her eyes before she looks at the noise coming from the kitchen. The apartment is small, so the kitchen and her bed are just near each other. She saw Hikaru cooking their daily morning meal, which is bacon and eggs.


    He looks at her as he flips the bacon down, and said, "Oh, you''re awake, go wash your face and the food will be ready by the time you finish up."


    But Naruto did not listen and just laid her back against the soft bed of hers.


    "No, I''ll just sleep. Wake me up again when you finish," she said lazily.


    Hikaru shook his head and did the same thing he did every day since he lived here, he threw a spoon right into her head and she immediately stood up.


    "Ow! Don''t throw things at me!" Naruto yelled as she rubs the small lump on her forehead after the metal spoon bounced off.


    "Now, now, since you want to be a Hokage, then wake up early. The Hokage does this every single day, so don''t be lazy or else, I''ll throw more things at you," when he spoke that last sentence, his eyes slightly grew red before it disappeared instantly.


    "H-hai!!" Naruto rapidly ran to the bathroom to wash her face but she tripped when she was running towards it and fell face flat to the ground. She quickly stood up in fear of Hikaru and ran again towards the bathroom.


    Hikaru smiled at her clumsiness, and he got to admit, it was pretty cute. Even though he is not a lolicon, but she got the face of her mother, and coupled with her glimmering blue eyes, she will be a beautiful woman once she matures.


    He returned to his cooking and waited for Naruto to finish up.


    (At The Academy, inside the classroom)


    Iruka stood in front of all of the students he got with Mizuki right by his side.


    "For today''s lesson, we will do a taijutsu test. All of you will be sparring with each other and I will choose which student you will fight, got it? Now, line up in front of the door and we will walk to the back of the academy, where we will do the sparring session. Let''s go!" Iruka announced.


    Hikaru looks quite surprised that they''re doing something different than learning "what is the favorite tea of the First Hokage". Why would we need to learn that by the way? To stalk him? Man, people must be crazy about the First.


    Anyway, Sasuke who is right beside him looks excited. Sasuke looks at him straight in the. eye and said, " Get ready Hikaru, I will fight you soon!"


    Again, Hikaru looks surprised. Since that day, when he beat those kids to near death, students have been frequently avoiding him due to fear. It seems like Sasuke is the opposite.

 Chapter 15 - No Chap

    No chap tomorrow, from now on, Tuesday is going to be my rest day, but I think I rest every day. But it doesn''t matter, Tuesday is my day.


    Anyway, what you have read in this fanfic is not planned at all. I just used my brain to do the things and when I come out of it, the chap is finished. Like, poof! I can basically write 2 chaps per hour, meaning, I can write around 10 chaps a day if I wanted to but I don''t. I''m lazy as f*ck and y''all probably noticed it already because I only write 700 to 1000 words a day.


    See ya!

 Chapter 16 - Please, No, Sasuke. Youll die.

    Last night, after he defeated the Black Knight, he forgot to level up and allocate his stat points in his stats. He got an idea to level up while they were walking towards where the sparring would take but he changed his mind because, if he does allocate his stat points, his opponent for the session is probably going to die due to his lack of control over his strength.


    That''s why he''s going to do it later when he is alone.


    As they reached the flat ground of the back of the school, he saw rusted metal fences around it. As if it hadn''t been fixed lately. Even though the land is fine but it''s obvious that the school doesn''t have that much budget for this year and Hikaru knew he is gonna have a talk with the Third later.


    Iruka stood at the middle of the area with Mizuki by his side and announced, "The first to spar is Sakura Haruno and Ino Yamnaka! The two of you, please come forward!"


    The students back out towards near the fences, forming a circle. Both Ino and Sakura walk towards the middle before staring at the eyes of each other with a fierce look.


    Sakura pointed her finger to Ino and yelled with her childish voice, "Ino Pig! I will win Sasuke-kun''s affection after I win this fight!!"


    "Bring it on, forehead! Sasuke-kun will be mine after I win this fight of ours!" Ino yelled back with even more vocal.


    Iruka sweatdrops at these two, he just sighed and yelled, "Start!"


    After that, Hikaru saw one of the most pathetic fights in history. Even though both of them are just children, but for christ''s sake, they are here to be a shinobi not to fight like pathetic children. All they did the entire time was just pulling each other''s hairs. Iruka-sensei got tired of it, so he just said it was a tie.


    Both of them crosses their arms and Sakura said with her annoying banshee like voice, "Hmph, you won''t get a tie next time!" And Ino replied, "Same!"


    Iruka shook his head while holding it with his right hand. He decided to just announce the next spar.


    "The next to spar is between Kiba Inuzuka and Naruto Uzumaki! Please step forward!"


    Both Naruto and Kiba walks forward towards the center. Kiba put on his fighting form and said, "You won''t win loser! Just give up!"


    Naruto put on her front and replied, "I won''t give up until I become the Hokage! No matter what!"


    Iruka, again, shook his head and thought, ''Kids, please, don''t take this sparring too seriously! It''s just a damn spar!" Truth be told, he was already close to having a mental breakdown because of these children. Why did he ever choose to be an academy teacher, he''ll never know.


    "Start!" Iruka yelled before backing off, so he could not disturb their spar.


    This time, Hikaru watched Naruto''s fight attentively. He wanted to know if she is strong for her age and immediately found out that she was not. Sure, she could be better than some thugs but that''s it. Meanwhile, Kibe here beat her like nothing. Seriously, Hokage-dono should''ve hired a teacher for her taijutsu style. Speaking of Taijutsu, he really needs a teacher for that. He needs taijutsu because if he wanted to fight enemies in the -Challenge- option, then he needs a fighting style.


    As he kept thinking about it, he didn''t realize that the time had passed and now it was his turn to spar with someone.


    Iruka, on the other hand, dreaded letting Hikaru spar with the other children. He still remembered that day vividly, that cold voice, that vicious strike. He just wished for Sasuke to win, he is his best bet right now. That''s right, he will put Sasuke and Hikaru together to spar. This is his only way for Hikaru to avoid other students from sparring with him.


    "Sasuke Uchiha and Hikaru Hiroaki-kun, please step forward!"


    Both Sasuke and Hikaru walk to the middle of the area to fight. While Hikaru just wants to end this as fast as possible, Sasuke here really wants to fight him.


    That day, when he beat up those third years, Sasuke saw it. He is strong, stronger than him, that''s why he is going to be his rival. A stepping stone for him, perhaps. But he could forget all of that because Hikaru is destined to be stronger than anyone in this world and any other world. That is if he could grow up, which he isn''t right now.


    Sasuke pointed at Hikaru with his left hand and said with a crazed look on his face, "Hikaru! You will be given the honor to be my rival! I will use you as my stepping stone to kill Itachi!"


    His fangirls then squealed in lovestruck.


    "Kya! Sasuke-kun is so cool!"


    "Sasuke-kun, I love you!"


    "Yeah! Beat that stupid Hikaru to the ground!" This one was Sakura.


    Then, Hikaru said as plainly as possible, "Ah, no thanks."


    "Huh?"

 Chapter 17 - Hey, Sensei, Did I Win?

    "Ah, no thanks, " Hikaru said as plainly as possible.


    "H-huh? What do you- no, it doesn''t matter whether you agree or not, you''re going to be my rival! My stepping stone for killing Itachi!" Sasuke yelled with his eyes clouded in anger.


    Hikaru predicted he would say that partly because of his previous words and the other is his reasons for revenge. But it doesn''t matter, Sasuke is going to get his ass kicked by him.


    Iruka on the other hand is panicking, he thinks that Sasuke has just angered Hikaru and that would result in the young Uchiha being beaten to death, even though Hikaru doesn''t have that kind of motives.


    "S-start!" he stuttered to say that due to his fear of Hikaru.


    As soon as Iruka announced that, Sasuke quickly dashed towards Hikaru at an amazing speed... for his age, at least. While the other students could barely follow Sasuke''s movements, Hikaru could clearly see it.


    As he reached Hikaru, the young Uchiha tried to do a feint by punching towards Hikaru, when suddenly, he stopped his fist midway before jumping high enough to kick Hikaru''s head.


    The young undead just blocks it with his wrist. Sasuke followed up with another kick with his other leg, which Hikaru just blocks it again easily.


    When his feet reached the ground, Sasuke backs away from Hikaru to prepare his next attack.


    As he saw Sasuke back away, Hikaru grinned. This time, it''s his turn to attack. He bent his knees a little before he blasted off in front of Sasuke''s face by using the force to stop him just right in front of him.


    Before Sasuke could react, Hikaru decided to end this as quickly as possible by uppercutting Sasuke. When his fist reached the boy''s chin, the young Uchiha was blasted off 10 meters away by the impact of his fist.


    Sasuke us now resting peacefully at the end of the metal fence, though, he was quite close being castrated because just at his no-no place, you can see a metal tube sticking out of the metal fence, which wouldn''t have been good if his little birdie were to be crushed by that thing.


    At first, the fangirls were cheering when they saw their dear Sasuke-kun kicking that nobody in the face but in just a few seconds, their dear Sasuke-kun was blasted off by an attack they couldn''t see from that nobody. It was as if he just teleported there and punched the daylights out of their dear Sasuke-kun.


    Everybody in the area was gaping in surprise. The top one in their class just got his ass handed to him by the new kid.


    Out of all of them, Sakura was the first one to react and immediately ran after Sasuke.


    "Sasuke-kun!" she yelled as she reached where Sasuke landed. She saw him having a purple bruise on his chin and she winced when she saw how large of an area that bruise took in his chin. His perfect face is completely ruined.


    "Sasuke-kun, are you alright?" A pretty stupid question to ask someone who just got his ass kicked by someone he deemed a "Stepping Stone", for me at least.


    The other fangirls also followed suit and started crowding Sasuke to see if he was hurt.


    Meanwhile, with Hikaru here.


    Iruka sighed with relief when he saw that was the only thing Sasuke received from Hikaru. As he was about to go and check how to grieve the young Uchiha''s injuries was, Hikaru spoke.


    "Hey, sensei, did I win?"


    ______________________________________________


    (Evening, At Hikaru and Naruto''s House)


    At the dinner table, Naruto and Hikaru ate their food. Even though doesn''t need to eat but he still has his tastebuds, which he is extremely grateful for. Ever wonder what''s it like having no tastebuds? Yeah, it''s terrifying.


    As the two of them ate, Naruto started a conversation with Hikaru.


    "You were so awesome back there! Like, in just one punch, you knocked out Sasugay!"


    "Well, he deserved it. Calling me his stepping stone, if he was an enemy, he would''ve died ten times."


    "Y-yeah. Anyway, Hikaru, I''m going to buy something in the store after we finish eating, wanna come?"


    "Of course, I can''t leave you alone after all, " Hikaru said with a smile.

 Chapter 18 - Despicable

    (The Next Morning)


    "Kiyo! Where are you?! Ah, my daughter, please come out!"


    This is what the two of them woke up to a screaming mother trying to find her child.


    Hikaru and Naruto walks out of the while still in their pajamas. They saw a middle-age woman yelling in the middle of the street with a large banner and in it is a young girl''s face drawn in it.


    "Kiyo! Please! If anyone has ever seen her, please tell me where she is!" the mother desperately cried for help.


    As Naruto saw the poor mother desperately calling out for her daughter, she felt a deep sadness emerging from her heart.


    "Hey Hikaru, let''s not go to the Academy today, " she said.


    Hikaru looks at her and asks, "Why?"


    "Because... I want to help her. I don''t know what she is feeling right now but I feel that it must have been very painful for her to suddenly lose her child like that."


    Hikaru simply smiles at her unconditional kindness for other people and he replied to her, "Fine, if that''s what you want. After all, the Academy is just right there."


    "Thank you, " she didn''t notice it but a tear was dripping down on her face.


    Meanwhile, with Hikaru. When he saw that, he knew he would have to report this to the Hokage. Call this stupid, but he felt a gut feeling that something terrible is happening behind the scenes.


    (3 Hours Later, At The Council Room)


    *Bam!*


    A civilian councilman slams his hand on the table and yelled at the Hokage, "Hokage-sama! What that kid did is unforgivable! Sasuke-sama was almost killed by him, you should kick him out of this village, ASAP! He is a danger to everyone around him!"


    The civilian council nodded their heads in agreement while the shinobi council shook their head in annoyance.


    "Ahem, " Hiruzen cleared his throat first, "First of all, don''t yell at me, " he glared at the councilman, "And second, I don''t take orders from no one except the Fire Lord. Don''t be arrogant civilian, or else..." he left that threat hanging on purpose.


    The councilman flinches, he just sat down and stayed quiet.


    Hiruzen clears his throat again, and said, "Shikaku, did you investigate what I told you?"


    Shikaku has two scars on the right side of his face which were probably his most noticeable feature. Like his son, he has dark hair tied up into a spiky ponytail, dark eyes as well as a goatee. His ears were also pierced.  He wears a meshed shirt underneath his flak jacket, a deerskin coat over that, and handguards.


    Shikaku stood up with a grave expression on his face holding a bunch of paper, which seems to be his report, "Hokage-sama, your instincts were right on the spot. The civilian council is indeed doing something terrible behind our backs."


    Hiruzen smirks at the civilian council as if he was telling them that he has already won.


    "Tell me, " Hiruzen said.


    Shikaku looks at the papers before telling them to Hiruzen.


    "The first one here is that the funds we have been giving them for the Academy have been pocketed into their own pockets, in short, they have been stealing from the village."


    All of the civilian council members stood up while their eyes widened in panic.


    "That is not true!"


    "Yeah! We have been doing our best to support the village!"


    Shikaku glares at them and they flinched a little at his gaze.


    "By support, you mean selling some of our civilians into slavery? Or blackmailing young girls to sell themselves for your own profits? Is that what you call support? You filthy despicable human beings!" Shikaku said with disgust deeply engraved in his voice.


    The entire civilian council was speechless. They didn''t think that someone would be able to figure them out this quick.


    "N-no! I-It''s not my fault!" one of them started running away but before he could reach the door, you can see that he was one head short from before. His head flew in the middle of the table, scaring all of the civilian council members.


    The body fell to the ground and you can see in front of him was a purple-colored hair Anbu wearing a cat mask on her face.


    "Ah, Cat. Good to see you, now if you could do this old man a favor, execute all of the civilian council members for their crime of treason!" Hiruzen ordered her.


    She knelt down in one knee and said with the utmost respect towards her leader.


    "Hai, Hokage-sama."


    With that, she ordered her fellow Anbus, who was hiding in the shadows, to drag all of the civilian council members away from this room.


    They were all dragged away while kicking, screaming, and flailing their arms away to get out of their respective grips but it was futile for the Anbu members were too strong for them.


    "Do you know who I am!? I am the head mercha-"


    *crack*


    "Aaaaaah!!"


    Cat broke his arm with a single chop while still dragging him away on that same arm. This time, all he could do is scream and scream away for help.


    As Hiruzen looks at the scene happening in front of him, he couldn''t help but thank Hikaru internally for this.


    (Flashback, Earlier This Day)


    In front of the Hokage is Hikaru, kneeling down on one knee as a sign of respect.


    "Now, what are you here for, Hikaru-kun?" Hiruzen asked with a grandfatherly smile.


    "Hokage-dono, I have noticed a few things around the village. First of all, one of my neighbor''s only child suddenly disappeared, and second, the academy seems like it hasn''t been fixed as of late, " Hikaru said.


    Hiruzen narrowed his eyes and replied, "So, what do you think is happening?"


    "I don''t know what to call this Hokage-dono, you may call it a gut feeling, but I think the civilian council had some hands moving around behind the scenes, " he said seriously.


    "I''ll look at it. For now, take care of Naruto until I tell you what I can find out, " Hiruzen said with his hands clasp together.


    "Hai, thank you, Hokage-dono."


    (End Of Flashback)

 Chapter 19 - Hai, I Will Do My Best!

    (Hinata POV)


    Ah, Naruto-kun! Finally, I can see his full body from up close! I know it''s 6 AM and I should probably go to school now but I can''t waste this chance! Naruto-kun''s kunai is just right above me!


    All this time, the window behind in his bathroom had been locked but now, it''s finally open! Ah, Naruto-kun''s p*nis!


    I reached for something that I could stand on, which was a wooden box, and took a peek on his bathroom window. As I took peek inside, I saw something that would forever haunt my mind.


    Naruto-kun doesn''t have a p*nis, instead, he has something very similar to mine. A... lower... mouth...


    Is Naruto-kun... a girl?


    I fell to the ground with my face all red.


    (End POV)


    While washing her hair, Naruto looks up at the window because she heard a thud but she just ignored it and thought nothing of it before she continued washing her hair.


    "Hmm, I wonder what happened back there. Well, not my problem, " she said while washing her hair with shampoo.


    (Minutes Later)


    Naruto came out of the bathroom while just wearing a towel over her body. She saw Hikaru preparing their food on the table. But it''s different from the usual, instead of bacon and eggs, they were a bowl full of fried rice and it''s also filled with vegetables and some meat. As she looks at it, she couldn''t help but drool at the sight.


    Hikaru turns away from what he was doing and looks at Naruto.


    "Oh, you''re finished? Here, I have already prepared our food but dressed up before you eat. And how many times did I tell you not to go around the house with barely anything covering you?"


    "Eeh, what''s the big deal? We''re both boys, so it''s fine. Or, do you swing that way like Sasugay?" she said teasingly.


    As Hikaru stared at her, he couldn''t help but thought, ''Oh, if only you knew..."


    Hikaru turns his head away and said, "Of course not, but it''s kind of uncomfortable when I see you like that."


    "Hmm, fine. I''ll dress up now. I''ll be right back, " she went to her cabinet, which was just at the end of her bed, and took out her everyday clothes. An orange jacket and orange baggy pants.


    "Seriously though, when are you going to change to other clothes, Naruto?" Hikaru asked while sitting down on the table.


    "Hmph, don''t underestimate the power of orange, Hikaru!" Naruto said dramatically as she jumped on top of her bed, but suddenly, as she landed on her bed, her towel fell off her body.


    "Ah."


    "Hmm?" Hikaru turned around to see what was going on, only to see a fully n.a.k.e.d Naruto on top of the bed.


    "..."


    "..."


    It took him a moment to react but when he did...


    "Naruto!!"


    "Gomennasai!"


    (An Hour Later, At School)


    Naruto wondered why Hikaru didn''t go to the academy, he said that he will go and talk with Jii-Jii but he didn''t tell what they were going to talk about.


    She pouted and muttered, "You dummy..."


    She suddenly sensed someone watching her, she looked everywhere and found a pair of lavender eyes staring at her with suspicions clearly visible in her eyes.


    ''Hmm? What was she name again? Hunata... Kinata... ah, that''s right, Hinata Hyuga. I remember she is the princess of the Hyuga Clan. So why is she looking at me that weird?'' Naruto thought inside her mind.


    Hinata is a slender girl of fair-complexion who, as a Hy¨±ga, her most distinguishing trait is the Byakugan, giving her featureless white eyes. She has dark blue hair that she keeps in a hime-cut of different lengths.


    Meanwhile, with Hinata...


    ''N-Naruto-kun, w-why are you hiding that you''re a girl? I-I want to know!'' she thought while keeping her eyes at Naruto.


    (Hokage Tower, Inside The Office)


    Hikaru is currently inside the Hokage office, but instead of kneeling down on one knee, he is standing up while looking at Hiruzen, who is in front of him.


    The air inside the room was silently serious, even the Anbus hiding in the shadows detected it.


    "Hikaru, you were indeed right. The civilian council has been running an underground slavery business, an illegal brothel, and they have been also taking funds right under our noses."


    Hiruzen is the first one to break the silence inside the room.


    "Tch, sc.u.ms!" Hikaru said with disdain. "So what happened to the people being used as p.r.o.s.t.i.t.u.t.es and being sold to slavery? Did they get rescued safely?" Hikaru asked.


    "Yes but unfortunately, the young girls have been traumatized to the point of wanting to kill themselves. It was a very sad sight for me, but we rescued all of them safe and sound, " Hiruzen with sorrow in his voice.


    *sigh* "So, what happens now, Hokage-dono?" Hikaru was mildly distressed from what he just heard.


    "They will all be transferred to a mental institution to try and at least heal their scars. I just hope that they will be alright, " Hiruzen told Hikaru.


    "Me too, " Hikaru replied sadly.


    Hiruzen claps his hands and said, "Now, now, let''s stop from these depressing stuff. Hikaru-kun, I didn''t forget your contribution to this successful operation. Here is a hundred thousand Ryo, " Hiruzen takes out a bank card under his desk and held it out for Hikaru to receive.


    Hikaru was dumbfounded. For him, a 100,000 Ryo is a very large amount of money.


    "H-huh? B-but I barely did anything!"


    Hiruzen chuckles and said to Hikaru, "No, it''s quite the opposite. If you didn''t report what was happening inside this village, I would''ve not known about it. Hikaru-kun, It''s thanks to you that all of those innocent people were saved. Besides this is also for Naruto-chan, I haven''t been able to visit her lately because of the stockpiled paperwork that I had to do. Please, take care of her on this old man''s stead."


    Hikaru never knew what accomplishment was, for all his life, all he did was go to school and hope for the best. And when he returned home, he would''ve to take care of his sibling. But now, he actually saved many people from either being killed or sold off. At this, he couldn''t help but tear up.


    "Hai, I will do my best!"

 Chapter 20 - F.u.c.k!

    Ah, guys, my phone just fricking broke. No, not the system, the screen is literally broken. I''ll try writing with this laptop but I''ll make sure to do less mistakes as possible. As you know, I can''t really write with this laptop that well. *sigh* It was new a phone too. Less than a month and it''s already broken. F.u.c.k!

 Chapter 21 - 3 Years Later

    (3 Years Later)


    A child no older than 12 with a long black hair that reaches to his back and black eyes with a tint of red in his pupil, he wears a long aristocratic coat that seems to come out of the medieval age with an exquisitely sewn trousers which are decorated with silver trinkets of varying sizes, and he wears a seemingly normal leather gloves but you can sense that they are of extreme high quality. He stood in front of the two teachers, Iruka and Mizuki, inside a room with a single desk for the teachers to sit on as he went on to perform a single hand sign.


    "Shadow Clone Jutsu," after he said that, seven poof of white smoke blasted in the entire room. As the smoke faded, it revealed seven perfect replica of Hikaru.


    "As expected of a prodigy, aren''t I right, Mizuki? " Iruka said while clapping his hands.


    "Yes, indeed. Hikaru, you have performed well, " Mizuki said with a smile.


    "You flatter me, Senseis, " Hikaru humbly said.


    Iruka took out a black forehead protector under the desk and he stood up before he handing it to Hikaru.


    "Hikaru, this Black Forehead Protector symbolizes you as a prodigy that graduated from this very academy, and I am glad to have been be your teacher for three years, " Iruka said with a sincere voice.


    Hikaru took his forehead protector and he said to Iruka, "Me too, sensei," before leaving through the entrance door.


    (Outside Of The Room)


    ''It''s been three years since I came to this world, '' Hikaru thought as he looks at the crowd in ront of him. ''Three years since I became one of the strongest individual in the entire village.''


    Everybody cheered for him as he went out of the graduation test room with his forehead protector but the happiest of them all is a girl with a blonde twin tails wearing an orange sleeveless jacket and under it is an orange T-shirt. She wears an orange Anbu pants with several pockets on it. This is Naruto, or what everyone calls her now, Azumi Uzumaki.


    She tackles Hikaru to the ground and she stared at his beautiful eyes as Hikaru laid under her, before she said with the brightest smile of all, "Congratulations, Hikaru! You passed!"


    Hikaru stared at her before lifting her off him and said, "Of course I''d passed, the test was easy, after all." He dusted off his clothes and stared at Azumi''s beautiful sky blue eyes before he held Azumi''s right hand.


    "Azumi, don''t you fail now. You''re going to be the Hokage, after all, " he said seriously.


    "What are you saying, Hikaru? Of course I''ll pass this test, and after that, I''ll become the first female Hokage!" she pumps her fist after saying that.


    Hikaru couldn''t help but blush because of her cuteness. Over the years, Azumi has grown into a beautiful girl and Hikaru was sure that she will grow even more beautiful. Though, she has grown very fond of him and sometimes she would intrude in his ''private'' time. That''s why, he too, has fallen for her.


    As they converse to each other, a bored voice intrudes them.


    "Alright, alright, you two love birds. I''m going to take the test now and Nar- I mean, Azumi, after me, you''re going in next, troublesome, " Shikamaru said while yawning as he went in the test room.


    ''That pineapple head, he dares disturb I and Hikaru-kun''s lovely conversation!'' Azumi thought angrily inside her head but outside she is still smiling innocently.


    After learning about her gender 2 years ago, after Hikaru told her about it, she has grown an unhealthy obsession towards Hikaru. At first, when she though that she was still boy, she felt a conflict whether she should confess her feelings to Hikaru or not but now that she knows that she is a female after all, she still couldn''t tell about her feelings to Hikaru. Because, well, she''s shy.


    "Hey, Azumi, you there?" Hikaru asked as he waves his hand at her face.


    Azumi woke up in her stupor. She saw Hikaru waving his right hand at her face, in which he stopped immediately after seeing her wake up from her stupor.


    "Y-yeah. Hey, Hikaru, you know, you have grown very handsome since then, " Azumi said without thinking but when she realize what she just said, she covered her mouth in embarrassment.


    Hikaru was surprised at the sudden words of Azumi but he just smiled at her charmingly and he replied, "You too, Azumi, you have grown very beautiful."


    Her eyes widened at his reply and she couldn''t help but blush. She wished that someone would save her from this embarrassing situation, which was answered almost immediately when Shikamaru went out of the testing room wtih his forehead protector dangling in his hand.


    "Oh, would you look at that, it''s my turn now, see you later, Hikaru!" she ran inside the test room almost instantly as soon as Shikamaru went out.


    "That girl..." Hikaru shook his head when he saw her all embarrass like that.


    Hikaru looks up to the sky and couldn''t help but think about all the things he did to get this strong. He died hundreds of times that he lost count of it, he lost too many souls, too many disappointments, and of course, what that disembodied voice told him after his first death.

 Chapter 22 - Flashback 1

    (Flashback - 3 Years Ago)


    Hikaru woke up in that same fog covered room, where he met with the disembodied voice a few weeks ago. He sat there, and he seems to be annoyed at himself.


    "Tch, I knew that was a bad idea and I just had to go and try to defeat those two black knights! When I saw the reward, I just couldn''t help myself! That was 80,000 souls!" he muttered under his breath.


    "So Thou has come back, " the same disembodied voice said with no surprise in his tone.


    He didn''t bother to raise his head because he knew there is no point in doing that. He did not beat around the bush and said, "Yes, I''m back and I have more questions for you this time."


    That''s right! His death wasn''t an accident because of his greed, instead, he decided that he should at least try and battle those black knights and if he dies, he could go back to this place and ask the questions he didn''t asked last time.


    "Hmm, what are thou''s question for I?" The disembodied voice seems interested.


    "First, who is the olden god I''m going to seal back in the Shinobi World?" Hikaru asked with his eyes all serious.


    "That would be Chaortos, Mother Of Darkness. She isn''t particularly strong but the number of her minions are massive, even I don''t know how many her minions are. She also has the ability to suck the darkness around a world and with that, she could increase the numbers of her minions. Please, thou should be careful when facing her. For she was known to be quite a cunning woman back in the golden age of the olden gods, but, not only that. I couldn''t say this to thee back when we first met but all Olden Gods have the magic powers to kill thou... permanently, " the disembodied voice gravely answered his question.


    Hikaru''s eyes widened and his pupils dilated at that last sentence. For once, he felt fear for his life. Then, suddenly, he came to a terrifying conclusion. If the olden gods were sealed, then doesn''t that mean that someone had sealed them in the past. Then that means...


    His eyes were shadowed by his hair as he said, "How many..."


    "Hmm?"


    "How many had sealed the olden gods in the past?!" He yelled at the disembodied voice.


    The entire place was silent for a moment before he heard a chuckle coming from the disembodied voice.


    "So, thou managed to figure that out? Yes, there were others before thee, 2 to be exact, and they all succeeded in their goal of sealing the 8 olden gods but at a heavy cost."


    Hikaru''s face grew serious as he asks, "Cost? What cost?"


    "They were forever cursed to be immortals and to wander the infinite worlds. They can never die nor be destroyed, " the disembodied voice said.


    "They''re immortals, so what? That''s more like a reward than a cursed, so what are you talking about?" He said, confused as to why they would consider it a curse.


    "Thou shall know it when thou''s time has come. Right now, thou is still too young. Maybe someday you will meet the two of them, those two fools, " the disembodied seems a little sad when he said that last part.


    ''Fools? Why did he call them fools?'' Hikaru couldn''t help but wonder. He decided not to dwell on it too much and just advance to his next question.


    "Do thee have more questions for I?" the disembodied asked.


    "Yes, am I fertile? I can get aroused but I still think that I am somehow not fertile," he seems to fidget around when he asked that question.


    "Unfortunately, since thou is an undead, you will never be fertile unless you get to be an immortal like those two, " the disembodied voice answered.


    Hikaru nodded his head and said, "Hmm, as I thought so. So, my next question, why couldn''t you just do it yourself? Sealing the olden gods, I mean."


    The disembodied voice replied, "It''s not that I don''t want to but I just can''t. I can''t explain this to thee right now, but I can assure you that I''m no enemy of yours."


    "Fine, then next question!" He said.


    The disembodied voice seems to sigh as he though that this will take a very long time.

 Chapter 23 - Just A Normal Day

    Azumi passed the test easily and Hikaru decided to celebrate by buying tons of gifts for Azumi. Right now, his bank account is filled with millions of ryos or, to be exact, 3,700,000 Ryo. With all those money, he was able to buy amazing gifts for her throughout the years. Nice clothing, good foods, a new house, and many, many more. For Hikaru, Azumi is like most precious person he has ever had. She''s cute, funny, kind, and most of all, she has never been spoiled rotten by the dotting he''s doing to her. Unlike other children.


    The the both of them wandered around the bustling place of the marketplace, where he and she is going to buy the things they need to celebrate. From time to time, some store owners would try to kick out Azumi but before they could do that, Hikaru''s cold gaze would always freeze them. They just had to obey, or else...


    ...he will kill them.


    For Azumi, she felt like she was living a dream. Since she was a child, no one had ever cared for her except her Jii-jii. Everyday, she would just sit in that lonely swing in front of the academy as she looked at happy faces of the children who had parents. But now, since Hikaru-kun is here, she would never be lonely like that ever again. She doesn''t want to return to that kind of lonliness ever again. For her, Hikaru-kun is her light and if he ever disappears... she don''t know what she will ever do by then.


    As they wander around the marketplace carrying many things they bought, including a huge ass cake, they saw three familiar faces. Shikamaru, Ino, Choji with their parents with them. They were also carrying some things but now as much as Azumi and Hikaru.


    Ino reacted when she saw them, she said, "Hikaru-kun! Azumi-chan! Hey!"


    Hikaru smiled at them nicely and dropped the stuff he bought gently to the ground before he cupped his fist at the clan heads. Azumi decided to go along.


    "Inoichi-dono, Shikaku-dono, and Choza-dono. How are you all doing?" He said as he lifted his face at them.


    "Hahahaha, you don''t have to be so formal, Hikaru-kun, " Choza said.


    "Then I shall do so, " Hikaru said while smiling at them friendly.


    "Anyway, what brings you here, Hikaru-kun?" Inoichi asked.


    Hikaru pointed at the things he bought and said, "As you can see, Azumi and I are going to celebrate our graduation and becoming a full fledged Genin, and it seems like that all of you are thinking the same thing."


    While they were talking, Azumi decided to talk to the other new Genins like herself.


    When she looked at them, she saw Ino stomping her feet on the ground and pouting her face while Shikamaru and Choji are trying to calm her down.


    "That Hikaru ignored me again! He''s so full of himself, hmph!" Ino yelled angrily.


    "Troublesome. Of course he wouldn''t look at you, he''s got Azumi by his side and you two are worlds apart. In fact, I think you''re the one who''s full of yourself. Just go back being a fangirl of Sasuke, " Shikamaru told Ino as he yawned.


    "Shikamaru is right, Ino. You two are really worlds apart." *chomp* *chomp* He said while munching on some ch.i.p.s.


    "Hmph, who told you guys I needed your opinions? I''m gonna snatch Hikaru-kun for myself!" Ino folded her arms and said haughtily.


    Meanwhile, Azumi''s eyes were shadowed over by her bangs, but you can see two red dots shining in her eyes and she is clearly aiming for Ino.


    ''Snatch Hikaru-kun away from me? Unforgivable! A whore like yourself has no place in Hikaru-kun''s heart!'' Azumi thought darkly inside her head.


    As the four of them were talking, Hikaru suddenly sensed an increased of bloodl.u.s.t in the air. And when he looked around, he saw Azumi behind Ino and she was ready to strangle her! In front of Ino, Choji and Shikamura seems to be trembling at the sight of Azumi, who''s behind her.


    ''What''s Azumi doing?!'' Hikaru asked himself.


    "Excuse me for a moment, " Hikaru excused himself from the three clan heads and walked directly at Azumi.


    ''Bad, this is bad! I need to calm Azumi before they sensed the bloodl.u.s.t in the air!'' He wasn''t a fool, he knew the strange obsession Azumi had for him and he may be flattered, but he doesn''t want her obsession to go any further. And, he fears that someday, she will become a yandere. That''s the one thing he wants to stop the most!


    He went behind Azumi and taps her shoulder gently. And then he whispered in her, "What are you doing, Azumi?"


    She couldn''t help but shiver in pleasure as she felt the hot breath of Hikaru going into her ear.


    She immediately turned around to look at Hikaru and she stammered as she said, "N-nothing H-Hikaru-kun! I-I was just going to them to talk."


    *sigh* He pats her head with his right hand and said at her softly, "I know, I know, but please restrain yourself. Anyway, let''s go back to our house. We can''t disturb them any further." In the end, he still, and will always, have a soft part for her.


    "Um!" She nodded her head cutely.


    Hikaru turned around to look at the clan heads and said, "We''ll go now and have a safe day!" The two of them picks up the things they bought in the marketplace before going home for the day.


    As they picked up their things, the clan heads couldn''t help but think, "Hmm, such a mature and collected child! I wish our children were like that."


    And with Choji and Shikamaru.


    "Hey, Choji, let''s not mess with Azumi in the future, " Shikamaru whispered at Choji.


    "Yes, you''re right. I wouldn''t want something happening to us, " Choji nodded in agreement.

 Chapter 24 - 22

    After the graduation ceremony, the Scroll Of Seals was suddenly stolen by someone. Hikaru wondered if that was Azumi because of the original canon plot of the anime, but he got rid of that idea because Azumi was clearly with him. He later found out that the one who stole the Scroll was a student who failed the test but Mizuki was the mastermind behind it. Mizuki also transformed into giant werekitty and, sadly, Iruka was gravely injured when he tried fighting Mizuki by himself when he found the two, his student and Mizuki, in the forest near Konoha.


    Right now, Iruka is fighting for his life in the Konoha Hospital. Azumi was devastated, no, not just her, all of her classmates was devastated that their favorite teacher was gravely injured just like that. But they decided to remain strong for their favorite teacher.


    Mizuki was later interrogated for any information before he was executed. They found out that he was working for Orochimaru and he was on a mission to steal the Scroll Of Seals and give it to Orochimaru. They didn''t find any valuable information afterwards.


    So with Iruka being gravely injured and Mizuki being a traitor, the classroom had no teacher. The school decided to put a substitute teacher for awhile, at least until Iruka manage to get up.


    So, now everyone who passed the test is inside the classroom waiting for their team announcement.


    The substitute teacher stood in front of everyone in the classroom as he reads a paper in his hands filled with list of which team to put the students in.


    "Team 8 will be Hyuga Hinata, Inuzuka Kiba, Aburame Shino. Your teacher will be Kurenai Yuhi."


    Hinata has grown over the years. She doesn''t stutter anymore but she is still quite shy. Though, she has grown fond of Hikaru as well. When she learned that Naruto, or Azumi, was a girl, she was quite devastated. Even though only female relationship wasn''t looked down upon by the village, she just couldn''t bring herself to do that. She still looks up to Azumi, of course. But she is a straight girl, after all. And Hikaru, for her, is the kindest boy she has ever met. He is mature, calm, cool, collected, and isn''t easily strayed by his emotions. (Though he would always get angry when someone talks bad about Azumi). Slowly, she fell for Hikaru, as well.


    Kiba, well, he didn''t changed. He is still the same guy trying to be an alpha and over the years, he had tried to fight Hikaru and everytime, he would get his ass kicked. In short, he never matured. He is arrogant, loud, obnoxious, and most of all, he always tried to get the attention of the girls in the class every single time. Though, he would always get his ass kicked by them.


    Shino isn''t exactly the talkative type. He stays behind his shades and hood and would never interfere in anything unless it''s needed. He was the most silent kid in class and someone would always try pick on him for his clan"s specialty, their insect ninjutsu. Even though they are one of the four noble clans in Konoha, people are still disgusted by them. One day, when Shino was being picked on by older kids in the class in the school''s cafeteria, he met Hikaru. Hikaru scared them and they were suddenly afraid of him, no, that was an understatement, they were terrified of him. Shino didn''t know what exactly happened, all Hikaru did was stand in front of the older students before they ran away in fear. Though, he heard them mutter this; "The blue clad monster is coming... along with its giant sword! And Its oozing in darkness!"


    ''Yata! See that, Hikaru-teme! Hinata-chan is in my team, you are basically away from Hinata-chan!'' Kiba thought in his head as he looked in Hikaru''s direction with smugness clearly written on his face.


    *sigh* ''I guess wishing for Hikaru-kun to be in my team was too much. But putting Kiba in my team is also very problematic. He''s just huge pervert. Shino on the other hand is very different than Kiba. He could be trusted because he''s a friend of Hikaru-kun, '' Hinata thought in distress. She just decided to look at the bright side.


    ''Hmm, so they''re trying to build a sensor type team? A very good choice to put me, a Hyuga, and an Inuzuka for this team. But the problem lies in Kiba. I have seen both of their performances and I know Kiba is just all talk, and Hinata on the other hand is very skilled in her taijutsu but I hope she would learn some ninjutsu skills, Good thing she didn''t inherit the natural arrogance of the Hyuga Clan or else this team could very much so become very problemtic, '' Unlike his teammates, Shino immediately analyzed the reason for making this team and at the same time, thinking the problems within the team.


    Then the teacher announced, "Team 10 will be Yamanaka Ino, Nara Shikamaru, Akimichi Choji. Your sensei will be Asuma Sarutobi."


    Ino has also grown over the years, albeit just slightly. She gave up being Sasuke''s fangirl because she could clearly see the lack of interest in her in his eyes. But Hikaru was different. He was like the older brother of the entire classroom. He''s kind, giving, handsome, and that long hair of his makes him more enticing. He was always wearing strange clothes. One time, he came in school wearing a full bodied golden armor but without the helmet. He called it; "Ornstein''s Set". That day, he was mesmerizing. He''s like the knight in shining armor that would always appear in her dreams. And she loved it.


    "Nani?! Why am I teamed up with these two idiots?! Why can''t I be teamed up with Hikaru-kun!?" Ino yelled at the teacher.


    "Yamanaka-san, Hokage-sama was the one who decided on this team. If you want to complain, go talk with Hokage-sama, " the teacher said.


    "Guh."


    In the end, she didn''t mutter a single word and just accepted her fate.


    ''We should be the one complaining, Ino. Troublesome, '' Shikamaru thought in annoyance.


    ''Shikamaru is right!'' This one was Choji.


    "Next! Team 7 will be Uzumaki Azumi, Uchiha Sasuke, Haruno Sakura, and... Hiroaki Hikaru. Your sensei will be Kakashi Hatake, " though he couldn''t say it, the teacher was surprised that the Hokage decided on a five-man cell. This is the first time he has ever seen something like this.


    ''Ho, Hokage-dono really did put me in Azumi''s team. But it isn''t a surprise. Putting her in the same team as Sasuke and Sakura alone is already bad move. Even after all the training I did with Azumi, she still became the dead last of the class. It was because she scored the lowest in the written test but even though her performance in the physical test was good, it was nowhere near to overwrite her low written test grade. She has the skills of a ninja, but in the end, the pen will always be her weakness. That''s why she was put in a team like this. Sasuke scored lesser than me, that''s why he is in the second place and Sakura is the first place in the female section of the class because of her booksmarts. But, the one added wasn''t me, it was Sasuke!'' Hikaru said in his thoughts.


    ''Since Sasuke scored lesser than me and I''m the student of the year, he should''ve been the one in an another team. It should''ve just been Azumi, Sakura, and I. But, from my theory, Kakashi should''ve begged the Hokage to be the one teaching Azumi, since his teacher was the Fourth Hokage, he should be the one to teach Azumi. Of course, the Hokage agreed but that would leave Sasuke without anyone to teach him how to use the sharingan when he awakens them. Only Kakashi wields the sharingan in the entire village, right now. (Though, Danzo wields it also). That''s why Hokage-dono just decided to put Sasuke in this team, but that''s not the only reason. He had a promise to fulfill to Itachi for Sasuke to live. Since I''m in the team, Sasuke''s survival rate is high. After all, in the entire village, he, the Hokage, is the only one who knows how strong I am, '' Hikaru said with smirk in his thoughts.


    Out of all the students in his class, Hikaru was by far the one who matured the most. It''s because of all the deaths he''s been through. He died hundreds, if not, thousands of times. In the -Challenge- option, he fought many kinds of enemies. Black Knights, Balder Knights, Taurus Demons, and many, many more. He even fought some bosses but he was never able to beat them because of how incredibly overpowered they are. He once fought Artorias after fighting 5 levels of Bloated Warriors and Bloated Sorcerers. And I tell you, they were a nightmare.


    Every next level multiplies them like this. 1 times 2 = 2 - 2 times 2= 4 and so on. That''s why it was very hard to defeat them, But because of that, he also grew his skills as he died many times over. Not just his stats. And don''t get him started with Artorias. He''s like 30 times stronger in here than the game. He feels like he''s playing the absurd nightmare mode of Dark Souls.


    Tonight, that would be the time when he will beat Artorias! This is for his honor as a Dark Souls player! And also for the 10,000,000 souls reward for defeating the overpowered Artorias. I know, the souls that would be rewarded to him is very... massive.


    After finishing with the team announcement, the teacher told them to wait for their senseis. In just 15 minutes, all the new genins were gone except, well, team 7.


    "Kuusoooo! That damn sensei of ours is late!" Azumi whined in her chair.


    "Azumi, be patient. I''m sure our sensei will arrive soon, " Hikaru said to Azumi.


    "Okay, fine. Since you said so, Hikaru-kun, " Azumi obliged.


    ''Though, I wouldn''t be so sure about that. Kakashi is clearly going to be late, '' Hikaru thought mischievously.


    And so, they waited, and waited, and waited, until 3 hours had passed.


    Sakura was screeching, Sasuke is really getting annoyed, Azumi is getting impatient as the time goes by, and Hikaru stayed silent.

 Chapter 25 - Just A Little Trick

    Hikaru knew Kakashi would be late and he''s not an impatient guy, so he waited patiently for his sensei. Though, that could not be said for the other three.


    "Ugh! That sensei of ours better appear now, or else I''ll pummel his face!" Sakura screeched like a banshee.


    "Hn, that guy better appear, " Sasuke said while brooding. He sat at the far back, away from Hikaru, who''s sitting right beside Azumi.


    "Hmm, just wait patiently Azumi, just like what Hikaru-kun told you to, " Azumi said to herself to calm her anger down.


    As Hikaru sat and listened to his teammates, he suddenly sensed a familiar chakra presence behind the classroom door. It was much larger than others, though it''s 1/4 to Azumi''s chakra level. He deducted that this must be Kakashi. He then decided to play a little prank for him being late.


    Do you guys remember the pyromancy called Iron Flesh? Yeah, he would use that to Kakashi to make his movements much, much slower.


    As soon as the door was opened, Hikaru appeared in front of Kakashi with the pyromancy hand in his left hand before touching Kakashi in the chest with it, he then used Iron Flesh to make Kakashi heavier. As soon as his pyomancy hand touched Kakashi, he became encased with iron.


    All of this happened in less than a second and when Kakashi finally noticed it, Hikaru was backed on his seat, like nothing ever happened. His pyromancy hand was nowhere to be seen.


    "Yo- why do I feel I so heavy?" Kakashi tried to greet them but he noticed that his body has gotten a lot heavier.


    "Ah, Kakashi-sensei, you''re finally here. Hmm, is something wrong?" Hikaru asked politely but you can see a mischievous glint in his eyes.


    When Sasuke, Sakura, and Azumi saw Kakashi, they were beyond shocked. They were extremely baffled because Kakashi is completely encased in iron, even his clothes were not spared.


    "S-Sensei, what in the world happened to you?!" Sakura asked, baffled.


    "Huh? What are you talki- Oh my god!" He was confused at first but then, suddenly, he noticed his arms were completely encased in iron. He tried looking at his body but only noticed nothing but iron covering his flesh. No, that could not be more inaccurate, his flesh IS the iron.


    As he was about to lose his mind, the iron in his flesh suddenly disappeared. And not a few seconds later, all the iron was gone.


    Hikaru stood up and walked towards the door. As he passed by Kakashi, he whispered silently behind Kakashi, "Don''t be late next time, Kakashi-sensei. Even though I''m a patient guy, I still have limits." With that, and as soon as he walked out of the door, Hikaru suddenly disappeared. He is heading towads the rooftop, where he knew that that was the place where the original team 7 gathered.


    Kakashi turned around after he heard Hikaru whisper, only for him to find nothing but air. "What was that?" He muttered.


    He decided to ignore it for now and immediately get on with his cute little students. He turned back to the genin he''s going to teach, (If they pass his test), and eyes smiled to them before saying, "My first impression of you guys... is that I''m having a very bad feeling. Anyway, go to the academy rooftop. That''s where we''ll be having our first meeting."


    As soon as he finished saying that, he used shunshin to disappear and go to the rooftop without any trouble.


    ''Hn, is that really going to be my teacher? He looks dumb, '' Sasuke thought with disdain towards Kakashi.


    ''Hmph, I don''t care about who''s going to be my teacher. As long as I''m with Sasuke-kun, I don''t care what happens, '' Sakura thought as she stood up to walk towards the door, along with the other two.


    ''What was that? Why did our sensei suddenly became covered in iron?'' Only Azumi thinks about that, unlike the other two.


    (At The Rooftop)


    When Kakashi appeared on top of the rooftop of the building via shunshin, he immediately noticed Hikaru, who is sitting at the edge of the concrete blockage wall of the rooftop.


    For a moment, it was silent for the two of them.


    "If I''m right, you''re one of my cute little students, aren''t you?" Kakashi was the one who broke the silence.


    "Yes, " Hikaru replied.


    "Then, can you explain what happened back there? I know for a fact that doesn''t happen everyday, what did you do?" Kakashi asked him while narrowing his eyes in suspicion.


    "Oh, that? Just a little trick, please don''t be bothered by it. After all, it''s your fault for being late, " Hikaru said with a slight smirk.

 Chapter 26 - 24

    On top of the rooftop of the shinobi academy, you can see two auras clashing to each other.


    Kakashi feels like this soon going to be his cute little student is looking down on him, and he can''t have that. He released the pressure of his chakra stronger than before, and he bared it down on Hikaru.


    But under all that pressure, Hikaru just jumped down from the ledge and stood up easily on the ground of the rooftop. He stared at Kakashi and wondered how will he fair against his own chakra pressure. He decided to release 50% of it and tried to see what would happen.


    As soon as he bared his Chakra onto Kakashi, Kakashi instantly felt the ground crack underneath him. He tried to fight it back but it was too strong and he slowly felt his body breaking under the pressure.


    ''What power! Hokage-sama did indeed told me he is strong, but not this strong! I feel like I''m standing in front of a live Kage!'' Kakashi thought under all that pressure.


    Hikaru decided to stop it and stopped all the pressure coming from him in an instant. Kakashi felt instantaneous relief as he felt all the pressure disappearing.


    But under all this, Hikaru couldn''t help but be surprise at this man''s willpower. Normal Jonins wouldn''t have been able to stand up, yet this man endured all that pressure while standing up. This man is worth a praise!


    Kakashi cleared his mind a little before looking towards Hikaru.


    "You''re strong, incredibly so. But that warrants my suspicion on you, 3 years is not enough time to get this strong. So what are you? An enemy? Or an ally?" Kakashi asked him in his suspicion as he narrowed his eyes at Hikaru.


    Hikaru wasn''t surprised that Kakashi would asked him of this. He knew for a fact that his mere existence in this village is suspicious. He knew that, for his first year in this village, many Yamanaka had been sent by the Hokage to his and Azumi''s house to check on his memory. It may not have been that obvious at first, but as time goes by, he slowly felt their presence. He was worried at what they would find out, so he talked about this with the Third Hokage, and he was surprised at what the old man told him. They did get a information on his head, and that was the "memories" of him being in Lordran.


    In those "memories", he was a peasant along with his family. In that world, he loved to read stories about the legends of the world. On how Gwyn won the war against the dragons, how the hero Artorias defeated the Father Of The Abyss, Manus at the cost of his life.


    This is also why they didn''t doubt him when it comes to his story about Lordran, the system already made his "memories" according to his story. Though, he should admit that he was a fool for telling them the story about Lordran. He should''ve never told them to begin with. Such a foolish mistake.


    Anyway, they believed them because of that. End of story.


    Hikaru simply smiled at Kakashi and he did a simple bow of respect as he said, "I''m neither of that, for I am simply a comrade of this village."


    Kakashi widened his eyes at his response for his question, and then he smiled underneath his masked and muttered, "I see..."


    Suddenly, the door on the rooftop opened, revealing Azumi, Sakura, and Sasuke. The two seemed to be tired, you can see that from their sweats, while Azumi seems to be quite energetic.


    *Ha* *Ha* *Ha* "Such disgrace from an Uchiha like me. Why am I so tired from just climbing up the stairs?" Sasuke said haggardly as he sat in the middle of the rooftop, along with the other two.


    ''Cha! Why am I so tired?! I looked pathetic in front of Sasuke-kun! I should diet more than I would so Sasuke-kun would look at me more!'' Sakura just being an idiot.


    ''That wasn''t even a warm up! Hikaru-kun would always make me train my physical body until I was tired!'' Azumi thought smug as she saw her other teammates being so exhausted. She looks at Hikaru, who is behind Kakashi, and thought, ''But Hikaru-kun... he is on a different level.''


    Kakashi looks directly at them and eye smiled before saying, "Hello, my cute little students. First, let us introduced ourselves! You first pinky."


    ''Hmm, he''s quick at changing his phase.'' Hikaru thought.


    "Don''t call me pinky! But could you elaborate a little?" Pinky said.


    "Elaborate on what?" Kakashi asked, confused.


    " Can you elaborate on how to introduce ouselves? You know, like giving an example?"


    *facepalm!*


    Hikaru couldn''t help but facepalm at the sheer idioticness of this girl.


    ''And she''s the smartest kunoichi of the year? Even my three year old sister knows how to introduce herself!''


    "O-okay, alright I''ll introduce myself as an example." He flinched slightly at the idiotic question of that girl, "I am Hatake Kakashi. I have a lot of hobbies, I like Icha-icha and other things. I hate people who don''t know the greatness of Icha-icha. My goal right now is to get the latest icha-icha paradise volume. That''s it. Now, you Pinky."


    She shyly looks at Sasuke and said, "I am S-Sakura Haruno. I have many hobbies, but the one I like the most is just staring at Sasuke-kun all day, " Sasuke fidgets as he felt the perverted stare of Sakura, "I like Sasuke-kun and makeups. I hate Ino-pig and Azumi! My goal is to have lots, and lots of babies with Sasuke_kun!"


    Sasuke started moving away from his spot, just to get away from Sakura but she tried moving in the same direction as him.


    ''Wow, what a fangirl. I did have fangirls at the academy but I never had as worst as this one.'' Hikaru couldn''t help but feel sorry for Sasuke.


    "Next, blondy over there, " Kakashi pointed his finger at Azumi.


    "Yo! I''m Uzumaki Azumi! My hobbies are going out with Hikaru-kun, training with Hikaru-kun, and shopping with Hikaru-kun! I like Teuchi and Ayame, being with Hikaru-kun, ramens that Teuchi would give me and Hikaru-kun, and sleeping with Hikaru-kun all night!" That last part triggered some suspicion from Kakashi. While Hikaru is sweating from all the words Azumi spoke that could easily get misunderstood. "I hate how cup ramen takes 3 minutes to prepare, and I really hate those worthless girls going near my Hikaru-kun!" She said that last part darkly with extreme venom. " My goal is to be the next Hokage and becoming Hikaru-kun''s wife!"


    It seems like Hikaru has larger problem than Sasuke over there...


    "N-next, Broody over there, " Kakashi pointed at Sasuke.


    "I''m Uchiha Sasuke. I don''t have any hobbies, I don''t particularly like anything, I hate almost everything, but I have a goal, and that is to revive the Uchiha Clan and kill a certain man. I will make all of these a reality!" Sasuke said darkly while Sakura squealed on how cool he was.


    ''Great, a fangirl, an obsessed girl, and an emo kid. But not only that! He also added a goddamn overpowered kid! Does Hokage-sama hate me that much!?" Kakashi grumbled and complained in his mind.


    (Meanwhile, In The Hokage Office)


    "Hahahahah! Serves him right. That''s what he gets for being so late for the meetings!" Hiruzen laughed at the man''s misery through his magical crystal ball while smoking his pipe.


    (Back On The Rooftop)


    All of the soon to be Genins sat in front of Kakashi as they listened what he is going to explain.


    "Hmm, you four have diferrent personalities, I like that. Alright, tomorrow we will start going to a mission, " Kakashi said.


    "What kind of mission is that, sensei?" Sakura raised her hand to asked.


    "First, we will do what you four can do, " except Hikaru that is, "We will be doing a survival training."


    "Hah? We''ve already done plenty of training back in the academy, " Sakura said.


    "This is no ordinary training, " Kakashi replied.


    "Then, then what kind of training is it?" Azumi asked excitedly.


    "Hehehe, " Kakashi snickered.


    "Hey, what''s so funny, sensei?" Sakura asked.


    "Well, if I were to say this, I''m sure you guys are going to be surprise." Then, his tone changed, "Out of 27 that passed the academy, only 9 will become a Genin. The other 18 will be sent back to the academy. In other words, this training is going to be a very hard test with a dropout chance of 66%."


    "What!?" Azumi reacted very surprised.


    "What!? That''s so unfair! What did we spent 4 years in the academy for?!" Sakura stood up and yelled. ''I need to pass this test, or else I''ll be seperated from Sasuke-kun! This a trial of love, right!'' She thought.


    Sasuke stayed silent but you can sense nervousness of off him.


    Hikaru stayed laid back because he knew very well that this was going to happen.


    Kakashi turned around to leave but not before saying, "This meeting is now over. Tomorrow we will meet at the third training ground at 7 am of the morning, sharp. Also, just an advice, don''t eat any breakfast tomorrow, you will throw up."


    With that, he left his students, via shunshin, alone. As they dispersed, Hikaru couldn''t help but think about his fight with Artorias tonight. That fight, he is going all out. He will even bring the dragon head stone and the dragon torso, though he will only use it when he''s almost weakened. Because being a dragon in the dark souls system, you literally turn into a dragon. Not a damn wendigo like thing, a REAL dragon that has wings and stuff. But it has a time limit and a waiting time. He can turn into a dragon for 10 minutes but the waiting time is 10 hours.


    He just hopes he can defeat Artorias by tonight.

 Chapter 27 - 25

    Hikaru and Azumi sat in their table inside their house, which Hikaru bought a few months ago. It''s bigger than their previous apartment but it only had one room, so the both of them sleep together.


    Right now, the both of them are eating their dinner, in which, after they finish eating, they will go to bed.


    They talked to each other a lot while eating, and when they finally finished, Hikaru told Azumi to brush her teeth. She complied and went on to do that. Meanwhile, he started doing the dishes as she brushes her teeth. After finishing, Hikaru then brushed his teeth before going to bed with Azumi by his side. She seems to like hugging him a lot, but he didn''t said anything about it and just prepared himself for the fight with Artorias.


    He checked his items in the bottomless box, which stands as his inventory now, and made sure he had the right items and the right quantity. Though, in this three years, he had been buying humanities nonstop in the system and now, he has over twenty 99* stacks of those.


    And his +10 Estus Flasks, after buying the Rite Of Kindling in the shop for 20,000 souls, he has over 100 Estus Flasks in his possession. And, whenever he dies, it refills itself back automatically. He thinks that 100 Estus Flasks is the current maximum quantity he could get, right now. He could no longer kindle it again after reaching 100.


    His weapon of choice are two special katanas. Two Black Blades. They are very powerful if used right, and he happened to be training his kenjutsu, known to Azumi. He maxed them to the extreme, which is currently +20 fire and +20 lightning. He looks extremely badass when he uses them because of the fire and lightning effect. He is very good at duel katanas, mostly because he trained his skills everyday, but it was also because of the samurai movies he watched back on earth that inspired him to do it. Every slash of his katana can deal around 800 damage. If the Tear Stone Ring activates, he will have over 960 damage.


    Right now, with these two blades, not even the current five kages are matched with him. But that is a very different story for that super overpowered Artorias. His heavy attacks are very difficult to dodge, especially with that speed of his. That''s why he wears a light armor, at least for him.


    The Undead Legion Armor!


    To be able to wear it without slowing him down, he also bought Havel''s ring from the shop. Its defense is very sturdy, and since he was a very hard grinder, he managed to maxed it out to +20. He''s practically one of the strongest, if not, the strongest person currently alive in the entire Shinobi World! And since this armor was originally worn by the Abyss Watchers, it also had an extra effect on every being infected by the abyss. That also includes Artorias.


    He''s prepared everything.


    Time to battle Artorias!


    He did somethings in the main screen of the system before he was able to enter that space again. The exact coliseum in the game where the player would fight Artorias, but it''s bigger by ten folds. With this, he could fight to his heart''s content. This time, he will go all out. Everything he can use, from magic to jutsus, he will use them all. A battle that will determine whether he is strong enough or not, this time, for sure, he will kill Artorias!


    He arrived at the coliseum as he closed his eyes back in the real world. His body may seem like it''s asleep, but it''s not. You can say that this is something similar to SAO, but if he dies inside, he can still be revive.


    When he arrived, Artorias was still not here. It usually takes a few minutes before he makes his appearance. So he decided to put on a few things, like his armor.


    Back in the real world, you can see Azumi sleeping quietly as she hugs closely to her body, when suddenly, both of her eyes opened, revealing two beautiful blue orbs. She then brought her head closer to Hikaru''s and asked, "Ne, are you asleep?"


    No response.


    She grinned as she slides her hand inside his clothes.


    Before kissing him in the lips.


    As she removed her lips from Hikaru''s mouth, you can see a silvery string connected to their mouths. After kissing Hikaru, she promptly proceeded to lick his stomach and feel his abs. They were beautiful, no one could ever compare to him.


    She stared madly in his body as she said, " That''s right, no one can ever compare to you my light, my.... Hikaru-kun."


    As she finished that sentence, she proceeded to violate him even further.


    She licked every part of his body, she touched every part of his body, she kissed him so many times, she is simply madly in love. Her love for Hikaru is undeniable. And she will keep it that way. For Hikaru is her light... her Hikaru is hers and hers alone.


    "Hikaru-kun, aishiteru."

 Chapter 28 - 26 Round 1

    With his Undead Legon Armor donned in his body, he stood up like a lone hero as he waited for Artorias to appear with his duel Black Blades in each of his hands. The katanas were releasing lightning and fire particles around it every second.


    Hikaru pierce his katanas into the ground before doing multiple hand signs. He was preparing to try his new jutsu on Artorias, which involves doing hand signs connected to every element. This is a five element jutsu, but it''s a bit different. He mixed the elemental chakras and created a new jutsu, no, I think it''s a bit closer to the tailed beast bomb.


    Once he finished the 50 hand signs in a few seconds, five elemental chakra appeared in front of him before he used his extreme chakra control to combined all of them together. As soon as they touched each other, a huge shock wave occurred.


    Hikaru stood calmly in front of it as the ground cracked and the katanas were almost blown away but he continued merging them together. A few seconds later, a new mass appeared in from of him.


    "As I suspected, this jutsu is still not finish but this will do as my second trump card against Artorias," he said as he analyzed the pitch black orb in front of him.


    He calls this jutsu, Yami no Tengoku(Dark Heaven).


    This jutsu will explode upon contact but it will not harm the target and instead swallow them up inside the black ball. The explosion will then happen inside the ball, and it would then rise up to the skies before exploding its dark mass everywhere and becoming something akin to the heaven, but instead, it will be dark. The target inside it will receive extreme damage, and maybe kill them.


    This is one of his trump cards, but it will only be able to activate if he manages to perfectly lure Artorias into this.


    He used several illusions to hide it in plain sight.


    "Now, I think it''s time he show up, " he said as he picked up his katanas.


    Sure enough, as soon as he said that, black mists suddenly gathered together, forming the tall humanoid figure of Artorias. He appeared with his greatsword hanging in his shoulder and with his left arm broken.


    ROAR!!!!


    He roared with extreme ferocity and the ground shook.


    Hikaru readied himself before he shot towards Artorias like a bullet. As sson as he reached him, Hikaru jumped up and smashed his katanas towards Artorias but the abyss walker blocked it with his greatsword. The impact of his Katanas smashing into Artoias greatsword distorted the air and created a shockwave that caved everything under Artorias.


    Hikaru stared at the abyss walker''s empty eyes but they were still fierced.


    He quickly tried to back off from Artorias, but as soon as he did that, Artorias swung his sword directly towards him while he was in mid-air. But fortunately for him, he managed to block it just in time with his katana. Yet, as he did that, the impact of the gratesword made his hands go numb and he flew towards the walls of the coliseum with harsh speed.


    But this was of no problem. He flipped through mid-air and landed on both of his feet in the walls. As soon as his feet touched the walls, he ran around the coliseum walls as he took out his throwing knives before throwing them towards Artorias.


    Of course, he knew this wouldn''t work but he managed to buy enough time to weaved some hand signs.


    "Katon: G¨­ry¨±ka no Jutsu!"


    Three huge flame dragons at the size of a house came out of Hikaru''s mouth and shot towards Artorias with extreme velocity,


    Artorias tried to slash it all away with his greatsword but he was quickly enveloped by the flame dragons and couldn''t do nothing but to take the damage.


    Everything was going along his plan smoothly, maybe because of his countless deaths against Artorias? He doesn''t know but this is his chance to kill Artorias!


    Because of that Katon jutsu, Artorias let an opening open. Hikaru saw this and took this chance to control the Yami no Tengoku while being hidden by an illusion.


    ROAR!!!


    Artorias stood up and roared again in furiousness. He tried to charge at Hikaru with his greatsword in tow but, it was too late. The black ball has already been touched by him, and he couldn''t see it because of the illusions Hikaru placed on it.


    The black orb exploded in front of Artorias but it suddenly stopped in mid-air before proceeding to swallow him up. This time, the five elements inside the black orb exploded inside it, and Artorias could be heard screeching beastly inside it.


    Then, the black orb floated up in the fake sky created by the system before it suddenly exploded in every direction and then, suddenly, the sky was devoured by the black orb. And Artorias continued to suffer the continues exploding elements.


    And the world suddenly went quiet.


    "Success! It was a success!" Hikaru rejoiced.


    But, nothing was finished yet. Artorias fell from the dark heavens with a large part of its torso torn out.


    "Tch, not finished yet? Guess this trump card is the only thing I can do right now, if I die fighting him in that weakened form, then I wouldn''t call myself a Dark Souls Player!" With one last roar, he became encased with chakra as he enhanced his physical strenght.


    Like a beam, he shot towards Artorias with extreme speed.


    This time, he would go all out!


    "Raaaahrg!"


    Countless blade attacks brought countless shcokwaves as he slashed both of his katanas into Artorias and Artorias did the same.


    Both of them were like untamed monsters as both of rushed their swords into each other.


    Swish!


    Hikaru''s left arm was sliced off clean by Artorias sword, but he paid it no mind and continued slashing his katana at him. The lightning katana formed countless lightning arcs as both of them slashed their swords at each other countless times.


    And at some point, it seems like no one was winning.


    Hikaru knew if this keeps up, he will eventually fall. So he did a simple jutsu that required no hand signs and blew a small flame at Artorias face''s. (Shinobis never fight fair).


    This distracted the abyss walker and Hikaru took this chance to cut Artorias one remaining good arm off. And it flew away.


    With a part of his torso blown up and his remaining arm cut off, Artorias seems like almost helpless.


    And Hikaru grinned, as he knew that this is his win.


    But suddenly, the abyss energy surrounding Artorias formed him a new arm.


    "Oi, this was not in the game!"

 Chapter 29 - 27 Dragon Form

    Hikaru quickly pulled out his Estus Flask and drank it to heal his wounds. As soon as he finished, the arm that Artorias sliced off grew back almost instantly.


    While he healed himself, Artorias did not kept idle. He picked up his weapon and rushed towards Hikaru at an amazing speed before jumping up in the dark skies as he plunge his greatsword down towards Hikaru.


    Hikaru saw that, and he knew that if he takes on that attack, he will die. So, in a flash, he took out his next trump card.


    The Dragon Stone!


    An item that can transform him into an Eternal Dragon for 10 minutes. In this form, his power is tripled and he will have the powers of the true Eternal Dragons until the time is up. Yet, it might sound all good, but the backlash is terrible. For three days and three nights, his body will suffer extreme fever. Even though he is an undead, and he was not supposed to have a fever. but this dragon stone breaks all of that.


    "I have no other options! Dragon Stone, activate!"


    As soon as he said that, a deafening roar resounded throughout the entire coliseum. A dragon''s roar.


    A blinding force pushed Artorias away as he was just about to plunge his sword down to Hikaru. He crashed on the wall but as he was about stand up, a gigantic claw at the size of his entire body brought its weight upon him and he was trapped under that claw as the ground behind him caves in under the pressure.


    Under the darkened skies of the coliseum, a majestic dragon as tall as the darkened sky, stood proudly as it stepped on Artorias. Its large dark head and its snow white body seems so natural. Its blazing red eyes glared down at Artorias, before it released a roar directed at the once proud knight of Gwyn.


    "Grooooooooar!!"


    ____________


    Name: Hiroaki Hikaru


    Level - 210


    Next Level - 345000 Souls


    [Stats:


    Attunement - 20 - 60


    Endurance - 50 - 150 (Limit Break)


    Strenght - 50 - 150 (Limit Break)


    Dexterity - 50 - 150 (Limit Break)


    Intelligents - 50 - 150 (Limit Break)


    Faith - 50 - 150 (Limit Break)


    Resistance - 10 - 30


    ___________


    Chakra - 57 (Cannot add level in this stat).


    ___________


    The power behind the dragon''s roar bared down on Artorias as everything that roar surrounds was crushed.


    With Artorias finally weakened, Hikaru can now crushed him in his Dragon form. Because of that new jutsu he created, Artorias was weakened to the point that he can go tow to tow with him when he was in his undead form. But after clashing with Artorias many times, he, too, was weakened. That''s why he needed the Dragon form, with this, the fight is officially finished.


    Black flames surrounded by white ones came out of the dragon''s mouth before enveloping Artorias within it.


    His inhumane screeches can be heard as the dark white flames ate him.


    Hikaru, in his dragon form, jumps back to dodge his dark white flames.


    But, as Artorias was being eaten by the flame, he heard a voice. A voice full of sorrow and regret.


    "All of you, forgive me, for I have availed you nothing..."


    Hikaru''s dragonic eyes widened, because that voice came from the burning Artorias.


    ''What... was that?'' He thought.


    This is the first time he has ever beaten Artorias, so that''s the first time he has ever heard that voice. But the question is, how was Artorias able to speak?


    As Artorias died, a transparent screen appeared in front of him, saying: [Great job at defeating the fallen Artorias, this is your reward: 10,000,000 Souls, 30 Humanities, Abyss Greatsword, Soul Of Artorias, Summon Stone For Sif, and a hidden reward for defeating Artorias for the first time, Advance Dragon Stone, that''s all.]


    With that, everything was finally finished.


    Though, in this fight, he was quite confused as to why Artorias didn''t attempt to go to his phase 2. That was the only thing that he will have to be careful on, but thankfully, he didn''t go to that. He was quite lucky.


    Artorias''s charred body disappeared in white light, and Hikaru, too, started to disappear but not before his Dragon Form cancelled itself on its own.


    (Back In The Real World)


    Azumi was n.a.k.e.d as she rubs her body against Hikaru''s. She stood up when she felt him move a little, and she knew that he was already waking up.


    "Hehehe, are you waking up soon, Hikaru-kun? Then, I better go and change myself, I don''t want you find me out, after all. Hehehe, " she said as she stood up to go to the bathroom buttn.a.k.e.d with her clothes dangling in her hands as her smile almost reaching her ears.


    Even though Hikaru is quite smart, but he is still oblivious about what Azumi has been doing to him everytime he battles monsters in the Dark Souls System.


    But he has been noticing a lot of things as he woke up in the past days. First of all, his body was sticky, his fingers seems to have been in a tight place, and his mouth being quite wetter than normal. Yet, since he believed in Azumi, he brushed it off as something natural. But deep down in his heart, he knew, she has some connections to it.


    Hikaru opened his eyes, and felt that Azumi was not by his side. So he checked his status and the shop before leveling up to [Lvl - 226] and putting it all the stat points to [Resistance]. He has been ignoring it for a while now because of his other stats, but since it strengthens his skin a little per level, he decided to level it up. It all cost 6,030,000 Souls and now he only have around 4,250,000 Souls.


    He felt his skin becoming harder by the second, and now, his skin is harder than rock. He felt that no kunai or shurikens can pierce it anymore. So he decided to try that. He took out a kunai from his bottomless box before stabbing it to his arm as hard as he can, and to his non-surprise, the kunai broke as it tried to pierce his skin.


    "Hmm, quite good. Anyway, I feel sticky all of a sudden, " he noticed it and decided to go to the bathroom, which, as soon as he stood up and arrived at the bathroom door, Azumi walks out of the bathroom dressed in her clothes.


    "Oh, Hikaru-kun. Were you peeping on me? Kyaa!" She said while blushing.


    Hikaru calmly stared at her, and said, "Of course not, why would I do that? Anyway, I''m going to the bathroom now to wash myself, so go to bed, we''ll be having quite a day tomorrow."


    She moved away as Hikaru entered the bathroom.


    *sigh*


    ''Still didn''t work, I wish he would just peep on me while i''m in the bathroom. I mean, I''m doing it so I just hoped that he will do it, too.''


    ''But... putting his fingers in my lower hole did felt good, '' she said in her mind creepily as she went to sleep.


    After a while, she still couldn''t sleep, so she started touching herself as she thought about Hikaru.


    ''Aaah, it won''t be long... until he claims me...''

 Chapter 30 - 28

    As expected, the after-effect of the dragon form took a toll on Hikaru''s body the very next morning. This time, however, it''s a little less mild than the last one. He don''t know why, but he thinks that it''s because he spent a little more than 2 minutes in that form, so the after-effects were a little bit mild.


    He felt like in just one day, this fever will go down soon.


    He has enough energy to cook Azumi some food and for himself and go to the training ground later. Since Kakashi is always late by three hours, he figured that he should just go there at 9 am, 1 hour before Kakashi shows up.


    After cooking their breakfast, he also cooked both for their lunch. A nice egg and bacons for breakfast and a fancy spaghetti for lunch.


    He decided not to use any weapons in that survival training because he knew he could kill Kakashi with it. And he doesn''t want that. Though, his mind is quite fatigued from his fight against Artorias, so he will probably not be able to control his strength properly.


    He prepared 2 bentos for the both of them after eating their breakfast, and that''s where he put the steaks, rice, and some side dish.


    "Hey, Hikaru, didn''t Kakashi-sensei told us not to eat?" Azumi asked.


    Hikaru looks at her as he wash their plates, and explained, "You''re right, he did told us that, but he did not order us not to eat. Think Azumi, if you go to a real mission without eating, you''ll die almost instantly."


    She cups her hands and said, "Oh, that''s why, " then she looks down, "You always need to explain things to me, I''m so stupid."


    Hikaru sighed and washed his hands and dried them before patting Azumi in the head.


    "Umu?" She looks at him cutely.


    "You''re not stupid, you''re bright, it''s just that you''re still inexperience. Remember, even the greatest and strongest shinobis started like you, a child, " he said with his eyes so soft that Azumi felt like she was laying in his body.


    "Un, you''re right! All of them, even the four Hokages, started just like me! If so, then I will be the greatest and strongest first female Hokage ever!" She''s all pumped up and she jumped a lot because of excitement.


    "Atta girl! Hahaha."


    As both of them prepared themselves, time passed without them noticing until it was 9 am and Hikaru used shunshin with her by his side to get to the traninig ground easily. Hikaru wore Chester''s outfit without his mask. He figured it would be cool to show up like this.


    (At The Third Training Ground)


    Sasuke and Sakura waited by a tree while their stomachs would rumble every now and then. It seems like they didn''t eat a single thing this morning, or, in Sakura''s case, did not eat DINNER and breakfast because she was on a "diet".


    And it seems like they have been waiting for Kakashi here since 7. Stupid, aren''t they?


    Hikaru suddenly arrived in front of them with Azumi holding his right hand. He looked around first before seeing both of them. He just waved his hand at them with a friendly smile before going to the statue near them to sit.


    Earlier, after packing their meals, Hikaru put them inside his bottomeless box. He can take them out anytime, so it was no big deal.


    For the rest of the time, he ignored both of his other teammates and just focused on Azumi. They talked a lot, mostly Azumi was the one speaking but he enjoyed this peaceful times. Not dying, and not fighting those damned monsters.


    Another hour passed before Kakashi finally showed up with an... alarm clock?


    Sakura saw this and schreeched, "Why are you so late, sensei?! And you had an alarm clock on you!"


    "Hmm, that is a really great question. You see, I saw superman flying in the skies and I thought maybe if I followed him I could get his autograph, so I searched for him for two hours with no luck, then when I finally saw him, it was nothing but a shinobi bird that had the same color as his suit! Can you believe that? Then a black cat walked in front of me, so I took the long way around and came here."


    It was so obvious that he was lying through his teeth, because he just arrived with a shunshin.


    "Liar!" Sakura accused.


    "Ma, ma, don''t be so excited after seeing me. I know I''m pretty popular around the village, but I don''t like underage girls, especially with the one that has no b.r.e.a.s.t to speak of."


    "Pervert! Pervert-sensei!"


    As Hikaru saw this, he couldn''t help but shake his head. He decided to end this and and said, "Sensei! Just the start the test!"


    "Fine, fine, just give me a sec. I''ll turn the timer on in this alarm clock, " he did some things in the alarm clock before putting it on top of a tree stump.


    He then took out two bells tied with a red string and said, "You see this two bells? These will decided whether you guys are ready to be a shinobi or not, I will conduct a test. The bell test. If anyone can take these away from me, then you will instantly become a genin under me, " a lie.


    Then Sakura pointed out, "But sensei, there are only two bells and there are four of us."


    Then, Kakashi''s tone changed to a darker one, "That''s right, only two will pass this test, and the losers will watch me eat these two bento boxes, " he took out two bentos, "in front of them. Hahaha."


    ''That''s why he told us not to eat! Bastard!'' Sasuke said in his thoughts.


    "And also, be sure to have the intent to kill me, and now..."


    All of them tensed up.


    "... the test has officially started!" He announced.


    The three of them disappeared in the forest but Hikaru stayed where he stood.

 Chapter 31 - 29: Corvian Claws

    In the training ground 3, you can see two individuals in the open area staring at each other. One was a child with the height of 151 cm, and the other is an a.d.u.l.t with a gravity defying white hair.


    "Hey Kakashi-sensei, I''ve been wondering whether you can fair against my shadow clones or not, shall we test it out?" Hikaru said with a smirk.


    "Hmm, maybe you should take this bells yourself instead of sending clones, " Kakashi said while pulling out his icha-icha book. He''s clearly not taking this seriously.


    "Then..." Hikaru slowly said.


    Suddenly, Kakashi felt a strong kick behind his back before he puffed into smoke and a log was in his place, broken to pieces by the kick that came from Hikaru''s clone.


    "...good luck, Kakashi-sensei, " Hikaru finished saying before he disappeared to find his other teammates while Kakashi deals with his clones.


    Kakashi used kawarimi to dodge that kick but he didn''t think that Hikaru would really use his clones to attack him. He has to say, they were really good at hiding. He couldn''t even sense them now as he hid in the shadows of the forest after using kawarimi.


    He has to be careful or else, he can really get his ass kick by a genin.


    As he waited there, he suddenly heard multiple shouts coming from behind him.


    "Katon: Goukakyuu no Jutsu!"


    "Suiton: Suiryuudan no Jutsu!"


    "Raiton: Raidan!"


    Three jutsus were instantly shot towards him.


    This took him by surprise but he still managed to use the kawarimi without any problem. But as soon as he appeared on a location after using kawarimi, he was immediately punch in the face.


    "Argh!"


    The punch hurt really bad and he knelt down before holding his face, but when he saw the clone of Hikaru ready to kill him with a kunai, he dodged it but barely.


    ''This kid is really trying to kill me! And how many clones did he make?!'' Kakashi thought cautiously as he felt the danger of his situation.


    Three more clones came out of the forest, and they were ready to kill him. Their eyes were watching him closely, he felt like if he makes a sudden move, he will die.


    ''This feeling... is like when I was back in the third ninja war!'' He felt ridiculous at thinking this but this was exactly how he felt back then. Enemies closing in on him like predators but that time, he was the predator and they were the prey. But now...


    It seems like, he is the prey this time.


    Meanwhile with the real Hikaru...


    Hikaru used the chakra signature of his teammates to find them, and found them quite easily. Back when he fought those enemies that turned invisible in the Dark Souls System, he had a really hard time with that. Especially when he tried fighting Priscilla. Even though she was weaker than Artorias, nonetheless, he was still a weakling at that time. That was like 1 year ago. Though, her beauty really surpasses every female around the village, she is really suited to be the daughter of a goddess.


    As he ran through the forest, he first jumped behind Azumi, scaring her in the process.


    "Kyaa! Hikaru-kun no baka!" She pouted cutely.


    "Sorry, Azumi, I didn''t mean that. I''m just here to tell you my plan on how to pass this test, " Hikaru explained.


    So, he told her the plan.


    The plan is very simple, just get both Sakura and Sasuke into working together with them and pass the test by working together. Simple, right? Wrong. When they talked to the both of them, all they said was "Get lost!".


    Of this, Azumi was furious but Hikaru was calm because he knew that this would heppen. Either way, he is going to pass with Azumi, and in the end, those two are simply worthless. Sure, Sasuke might be Indra''s reincarnation, but both of them were assholes in the series. Especially Sasuke, he''s worst when he was a teenager. Just because your clan got slaughtered by your older brother in just one night, doesn''t mean you can be emo and edgy for the rest of your life. In the series, only because of Naruto that he was able to change, but in this timeline, he will make sure that Azumi will never have any friendly relationship with him. Though, if Azumi really wants to be a friend of him, which is a pretty low chance that that will never happen, then he doesn''t have the right to interfere with her.


    In the end, I can kill him very easily with my pinky.


    He''s that weak. And Sakura? She can be quickly forgotten, If not for her relationship with Naruto, Tsunade might''ve never taken her as her disciple. And she has a pitifully weak chakra signal, it''s like she only have a civilian''s chakra level. He was barely able to find her.


    Since it was no good trying to recruit them, then he and Azumi will have to team up fighting Kakashi. Maybe he''ll pass them, who knows?


    As both Hikaru and Azumi appeared in the empty spot of the forest, they saw Kakashi covered in cuts all around his body and he seems quite tired.


    "Ne, Kakash-sensei, are you okay? You seem to be pretty beat up, so why don''t you just hand over the bells to us?" Azumi told to Kakashi.


    "As a Jounin, I can''t do that. Try and take it, " he tried gasping for breath, "maybe then will you be able to be my cute little students, " Kakashi seems to be a little out of breath and his chakra is quite low.


    "Hm, Azumi, go get him. It''s your turn, consider this as my survival training, " Hikaru said to Azumi with a strict voice, unfitting his normal brotherly voice.


    Azumi knew what she has to do when he has this strict voice, and that is to follow every order he has. Back when she was an academy student, her Hikaru-kun started training her when both of them were ten. He said that he doesn''t have any form of fighting skills, but he will teach her the fighting style of the "Corvian Knights". She doesn''t know what those were, but when he showed how that fighting style goes, she was baffled. The speed was incredible, every move he did cut something whether they be plants or trees.


    He also said that once she finishes his training with that fighting style, he will teach her a new one. Of course she was excited at the prospect of that. She wonders if he knows everything because of all he told her.


    For Hikaru, well, at that time, he just finished fighting two Corvian Knights both at the same time and managed to defeat them due to pure sheer luck. When he decided to train Azumi, he decided that fighting style will suit her well. She''s a brawler after all. But the only thing she lacks is the weapon of the Corvian Knights because honestly, she has completed every move of the Corvian knights. Some were even improvised and he didn''t even show her that style that well when he was training her because he just based it off on his memories of his fight with them.


    "I understand, Hikaru-kun, " she said as she walks towards Kakashi with the intent to take the bells.


    But as she walked away, Hikaru suddenly said, "Azumi, take these two things first before you fight him." He then gave her two Corvian Claws upgraded to {Sharp+10}. He didn''t gave it to her when she was training because she could get hurt, now a real fight with Kakashi should be able to bring her full potential.


    "Is this...?"


    "Yes, these two are yours now. Don''t lose them or I''ll be very mad, got it?" Of course he wouldn''t get mad at her, it''s just a warning because it''s such a pain to upgrade equipment.


    "Yes!" Azumi couldn''t help but be excited. Her Hikaru-kun had finally gave her a weapon! She will treasure this for the rest of her life!


    She turned around to face Kakashi as she puts on the two Corvian Claws in each hand.


    Azumi might be small compared to Kakashi right now but she is very dangerous when she wields those weapons. As I said before, she has completely mastered the fighting style of the Corvian Knights, at least the one who has two claws not the one who throws sharp feathers everywhere. Her current strength right now could be around the level of a High-Chuunin. That is if she uses the jutsus Hikaru taught her but that would be almost impossible because she cannot form any hand signs right now as the Corvian Claws are blocking her hands.


    As she stared at Kakashi with a dangerous intent, she moved. Within a second, she was already in front of her. Kakashi couldn''t see her at all!


    She throws her back along with her arms to charge up before she shot her claws to dug out Kakashi''s stomach. He fortunately dodged her at the last seconds.


    But she wasn''t finish yet! Rush attacks after rush attacks viciously left him cornered. The fighting style of Corvian Knights may not have grace but its vicious speed attacks and versatile movements makes it up for it.


    All of the rush attacks Azumi made left Kakashi in a defensive position. He was already weakened from his fight against Hikaru''s clones but this girl is as equally dangerous as those clones, if not, more!


    He could literally lose his life in this fight!


    But fortunately for him, Azumi doesn''t aim for his life, and instead... for the bells.


    Kakashi wanted to use his Sharingan already but this girl left him no chance to do that, he cursed himself for being so prideful. he could''ve used his sharingan from the very beginning if only he wasn''t so prideful. Now look at him, getting his ass handed to him by a girl!


    As Hikaru observes the fight the more he felt proud about Azumi.


    "I''ve truly trained her well, " he wipes a tear, "She can certainly become a great Hokage with my training! Later, I''m gonna teach her how to fight with a spear!"


    Azumi has truly grown in just a blink of an eye.


    He decided to stop the battle when he saw Azumi standing on top of Kakashi''s shoulders. But the bells were already missing from his waist and it was obvious that she just got too excited for her first real fight.


    "Azumi, stop. You''re going to kill him at this state, and besides, you already have the bells, don''t you?" Hikaru said to Azumi.


    "Ehehehe, " she laughed sheepishly before jumping down Kakashi''s shoulders.


    She landed in front of Hikaru and looks at him cutely before asking, "Did I do good, Hikaru-kun?"


    "Of course, of course, you were the best!" Hikaru rubs Azumi''s head as she smiled cutely because of the compliment she got from her Hikaru-kun.


    As the two ignored the nearly dead Kakashi, Sasuke was gritting his teeth because of his jealousy towards those two''s strength.


    "How? How!? How!!?? I''m Uchiha Sasuke! A genius among geniuses, but why are those two so powerful?! That power, I want it! My revenge shall be completed if only I have that kind of power!"


    Hikaru pokes the nearly dead Kakashi with a stick while saying, "Oi, Sensei, are you awake? Poke poke poke."


    Kakashi slowly opened his eye and saw the bright sky and thought, ''Am I dead? Did I die while fighting that little monster?'' For the first in his life, he felt bliss. But that was disturbed when he felt someone poking something hard in his face.


    "You alive, sensei? Poke poke poke, " Hikaru said lazily.


    When he heard that voice, he knew that he was not in heaven, he was in hell.


    "I''m alive, godamnit! Stop poking that thing at my handsome face!" Kakashi rose up and took the stick from Hikaru''s hand and broke it before throwing it away in the grass.

 Chapter 32 - 30

    Kakashi stood in front of them as Sasuke and Sakura were tied in two different trees. He looked sternly at the four of them and said, "Hikaru and Azumi performed well, and if I say so myself, they have already surpassed the Genin level. But you two, Sasuke, Saskura, all you two did was watch! Watch as your teammates fights a Jounin by themselves!"


    Sasuke gritted his teeth but he couldn''t do anything because he was tied tightly to a tree by a rope. Sakura felt tears coming out of her eyes because she knew that she would separated from her Sasuke-kun if their sensei decided not to pass them.


    Hikaru could not care less if those two doesn''t pass. He just sat under a tree while listening to Kakashi as he closed his eyes. Azumi, on the other hand, just stayed by her Hikaru-kun''s side while holding the Corvian Claws he gave her closely, as if she was afraid that someone would steal it.


    He continued, "Naturally, I''m very disappointed in you all, " at this, Hikaru opened one of his eyes, "You four did not get the meaning of this test, yes, you too Hikaru. I''ll give you all one more chance, and if you still fail this, then good luck spending another year in the academy."


    He gave them two bento boxes, one for Azumi and one for him. Kakashi then said that if any of them tries to give Sasuke, or Sakura, food, then he will automatically have to fail them.


    He left after giving the bentos and instructions.


    Hikaru wanted to end all of this, because honestly, he''s just wasting his time. He knew how this goes on, give them food and Kakashi will appear menacingly before passing them.


    So, while Azumi ate the bento excitedly, he decided to give his to Sakura. it doesn''t have any particular reason, it''s just that she''s the one closest to him.


    He extended his arm that held the bento towards Sakura and said, "Here, eat this, I''m not hungry."


    "But Kakashi-sensei told you guys not to gives us food." Even though she said that, she still felt her stomach grumbling because she hasn''t eaten since yesterday evening.


    "So what? Just take it!" He said.


    "But my arms, i can''t use them, " she said because her arms are tied in the tree.


    Hikaru raised an eyebrow and said, "Is that so? Then I can feed it to you."


    As soon as he said that, Azumi heard it. Her eyes suddenly turned towards Sakura. She glared at her with utmost hate and Sakura felt a chill crawling behind her back. She felt that if she accepts Hikaru''s offer, she will die. But she''s too hungry to think of that and just accepted the offer.


    "F-fine, but don''t think you can charm me away from Sasuke-kun!" She said bashfully.


    "I have no intention of doing that." He then stood up before walking towards Sakura as he opened the bento. It was full of different kind of foods.


    He took out a plastic spoon from his pockets (Note: Don''t ask) and scooped some rice from his bento.


    "Open your mouth, say aah, " he said.


    She opened her mouth but as soon as she did that, she felt Hikaru harshly shoving the food deep down to her throat.


    "Aggh, guugh, uggh!" She tried complaining but Hikaru kept shoving food down to her throat via his spoon. She choked on the food but Hikaru didn''t stopped.


    ''This is really fun, I first thought of just feeding her but this is really fun.'' The sadist thought sadistically.


    Flurry after flurry of his hands moving from his bento to Sakura''s mouth as his was curled up into a smile. As Sasuke watches this, he heaved a sigh of relief.


    ''Good thing that wasn''t me.'' He slightly felt better at being just tied to a rope than that.


    But he didn''t notice a shadow moving a spoon too towards his mouth, and when he notices it, it would already be too late.


    Azumi decided to copy Hikaru because she thought that it was fun, I mean, Sakura seems to be enjoying it, she felt a little a little jealous but she can understand that Hikaru seems to be having fun.


    That day, all the shinobis in the area was sure that they heard two people choking harshly and two demons laughing at their suffering.


    Meanwhile, with Kakashi. As he continued to watch them, he couldn''t help but winced.


    "I think it''s time to step out, I''m pretty sure Broody-kun and Pinky-chan is already dying over there. But it''s kinda hilarious at the same time."


    Since they were feeding them, and technically, they are, he decided to pass the four of them and become a real team.


    When he arrived there, he saw Sasuke and Sakura nearly out of breath. He felt a little sorry for them, so he decided to stop both Hikaru and Azumi. After stopping them, he first tried scaring them before revealing that they had passed his test... technically.


    Hikaru and Azumi seems to be disappointed though.


    After passing them, he told them to go home and rest because tomorrow, they will be doing a lot of D-Rank Missions. Basically, just child chores.


    (Scene Break)


    Hikaru and Azumi returned home as soon as Kakashi passed them. Hikaru didn''t care about being a Genin or being a higher authority in the village. He just cares about being strong and taking good care of Azumi. That why he decided to be a Genin, not because he was interested, but because Azumi will be a Genin too.


    Even though he was is stronger than anyone, he still knew that his arrival here caused a butterfly effect. Not many things are noticeable, but they are there. But he did found out something big after spending three years here in this world, he don''t know whether it''s because of his arrival or not, but they exist here.


    Yokai exists in this world.

 Chapter 33 - Short Chap; 31: The First and Second

    He did not see them at first but the more he spent his time in this world, the more he felt their presence. But he cannot see them until he bought a ring in the system, which is definitely not from Dark Souls. It''s called, The Ring Of The Unseen.


    With this ring, he was able to see them, hear them, touch them, and feel them.


    Many of them said that they recognize him, or in other words, his presence to them. They said that since primordial time, two beings with the exact aura as him showed up here. They were strong. With one hand, they could move mountains, split the raging oceans, and destroy entire landscapes in just a few moments.


    Undeniably, he thought, that these were his predecessors. The First and Second. That''s what he started calling them. And he''s the Third.


    Of course, he was not surprised by this. The Disembodied Voice told him about them. They were the wielders of the Dark Souls System before him. But, he don''t why, somehow, the Dark Souls System was separated from them. Now, they live their lives in immortality. Two Neverlasting Humans, wandering the multiverse by themselves.


    The Elder Yokais never showed themselves in front of him because of how powerful they are and it might disturb the people in the village, but instead, they are just sending Lower Ones to communicate with him.


    With their help, he was able to find the seal. The Seal Of The Olden God, Chaortos. It was not hard to find, for them, since they have already known where it was due to the dark raging energy that it released from time to time. Only a Yokai can sense it for humans were never meant to be sensitive towards a God''s energy.


    He had found the seal but the only thing troubling him is how weak he is. That Olden God is obviously more powerful than him and fighting her in his current state can lead to him dying permanently. And he does now want that.


    Oh right, even though that Disembodied Voice told him that "They have come out of their respective seals", he meant it like in the future. They HAVE come out of their seals but in the future that is. This might be a little confusing, so let me explain.


    Everytime he goes to a world, he will always send him 100 years in the past before the Olden God could break their selves out of their seals. But in this time, even though they haven''t gotten out, their seals are still incredibly weakened. The seals are supposed to seal them for billions of years each time, and the only way to fix the seal is to let them out before sealing them again. Hikaru doesn''t know how it works, but it was what he said.


    But they won''t go out and come inside their seals without a fight, do they?


    That''s why he needed to grow stronger but he still have a lot of time, another three years will surely suffice.


    But to end this cycle of sealing them, he needs to kill them. And the only way to do that is to take or destroy their God Souls. As long as they have their God Souls, they are Immortals. Even if he destroys their physical bodies, their God Souls will still be alive and will wander the infinite worlds before reincarnating to a body. And that will be really hard, considering there are infinite universes out there.


    That''s why the other two before him have never taken that risk.


    ________________________________________________________________________________________


    After fighting five Darkwraiths at the same time, Hikaru decided to return to the real world. They were easier than the Black Knights but their strength cannot be underestimated. He almost lost an arm to them.


    As he was waking up, he suddenly felt someone kissing him while ravaging the insides of his mouth with their tongue.


    As he opened his eyes, a blurry image of Azumi slowly unveiled itself in front of his eyes. Her normal beautiful sky blue eyes were hollow, only pure obsession can be seen. Her head continued to move as she ravages his mouth with hers. He felt her hands rub his body up and down. Slowly, she rubbed his lower part with hers. And, for some reason, she was n.a.k.e.d.


    She was too busy violating him, to notice that her object of obsession was already awake.


    Hikaru knew he had to stop this but, for him, it felt so good.


    He gathered up his courage before he held her arms and asks calmly, "What are you doing, Azumi?"


    She froze as she heard his voice.

 Chapter 34 - 32: "I Love You" she said. "I Love You, Too, " he replied.

    She knew what she is doing is wrong but it just felt so good. She''s scared to admit what she is doing to her beloved Hikaru-kun for the fear that he might reject her forever. And if that ever happens...


    ...she might lose her mind.


    But now, he''s staring at her full n.a.k.e.d body with his beautiful black eyes with that red tint always so present.


    "H-Hikaru-kun? Y-you were awake?" She asked while stammering due to the shock.


    "No, I just woke up. But that''s not important. Why were you doing that?" He said that last part sternly.


    "I-" She couldn''t speak a single word.


    "You know Azumi, we''re just children. 12 years old! Have you ever thought of that? We- no, you are not supposed to be doing something like that." He said to Azumi even though he''s supposed to be 19 this year, at least in his mental state.


    She couldn''t refute everything he said but she decided to gather the courage to say this and this only, "But we are Shinobis now! O-old enough to kill, old enough to have s.e.x! So please, don''t hate me now that you have seen this part of me!" She shouted with her emotions as much as possible.


    The room was dark, only the light from the window that comes from the moon can get through. Inside it, you can see Azumi on top of Hikaru, staring at his eyes as he stared back into her eyes full of emotions.


    Hikaru smiled charmingly as he raised his right hand to caress her face. She widened her eyes in surprise.


    "I would never hate you, for you''re the one I love, and I will always keep it that away." He then frowned, "It''s just that, we are still too young and if anyone finds out that you have been doing this to me, I don''t know what will happen to you. I love you and that will never change, just give it time."


    Suddenly, Azumi''s eyes were covered by her bangs before she stood on her knees on top of the bed and she fully revealed everything. Her long blonde hair, her B-cup b.r.e.a.s.t, her wet p.u.s.s.y, her curves, before she smiled and said, "Hikaru-kun, if you truly love me, then take me, claim me, take my everything, it''s all yours." Even though her body is small but the maturity of it cannot be hidden.


    She grabs her hand and pulled it towards her right b.r.e.a.s.t before his hand fully enveloped her b.r.e.a.s.t.


    As he felt his hand touched her b.r.e.a.s.t, he couldn''t help but groped it. She m.o.a.ned loudly, obviously turned on.


    "Yes~, Hikaru-kun~, that''s it! Grope it, this is yours, all yours."


    Hikaru couldn''t help it anymore. Without any hesitations, he pushed her on the bed before sitting on top of her.


    He stared at her gorgeous face for a moment before kissing her wildly in the mouth. He dragged his kiss to her neck, to her b.r.e.a.s.t, to her beautiful curved body, before he reached her lower mouth. As he kissed it, she m.o.a.ned loudly as she held his head, trying to push it deeper.


    "Aaah~, Hikayu-kyun~!" She m.o.a.ned loudly as she came in his face.


    They readied both of themselves before Hikaru plunged his Giant Halberd into her Gaping Dragon.


    That night, two lovers made love as they expressed everything they had for each other without holding back.


    For five hours, they both made out without resting and the most frightening thing is that both of them seems like they are not running out of stamina any time soon.


    It''s now 6:30 am and they are still not finish. Azumi seems to be giving out but Hikaru continued going on, not even stopping once. Before long, she passed out at 8 o''clock am. Hikaru was still not tired because he is an undead.


    As he put her face near his, he caressed it lovingly and tenderly. Even though he is quite guilty for taking her v.i.r.g.i.nity, he decided that from now on, Azumi is his and he is hers. They are lovers, and nothing is ever going to change that.


    Since Azumi is still asleep and undoubtedly still tired, he decided to use his clones to go to where the team 7 is meeting. He disguised one of his clones as Azumi for some very obvious reasons.


    As he stayed awake laying next Azumi as she used his arm as her pillow, he thought about what they both did today. If this was back on earth, both of them will be taken apart from each other because of the things they did. But here, power means everything. It may not be that obvious, but if you take a little closer to this world, as long as you''re very powerful, whether by influence, money, strength, you can take everything. Obviously, right now, only a few can take down Hikaru on their own, and most of them are dead. The only thing he felt is a threat is the Akatsuki.


    He frowned at this thought.


    The Akatsuki is still a very powerful foe and one day, he will have to face them for Azumi''s sake. For Azumi he will do anything to protect her. He don''t know if he can beat them all at once, so he will need to be cautious. Maybe once his stats reaches the number of 80, maybe then will he have the chance to beat them. Maybe by one by one but that will be hard because they move around a lot.


    He will have to use his connections to the Yokai, maybe they have some Intel on them.


    For now, he will enjoy his time with Azumi.


    (A Few Days Later)


    Team 7 stood in front of Hiruzen as they had just completed a D-Rank mission. Catching Tora.


    Of course, Hikaru easily caught it but not before letting his teammates and his lover get a taste of hell.


    ''I think Azumi almost killed it with her Corvian Claws, and I think this cat is really traumatize at this point, '' He thought as he looked at the pale, shivering orange cat in his arms.


    Since becoming a Genin, Azumi has changed her clothes. Now, she wears a black and orange jumpsuit with her stomach exposed a little. (Basically just female Naruto clothing but from shippuden). She has her forehead protector tied on her head.


    The other hadn''t changed that much, just the same.


    As Madam Shinji takes her cat with her, Azumi and the rest couldn''t help but sneer at the suffering of the orange cat.


    Hiruzen on the other hand have really gotten older. He still wears his Hokage robe but you can see in his face that he really need a replacement to take the mantle of Hokage.


    Hikaru looks at the Hokage and said, "Hokage-dono, we really need a higher tier mission. This chores are really getting to me, and why are your villagers so entitled to everything? They asked us to clear a lawn, take care of their baby, or like that one time when Sasuke over there had to wipe an old man''s filthy ass." Hikaru, Azumi, and Kakashi couldn''t help but snicker at that last part.


    "Don''t bring that up, Hikaru. I''m still trying to forget that." Sasuke said, annoyed at Hikaru. He is still trying to get over the fact that the great Uchiha Sasuke was forced to wipe an old man''s ass. By forced, he meant Hikaru threatening to cut off his d.i.c.k if did not do that. Of course, he had to do that or else he can kiss reviving the Uchiha Clan goodbye.


    Hiruzen made a gesture at Hikaru saying to him that he needs to get closer. When he got closed to the Hokage desk, Hiruzen whispered to him, "Did he really do that?"


    In which he replied, "A hundred percent Yes."


    Hiruzen couldn''t help but snicker too at the misery of the poor boy.


    "Oi, what''s so funny?" Sasuke asked.


    They ignored him.


    Hiruzen then stated, "Since Team 7 has accomplished the enough requirement to go to the next level, I permit Team 7 to take a C-Class mission. Tazuna-san, please come in."


    Soon, an old man holding a bottle of alcohol walks in the Hokage''s office.


    :Your mission here is to protect the body builder, which is Tazuna-san over there, until you guys reach the bridge."


    Then, as Tazuna stared at the Genins who is going to protect him, he said, "Are you people sure that these brats can protect me? I mean that pink haired girl can certainly use a muscle."


    "Who the hell do you think you are?!" Sakura screeched as she pretended to roll up her imaginary sleeves to punch the drunk old man.


    "Ma, ma, don''t go killing our client the same time we received the mission. Anyway, Tazuna-san, you don''t have to worry because all these "children" before you can certainly pack a punch. And besides, if everything goes wrong, I''m a jounin, so you can trust me." Kakashi stopped Sakura before she could do anything that could kill the bridge builder.


    Azumi, too, seems to be angry but Hikaru held her back from doing anything stupid, to which she obliged.

 Chapter 35 - 33: One HIT!

    Team 7 and Tazuna stood in front of the gate of Konoha while waiting for Kakashi to arrive.


    Hikaru did not wear his Chester Set, this time, he chose to wear the Black Hand Set. A wide brimmed hat sits atop his head along with its thin hood. A black leather armor covered with a black cape was donned by Hikaru as the cape fluttered in the wind. He wears leather gloves on his hand and whenever he moves, it made no sound. And finally, a thick leather pants, which is very well crafted, was donned on his lower body. On his waist was his two Black Katanas. Overall, if a stranger were to pass by, they wouldn''t notice him at all even though it''s broad daylight.


    Anyone who has gone to the Academy with Hikaru would not be surprised of his outfit because they have already seen a fair amount of Armors in their time with him, but Tazuna is a complete stranger to Hikaru''s weird habits.


    Even so, he ignored it for their job was just to protect him and nothing. Yet, he sometimes would lose sight of Hikaru and he would find him right beside him, which creep him out a little.


    Meanwhile, Azumi stayed close to Hikaru while hugging his arm lovingly. Hikaru could not refuse her for she is already his girlfriend. He just shook his head at her silliness.


    As they waited for Kakashi to show up, they couldn''t help but get agitated. It''s been two hours and he has still yet to show even a shadow of his.


    Finally, Hikaru had enough. He created a single shadow clone and ordered, "Go to his house and burn every Icha-Icha book you see, every single one, down to the last one, understand?"


    The clone nods before disappearing.


    As he saw his clone disappear, Hikaru couldn''t help but smirk evilly. This time, he will surely respect other people''s time.


    Sasuke, Sakura, and Tazuna moved away as quickly as they could for that smile will certainly do something again.


    Not even 5 minutes later, he saw Kakashi dashing towards him with his eyes full of rage. As soon as he reached Hikaru, Kakashi grabbed his shoulders before shaking him as he spouted nonsense.


    "I cannot believe that you just burned your sensei''s favorite books! How could you even burn them?! They were pure treasures! And the golden edition that Jiraiya-sama signed himself, you burned it, too!"


    Hikaru raised an eyebrow at him before he slapped his hands away from him and dusted himself as he said, "First off, I did not burn your perverted books, my clone did, and secondly, it''s your fault for being late. You have wasted enough time, you''re our sensei, and plus, a Jounin, so you need stop visiting the graves of your deceased friends and be responsible for once. You have something new, so don''t waste it like what you did to Rin." Every word that came out of his was filled with harshness.


    Kakashi stood there, dumbfounded. He couldn''t believe that his student would really say that. And from his words, he seem to know about what he did to Rin.


    "You... how did you know that?" He uttered out.


    "Who knows." He smiled at Kakashi before turning around.


    "Let''s go, " Hikaru said as he walked while the others followed along.


    Meanwhile, with Kakashi, as he narrowed his eyes on Hikaru, he muttered, "Just who are you... Hikaru Hiroaki?"


    The rest just kept quiet for they were not sure how to react to this. They just walked away as they went in the direction of the land of waves.


    (40 Minutes Later On The Road)


    As they continued their travel towards the Land Of Waves, Hikaru couldn''t help but notice the puddle on the ground, even though it hasn''t rained for a few weeks.


    ''From their chakra levels, they seem to be around Chuunin level. Hmph, such a worthless genjutsu like that won''t trick me. But, '' He looked around his teammates and noticed that only Kakashi seems to have noticed the genjutsu in that puddle, ''I should have really trained Azumi in sensing genjutsu. Sasuke and Sakura, too, haven''t noticed it. At this rate, they would die in the real shinobi world before they could even make their first kill.''


    Hikaru shook his head in disappointed as they passed by the "puddle". But as he thought about it, he couldn''t help but think of something. If he''s successful, maybe this would help in Azumi''s growth. But it will be too harsh to do this to her, but he can''t keep babying her any longer. Hmm, what to do? Should I do it, or not?


    But suddenly, without any warnings, the two chuunin level opponents came out of their hiding spots and aimed for Hikaru, since he was the first one in their field of visions. Two shuriken-styled chains rushed forward towards Hikaru in an amazing speed. But, as if he had an eye behind his head, Hikaru pulled the Lightning Black Katana out from its sheath and with a single unseen slice, the shuriken chains were cut into pieces.


    By the time the two demon brothers, Gozu and Meizu, reacted, their right and left hands were already sliced off their bodies and since their mental gauntlets were attached to their right(Gozu) and left(Meizu) arms, it fell off along with it.


    "AAAHH! My arm, my arm!" Meizu cried out as blood spurted out.


    "Retreat! Meizu, retreat!" Gozu immediately made the decision to retreat since it can already be seen that they were no match for this kid in front of them.


    But they were not let off by Hikaru, who suddenly appeared behind them with his dark cold eyes before their consciousness faded away as they felt a hand chopping their napes. They fell to the ground but not before Hikaru kicks them towards in front of his team.


    Sasuke and Sakura couldn''t believe his eyes, two chuunins down in a single hit! They were not stupid, they have seen those two in the wanted pictures before, The Oni Kyoudai! They were famed for their metal gauntlets and their splendid coordinating attacks. But to see them down in one hit, unbelievable!


    "Sensei, get the ropes, we''ll get information from them. And you, Tazuna-san, we''ll talk later after they have awoken." Hikaru said with his voice transformed into something akin to ice.

 Chapter 36 - 34: The Six Yokai Lords

    In a large ancient hall, you can see 6 thrones with varying sizes. On those thrones sat the 6 primordial lords of Yokai. Each throne had names engraved on them, symbolizing the lord who sat on it.


    Serpentine, the legendary white serpent that once massacred an entire empire of humans by herself many millenniums ago. On her throne, she sat gracefully while in her humanoid form. She has white silky hair, two dots in the ends of her two beautiful red eyes, a very beautiful face, and a voluptuous body that could topple entire empires. She wears a white ancient Haori, befitting her status.


    "Hm, how long has it been since we last met up like this?" She said with her sweet enchanting voice.


    "I believe it has been three thousand years, Serpentine-san." A very childish voice replied to her question.


    The Dragon Lord, Suisei. He has a very child-like appearance, not what you would expect from a Lord but don''t be fooled. He may look like a child, but he is the Dragon Lord who rules over the aquatic Yokais. In his humanoid form, he looks like a delicate child with a long light blue hair that shines even in the dark. He has sea blue eyes that seems to shine a glint every now often. His clothes consist of a dark pants and a sleeveless blue jacket.


    "Indeed, three thousand years had passed since us Lords have met with each other. Though, we would be forgiven for the sudden responsibility that was passed onto us by our late predecessors." This time, a very seductive voice sounded.


    Konton, The Nine-Tailed Kitsune, Ruler of the Kitsune Yokais. Don''t get her confused with the Kyuubi who attacked Konoha 12 years ago. She is a real entity, unlike the mindless Kyuubi who was constructed entirely by chakra. Like Serpentine, she has a very beautiful face, devoid of any imperfections. And her body is very voluptuous. Her b.r.e.a.s.t is larger than Tsunade''s and her curves are really gorgeous. With her beauty alone, defeating men will no longer be a problem. She wears a very revealing orange yukata. Her orange hair really fits along with her amber eyes. Nine fluffy tails continued to wave behind her as her fox ears twitched from time to time.


    "Hmm, I really can''t believe that a chosen immortal would appear again. But even though this one is still young, his strength and skills are nearly close to you young ones." A deep, old, and wizened voice said.


    Tengoku, an old monster that has existed since billion of years ago. No one truly knows what his true form is, but what they truly knows is that he can slaughter every Yokai in this land if he wanted to. They were just thankful that he is just a kind-hearted old man. He never seeks trouble to other people and neither do they for the fear that he will wipe out their existence. It is no question that he is the strongest out of all of them, that''s why they call him Old Monster. In his humanoid form, his appearance is that of a white haired old man wearing a white robe.


    "Seems interesting, maybe I''ll pay that young immortal a visit soon. Hehehe." A young arrogant voice said.


    The Heavenly Werewolf Lord, Shiro. He is the youngest out of all of them, he has just recently taken the mantle of the previous Werewolf Lord, his father. Since he was pampered when he was a child, he became very arrogant due to him being the son of the Werewolf Lord. Though, that can be forgiven for he is still young. He wears a white jacket with furs in the neckline and a blue pants. In his humanoid form, he has a very spiky white hair and deep blue eyes along with the markings in his face.


    "Shiro, don''t be hasty. I hear that the young immortal is very strong. He seems to wield two very powerful blades and it seems like that those blades has been enchanted with divine lightning and chaos flame." A female voice said, worried.


    This is Kuroi, the Lord Of Tengu. The Tengu and The Werewolf Clan has been very close since their beginnings. Kuroi is someone respected for her strategic mind, and she has been friends with Shiro''s father since they were children. She looks out for Shiro for he might try and do something stupid, like offending the Old Monster. That would surely bring great catastrophe to his Werewolf Clan. But she has only seen him being reckless and nothing more. In her humanoid form, she has a pitch black hair and black eyes. She is beautiful but not at the level of Konton and Serpentine. She is wearing a short black yukata with flowers in the design.


    "Hmph, you can''t tell me what to do, Aunt Kuroi. I''m already 2 century years old." Shiro said while crossing his arms and looking away.


    "You''re still a child in our eyes, everybody in this room has lived for at least fifty-thousand years, you are simply too young. What was your father thinking when he gave you that position? Sigh." She sighed in disappointment as she shook her head.


    "Hahahaha, maybe Young Shiro is right. We still haven''t seen the chosen immortal in person, maybe he can pay him a visit and tell him our message to him. Isn''t that right, Young Shiro?" Tengoku said while laughing.


    Shiro nodded his head but did not dare to look nor speak to the Old Monster for he, too, is very scared of him.


    "See? Young Shiro, if you can deliver our message to the chosen immortal, I''ll give your Werewolf Clan a gift." Tengoku said.


    At this, Shiro''s eyes shined.


    "...Really?" He managed to asked.


    "Of course, now go. We a.d.u.l.ts have something to speak about." Tengoku then gave him a letter. Inside that letter is the message meant for Hikaru.


    "I won''t fail you, Lord Tengoku." Shiro then suddenly disappeared from his throne, to look for the chosen immortal.


    "Now, since the youngling is gone, let''s talk about the previous words of him." Old Monster said with his mouth, slowly rising.


    The faces of the lords grew serious.


    (With Hikaru)


    Gozu and Meizu finally woke up and the moment they did, they started screaming because their arms was still sliced off and Hikaru only tied a rope around it to stop the bleeding.


    Sakura, Sasuke, and Azumi couldn''t help but flinch at their screams of suffering.


    "Now, tell us what you all know or I will pull out your nails, slowly and painfully, " Hikaru said while pulling out one of their nails to prove his point.


    "AAAH!!! STOP! PLEASE STOP!" Gozu screamed as Hikaru slowly pulled his thumb''s nail slowly.


    Kakashi watched this with no visible reaction on his face but inside, he was feeling a little bit numb. But his situation was good compared to the other four.


    Sakura couldn''t help but puke at the scene in front of her. while Sasuke only seemed a little bit green. Azumi seems unfazed.


    Hikaru''s continued his torture for half an hour before they spoke about everything. After learning all the information they had, he killed the demon brothers... brutally. Meizu got his spine pulled out by Hikaru and he died almost instantly. Gozu, on the other hand, suffered a much, much worse execution than Meizu. Hikaru slowly stabbed every part of his last remaining limbs and his blood curdling screams terrified his teammates. Kakashi, at some point, just directly killed Gozu, so that his suffering would end.


    Now, what was Hikaru''s goal in this? That was to show his fellow Genins the cruel reality of this world. They were pampered since they were children, and it was now time for them to grow up. They decided to be ninjas, then they gotta own up to it. The field of shinobis is not a playground but a cruel battlefield filled with countless corpses.


    ''Is this really the world Itachi stepped on? And Hikaru, how powerful are you really?'' Sasuke thought inside his terrified mind.


    ''Aaahh! I don''t want to be a ninja anymore! I don''t want to die like that!'' Sakura cried inside her mind.


    ''Hikaru-kun, I know that you wanted to show me this for a reason. Indeed, this world is much, much more terrifying than I thought. But Is this really what happens to rouge ninjas like them? Maybe one day, when I become the Hokage, I can bring peace to this world. It may seem like a far fetched dream for me, but it''s worth to give it a try, ain''t it?'' Azumi thought inside her mind as she stared at the bloodied scene in front of her. For some reason, she didn''t get scared of Hikaru.


    "Hikaru, I understand." Kakashi said to Hikaru as he turned his back on the scene in front of him.

 Chapter 37 - 36: Believe It!

    After Hikaru killed the demon brothers, Kakashi decided to ask some question from Tazuna about the one who was after his head. He lied at first but since the evidence was so clear, he eventually gave in and told everything what was happening in the Land Of Waves.


    He said that there was a man named Gato, who, after setting foot on the Land Of Waves, decided to build a shipping company. Even though he was a incredibly rich, Gato wanted more and decided to built illegal smugglings, illegal brothels, human trafficking, and drug trafficking businesses. Soon, he became a billionaire who was known throughout the land. But, under his feet, was the suffering citizens of the Land Of Wave. And all the citizens could ever do was grovel themselves in front of this cruel man and obliged to his every decisions.


    But there was hope.


    If Tazuna ever manage to build the bridge that would connect them to the mainland, new businesses would again bloom in the Land Of Wave! But Gato did not want this and thus offered a huge amount of money just for him to stop making the bridge, but Tazuna refused and said that he will not take this money just for him to leave his friends and family behind. Gato left along with his bodyguards, but strangely, he was quiet.


    As he explained all of this, Tazuna couldn''t stop himself from crying. He begged them that if they successfully protect him until he finishes the bridge, then he would forever be grateful to them.


    Kakashi wanted to reject it and just go back to the village to report this to the Hokage but suddenly, Hikaru said that they will do it. Kakashi was stunned and told him that reporting this to the Hokage is the best option possible.


    Hikaru only said one thing to him while he looked at him coldly, "If we ever return and report this to the Hokage, then tell me, how long do you think we can make it in time just before Tazuna is killed?"


    He couldn''t refute that, two chuunin ninjas already appeared, then what if a jounin appears? He will surely die, and he knew that Gato is extremely wealthy, it would only be a matter of time before an S-Rank nin appears. In short, this would be a disaster for the Land Of Waves.


    But then, Hikaru said, "Though, it would only be right for Hokage-dono to know what is happening in the Land Of Waves, so I will send this letter to him."


    Soon, he started writing a letter and after he finished it, he brought out a very unique stone out of nowhere. It had a carving of a wolf with a sword in its mouth, fighting something that can only be considered monstrous.


    "The Great Grey Wolf, Sif! Come to my command and show yourself!" Soon after saying that, the stone disappeared from his hand and bright white light particles appeared from the stone before it slowly formed itself into something akin to a canine creature. Slowly, the body of a grey wolf appeared in front of them and in its mouth was a huge sword.


    Its closed eyes slowly opened itself before the grey wolf howled into the forest.


    "Awooo!"


    His teammates mouth was agape, they couldn''t believe that he can do something like that. Kakashi was not surprise though, for he knew that summoning jutsus exists in this world, after all, he, too, is contracted to one of them.


    Hikaru slowly walked towards her. As he reached Sif, he petted her before he tied the letter on her body with a thin rope.


    "Sif, give this letter to the Hokage. Now, go on. Return to me once you have given it to the Hokage." Hikaru ordered before Sif ran to the direction of Konoha in a blinding speed, with the letter on her.


    "I didn''t know you had a summoning creature with you, Hikaru." Kakashi said.


    He turned his head to look at him and said, "Well, now you know. Anyway, let''s go on, lest an even stronger enemy appears."


    Kakashi nodded before they started walking again, but Tazuna, who was behind them, couldn''t help but feel grateful towards them.


    ________________________________________________________________________________________


    Soon, they reached the Land Of Waves via the fishing boat that Tazuna''s friend owned.


    But, as soon as they touched the ground, the mist in the area suddenly tickened. They could barely see anything. Tazuna waved it off saying that this was only normal in the Land Of Wave because this was close to The Land Of Water.


    As they started walking, Azumi suddenly threw a kunai in the bushes, which drew a yelp from Sakura.


    "Azumi! What was that for? That surprised me." She said.


    "I sensed something there, I''ll check it." Azumi said as she walked towards the bush to see if there was indeed something in there, only to see that she has pierced a snow white rabbit with her kunai.


    She looks at her team and scratched her head sheepishly.


    "I guess I was wrong, hehehe."


    But, as a jounin, Kakashi was able to deduct that white rabbits are only found in winter, thereby this white rabbit was owned by someone. As he slowly realized, his only visible eyes widened.


    "Everyone, duck!" He yelled as he ducked.


    They did as he ordered, everyone except Hikaru.


    Soon, a giant cleaver sword spanned on top of them, barely escaping it. But when the giant cleaver sword reached Hikaru, he only drew his lightning Black Katana to block it. Yellow lightning arcs soon flew around as he drew the katana from its sheath, and when he blocked the giant cleaver sword, the lightning arc only grew more intense.


    With the amount of upgrading he did to his katana, even the hardest object in the world would be cut cleanly under it. And that''s what happened to the oversize sword, it got cut in half so cleanly, that he could see his reflection in it in the short amount of time the cut in half sword passed by him.


    Boom!!


    The two parts of the oversize sword managed to get stuck on the treesn thus making a huge noise upon its landing.


    Suddenly, a man appeared near the broken sword. He picks up the one with the handle and said, "Tch, I didn''t think that someone like you would exist in that warm hearted village. Who are you? If you were this strong, then I surely would''ve heard about you."


    The man was a tall and noticeably muscular man with light grayish skin, short spiky black hair, dark brown eyes, and small eyebrows. Hikaru can see wearing bandages like a mask over the bottom half of his face. He was topless, only a black belt was worn in his chest area.


    Hikaru kept silent, he didn''t want to start a conversation to his soon dead enemy.


    "Zabuza Momochi? The Demon of the Hidden Mist!?" Kakashi said in shock.


    "Ho, seems like someone still knows who I am. But I''m not here to give autographs, give me that old man now or I will slaughter all of you." Zabuza said, bloodthirsty. He ignored Hikaru ignoring him for he knew the one in front of him, Kakashi of the Sharingan, the man who copied over 1000 jutsus. He already lost his sword, but he can still win this if he use his skills perfectly. Though, the kid near Kakashi is emitting a sense of danger from him.


    Kakashi suddenly lifted the head protector that was covering his left eye, and revealed the spinning three-tomoe sharingan he was hiding behind that headband protector.


    "Ho, so you''ve decided to reveal your sharingan at the start of our fight, eh? Kakashi of the Sharingan, the man who copied over a thousand jutsus! What an absolute honor, hahahaha!" Zabuza said mockingly. Even though Hikaru sliced his sword in half, he still underestimated him due to the fact that he was a kid. He thought that Kakashi is more of a threat than him, which is going to be his absolute downfall.


    "Zabuza, I''ll give you a chance, join Konoha or die." Hikaru said as a cruel light glinted in his dark eyes.


    Zabuza was surprised at the sudden offer, but he just snorted "Hmph, why would I want to join such a pathetic village, eh? And me? Die? Like I''d fall in the hands of a brat like you, and neither those three fools behind you."


    Meanwhile, with the other three...


    He couldn''t move. It was just like last time when he saw Itachi slaughtering his clan. But this time, his enemy has the intent to really kill him. The bloodl.u.s.t, it''s so strong that the area was surrounded by it. He felt really useless now, meanwhile Hikaru is staring at the eyes of their enemy with no fear. But Sasuke...


    Sakura knew that she was weak. The only reason she was able to join the academy was due to the influence of his parents, and the fact that they wanted her to at least marry Sasuke in the future. As she tried to stared at the enemy, while trying to at least protect Tazuna, she couldn''t help but feel pathetic.


    Azumi wanted to fight alongside Hikaru but the power gap between them is simply too massive. She wanted to help him, and at least feel the burden he is carrying with him. She was no fool, she could feel Hikaru everyday having a headache for some reason. She heard him once say that he needed to grow strong soon, but she couldn''t help but ask herself that time, "Why would he want to grow strong faster than he is? We are still young, there are plenty of time to grow stronger and yet, why?"


    She cannot help him for she is still too weak, even with all of her current strength, she still cannot beat her Hikaru-kun in a spar. Now, she is here, frozen like the rest of her teammates. But is this really all she have? All the training with her Hikaru-kun and yet, she would still freeze at the sight of her enemy? Her Hikaru-kun''s enemy? No, she is stronger than this. She will be the Hokage and marry her Hikaru-kun in the future! She can''t be weak like this!


    "I-I will fight you, too!" With her newly found courage, and the rage inside her for being so pathetic, a red boiling chakra suddenly appeared around her. Soon, it surrounded her, turning into a chakra cloak with one tail behind her back.


    "I am Uzumaki Azumi! Remember this name, for I am the one who will kick your ass! Believe it!" She roared and the thick mist surrounded them was blown away by her roar.

 Chapter 38 - 36

    In the land within the Land Of Waves, you can see a huge amount of red raging chakra pouring out of a single blond haired girl with three thick whisker marks on her face, a tail made of that chakra coming out of her behind. Her eyes were like that of a cat but it was blood red.


    "I am Uzumaki Azumi! Remember this name for I will be the one to kick your ass! Believe it, dattebayo!" She shouted as the red boiling chakra covered her from head to toe like a cloak.


    Seeing this, Zabuza widened his eyes, and though, ''What!? A jinchuuriki!? I thought all the jinchuurikis are only stationed inside their respective villages and were never let out by the current Kage!? This is not good, fighting Kakashi and this jinchuuriki will be impossible! And, if I am right, that jinchuuriki holds the Kyuubi! F.u.c.k, f.u.c.k, f.u.c.k! I need to retreat! My sword is already broken, and it will take some time before I can fix it! I really got myself in deep, this time."


    Zabuza knew what a jinchuuriki was because he already fought Yagura, the Fourth Mizukage, but he lost badly. Now, he is on his quest to gather enough funds to help the Rebellion to usurp Yagura and bring peace back to Kiri. That''s the only reason why he decided to take on the mission of a disgusting fat man to kill this old man but, that may be impossible right now.


    ''The kyuubi chakra is getting out of control! I need to stop her before she goes even farther with that power! If the kyuubi is indeed trying to get out, then I will have no choice but to eliminate her. I know that will turn Hikaru against me but what can I do?'' Kakashi thought as he observed and analyzed his surroundings while paying attention to both Azumi and Zabuza.


    ''What chakra is that!? I have to get away! The malice, it''s far too strong!'' Sasuke thought as he retreated a bit farther from the fight, while staying close to Tazuna.


    Sakura was no longer ready for battle, if she ever was, and now, she has just fainted in front of Tazuna because of all the things happening in front of her.


    "Graaaaah!!!"


    Azumi was the first one to strike with her Corvian Claws on her hands, ready to plunge it deep inside the nuke nin.


    "Shit! She''s fast!" Zabuza dodged it but not without any injury. It was only minor though.


    Slash after slash, Zabuza couldn''t catch up with her. He can''t get enough time to do a jutsu, it''s like she''s trying to keep him away from using his jutsus.


    "Shit, shit, shit!" Zabuza screamed in irritation as he dodged another claw slash.


    "Stop darting away! I''ll kill you!" Azumi yelled as continued slashing her Corvian Claws towards Zabuza.


    At this time, Kakashi watched Zabuza''s movements with his sharingan as he got ready if anything ever happens. Azumi seems to have taken control of the battlefield and Hikaru couldn''t get anymore impressed.


    ''With the kyuubi chakra, her power is now near High Jounin Level. How marvelous! And with the speed training I did for her, she can be around near Kage Level! This is fantastic! But, this is only temporary. The kyuubi chakra is slowly burning her flesh off, and if this does not stop, she will go towards something even I can''t defeat. I''m sorry Azumi, but this is necessary for your own good.''


    But just as he was about to move, the two fighting individuals neared where Tazuna and the rest was, and Zabuza saw the fainted Sakura laying on the ground, unconscious. He smirked when he saw this before he fled his battle with Azumi as he ran towards Sakura.


    "Get back here, damn it!" Azumi yelled then ran after Zabuza.


    She neared his back and was ready to kill him with one swift slash to his heart, when suddenly, she stopped her hands mid-way. Why? Because the unconscious face of Sakura was right in front her, thus stopping her from killing him.


    And behind the unconscious girl was Zabuza holding her neck. That''s right, he took her hostage.


    Even though Tazuna was somewhat near Sakura, he decided that the old bridge builder would amount less than this pink haired girl. She is their teammate, that''s why they may care for her. He could''ve killed the old bridge right there, but with the jinchuuriki on his back, he couldn''t do that. Because his goal is to give funds to the rebellion in mist, and if ever he dies, then there would be no one to bring back the money.


    "Shit! I didn''t think Sakura would just fall unconscious! This is really bad. If she ever dies, then that would mean I lost one yet again. And I can''t have that! I have already lost enough comrades, but this time, I will save her!" Kakashi''s eyes then slowly rotated before turning into its mangekyou form.


    "I''m sorry Obito, but let me save one this time. I can''t afford to lose another one." Kakashi muttered as he performed several hand seals before shouting.


    "Kamui!"


    The situation forced him to use his mangekyou but this comes with a price. He does not have enough chakra to use it, so he would have to drain all of his chakra just to use this.


    With Sakura taken hostage, Azumi couldn''t do anything but growl deeply as she snarled at him. But, suddenly, the space around Zabuza distorted and before he could do anything, his entire arm was taken away by that distortion.


    "I missed, but that''s enough for Azumi to kill him. I just hope that Sakura is safe..." Kakashi muttered before passing out and fell to the ground with his mangekyou inactive.


    "Gaahh!! My arm! How did that happen!?" Zabuza looked around while he held his right arm and saw Kakashi unconscious before he deducted that it was probably Kakashi''s doing.


    He released Sakura from being a hostage and with that, Azumi started her counterattack again. This time, Zabuza couldn''t do anything but try to dodge her, but he was failing. He''s already losing too much blood, thus weakening him.


    ''F.u.c.k, my vision is getting hazy. Damn it all! Haku, where are you!?'' Zabuza thought while trying to dodge most of Azumi''s fatal attacks.


    "Die, die, die! Just die!" Azumi yelled while continuing her attacks. Her kyuubi chakra cloak was getting more and more dense. A sign of gaining another tail. Taking Sakura hostage was enough to piss her off, and her anger meters is really getting to her limit.


    "This is stupid..." A mutter came but it was enough to be heard by everybody. All of them stopped as they felt the killing intent in the air thickened. They turned their heads towards Hikaru.


    "If only I''d taken action earlier, Kakashi wouldn''t have been unconscious like this. If I''d taken action earlier, he wouldn''t have taken Sakura hostage. If, in the first place, I''d taken action, then all of this wouldn''t have happened. Seriously, how stupid was I? Hah hah hah." His voice was full of self mocking. His tone was breaking. The killing intent he was releasing was terrifying.


    "Azumi, stand down."


    With one sentence, he used his mana to suppressed the kyuubi chakra that Azumi was using.


    ''What? How...?'' She thought in shock as she felt that chakra being supressed.


    "This is really... stupid." Hikaru muttered as the air around him distorted. His power was leaking out but he didn''t care.


    He knew, if he didn''t just watch Azumi transformed into her kyuubi mode, then he would''ve been able to kill Zabuza without any problems. But, he was just really was proud of her for using the kyuubi chakra without going berserk.


    No matter, everything is fine now. Why? Because he is here.


    ''What... is... happening? I could barely move! Am I freezing over this brat''s killing intent?'' Zabuza thought as he tried moving his limbs, and found out he couldn''t.


    "You know, it''s been a long time since I''ve been truly pissed off. You just did that, good job. You''re dying here today, Zabuza."


    Without giving Zabuza a chance to react, he disappeared from his spot and appeared in front of him.


    ''What!?'' He couldn''t even see him!


    Hikaru arrived under him before he kicked the nuke nin in the jaws so strong that you could hear his jaws breaking. Zabuza flew upwards due to the strong force of Hikaru''s kick. A hundred feet into the skies, he found himself there.


    Hikaru kicked the ground and jumped upwards towards Zabuza and he arrived on top of him in a blinding speed.


    Whoosh!!


    Hikaru arrived on top of Zabuza up in the skies before kicking him in his chest and he flew down straight towards the ground. But Hikaru was not finished yet, as Zabuza crashed on the ground, Hikaru fled down like a sharp bullet towards Zabuza before he pierced his stomach with his feet.


    Booooom!!!


    The entire surroundings was filled with dust and on the middle of the area was a huge hole created by Hikaru when he crashed down on Zabuza.


    Hikaru jumps back up and saw Zabuza unmoving. And, suddenly, he noticed that there was no hole on his stomach, which was really strange since he thought he already pierced it. He walked towards Zabuza to check his pulse, and found nothing. As he looked at Zabuza, he saw that his jaws was already destroyed and his saliva was drippin from it continuously. His back was broken, his last remaining arm was already broken. His legs were quite fine but that''s it.


    "Now, he''s dead. A shame, I would''ve love to compare my sword skills with him. No matter, I''ll just find someone later."


    With his emotionless eyes, he turned his back away to return to his team. Though, he couldn''t see it but two pair of tear stained eyes were watching in the shadows and three thin needle was pierced into Zabuza''s neck.


    _______________________________________________________________________________________________


    After he "killed" Zabuza, Hikaru decided to continue on the mission now that the main threat is gone. Gato could be taken care of easily, he is nothing but a powerless mortal after all. Tazuna led them towards his house, where he met pretty woman in her near thirty''s, which was Tazuna''s daughter. She saw how bad Kakashi''s state was, so she offered them a room in their house to stay for the time being. They bathe afterwards and Tsunami, the name of Tazuna''s daughter, told them to eat while waiting for Kakashi to wake up.


    As they were eating, a boy, or a brat, suddenly said that there was no hope, Gato was gonna kill them all. They were only spoiled little brats that was pampered all their lives. Hikaru ignored him, telling himself that he was just a nuisance. But Azumi took his words hard. She snapped at the boy before saying that she had no appetite and she''s just going out to train.


    After she went out, the boy, Inari they learned, cried before running up the stairs.


    Hikaru was worried about Azumi, so he went out without finishing his food to go and get her.

 Chapter 39 - 37

    At the spot where Hikaru "killed" Zabuza, a young teen wearing a mask knelt down in front of Zabuza. The teen cried behind the mask but she picked up the unconscious body of Zabuza.


    That''s right, Zabuza did not die, even after falling 100 feet from the sky and getting drop kicked by Hikaru from 100 feet high. You see, just after Zabuza crashed into the ground, he used his chakra to block the fall damage, and when Hikaru drop kicked him, he used his last remaining chakra to block it. Of course, the protection broke but he managed to live.


    Haku used her needles to fake Zabuza''s death. Although, it was really risky. The moment Hikaru drop kicked, Haku managed to used her needles just in time for Hikaru to crash onto Zabuza.


    Though, she believes that Zabuza may no longer be able to speak due to Hikaru destroying his jaws. And also, his right arm was cut off when Kakashi used Kamui. He now has one arm less in his body.


    She carried him towards their base and just hoped that no hunter-nin from Kiri gets them.


    _______________________________________________________________________________________________


    (Inside Gato''s mansion, in his office)


    "What!? Tazuna returned safe and sound to his home?!" Gato yelled.


    "Yes, Gato-sama. It seems like Zabuza failed." One of his thugs said.


    "Tch, useless fool!" He proceeded to smash his expensive tea cup on the thug''s head, in which the thug did nothing as his head bleeds from the injury.


    "Contact Akatsuki, it seems like I''ll have to go all out. Tell them I''ll give them 300 Million Ryo to kill that bridge builder. If that fool manages to build that bridge, it would be the end of me." Gato said while drinking some expensive wine.


    "Hai, I''ll get into it soon, Gato-sama." Without wasting any time, the thug left the office to contact the akatsuki while holding his bleeding head.


    "Hmph, let''s see you finishing that bridge, Tazuna. No ninja in Konoha will be able to help you now. Hahaha, "Gato laughed wickedly as he called the p.r.o.s.t.i.t.u.t.e by his side.


    (With Hikaru and Azumi)


    On the forest just near Tazuna''s house, Azumi sat under a tree as Hikaru walks towards her and sat right beside her.


    She looks at him and said, "Hikaru-kun..." Her eyes were a little puffy, evidence that she cried.


    Hikaru held her cheek with his right hand and said, "Why were you crying, Azumi? Because of what that boy said?"


    She nodded shyly.


    "You silly girl, don''t be affected by such things. That boy was just a child. You don''t know, maybe he had a very terrible memory of something. Let''s go back." He stood up and stretched his hand towards her.


    "Okay." But just as she was about to take his hand, instead of standing up, she pulled him down, making him fall towards her, before kissing him in his lips, french style.


    As her tongue connected to his, she couldn''t help but savor his saliva. It tasted like the food they ate together earlier.


    "Mpmh...?"


    Hikaru wanted to stop this right now because their position will make someone uncomfortable. He is on top of her while she''s kissing him directly.


    She pulled her lips along with her tongue, making a silvery line made of their saliva and she said cutely, "Hikaru-kun, please kiss back."


    He just couldn''t resist her cuteness, and this time, he''s the one who started kissing her.


    They proceeded to stay there for half an hour before going back to Tazuna''s house.


    After they''ve gone baclk, they saw that Tsunami was already cleaning the table while the others were no where to be seen.


    "Tsunami-san, where is everybody?" Hikaru asked while holding Azumi''s hand.


    She stopped what she was doing and said, "Your sensei has already awoken, though he seems to be quite weak. It had something to do to what you ninjas call "chakra depletion". They''re just upstairs."


    "Thank you, Tsunami-san." Hikaru said as he went upstairs of the house with Azumi. The two of them entered the room they occupied and saw Kakashi inside, still bedridden, but he was awake.


    "Oh, Hikaru and Azumi. I heard what happened. I''m just glad you''re all okay." Kakashi said as he weakly eye smiled.


    "Yeah, anyway, you really shouldn''t tire yourself like that. The mangekyou may be powerful but it has its limits, always remember that." Hikaru said.


    Sasuke heard what he said and asks, "I didn''t want to ask Kakashi about why his sharingan eye changed mid-way during the battle because he''s quite exhausted, but you seem to know. What was that?"


    Hikaru looks at Sasuke and thought that it would do no harm to tell him what the mangekyou is.


    "What you saw was the Mangekyou Sharingan, only a handful of Uchihas had ever awakened those eyes throughout its history. The first one to awaken those eyes was Madara Uchiha, one of the creators of Konoha."


    Sasuke may not admit it, but he''s learning more from Hikaru''s mouth than the shinobi academy. I mean, why would there be a whole test about what the first Hokage drinks? In the academy, there weren''t anything about Madara Uchiha. It was only about Hashirama Senju and blah blah blah. It kinda pissed him off, it was like saying that the Uchihas were naturally evil.


    "To awaken these eyes, you will have to witness a death of your loved ones. Though, I really don''t understand why you still haven''t awaken your sharingan." Hikaru said with a mocking light appearing in his eyes.


    Sasuke narrowed his eyes dangerously and said, "Why?"


    "You have seen your entire clan slaughtered right in front of you, you even saw your parents being killed by your "dear" older brother. Is it because you''re less talented? I mean, isn''t your goal supposed to be killing Itachi? How can you even do that when he was an Anbu Captain when he was your age?"


    Every word pierced Sasuke and he knew that everything was true. His father always told him to his face that he was less talented than his brother. He wanted to prove himself and he worked himself day and night when he was young just to learn the Fireball Jutsu, and the only thing he got from his father was a nod. A simple nod, yet, that was not enough. Itachi was always the better one, always the greatest, always the best in his parents'' eyes. And he hated that.


    "Shut up!" Sasuke snapped at Hikaru.


    "Hmm? Why would I? Everything I said was the truth, wasn''t it? Uchiha Sasuke, the weakest Uchiha to ever exist, hahaha." Hikaru laughed out loud.


    Now, this sudden turn of events might confuse you. but Hikaru is doing this for a reason.


    He realized that except for him, Kakashi and Azumi, everyone else in his team was weak. Mainly Sasuke and Sakura. That battle with Zabuza was a wake up call, this team is extremely unbalanced.


    Now, you might be asking why Hikaru is agitating Sasuke, well it''s because, mainly to anger him, secondly just for fun. The reason for angering him is simple, that is for Sasuke to face near-death experience with Hikaru. Soon, just as planned, Sasuke will challenge Hikaru in his rage.


    Sasuke pointed at Hikaru and said, "Out, now!"


    See?


    Both of them went out, with Sasuke being a hotheaded.


    Sakura and Azumi stayed with Kakashi, mainly because Hikaru told them to. They might not like what he will do to Sasuke. Kakashi tried to stop them but he was powerless.


    In a pond near Tazuna''s house, Sasuke and Hikaru stood 10 meters away from each other.


    "I will show you the power of an Uchiha!" Sasuke shouted as he started weaving hand signs for the fireball jutsu.


    He rushed at Hikaru as he inhaled deeply before shouting, "Katon: Goukakyuu Jutsu!"


    A large fireball as large as a small house fired from Sasuke''s mouth.


    The large fireball shot at Hikaru but, just as the fireball got closer to him, the fireball suddenly shrunk in size before it completely became at the size of a palm.


    Hikaru held the now small fireball in his hand and said, "Is this the best you''ve got? How disappointing."


    Sasuke''s eyes widened, "That''s impossible!" He shouted.


    "In this world, the things you deem impossible are sometimes possible. Now, quit whining because It''s my turn now."


    Hikaru suddenly released a huge amount of killing intent.


    "Caw, caw, caw"


    "Kishi, kishi, kishi." (Note: The sound of critters running away.)


    The birds hiding in the trees flew away, the little critters ran away with their small little legs. For they knew, the monster in front of them is very dangerous.


    Every creatures in the forest ran away from Hikaru, even though the killing intent wasn''t directed at them but at Sasuke.


    Earlier, he was completely blinded by rage that he dared to challenge Hikaru to a fight. But now, he can see... the monster in front of him.


    He felt it, it''s like he is in a very terrible nightmare.


    The dark depths of the water slowly raised a claw to grab his leg.


    He tried screaming, struggling, but no matter what he did, all he could ever do was try but with no success.


    He tried everything but it was futile.


    Slowly, as his body was forcefully dragged into the depths of the raging ocean, he started to think.


    "Is this how my story ends? Nothing but an avenger that, in the end, can never do anything. Is this really going to be my story?"


    He closed his eyes, as if he was ready to accept it, but suddenly, he opened his eyes with more determination than ever.


    "....NO! My story is still not yet finished! Uchiha or not, this time, I will control my life! Not for revenge, but for myself!" He roared as his eyes slowly transformed.


    Two Tomoe Sharingan!


    Then, suddenly, the surroundings started to crack like glass before it fully broke. He opened his eyes, only to see that he was back in the room with his team.


    "Huh? What just... happened?" He wondered outloud.


    Hikaru smiled at him and said, "Congratulations, you just broke my genjutsu."

 Chapter 40 - 38

    (A Week Later)


    It''s been a week since Hikaru taught that Emo Boy a lesson, and now he became somewhat carefree. Sasuke would no longer brood and you can always see him smiling, even helping people in the Wave. He truly changed, he''s no longer the emo revenge kid, now he lives a purpose just for himself. He wants to create his own story rather than pursuing revenge.


    However, the biggest shock is that he actually acknowledged Sakura and offered a hand to her. He doesn''t like her or anything, it''s just that Sakura has been trying for too long, and he thought maybe she can find somebody else for her. Sasuke treated her as a friend, not a candidate for love.


    Now, you might be asking, "where is Azumi, or Hikaru?". Well, I''ll tell you. Their teammates also wondered what they were doing everyday because they have been disappearing for long hours every single day. The reason is, they have been f.u.c.k.i.n.g each other like rabbits in a motel here in Wave since a week ago.


    "Oh my god, yes, yes, yes! Darling! More, more! ~Ahn~" Azumi cried lewdly in one of the bedrooms of the motel.


    And, oh yeah, right now too, they are f.u.c.k.i.n.g each other.


    They have been going at it for 5 hours straight and none of them were a bit less tired. They could continue on for three days straight if they wanted to.


    After Azumi entered her one tailed state, she felt that, for some reason, her chakra has been increase by at least three times. She doesn''t know why but she knew that her chakra control is gonna be shitty again due to the sudden increase of chakra inside her. But she was grateful for it because she could last longer in bed with Hikaru.


    After some time, she started calling Hikaru "darling" and he absolutely loved it. Without a doubt. He did not care even if she started calling him like that in public, For him, what''s the point of a relationship if you just hide it everyday? It should be free, he doesn''t care about the consequences for he could simply slap them to death.


    "Are you gonna c.u.m, darling? Then do it inside me!" Azumi demanded.


    As per her demand, Hikaru, who''s behind her, came inside her and the pleasure was immense.


    She turned around to look at him and she couldn''t help but marvel everything about him, and the same goes for him.


    "I love you, darling." She said with her voice bordering obsessiveness.


    Hikaru softened his eyes and told her tenderly, "I love you too, Azumi-chan."


    They hugged each other in that lone bed before the both of them just decided to lay there while n.a.k.e.d head to tow. They wanted to feel each other''s body more, though Hikaru''s body is quite cold due to him being an undead while Azumi''s body is very warm, unlike him.


    (A Few Hours Later)


    After making out, the both of them returned to Tazuna''s house but they noticed that there was some commotion happening inside.


    "Oi, bitch, come with us and maybe we''ll show you a good time! If you don''t, let''s just say that your little boy here will die very young" They heard a rough voice coming inside of the house.


    "What the...?" Hikaru and Azumi ran straight to the door of the house and saw two samurai harassing Tsunami and Inari.


    Hikaru narrowed his eyes at the samurais.


    Azumi growled and readied her weapon.


    The samurais turned their heads as they heard their footsteps.


    "Oi brats, what''cha doin'' here? Huh? Do you two want to get killed or somethin''?" One of the samurais said arrogantly.


    Hikaru simply smiled and wondered, "Hmm? I thought you guys were the ones who''s getting killed, aren''t I right?"


    "Huh!? What''re you talki-"


    Before the samurai wannabee could finish his sentence, he was already one head shorter than the others. The head of the samurai wannabee flew in front of the other one.


    "Wha-" The other samurai wannabee managed to utter before his body was cut in half. His inner organs were shown before the remains of his body fell down.


    "i told you guys, right? You were the one who''s getting killed, but I guess you can''t hear me anymore, am I right?" Hikaru said coldly as he looked down at the non-intact corpses of the samurai wannabees.


    He changed the direction of his vision towards the mother and son before saying, "Where are the others? They were supposed to protect you guys."


    Even though Tsunami was scared of the corpses in front of her but even then, she tried to manage replying to his question.


    "M-my father left the house to go to the bridge and the rest of y-your team followed him to protect him in case of anything happening."


    "Tch, let''s go Azumi. If these two corpses were indeed sent by Gato then something is happening in the bridge." Hikaru said. He knew what''s happening in the bridge, in the anime, Zabuza and Haku were the only one there but if he is right, Gato must''ve hired someone who has a higher rank than Zabuza. Must be someone who is an S-Rank Criminal.


    He just hopes that it isn''t the Akatsuki, or else, things will get really messy.


    (At The Bridge)


    ''I didn''t think that Gato would actually hire of someone of this caliber. He did not only hire one, he hired two! Sasori of the Red Sand and Deidara, The Flashy Bomber. I can barely take one of them but two!? This is simply overkill! Hikaru, you need to get here as soon as possible!"


    Kakashi couldn''t help but feel fear for the two in front of him is simply too strong for him.


    "C''mon Dedara, stop playing with them and just kill them. We have no time for this." Sasori said inside his puppet, Hiruko.


    "Aw, you''re no fun, Sasori-danna. This is literally the easiest mission we got that has around 600 Million Ryo for the pay. Geez, let me play a little." Deidara whined.


    "You little... fine, but leader won''t like this." Sasori said in his deep and rough voice.


    "Katon: Housenka no Jutsu!" Sasuke inhaled and fired several small firballs towards the duo.


    "Sasuke, no!!" Kakashi shouted.


    "Hmph, annoying little pest." Without even bathing an eyelid, Sasori swatted the fireballs, along with Sasuke, with his metal tail.


    "Gah! Damn it!" Sasuke said as he spit some blood out of is mouth.


    "Sasuke-kun! Are you alright?" Sakura said while caring for his wounds.


    "I''m fine, but these guys are just too strong. We can''t beat them like this. Damn it, where is Hikaru and Azumi?!" Sasuke said. He stood up and prepared to do another jutsu, though, his chakra is currently low due to him using many jutsus.


    "Wait, Sasuke! Don''t try something stupid again! if they weren''t playing with us just now, we would''ve been dead!'' Kakashi said when he saw Sasuke weaving another hand seals.


    "Don''t you think I don''t know that? But what else could we do? If we''re going to die today, then I''ll at least die while fighting back!" Sasuke shouted back.


    "Is that Itachi''s little brother, Sasori-danna? Hmm." Dedara asked.


    Sasori got curious and tried to look at Sasuke''s features a little and said, "Now that you mention it, he does look like Itachi. Though, I think he would be piss if we kill his brother. We should spare him, for now. If he gets in the way, just kill him."


    "Hm."


    Sasuke''s ear''s perked up when he heard them talking, " Do you know my brother?


    Sakura and Kakashi widened their eyes when they heard that.


    ''Sasuke-kun has a brother?'' Sakura thought in shock.


    ''Itachi, huh? Now that I see it, the two of them wears the same black cloak that has red clouds in it. Maybe this is some organization or something. Itachi must''ve joined them, this is really troublesome.'' Kakashi thought gravely.


    Deidara looks at Sasuke and said, "Of course we do, he''s been in the group since 5 years ago. You know, you really look a lot like him and that really pisses me off. Hn."


    Sasori then snorted and said, "Shut up, Deidar. You''re giving them too much information. S-Rank my ass, the only thing S-Rank about you is you loving your stupid clay."


    "What did you say, huh?! For your information, my ART is the greatest thing in the world. Nothing in this world can compare to that." Deidara started bickering with Sasori.


    "Oh yeah!? Mt puppets are the greatest kind of ART! You''re trash of an art is simply for peasants, aren''t right? Deidara-kun, hahahaha!" Sasori laughed at Deidara, who''s face is becoming red in anger.


    "F.u.c.k off, hn!" Deidara just looked away and snorted.


    "Always a loser, I see." Sasori added.


    "What are we watching here?" Those were the collective thoughts of team 7 as they sweatdrop after they saw the two S-Rank criminals bickering like children.


    Suddenly, in a speed that no one could follow, Hikaru appeared in front of Sasori with his fire black katana ready to stab him in the heart.


    With his danger sense tingling, Sasori managed to block the attack but at the cost of metal tail.


    "Nani!?"


    Boom!!


    The impact Hikaru made, destroyed Sasori''s puppet armor, Hiruko.


    Dust filled the air before it dissipated and revealed Sasori''s real body.


    His true body, which was a puppet with a pair of spinning claws attached to the backsides, a holder for four scrolls on the back, a stinger in the empty and open stomach cavity, a compartment in the right chest, and a core in the left, his eyes were wide open in a maniacal-like way, as opposed to his normal calm looking eyes.


    On his left thumb was his Akatsuki ring.


    "Ho, who are you? To break Hiruko, you must be really strong." Instead of his rough and deep voice, they heard a young man''s voice. It was cold, as if it never once touched the light of flames.


    "Sasori and Deidara, huh? This is going to be a pain." Hikaru muttered.


    "Sasori-danna! Are you alright?!" Derdara ran towards Sasori to check if he was okay.


    "I''m okay, you fool! Nevermind that, look at our opponent. This one is really strong because I can feel his chakra, it''s even higher than the two of us combined! We need to run, we''re no match for him." Sasori said gravely.


    Also, Hikaru hasn''t been slacking off in his grind for souls and training his chakra and chakra control. His [Resistance] stat is almost reaching 50, it now has [45] stats in it. Not even the strongest metal in this world can pierce his skin, though he would be arrogant to say that. You don''t know, maybe there are some kind of thing that could easily pierce his skin.


    His chakra training is really going well, the numbers of stats in his chakra and control stats is around [60] to [70]. So, not even Azumi can match him in terms of amount of chakra. Though, that would not be true once she conquers the kyuubi inside her seal.


    Deidara couldn''t help but be shocked, because this is the first time he saw Sasori having a grave expression on his face. Which means, their opponent is something they cannot beat.


    "But that''s impossible! That''s just a kid! He hasn''t even grown hair inside his pants! How can you say he has that much chakra!?" Deidara asked.


    "Deidara, you fool! Try sensing his chakra! Just for once, use your f.u.c.k.i.n.g brain!" Sasori shouted.


    Deidara as Sasori told him and he was shocked. Indeed this boy, who is only around 12, is stronger than him! Not just his chakra, but there is this deep monstrous dark energy that he can''t recognize.

 Chapter 41 - 39

    In the unfinished bridge, the corpses of the construction workers lay there as Team 7 and the two Akutsuki duo faced off.


    Hikaru made the rest of his team and Tazuma to back off because only he can face them. Kakashi is useless but if he can use his Mangekyou in just the right time, he could take out one of them. That is if it''s unnoticeable. Though, from the last time he used his Mangekyou eye ability, it missed. That''s why it''s unreliable.


    "Kid, just give us the old man. I promise you, we do not have to be enemies." Sasori said. He knew that fighting Hikaru will be futile, from his presence alone, he can deduce that even if he uses all of his puppets, it wouldn''t be enough. And, when he gets back to their base, they could report this tough enemy to their boss.


    Maybe they could also recruit him in the future. He may be arrogant but he''s no fool.


    "Sorry, but we have our mission, you have yours." Hikaru told them as he narrowed his eyes at them. He readied both of his Black Katanas, which is the fire and lightning katanas. Both of his swords emitted their elemental enchantments as the air distorts around them due to his swords being too powerful.


    ''Chaos Flame and Divine Lightning. Surely, no creature in this world can defy them.'' Hikaru thought. ''The only problem here is Deidara. He has this massive scale suicidal jutsu that can affect everything around him in miles radius. This could be bad especially to everything around him for the town of Wave is just right around the corner and his team is here. He could probably survive that but his teammates can''t.


    Hikaru went into his sword stance, which looked like a spinning pinwheel.


    ''I''ll have to take out Deidara first!!''


    Without any hesitations, he disappeared from his spot and appeared in front of Deidara, but faintly, he could see a smirk on the blonde''s mouth. It was too late when he noticed it but the floor beneath him shined brightly before going into an explosion.


    "Art is an explosion, katsu!" Deidara yelled maniacally.


    Boom!!!


    Rock flew everywhere as the huge explosion took place.


    Deidara dodged it easily because he knew where it was but Hikaru wasn''t so lucky.


    He got blasted into the sky. It didn''t hurt him but his clothes, which was still Chester''s Set, almost got tattered. Which pissed him off a bit but he kept a calm mind. This Set is pretty weak compared to the others but he still put effort in it to upgrade the entire set.


    Kakashi and the rest shielded their faces from the dust of the explosion but, nonetheless, they were fine.


    Azumi was worried but she had trust in her Hikaru-kun. He wouldn''t die that easily.


    "Deidara, you fool! You could''ve warned me!" Sasori yelled as he coughed through the dust left by the explosion.


    "Then, it wouldn''t have been a surprised, un." Deidara said.


    "Tch, anyway, how did you know he was gonna target you first?" Sasori asked as he watched vigilantly where Hikaru could be.


    "I planted a few clay bombs around this area while you guys were not looking, though they are very few but they pack quite an explosion. The reason I knew how he was gonna target me was because he kept looking at me with his dangerous little eyes. I just hope that he didn''t go unscathed in that explosion. Un." Deidara replied.


    ''Tch, even though it''s hard to accept but Deidara is quite smart to put traps without him noticing. This should give us a bit of area advantage.'' Sasori thought.


    Suddenly, Hikaru fell from the sky while standing up perfectly. Not a single wound was on him, only his blades can be seen shining dangerously.


    "Careful, Deidara." Sasoi said cautiously.


    "I know. Un." He replied.


    They tensed up when they saw him open his mouth.


    "You know, I was gonna use chakra on the both of you. But since you almost blew up my clothes, I''ll let you see one of my abilities." As he finished his words, he put away his swords and put them into his storage box.


    This time, his hands suddenly went into flames.


    "I''ll use my pyromancies on you. Be honored for you are one of the few in this world to see my fire techniques."


    Suddenly, he raised his hand towards them and they tensed up, only for him to say one simple word.


    "Fireball."


    A fireball as huge as a two storey house came out as soon as he said that one simple word.


    "Impossible... without any hand signs..." Sasori muttered as his eyes constricted because the fireball emitted an extremely hot energy. He can already feel his Akatsuki cloak melt.


    Seeing his reaction, Hikaru said, "This flame is no ordinary flame. It''s made of Chaos Flame!" With this, he shot the huge fireball towards his enemies.


    "Dodge Deidara! If his flames touches us, we will be obliterated!" Sasori shouted as he dodged the huge fireball. Deidara did the same.


    But even though it didn''t touch them, it grazed them. It was too hot that everything in it''s surroundings melted before it crashed down towards the sea beneath the bridge.


    Their skin melted, well, for Deidara that is. Sasoi felt no pain for he had made himself into a puppet but even he can see how dangerous that fireball was.


    "Tch, Deidara! We need to flee! It doesn''t matter even if the boss gets mad at us! We will die!" Sasori yelled in urgency.


    "Oh ho, who told you guys to run away? There''s more where that came from." After saying that, dozens of fireballs the same as earlier appeared on top of him.


    Deidara and Sasori was immediately overcome by despair when they saw those fireballs.


    "Come you two, I will show you what true despair is like." Their despairs weren''t even the same as him when he was fighting countless monsters inside the system. He watched himself get beheaded against ten Black Knights. He felt the crippling pain of being eaten alive by a huge drake. He tried running away as the abyss slowly ate him inside. He felt the despair of being cursed. He was poisoned ''till he died. He once got meatpaste by his enemies. He felt his body being slowly eaten by those dogs in the system. Slowly, he fell into despair time and time again. But he rose up. He fought them even when all of his limbs were either broken or sliced off. Even when there was a huge hole in the middle of his body. He fought on.


    This level of despair their feeling is nothing compared to his!!


    His eyes went as cold as ice when he saw them like that.


    "Your despairs will never be on par with mine. For that, I will show you what despair''s truly is."


    With one move of his hand, he combined all the huge fireballs on top of him, making a small sun.


    The level of heat that small sun''s emitting burned everything away in Hikaru''s path.


    Kakashi, Azumi, and the rest backed away. Their feelings were awe, fear, and a little bit of despair. His power, they cannot go against it.


    Sasori took out a scroll behind him before he opened it and said, "Tch! Secret Red Technique: Performance of a hundred Puppets!"


    As he finished, a huge amount of puppets wielding a varieties of weapons appeared with a puff of white smoke.


    "Deidara, you go and take this information to the boss. I will probably won''t survive this but know this, you are really the worst partner ever." Sasori said with a smirk.


    "Sasori-danna... tch, fine! Y-you better not die! Damnit all!" Deidara ran away while holding back his tears.


    Sasori gently looked at the fleeing back of his partner and thought, ''You may not have been the greatest partner but you were my bestest of friend. I''m really sorry.''


    Hikaru coldly looked at them and thought, ''Hmm, I''ll let him escape. The entire Akatsuki should know how dangerous I am, no, he doesn''t even know the rest of my abilities. I only showed him my swords and my pyromancy. If I wanted to, I could could go to Amegakure. But the problem is the location of their base, or bases. I still don''t know where the rest are. And some of their members may be on other missions. Pain is a threat, though. Obito can hardly be considered a threat to me but for the people I care for... he''s a massive threat.''


    All of them are a threat to every villages.


    Then, suddenly, he changed his mind.


    ''On second thought, Deidara could just go and die. I''ll reveal too much information to the Akatsuki, and they may use that against me.''


    Without any hesitations, he created another huge fireball, besides the bigger one he''s currently holding, before firing it towards Deidara in a blinding speed.


    "Nooo!!" Sasori shouted as he used his puppets to block the fireball but they were burned to crisp as soon as they touched the fireball.


    Deidara turned around as he jumped on the branches of the forest, only to see a huge fireball going after him.


    "So he won''t even let me go. I have too much information on him. Un" Deidara said.


    But he decided that he won''t go down without a fight. He summoned a huge clay dragon to go head on with two storey huge fireball.


    "Art is an explosion, kat- guh?!"


    The fireball suddenly disappeared without a trace... and there was a dark blade sticking out of his chest.


    He looked behind him, only for his eyes to be met by a dark piercing eyes. The red tint in the middle shined coldly.


    In one moment, Hikaru said, "You know, I was actually planning on letting you go. How stupid was I?" Before he sliced Deidara in half, permanently killing him.


    Sasori arrived in just the right time to see him kill Deidara. The despair of losing a friend, that was what he hated the most. After all, him losing his parents when he was young was too painful. Now, right in front of his very eyes, his only friend died in the hands of a stranger.


    This is why I cast my real heart aside, it was filled with nothing but a hollow space. Now that I finally replaced it, my emotions dared to come back? Reality is such an irony. My friend, I will die today. But maybe, in the after life, may we meet again...


    Sasori yelled one last time as he charged head on against Hikaru.


    With one last shine of his strength, he battled against Hikaru.


    Not with rage but for his release. He has finally gained back his emotions, only for him to lose it.


    Nothing was fair, that much he knew.


    But, maybe someday, he can meet her again.

 Chapter 42 - 40

    After killing the pair of Akatsuki duo, Hikaru took their rings because he thought that they might be useful in the future, even though he doesn''t know the exact function of these rings.


    Since Gato was willing to spend hundreds of millions of Ryos just to kill them, Hikaru decided to take all for Gato''s money for himself. That''s billions of ryos, mind you. He could do a lot with that, and there is only a few million ryos in his Konoha bank account.


    As he thought about this, greedy glints in his eyes would often show, which Kakashi and the others found weird. Hikaru wasn''t exactly the "greedy" type.


    One day later, he was now in front of Gato''s mansion. It wasn''t hard to find, since it was literally glaring at him while he was in the town of Wave. He decided to tell Kakashi that he had something to do, and the cyclops just narrowed his eyes at him before agreeing.


    "Let''s see, do I use a wide-ranged spell, or should I just go there and quietly assassinate Gato? Nah, I''ll just barge in and take all of his precious items. I mean, a conceited guy like Gato would most likely have gold bars laying around somewhere in his mansion." Hikaru said as he looked at the huge mansion in front of him.


    It was not exactly the modern type mansion back in Earth, but it''s quite decent. Too bad he''ll destroy it after taking the money.


    He stood in front of the main gate and the guards took notice of him, which was just thugs armed with Katanas.


    "Oi brat, what''re you doing ''er? Do you wanna die?" The thug asked him as he looked down on him.


    "Hahaha, hardly. It''s just that, your boss something I really want. Now, please die." Hikaru replied. In less than a second, the guards were already missing their heads, and Hikaru was behind them while sheathing his Uchigatana.


    This Uchigatana has no enchantment, it''s just a regular Dark Souls Katana that he bought in the system. Heck, it''s not even upgraded. Since, he thought, he''s just dealing with low-level opponents, a normal katana should suffice. Though, even though it''s just a "normal katana", it''s still pretty sharp. It''s sharpness is close to the Kirigakure''s Seven Swords.


    But this Uchigatana has one glaring weakness. It breaks too easily.


    Without paying any mind to the corpses around him, Hikaru continued his walk in the huge front yard of the mansion like he owned the entire thing.


    Every step of his, blood would appear. Numerous thugs tried stopping him throughout his walk, only to be either, sliced in half or beheaded by Hikaru''s blade.


    "Since Gato put the entire Wave into poverty, it''s only right for me to put HIM into poverty." Hikaru said while looking coldly at his surroundings.


    "AAAH! DIE YOU MONSTER!" Another thug appeared with a blade but he was killed almost instantly by Hikaru.


    "Seriously, is this an ant hill or something? Around a few dozen thugs have already been killed by me, and yet, they''re still running towards me left and right." Hikaru said, annoyed.


    He still haven''t reach the front door of the mansion and a few dozen thugs have already been killed by him.


    "Sigh, maybe I should just ransack the entire mansion."


    Hikaru weighed down the options before ultimately deciding to ransack the entire mansion.


    "First, I should just kill every thug. Let''s see, ah, yes. Fireball." A huge fireball appeared in his hand.


    That day, Gato waited in his room while overcome by terror as he saw everything that seems expensive get stolen away by Hikaru.


    Hikaru didn''t even notice Gato when he killed him. He just continued stealing everything he can, even Gato''s bank card was stolen by him. Gold bars, precious jewelries, expensive wines. Every expensive things in the entire was stolen by him.


    He spared the girls he found, and the people who were getting ready to be sold into slavery in the bas.e.m.e.nt of the mansion. It was a quite disgusting scene he stumbled upon in that bas.e.m.e.nt. Feces and piss were everywhere, he guessed that these people weren''t allowed to go to the bathroom.


    He returned them into the surface and after a long walk, he was finally able to bring them to Tazuna.


    Everyone was in the house and the rest of his team were there, too.


    "Hikaru, where did you find all these people?" Kakashi asked.


    "Them? After causing a havoc in Gato''s mansion, and ultimately destroying it, I managed to stumble upon them under Gato''s bas.e.m.e.nt. I realized that they were either slaves or s.e.x toys used by Gato. Either way, they''re not our problem now." Hikaru said while sitting at the table of the house, drinking the hot chocolate that Tsunami made.


    "That;s true. Since Gato is dead, then after Tazuna-san finishes the bridge, we will go back to Konoha. That wolf summon you did before must''ve reached Hokage-sama by now." Kakashi said as he ate the food prepared by Tsunami.


    "Aah~, finally, I will be able to return back home. I need my beauty sleep, I''ve been quite stressed these days." Sakura said as she laid her back against the chair she''s sitting on.


    "Hmm, that''s true. I can''t imagine myself doing another of these missions. An A-Rank shinobi and 2 S-Rank shinobis. God, I wonder if Itachi also got this kinds of missions." Sasuke said while rubbing his forehead.


    "Guys, guys, just relax. We will soon get our most deserved rest after we finish guarding Tazuna-san." Azumi said while eating her food that was also prepared by Tsunam.


    "Hahaha, you guys won''t last long if you keep complaining like this." Kakashi laughed at them.


    "Hmph, at least I''m not a pervert who''s just reading p.o.r.nographic books everyday to solve his l.u.s.t." Sasuke retorted.


    Kakashi staggered at Sasuke''s retort.


    "Well, at least I''m not a raven gay haired emo who ignores every girl who liked him. Hah, retort to that." Kakashi said as he congratulate himself over his shallow victory.


    ''Tch, petty son of a bitch.'' Sasuke just looked away with a snort.


    "Anyway, Kakashi-sensei, did you at least train Sasuke and Sakura?" Hikaru suddenly asked.


    "Of course, I trained them on how to climb a tree." Kakashi proudly said.


    Hikaru widened his eyes before rubbing his forehead in obvious disappointment.


    "Let me get this straight, so you trained them on how to climb a f.u.c.k.i.n.g tree. Is that it?" Hikaru asked with his voice obviously irritated.


    "Yes, why...?" Kakashi slowly replied.


    "Jesus Christ, Kakashi, Azumi had already learned that a year ago, and you''re telling me that these two doesn''t even know the basics of chakra control?" Hikaru snapped at Kakashi.


    "Uh, well... I have no excuse. Maybe... you can train them?" Kakashi slowly asked.


    "F.u.c.k.i.n.g Christ, Kakashi!"


    (A Week Later)


    In the end, Hikaru managed to force Kakashi to train the two. Taijutsu, chakra control, the basics of elemental jutsu. To be honest, Sasuke was lucky that he had many Uchiha jutsu scrolls in his clan compund. Many civilian family struggles just to find a single jutsu scroll. Jutsu scrolls are undoubtedly very expensive, at least for civilians. And the cost for the academy tuition is also expensive.


    Since Hiruzen really cares for Azumi, he decided to make her tuition free. Many thought that it was unfair but it was the Hokage''s decision, so they couldn''t step in. Hikaru, on the other hand, had to pay for his tuition but he was in a 80% discount, which was basically the same as it being free for him.


    Sakura managed to go to that school because her parents have a political position in the village, albeit lowly. Her parents used to be shinobis but they gave up on that when they had Sakura. They were not poor but not that rich either. They were in between.


    In the end, in every world, currency always wins.


    Anyhow, after Tazuna finished the bridge, Hikaru first gave him 60 percent of the things he took from Gato before leaving the Wave. But the bank card of Gato would have to wait since he still doesn''t have any legal access to it. He''ll just let Hiruzen take care of it, but he will still take 50% of the money inside the card.


    But the stuff he stole form Gato are really expensive, and all of it worth around two billions. Which is to say, a lot.


    This mission may have been dangerous, at least for the rest of the team, but the rewards, how to say this, very hefty.


    Of course, he did not forget about his team. He gave each of them a few million ryo, even Kakashi. Sakura was the most overjoyed because this could really help her family. She almost kissed Hikaru due to her happiness, only to be stopped by Azumi''s claws.


    And also, just after they left Wave, the rest of citizens learned that Hikaru had killed Gato and they were now free from his hands. So, they decided to name the bridge, The Great Hikaru Bridge. (Note: Since Hikaru means Light, they basically named their bridge "The Great Light Bridge").


    A day later, they finally returned to Konoha and reported everything that happened in the Wave to the Hokage, Hiruzen.


    Hiruzen already knew that this mission would be successful because Hikaru was in it. He trust Hikaru and that goes the same for him.


    He dismissed everybody except Hikaru.


    Inside his office, there stood Hikaru in front of Hiruzen, who is sitting on his chair.


    "So, you killed two S-Rank criminals. That''s really not a surprise for me but for this mission to escalate that much, sigh. I''m really getting old for this. Anyway, would you like to retrieve their bounties? I think Sasori of the Red Sand worths around 200 Million Ryo. And that same goes for Deidara the flashy Bomber." Hiruzen said.


    "Of course, but donate 50% of those to some good orphanage. I''m not out of money, far from that, to be exact." Hikaru took out the head of Sasori and the head of Deidara. He salvaged the remains of Sasori''s body because it was full of secrets. Maybe he could do the same thing Sasori did, making a live puppet who could make its own decisions.


    "Return the head though, I need that. You could throw Deidara''s." Hikaru said as he gave the heads to Hiruzen.


    As he checked it, the Third Hokage couldn''t help but say, "But Sasori''s head is made of puppet, the people there wouldn''t be sure if this is the real him or not. You need some kind of DNA that connects to him, or you wouldn''t get your bounty."


    Hikaru sighed and said, "Really troublesome."


    After a lot of searching throughout of Sasori''s body, he managed to find his DNA. It was just his f.u.c.k.i.n.g hair, his hair was his literal hair when he was still a human.


    After saying his goodbyes to Hiruzen, Hikaru returned home, where Azumi awaited him.


    This apartment will get a change soon, he''s a rich man, after all.

 Chapter 43 - 41

    ( 1 Month Later )


    It''s been a month since the Wave mission and the team 7 would occasionally do C-Rank Missions. The others were just D-Ranks.


    Since becoming so rich, Hikaru decided to build a 12 Floor Hotel and bought a new house for the two of them. It was not small but not that big either but the design was the thing that caught Hikaru''s attention. The paint that was used on that house was orange and the moment Azumi laid her eyes on it, she immediately loved it. It cost a few million for this house and around 150 Million to build that Hotel.


    The construction manager said that it would take a minimum of 3 years to finish it, and at maximum, 5 years. But he had all the time in the world. This Hotel he''s building in an open spot in Konoha is for Azumi''s future. With this, she could earn millions a month without doing anything and Hikaru had already planned everything.


    Of course, he couldn''t build a building if he doesn''t buy the land around it. The land he bought was just outside of Konoha, it was around 10 Hectare and it cost him 50 Million Ryo. It was rather cheap because the land around it could be cultivated, which was also something he would look into later.


    While he bought numerous properties, he, of course, wouldn''t forget about Azumi. Everyday, they would go around Konoha to do a lot of things. They would go on a shopping spree, giving resources to some orphanages, they would sit on top of the Hokage mountain while eating Ice Cream. To be honest, he felt like this was the life he had always wanted. No, not being super rich, it''s like carelessly spending things while making other people happy.


    But he knew, this all wouldn''t be possible without the system. It was all thanks to the system that he can do all these things. He wouldn''t forget that.


    As they both sat on top of the Hokage mountain while eating Ice Cream, Hikaru and Azumi looked at the fading dusk of the sun. Silently, the sun slowly went down as the moon rises from the sky.


    "Let''s go home, Azumi." Hikaru said as he stood up and extended his hand towards Azumi.


    "Un!" She nodded her head and took his hand.


    ( Next Day At The Hokage Office )


    In front of Hiruzen stood the Jounin senseis. They each have their own quirks.


    Asuma, who basically doesn''t know the word "shave" and always smoking cigarettes. He is a tall man, with brown eyes, olive skin, short black spiky hair, and a beard. His clothing consisted of the standard Konoha ninja uniform with the sleeves rolled up half way, flak jacket, regular shinobi sandals and forehead protector. He also wore a sash that had the kanji for "Fire" (»ð) marked on it around his waist, a pair of black bangles, and bandages wrapped around the arms of his sleeves.


    Kurenai, her face is cold. She''s the ice queen inside of Konoha, due to the fact that she had cruelly turned down every men that decided to pursue her. Kurenai is a fair-skinned woman of slender build. She has long black untamed hair reaching her upper back, and very unique eyes that are red in colour, with an additional ring in them. She wears make-up consisting of red lipstick and purple eye shadow. Her regular outfit consists of a red mesh armour blouse with only the right sleeve visible. Overall, this is very broad material which resembles bandages with a pattern on it similar to those of rose thorns. Her hands and upper thighs are also wrapped in bandages and she wears the Konoha forehead protector and regular shinobi sandals.


    Kakashi, who''s actually not late this time but he''s still reading that p.o.r.n book of his. He had a gravity defying white hair, a mask that hides the bottom of his face, and his other eye was covered by his forehead protector. Just from looking at him, you can feel the laid back attitude of his.


    Might Gai, the self-proclaimed rival of Kakashi. He is a tall and muscled man. He has fair skin, a strong jawline, a somewhat large nose, a black ball cut hair, and the most noticeable feature was his huge eyebrows. He wears a green jumpsuit, orange striped leg warmers, and the standard Konoha flak jacket, which he normally leaves unzipped.


    "Now," Hiruzen started, "you might have some gist as to why I called all of you here. Nonetheless, I''ll explain. As you all know, the chunin exams is going to be held in Konoha this year. Out of all the teams in the village right now, the teams you four lead right now is the best in the village. Even though it''s just been a month since some of them graduated from the academy, I would like to know whether you would like them to participate or not?"


    At the surprise of everybody, Kakashi was the first one to speak.


    "Hmm, I think my team can handle that. Sasuke is already mid-chuunin or so. Sakura may not be that strong but she has some medical skills that I taught her. And Azumi can simply be called a prodigy. While Hikaru, well, simply put... a monster. That''s why I would like them to participate in the chuunin exams." Kakashi lazily said.


    "That''s good, that''s good. Anyone else?" Hiruzen nodded his head in satisfaction.


    "Wait, what do you mean Azumi is a prodigy? From what I remember is that she was a deadlast in the academy. If you''re gonna lie, try to make it more plausible." Asuma said while snorting.


    "Asuma, tsk, tsk, all of you really lucked out on this one. Azumi was the one who nearly killed Zabuza Momochi when she used ''that'' chakra. She''s a prodigy but she doesn''t have that much intelligence and instead, makes her strategy while she''s in battle. Listen, Asuma, if you''re going to disrespect one of my students, you better be prepared, or this could get very messy." Kakashi said as his sharingan slowly rotated behind his forehead protector.


    "Bring it own, pervert. Let''s see who''s the better shinobi here, eh?" Asuma boasted while taking out his trench knives.


    "ENOUGH! Do you two not respect me, the Hokage? Huh?!" The air inside the office suddenly pressured everyone in the room except Hiruzen.


    With his chakra alone, he could suppress these two jounins.


    They both knelt down and said, "We apologize, Hokage-sama."


    Hiruzen stared at them and they felt the sweat behind their back slowly increasing.


    "Now, is there anybody else who wants their team to participate in the chuunin exams?" Hiruzen asked while surveying the room.


    "I would like my team to also participate in the chuunin exams." This time, it was Gai who spoke.


    "Very good, anyone else?"


    "I, too, would like my team to participate. The exam may be good train their young minds." Kurenai said.


    "Me too, Hokage-sama, I would like my team to participate. I wanna see Kakashi''s reaction when his team loses to mine." Asuma said while glaring at the cyclops.


    "Good, let''s wrap this up. Two days from now, the exams will start. Get your genins ready by then. That''s all, dismiss!"


    ""Hai, Hokage-sama!""


    After they all left, Hiruzen laid his back on his chair while taking swiff of his pipe.


    "You can come out now, Hikaru." Hiruzen said.


    And suddenly, in a moment, the world suddenly shattered like glass before it became renew again.


    And there he is, Hikaru, standing where the jounins were before.


    "Is that really the best Konoha could offer? They couldn''t even detect my genjutsu." Hikaru said incredulously.


    "Sadly, yes. Though, it was unfair for you to test them with genjutsu. I don''t know how you refined your skills in it for it to become very strong but your genjutsu is almost undetectable. Only someone with a sharingan could break it, and that would likely take everything they can just to break a single layer of your genjutsu." Hiruzen said, while disappointed in his ninjas, cannot help but admire the skills of this young man right here.


    "Genjutsu isn''t even my strongest in my skill set. Though, my strong genjutsu is most likely because I have a very good chakra control. And the only reason I learned this thing was because I could literally recreate anything I wanted. And with that, I could entertain Azumi." Hikaru said.


    Yes, with genjutsu he could recreate the movies in Earth. Shrek, How To Tame Your Dragon, Frozen and many, many more. Heck, he could even recreate the entire city of Anor Londo if he wanted to. He doesn''t know why but he seems to be really skilled in shinobi arts. It''s like he was made just to be perfect.


    He rememered Azumi''s amazed face when she saw the huge dragons that he created with his genjutsu. He would even make her ride that dragon like it was real.


    "But you''re really talented in that area, there''s no doubt about it. Maybe one day, you could... take over my position as the Hokage?" Hiruzen slowly said.


    "No, never. Do you think I don''t know how you suffered as you continuously stamp the papers in your table? Yeah, I would never want to be the Hokage, or any other position that has the Kage named in it." Hikaru said in deadpanned face.


    "Sigh, well, it was worth a try." Hiruzen looked down for a second and when he lift his face up again, he saw literal mountains of papers in his table.


    He sucked in cold breath as he saw his worst nightmare, only for it to disappear.


    "Huh? Genjutsu?"


    "Good luck, old man. I''ll give you a hint on how to defeat those paperworks, once you manage to legally unlock Gato''s bank card." Hikaru said as he left through the door.


    Hiruzen sat there, dumbfounded.


    That kid knew all along on how to defeat his worst enemy, and yet, he didn''t tell him all this time...


    "Damn you, brat!!" Hiruzen screamed in anger.


    The Anbus hiding in the shadows sweatdrop at the sight of Hiruzen, who''s weezing in anger.

 Chapter 44 - Something is fishy

For some reason, I can no longer send or see the power stone in my fanfic. What happened? Why is it gone?

 Chapter 45 - 42

    "Hah!" With one sword thrust and another, Azumi trained herself in the way of sword in their backyard, while Hikaru watched in a distance.


    After the wave mission, he came to the conclusion that Azumi was more likely suited to become a sword fighter. Teaching her the Corvian fighting style was good for Azumi but sword wielding is more likely suited for her. Due to the fact that her mother was once a renowned sword master across the entire five countries. It was quite weird that no one could see the resemblance between her and her mother, which was because her looks and compared to her mother''s is really uncanny.


    Without her whisker mark and just turn her blonde hair into red, she would exactly look like her mother. Though, right now, for him, she looks absolutely perfect.


    You may call him a lolicon, which is kinda true if you look at their relationship, but if you have a girlfriend this beautiful, and you know that she will still even more beautiful, then it doesn''t matter. And, it''s not like he was the one who initiated this relationship... at least that''s what tells himself everyday.


    "Good job, Azumi. You''re getting the basics, tomorrow will be the start of the chuunin exams. I''ll give you some pointers for you to train on. I know I''m not a sword master, but I know a thing or two about swordmanship." Hikaru said as he walks closer to Azumi.


    With Hikaru reached her, Azumi stopped her training and said, "C''mon, Darling. Is this really necessary? I could already take on Kakashi-sensei in a one on one fight! I''m already strong enough for this cuunin exam that he told us about."


    Hikaru chops her slightly on the head with his hand.


    "Ow!" She rubs the bump on her head while pouting cutely.


    "What was that for, Darling?" She asked.


    "Kakashi was already weakened by my clones back then. And if you mention about Zabuza, that''s because you used the Kyuubi''s chakra, which you shouldn''t have. Because that chakra will erode your body, thus poisoning it. It was said that if a jinchuuriki ever go on full tailed beast mode without fully controlling the tailed beast. it would half their remaining life span. Fortunately for you, you''re an Uzumaki. They were known to have longevity." Hikaru said in a stern voice.


    That''s right, Hikaru had already told her about the Kyuubi. She wasn''t that shock actually when he told her. She must''ve guess it because of the ways the civilians of this village used to call her. Demon Spawn.


    And the only demon that ever "graced" this village was the Kyuubi, she quickly pieced the things together, and ta-da, she figured it out. She wasn''t so sure about it at first but when her Hikaru-kun told her about it, she finally erased her doubts.


    "I know that, you have already drilled that into my head for so many times. But I''m not that weak, ya know?" Azumi said while pouting.


    "Yes, you are not weak. At least in the standards of this village. But in the eyes of the world, you''re weak, I am weak. Right now, we are incredibly weak." Hikaru said deeply.


    "B-but you''re so strong! Not even Kakashi-sensei can match you in full power!" Azumi exclaimed.


    Hikaru nodded, and said, "It''s true that I beat Kakashi in pure raw power, and even experience in combat. But he has seen one thing I haven''t seen."


    "What''s that?" She asked.


    "War, Azumi, war. We''re alive because of the previous war heroes, and Kakashi was one of those. But every war hero has one thing in common... they are broken inside. Remember this. Azumi..." He stopped a little to look at Azumi.


    "Un!" She nodded.


    Seeing her nod, he continues, "No matter how strong a person is, no matter how old they are, and no matter how young they are, they can still get broken. But humans are complex beings. No matter what you do, even if you get broken, don''t ever give up. But I really shouldn''t say that to you, right? Because that''s already your Way of Ninja."


    Hikaru looks at her, and she widened her eyes.


    Meaninglessly, she held out her hand before grasping something and said, "Yeah, I''m never gonna give up until I become the Hokage! That is my Way of Ninja!"


    "Atta girl! Now, let''s go back inside the house and get something to eat. You must be hungry after our training session."


    Hikaru held her hand as they went back to their house.


    Azumi silently gazed at her back, and knew that back will always be there for her. It has always been there for her, no matter what happened, he still continued to protect and care for her. And that''s why she loves him very much.


    ''...that''s why I am obsessed over him.''


    Her eyes hollowed a little before it returned back to normal.


    Silently, slowly, but surely, her feelings for Hikaru just continued to rise up. No matter what he does, she will always love him.


    ( An Hour Later, Somewhere Around Konoha )


    Both of them finished their lunch and talked for a while before deciding to go out of their house for a walk.


    "Ne, Darling, I still haven''t ask this but how did it feel to have an entire family?" Azumi suddenly asked.


    "Hmm, to say it simply, it was kinda boring. My mother and father used to work outside of our home and I would always be left with my siblings. It''s been three years since I last saw them, and honestly, the only one I really missed is my little sister, Hina. I think she would be 6 years old by now. I disappeared from my family when she was just three years old. I really miss her." Then he frowned, and said, "Though, I didn''t have that much good impression on my other sister. She was arrogant, always complaining, and always showing off right in front of my parents and me. In short, she was annoying," Hikaru answered, but he was slightly angry when mentioning his other sister.


    She looked surprised that Hikaru can be so spiteful towards someone. And that someone is of his blood relation.


    She then started talking, and said, "You know, when I was young, I would kill to have a family that cares for me. Before I met you, I was always alone while I watched other kids get picked up by their parents and they were jumping around in happiness. I was so lonely before I met you. Sneers would always come into my direction, civilians would always call me demon, and they would always ignore me. I was young, so I didn''t know better. That''s why I started pranking everyone that caught my line of sight, just to get their attention. And then you came. You extended a hand towards me and told me that you will have lunch with me, not the other kids, but only me. And I loved that, every moment of that was the thing I only needed. You were always there for me, that''s why I love you."


    She doesn''t if she''s confessing again to her Darling but it feels good to tell him this. She thought that maybe he should know about this, and that''s why she told everything to him.


    Hikaru stared mindlessly at her for awhile before he smiled with utmost he can and said, "Thank you, Azumi, for telling me all that. I love you, too. "


    She smiled while slight tears were coming out of her eyes..


    Truthfully, Hikaru doesn''t care one bit about his family except for his little sister, Hina. His other younger sister, who''s just three years younger than him, was more talented than him. No, he doesn''t like her because of that, it''s because the favoritism that his parents is giving her. She was an idol who''s just starting her career, a genius in every subject in school, and a kendo style fighter who had won a championship for her school. Naturally, favoritism would occur, and he hated that.


    And the only achievement he had? Skipping three years of junior high to advance to senior high. And it was just because of pure sheer luck.


    He may be the one his parents wanted to work because they needed it, but his other sister, Ena, had their full hope. The hope that their daughter would rise their family status. Their wealth. He hated them for that, but over these three years, since he met Azumi, he toned down his resentment towards them a little.


    Now that he thought about it, Ena should be 16 years old by now. Last May was her birthday, while Hina was last april. It''s august right now.


    While they were talking, they heard a child''s scream in a distance.


    "Let me go! Let me go, you make up wielding bastard!" It awfully sounded like Konohamaru.


    "I think that was Konohamaru, Darling." Azumi said seriously.


    "Hmm, who has the balls to attack the Hokage''s grandson in broad daylight. Let''s check it out." As soon as he finished saying that, he disappeared along with Azumi.


    Meanwhile, with Konohamaru and Sakura.


    Three Suna nins stood in front of them.


    A girl who has a rough blonde hair style, a red headed boy who''s eyes seems to emit bloodl.u.s.t, and a... guy wearing a cat costume with make up on his face? That''s weird...


    "Let me go, you furry bastard!" Konohamaru yelled as the guy wearing make up with a furry suit continued grabbing him by the colar.


    (Kankuro: I''m not wearing a furry suit!!)


    "I''m not a furry, damn it! Brat, you should know the consequences of bumping into I, the great Kankuro!" He said.


    "Hmph, I don''t give a single flying f.u.c.k! Let me go!" Konohamaru continued yelling curses after curses.


    "Man, this brat has some mouth, eh? Let me pull your tongue a little. Don''t worry, it won''t hurt." Kankuro said disturbingly.


    "Stop, he''s just a child!" Sakura yelled as she saw Kankuro''s hand going towards Konohamaru''s mouth.


    "Hmph." Kankuro simply snorted at the futile attempts of the pink haired girl, and continued going after Konohamaru''s tongue.


    But just as he continued towards it, five shurikens went out of a tree, forcing him to let go of Konohamaru to dodge the shurikens.


    "Who''s there?!" Kankuro asked while looking around cautiosly.


    "Behind you, idiot."


    Without having the time to react, someone swipes his legs, making him fall down, before he was punch in the face.


    "Gah!" He flew a few meters away before he managed to get his balance back.


    Sakura saw the one who punched the Suna nin, it was her beloved Sasuke-kun!


    Sasuke looks at her, worried, and said, "Are you okay?"


    ''Kyaa! Sasuke-kun is worried for me!'' Sakura fangirled.


    ''Nevermind, she''s fine." Sasuke thought as he saw her reaction.


    Sasuke then turned his head towards the Suna team, and said, " Let me guess, you guys are here for the chuunin exam?"


    The red haired didn''t reply but the sand colored hair girl did, "Yes, I apologize for the inconvenience we brought your team and that kid because of my brother. We''ll take our leave now."


    Not a sincere word came out of her mouth as she simply walks away along with the other one.


    "Wait up! Don''t you know who''s kid you just messed with? He''s the Third''s one and only grandchild. You three better explain this to our leader. If you don''t, this may cause an all out war with Suna." Of course, that was a bluff from Sasuke. This could simply resolve by apologizing a little but their apologies weren''t sincere enough.


    The sand colored hair girl visibly flinch, but she then said, "Please, don''t treat me like a kid. I know your bluffing, this small little thing cannot cause an all out war against Konoha."


    "Temari, shut up." The red haired bloodl.u.s.t filled boy suddenly spoke coldly.


    Temari closed her mouth almost immediately the boy said that.


    The red haired boy then looked at Sasuke and said, " You''re quite interesting, what''s your name?"


    "Sasuke, Uchiha Sasuke." He replied cooly.


    "I''ll remember that... when I come to your funeral!" Without any warnings, the sand in his large gourd acted swiftly and formed into a large hand before it rushed towards Sasuke.


    Sasuke couldn''t make it in time, and even with his sharingan, it was hard to see the sand!


    He tried forcing his sharingan go beyond its limit but he couldn''t. It was futile. His death was inevitable.


    Suddenly, as the large hand made of sand was just milometers away from his body, a thin fiery wall appeared in front of him, and the large hand sand was enveloped by it before turning into pure glass!


    "Ho, really daring, aren''t we? You know, attacking someone before the exam even starts is against the rules, didn''t you know that?" This time, he could recognize this voice.


    It was Hikaru, who''s standing near a tree with Azumi!


    He was just crossing his arms, and yet, the sand hand was stopped!

 Chapter 46 - 43

    Slowly, Hikaru walks out of the shadow of the tree. His face was calm, his posture was straight and smooth. He walked like an elegant noble while maintaining his powerful presence.


    This time, he wore some pretty normal clothing. A plain white shirt, black short anbu pants, and you can see his rings on his fingers. They were beautiful, to say the least.


    "Hikaru, good timing, " Sasuke said in relief.


    Hikaru simply stared at the red haired boy, and asked, "You three are pretty daring, eh? Hey apple head, what''s your name?" Even though he already knew who these three are.


    "Gaara." The red hair''s short reply.


    "Ho, the crazy jinchuuriki of Suna have come to Konoha?" Hikaru said.


    Temari and Kankuro knew that they have to get out of this situation, urgently. This boy right in front of them knows something, they could see it in the way his eyes glints. And they have to worry about Gaara, too. This could get out of hand!


    Suddenly, Gaara grinned maniacally.


    "Mother, mother is calling for your blood! She screams your name in great displeasure! Mother is telling me to kill you! Skin you! And drink your filthy blood! You will prove my existence once more!" Gaara yelled in a voice full of deranged tone.


    ''Shukaku screams my name in great displeasure? What''s happening? Does ichibi knows who I am? That''s... surprising. Maybe she knows the Second? That''s possible.'' Hikaru thought, puzzled.


    Temari got near Gaara to try and calm him down, only to receive an attack from his sand.


    "Gah!" Temari flew away with blood dripping from her mouth.


    Gaara seems to have ignored her and simply stared at Hikaru with his psychotic eyes.


    Suddenly, Gaara''s eyes started to change. His pupils became star shaped and around his eyes simply became sand.


    "Kiran! I will kill you!!" This time, it wasn''t Gaara''s voice that came out, instead, it was a bit more beastly but it was screeching.


    After he screamed that, Gaara''s eyes suddenly returned to normal before going unconscious.


    Seeing that Gaara had fallen asleep, Temari and Kankuro suddenly got terrified. Whenever he falls asleep, the Ichibi will come out! If ever he releases that beast inside Konoha. they''re doomed! Their plan of invading Konoha is doomed!


    But, he did not transform or anything. Instead, he just fell soundly asleep.


    "Huh? That''s weird?" Kankuro muttered out.


    Hikaru looks at them and said, "I have restrained the Ichibi, you two can relax. But bringing a defect jinchuuriki here inside this village, your village really had the balls."


    Earlier, when Gaara was on the verge of transforming, he used his mana to restrain Shukaku inside his seal. Mana really comes in handy every time. Though, it was slightly hard because his seal was not really made for sealing tailed beasts. It''s more like a storage seal that''s slightly bigger than normal. He''ll talk about this with the Hokage later.


    Even though Temari was injured because of Gaara''s attack earlier, she still manages to speak out, "Wait, this is just a misunderstanding! We really just came here for the chuunin exams."


    "How so? A defect jinchuuriki, the son and daughter of the Kazekage, and more importantly, if Gaara ever falls asleep, he would release the Ichibi inside him." Hikaru said while still holding down Ichibi with his Mana. He''s currently transferring some of his mana to continue and suppress Shukaku for the time being.


    Temari and Kankuro flinched, they knew that they''ve just been found out. No use fighting inside the enemy''s village, it would simply be futile.


    Sasuke, Sakura, and Konohamaru couldn''t help but be shocked at the sudden turn of events. Suna was more likely going to invade Konoha with their unstable jinchuuriki but they don''t know more.


    Hikaru gazed at them coldly, and said, "You two will come with me to the Hokage''s office. To be letting another village''s jinchuuriki, Konoha''s security system is really lacking these days."


    He made a clone to lift Gaara while he "escorts" the two siblings.


    He then said to Azumi, "Go home, I will meet you there. I just have things to take care of, " Before he walked away.


    He may have just ruined the entire the invasion on Konoha. But this is better. Maybe the Third Hokage would still continue the exams, and try to kill Orochimaru. That rouge student of his is, after all, one of his greatest failures.


    As he walks towards the Hokage Tower, the civilians he passed by glared at him with intense hatred.


    ''Ah yes, these people after all still thinks that Azumi is the demon fox. And, since I am be her side, they think that I''m also a demon. Their stupidity really goes somewhere. Though, I''ll kill them the moment they touch even a single hair strand of Azumi. I''ve killed a few over these years, and they are always begging for their life for some unknown reasons. I just simply pull their spines, their teeth, and their limbs. No harm was done.'' Hikaru thought sarcastically and mockingly.


    He simply walks by pass them while ignoring their glares. They may try to harm him, or Azumi, but the moment they do, he''ll kill them with the most brutal way possible.


    The Third approved of this and made a law that no one can harm Azumi, or they will be executed on the spot.


    (A Day Later)


    The chuunin exam''s still continuing. The third did not cancel the exam.


    After interrogating the two, they managed to find out that Orochimaru was the one who proposed this idea of invading Konoha to them. Since Suna was becoming more financial unstable over the years because of Konoha taking away all of their missions, the Kazekage agreed to that snake''s plan.


    Hiruzen, though, came up with a plan. And that is to stop Orochimaru once and for all. He will call Jiraiya back to the village, and with the two of them, they should be able to kill Orochimaru.


    And, he still cannot cancel the exam for an another reason. Kumo is also joining, and the lightning daimyo and Fire Daimyo are also coming as well. Konoha cannot afford to lose face in front of two Daimyos. Or they will lose some financial backing from their very own Daimyo.


    With all these reasons combined together, Hiruzen had no other choice but to continue the exam.


    ( At The Exam Hall )


    After meeting Kakashi, Team 7 proceeded to enter the exam hall. In there, they saw around a hundred and sixty genins. Every team hails from other villages. But the most surprising was that Kumo was in here, too. Though, there were only four of them. But it seems like one of them was the Nibi jinchuuriki, Nii Yugito. She seems to be the jounin sensei of these three genins.


    But, those three genins were quite strong.


    As the Team 7 enters the hall, every genin inside turned their heads to look at them.


    "They seem strong, " Sakura said as she hid her fear towards them.


    "Yeah, I could feel my skin crawling at the sight of them." Sasuke said.


    "Really? They seem really weak, I could probably kill them with my pinky." Hikaru said nonchalantly.


    "Hmm, I could probably take them on. I''ve been training my sword techniques this entire month." Azumi said as she held the hilt of the sword that Hikaru gave her. The Sunlight Straight Sword. Hikaru enchanted it with +10 Divine Lightning. It''s one of his strongest weapons in his item box.


    From time to time, the sword on her waist sparks yellow lightning.


    Suddenly...


    "Hikaru-kun! I''ve missed you!" Hearing that voice, Hikaru dodges side ways and Ino only hugged nothing.


    "Ino, you should really pick the time and place." Hikaru said, annoyed.


    Ino turned around and said, "Oh you~, I told you to call me, Ino-chan~."


    "Can you not? Azumi is right here, you know." Hikaru said as he pointed at Azumi.


    "Aww, why don''t you just ignore her and go out with me? I''m sure it will be really worth your time~" Ino said with her seductive and sultry voice.


    "You worthless pig!" Azumi took out her sword from its sheath before thrusting it towards Ino, but Hikaru just blocked it with a shield he took from the system. It was just buckler but it did the job before breaking apart.


    "Azumi, put the sword back to its sheath. Don''t kill a fellow Konoha shinobi." HIkaru said sternly as he discarded his broken shield.


    "B-but she''s trying to seduce you!" Azumi yelled.


    "Don''t worry, I won''t fall for her. Just calm down, okay?" Hikaru tried calming her down.


    "Okay." She complied.


    Ino seems to have been petrified on the spot. She was really so close at being killed.


    "Troublesome. Ino, now you see why you don''t go after men who already has a lover? Anyway, you all really joined the chuunin exams?" Shikamaru''s lazy voice said.


    Choji''s by his side, eating ch.i.p.s like always.


    "Yeah, as you can see." Sasuke replied.


    Another team from Konoha came, it was Kiba, Hinata, and Shino.


    Kiba still wore the same style of clothes he had back in the academy. Hinata seems to have grown and showed a bit more skin. While Shino was silent as always. Hikaru and him just basically nodded at each other as a hello.


    "Yo, it seems like the Rookie 10 has come together again." Kiba said loudly and Akamaru barked.


    "Rookie 10?" Sakura asked.


    "That''s what they call us these days." Kiba replied.


    "Hmm, there you are, Hikaru-kun." Hinata exclaimed before running towards him.


    Hikaru stopped her mid-way, and said, "Don''t, just don''t."


    Hinata was confused at first but when she saw Azumi''s glaring eyes, she understood what was happening.


    "Fine, but you will still go to the event that''s happening this month in my clan''s compound." Hinata said stubbornly.


    "You don''t have to keep reminding me. August 26, right? Okay." Hikaru seems tired of all these.


    11 days from now, it will be the birthday of her grandfather, who''s turning 77 this month. Hinata invited him a few weeks ago because her father keeps pestering her to marry some son of the Daimyo, and he''s her only chance of getting away from that perverted bastard. The only reason he wanted to marry her was because he wanted her body, which, if they ever marry, the Hyuga Clan will grow even stronger. Also, he''s a pedophile. That''s why he wanted Hinata.


    Hikaru''s role is to kill the Daimyo''s son silently, they''re basically planning an assassination. But, you may think that this will be troublesome to do, and you''re right, if the Daimyo ever liked his son. His son is a very dirty stain in his family, and that son also wants the throne for himself. But he cannot just do something about his son because that bastard has some power in the main capital. Many corrupt officials are rooting for him because, when he becomes the Daimyo, he''ll basically give those corrupt people a free gate way pass to do horrific things inside the main capital.


    In short, he''s a must kill individual.


    "You guys should really quiet down." A voice suddenly said. It was a white haired genin who wore a pair of round glasses and a Konoha headband on his forehead.


    "Who''re you?" Kiba asked him.


    "I''m Kabuto, but never mind that. Look around you."


    They did as he said, except Hikaru, and noticed a lot of eyes staring at them coldly. Their gazes made their body freeze a little.


    "Hmph, so what? Glare all they want but nothing will change. They''re still weak." Azumi said smugly.


    The Suna Team looks at them.


    Yesterday, Gaara slept, he only slept until he had enough of it. It was a bliss for him because for so many years, that was the first time he fell asleep without the Ichibi coming out. And it was so comfortable, he really would love to sleep like that again.


    "Hey, Gaara seems more cheerful than usual." Kankuro whispered to his sister.


    "Yeah, he''s even smiling with a calm face. Maybe it''s because of the Hokage fixing his seal more properly?" Temari replied.


    "Yeah, but let me tell you, I like this version of him than the grumpy "I''ll kill you" version." Kankuro said.


    "True to that."


    With the Rookie 10.


    "This is freaking me out a little." Ino said.


    "Yeah, you should be. Almost all of these people are elites from their village. That''s why you should quiet. You might pissed someone from all your noises." Kabuto warned.


    They went quiet as Kabuto told them.


    "Anyway, would you lik-"


    He was cut off when a large poof of smoke appeared in front of all the genins.


    Ibiki and the rest of the Konoha Torture and Interrogation Force appeared after the smoke dispersed.


    "Maggots, from this point on, the chuunin exams has started!"

 Chapter 47 - 44

    After Ibiki announced himself, the chuunin exam started.


    The first part was a written test, and Hikaru did not do anything other than draw doodle faces on his paper. Meanwhile, Azumi was having a hard time while Sasuke and Sakura breezed through their own papers,


    After an hour or so, Ibiki announced that the tenth question of the written test will decided whether they pass or not. If they get it wrong, they will be banned from taking the chuunin exams for the rest of their lives.


    It immediately created an outrage from most of the genins but Ibiki silenced all of them with a simple "Shut up!".


    The options were, if you don''t want to take the tenth question then you can show your candy ass, shine it real good, and get the f.u.c.k out of here! The second option was to just man up and take the damn question.


    And, after saying that, almost half of the genins went out of the door because of their sheer cowardness. While the others stayed in the room.


    As Ibiki surrounded them with his gaze, he couldn''t help but sigh, because this was not his goal. They should''ve been reduced by at least 30 percent, not 60 percent.


    ''Anko will definitely not let this go.'' Ibiki thought.


    "Alright, you have now all passed the written test. The second proctor should be arriving soon." Ibiki said and turned around before leaving the room.


    Meanwhile, almost of all the genins were dumbfounded. But the ones who took it the worst were the ones outside the room, who decided to not take the tenth question. They were either angry, or blaming their own selves.


    Hikaru sat on his chair as he tried thinking of another Jutsu to make. The reason why he always uses his chakra and not his mana was because that even if he runs out of chakra, he will not be exhausted or tired. But if uses his mana, it would be a different story. Chakra is not really a part of him, it''s just like in games where, even if you use the entirety of whatever magical energy you have, you will not get tired. Meanwhile, with Mana, that''s the main source of his magical power.


    Imagine that the chakra inside him is sealed inside a container, which he can use any amount anytime. Meanwhile, his mana is connected to almost every part of his undead internal organs. That''s why he has extreme mastery towards mana, it was meant for him. While he only gained his chakra through continues practice of absorbing it from the environment.


    With his chakra, he started from scratch. That weird disembodied voice told him that he was the one who modified his body to become attuned to almost every magical energies in the entire multiverse. Well, almost.


    He can learn chakra, Ki, Nen, or any kind of energy. But there''s a catch, he has to be in the universe where that energy is.


    Though, Mana is still more powerful than Chakra. So, sometimes, he use some very powerful spell, which he himself created.


    Oh and yeah, most of the spells in the system were pretty weak. That fireball before? He modified it to become like that, otherwise it would only be at the size of his hand.


    As he fell into deep thought, someone suddenly shattered the window in the room and a purple haired woman came in. She was a fairly tall woman who was of slender frame. She has light brown, pupil-less eyes. Her purple hair was styled in a short, spiky, fanned-ponytail. She wears a fitted mesh body suit that covers her from her neck down to her thighs. Over this, she wears a tan overcoat with a purple in-seam and a pocket on each side, a dark orange mini-skirt, a dark blue belt, and pale grey shin guards.


    A paper sign also appeared behind her. And then, she yelled, "The s.e.xy and strong, Mitarashi Anko has arrived!"


    Seeing that awful display, Hikaru shook his head and sighed. He had seen her in some of the council meetings while he hid in the shadows. She is... eccentric, to say the least. She doesn''t know him but he knows her.


    Anko counted them all, only to see that there are 94 of them.


    "Man, Ibiki is really going rusty. He couldn''t even cut the number of these brats to at least, in half?" Anko spoke with disappointment evident in her voice.


    "Welp, no matter, I''ll just cut their numbers in half!" Anko said with her mouth leading towards a face splitting grin.


    "C''mon brats, it''s time to go to phase 2." Anko said as all the students stood up to follow her.


    ( Forest Of Death, Training Ground 44 )


    After a little while, she brought them in front of a giant metal fence gate and behind it was a gigantic forest full of the tallest trees they have ever seen.


    The other genins couldn''t help but be amazed at this. It looks so... divine.


    Anko looks at them, and saw their amazed faces before she evilly grinned and said, " Now, don''t be caught off guard by the beautiful view of this forest."


    "Huh, why?" One of the genins asked.


    "Because this entire forest is inhabited by countless gigantic beast. And there are thousands of currently known species of them that are living here, day by day. Now, there is another fence gate in the forest. That gate is a warning that you are currently delving deeper towards the center of the forest. In the center, there are many kinds of monsters that even most of our Jounins cannot contend with. They have many unknown abilities. So, whatever you do, don''t you ever go near that, okay? Okay." Anko explained.


    Now, all the genins, except Hikaru, were terrified of this forest in front of them. Even Azumi and Sasuke were scared. Sakura, well, as always, scared out of her living soul.


    "Um, Darling, I think we shouldn''t go there." Azumi said while shaking.


    Sasuke looks at him, and also said, "Yeah, this time, I agree with Azumi. I''m getting bad vibes from that forest."


    "Don''t worry, she said that those kinds of monsters only exists in the center of the forest. We just avoid that place. Though, she has not yet explained what our current goal is." Hikaru said but he already knew what their goal is.


    Next, she explained what their goal is. There are two scrolls, the heaven scroll and the earth scroll. Each team have to take either of these and go on towards the forest. Their goal is to take the opposite of their scroll from other teams, which is either heaven or earth.


    It was simple, until you see that it''s clearly going to be a massacre inside that forest. Most of the teams would probably be eaten alive by the beasts inside the forest, or killed by someone.


    A table appeared in front of Anko with a poof of smoke and on that table was the scrolls.


    "Now, you guys will take one scroll each. And no one will camp in the entrance. That will be against the rules." She explained to them before all of the teams managed to get one scroll.


    Team 7 got the Heaven Scroll.


    After taking their scroll, Team 7 walked in the forest before they disappeared in a burst speed. Well, Sakura just ran pathetically just to catch up to them. To her credit, at least she didn''t get tired from that simple run.


    Now that they''re a little deeper into the forest, Hikaru proceeded to explain his plan.


    "Alright, I''ll be spreading out my clones to hunt for the scroll we need. We should just stay here while I hide us behind a genjutsu. This should be the safest plan for us. I may be strongest out of all of us but I still have my own limitations. But to be honest, I could probably kill most of them in a blink of an eye." Hikaru said as he weaved some hand signs for his genjutsu before making four clones and each of them have 20 percent of his chakra. They should be around jounin level and could take out most of the teams they come across to. And, they won''t be destroyed with a simple hit.


    Sasuke nodded his head, and agreed, "That''s true. This is the safest option for us, right now. Unless a sannin level opponent suddenly comes out of the shadows, we won''t be defeated easily."


    ''Did he just jinx us?'' Hikaru said inside his thoughts.


    They all agreed, mostly Sakura, since she''s their weakest link.


    While they hid, the four shadow clones disappeared from their spot and started searching for the scrolls. They separated just in case.


    ( Clone#1 )


    The clone stepped on the branch of the trees before leaping to another branch. He''s currently navigating throughout the forest to search for target, which is any team that he spots with his vision.


    He can use A-Rank jutsus at least three times. Thankfully, his creator was kind enough to give them clones of his weapons. They could probably take on four teams without breaking a sweat. That was great, the faster they could do this, the faster they could return to their creator.


    As he leaped through the branches, he spotted a team that seems to be from Amegakure. They were wearing these cloaks that hid their bodies, and they were also wearing masks that covered their lower mouths.


    Seeing them, the clone grinned.


    He leaped off the tree before he appeared in front of that Amegakure team.


    The clone was wearing Chester''s outfit but unlike Hikaru, they wore the Snickering Top Hat of Chester. And because of that, they looked more like a joker than a shinobi. Though, for some reason, it seems cool.


    The Ame Team were immediately on their guards, and one of them decided to ask, "Who are you?"


    ''Hmm, I think this is the right time to cosplay. I mean, who wouldn''t do that?'' The clone thought as he smiled behind the mask.


    "I''m the Magnificent Chester, at your service. Now, this may seem sudden but, can you please give me your scrolls? I would rather avoid a confrontation with you guys, since it would only result in your deaths." He said elegantly with grace coming off of his voice.


    The Ame Team then sneered and one of them said, "You think you can kill all THREE of us? How delusional are you? C''mon, let''s kill this pest before his team arrives. I''m thirsty for some blood."


    That one seems to be their team leader.


    "Hmm, how disappointing. Since you people decided to just kill me instead of talking instead, then you wouldn''t mind me doing the same thing, right?" In a sudden burst of speed, he appeared i behind them. But, there was something very eye catchy in his hand.


    The head of their team leader is in his hand, dripping blood.


    They looked at their team leader, only to see where his head was supposed to be bursting blood like a fountain.


    "Now, let''s get this over with." Without speaking to them any longer, he beheaded all of them with his bare hands. He did not let them mutter another word.


    He only threw all of their heads away and searched their bodies for the scroll. He got it but with some of their blood got on it. Unfortunately, it was only the Heaven Scroll, the same scroll they had.


    "Hmm, I wonder how are the other three doing?" He said as he looked up on the blue sky.


    He kept the scroll and continued searching for more teams.


    ( Clone#2 )


    He stood in front of three dead bodies, and they seem to be from Amegakure also. All of them were cut in half by his sword, and on his hand was another Heaven Scroll.


    "This is really such a disappointment. Guess I''ll search for more." With that being said, he disappeared from his spot.


    ( Clone#3 )


    "W-wait! I''ll give you the scroll, just let me go!" One of the genins, who seems to be on her last legs, begged desperately in front of Hikaru''s clone.


    Her other teammates were already laying on the ground, nothing but corpses now.


    "Hmm, let me think about it... okay, just give me the scroll." He said as he extended his hand towards her.


    She seems to be searching for the scroll, only to take out a tanto and went for his head.


    "How unfortunate..." The only words she heard before her vision was split into two. Her body was cut in half by his sword.


    Looking at her dead remains, he said somberly, "Is it weird that I already got so used to this kind of scene? The mind of our creator is simply a labyrinth full of nightmares. It''s a wonder how he could still smile."


    With that, he took the scroll from the body of the dead girl before he saw that it was just another Heaven Scroll.


    "Shame..." He shook his head before taking off to find another team.


    ( Clone#4 )


    His situation is slightly more troublesome.


    Two teams were already fighting when he stepped in. He killed 3 of them but the other three seems to be stronger than the others, who''s dead right now.


    "Strong, three high-chunin level genins? But that headband, they seems to be hailing from Kumo. I better get my ass ready." The clone said as fought them with the two straight swords he had.


    Pang! Pang! Pang!


    Metals clashing could be heard, and the clone seems to be losing the battle.


    But the three genins from Kumogakure were having a hard time defeating him.


    "Tch, let''s see you guys handle this!" The clone said as he weaved hand signs for an A-Rank Ninjutsu.


    "Futon: Hundred Wind Blades!"


    The surrounding suddenly distorted and on of the Kumo genins suddenly got cut by something invisible.


    "Haru!" One of his teammates yelled.


    "Yeah, something is going on. He used a Futon Ninjutsu, so our Raiton will be weak against it. It seems like our surrounding is filled with invisible wind blades. Our situation has turned very grave." The one who''s name is Haru analyzed.


    This situation is very unfavorable for them.


    "Hmm, you''re very smart. Yes, if you three move, even if slightly, you will get cut. Worst case scenario, you will all get your head beheaded." The clone said.


    But even though he said that, he cannot control this jutsu. Even he can get cut by it, if he''s not careful.


    Haru smirked and said, "You think this wind blades can stop me? Well, think again!"


    He moved his arm and it got cut but he made a hand sign.


    Kawarimi!


    He disappeared in a puff of smoke and the only thing that landed there was a log.


    "Tch, f.u.c.k.i.n.g kawarimi. I really wonder why it''s so easy to f.u.c.k.i.n.g learn." The clone cursed under his breath.


    Seeing their teammate do that, the two of them copied him and they got out of his trap.


    They got out of the range of his jutsu, and the clone cursed even more.


    "Raiton: Thunder Bolt!" Haru yelled as he extended his arm and huge amount of lightning chakra appeared on his hands before he threw it at the clone of Hikaru.


    "Suiton: Water Ball!"


    "Suiton: Water Ball!"


    The other two released two water jutsus to strengthen the electrical current of Haru''s jutsu.


    But the clone was not idling, this time, he used a two element combination ninjutsu that Hikaru made himself.


    "Katon and Suiton: Hidden Flame Jutsu!"


    He created a large water ball and inside it was a fireball but at a smaller size, it sat at the top of his hand before he threw it at the jutsus coming for him.


    "Take this!" The clone yelled with all his strenght.


    The ninjutsus clash but ultimately...


    The clone lost.


    And the Kumo Team won.


    The jutsus hit him and he disappeared in a puff of smoke.


    The three tired genins widened their eyes, and said at the same time, "A shadow clone? We were fighting a clone this whole time?"

 Chapter 48 - 45

    As Hikaru sat on a branch of a tree, near his teammates, he suddenly received the memories of his clone.


    As he reviewed it, he couldn''t help but facepalm.


    "Did my clone really hold back that much? I gave them weapons, and strong jutsus. But for some reason, he decided to hold back and play with that Team." He shook his head in disappointment.


    "What''s the matter, Darling?" Azumi asked worriedly.


    "Nothing, " Hikaru''s short reply.


    "Okay, " She decided not to delve in deeper.


    As they waited for the clones to come back, they suddenly heard a bunch of metal clanging just behind the thick trees.


    Pang! Pang! Pang!


    "What''s that!?" Sasuke said, alarmed.


    "Sasuke-kun, I''m scared." Sakura said as she held Sasuke''s right arm to feel safe.


    "Don''t worry about it, it''s probably just 2 teams fighting, " Hikaru said nonchalantly as he laid his back against the tree.


    When Sasuke heard that, he suddenly got an idea.


    "Why don''t we ambush them? We can take both of their scrolls, and maybe one of them is the Earth scroll." He explained to his team.


    Hikaru raised his head to look at Sasuke before saying, "No, let''s wait for the two teams to kill each other. That way, they will be a lot less problematic."


    "That''s true..." Sasuke muttered before he suddenly heard a familiar voice from one of those teams.


    "They''re strong! Hinata, back away, I''ll take them on!" That voice oddly sounded like Kiba''s...


    Hearing that voice, Azumi widened her eyes and yelled, "Darling!"


    Just as she finished, Hikaru dropped down from the tree and dusted himself before saying, "Truly, this is messing up my plans. Why can''t everybody just follow the plan for once?"


    He disappeared from his spot and appeared where Team 8 is. He looked around and saw three Amegakure genins. They wore the same black cloak the rest had when he saw them.


    Behind him was Team 8. They were tired, low of chakra, and bruises were vivid everywhere in their body.


    Seeing that, Hikaru turned his head towards the Ame Team.


    He did not speak, only silence can be heard.


    He draw his Uchigatana shortly before putting it back on its sheath.


    The next thing Team 8 saw, was the mincemeat bodies of the Ame Team.


    Hikaru sliced them so fast that no one could see it. The bodies were cut into a thousand pieces of meat.


    Hikaru picked up the clean scroll that the Ame team carried before he turned around to look at Team 8 and said, "Follow me."


    As he saw the scroll, he smiled. It was the Earth Scroll. Just what they needed.


    "Hikaru... how did you do that?" Kiba asked while he carried the injured Shino. Hinata was slightly better than the rest of her team, so she could walk on her own.


    "How did I do what?" Hikaru replied with a question without turning around as they walked towards the safe location he made for his team.


    Kiba got annoyed, and said, "You know what I mean! A genin shouldn''t be able to wield that kind of power! You somehow just took out your Katana before you put it back into its sheath for less than 3 seconds, and then they died!"


    Hikaru seemingly just ignored him and took out three golden golden bottles.


    He stopped and turned around to give them those bottles.


    Kiba was just about to ask what they were but Hikaru shut him off with a simple shush.


    "These three bottles are called Divine Blessing. Don''t ask where they came from, the only thing that matters is that it heals you fully. Drink it." Hikaru said as he gave them the bottles.


    Hinata took one of them and was about to drink it, when Kiba intervened and said, "Don''t drink it yet, Hinata-chan. I''ll drink it first to see if it''s safe or not."


    Hinata narrowed her eyes, and coldly said, "Don''t order me around, Inuzuka. I''ll drink whatever I want." She then proceeded to drink it and a golden glow came off from her body before it dissipated.


    All of her bruises and wounds were healed almost instantly after she drank the Divine Blessing.


    "Wha...?" Kiba couldn''t believe his eyes, such a miraculous thing actually exists!


    He then drank it too and he felt the same thing Hinata felt. It healed his wounds, and injures. He suddenly felt energetic again! But then, he looked at his partner, Akamaru. He was also injured, and it''s more likely more fatal than Shino.


    "Um, Hikaru, can you please give me one of those again?" Kiba asked but his voice were lower than before.


    "Hmm, sure but after we get back, you will give me 100,000 Ryo." Hikaru said as he smiled at him.


    "Huh?" Kiba was suddenly confused.


    "Now, did you really think that another one of those is free? Don''t be absurd, I only gave you three for free because of your injuries. If you want one now, you will have to agree to give me a hundred thousand Ryo by the end of this phase."


    Kiba staggered at huge amount that Hikaru is asking, and it would likely burn a hole in his wallet. And that hole would not be small.


    "How about a... discount?" Kiba asked timidly instead of the previous boisterous one.


    "No, " Hikaru''s simple answer. Even though he''s probably richer than any other clans in Konoha, he still wants more. Even if 100,000 Ryo is just a drop of water in his bank account, it''s still money.


    "Tch, fine. Give me the thing and I''ll give you the money later." Kiba said as he extended his hand to receive the Divine Blessing.


    "Deal! Here you go." Hikaru gave him another Divine Blessing.


    While they were talking, Hinata helped Shino drink the Divine Blessing and he was restored to full health.


    Kiba opened the lid before making Akamaru drink a single drop per time. Before long, the dog was healed.


    "Akamaru!"


    "Waf, waf, waf!" The small dog barked.


    Hikaru then turned around to leave.


    "Let''s go, some teams may try and attack us." Hikaru said as walked away while the other three followed.


    A few moments later, they finally arrived where Hikaru planted his genjutus. In here, not a single soul can see them even if they went close to that person. Of course, you would have to have Hikaru''s permission to enter here.


    When they arrived, Hikaru saw three of his clones kneeling in front of him.


    "Did you guys accomplished your mission?"


    "Yes, creator. I have stolen 2 Heaven Scrolls, and 1 Earth Scrolls." Clone#1 replied.


    "I am the same." Clone#2 replied.


    "Me too." Clone#3 replied.


    "Good, now disperse yourselves." Hikaru ordered.


    ""Yes, our creator!" Then they disappeared in a puff of smoke. After they dispersed themselves, they dropped 9 scrolls. 6 Heaven Scrolls and 3 Earth Scrolls.


    "I really don''t know how Darling is able to command his clones so good. My clones only laze around when I try to order them." Azumi complained as she pouted.


    "Don''t worry about it, Azumi. You''ll come across it in time." Hikaru said as he picked up the 9 scrolls that the clones dropped when they dispersed.


    When Team 8 saw the huge amount of scrolls he had, Hinata decided to ask, "Hikaru-kun, can you give me one Heaven Scroll? It''s what we need right now."


    "Of course, here." Hikaru threw one Heaven Scroll towards her and she caught it easily.


    ''Why can''t she call me "Kiba-kun"? I''m better than that guy, seriously.'' Kiba thought in jealousy and envy.


    "Our next move is to go back and give our scroll to the procter, AKA, Anko." Hikaru said and the whole team agreed.


    20 minutes later, they were already in front of the tower.


    When they got there, they realized that they were the first ones to get to the tower.


    After opening their respective scrolls, their senseis appeared in a puff of smoke. Kakashi for Team 7 and Kurenai for Team 8.


    Learning that Hikaru saved her students from certain doom, she gave him her gratitude. before she and her team left Team 7 alone.


    "Alright, I''m really happy that my cute little students managed to pass the chuunin exams, it would''ve been a surprise if you guys didn''t passed. Anyway, the higher ups decided to move the preliminaries in three days. Thereby making it August 18.


    It was made this way so that they can wait for other teams to arrive while the the teams that managed to pass early take a rest.


    They were then moved into separated rooms.


    Hikaru is now alone in his room as he checked his stats.


    [Name: Hikaru Hiroaki


    Race: Modified Undead


    Level: 310


    Next Level: ???????


    Attunement - 30


    Endurance - 60


    Strength - 60


    Dexterity- 60


    Int - 60


    Faith - 60


    Resistance - 50


    Souls - 5,500,000


    ______


    Chakra - 80


    Chakra Control - 70]


    Seeing his stats made him smile.


    This is the result of all of his hard work.


    "Now, let''s go and farm another batch of souls. Maybe I''ll challenge Manus? Since I''m already this strong, maybe I can defeat him."


    Those were the last words of Hikaru before he ultimately died 20 Minutes Later.


    ( In the Main Capital of the Land Of Fire )


    In a mansion guarded by hundreds of jounin level shinobis. Inside that mansion was a room decorated like a children''s room. Inside that room, there was a long table. 12 girls between the ages of 9 to 14 were tied on the chairs at the table.


    All of the girls were dressed like dolls, and their faces were like dolls. But they were not dolls. They are humans tied to a chair, dressed like a pedophile''s fantasy, and if you look a little closely, you can see deep purple bruises on their faces. It was hidden because of the white foundation of whoever put their makeups.


    They were either struggling to get out but it was futile. The ropes were too tight, and that''s not all, the one who made all of this were in the room too.


    It was a tall handsome man with short black hair and deep yellow eyes. He was pale, he wore a nobleman''s coat with trousers that were surrounded by jewelries. From time to time, his long slithery fingers would touch the girls like they were the most precious thing in the world.


    His eyes would wander around, aimlessly, around the little girls.


    The little girls were trying not to cry, as if they were so scared to cry. But one of them couldn''t hold it in, and a nine year old child burst in tears.


    "Waaahh! I want to go home to my mummy!! Waaahh!" She cried, and it caught the man''s eyes.


    He ran directly towards her, and said with a deranged voice, "No, no, no, no, no, nooo! You''re ruining your makeup, my dear. But don''t worry, I''ll fix that for you."


    He took out a bottle filled with white foundation. He opened it and tried to take out a handful of it, only for the bottle to drop, spilling all of the foundations away.


    His eyes suddenly went mad before he stared at the crying face of the little girl, and the tears were ruining more and more of his precious art work.


    "You worthless little mongrel! How dare you! How dare you! HOW DARE YOU!!" He raised his hand and slapped the little girl endlessly, until her face were full of blood. She was even choking on her own blood.


    He then stood up and started kicking her in the stomach, making her choke on her own blood more. But the pain she was currently feeling was unbearable. And that made her cry even more.


    "After, " another kick, "All I''ve done for you, " another kick in the stomach, "You dare say that you still want to be with your peasant of a mother!? How dare you!!"


    As he continued kicking her, he didn''t realized that her body was already lifeless. She''s dead from all of his kicking. Mostly because he also kicked her in the chest, directly into her heart and that made her heart stopped.


    He kicked, and kicked, and kicked, and kicked, until he finally noticed that the girl in front of him had already been dead awhile ago.


    The other girls could only look away as they saw one of them beaten to death, again. They didn''t want to cry, no, they cannot cry. Once they cry, it''s all over. Death is their only option.

 Chapter 49 - 46

    It''s been three days and only a few teams passed the Second Phase. Either they got killed by other contestants, or they got eaten alive by the monsters living inside the Forest of Death. But Hikaru definitely had something to do with the decreased numbers of teams. First, he took out the majority of teams there. Only around 8 teams were left because of that.


    Five from Konoha, One from Suna, One from Kumo, One from Oto.


    It was also thanks to Hikaru why the others passed, he basically just left the rest of the scrolls he stole from other teams on the very spot they stayed.


    He didn''t really care, they got their goal and that''s what really matters.


    Inside his room, he laid his back on his bed as he "sleep".


    Suddenly, without any warnings, he opened his eyes, revealing his dark eyes that has a red tint on the middle.


    He rose up from his bed as he held his head, as if he was having a headache.


    Earlier, he just died again fighting Manus. He thought he could take him on but that thought was squashed when he stood in front of the beast of the abyss. It was really strong, he could barely scratch it even with his strongest weapons. It had a very dense and tough skin.


    "I think I would need to use blunt weapons next but that can wait. The preliminaries is already starting." Hikaru said as he stood up to leave the room.


    His calm and collected face, his calculating eyes, and his guarded figure, it was as if his death earlier meant so little to him. Maybe it''s because he already got used to it?


    ( At the Exam Hall )


    Hikaru showed up suddenly between his teammates and along the other Konoha genins, surprising them all.


    "Gah, you surprised me!" Sasuke said.


    Sakura fell down a little before she fixed her posture.


    The rest were just mildly surprised.


    They all talked a little until the Hokage came out and proceeded to announce his speech. It was just all about the chuunin exams being a replacement for wars and stuff, before Hayate Gekko, the proctor, decided to take the lead.


    After a short speech from their proctor, he announced the preliminaries to begin.


    There was a large screen in the middle of the ceilings, and on it were the names of all of the Genins present.


    Hayate gave them a chance to forfeit and Kabuto immediately raised his hand. Shikamaru seems to have the same idea but he suddenly remembered his mother, he shivered, before he ultimately decided against that decision.


    On the other hand, Hikaru stared at the Kumo team. They were the ones who defeated his clone, albeit that clone of his was holding back, even so, a defeat is a defeat.


    There were three of them, two of them had red hairs. They were a boy and a girl, and the other had a darker tone of skin, different from his teammates tanned skin. The two red hairs seems to be siblings since they almost had the same face, and purple eyes. The other one had grey hair that had long bangs, a lazy-looking eyes, and he was quite tall. The other two were about the same height as Sasuke.


    The grey haired Kumo genin has a pretty big sword on his back The two red hairs had tantos on their waists. They may be all proficient in Kenjutsu, and they''re quite a threat to his team.


    Hayate stood in the middle of the arena and the large screen on top of the ceiling suddenly flashed before two names were picked.


    "Akimichi Choji vs Nara Shikamaru, please step down here on the arena, " Hayate announced.


    The two were quite surprised to see their names on the board but accepted it nonetheless. The two friends went down and faced each other.


    "Alright, start!" And just as Hayate announced the battle, Choji suddenly forfeited.


    "I forfeit, proctor. I don''t want to fight my best friend." Choji said as he munched on the ch.i.p.s he had on his hand.


    ''I was about to forfeit, too. What a drag." Shikamru thought as he scratched the back of his head.


    "F-fine, cough, the winner is Nara Shikamaru!" Hayate announced.\ but he coughed mid-way.


    The two returned back to their spots on top of the arena.


    The board then flashed another names.


    "Mizumi Tsurugi vs Kankuro, please come down to the arena." Hayate announced. It was pretty obvious that he was sick.


    The two came down and Hayate announced the battle to start before jumping back.


    After a few minutes or so, Kankuro''s opponent fainted because of the poisons he injected to his body via his puppet. He could''ve killed him there but he decided against it. Orochimaru might get a little upset.


    "Winner, Kankuro from Sunagakure!" After announcing that, the board then flashed another two names again.


    It was Tenten and Temari.


    Both of them jumped down towards the stage, where they both looked fiercely at each other. Seeing that the two were ready to fight, Hayate announced their battle to start before retreating.


    "So, I heard around here that you are a weapon expert. Care to show me?" Temari said as she readied her battle fan.


    Tenten smiled with confidence and said, "Of course, but you better be ready ''cause I''m not holding back!"


    She took out a scroll before she spread it out, and smokes after smokes poof out a variety of weapons. She then threw all of them towards Temari in high speed, some even doubt that she was a genin.


    "Hmph." Temari snorted before she waved her battle fan, deflecting all of her weapons but that was a bad move from her because almost of those weapons were connected to streams of exploding tags.


    When she noticed this, it was too late. All of the exploding tags planted by Tenten exploded everywhere.


    "Good job, Tenten!" Rock Lee shouted from up the stage along with Gai.


    The entire stage were covered by smoke before Temari waved her giant battle fan, dissipating the smoke created by those exploding tags.


    It was good that she managed to kawarimi just in time.


    "Tch, how did you survive that? No, it doesn''t matter. I''ll show you how a weapon master fights!" She said/


    She then threw four shurikens towards Temari, only for her it to missed as Temari smirked.


    "No way, Tenten missed!?" Rock Lee said in shock.


    Gai then squinted his eyes and said, "No, if you look a little closely, you would see that girl from Suna just dodged it, very easily if I say so myself."


    Temari decided to taunt her, "Is that the best you got? You won''t even be able to scratch me like that."


    "Don''t you underestimate me!" Tenten then ran around Temari before jumping upwards. She took out another scroll and she spreads it out in the air before flipping through the air as the scroll was spinning around her.


    Dozens upon dozens of various weapons were shot towards Temari as she spins in the air. Seeing this, Temari just opened her battle fan again before she deflected all of it easily.


    Up on the stage, Hikaru only turned his back around and said, "Tenten will lose. Obviously, Temari has the advantages. Tenten''s rapid throwing of weapons will only lead to futility."


    "How can you say that? She''s from Konoha, you know!" Rock Lee said, he was quite angry hearing someone say that about his friend.


    "Well, if you say so. But it doesn''t change a thing, she will still lose. If just throwing a bunch toys in mid-air can make you a shinobi, many would''ve succeeded a long time ago." Hikaru said harshly.


    "You take that back!" Rock Lee yelled at Hikaru in anger.


    Hikaru narrowed his eyes, seeing him do that, Kakashi decided to intervene.


    "Gai, can you do something about your student? I''ll take care of mine." Kakashi said to Gai with an eye smile.


    "Of course, my eternal rival! Lee, calm down. I''m sure young Hikaru here didn''t mean a word he said, " Gai told him as he tried calming him down.


    Hikaru snorted and just ignored them. He was still quite upset about losing all of his souls after he was killed by Manus. That was more than 5 Million, mind you. Anyone would be upset if they lose that kind of huge amount.


    And, just as he said a few moments ago, Tenten lost terribly to Temari. Even as far as using the technique she called, "Rising Dragons". Which was just another name for throwing a bunch of weapons towards her opponent. It was ridiculous, really.


    Seeing him this annoyed, his teammates worries about his opponent in the preliminaries. Imagine someone as strong as Hikaru your opponent.


    After Temari was taken by the medical staff, Hayate announced Temari as the winner. Tenten''s defeat was not as bad in the anime, Temari just made her faint after tiring her out. It may be because they''re basically prisoners of Konoha that she went easy on Tenten.


    Next, the board then flash two other names.


    Uchiha Sasuke vs Yoroi Akado.


    "Please come down the both of you." Hayate said.


    "Sasuke-kun, good luck." Sakura told him.


    Sasuke simply smiled and said, "Thank you, I''ll defeat him a hundred percent." With that, he left Sakura with hearts all over her eyes.


    On the other side of the stands was Orochimaru, who''s disguised as the Jounin-sensei of Yoroi and two others. He''s gritting his teeth in anger as he missed the chance to mark Sasuke with his cursed seal earlier in the forest of death. He simply couldn''t find him!


    ''Tch, it doesn''t matter. I heard Sasuke has some brother issues, maybe I will be able to take advantage of that. First, I need to mark him. That way it''ll be easier to get him to my side.'' Orochimaru thought deviously inside his head.


    As he stared at Sasuke, he didn''t realize that Hikaru was looking at him. It seems like he already got a gist of who he is.


    Seeing that snake present, Hikaru close his eyes and waited for his turn.


    In the fight, Sasuke had a rough start. It was because Yoroi was able to absorb his chakra just buy getting in contact with him, and that messed up his sharingan because his eyes needed chakra to be active. So he decided to turn it off and started to use long-range attacks, I.e Jutsus.


    After a few hits of his katon jutsus, he finally knocked him out with a simple taijutsu.


    "Winner, Uchiha Sasuke!" Hayate announced.


    Sasuke went up the to his team but he was a little tired. That fight with Yoroi definitely did some numbers on him.


    "Congratulations, Sasuke-kun! You won!" Sakura cheered for her beloved Sasuke.


    "Yeah, thanks. I''ll rest for now. Good luck with your fight, Sakura." He said as he sat beside the wall to rest a little.


    Next, it was Sakura''s turn to fight, Her opponent was Ino.


    They both went down and faced each other. Hayate announced the beginning of their fight and they got ready.


    Their fight was quite pathetic, actually. A few slaps here and there before they knocked each other out with a punch in the head.

 Chapter 50 - 47

    Next fight was between Kiba and Azumi.


    They both went down to the stage to faced each other.


    "Give up, dog boy. You''ll just humiliate yourself." Azumi said with a smirk.


    "Grr, you better not underestimate me! You were just a deadlast back in the academy!" Kiba yelled and Akamaru barked.


    "Whatever you say, dog boy. Don''t say I didn''t warn you." Azumi said.


    "Get ready, the both of you. Three, two, one, start!" The proctor announced before retreating back as to not to disturb them.


    Azumi did not want to use the new sword that her Darling gave her, partly because she did not want it to get dirty, instead she brought the Corvian Claws.


    Azumi smiled sadistically as she brought the two dangerous claws together before infusing them with her Futon element, giving them even more sharpness.


    "Let''s see how you pair against my claws. Will you die or will you survive? Let''s find out!" Azumi yelled crazily as she appeared in front of Kiba with a sudden burst of speed.


    "What!?" Kiba couldn''t react in just the right time but still managed to dodge due to pure instinct, resulting him almost being pierced by her claws.


    "C''mon, c''mon, c''mon!" Slash after slash of her claws wounded Kiba, he did not had enough speed. Normally, an Inuzuka could''ve dodge this kinds of attacks, that is if Azumi was normal. Hikaru trained her speed more than anything in the past, that''s why she''s able to use the claws so efficiently.


    "Where''s your previous courage, huh!?" Azumi taunted as she continued swounding him with her claws. Akamaru couldn''t even help him, if he does, he will get caught up in her barrage of claw attacks, maybe resulting him to being mincemeat.


    Up on the stand.


    When Kurenai saw this, she couldn''t help but look at Kakashi and yelled, "Stop her, Kakashi! She''ll kill him!"


    Kakashi scratched his face nervously and said, "Uh, yeah, about that. Only Hikaru can control her, so maybe you should go talk to him?"


    "What!? What are you doing then!? Go talk to him!" Kurenai screamed.


    ''God, so overbearing.'' Kakashi thought as he opened his book to ignore her.


    Seeing that Kakashi would likely do nothing, she turned her head towards Hikaru, who had his back against the wall with his arms crossed.


    Hikaru sensed her looking at him, and he knew that she will ask him to stop Azumi from killing her student. He looks down on the stage, and Kiba was getting his butt kicked by her. There were deep cuts everywhere in his body, and seeing that he will likely die soon, Hikaru decided to intervene.


    "Azumi, that''s enough." He told her and his voice reverberated throughout the hall.


    Hearing her beloved''s voice, Azumi stopped torturing Kiba and left the stage. Her opponent was barely conscious and his back had already touched the ground. Hayate decided to stop it here and announce her victory when Kiba suddenly slowly rose up.


    "Who... said... that you... could leave? I will beat you!" Kiba yelled with his last battle cry as he swallowed a pill along with Akamaru.


    Akamaru transformed into him as they got ready to use his jutsu.


    "Do you really want to die that badly? Then I''ll give you a beating you will never forget!" Azumi said as she charged with her claws ready to pierce him.


    "Beast Human Taijutsu Art: Fang Over Fang!" Kiba yelled one last time as he and his dog became drills. They rotated in mid-air so fast that they became like cyclones as they rushed towards Azumi.


    "Futon: Kazakama!" Imbued with her wind element, she slashed her claws towards the cyclones and multiple gigantic wind scythes came out rushing towards the duo.


    As both jutsus were about to clash, someone suddenly intervened.


    "Didn''t I say to stop fighting?" A very apathetic Hikaru suddenly appeared in the middle of the jutsus, and just as they were about reach him, they were both stopped by an invisible barrier, resulting Kiba and Akamaru to crash towards it.


    When he fell to the ground, Kiba was knocked out. Akamaru was somewhat conscious.


    Azumi removed her claws as she scratched the back of her head sheepishly and said, "Gomen, gomen."


    "You''ve already won, let''s go up. The proctor should be announcing it soon." Hikaru said as he held Azumi''s hand and went towards the stairs.


    Hayate narrowed his eyes at Hikaru and said, "Young man, if you intervene in a fight again, I''ll have to disqualify you. Consider this a warning."


    Hikaru did not look back, he only nodded his head before continuing towards the stairs.


    Kurenai already went down to pick up Kiba and bring him to the medics. He was badly wounded all over his body, he would have to stay in the hospital for several weeks before he''s able to fight again.


    Winner, Uzumaki Azumi!


    Next fight was between Hinata and Neji.


    As soon as the proctor started their match, they charged towards each other to fight in taijutsu. For awhile, they were even, that was until Hinata used Katon jutsus.


    Surprisingly, Hinata had affinity for fire and lightning elements. They were pretty strong, too.


    But she only used one Katon jutsu before using Hakke Hyakunijuuhachishou. (Eight Divination Signs: 128 Palms of the Hand). Sealing all of his tenketsu points.


    But that disadvantage did not stop Neji from expressing his hatred towards the main family of the Hyuga Clan. Going as far as showing the seal on his forehead. With one last struggle, he unblocked all of his tenketsu points with his chakra. He was weakened and could no longer fight that well.


    In the end, he was defeated by Hinata as she used her taijutsu.


    Winner, Hyuga Hinata!


    Up on the stands.


    "I didn''t think Neji would reveal his deepest secret." Rock Lee muttered to himself. Gai and Tenten were not here. Gai carried Neji to the medics and Tenten''s still unconscious.


    The board then flashed two other names again.


    This time, it''s Hikaru and Haru.


    "Hikaru Hiroaki and Uzumaki Haru. Please come down." Hayate said.


    They both went down, and Hikaru seems more eager this time.


    ''Finally, I could relieve some stress. Let''s see how he can fair against me. Since they could defeat my clone, he must be pretty strong. But an Uzumaki in Kumo? That''s a surprise.'' Hikaru thought as prepared some fire spells he''s going to use against this guy.


    They faced each other while 10 meters away from each other. They both stared at each other''s eyes.


    "So, you and your team managed to defeat my clone." Hikaru said.


    Haru widened his eyes before it went back to normal and said, "You were the one who created that clone? Tch, just my luck." He cursed under his breath.


    "Though, it''s a surprise that there''s an Uzumaki in Kumo. I think you''ve seen my partner earlier, the one with the blonde hair." Hikaru kept on talking.


    "Yeah, another Uzumaki, I thought me and my sister were the only ones left. Apparently not. Are you gonna battle or are you just going to babble?" Haru said annoyed. Truthfully, inside, he''s feeling a little scared at his opponent in front of him. He''s a natural sensor, and so is his sister, so he could sense the amount of chakra this guy has. And man, it''s huge. It''s almost half of a tailed beast''s entire chakra storage.


    (Note: 200 Chakra in stats is around one tailed beast chakra. Though some of it were different but it''s still like that.)


    "No, no, don''t worry. The battle will start soon. Just try to not get burned alive later." Keeping it vague, he smiled an actor''s smile.


    ''Must be some Katon jutsu, I should prepare myself. I should probably use Suiton to counter his Katon.'' Haru said inside his thoughts.


    "Remember, even though killing is allowed, it''s still frowned upon by the village. Now, ready for a clean and clear fight, Begin!" The then proctor jumps back.


    As soon as the fight started, Haru threw three explosive kunais towards Hikaru.


    But Hikaru just caught it easily before throwing it back to Haru shortly after.


    Seeing this, Haru widened his eyes before he dodged it, albeit barely.


    Haru then weaved several hand signs before throwing a suiton jutsu.


    "Suiton: Water Ball Jutsu!" Water balls came out of his mouth and rushed at Hikaru in great speed.


    "Sigh, I should''ve known." With one wave of his right hand, he made a fire wall that evaporated the water balls.


    "Wha...? How can that be?" Haru said in shock as he saw his opponent create a katon jutsu without any hand signs.


    "Weak, you are weak. I should just end this as soon as possible." Hikaru said in disappointment.


    "Hey, what do you mean by that!?" Haru asked in anger.


    "You''ll see." Hikaru slowly rose up through the air, shocking everyone in the hall.


    "I''ll show you one of my greatest creations, you should be honored." Hikaru looked down at Haru as he said that. He brought his hand up in the air.


    Suddenly, a huge fireball the size of the entire stadium appeared on top of Hikaru hand and the fireball melted the ceilings to create more space. Not a single thing were left in the ceilings. Almost all of it were melted by the huge fireball before the very fireball was suddenly compressed into the size of an a.d.u.l.t''s hand.


    All of the people in the stand were in awe, and some of them were terrified. The heat radiating from that fireball was unbearable. It was as if they were near the sun itself.


    "Oh, don''t be surprised by just that. I''ll show you even more flashier moves." With that being said, he created dozens of huge fireballs in the sky, now that the ceilings were gone, before compressing them into the same size as the previous fireball.


    "Now, to gather them." Hikaru said. The hot fireballs gathered behind him like the truth seeking orbs in the anime.


    "Haru, was it? If you can survive this fireballs of mine, you may live. I was contemplating whether to end this soon but I just decided to play with you. Try not to die, okay?" Hikaru said while smiling sadistically. His eyes were getting redder and redder, as if madness was concealed behind those eyes.


    For Haru, he feels like this is going to be his grave if he doesn''t forfeit. But his Uzumaki pride won''t just give up. If he gives up now, how could he avenge his parents? No, to avenge his parents, he first need to be alive!


    "Proctor, I forf- holy!" The fireball behind Hikaru was already speeding in mid-air towards him threateningly.


    "Shit! Proctor, I forfeit!" He shouted with every last of his strength but the fireball didn''t stopped. It continued as mini fireballs, too, shot from it.


    "Hiroaki! Stop!" Hayate shouted in alarm when he saw him not stopping even after his opponent forfeited.


    It went out of his plans that his opponent would actually forfeit. He forgot about it, and that made him even more mad.


    "Tch, fine." Hikaru took out a pure blue bottle and drank it. It was the Hidden Blessing. He felt his mana regenerate at a much more fast phase after drinking the thing. He canceled his pyromancy after regenerating all of his mana back.


    Hikaru flew towards the stand and landed between the Konoha teams.


    Haru, while nearly dodging the hot fireball, was left with some burnt marks on his body.


    "Are you okay, Haru?" Yugito jumped down from the stands as she picked up Haru worriedly.


    "Yeah, I almost died though. That crazy son of a bitch really wanted to kill me, and I couldn''t even do anything." Haru said bitterly as he punched the ground.


    Yugito stared at him worriedly.

 Chapter 51 - I really dont know...

    I''ve been thinking a lot recently about this fanfic. It''s obviously bad and one of the reasons is that I didn''t plan it, unlike others. I really don''t know whether I should drop it or not, I mean, this fanfic is already blacklisted, isn''t it? It''ll probably result in more headache if I continue this fanfiction.


    I don''t know, maybe it will return soon? I really don''t know. I''ll wait for it, maybe it''ll return soon. But since this is just a really bad fanfiction, WN would probably not care. They''ll just say, "Meh."


    For the time being, I will plan a fanfiction and post it in fanfiction.net, maybe? I''ll still post here from time to time. It has gotten messy, really.


    Hmm, I really don''t know. Maybe it''s just the way we are?


    No matter, I''ll stick you into my prayers.


    A fine dark soul to you...


    COMMENT 19 comments Load failed, please RETRY Privileged


    More Privileged Chapters


    Download the app and become a privileged reader today! Come take a sneak peek at our author''s stockpiled chapters! Download 19 Table of Contents Display Options


    Background default yellow dark


    Font Nunito Sans Merriweather


    Size


    Paragraph comments Chapter comments Write thought login liked newest Author:


    ? 0){ %>Chapter :


    Author: Machine Translation


    Editor:

 Chapter 52 - 47

    (Note: I''ll just skip the other fights. I don''t want to drag this as long as it is.)


    After a few moments, Gai, Neji, and Tenten returned to the hall since it was still not over for Team Gai. There''s still Lee, who''s really eager to fight in the stage.


    The next fight was between Gaara and Rock Lee.


    At first, you could see Gaara completely dominating the battle. Rock Lee couldn''t hit him no matter what he did because of the auto-sand defense mechanism of his.


    That is until Lee dropped the weights on his legs, which was restraining his speed this whole time. At first, some people mocked him because of that but when he dropped his weights on the ground, they were shocked. Not only the ground caved in when the weights landed, but it also cause a huge amount of dust to rise up from the ground. To hold that much weight on his legs, even Hikaru was quite impressed by this simple feat... Well, as impressed as a nearly immortal being with almost overpowered strength could.


    Truthfully, Hikaru is like a living god in this world right now. He''s stronger than Madara and Hashirama combined, can destroy an entire mountain if he wanted to, heck, he could even separate the oceans if he''s given the chance. The only thing that poses a threat to him right now are the tailed beasts. But that is until he maximize his stats. He would literally be a living god by then.


    That weird disembodied voice said to him that once he passes the limits of his stats, I.e 99, he would transform into a god. He would still be undead but he will have the strengths of a god. No one, absolutely no one would be able to defeat him in the multiverse except the other gods, once he passes the limits of his stats.


    He would become a divine being, albeit still capable to be killed but a divine being nonetheless. Though, death was never a problem for him anyway, he could simply die and be back in the next second.


    In short, he may be the most overpowered being in the entire multiverse, his potential at least.


    All of the things he''s doing right now is simply for... Azumi. The Wave, money, to ensure that she won''t die in the exams, he joined it. Everything is simply for Azumi to live a better life, though sometimes, some of his emotions gets in the way. He won''t deny the fact that he''s simply too overprotective over her, I mean, if somebody even tries to touch a piece of her hair, he would literally kill them.


    But it doesn''t change the fact that she''s happy right now. She has everything, all she needs is right there. He simply cares too much about her.


    Anyway, back on the fight.


    Barrage after barrage, Lee continued assaulting Gaara with his taijutsu and again and again, he was stopped by Gaara''s auto-sand defense mechanism. But Gaara could see them, his moves, he can see them. He was trained in taijutsu too, when he was young by Yashamaru. He later killed him when he tried to kill him when he was sitting on top of a building, looking at the moon.


    ''He''s fast, I''ll give him that. But since the Hokage put some sort of seal on me, my mind has been clearer and more productive. I''m better than ever. Now, it''s time to show him my real strength.'' Gaara thought behind his sand defense as Lee continued his assault.


    With a thought, Gaara exploded his sands everywhere, some of it got into Lee''s eyes, making him blind for a moment.


    Taking his time, Gaara removes his sand armor for faster movements.


    He took a deep breath as everybody felt the air changed into some kind of pressure. He slowly formed a taijutsu stance, which is kinda mixed between crane and mantis style. The giant gourd behind his back transformed into sand before it slowly crawled towards his arm, slowly forming into some kind of arm guard.


    Most of the contestants were surprise to see him form a weird taijutsu stance. But his siblings were not surprised at all because they have already seen how good his taijutsu is.


    Rock Lee finally got the sands out of his eyes, and saw his opponent ready to strike him with the two of his hands.


    "What!?" Lee dodged his attack, only for it to continue. He couldn''t get a breathing space because of how fast Gaara was.


    The sheer agility of Gaara''s attacks bugged Lee''s mind. He tried finding a way out, he even tried moving backward but Gaara''s complex foot work always manages to catch him.


    ''He''s fast, the only way to defeat him is by using the inner gates but that would only be my trump card. I''ll use the reverse lotus to defeat him.'' Lee planned in his thoughts as he continued to dodge Gaara''s attacks.


    Suddenly, when he stepped onto Gaara''s sands on the ground, it suddenly gripped his legs tightly with no chance of breaking it.


    "What!?" Lee reacted as he felt the sands below him tightening.


    Gaara took this chance to rapidly attack him with short and graceful attacks on his chest, and after Gaara was finished with his assault, he then spread out his arms before he back flipped and kicked Rock Lee on his chin, resulting him being kicked away by Gaara.


    The son of the Kazekage landed gracefully on his feet as he saw Lee vomiting blood at a distance.


    Gaara looked at him and said coldly, "Give it up, you''re clearly no match for me. I have my sands everywhere on the stage, making me able to make traps on a whim. You''re strong, that''s for sure but you just encountered the wrong opponent."


    Rock Lee vomited blood before finally standing up as he wipes his mouth with hsi wrist. He smirked and said, "I will never give up! Because that is my ninja way!"


    On top of the stage.


    "I can''t believe it. He really mastered two styles of the legendary martial arts! The Crane and Mantis Style!'' Gai exclaimed in shocked.


    Neji looks at his teacher in confusion and asks, "Crane and Mantis Style? What are those?"


    "Those two styles were created after observing those two animals for almost a decade. They then turned it into a fighting style. But for a kid no older than 14 to master those two, he must be really talented. Coupled with his ability to control sands, he will become a fearsome monster in the future. But right now, Lee is in a total disadvantage. His opponent knows two special taijutsu and can use chakra, while Lee only has his taijutsu." Gai explained to his student.


    Neji turned his head to look at the stage again and muttered, "Lee..."


    Back on the stage.


    "I have no choice!" Lee roared as he crossed his arm.


    "Hachimon Tenkou, Kai! Kaimon! Kyumon! Seimon! Shomon!" With each gate released, the chakra around him slowly formed into an invisible force as it raised the earth below him. The wind spiraled in the stage with him in the center.


    In one go, he opened 4 gates!


    His hair rose up and his skin turned red while the pupils in his eyes were gone.


    "Prepare yourself, Gaara!" Rock Lee suddenly disappeared from Gaara''s field of vision.


    "What!?" Gaara reacted too late as he was suddenly flung into the air before his sand defense could form around him.


    Rock Lee had kicked him into the air!


    Lee then kicked him again in mid-air before appearing again behind him in mid-air as he treated Gaara like ping pong ball.


    When he kicks him, he would appear where he kicked Gaara and kicks him again in mid-air.


    Since he had no sand armor on, he took the damages head on. Thankfully, Gaara''s body''s quite strong thanks to all the strength training exercises he did back then., so he could tank some of Lee''s attacks.


    On the stands.


    "Go Lee, make your youth shine the brightest!!" Gai yelled to encourage his student.


    Kakashi''s face grew serious as he said to Gai, "You really taught him that, Gai? You know how dangerous it is. If he pushes his body too far, he might just die, Gai."


    Gai then stops his cheering and replied back, "You can''t tell me what to do with my student, Kakashi. Lee wanted this, so I taught him all the things I know, resulting him being one of the world''s greatest taijutsu users."


    "But at what cost, Gai! From what I''ve seen, he just activated four gates in one go! Do you know how much stress is gonna be put in his body once that the gates dies?" Kakashi berated him angrily.


    "You have no right, Kakashi. He''s my student, he was prepared to do anything at any cost just to become a great shinobi." Gai said, slightly angry at Kakashi for berating him.


    Kakashi just kept silent and did not talk much anymore. He just continued to watch the battle in front of him.


    Sakura, meanwhile, is between the two of them. It was too much of a pressure as she felt the anger of these two. She then moved away next to her teammates.


    At the fight.


    ''Am I really going to lose?'' Gaara thought as he shielded himself again against Rock Lee''s punch, only to be blown away.


    His face was filled with blood and his body was full of bruise due to all the hits he''s taken from Rock Lee. They were in mid-air, so he couldn''t use most of his sands. He needed just one chance, just one chance is enough to beat Lee.


    And it came.


    Rock Lee wraps him around with the bandages on his hands and he then rotated him fast in mid-air before crashing down towards the ground.


    "Reverse Lotus!" Rock Lee yelled his technique.


    Boom!


    A huge part of the center stage was broken into a thousand pieces as the both of them crashed towards it.


    Rock Lee jumps off just a little away from Gaara before his inner gates disappeared, returning him to his normal look.


    On the center of the debris made by the Reverse Lotus of Lee, was Gaara who seems to be unconscious.


    Everyone on Konoha''s side smiled, seeing that the kid won but their joys were short lived when Gaara suddenly opened his eyes widely before slowly standing up on top of a cloud of sands.


    "That was dangerous, if I haven''t used my sand to form a cushion underneath me I would''ve broke a lot of bones in my body." Gaara said as stood on top of his sands. He seems to be weaker though, his breathing pattern seems to have hastened a lot. On top of that, his body was filled with injuries.


    Meanwhile, Lee was laying on the ground, already nearing unconscious. A lot of his bones were already broken from using too much of his inner gates.


    In short, his extremely vulnerable right now.


    Gaara looks down at him and said, "But seeing you already so weak and vulnerable, I''ll give you a chance to give up. You''re already too weak. A simple sand attack could kill you right now."


    "Lee, just give up!" Gai shouted from the stands.


    Lee slowly stood up and you can clearly hear him chuckling, albeit weakly.


    "He...he...he... give up? Those words are not in my dictionary. I''m never giving up, ''cause that is my ninja way!" Lee shouted at the top of his lungs, emmiting an invisible pressure that Gaara could only feel.


    Gaara stared at him coldly and said with a freezing voice, "Then so be it. Die."


    With one wave of his hand, his sands came rushing towards Rock Lee, ready to crush him into mincemeat.


    Whoosh! Boom!


    Gai appeared in front of Lee and vanished the sands with a swipe of his hand.


    "Stop, he has already loss. There''s no need to continue this battle." Gai said to Gaara.


    He only snorted and turned his back away before he returned to his team.


    Gai then went down at the height of Lee, and was about to speak, when he saw no signs of consciousness in Lee''s eyes.


    Earlier, when he spoke those words, he was already unconscious. Only with pure will power was he able to speak those words and emit an invisible pressure towards Gaara.


    Gai hugged his student and cried, "What have I done?"

 Chapter 53 - 48

    After the battle, Rock Lee suffered tremendous damage to his body. Because of overusing the inner gates, he''s right arm and right leg were crushed under the heavy force of the inner gates. He is now practically a cripple. The medics said that he could no longer continue his life as a shinobi and could only live the rest of his life as civilian.


    Gai, of course, refused to accept this. He begged the medics to do something but the only thing he got was a shake of a head. They were not skilled enough to heal this kind of injuries, they said.


    The Sandaime ordered his doton user shinobis to fix the stage since it was so broken because of the fight earlier.


    Hikaru, meanwhile, thought about building a force like the Abyss Watchers. He realized that he will leave this world eventually and by then, there would be no one left to protect Azumi. Almost the entire population of Konoha hates her, and she only has a few people on her side. He may be overacting but this is only one of his ways to protect her, he still has other plans.


    He plan to buy the primordial crystal from the system to make Azumi immortal like him, the same crystal that Seath used to become immortal like his brethren. But the thing is, the cost of that thing is massive. It was 5 Billion Souls. He could barely get a hundred million souls for three years and 5 Billion? Don''t even get him started.


    But, there are still a disadvantage from using the primordial crystal. It''s easy to break, you can clearly see that when you fought Seath in a boss fight. One hack of a sword and it''s broken. That''s why he also plans to use the titanite ore to create a protective shell around it, and also, he wants to make it so that it looks like a ring.


    The Titanite ore is the ore of gods, it maybe be one of the most powerful ore in existence. And he has a lot of it in his inventory, around 10 stacks of slabs. That would be around a thousand titanite slabs. With it, he will craft a perfect shell around the primordial crystal once he manages to get his hands on the thing. But he''s still so far away from reaching that goal, he doesn''t have jackshit in his souls.


    That''s why, until that time, he''ll have to build an army that can oppose any force in this world while maintaining their loyalties towards him and Azumi.


    That''s why he needs talented individuals. Someone like Hinata, Neji, or Sasuke.


    Of course, that army of his will have another goal aside from protecting Azumi.


    And that is to stop the Otsutsuki Clan.


    He had found traces of them around this world and the Yokais also helped by telling him all about them.


    (Note: He died around 2015 - 2016. so he did not see the end of Naruto. All he knows is from the Manga, where he figured out what happened in some events. Like the plans of Madara and who the man behind the mask is. But I may have changed some of the timelines in Earth. That''s right, I''m not only making a fanfic about animes and games, I''m also making a fanfic about earth. You''ll see that in the later chapters).


    And I tell you, they were everywhere. From horns to carcasses of the members of that clan. He even found some on the moon after taking a flight near it, just to experience what''s like to be in space. His name was Toneri Otsutsuki.


    He seems to have this unhealthy obsession towards Hinata and that worries him quite a bit. Hinata is one of his closest friends in Konoha, save from Shino. That shaggy haired guy would usually stalk her while she''s in the Hyuga Compound, he meant that he would leave the moon and land on this world from time to time.


    He seems to be around the same age as everybody else, around 14 or so.


    At first, when they met, they fought each other. Hikaru defeated him very easily, I think it was last year when he went to the moon. He seems to have the battle prowess of a kage and knew almost all the chakra elements in this world.


    He wanted to kill him but decided to spare him when the old man by his side begged him not to. It seems like that old man was not longed in this world any longer. He''ll die soon, Hikaru thought.


    He never went there again but from time to time, he would sense Toneri watching Hinata from a distance.


    As he fell into deep thought, he didn''t realize that the preliminaries was already over until his teammates snapped him out of it.


    Here''s the quick match.


    Aburame Shino vs Zaku Abumi - Shino won.


    Tsuchi Kin vs Uzumaki Airi(Haru''s sister) - Airi won.


    Kinuta Dosu vs Darui - Dosu won, albeit barely.


    Now, there are eleven. contestants going to the semi-finals.


    Hikaru, Azumi, Sasuke, Shikamaru, Temari, Airi, Dosu, Shino, Hinata, Gaara, Kankuro.


    They were then ordered to draw numbers from a slot box. The corresponding number from the previous one will have to fight in the finals. For example, 1 vs 2, 3 vs 4, 5 vs 6, 7 vs 8, 9 vs 10. The odd number will then proceed to the finals without fighting anyone.


    And so, they all formed a line to draw respectively.


    First to draw was Temari and she got number 5.


    Second to draw was Shikamaru and he got number 6, he shivered slightly.


    Third to draw was Azumi and she got number 1.


    Hinata was next to draw and she got number 2, she got a slight glare coming from Azumi.


    Sasuke drew next and got number 3.


    Gaara was next and he got number 4.


    Airi drew next and she got 7.


    Shino drew next and got number 8, he looked at Airi and they nodded at each other.


    Kankuro drew 10.


    Dosu drew 9.


    And that left Hikaru with the number eleven, thus he advanced to the finals without battling, which pissed him off slightly.


    Hayate stood in front of them as he announces, "So, here are the battle match ups for the semi-finals of the chuunin exams."


    He then proceeded to reveal a paper, in which said:


    Temari vs Shikamaru.


    Azumi vs Hinata.


    Sasuke vs Gaara.


    Airi vs Shino.


    Kankuro vs Dosu.


    Hikaru will fight whoever wins in fight 5.


    The Hokage then announced that the finals will start next month to give them enough time to train and recuperate their injuries.


    They were then taken by their teachers to train them but Hikaru and Azumi decided to stay behind. Hikaru decided to train Azumi himself, it''s probably going to be more effective than a perverted cyclops who''ve never trained genins before. He literally doesn''t even train himself anymore, that''s why his skills had deteriorated over this pass years.


    He let him take Sakura and Sasuke while both of him and Azumi went to their house to rest. Well, Hikaru''s just gonna grind again for Souls and other items. Truthfully, he has a huge amount of items in his item box right now. He could say that it could fill 1/3 of the entire landscape of Konoha if he lets it all out, maybe more.


    When they got back, Azumi immediately crash herself onto her bed while Hikaru decided to leave for a moment.


    He left Azumi because it''s so obvious that she''s tired while he, an immortal undead, can regain his whole stamina in less than ten seconds.


    When he got out of his house, he instantly shot up towards the top of the Hokage mountain in a burst of speed. In less than a few seconds, he was already there.


    He sat on top of the Hokage mountain as he gazed at the dusk as it swallowed the sun. This is a place where he can feel a peace of mind.


    And of course, someone would always break it.


    "Hiroaki, my offer still stands." An old voice said behind him.


    "You know Danzo, you have always been an annoyance. Do you want me to get rid of you as well?" Hikaru said without turning his back because he knew the one who''s balls were so large that he decided to once threaten him to join his Root Foundation.


    "Hmph, schemes and such won''t work against me, boy." Danzo emphasize on "boy".


    Behind Hikaru was an old man who''s right eye and right arm are covered by bandages. He has black short hair, an old wrinkled face, and he wears a white and black haori.


    Also, Danzo still doesn''t know how strong Hikaru is, and if he did, he would only thought of his strength to be around Jounin level at best. Hikaru thinks that it''s because of his age the reason why Danzo underestimate him so much. He could kill this old man and no one would know. Hiruzen might get slightly angry at him, which he doubts.


    The only reason he is still breathing was because Hiruzen begging him not to. That Sandaime may be somewhat of a dictator but for some reason, for some f.u.c.k.i.n.g reason, he has this soft part for his former teammates.


    "Danzo, don''t push me into joining your stupid Root. I hold no love for this village and the only reason I''m still here is because of Azumi and some other people. Always remember that the moment something happens to Azumi, this entire village will be burnt to the ground by myself. And you will be in the center of it." Hikaru said threatiningly before disappearing in a burst of speed.


    Staring at where Hikaru was before, Danzo said, "Hmph, that''s why you have been always a flight risk. Such a shame I would have to kill a very talented child." He then turned around and left the mountain, not noticing that a small part of his face was blackened.

 Chapter 54 - 49

    n a foggy room, not even a shadow exists in that room, only pure emptiness can be seen. The white fog traveled through the air before a portal at the size of a door appeared in the middle of the room. It was a black mystical portal, it seems like there was no light emanating from it.


    Suddenly, a person walks through that mystical portal.


    He is a tall man with no dirtiness that can be seen on his face. His feet long white hair mystically floated as his feet did not touch the surface of that foggy room. He wore a long white and blue robe and had this scholarly aura emanating from him. And his face was quite too perfect. He seems to be the lady''s man that can be seen around almost at every bar. He also has this piercing red eyes that seem to see right through the soul.


    He then stood at the center before quietly speaking, "I have come again, I hope you don''t mind."


    Then, the disembodied voice replied after a few moments of silence, "Kiran, what are you doing here, again?:


    Kiran smiled ever so slightly before he said, "I wanted to meet the new inheritor of the Dark Souls System. It''s been 5 billion years since I had that thing in my hands but I don''t miss it. I had traveled around the infinite multiverse and made quite a few families on my own, but they died in the end. How''s Zain doing?"


    "Zain''s fine, as fine as a hollowed immortal is. He seemed to have holed himself inside a giant library made of the pictures of all the families he''d made over these many years. I just hope he won''t go full hollow, or else, many of the universes in the multiverse will be destroyed simply by a flick of his fingers." The disembodied voice said.


    Kiran frowned and said, "If only I could end his suffering, unfortunately my strength is simply far too below than him. I am at least half as strong as him when I let go of the System. Back then, he was still sane. I just hope I won''t turn out like him."


    A silence occurred for a moment before the voice said, "You didn''t just come here to meet him and talk to me like this, are you?"


    Kiran smiled and said, "Of course not, I''m here to speak about what you did to the newcomer''s body. I have seen it and I still couldn''t examine what''s going on. He''s rising in power way too fast. When I was in that stage, I was only able to reach the stats of 40. So, what did you do?"


    The disembodied voice chuckled slightly and said, "I modified his body."


    "You what?" Kiran asked in confusion.


    "I modified his body to be perfect at everything. He can learn techniques 10 times faster than most of the talented prodigies, I gave him a very creative mind to create various spells of his own. I gave him the power to survive the torture of death a million times more than you two. In short, even after letting go of the system, he will not break, unlike you two. I also gave him something else, an ability that all of the current and past gods fear."


    Kiran widened his eyes slightly before he chuckled threateningly, "So you gave him THAT ability?


    "Yes, but not only that, I also gave him another ability. With that, maybe you could achieve your dream for Zain to get killed. He has gone on for too long, soon, he will go hollow. And I can''t have that. We''re already changing too much in the multiverse and if we change even more, the other gods will have their eyes on you and Hikaru soon." The disembodied voice said.


    Kiran scowled and said, "So be it, I can kill them without lifting a finger. They''ve grown too weak than the older gods."


    "You know you can''t kill them, right? It will change the very nature of a planet or worse, the universe itself where they reside." The voice said.


    "Hmph, don''t teach me what I already know because it doesn''t matter. I''m an immortal now, I can create life and death if I have to. I can build an entire planet if I have to. I can build a universe If I want to. I''m already stronger than you. You don''t have to tell me things that I already know. I''ll kill them If I want to. You know I''m very short-tempered, right?" Kiran said with arrogance dripping off his voice.


    The disembodied voice went silent and when Kiran saw that it was no longer wanting to speak with him, he snorted before making a portal to get out of the foggy room.


    And like nothing happened, the room went silent. Not even a pin''s drop can be heard.


    (With Hikaru)


    Hikaru stood in front of 10 Black Knights in a white room larger than anything. You can see that they were no normal black knights, he can feel their power radiating off from their bodies.


    Hikaru kept silent as he strategically observed them all.


    Knowing that he can beat them, he readied his fighting stance before he shot towards them at a speed that surpasses the speed of sound, maybe even going towards the speed of light.


    Before the black knights could react, Hikaru jumped up before he spanned in the air and grabbed the head of a black knight and twisted it along with himself.


    When he landed on the ground, the Black Knight''s head was no longer attached to itself, Hikaru now held his entire head on his hand.


    He then charged towards them again as he threw away the head. The Black Knights this time were prepared but Hikaru only took two of their giant greatswords before he cut two of them from the waist down.


    ''I''m already stronger than them. They''re all above Kage level, so this means that I can take on multiple Kage level shinobis in the shinobi world. That''s good to know.''


    Without wasting time any longer, he swiped both of giant greatswords on his hands and cut off all the Black Knights'' from the waist down.


    Now, he finally was able to earn just enough souls.


    [Congratulations on winning the fight. Here''s your reward from the system]


    [1,000,000 Souls, 20 Humanities, a part of the summoning stone for a Black Knight]


    [You have obtained all the parts of the Black Knight''s summoning stone, would you like to combine it? Yes/No]


    Hikaru pressed [Yes] instantly. Now, he has finally managed to get that Black Knight''s stone. It''s a very rare drop from the system, and the chance to get it is just around 0.30%, so you can see how much he had suffered just to get that summoning stone.


    He has around 10 Million Souls, so now, he will level up a few times before buying lots and lots of items from the System.


    In a few moments, he started disappearing from the arena and before long, he was gone.


    ( Real World )


    As Hikaru woke up he suddenly felt something weighing on top of him. He opened his eyes and saw Azumi all sweaty as she bounced her ass off his p.e.n.i.s up and down.


    Her petite body was devoid of all clothings, all he could see was her perfection.


    He suddenly rose up and hugged her petite body, surprising her slightly.


    "I told you not to do it while I''m asleep, Azumi." Hikaru said with a slight smile.


    "But I just couldn''t help it, you know? Nevermind that, let''s go wild tonight." Azumi replied with a seductive smirk on her face.


    "We''re always wild." Without any hesitations, Hikaru immediately made out with her for hours upon hours. They did not rest, not even a second.


    ( A Few Days Later, August 26 )


    It''s time for Hikaru to go to the birthday event of Hinata''s grandfather. He dressed up to look more noble. He wore a black colored Chester''s clothes and fixed his hair to look more smoother. He then took a cane with a giant ruby on top of it to look more richer and noble. And lastly, with the last finishing touch, he was ready to go.


    Hikaru decided to bring Azumi to the party, surely, Hinata will not shoo her away. He bought her the most beautiful dress in Konoha. It was an orange strapless dress made from the finest silk in all of the Elemental Nation. Not even the richest person here on Konoha could afford that even if they have the money, because the person selling this was a bit¡­ eccentric.


    He hired the greatest fashion designers in Konoha to make Azumi look even more beautiful. Even when she had no makeup, she was a goddess. Now that she has makeup on, she looks even more beautiful than before. She''s like a fairy who seems to have descended from the heavens. Though, she''s still a twelve year old, so it would be weird if he said all that in public. Imagine the embarrassment.


    And her whisker marks only made her cuter.


    He stood in front of her and said as he extended his hand towards her, "Shall we go, mylady?"


    "Of course." She took his hand and went out of their house.


    Just outside their house was a beautiful caravan. It was carved with the finest gold and made from the hardest woods to exist in this world. Hikaru made that specifically just for this day. Four horses were ready to go attached in the front of the caravan. On the driver''s seat was the Black Knight that he summoned through the summoning stone.


    Dozens of people gazed at them in envy, some with even more burning jealousy. They were just children and yet, they''re richer than any people in the village. Hikaru could clearly see that but paid them no mind.


    Where were they when Hikaru took care of himself and Azumi? They rose up completely on their own. And with these riches, Azumi could live the rest of her mortal life with no problems.


    He ignored them as they walked elegantly and entered gracefully on the caravan.


    He is going to make a big show in that party today!

 Chapter 55 - 50

    A Caravan nobler than anything around it arrived in front of the gates of the Hyuga Clan, from that Hikaru and Azumi revealed themselves as they came out of the noble caravan right behind them. The Black Knight, who was riding the horse, stepped down and kneeled down in front of them.


    Hikaru held her hand gently as they both went towards the front gate, which was guarded by two Hyuga shinobis.


    When they came closer to the gate, one of the guards stopped them.


    "Halt, what is the business of you two here?" The guard asked.


    Hikaru took out a letter and gave them it, he then said, "We were invited by the heiress of the Hyuga Clan, Hyuga Hinata. You can confirm from the handwriting in the letter she sent me."


    They opened the letter, and as he said, they were indeed invited by the heir of their Hyuga Clan.


    They gave him the letter back before saying, respectfully this time, "We''re sorry for our rudeness. We did not realize that you and your partner are friends with Princess Hinata. Please enter."


    They opened the gate for Hikaru and Azumi to enter along with the tall Knight wearing a black armor.


    Now, as you can guess, Azumi was not invited by the people of Hyugas, and Hinata definitely did not invite her. Hikaru manipulated the letter through illusion and made it look like that Azumi was indeed invited to the party. A bit shameless of him but he wants Azumi to experience something like this. Though, he plans to throw a big party at her 13th birthday, October 10.


    One of the guards escorted them towards the mansion of the Hyuga Clan, where the event will start. Azumi couldn''t help but have stars on her eyes when she saw the Hyuuga Compound. It was large, a hundred times larger than the house they''re currently occupying.


    Seeing her childish side, Hikaru simply smiled. The Black Knight followed behind them, while it was on guard for any surprise attack. It couldn''t be blamed though, because it was programmed by the system this way. Its program is just to protect Hikaru, that''s it.


    When they reached the compound, there were already many people there from various clans. He could even see the Shikamaru, Choji, Ino, Kiba, Shino, Sasuke, and Hinata gathered together in one huge round table, It seems like the party had not yet started because they were still not eating.


    "Oi, everyone!" Azumi shouted happily.


    She''s quite close to them, considering they all graduated from the same batch. But she doesn''t like Ino that much, for reasons that you should already know.


    They turned their heads towards the approaching Azumi.


    "Oh, hello Azumi. Surprise to see you here." Shikamaru said lazily.


    As Azumi and Hikaru neared their table, Hinata was quite confused and she mused something on her seat, ''Azumi? Why is she here? I don''t remember inviting her. Except because of assassinating the son of the Fire Daimyo, I also wanted Hikaru-kun for myself, at least just once. Not just because of my feelings for him, but for political reasons too. My father said that just a single word from him can change the mind of the Hokage. If he has that kind of power in Konoha, and considering his strength, he''s the only one perfect enough to be my spouse. If only if it weren''t for Azumi, he would''ve been mine by now.''


    Truthfully, she''s quite mad at Azumi for just having Hikaru all for herself. Since three years ago, she''s changed. She became more confident, more talented, and she no longer stutters when she speaks, unlike the time when she would blush crazily at the sight of "Naruto".


    She came to a conclusion that Hikaru probably invited her on his own, in short, a gate crash. But she and her clan would probably not be able to do anything if they pissed off Hikaru, it would only mean disaster for them. Sure, since the massacre of the Uchiha Clan, they''ve been saying that they were the strongest clan in Konoha. In truth, it was only because of their bloodline, the Byakugan, that they were still here.


    As she stared at Hikaru, he suddenly winked at her charmingly, which caused her to blush slightly. Knowing that their plan is tonight, she decided to just keep Azumi here. It wouldn''t hurt.


    "Sasuke, how is your training with Kakashi?" Hikaru asked as sips from a cup full of water.


    "It was good, he''s teaching me a new jutsu soon. He said that it was an A-Rank one." Sasuke replied.


    "So, he''s teaching you his Chidori, huh?" Hikaru said.


    "Chidori?" Sasuke tilted his head in confusion.


    "That''s a jutsu he created himself along with his best friend, Uchiha Obito." Hikaru said, deciding to reveal Obito to Sasuke.


    Hearing his family name, Sasuke''s interest peaked.


    "Can you tell me more about this Obito?" Sasuke requested.


    Hearing that name, Shikamaru perked up.


    "Obito? As in Uchiha Obito? I heard that he was the one who gave Kakashi-sensei the Sharingan in his left eye. He was a war hero that even the Uchiha praised. It was sad that he died at an early age, he would''ve been a very powerful shinobi with his Sharingan." Shikamaru explained, though lazily.


    Sasuke was now really interested, he would have to ask Kakashi about this later.


    As they were talking to each other, a tall young man with short black hair and deep yellow eyes suddenly appeared near them. He wore a traditional haori for events like this and two bodyguards were behind him. They seem to be shinobis.


    As he walked near them, he noticed Hinata seating among them.


    "Oh, Hinata my dear, what are you doing here with these peasants? Let us go to a more dignified seat, as your fiance, this is more suitable for the both of us." He said a disgusted face as he looked around the rest of them, and he extended his hand towards Hinata.


    Seeing this, Hinata was unsure. If she was to take that hand, it would only mean that she had already accepted him as her fiance, making even more delusions to appear inside his head. If she doesn''t take that hand, he will probably cause a scene.


    As she thought about it, Hikaru, who sat near her along with Azumi, simply slapped his hand away, and she noticed that something cracked. Then, something amazing happened. The bones in his arm suddenly broke into a thousand pieces when Hikaru slapped his hand away.


    The man was shocked for a moment before a scream full of pain sounded throughout the entire party hall.


    "AAAHH! MY ARM, MY ARM!" He shouted as he held his broken arm with his other arm.


    ""Daiki-sama!"" Both of his bodyguards rushed towards him.


    "Shut up, sc.u.m." It was silent but it was heard throughout the whole party place. Hikaru suddenly stood up, went near Daiki, before he kicked him upwards.


    The crying man shot up towards the roof, breaking it, when Hikaru kicked him upwards. In the hole Hikaru made when he kicked him, you can see Daiki going over a hundred feet. He doesn''t even know if he''ll survive that once he lands on the ground, since he was nothing but a worthless mortal.


    The bodyguards glared at Hikaru for a moment before rushing towards that hole to save their young master.


    Meanwhile, everyone in the event was mouth agape as they stared at Hikaru. No one, they mean, no one ever had the courage to do that to a royalty. He was one of the sons of the Fire Daimyo for christ sake.


    Hikaru dusted off his hands before sitting back down and continued drinking the cup of water in front of him, while Hinata and the others were speechless. To openly do that in front of everyone¡­


    "Now, let''s continue the party, shall we?" Hikaru said.


    A few moments later, Hinata''s father, the head of Hyuga Clan, Hyuga Hiashi. When he saw the human shaped hole on his roof, he was furious. And when the guests saw that, they all pointed at Hikaru, who was simply sipping from his cup of water.


    Hiashi walked near Hikaru with extreme rage can be seen on his face.


    "What did you do, brat!?" Hiashi said coldly.


    Hikaru simply looked at him and said, "A worthless rat came, so I kicked it away. Don''t worry, you''re safe now."


    "Rat?"


    Hinata gestured at Hiashi and whispered something to his ear. The more he heard about it, the more black lines appeared on his face. When she was finished, his face was as black as his hair.


    "So, let me get this straight. You broke the arm of Hideyoshi Daiki, kicked him through MY roof and you''re calmly sitting here while drinking whatever the hell that is?" Hiashi said as his voice was filled with rage.


    "Yes." Hikaru simply replied.


    "You son of a¡­"


    "Wait, father no." Hinata whispered something to his ear again, and this time, he knew who he was. The prodigy that even the Sandaime respects, Hikaru Hiroaki.


    Hearing that, Hiashi just turned around and walked away without speaking anything else. Even though he was quite angry at Hikaru, he was also grateful towards him. That spoiled rotten son of a bitch has been trying to get his daughter''s hand, which pissed him off. Even though he was still not her fiance, he kept saying that he was her fiance.


    Seeing the head of the Hyuga Clan walking away, all of them heaved a sigh of relief.


    Even though all of them were shocked of what happened, Azumi simply hugged Hikaru''s arm without a care for the world.


    Suddenly, something came to Hikaru''s head. He remembered the letter he got from the Werewolf Yokai Lord, Shiro, a month ago. He hasn''t opened it since, because he was busy at something at that time. He decided to open it after this event, it should be something good, since it came from one of the Yokai Lords.

 Chapter 56 - 51

    And so, no one could do anything since Hikaru is a very powerful person inside Konoha, both politically and physically. His wealth alone would put shame on the faces of all the clan heads in Konoha. If you bring up his powers, they absolutely wouldn''t believe it.


    After the party, which was crazy, Hikaru and Azumi went back to their home. He then left a clone with her and left the house to go somewhere, he did not even tell her.


    Unknown to her, he is going to finish the job he should''ve done earlier; Killing the son of the Fire Daimyo.


    He arrived somewhere a bit far away from his house. It was a thick forest outside of Konoha, and in the open land where there were no trees, there was a man with tattered clothes and various broken bones in his bony, who was tied to a thick wooden pole. He was unconscious but you can see dried up tears coming from his eyes. It was the son of the fire daimyo, Hideyoshi Daiki.


    The bodyguards he had earlier seem to be ignoring him, not even trying to treat his injuries.


    Hikaru suddenly appeared in front of them with a smile so vicious that even Satan himself would applaud at him.


    "So you two has taken care of torturing him?" Hikaru asked.


    The both of them looked at him without any hints of surprise in their eyes and kneeled down, before replying, "Yes, creator. That man is a vicious child predator, he is not someone who should deserve from the hands of our very own creator."


    "Yes, that''s technically true. Anyway, do it as I planned. Transform his physical body into a human female child and have him sold on the auction for child pedophiles. After they have their fun with him, hunt down those pedophiles and kill them all, but not before torturing them first." Hikaru said as he stared at Daiki with his eyes shining with sadistic light.


    ''Ah, I have always wanted to do this to child pedophiles. They are honestly disgusting. Though, is the fact that Azumi and I have had s.e.x more than a dozen times counts as me being a pedo? I hope not, that very thought shivers me.'' Hikaru shivered a little before he calmed himself down and took out a pink orb from his storage box.


    "You guys should know what this orb is, you two are my clones, after all." Hikaru said as he handed them the pink orb.


    The two clones then transformed back to their original forms, Hikaru''s current appearance, and received the orb.


    This pink orb is full of Hikaru''s mana, and with this orb, he would be able to change someone''s outer appearance but they would still be the same age inside. Maybe he should use this to Azumi? But that would ruin every plan he has for her, so he''ll just think about it.


    Even though this orb is full of Hikaru''s mana but the mana it has inside is only a very small percentage of the entirety of his mana. Maybe less than 1 percent? I don''t know.


    He then left his clones to go back to his house and have a good ol'' grinding for souls. He just can''t earn enough of those things, even if he has around 10 million souls, it would always be reduced to 1000 after a dozen of leveling up. Maybe he should grind for a whole week? But that would be too suspicious, since he would be missing for that time and there''s a huge chance of him dying and losing his souls permanently in the System. So, he''ll just decide against it.


    As he opened the door to his house, he suddenly saw hundreds upon hundreds of Azumi all in a.d.u.l.t form, presumably clones, waiting for him while n.a.k.e.d. There''s even more in the other rooms!


    They all had long flowing hairs that seemed to have been touched by the sun, tall for women, E-Cup b.r.e.a.s.ts, big round juicy asses, cute whisker marks around their cheeks, beautiful sapphire eyes, cute small noses, and pink tender lips.


    Hikaru grinned and thought, ''I don''t care what anybody says, I''m not grinding tonight!''


    He then jumped on them and they all screamed teasingly.


    """Kyaa~!"""


    On that night, on that day, on that week, on that month, in this year, they all learned that the ground could shake so hard even without an earthquake.


    (Note: Oh yeah, Azumi would sometimes transform herself into an a.d.u.l.t. It''s kind of kinky for her but not really).


    In the morning after they had their one-sided orgy, (FFM), Hikaru had to clean up the rest of the house because of that. And when Azumi decided to release all of her clones all at once, let''s just say that I don''t want to describe it.


    She passed out and possibly that she would not wake up anytime soon, seeing her face seemed to be full of satisfaction.


    Hikaru cleaned the house for the rest of the morning.


    ( Afternoon )


    Just as Hikaru finished cleaning up after their mess yesterday evening, Azumi suddenly sneaked up behind him, wrapping her arms on his body, and said in a sleepy voice, "Darling, let''s do it again."


    When Hikaru heard that, he smiled nervously and turned around before he said, "Maybe not this time, Azumi-chan. I just finished cleaning the house."


    "Hmph." Azumi pouted and looked away.


    ''Are all Uzumakis like this? Minato must''ve had a very rough time with Kushina, considering the fact that he''s just a mortal. I''m really glad that I''m an almost immortal being that could not get tired from simple activities like this. Sucks to be him.'' Hikaru said inside his mind.


    ( Meanwhile, with Kurama )


    Inside a large metal cage in what seems like a sewer, you can see a 100 feet tall fox with huge red and dark bunny-like ears.


    It only said three words with a deep female-like voice.


    "F*ck my life."


    ( Back With the Two Lovebirds )


    At 5:00 AM in the afternoon, Hinata and Ino came to their house and said that they would take Azumi for an only girls sleepover at Ino''s second house since it was their day-off from training. Hikaru, not wanting for the opportunity for Azumi to grow her relationsh.i.p.s with her friends, decided to agree.


    It seems like Tenten and Sakura were coming along with Kurenai, they needed an a.d.u.l.t too.


    Azumi was hesitating at first but since Hikaru gave her his consent to go there, she immediately agreed.


    And Hikaru, being overprotective of her, decided to implant a piece of his mana inside her without her noticing. If any enemies tried to attack her, they would immediately be killed on the spot by his mana, even without him being there.


    "See you later, Darling!" Azumi waved at him outside of their house with her girl-friends.


    Hikaru waved back and watched her back until she was out of his sight to make sure of her safety before he went back inside to change since he''s also going out to go to a hotspring to feel a little bit better because Azumi is not here with him. He''s regretting letting her go to that slumber party now. He feels a little bit alone.


    As he dressed up in black shorts and white t-shirt, he suddenly remembered that letter he got from Shiro, one of the Yokai Lords.


    He took out from his storage box after changing to his clothes. He opened it, and saw a piece of folded paper inside. When he unfolded it, he saw that it was a summoning jutsu for¡­ Godly Mythical Beings?


    "Huh? That''s weird¡­" Hikaru muttered.


    There were hand signs drawn on the paper for instructions.


    "If those words are really true, then I just got a hell of a gift from the Yokai Lords. I really want to test it out now but I want to go to the hotsprings like right now." Hikaru said as he thought about it hard. He sat on the bed.


    Then, he came to the conclusion that hotsprings are more important than this. So, he stood up and went out of his house but not before locking it. He kept that summoning thing in his storage box, he''ll get to that later.


    ( Near The Hotspring Inn In Konoha )


    When he arrived near that establishment, he noticed an old man with long spiky hair laughing pervertedly as he peeps on a small hole on the female''s side of the bath.


    "Oi, old man. I''ll give you a hand!" Hikaru ran towards him and prepared his right leg for strike shot towards the goal.


    Recognizing this person as Jiraiya, Hikaru then kicked him through the women''s bathroom with extreme accuracy that Jiraiya shot towards the middle of those women.


    Hikaru turned around as Jiraiya was just about to be beaten up into pulp by those beautiful young ladies. He got to look at them too, so it was worth the kick.


    He dusted off his hands before going to his merry way while whistling the song [Unravel].


    A moment later, he was already in front of the men''s hotsprings, He was about to go inside, when a hand suddenly touched him on the shoulder.


    Hikaru smiled and said without seeing who it was, "So, you survived, Jiraiya."


    Behind him was the form of Jiraiya, tattered and beaten up.


    "Brat, do you know what you just did? You ruined hours upon hours of research! Those women just shredded my notebook into a thousand pieces before using a katon jutsu to burn it! You will have to pay me for my loses!" Jiraiya said in outrage.


    Hearing his complaints, Hikaru just took out a black briefcase out of nowhere and gave it to Jiraiya.


    "Is that all you have to say? Then I''m done, here''s 10 Million Ryo, have a good day." Hikaru said before he went inside the hotsprings.


    Jiraiya, not believing a single word he said, opened the briefcase, and there it was, the ten million ryo Hikaru said. It was stacked in bills, so he could count it easily.


    He was shocked, he didn''t think a kid like this actually had this much money.


    ''He must be a rich young master from some family. Anyway, I just got free money so I have no rooms for complaints.'' Jiraiya said, not realizing that the briefcase he was holding was nothing but an illusion.

 Chapter 57 - 52

    In one of the brothels on the red light district, you can see Jiraiya talking to the people in the lobby, though it seems like they were arguing.


    "Sir, for the last time, you''re not handing us any money in your hand! You don''t even have money and you''re saying that inside this briefcase is full of money!? Bullshit! There is no jackshit in there!" The employee said angrily.


    "What do you mean there''s no money!? Look at it!" Jiraiya pointed to his right hand.


    The employee looked and there was nothing there except his right hand, which seemed to be holding an imaginary briefcase.


    The employee stared at him blankly before yelling, "Security! Get this man out of our establishment! Immediately!"


    The securities answered his call and came right next to him. They were two tall black men wearing suits and sunglasses. They then held each of Jiraiya''s arms and said, "You have disturbed our brothel enough, we think it''s time for you to go home."


    They then dragged him towards the door as he kept yelling and kicking his legs, only for the two men to hold tighter.


    "LET ME GO! LET ME GO!" Jiraiya screamed.


    Considering the fact that he''s a Sannin, I would think he completely forgot about him being one of the greatest shinobi in the world. A shame that he''s an idiot, it would''ve been good if he died while fighting Hanzo, that way, Tsunade and Orochimaru would stay in the village to protect it as a symbol of their friendship. That would be unlikely though, since the both of them don''t care shit about him.


    Meanwhile, back at the hot springs¡­


    Hikaru just got out of the hot spring bathhouse and he rejoiced that he finally got the rest he well deserved. He''s been grinding here and there for souls, dying left and right, at the very least, this bathhouse is only second to him and Azumi making out.


    As he walked out of the bathhouse, he decided to buy some chocolate milk from the shop right beside the bathhouse establishment. It was delicious since it was quite cold.


    He then disappeared in a burst of speed and suddenly appeared outside of his house. He went to open the gates before walking towards the door then opened it as he entered his house.


    When he entered the living room, he saw a white spiky haired with markings on his face sitting on the couch. This is Shiro, One of the Yokai Lords. But he seemed a little tired, because there were bags under his eyes.


    Shiro turned his vision towards Hikaru, who had just entered the house, and said, "You''ve arrived. Thank god you''re here, please tell me why you haven''t opened your letter yet?!" Shiro suddenly asked while agitated.


    Hikaru, not so surprised seeing him here ''cause he already sensed him two miles ago, simply said, "I just forgot about it, don''t worry, I''ll check it now."


    Shiro suddenly heaved a sigh of relief, as if the most comforting thing just happened in front of him¡­. Which is kinda true since that Old Monster had been threatening them to extinct all Werewolves Yokai if Hikaru doesn''t check his letter. Shiro, who is now both a Yokai Lord and the Head of his Clan, had been very stressed lately because of that. Their economics were crumbling piece by piece because of that Old Monster. His people are now living in fear that the Old Monster would suddenly just appear in front of their gates and destroy their entire village in minutes without them being able to do anything.


    He, Shiro, had been trying to find time to leave their village to check on Hikaru but he never got the chance since his people are always filling up the paperwork on his desk. Thankfully, from all this noise, his father went out of his seclusion. who was learning the secret technique of their clan. He then temporarily gave the duty to him and went out here to check on Hikaru.


    Imagine having your entire clan having the threat of someone just destroying their entire village because some guy forgot to open the f.u.c.k.i.n.g letter. That Old Monster may be a kind-hearted old man but he has a very short fuse.


    Hikaru took out the letter from his storage box and opened it. He then took out the paper inside it.


    "In this letter, it is said to be the summoning jutsu for Godly Mythical Creatures. Now, why would I need that?" Hikaru said as he waved the paper from his hand.


    "Godly Mythical Creatures? Aren''t the creatures there are phoenixes, dragons, fairy, krakens, unicorns, and many, many others? The Old Monster must really like you to give you that as your summons, but now that you have opened it, I''ll go back to my village. Please, just go there." Shiro said before disappearing in thin air.


    Hikaru raised an eyebrow and said, "What''s his problem?"


    He just ignored it and looked at the paper in his hand. After memorizing the hand signs written in it, he returned the letter back to his storage box. He then did the hand signs and yelled, "Gyako Kuchiyose no Jutsu!" before he disappeared in a puff of smoke.


    Now, not a single song remains inside his house. Only the eerie silence of the house can be spotted.


    ( The Land Of ??? )


    This world was once a home to all creatures. Yokai, Mythical Creatures, Gods, Simple Animals, and Humans. But then, the Juubi came destroying almost everything. Not even then could combat it, so they retreated to the deep earth, where the Juubi could not reach.


    Milleniums passed and they managed to make a decent civilization inside the very earth and made home to countless creatures. They came to know that some humans and simple animals survived the Juubi thanks to what they call "The Sage Of Six Paths". They were stronger than him, that''s for sure, but he had these weird skills that, in the end, defeated the Juubi.


    He was no mere mortal since he sealed the juubi inside himself but at the cost of his lifespan. Living a short 100 years, he died while his offsprings were battling each other every single day. He separated the life energy of the Juubi into nine separate beings before he died.


    They were quite sad, since the people down there, too, consider him a hero. Sadly, mortal life is such a fleeting thing.


    When he died, countless powerful creatures came out of their hidings. They were beings who could''ve easily defeated the Juubi but they chose not to, for reasons unknown. But they did not get angry at them because it''s their fault for being too weak. If they had been stronger, then they wouldn''t have to live under the earth for many millenniums


    But still, they did not go up immediately because, for some, this is their home.


    Slowly, humanity forgot about their existence. They just deemed them as folklore and urban legends, or myths. Without their belief towards them, now, humanity has been blind from their appearance. They could no longer see them, even if one of them is standing in front of them.


    They then decided to sign up a contract to one of those powerful beings, and his name was Tengoku. This contract will serve as them being his summoning partners at the cost of him protecting them, which is a very small price to pay since all of them were powerful.


    He agreed to their request with a kind smile.


    Now, it was the chosen immortal''s turn to do that. This is his gift to him. A gift that Tengoku couldn''t give to the former chosen immortal, Kiran. They were friends but, in the end, he never visited again. He just decided to substitute Hikaru for Kiran because he still treasures the weapon he gave him billions of years ago.


    Tengoku still holds that weapon, the dagger of a goddess. He doesn''t use it but he just keeps it as a little remembrance of his old friend.


    When Hikaru opened his eyes again, he saw many tall mountains, flat lands, trees as tall as the mountains, large flowing rivers, and gigantic creatures walking or flying around everywhere. It looked like paradise but there was only one thing missing, the sun. There was no sun but an artificial light on top of this underworld.


    "What¡­ is this?" Hikaru muttered, shocked.


    The sight in front of him was beyond his expectations. This is a literal paradies for everyone.


    "This is the world created by the remnants of the old age, The Beautiful Underworld." An old wizened voice spoke behind him.


    Hikaru turned around to see an old man with a long white beard and wore a long white robe.


    "So you''ve come, Chosen Immortal." The old man said.


    "Who are you?" Hikaru asked, immediately on guard.


    The old man suddenly did the unexpected, he laughed.


    "Hah hah hah hah, you are truly almost like Kiran. He once had a black hair as long as yours, eyes darker than any abyss. But his hair suddenly turned whiter than snow and his eyes became redder than blood.


    " The old man then turned sad, "That was the day he lost his beloved woman. Anyway, I am Tengoku, one of the Yokai Lords."


    ''Kiran? This old man knows the Second? He must be some ancient man or something, because you can''t just know someone who''s billions of years old.'' Hikaru thought.


    "By the way, you''re very strong. You''re at least close to being as strong as I am but you''re still lacking a little bit. Anyhow, the reason I brought you here is to let you meet a dark dragon that I tamed and trained years ago. Asphodel, come here!" Tengoku said as he lightly tapped the ground with his staff.


    Then, suddenly, a humongous shadow overshadowed them both from up. Hikaru looked upwards and saw a dragon as huge as the mountains around him, who was covered inmany shining dark scales. Its wingspan easily covers an entire mountain, its horns as big as ten humans, and its long, long tail moving ever so slightly.


    The dark dragon came down and landed in front of them with its face in front of them, as if it was threatening him.


    "Father, why have you called me?" The dragon spoke in a deep and rough voice, like a male does.


    "To let you meet your new summoner, Hikaru Hiroaki, the new Chosen Immortal." Tengoku said as he pointed at Hikaru.


    The dark dragon snorted and the air around them blew up slightly before it spoke, "Hmph, that is if he can beat me in a fight. A dragon only listens to someone stronger than them."


    ''Seriously? A dragon? I can become a f.u.c.k.i.n.g dragon! Why would I need that!?'' Hikaru thought incredulously.


    Hikaru was about to refuse the offer and leave, when the dark dragon suddenly disappeared in a poof of smoke and in front of them stood a beautiful woman, who''s at least 5''11 tall and had dark hair, dark eyes, and a long dark skin. She had horns protruding from her head, and two other horns on her shoulders. A very voluptuous body and the only thing covering up was a gothic battle dress.


    "I think this form is preferably the best way I can fight with utmost speed and agility. Isn''t that right, father?" She said with a sweet female voice, unlike the previous deep and rough one.

 Chapter 58 - 53

    ( Somewhere In the Middle Of the Sea )


    It was dark, the night had fallen. A boat in the middle of the sea can be seen, although barely. On that boat were 3 children, two boys who had the same features, and a seemingly little girl dressed in a pink dress, she was pretty cute.. They were all around the age of 12.


    The two boys sat on that boat while they controlled the water around them with chakra, to go to their target destination. While the "girl" was tied up, laying on the boat. Her eyes were blindfolded, her ears were covered with thick muffs, and she was gagged with a piece of clothing.


    The two boys were Hikaru''s clone, while the ''little girl'' was Hideyoshi Daiki, a former male who kidnapped hundreds of little girls and did unspeakable things to them who, now, is a little girl because of Hikaru transforming him into one.


    Their current destination is The Island Of Paradise. This place is where all depraved rich people come to fulfill their sick needs. Hikaru learned of this place from the Yokais. They said that this island''s full of dark and twisted energy, they said that it may be coming from the people inside it.


    Besides selling off Daiki, who is now a cute little loli, their other goal is to destroy this entire island without harming any innocent people. This is going to be hard, especially since this entire island is guarded by thousands of Jounin level shinobis, there''s even an S-Rank shinobi inside.


    Hikaru couldn''t go, so he sent two of his clones, who each have 40% of his chakra. Combine them and they have 80% of his chakra. They are no doubt very powerful, surpassing even Kage level shinobis but, the thing is, they''re literally going to fight an army of shinobis. They hope that the weapons given to them by Hikaru would work, even though it''s just two Black Knight''s Halberd.


    After a few hours of riding the boat, they finally saw the lights of the island. The entire island is literally shining everywhere.


    Meanwhile, Daiki was still unconscious, unmoving.


    This mission is going to change a whole lot in this world, for people like Daiki would be reduced greatly.


    The clones transformed into middle aged men that look like rich people.


    They grabbed Daiki and put her inside a large bag before they carried him off the boat after arriving on the island.


    ( Meanwhile, back with Hikaru )


    "I think this form is preferably the best way I can fight with utmost speed and agility. Isn''t that right, father?" Asphodel said with a sweet female voice.


    "Yes, my daughter." Tengoku said, even though she''s not his real daughter.


    Meanwhile, Hikaru stared at the woman right before him. She was beautiful, and along with her dark skin and E-Cup b.r.e.a.s.t, she was gorgeous. Right before him was a very voluptuous woman but his loyalty towards Azumi stays firm, unwavering.


    Instead of ogling at her, he decided to size her up. She''s strong, at least above Kage Level. Her physical strength had not lowered since she transformed into her human form.


    But¡­


    ...His physical strength is still stronger than her. He could topple mountains with one hand and use his other hand to slap another mountain, in short, his physical strength is immeasurable. But he knows just how strong he is. And this dragon in front of him is a lot weaker than him.


    "Tengoku, " He called.


    "Yes?" He turned his head towards Hikaru.


    "I suggest you make your daughter surrender, she is no match for me. If you know how strong I am, you probably know I can defeat her without breaking a sweat." Hikaru said as he looked at them with his steely gaze.


    "Of course, I kno-"


    He was suddenly interrupted.


    "Huh!?? What do you mean I''m no match for you!? Let''s see if what you say is true! Come take me on!" Asphodel yelled angrily in a sudden burst of fit.


    She seems like a tomboy, and what do you know, Hikaru''s other type of girls are tomboys. It kinda turns him on when he sees a dark skinned girl dressed like a boy, at least that''s what it was when he was living on earth. But now, yandere girls are just too cute, so he couldn''t resist them. Look at what happened between him and Azumi.


    But her attitude is the only thing that seems like a tomboy.


    "Fine by me, let''s go to an open field. Let''s see if you can really beat me." Hikaru said as he turned around and gestured her to follow him.


    She seemed very cooperative and followed him, while Tengoku felt like the third party here.


    A few moments later, they arrived in an open field. They came across many beast-like people but they were very friendly and pointed them towards here.


    The open field is surrounded by tall trees and covered with green grass.


    They stood 10 meters apart, with Asphodel readying her fighting stance. While Hikaru only relaxed his body, not a thing changed from him, because in the end, fighting style and whatnots are useless against raw pure strength. Martial arts were made for the weak to counter the strong, but when that person is too strong, martial arts are going to be useless.


    It''s obvious that this woman had learned some kind of martial arts but he doesn''t know what it is, since he''s not a martial arts expert.


    Through experience, he can read his opponents moves and determine where they will attack. Even if dozens of people attack him at the same time, he could still dodge all of their attacks and counter with a move that will definitely kill them.


    "Hope you''re ready, "Chosen Immortal". She mocks his title.


    "Ready when you are, girly." Hikaru said with a smirk.


    "Brat, I''ll wipe that smirk off of your face. Just you see." She then charged at him at full speed, which is ten times faster than the speed of sound.


    She redirected her fist towards his face to punch him, only for him to simply move his head, dodging her fist. She looked at his face and saw his eyes looking down at her before she felt a sudden pain on her jaws.


    She was suddenly blasted upwards by a sudden kick on her jaws, but before she could retreat and counter, Hikaru grabbed her feet and smashed her onto the ground, creating a huge hole.


    Without flinching, she jumped up towards him out of the hole and retreated a little far away but as soon as she landed on the ground, she was suddenly met with multiple punches throughout her body. Hikaru''s not even giving her a chance to use her special abilities!


    "Gaaahh!!" She was then blasted towards the forest, breaking multiple trees along the way. Her body was filled with blood, her gothic dress was slightly torn.


    She endured the pain in mid-air and forcefully landed on her feet.


    Hikaru appeared in front of her without making any sound and grabbed her throat.


    He floated in the air as he lifted her face up towards his and said, "You know, I''ve always supported gender equality. You should know that, since I''m going to smash your face towards the ground."


    Before she could reply, he flew towards the skies and when he was high enough, he flew down towards the ground faster than the speed of light with Asphodel''s face in front of him!


    Boom!!!!!


    When Hikaru crashed her face towards the ground, the entire ground was flattened to the point that the dirt on it was scattered away along with the forest and with Asphodel all mangled up and her face was crushed. Her perfect nose was broken, her front teeth fell off.


    When Hikaru saw the state she was in, he couldn;t help but exclaim, "Oh god! Did I just ruin her face!? Shit! Tengoku may get angry at me. I need to heal her immediately!" He took out a bottle of divine blessing and rushed towards where her body was. He then poured all of the bottle''s content in her mouth.


    Her body slowly regenerated at a faster rate, her fallen teeth grew back in an instant and her dislocated limbs were fixed immediately.


    He heaved a sigh of relief as he saw her return to her former state. But there was one thing he forgot, her clothes were blown away when he did that face crushing thing and now, her body''s been fully exposed.


    Hikaru stared at it and said while nodding his head, "Good, good, such a divine body. Shame that I already have a lover. Hope that old man Tengoku won''t try to kill me, I messed up his daughter, after all."


    He took out the saintess'' clothes from his storage box and dressed her up himself. It was one of the only female clothes in his inventory but this should do the job.


    Meanwhile, Tengoku saw the entire fight and he was impressed with the Chosen Immortal''s current strength. From his calculations, he could tell that Hikaru could take on the other 5 Yokai Lords and come out on top., because that "daughter" of his is already one of the candidates for the spot of the Dragon Lord.


    ( At The Hokage Tower, 8:00 PM )


    Inside the office of the Hokage, you can see Hiruzen taking a puff from his pipe as he thought about his actions many years ago.


    You see, the destruction of Uzushiogakure was not just caused by the other three villages, it was also his fault that it happened.


    The Uzumaki Clan wanted the jinchuuriki, Kushina, and take her away from Konoha. They didn''t know the reason but it probably has ties to her being the princess of the Country Of Whirlpool


    [To Be Continued¡­].

 Chapter 59 - 54

    By giving information about the Uzumaki Clan to Kiri, Kumo, Iwa, they all managed to break into the protective shields of Uzushiogakure.


    It was a surprise attack from the three villages, so Uzushiogakure didn''t stand a chance. They would''ve but they were caught off guard, resulting in them being brutally massacred by the three villages.


    Even though they already destroyed the whole village, the three villages'' goal did not stop there. They, too, needed the Fuinjutsu Scrolls of the Uzumaki Clan. Those scrolls are very valuable, due to the fact that the secrets inside of those scrolls are the knowledge to seal the Tailed Beast very easily.


    Remember, the Uzumaki Clan could seal entire Tailed Beasts with a few hand signs. They were very powerful individuals but, in the end, they were just mortals.


    The only way to get to the scrolls was hidden inside the Clan''s Patriarch''s house but it was littered with thousands of incredibly powerful seals. They couldn''t break them and just decided to give up since they lost too many men already.


    Hiruzen still very much regretted the time he sold out the Uzumaki Clan for the other three villages promised him that they would sign a peace treaty if he gave them the information needed to invade Uzushiogakure. But they broke their promise and continued the war.


    Konoha lost too much at that time but that birthed many talented geniuses like the Fourth Hokage, yet, that, too, birthed many vile monsters due to the effects of the war. The Senjus were almost extinct, their main founding clan was almost killed off.


    Tsunade Senju did not want another spouse since the death of her lover during the war. She is the last living Senju, yet, she did not want to repopulate her clan.


    Orochimaru had gone mad and defected from Konoha after he was found out experimenting on live humans.


    These were all the effects of the war, that''s why Hiruzen wanted to cease the war by trusting those villages. He betrayed one of their allies, he regretted that. He failed his students. He regretted that. Most of all, he failed his village. His regrets are numerous but, he found one last hope to redeem himself, no, at least slightly redeem himself.


    Uzumaki Azumi, the daughter of his friend and a member of a clan he betrayed.


    He wanted redemption but he could never have that for his sins are too many. But at least, this child and the promise he made to his friend can help him, even if it''s slightly.


    He is a traitor and that can never be changed.


    Hiruzen leaned slightly on his chair as he ignored the paperwork in front of him and slightly took a puff from his pipe. He looked up at the ceiling meaninglessly and slightly smiled as he remembered the time when everything was so simple.


    A slight scratch to his knee and his mother would be rushing instantly.


    He remembered the time when he sat at the top of the Hokage Mountain with his friend Danzo. Everything was so simple back then but what changed? Was it the time when he betrayed the Uzumaki Clan? No¡­ it was the time when he received that headband from the academy. The time he became a shinobi was the time he cast away all of his childish innocence.


    Hiruzen slowly stood up with his fragile legs and turned around to look at the moon before he wistfully muttered, "Ah, simply imagine that time. When everything was so easy and uncomplicated. If I could return to the past, then I would not have taken that headband. I would''ve just been satisfied as a farmer. The vigour of the youth really drives us to do things we would never want in our later life."


    He smiled ever so slightly and looked wistfully at his beloved village.


    A Hokage''s duty is to loom over the village with his protected shadow while shielding all of the attacks coming everywhere. The other three succeeded, then why couldn''t he?


    Hiruzen is nothing more than a wistful old man. A genius, yet with that much filled regret, how could you call yourself a genius? A wistful old man is a much better term for someone like him. A traitor and a failure.


    ( Inside The Island Of Paradise, in The Slavery Auction )


    After chaining her up and dressing her up real good, the two clones put Daiki inside a cage and sold "her" in the auction. After a few bids, some fat old guy bought her for 1 Billion Ryo. Of course, the two clones got the money but they weren''t sure if they could return back to give it back to their creator.


    Their plan is to rescue every innocent person on the island so they could execute their massive jutsu onto the island, Yami no Tengoku. Hikaru had finally perfected it, and the clones could use it 2 times before disappearing.


    It should be enough to envelope the entire island.


    This is their plan. They''re going to rescue the innocents first, steal large boats from the island, board them in, hypnotise a boat driver with genjutsu to make him drive the boat, and when the shinobis on the island notices them, then one of them will battle them and the other one will cast the jutsu onto the entire island to kill those sick people who enjoys the suffering of others.


    (Daiki''s POV)


    Huh where am I? Why is it dark? Why am I tied up to a bed?


    It''s soft, at least soft enough for a royal like me. I can see but barely, there''s a single candle lit in front of the bed, on top of a table. It''s cold, maybe the window is open?


    Huh? Why can''t I speak? I can''t open my mouth!! It''s taped!


    My limbs are tied but why do I feel small? I looked around me and saw that my arm and legs were thin, small and frail like a child''s¡­


    I looked at my body, and saw two small budding b.r.e.a.s.ts! I''m n.a.k.e.d, that''s why I feel cold! I can see it, I am in a girl''s body!


    But how!?


    Was it those two!? Those two did this to me! Those f.u.c.kers! I''ll kill them when I get out of here!


    I tried struggling, yet it was futile since the ropes were thick and it was tied tightly to my limbs.


    As I tried to break out, I suddenly heard a door open from the small hallway just right beside this bed. The light from outside came in and I caught a glimpse of where I am. It seems like I''m inside a hotel room but nevermind that, there''s an old fat man dressed as a noble!


    He wore a mask that hid the upper part of his face. He''s carrying a plastic bag that seems like it''s full of tools.


    "Mmph!" I tried speaking but couldn''t.


    "Oh hi hi hi, you''re already awake?" The fat old man said as he closed the door, shutting off the lights from outside. He giggled weirdly, and I felt like I''ve seen this man from somewhere.


    The fat old man dropped the plastic bag near the bed before he slowly took off his clothes.


    "I might be rushing things but I will let you know that this will feel good in a minute." The fat old man said while giggling creepily.


    I suddenly knew what''s happening to me, this old man is going to f.u.c.k me!


    "Mmmph, mmph, mmmmpphh, mmmmmpphh!!" The more I realized, the more I tried struggling but my body seemed weaker than before!


    Then, it all came to me who this fat old man was when he took off his mask.


    It was¡­ my royal uncle¡­


    I tried struggling more as my uncle mounted me with his n.a.k.e.d body.


    Ah, what cruel sin have I done to deserve this?


    I thought as I felt something penetrate me from below¡­


    (End POV)


    ( Back With The Two Clones )


    They successfully rescued most of the innocents inside the island but some were left behind because they were beyond help. Powerful doses of drugs had been injected in their bodies, making their brains nothing more than vegetables.


    Thankfully, the shinobis on the island hadn''t noticed them. They used genjutsu to fool some shinobis but other than that, everything''s going as planned. The people they''re trying to rescue were very cooperative, making their plan easier.


    Silently, they made their ways to where the boats were parked on the ocean. This time, it''s going to be a bit hard since many shinobis are guarding the place. And not only that, there are also people left on board in the boats.


    Clone 1 looked at Clone 2 and they both nodded at each other.


    Clone 2 transformed himself to look like something he knows, which was Marvelous Chester. (Note: For the sake of simplicity, I''ll call Clone 2, Chester).


    Chester suddenly appeared in front of the hundreds of shinobis stationed there.


    All of the shinobis were instantly alarmed at the strange individual in front of them. They were immediately on guard.


    "Woah, woah, don''t be so serious now. There''s better ways using those hands, jacking off my d.i.c.k." Chester spoke to the shinobis.


    The shinobis didn''t take his words well and threw countless shurikens towards him.


    Fwish! Fwish! Fwish!


    Chester smiled with amus.e.m.e.nt before he deflected all of the incoming projectiles with a swing of his black halberd that suddenly appeared in his hands.


    Speaking no more words, he rushed towards the shinobis.


    The shinobis were shocked at his combat ability as they saw him cut them one by one like tofu with that weird halberd of his.


    They threw countless jutsus towards him but to no avail as he would just dodge them or deflect them whenever he could.


    Clone 1, seeing that Chester is doing well, knew that the time is right.


    After a few moments of so, he managed to lead the innocents onto a large boat which was the nearest boat from their position earlier.


    It was hard, since he had to do it slowly for the other shinobis not to notice them.


    Chester was still fighting them, and he''s chakra seems not to be depleting. He barely uses his jutsus, so that''s quite understandable.


    After killing most of the people on board, which was thank god not noticed by the shinobis outside, he took the slaves into the rooms where the previous guests of this boat stayed on. He let them rest there while he hypnotises the people on board on this ship.


    With his mission successful, he blew a fire dragon up to the skies for Chester to see. When he saw that, he knew he had to do the other part of the plan.


    The large ship sailed towards the sea and some shinobis tried chasing it by running on the surface of the water but Chester would just kill them.


    ''Now, the plan has been accomplished and the next and last stage is the last one. Destroying this island.'' It was just timed, because he could already feel people with strong chakra signals coming towards here. They are presumably the S-Rank shinobis on this island.


    He suddenly stopped fighting and blew all the shinobis away with his chakra.


    He weaved a few hand seals and used most of his chakra to create a large black ball made from the five basic elements.


    "Yami no Tengoku(Dark Heaven)." Chester muttered as he saw the large black ball floated up in the sky.


    The next thing that happened shocked all the people on the island.


    The stars disappeared when the large black ball suddenly exploded.


    There was nothing but suddenly, every hair on everyone''s body stood up.


    Countless elemental attacks suddenly struck everything randomly, it was coming from the black sky! They tried firing their own jutsus but the dark sky would only absorb it and deflect it back to them!


    Dark Heaven is made from the five basic elements with a little bit of dark chakra. The one Hikaru used back in his fight with Artorias was just the unfinished form of this jutsu. The real point of this jutsu is to just destroy everything under it. That''s why the clones had to evacuate the slaves and other innocent people on the island to use it first.


    This jutsu would only mindlessly destroy, not even the creator of this jutsu can control it. It would even attack the caster of this jutsu!


    It''s an uncontrollable jutsu but it''s an aoe one, so it''s quite useful to some situations. But it can only remain in the sky for just 30 Minutes, after that, it''s all gone. Nothing will remain. In short, a continuous jutsu.


    With one last effort, Chester took the time to destroy all the boats and sh.i.p.s on the island so that the people inside the island can''t escape.


    ''My job is done, I just hope that nobody survives this.'' Chester thought as he disappeared in a puff of smoke after using the last of his chakra.


    [To Be Continued¡­]

 Chapter 60 - As you guys can see...

    As you can see, I can''t post chapters right now. I don''t have that much time because of work, I mean real work, and yes I work. Maybe tonight at 7:00 PM I can make time to write a chapter. I''m running out of ideas for some reason, maybe it''s because I don''t read enough?


    Give me some good novel suggestions down in the comment.

 Chapter 61 - 55

    After beating Asphodel to the ground, Tengoku came. Instead of being angry, he seems to be laughing, as if it was a good thing.


    He said that Asphodel was a stubborn girl and she wanted someone stronger than her to take her as their summons, since Hikaru defeated her in a straight up match, that means he''s the new summoner of Asphodel, becoming the very first outside of Tengoku to summon a dragon from the Beautiful Underworld.


    Hikaru just gave a sigh to that and thought that summoning her in her dragon form if going to be cool, especially that he can boast this to other people.


    Suddenly, he had an idea for the finals of the Chunin Exams, so that it can be done faster while showing off the power of the village, I.e his power.


    Asphodel, being unconscious, Tengoku decided to say his goodbyes to Hikaru to bring her back to her den. Hikaru said his goodbyes too, before he left the Beautiful Paradise via a reverse technique.


    After appearing back in his house, Hikaru decided to tell his plans to the Hokage, while preparing for a snake hunt.


    He put on his everyday Chester Clothes and went out of his house. He flew using mana towards the Hokage Tower with his utmost speed. He arrived there in less than a second.


    He then went through the window on the Hokage Tower, almost surprising Hiruzen to death.


    "Oh for six-path''s sake, can you give this poor old man''s heart a break? That almost killed me." Hiruzen said as he wheezed out due to his surprise.


    Hikaru jumped from the window and landed in front of the Hokage desk with a big smile on his face.


    "Hokage-dono, I just had an idea for the finals of the Chunin Exams. It''s going to be awesome." Hikaru said with excitement dripping off his voice.


    "Really? Wasn''t the first idea for the chunin exams great? We get to observe the contestants'' overall skills and strength, what''s greater than that?" Hiruzen asked in confusion.


    Then, Hikaru told him all about his idea and Hiruzen suddenly found it a good idea.


    In short, it''s a 1 vs All battle type of thing. But there''s going to be a timer, whoever survives for more than 5 minutes against Hikaru passes the test. Of course, there''s going to be handicaps, Hikaru is too strong for them. He''ll be blindfolded, his arms will be tied to his back, and he cannot use any form of chakra.


    This is a good idea, especially since the investors and Daimyos are coming to watch the Finals. If they can show the power of Konoha through Hikaru, it would be a good thing. But there''s something wrong with that idea too, Hikaru would have to beat the contestants from Konoha too. Since the majority of the contestants are from Konoha.


    It would also make the major clans of Konoha to look weak, since their heirs are participating in the Chunin Exams.


    There are pros and cons too with that idea but it will be worthwhile.


    Hiruzen cannot decide whether to go with that one, or with the original.


    With more investors, more missions will come to them along with the Daimyos but the major clans would have to take minor damage from it. And not to mention Orochimaru''s invasion. The Chunin Exams should be nothing but a decoy right now.


    He was about to reject Hikaru''s idea, when the undead boy suddenly told him that he will be hunting Orochimaru for the rest of the month.


    That sparked a light from Hiruzen''s eyes, because that would mean the major problematic person in his head right now is going to disappear. That means the Chunin Exams could go normally.


    Hiruzen then just decided to go with, ''Ah f.u.c.k it", and agreed to his idea.


    With that, Hikaru left the room, knowing that he still had less than a month to hunt down a snake. And he''s starting right now.


    Hikaru left the room through the door before he suddenly disappeared very quietly, leaving a very ominous wind behind his steps.


    ''Orochimaru, I''m coming for you, I may not know where you are right now but I can spread my chakra throughout the entire village to find you. Get ready, for your dream to immortality is going to be crushed under my foot.'' Hikaru said inside his head, fully knowing that Orochimaru stands no chance against him.


    After all, the 1 vs All idea is just really for Azumi. To train her to fight against opponents stronger than her with a team stranger to her. It would surely boost her combat ability, along with her teamwork.


    Meanwhile, with Azumi who''s completely clueless to what Hikaru had planned for her.


    She''s in a room with four beds with each enough to fit two people. The beds were clearly designed for girls, it had pink bed sheets and orange comforters. It seems like they had some kind of aircon in the room, which Azumi thought she would ask Hikaru to buy one too.


    There was Ino, Tenten, Hinata, Sakura, Her, and Kurenai.


    Ino has one bed for herself, Azumi and Sakura were sharing one bed, Hinata and Tenten shared a bed, while Kurenai got one bed for herself. In the middle of their beds were lamps on top of a table, they were all lit. The room was made for concrete walls, unlike the traditional japanese house that is sometimes made in paper. It''s also made that way so that the cold wind of their aircon could envelope the entire room.


    "Hahaha, are you guys jealous? My dad''s a friend from the one who made those aircons, you know." Ino bragged to the others.


    "Hmph, don''t be so proud of yourself. I have also ordered one through mail but they said that it will arrive a few weeks later." Hinata said to Ino with a smug face.


    "Tch, show off." Ino muttered resentfully.


    Well, they''re just like this; talking about girly things. But for them, showing off how rich they are seems to be cool to them when it''s clearly not,


    Sakura, Tenten, and Kurenai didn''t have the same amount of wealth as them, so they could only stay quiet until one of them changed the subject.


    "Hey, how about we tell stories to each other?" Azumi asked, since the others were obviously feeling uncomfortable being shown off by their wealth, she decided to change the subject. A subject where she could win against them.


    Ino turned her head at her and said, "Well then, since you were the one who suggested it, how about you tell a story first."


    Azumi, not expecting that so quick, suddenly went nervous but she remembered a story Hikaru told her once. It''s a short one, so it''ll be quick.


    She cleared her throat and replied, "F-fine. I''ll tell you a story, a story about a Lonely God and a child he created named, Alice."


    They all straightened their backs to listen to her story.


    The Story


    ____________________________________________________________________________


    There was once a god drowned in melancholy and despair for reasons he doesn''t quite understand. Even though he created a beautiful world full of humans with emotions, he just couldn''t find love and comfort. Despite the fact that he had interacted with the humans before and made bonds with lots of them, he still couldn''t find that comfort he so badly needed.


    And with that, he despaired.


    He wanted to cling to a comfort he could hold on but found no rope trying to pull him back. In his castle, he found no one to interact with. He would go down to a world he created but found that the ones he made bonds to had already died a long time ago.


    Time is just as fleeting as death; he learned that a long time ago but why would he create bonds with creatures with short lifespans? It only brought him more despair and melancholy.


    From then, he isolated himself in his own castle in the sky. He never came out from those walls, even when humanity was in trouble, he never came back.


    He wanted a creature that could make him happy again, away from these negative emotions. Living his lonely immortal life, not once he interacted with someone outside of the walls of his castle.


    But one day, when he was sitting on his bed, he suddenly had the feeling to sleep. This surprised him because he never once had to sleep since the day he became an immortal god.


    So, he slept on his bed.


    But there was something strange, he dreamt of a little girl who had angelic white hair and golden angelike wings. Her golden eyes moved ever so slightly as her little hands reached out for his face and he heard her say, "Father, I''m here. There''s no need for you to despair any longer, please smile with happiness. I''m here, aren''t I?"


    For the first time since millenniums of isolation, he smiled with tears streaming down from his cheeks full of joy and happiness that he badly wanted to seek back then.


    And then he woke up.


    He suddenly realized that it was all a dream, and he despaired yet again, only to feel something tap him on his shoulders.


    He turned his head to look at it, and found the very same girl in his dreams hovering beside him.


    "Father, what''s wrong?" She asked with a worried face.


    He smiled at the sight of her and said, "Nothing, Alice. Just some bad memories."


    The End.


    ____________________________________________________________________________


    "Eeh!? What''s with that ending? That''s so vague." Ino complained.


    "I somehow got it but I just can;t get my hands on it." Hinata said as she wondered what the ending meant.


    "Eh, so what was the ending''s meaning?" Sakura asked curiously.


    "I don''t know, Darling never said it to me." Azumi replied to her question.


    "To end it with just that, hmph. Such a bad story." Tenten said.


    "It''s not actually that bad, maybe the ending meant that some time had passed from the time he created that girl, Alice." Kurenai said.


    "Hey, enough about that. It''s your turn, Ino. I already told my story, it''s your turn now." Azumi pouted.


    "Ah." Ino scratched her head sheepishly.


    And so, for the rest of the night, they had fun telling wholesome stories to horror stories. They also had a pillow fight, to playing with teddybears, They would even go out of their room to go to the kitchen and make midnight snacks for themselves.


    At the very least, they all had fun at their slumber party.

 Chapter 62 - 56

    The dark starry night enveloped the entire village of Konoha. The streets were silent, not one soul could be seen. On top of the whole village, in the middle of it, you can see a small individual wearing an armor that seems to crumble at any moment into dust.


    On his face was a dark mask and engraved on it was a face of a skeleton. He wore dark chest armor, it seems to be covered by bones. He wore a dark gauntlet crafted with sharp nails to pierce its enemies. He also wore long dark leggings yet it seems kinda ghostly as he floated up in the dark sky.


    This is Hikaru wearing the Dark Set. He''s trying to search for Orochimaru with his chakra sensor, reaching even the ends of the village.


    After a few moments, he found him somewhere underground but it was outside the village. It seems like they built a laboratory base there when Orochimaru was still inside the village. He''s currently sleeping right now in one of his rooms there. He''s unguarded, as you would expect from an arrogant serpent.


    It''s better this way, the more silent the killing is, the greater.


    In a matter of seconds, he disappeared from the sky and appeared near the right side of the village. He floated ghostly towards a thick wooded area before arriving on top of their laboratory base, which was under the dirt.


    Quietly, he landed onto the ground while hiding his chakra, so that no one would be able to sense him.


    He transferred some mana to his right hand and used it to dig the dirt up quietly but faster than a shovel. After a moment, he finally made a hole huge enough for a child like him to fit.


    He jumped into the hole and silently landed on what seems to be a hallway. It was dark, the hallway was only dimly lit by the torches attached to the walls. The walls were made from rough stones yet it had done the job to make it a little more nicer, and the floor is made from smooth stone.


    He walked around the hallways making no sound while slowly creeping up in some of the rooms around there. When he saw a henchman of Orochimaru, he would quickly kill them even when they''re sleeping. For safety measures, he used a light spell to make him invisible.


    Like a phantom, he searched the hallways for some signs of that snake''s people.


    He opened one room, it seems to be in a lot better condition than the other rooms. He saw two bunk beds, and on it were four individuals. It took him a moment to realize that these people were the sound four, and they''re completely unguarded.


    He slowly creeped up to them, there was no light in the room, so no one would even see him. He went towards Jirobo first, if the anime he watched was right, and killed him silently in his sleep by gorging out his heart before crushing it.


    Then he went next to Sakon, or Ukon, and he pierced his brain with his mana enhanced thumb. He died as he opened his eyes, only for it to roll back to his head.


    Next was Kidomaru, he just crushed his head with his bare hand, leaking out his brain and eyes.


    As he was about to go next to Tayuya, he suddenly saw him wide-eyed as she witnessed the things that had happened to her teammates.


    She was about to scream when an invisible hand covered her mouth.


    Slowly, Hikaru revealed himself but his eyes were glaring red. Behind his mask, you can see his eyes shine blood red as he stared at Tayuya.


    Her eyes were covered in fear, not knowing when she would die.


    Hikaru smiled behind his mask as he put a finger in front of his mask and said, "Shh, don''t be scared. I''m not gonna hurt you. I just want to know where your other teammate is."


    He cupped her face as he touched her long red-pink hair.


    "Your hair is quite beautiful." Hikaru noted, but his words were soulless.


    While Tayuya may be arrogant and overbearing but in front of this kid, she felt like nothing. As if he could snap her neck in less than a second, this is the feeling she got from Orochimaru-sama but it was stronger. So strong that she couldn''t speak at all.


    Her eyes teared up, knowing her death was inevitable.


    Suddenly, she found a hope, a hope that he would spare her if she betrayed Orochimaru.


    "I-I know where most henchmen of Orochimaru-sama are!" Tayuya said desperately.


    "Oh don''t worry about those people, I just want to know where your other teammate is. What was his name again? Ah, yes, Kimimaro." HIkaru replied, still grinning.


    The reason why he wanted Kimimaro was because of his talents, with his strong bloodline, he could become a very strong part of the group he''s going to make. The name of that group is going to be, Blood Wolf. He plans to hire the best blacksmith in the elemental nation, which is the one who crafted the seven swords of Kiri, after forming his group.


    Tayuya widened her eyes, something must be up.


    "O-of course, I can lead you to him." She stuttered.


    "No, I don''t want you to lead me to him, I WANT to know where he is. Tell me now, or die brutally." Hikaru threatened.


    She gulped and replied nervously, "H-he''s two hallways away from Orochimaru-sama''s room."


    He patted her head with a smile and said, "Now, that wasn''t so hard, wasn''t it?"


    She nodded quickly.


    But as she was about to speak again, Hikaru knocked her out with a chop in her neck. She lost consciousness almost immediately. She was about to fall down but Hikaru caught her and said, "I also need a strong maid capable of protecting herself and Azumi. I should put a mana burden in her heart, in case she tries something fishy."


    Mana Burden is a technique he created just for slaves, he can attach it to any vital organs of a person and if they try something against them, that Mana Burden will crush that vital organ.


    Mana Energy appeared on his right hand before he held it against her left chest, he slightly felt her b.r.e.a.s.t being pushed by his hand but paid it no mind and continued doing what he''s going to do.


    It''s not like he''s going to do anything bad to her, in fact she might as well benefit from this. With him by her side, she will grow even stronger than she is right now.


    Alright, you might be asking how he could cure Kimimaro''s sickness. Simple, Divine Blessing. It is able to cure any ailments, even illness of a person. That''s right, he might even be able to cure Itachi. If he sides with them that is.


    Now, he will buy some maid clothes from the store in Konoha. Hikaru wanted a maid for simple things, like cooking Azumi breakfast, lunch, and dinner everyday. Cleaning the house, washing the dishes, and things like that. But the main thing is, protecting her while he''s gone. Tayuya is a female, which is good, and she''s also a trained shinobi, making her even more valuable. Of course, he''ll pay her with money. Maybe around 500,000 Ryo a month? He''s super rich after all, and Hiruzen might be able to open Gato''s bank card soon.


    But his money is not infinite, he needs a business soon. That Hotel he''s building back there will take a few years to finish, so he needs a business that can grow his money even more.


    It may be somewhat hard but it''s also quite simple; Food Business. He''s a great cook, so all he has to do is buy a large building somewhere in Konoha, design it into a western style restaurant, and make dozens upon dozens of clones to do the cooking, delivering the food to the customers, and washing the place.


    Tayuya is not really needed for the house cleaning but she''s important for protection, he''s not omnipotent after all.


    He wandered the connected hallways, until he reached a room.


    He did not knock and opened the door quite loudly, specifically to awaken Kimimaro.


    But he did not need to do that, since he can see Kimimaro clearly awake. Blood was everywhere in the room.


    Seeing an unknown individual entering his room, Kimimaro glared at Hikaru but he was powerless. He hasn''t taken his medicines yet, Kabuto was supposed to deliver it to him by now.


    "Who are you?" Kimimaro asked calmly but cautiously.


    Kimimaro sat on his bed, ill, there was a small table in front of him and a chair for someone. Hikaru took the chair and sat on it as he directly stared at Kimimaro''s eyes and said, "I''m going straight to the point. I''m an enemy of your master but I want recruit to you to a new group I''m creating soon."


    Kimimaro smiled at him, as if he was mocking him, and he said, "And why would I need to do that? Orochimaru-sama is the only one in the world who has my loyalty, that will never change. And he''s the only one who can cure the illness I have right now, so let me repeat, why should I join your little group?"


    Hikaru grinned, as if he was expecting thi response, and he said, "Simple, look at this." He held out his right hand and out of nowhere a bottle and inside it was some kind of golden liquid.


    "This in my hand is a blessing from the very gods themselves, " he lied, "and if you drink this, it can heal any ailments or illness overtime."


    "Don''t you lie to me, there''s no such beings as gods. You can''t fool me, even Orochimaru-sama himself cannot heal my illness. How can you then?" Kimimaro said, this time coldly.


    "So you want an example? Here."


    Then a loud sound of bone cracking sounded in the room.


    Hikaru had broken his entire left and cut it off with his right hand while he kept the bottle on his mouth. Blood splashed onto Kimimaro''s face since Hikaru is in front of him, quite close if I do say so myself.


    "What the!?" He didn''t expect this, that''s for sure.


    Hikaru didn''t even flinch, as if he was used to this.


    Then Hikaru winked at him and drank the divine blessing straight from the bottle.


    Then, something amazing happened. Hikaru''s arm slowly regenerated. In just 10 seconds, it was back to normal, as if nothing ever happened.


    (Note: Divine Blessing and Estus Flask are different, with Estus FLask, a sliced off limb could regenerate instantly while the Divine Blessing will only heal slowly. I think it''s like that in the game).


    Kimimaro widened his eyes, such a miraculous medicine really exists in this world and it''s in the hands of a kid who''s wearing this weird armor that could crumble at any moment.


    Hikaru stretched his newly grown left arm, and said to Kimimaro, "See? If you drink one of these, you can go and say bye-bye to your illness. Join me, and I''ll give you one of these." He took out another bottle of divine blessing and shook it in front of Kimimaro.


    For Kimimaro, this deal is really enticing. But his loyalty cannot be bought by something like this.


    "I''m still not joining, Orochimaru has done a lot for me. Even if I die, at least my very body can be of use to him. I''m not afraid to die, the only thing I''m afraid of is to fail my loyalty to Orochimaru-sama." Kimimaro said stubbornly. His calm eyes stared directly at Hikaru with unwavering will behind it.


    Hikaru grinned even more, if he''s this loyal to Orochimaru even after that snake did many unspeakable things to him, this teenager in front of him is surely worthy to join him. An unwavering loyalty towards an evil and insatiable master, this kind of people only pass by every once in a while.


    And he''s surely not going to let him go.

 Chapter 63 - 57

    Two shadows silently ran towards a certain room in the dark hallways that is only slightly lit by the torches placed on the walls.


    Hikaru made a clone to deliver Tayuya to a certain place somewhere in the forest that only he knew where. She would only be a nuisance here, after all.


    Hikaru made his way towards a certain room while the dark figure right beside him hid somewhere.


    The room had no door, only a hole that''s the size of a person.


    Inside that room was Orochimaru, he was sleeping yet Hikaru can feel that he hasn''t let go of his guard yet. One wrong step and he''ll awaken him but that''s not really a problem any longer. There''s a much bigger thing he wants to do right now.


    He walked towards the middle of the room with footsteps loud enough for a trained ninja to hear. Orochimaru immediately opened his eyes and yelled while he got up, "DId I not say not to disturb me!?"


    Hikaru, with an apathetic look on his face, took out a spear from his inventory box and threw it at Orochimaru''s shoulder, pinning him onto the wall.


    It was so fast that Orochimaru had no time to dodge, and his reflexes were not fast enough to catch a thing like that.


    The wall behind was pierced by the spear that Hikaru threw with his shoulder also stuck on the wall. He screamed in pain as he tried to pull the spear out from his shoulder, but Hikaru gave him no time and appeared in front of him standing on top of the bed as he punched him in the stomach and held his neck tightly, immobilizing him even further.


    Hikaru leaned a little closer and said to Orochimaru as he smiled as if he hadn''t seen a longtime friend, "Hey, how are you doing? I wanted to stick a literal stick up your ass but that would be quite disgusting. You have to consider the feeling of this spear, after all."


    "Who,,,the... hell are... you!? Gah!" The snake barely wheezed out as Hikaru held his neck quite tightly.


    "Who? Me?" Hikaru looked around and pointed at himself.


    It seems to pissed Orochimaru even further.


    "I''m just joking, don''t look at me like that. Don''t bring me to your pedo fantasies, ''kay?" Hikaru said as he winked at him playfully, which served to pissed the already pissed snake even further.


    "You¡­worthless...mongrel!!" Orochimaru hissed.


    "Oh wait, you couldn''t breath because I''m strangling you with this hand of mine. But you have to understand, I don''t want to see another you coming out of your mouth, that would be pretty disgusting." Hikaru said.


    Then, Orochimaru opened his mouth and Hikaru got confused as to why he would do that, only for a sword to come out of the snake''s mouth. Hikaru saw that and did nothing, as when the sword reached his face, it only made sparks as if it was hitting a very hard object.


    The sannin widened his eyes in shock when he saw his sword didn''t pierced the kid in front of him.


    Hikaru is wearing armor that''s been reinforced with titanite to +10, and coupled with his steel hard skin, he''s basically immune to physical attacks and some jutsus. The dark mask was covering his head, but even without that, the Kusinagi sword still wouldn''t pierce even the outer layer of his skin.


    "That wasn''t nice, you know? Heh, no matte-"


    He was interrupted when Orochimaru used his substitution jutsu, and another him came out FROM his stomach. That one was fast enough to slither towards the door like a snake, yet Hikaru was still faster than him.


    Taking out a random long sword from his inventory box, he appeared in front of the snake instantly and cut all of his limbs.


    "Raaahh! You bastard! I''ll kill you!" Orochimaru hissed.


    This time, Hikaru replied no longer joking around, "With what army? Face it, you''re going to die. At least die a little bit graceful." He thought about it for a little moment and said "No, a snake like you shouldn''t deserve that kind of respect from someone like me."


    Orochimaru smirked and snakes grew out from the parts where he lost his limbs. All of them attacked Hikaru but they all just burned to ashes when the Undead used his pyromancy. It was different from any other flames, it was redder than normal yet Orochimaru could feel the heat of it. The flame was melting his body even though he was quite away from it.


    "Be honored, snake, for you were able to see the chaos flame in action before your eventual death. But before you die, tell me what do you think about Kimimaro?" Hikaru said.


    "Why would you want to know a useless thing like him? He''s going to die soon!."


    "Speak now, or I''ll burn your souls." Hikaru threathened.


    "Tch, Kabuto and I were experimenting on him once but we accidentally did something to his bloodline. It mutated and grew stronger, at first we were joyful but then we learned that there was a side-effect. It shortened his life span. An illness grew inside him, and it would only happen to a Kaguya who''s already in their sixties. Knowing that, I worked him to the last of his usefulness so that the time I spent on growing him wouldn''t go to waste. He''s useless now, he could barely leave his bed. I''m gonna throw him away soon, so see? I know you are interested in someone who has a Kaguya''s bloodline like him, but give it up. He''s already six-feet underground." Orochimaru smirked at the last of his words.


    But Hikaru only seemed to grin and said, "You hear that, Kimimaro? He''s disposing you soon."


    Then, out from the shadows of the room, Kimimaro came out. Tears were streaming down on his face, those hurtful words hurt him the most. It was his master''s fault why he had this illness. Thanks to Hikaru giving him that bottle, he was finally cured. Hikaru asked him to accompany him towards Orochimaru''s room to listen to his explanation about him. Kimimaro hid so that he could hear the truth from his master''s own mouth, yet it was something he didn''t like.


    He only wiped away his tears and calmed his raging emotions soon before he said, "So this was supposed to be my ultimate end, dying after being manipulated by a sick bastard. I feel sorry for the others. I trusted you as my master, but now, no more."


    Kimimaro''s face was quite somber, knowing that he had already lost his purpose. That was the only thing keeping him alive, yet, now that was also taken away from him.


    Hikaru smirked at Orochimaru''s despair. He could see it on his face, how his face slumped down and how his eyes drooped.


    He just lost the best shinobi, who would have easily been a powerful body for him. But that matters not, he still has Uchiha Sasuke, a prodigy like his brother. He just needs a little bit of polishing and he''ll be a powerful body soon.


    "Hah, it doesn''t matter! You could leave all you want but know this, I will hunt you for the rest of your life!" Orochimaru screamed maniacally.


    "Alright pal, now die." Hikaru grabbed Orochimaru''s face and the rest of that snake''s body became black before slowly transforming into something grotesque. It didn''t grew larger, his body only turned into some kind of snake but eyes were everywhere on its body. Long tongues wiggled out from that grotesque body.


    "Ho, so this is what you look like without your humanity. How disgusting." Hikaru held a black and white ethereal object on his hand before popping it.


    Hikaru then burned Orochimaru''s grotesque form to death and before his soul could leave his body, Hikaru caught it and put it inside a jar filled with holy magic. He has sealed Orochimaru and no one would no longer be able to use Edo Tensei on him. And he can no longer revive like he always does.


    Hikaru put the jar back to his storage box and left the base along with Kimimaro. Using his pyromancy, he burned the entire underground base to the ground. Everyone in Konoha woke up when they saw a bright light far ahead of them.


    Hiruzen looked out of his window and immediately knew that that was Hikaru''s doing and paid no mind. He''ll be coming here soon, after all.


    Meanwhile, Kin Tsuchi was out enjoying the fresh wind outside of the underground base when she saw flames redder than normal burst out from that base.


    She dropped the apple candy she was eating and ran straight towards there.


    Back with Hikaru...


    He stood in front of the large fire he just created but he was keeping it from spreading even further with his pyromancy.


    "Wonderful, isn''t it? Join me Kimimaro and you will grow stronger than you are now. Maybe even stronger than a kage!" Hikaru offered.


    Kimimaro only shook his head and said, "I''ll have to decline that for now. I have been thinking since earlier when Mas- I mean, Orochimaru died. Why do we exist? Since young, I''ve been locked up under my clan and when they were massacred by the Kiri Force, Orochimaru rescued me. Since then, I''ve always been loyal to him and thought that to be my purpose, yet now I have no purpose. I want to know the meaning of my existence. I''ll travel around the elemental nation, and when the time comes, I''ll go and meet you again. I don''t want to serve anybody as my purpose any longer, you can understand, right?"


    Hikaru only smiled and said, "Well, at least you''ll come meet me again, right?"


    "Yeah." Kimimaro nodded.


    And so, with the resolve to fin the meaning of his existence, Kimimaro set out to travel the elemental nation but not before Hikaru gave him a dozen Divine Blessings. If someday he''s in a critical condition, he should be able to heal himself instantly.


    And with that, Hikaru and him parted ways.


    Maybe someday, they''ll meet again.

 Chapter 64 - 58: Story Time

    (The Day Before The Finals)


    In this whole month, Hikaru had unlocked another feature of the Dark Souls System. He can now summon certain NPCs to fight for him while he can talk to them like they were real people.


    Of course, it has limits to which how many he can summon and the characters he can summon. He gets a first character and his first slot for summons.


    Of course, as a fan of Dark Souls, Hikaru chose Solaire as his first summon. He can gain slots and characters for summoning through the statistics of drop rates in the system. He can also summon Solaire in real life and while battling bosses inside the system but if he dies, it''ll take a whole month for him to be restored.


    "My dear friend, this is a very tough fight. But as a loyal knight of the sun, I will forever stay loyal to my friends! Take this, foul beast!" Solaire yelled as he slash his sword towards Manus, The Father Of The Abyss.


    Yet, he only got swatted away by the beast''s gigantic hand.


    A few meters away from Manus is Hikaru, who is currently preparing a big pyromancy attack with his chaos flame.


    "Chaos Fire Whip! Bind this foul beast to the ground!" Hikaru shouted as countless ropes of chaos flame went directly towards Manus'' limbs. The Beast of the abyss tried shooting off the chaos flame wh.i.p.s with its dark magic, yet it failed since there were countless of them continuously coming out of Hikaru''s hands.


    After a while, Hikaru succeeded in binding Manus to the large stone ground of the arena where they are fighting. But the cost was his Mana almost being depleted but it was easily taken care off when he drank a Hidden Blessing bottle.


    "Hah hah hah, as amazing as always, my friend." Solaire laughed as he patted Hikaru''s back. His voice sounded smooth yet it was imbued with a warmth that will calm your heart and mind.


    "Yeah, anyways, we need to kill this beast now. If we don''t, the spreading of the abyss in your world will take countless lives." Hikaru said seriously. Since gaining Solaire as his summoning companion, he was finally able to defeat Manus 2 Times! Of course, it was tough but with Solaire tanking all the damage and Hikaru dealing all the damage, they are almost unstoppable.


    Solaire boasts his great defense, even Hikaru admits that his defense surpasses his. He doesn''t know why though, he also has the Sun Set inside his storage box with max out upgrades yet it is still less than Solaire''s defense.


    But the most concerning thing is, there is a world exactly as the world in the game of Dark Souls. That means, there are many parallel dimensions of that world. Whether it be Gwyn choosing to relit the first flame or humanity succeeding in conquering the world.


    But Solaire apparently lives in one of those worlds. Specifically where Dark Souls 1 takes place. He said that he had turned himself an undead to seek out the sun. He also said that he feels like he was closer to his sun than before. Hikaru doesn''t know but he has a bad feeling about those words.


    Killing Manus even though he was binded by his chaos flame wh.i.p.s was harder than he thought. Some of his weapons broke while trying to damage Manus. After a long hard work of slashing him up, Hikaru and Solaire managed, yet again, to kill Manus, Father Of the Abyss.


    "And here comes the memories." Hikaru muttered as he was suddenly struck with the memories of the primordial man.


    This would happen everytime he defeats Manus. His memories come to whoever defeats him, specifically Hikaru but it would be different every time. But there is one thing that never changes, it will always be a tragic story.


    [Memories]


    ____________________________________________


    The primordial man was once a humble powerful sorcerer. He lived most of his time living in the mountains with his beautiful daughter, Marvella, who was 18 Years Old at the time.


    He had long black hair, silvery white eyes, and pale skin. He wore formal clothing and wielded a catalyst in the right side of his waist.


    They lived peacefully in the mountains inside their wooden house while helping other people once in a while.


    Marvella, at that time, was currently the most beautiful woman to live near the Kingdom of Gwyn. Gwyn and his companions were still at war with the dragons and it showed no signs of being stopped.


    Manus at that time stayed inside his home, ignoring the calls from the military to help the war with the dragons. He only held a pendant that was filled with his nostalgia and reverence. This was the pendant of his past deceased wife. She was the only person he ever revered for her beauty was unsurpassable and her strength was astonishing yet, it seems like she was not from this world. She longed for her home but met her end in this world half away in their marriage. It was a strange disease that even he, one of the most powerful sorcerers in the world, cannot cure.


    The only thing that was left was her pendant, a mystical pendant that was imbued by an unknown magic he doesn''t know. He just keeps it by his side, never letting it go for the fear that once he lets it go, it will disappear.


    One day, his daughter married a simple man living in a nearby village. He was nothing special but he respected his daughter''s wishes.


    He gave his daughter the pendant of her mother, for it was a dying wish from his wife that once Marvella marries a man she likes, he will have to give that pendant to their daughter.


    They all lived happily after a while, Marvella was pregnant with a child and he was happy to finally have a grandchild.


    ...Until Gwyn himself arrived at his home. It was obvious that the King of Sunlight was mad because of his constant declination of the lord''s request to join the lord''s army.


    Arriving at his home, Gwyn opened the door yet he hadn''t even touched the door.


    Behind the lord were dozens of Silver Knights kneeling at his back.


    Gwyn looked like around the age of 26. He had long blonde hair, a well cut beard, black eyes looking at them with his cold gaze, and his presence were enough for everyone around him to kneel. It was as if he was born a king.


    "Manus! I''ve had enough of your insolence, join my army now or let your family die." Gwyn threatened as his hands crackled with yellow lightning.


    Manus, his daughter, and his son-in-law were currently eating on the table when Gwyn arrived.


    Manus, knowing that he had angered the Lord himself, stood up and kneeled apologetically.


    "Lord Gwyn, I know that my insolence has deeply angered you but please understand that I have a family. If I were to die, who would support them? And my grandchild would be born in three months. My daughter doesn''t even know how to use sorcery like I do. I beg of you my lord, let us go." Manus begged.


    Looking at them in disdain, Gwyn said as his robes crackled with yellow lightning, "You think stupid excuses like that will help you!? A mere human like you shouldn''t think too highly of himself, join my army and your family will be given royal privilege for the rest of their lives."


    Manus was a very strong sorcerer, in fact, he''s one of the few who knows the secret to the immortality of the eternal dragons. He didn''t learn it from anyone, he researched it deeply. He has many researches that could help his kingdom advance even further but his constant decline of his invitation angered him.


    "I will still decline, my lord." Manus said as his head was bowed to show respect.


    This time, the outside of his house was destroyed by the lightning coming from above.


    "Insolence, to even decline my invitation even when I am in front of you?!" Gwyn was truly enraged by this human in front of him. He wants to kill him but he cannot for he''s too important of a researcher.


    Manus knows that the eternal dragons are not the only ones they are killing, they are also slaughtering new-born dragons. Eternal Dragons are just like all beings, they have their own mind and soul. Killing newborn dragons is like killing human children. In the first place, the Eternal Dragons were never a threat to their race. They just lived their immortal lives peacefully until they die. But Gwyn wanted to "Retake their lands" since the first flame arrived.


    Knowing his death was inevitable, he prepared himself to cast a spell to at least battle them to buy time for Marvella to escape.


    But as he was about to do that, Gwyn said something.


    "Oh, I didn''t know your daughter was a beauty. Why don''t I take her as my wife who will carry my children? Huh, Manus?"


    It was sudden, it was unexpected but he knew his daughter was in danger.


    "No, my lord. I beg of you, my daughter is pregnant and already has a husband. If so, please¡­"


    "So what? If I say something is mine, it''s mine." Gwyn said arrogantly.


    Without wasting a single second, Manus created a huge ice wall in front of him to block out Gwyn. He then carried his daughter and both of him and son-in-law ran away after breaking a wall in the back of their house.


    Gwyn, meanwhile, just smiled.


    One of his knights went up to him and asked, "My Lord, what should we do?"


    "Follow him. Kill the husband but take Manus and his daughter to me alive." Gwyn ordered and his knights followed the three. "His daughter should be worthy of bearing my children. I can already see the depths of her magic powers. If she gives birth to my children, they will be more powerful than I, the Lord of Sunlight." Gwyn finished.


    Meanwhile, back with Manus and his family.


    They ran and ran but his son-in-law couldn''t keep up since he was a human without any kind of abilities. Manus boosted his speed with magic and they could now run quite faster than before.


    But when his son-in-law looked back, he saw a Silver Knight pointing a bow at Manus, who was unaware. The bow was large along with its arrow.


    ''If I''m not mistaken, that''s the great bow!'' He thought.


    "Father!"


    As soon as the Silver Knight shoots the gigantic arrow at Manus, his son-in-law jumps in and blocks it with his body, knowing full well he would die.


    "Elvin! No!!" Manus shouted with tears as he continued to run away from the Silver Knights while carrying his daughter. He turned his head one last time to look at Elvin and only saw his back being pierced by a huge arrow.


    He continued running and running while carrying Marvella, who''s crying in her father''s arms, knowing that her husband had just died. He couldn''t stop, the Knights were still behind him.


    The woods were hard to search in but these inhumane knights seem to know how to jump from trees to trees, making them even faster.


    Manus couldn''t do that since it could damage the child inside his daughter''s w.o.m.b if he does that. Even now, while he''s running, he is protecting her with a magic shield in case someone shoots her.


    He focused all his magic to his body boosting and protecting his daughter but he still managed to deliver magic attacks from time to time.


    Manus knew that if this goes on forever, he will be caught eventually. So as he risked it all, he took out his catalyst and turned around before he shouted, " Great Soul Dregs!"


    Dozens of shadowy balls floated near his catalyst before they all shot forward to all Silver Knights. There were 8 of them, it seems like he killed some when he was attacking randomly while running before.


    Dark Attributes were one of their weaknesses, so the damage was double than before. He killed almost all of them, except for one.


    "You...heathen! You...dare...to betray-" The Knight was cut off by another soul dreg.


    As he was about to heave a sigh of relief and rest, a man''s voice sounded behind him.


    "Good job on killing my knights, this just proves your strength. They were the best of the best but of course, I still have a lot of them back in my kingdom."


    Manus knew full well who was behind him.


    [To Be Continued...]

 Chapter 65 - 59

    Manus was captured along with his daughter, who was pregnant at that time. Gwyn, knowing that the child inside Marvella isn''t his, forcefully aborted the fetus while Manus could only watch helplessly. At the end of that, he was a heaping mess.


    His hatred towards Gwyn grew larger.


    Gwyn separated him from his daughter and he was transferred to one of the stations where his sorcery was really needed. The research lab.


    There were dozens of Silver Knights guarding the place but he knew he could escape it. The only thing keeping him was his daughter being imprisoned by Gwyn.


    The lab was quite large, and it made enough space for the researchers, I.e sorcerers, to analyze large objects. Most of the time, the only thing they were researching about was dragon parts. Some parts of the dragons are poisonous, so they would have to inspect it carefully before they craft it into some kind of weapons.


    A year later, the war was nearing its conclusion and Lord Gwyn and his companions were winning the war.


    But he suddenly got a news that his daughter died birthing the first heir of Lord Gwyn


    Manus was devastated.


    But now, there was no longer something keeping him from escaping.


    But first, he would have to see his grandchild.


    With no more restraint, he destroyed the entire lab with his dark sorcery, killing everyone in it. He spared no one, not even his fellow sorcerers.


    As he walked through the destruction he had created, he smiled with extreme malice as he said, "Do not go gentle into that good night. Old age should burn and rave at close day; Rage, rage, against the burning of the light."


    The last part of the poem implied that he will be the one to unkindle the fire that Gwyn loves so much.


    Manus may be some old human but he''s a primordial one.


    At this moment, his humanity and soul was beginning to lose control. His eyes were showing signs of the abyss. Small horns started protruding from his forehead.


    "Ah, my daughter. How much have you suffered? Don''t worry, papa shall take his revenge for you. I didn''t want to do this since your mother insisted that I don''t do it but I have no more choices. I shall wreak havoc throughout his kingdom. No longer shall that worthless king be kneeled upon from now on. With the abyss by my side, he shall stand no chance."


    Manus said as he continued walking through the destruction he had created earlier, mesmerized by its beauty while leaving tracks of the corruption of the abyss.


    With a single blow of the wind, he vanished. Not a single trace of him could be seen.


    He appeared in the first prince''s room. The room was quite lovely, full of childish decors.


    Holding his catalyst, he went near to the crib of his grandson.


    He put his catalyst back to his waist and picked up the baby in the crib. He held his grandchild in his arms while tenderly caressing his face.


    His abyss like-eyes warmed as he looked at his grandson.


    The baby also raised his hand, trying to touch the face of his grandfather. Yet Manus only turned his head back, as if he was afraid to let his grandchild touch his face.


    As he was about to put the baby back to his crib, he saw something he thought he wouldn''t be able to see in his life. The pendant he gave to his daughter was resting upon his grandson''s crib. He took it and tears came pouring out of his eyes. He looked at his grandson as he broke the pendant in two and said.


    "Little one, one day I shall come back for you. I don''t have enough power to go toe to toe against the Lord of Sunlight. But when that day comes, hold this pendant near you. I shall know who you are by then. We will forever be intertwined by this pendant, not a soul shall stop me from coming back for you. I promise you that." As he finished saying his words, he heard footsteps coming from outside the door of the room.


    He put the baby down along with half of his pendant before he vanished as soon as he appeared.


    The only trace he left was the broken in half pendant that he left for his grandson, the inheritor of Gwyn''s sunlight, and in the near future, will be nicknamed as The Nameless King.


    (In an Unknown underground place, years later)


    Manus was close to perfectly controlling the abyss but suddenly, they came. The Lord''s Blades.


    They were very powerful assassins, and Manus had to run away because of their numbers.


    He had grown considerably more powerful than he was years ago but he was nowhere near Gwyn''s power.


    And the one sent to him right now was Ciaran along with her legion of assassins, one of Gwyn''s Four Knights.


    He held no chance against them, there were around 35 of them. He had to run.


    Since becoming contact with the abyss, his body had transformed into something akin to a demon. His long pitch black hair corresponded with the abyss around him, his lips became paler, his skin turned as dark as his hair. Yet he looked younger than before.


    He had his mana armor placed around his skin to protect him from the projectiles that the assassins were throwing at him. They were underground, so he had little to no space to run for.


    "Dark Fog!" He casted a spell while running.


    But the poisonous fog seems to not have infected them.


    ''Tch, how did they even know where my location was? This is a very hidden spot, and it''s even underground. But that''s okay, I still have the location advantage. I''ve set up countless traps here, maybe if I could just lure them in¡­''


    As he thought about his traps, something suddenly pierced his right leg.


    It was a poison dagger! He staggered to the ground but with quick thinking, he used [Remedy] to cure the poison that affected him.


    He stood up again but the people following him got closer.


    He was not as fast as before because of the wound on his leg.


    He saw a hole in the dark cave and went to that human-size hole. When he went inside, he saw that there was a large area covered by nothing but stone. He had gone into the wrong hole!


    There was no way out.


    He turned around, only to see the assassins coming for him.


    So, he had to fight, or die.


    He chose his first option.


    He killed all of them with his one last futile attempt, but as a result, his mana was drained to its limit. He would perish soon. But at least he killed them all, right?


    Well, he was wrong. Ciaran faked her death to fool him so that the other members would fight him to exhaustion and she would be the one to deal the final blow.


    He died with her stabbing him in his back.


    "You¡­"


    "Die, for the greater good." Ciaran said coldly.


    His body fell limp to the ground as Ciaran kicked it away.


    Again, he failed.


    As he closed his eyes, he saw his daughter waving to him from a place that he could only tell as a paradise. They were telling him to come over there, to that peaceful place.


    But he had a promise to keep.


    [End of Memory]


    Hikaru stood in the cave where Manus died, the monster of the abyss he had just killed. Solaire tried waking him up but he was too grasped on the memories he had just received.


    "As always, another tragic memory. Why does this always happen only to Manus? Is the System telling me something? If so, what is it?" Hikaru muttered, trying to think about what he had just seen.


    Manus was THE Primeval Man. He was different from others. Was it his extreme emotions that ignited his soul and humanity from going out of control?


    "Hmm, no matter. I''ll think about it later. Azumi should be done with her Rasengan Training." Hikaru was suddenly bonk by something on his head. He looked up and saw Solaire holding a club.


    "What was that for?" He asked.


    "You weren''t waking up from your daydreaming. I think it''s time we leave this place." Solaire said.


    "I guess you''re right. Oh wait, I still haven''t claimed our rewards."


    In front of Hikaru was a transparent screen, it listed his rewards that he had just earned.


    [Soul of Manus, 50 Million Souls, 40 Humanities]


    "So no luck today, huh?" Hikaru said as he saw the rewards.


    Right now, his level is 400.


    This is his stats.


    _____________


    Name: Hikaru Hiroaki


    Race: Modified Undead


    Level - 400


    Next Level - ??????????


    Attunement - 40


    Endurance - 70


    Strength - 80


    Dexterity - 70


    Int - 70


    Faith - 70


    Resistance - 70


    ____


    Chakra - 89


    Chakra Control - 70


    _________________


    It took him more than 500 Million Souls to reach this level in a single month. It was worth the grind though. Now, no one would be able to be a threat to him in this world anymore. Not even the Akatsuki. And, his fight with the Olden God should be near soon. Once he reaches the max [99] Stat Cap, he will fight her. Chaortos, The Mother Of Darkness.


    He hasn''t worked on his chakra that much this month. He had to focus his self to grind souls every single day. Since Azumi found herself a teacher, which is Jiraiya. Of course, there was this awkward meeting the pervy sage but it turned out fine in the end.


    Jiraiya asked if he could train Azumi, and Hikaru agreed since there seems to be no problem in it. He''ll be more likely be a better teacher to her as a shinobi, but Hikaru himself would teach her things from time to time.


    Now, it''s day of the finals and Hiruzen has a big announcement for the teams.

 Chapter 66 - 60

    It was a fine day for Konoha. The Chunin Exam Finals will start any moment now. Thousands upon thousands of people visited Konoha to see the finals, whether they be merchants, shinobis, civilians, or rich nobles, they all came here just to see the fights.


    Hiruzen and the other Kages, The Kazekage, Rasa and the Raikage, Ay, agreed to Hiruzen''s plan but there was a bet. If ever a shinobi from their village wins, Hiruzen would have to pay them with a huge amount of money. The Sandaime agreed, knowing full well that nobody in this village can beat Hikaru in a fight. This was especially great for Rasa, since he really needed a financial backup in his village. The Raikage just wanted to see the heck of it, he''s just interested in who would win this fight. All contestants vs one handicapped contestant.


    Hikaru will be blindfolded and cannot use his chakra nor mana. He made these rules himself to make it harder for him. He can only use his raw strength, which is still a little bit unfair for the other contestants.


    (At The Konoha Stadium)


    Thousands of people surrounded the arena as they all chatted with each other. The Sandaime, Kazekage, and the Raikage all sat on top of the stadium in a glass protected room. They each have their own bodyguards, the Raikage with Samui as his bodyguard, and the Kazekage with Baki guarding him. While the Sandaime has Jiraiya as his guard.


    Samui is a tall, fair-skinned woman with a curvaceous figure who generally wears a stoic, aloof expression on her face. She has blue eyes and straight, shoulder-length blonde hair cut in an asymmetrical bob style. She wears a very low-cut outfit which displays her sizeable cleavage, with mesh armour underneath, a short skirt and red hand guards, high boots, and what appears to be a modified Kumogakure flak jacket that covers her stomach only, similar to a girdle. She also carries a tant¨­ strapped horizontally to her lower back


    Baki is a very tall man. He has two distinctive, red markings on the right side of his face, the only visible part of his head, with the rest being covered by his turban-like head gear and by a sheet hanging from it on the left side of his face. He dons the standard attire of a Suna-nin, complete with a forehead protector and flak jacket.


    "So Jiraiya, do you think Azumi can win against Hikaru?" Hiruzen asked, knowing full well she couldn''t.


    Jiraiya just sighed and shook his head before saying, "No, she cannot. Hikaru, simply put, is a monster. Not even I can punch him without getting skewered by his hand through my stomach. He''s simply too strong."


    "Hah hah hah hah, of course you wouldn''t be able to. Not even I, the Hokage, can defeat him." Hiruzen laughed.


    Rasa and Ay suddenly had shivers. They felt like they''ve just been scammed by this sly Hokage.


    Hiruzen then turned his head towards the other two Kages and said, "You two will have to watch carefully, see if you can determine who to become a chunin and who doesn''t."


    Ay snorted and said, " Hmph, I only have one shinobi there. Airi and Haru were more than qualified to become chunins, if only Haru didn''t encounter an enemy he couldn''t defeat, then I would have two shinobis here in the finals. Darui only has himself to blame, I''ll make sure to train him harder than before."


    "Hm, all three of my children got in but that doesn''t mean I''d be biased only towards them. Gaara seems to have been able to calm himself and not go maniacal over something. Temari is still the same, while Kankuro¡­ he is still as basic as ever. I wonder, what happened to my son, Gaara, when he arrived here?" Rasa wondered.


    Rasa, while he loves his children very much, is also torn between his familial love and his duty as the Kazekage of Suna. He made a deal with Orochimaru to invade Konoha, knowing full well that Orochimaru was a highly dangerous criminal. But he wonders, where is that Snake?


    Hiruzen saw the puzzled look on Rasa''s face and said, "Orochimaru is dead."


    The Kazekage suddenly widened his eyes and stood up almost immediately before trying to escape, only for Jiraiya to appear behind him with a kunai on his neck while Baki had his kunai on Jiraiya''s throat too.


    "Hokage-dono! What''s the meaning of this?!" Raikage yelled.


    "Now, now, calm down. Let me explain." Hiruzen looked straight at the other two Kages before him and said, "You see, the Kazekage teamed up with Orochimaru, a highly dangerous criminal, to invade our village. You see now? Your shinobis would''ve been caught in the crossfire if one of my men, I mean, boy, killed Orochimaru less than a month ago." Hiruzen explained.


    "What?! Was that true, Kazekage!?" Ay asked angrily.


    Samui readied her tanto as she stared at the scene in front of her.


    "Calm down everyone. Jiraiya, put down your kunai. We will have a talk with our Kazekage here." Hiruzen said as his eyes glinted.


    Jiraiya withdrew his kunai and Baki also withdrew his kunai.


    Then, suddenly, the air around Hiruzen changed. He became more serious and calculative. His previous carefree attitude was gone, and now his staring dead directly to Rasa''s eyes before he gave the Kazekage two options, "Rasa, I know that your village has suffered from a financial crisis but this does not mean you could just invade my village. You know the consequences of war, you were there after all when it all happened. I understand your situation¡­"


    "No you don''t!" Rasa yelled at a sudden snap, "Did you ever see your people die from starvation because we didn''t have enough resources in our village? Or did you ever see your people fight for a single slice of bread!? The feeling of those things, it makes me feel that I''m a failure as a leader! Your village took away one of our main and highly paid financial income, our missions. I have thousands of my shinobis waiting just outside your village, I can invade Konoha anytime I want! Give me one good reason why I shouldn''t!"


    "Because all of your shinobis are under my genjutsu." Suddenly, a young yet cold voice sounded.


    All of the people in the room turned their heads towards the voice, and saw a twelve years old child looking at them. He wore aristocratic clothes with a mask tied to his waist. He has a long sword on his back with the Konoha headband on his waist.


    "Oh, Hikaru, you''ve finally arrived. So, did they put on a fight?" Hiruzen asked, strangely happy.


    "No, they couldn''t, specifically, they just really couldn''t. They are all now under my genjutsu, I can make them do whatever I want." Hikaru replied.


    "You lie! There''s no way¡­" Rasa said.


    "...He would be able to do that? Trust me, he''s more powerful than he looks." Hiruzen said.


    Hiruzen gestured at Hikaru and he immediately understood what the Sandaime wanted him to do. In a sudden burst of speed, he appeared behind Rasa, dislocated his knees with a kick, before tying him up with his mana whip. Then he knocked out Baki with a chop on the back of his head, so no more interference would join in.


    All of this happened in less than a second.


    Ay couldn''t even react after Hikaru was one with Rasa, and he only reacted a few seconds after. Samui even took 10 seconds to realize what had just happened.


    "What just¡­ happened?" Ay couldn''t comprehend what just happened to Rasa. It was like, in a single flash of a second, Rasa had his knees dislocated and Baki was knocked out.


    "Aaah!! What happened!?" Rasa yelled as he fell to the ground when he felt his knees dislocated.


    Now, Rasa wouldn''t be able to fight and Hiruzen could talk to him as much as he wants.


    Hikaru threw a bottle of Divine Blessing to Hiruzen''s hands and said, "Well, I''ll be going now. Make your talk fast, the finals are going to start soon." He then vanished in thin air.


    Hiruzen nodded before he looked back to Rasa and said, "Now, we''ll talk calmly and resolve our grudges to each other."


    ( Half an hour later, in the arena)


    Countless chatters came from the sidelines of the arena, while the contestants waited behind the metal fences.


    It seems like they''ve been here for a while. But, there was something that caught their eyes for a while now, is that Hikaru was sitting in the middle of the arena with a blindfold on his eyes.


    "I wonder what darling is doing there." Azumi wondered out loud.


    "Maybe the Sandaime ordered him to do that? But why though?" Sasuke replied to her question.


    "Hmm, let''s just ask him directly." Hinata said before she shouted at Hikaru, "Hikaru-kun, what''re you doing there?"


    Hikaru turned his head towards Hinata, and said, "Oh this? Wait for the Sandaime to announce what''s happening." Then he took out a chocolate bar out of nowhere and ate it while waiting for the Hokage too.


    While he is blindfolded, Hikaru can still "see" what they are doing. He has trained his hearing and smell so that he could fight the invisible monsters in the System, like the Irithyllian Slaves. They were very annoying enemies. There are those in which you could see their eyes and dark smoke, while there are types that could truly become invisible by closing their eyes.


    Imagine fighting ten of those and they are all ten times stronger than normal. Yeah, he was f.u.c.k.i.e.d by them for so many times. Not in a literal sense though.


    Then, the Sandaime appeared on top of the Kage stands and all the people quieted down.

 Chapter 67 - Hmm...

    I''ve been thinking of creating a novel. I want it to be based upon God Of War, the game, but it''s not going to be the greek pantheon that''s going to be the enemies here. I will be making my own gods, just like I did with this fanfic.


    Around 12 major gods and 24 minor gods. Each major gods have 2 minor gods as their servants. The MC will be a demigod, just like Kratos. I will make a plot that will direct the mc''s hatred towards the gods. He will try to slaughter them just like Kratos did to the greek gods.


    But first, let''s have a talk about our sponsor for today, Raid Shadow Legen- whoops, wrong words there buddy.


    Alright, enough about jokes, I will first build the world. Hmm, I will plan it inside my head. I''ll let you guys check it after I''m done with it.


    PS: Not a fanfic but a novel.

 Chapter 68 - 61

    "I see that all of the contestants are here except for Kinuta Dosu, but that matters not. The Kages and I have changed the rules of the finals. Young Hikaru here has challenged all of the contestants present here for a one versus all. If he wins the fight, he will be promoted to chunin straight away and you guys guys will not be promoted to chunin, unless your Kage deems you worthy of being a chunin. But, if you guys were to win against Hikaru, he will not get promoted and instead, all of the ones who will survive the fight against him will be promoted to chunins. But those who''ve been knocked out, I''m sorry, but they will have to retake the exam next year." Hiruzen stops his speech and stares at the people down in front of him for people who will be against this idea. He saw none, and continued his speech.


    "All of you will have 5 Minutes to plan your attack, and Hikaru will be handicapped. He cannot use his chakra, or any other powers he has against you guys. He will be blindfolded so that he cannot use his eyes. These were his personal rules that he set for himself, do not worry about it. After all of you finished planning your strategy, you will have 30 Minutes to fight Hikaru."


    Hiruzen turned around to go back to the Kage Stands but not before saying, "Good luck, all of you. Trust me, you will need it." He then returned to Kage Stands.


    In the middle of the arena was Hikaru, sitting calmly while eating another bar of chocolate.


    Up where the contestants are, they seem to be chatting with themselves.


    "Really? We all have to fight Hikaru-kun while he''s handicapped? That''s a load of bull! This is unfair, even for Hikaru-kun!" Hinata complained.


    "No, if you think about it, it''s not really that unfair, considering his strength. He could still slaughter us even if all of his limbs were cut off." Sasuke said as he thought about it.


    "Hm, yes, Hikaru''s very strong. I''m even starting to be nervous with just the thought of fighting him." Shino said with a very nervous voice.


    "Hmph, I just want to avenge the defeat of my brother, that''s all." Airi said.


    "Guys, this is no time for arguing. We need a strategy to defeat him. Right now he can only use his raw strength against us, not his other powers, which is a very big advantage for us." Shikamaru said but his voice this time is serious, very unlike him.


    "So what do you suggest, you lazy bastard?" Temari said to Shikamaru.


    "Troublesome, let''s go with the old tactic, protect and attack. From my own assumption, Airi here seems to be an Uzumaki, am I right?" Shikamaru said to the others.


    Airi nodded her head.


    "Then you know a lot of Fuinjutsu, right?" Shikamaru asked.


    "I''m a level 6 Fuinjutsu Master, if that''s what you''re talking about." Airi replied.


    "Really?! That''s amazing! Now i get my plan to work. Listen, Airi will be our main weapon against Hikaru. If we can get her enough time to prepare a seal that can bind Hikaru, then we have basically won by then. Our heavy hitters are going to be Sasuke, Azumi, and Gaara. The rest will protect Airi until she finishes the seal. I will serve as a distraction for the heavy hitters, as I am the only one here who can manipulate shadows. All of you got that, right?"


    ""Yes!"" ""Roger that!"" "" Of course"" They all said in unison.


    "Soo, I should use [Fuinjutsu: Art Of Binding]?" Airi asked.


    "Yes, but can you make it stronger than normal?" Shikamaru replied.


    "Of course, who do you think I am? But you will have to buy me 20 Minutes of time. It''s easy to alter a Fuinjutsu technique if you have enough knowledge about it." Airi said.


    "Great! It seems like the time is up, let''s fight Hikaru!"


    "Wait! I should tell you something about Hikaru first." Azumi suddenly interrupted.


    "Hmm? What is it?" Shikamaru asked.


    "He can hit tenketsus, just like the Hyuga does." Azumi said gravely.


    "What? That doesn''t matter, he has his blindfold on. Even if he can hit our tenketsu, he can only probably use it when he can see." Sasuke said.


    "No, he doesn''t need his sight to do that. He perfectly knows where each and every tenketsu is. I think he spent some time studying medical ninjutsu for a while back when we were all in the academy." Azumi said with a grave look on her face.


    "Well, this is a problem. Troublesome." Shikamaru said, as if he has a lot of problems right now.


    (A Few Minutes Later)


    All nine of them finally went down to fight Hikaru after planning their strategy. They had to make a plan B, in case everything goes down.


    Hikaru stood up with a smile on his face. When he did that, all of the people in the stadium sensed a pressure unlike any other. But it was not directed to them, it was directed towards the other contestants. They all kneeled down due to the pressure, they can even see the ground under caving in due to the pressure he is emanating.


    ''First step, break down their confidence. Let''s see how they fight against this.'' Hikaru thought with a smile.


    But, suddenly, they all turned into Azumi before they disappeared in a poof of smoke.


    "Huh, what?" Hikaru was flabbergasted.


    "Behind you!" This time, he can clearly hear Azumi''s voice.


    "Oi! I haven''t started the fight!" Hayate yelled, but he suddenly felt a stare coming from behind him. He turned around and looked up. He saw the Hokage gesturing to him to let them go. He was smiling, as if enjoying Hikaru''s pain.


    ''Heh, brat. Now you will see the wrath of a Kage. Hahahahaha!!'' Hiruzen laughed evilly inside his head.


    Hikaru dodged a kick towards his head by crouching down slightly, but another kick came downwards, it was aiming for his legs. He dodged it easily by jumpin up, he landed on the ground and he was met with a punch on his face along with a giant fireball coming towards him.


    He crashed on the ground because of that punch, it was aiming to immobilize him even for just a single moment for the fireball to hit him.


    "Hmph, your futile efforts are nothing." He backflipped and landed on his feet. He then slapped the giant fireball away, dissipating it easily.


    "Good work, Gaara, Azumi, and Sasuke. But that wasn''t nearly enough to take me down." He stood his ground with that annoying smile on his face never leaving him.


    "Tch, we nearly had him." Sasuke cursed under his breath.


    "Don''t forget our goal, Sasuke." Gaara reminded him.


    "Yeah, I won''t forget."


    Sasuke and Azumi then charged towards Hikaru with Gaara''s sand backing them up.


    Punches and kicks, Hikaru dodged them all very easily. He would sometimes point out their mistakes, it was as if he was coaching them.


    As he continued dodging their attacks, he was suddenly immobilized by something. It was just for a fraction of a second, but it was enough for the other three to take advantage of it.


    Sasuke sent three shurikens towards him before multiplying all of them. From three, it went from a hundred shurikens. Hikaru, sensing that countless objects were currently flying towards him, only stood his ground.


    But Azumi was already behind him with a rasengan on her hand.


    "I''m sorry, Darling. Rasengan!" Azumi attacked him from behind, launching him towards the shurikens.


    BOOM!!


    Hikaru was launched towards the shurikens before he crashed on the walls of the Arena.


    Great amount of smoke appeared when he crashed onto the wall. Yet, when he came out of that smokescreen, he was unscathed.


    "What!? How did he live through that!" Sasuke yelled in shock.


    "Impossible!!" Gaara muttered.


    If a regular shinobi was hit with that kind of attack, they would''ve been dead by now.


    "How disappointing. I thought that you 4 would be stronger than this. Did I overestimate you all?" Hikaru said harshly as he dusted himself off.


    On the other side of the arena was a dome made of bugs. Just outside of it were the others, they were guarding it.


    "And if I''m not mistaken, that bug dome over there is where the rest of your plan is? The only Uzumaki who''s not here is Airi, knowing you, you would''ve made her create a fuinjutsu to bind me or seal my movements completely. Do you think that would work? Shikamaru?" Hidden all along was Shikamaru, he was the one who stopped Hikaru''s movements earlier for a fraction of a second.


    "Tch, you sure are strong. But don''t be full of yourself just yet. I have other strategies to beat you!" Shikamaru yelled.


    "Hmph, come and try." Hikaru taunted them. He then added, "But now, it''s my turn."


    Hikaru suddenly vanished.


    The four of them looked around trying to find them. Yet, he just appeared behind Shikamaru.


    "Boo." With a flick of his finger, Shikamaru suddenly found himself hurting all over. Hikaru, with a flick of his finger, made Shikamaru crash towards the wall.


    "Shikamaru!" Sasuke yelled, trying to help but he was swatted away by Hikaru.


    "I shall let you see how much disparity there is between us."


    Hikaru appeared in front of the already weakened Shikamaru and kicked him deeper in the walls of the stadium. The ones who were close were shaken due to the impact of that kick.


    Hikaru looked inside the hole he just made and saw Shikamaru bleeding all over. He turned around and ignored him before going after the others.


    But then¡­


    "Who¡­said¡­You¡­could¡­leave?" Shikamaru crawled out of that hole, bloodyed.


    ''Ho, such willpower. But that''s nothing in front of absolute strength.'' Hikaru was just about to kick him again, this time to knock him out for sure, but Azumi, Sasuke, and Gaara suddenly appeared in front of him, blocking his path.


    "Don''t just focus on him, there''s still us." Sasuke said.


    "This time.... I will beat you." Gaara said as he went into his stance.


    "Don''t try to run, Darling! This time¡­ this time, I will beat you! Believe it!" Azumi announced with her sunlight straight sword in hand.


    She will not face Hikaru as her lover, but as a shinobi!


    Truth be told, Hikaru can finish this in a flash but this is important for Azumi''s growth. If she can scratch him, even just slightly, then he can say that she has grown powerful.


    Hikaru chuckled before it slowly turned into a full blown laughter.


    "Hah hah hah hah hah!! Interesting, interesting! Let''s see how you can beat me, I''m curious!"


    The faces of the trio grew even more serious, this time Hikaru may not go easy on them.


    Meanwhile, up on the stands¡­


    Hikaru had summoned him here to watch the fight, but he didn''t think that his friend''s lover would have the same sword as him.


    "Ah, my friend. You must be cherishing our friendship very much." Solaire said as he wiped his tears of happiness.


    Thanks to his friend, he made another friend here and his name is Might Gai! The most youthful person in this village!


    "Aren''t I right, Gai my friend?" Solaire asked the dude who''s wearing a tight green spandex.


    "Of course, Hikaru is one of the most youthful people in the village! I would even hear him training in the middle of the night while Lee and I were doing our nightly training! I would even hear Azumi-kun training too! Hahahaha!" Gai laughed and Solaire laughed with him too.

 Chapter 69 - 62

    "Are you finished yet!?" Hinata asked Airi from outside the bug dome.


    "Almost! Just give me a little bit more time! 2 Minutes is enough!" Airi replied from inside the bug dome.


    "Hikaru-dono is as strong as ever. To take on the four of them and still hold back a large margin of his strength, truly such a powerful shinobi." Shino said as he adjusted his sunglasses.


    "Tch, if we just give them our support, then that Hikaru would probably lose. C''mon, Temari, let''s go there and fight alongside them!" Kankuro said, feeling a little bit angered that he''s just staring at the fight in front of him and could not do anything.


    He was just about to charge straight in but Temari was faster with her giant fan. With one swing, she hit his head with her giant fan, making him fall flat on the ground.


    "Dumbass, if we go there now, there''s a huge chance that Hikaru would take notice of what we''re doing right now. He may just attack us but even if he doesn??t attack us, we still need to take caution."Temari sighed before she stared down at Kankuro and said, "Remember this well, Hikaru is on a completely different level. Maybe even in our lifetime, we wouldn''t be able to catch up to him."


    Hikaru is strong, his powers could not be measured by any means. Maybe even he himself doesn''t know how powerful he is. Shino and the others has never seen him go all out. Even after they''ve graduated from the academy, it seems like he''s grown a hundred times more than back then. Maybe one day, they would be able to see just how strong he is.


    (Scene Change)


    "Interesting, interesting! Let me see how you will all beat me, I am curious!" Hikaru yelled as his smile grew bigger.


    Gaara rushed straight at Hikaru with hundreds upon hundreds of sand shuriken following him.


    Sasuke weaved a single hand sign before shouting, "Katon: Housenka no Jutsu!" 7 volley of flames came out of Sasuke''s mouth before he controlled the flames to go directly towards Hikaru. The small volley of flames rushed at Hikaru at an incredible speed but hidden inside those flames were explosive kunais, making it even more deadlier.


    "Taju Kage Bunshin no Jutsu!" Hundreds of clones appeared in a large poof of smoke.


    "Now for the real part! All of you, make a rasengan!" Azumi shouted to her army of clones.


    Meanwhile, with Hikaru¡­


    Before Gaara could reach him, Hikaru suddenly vanished from his vision. He stopped mid-run before,looking around for any signs of Hikaru. Yet he only found nothing. Until he heard a slight whistle from the wind, it was coming from above!


    BOOM!


    Hikaru had jumped above them before he kicked the air and was about to land a punch towards Gaara but it was blocked by his automatic sand defense.


    Hikaru pushed his hand away from the sand and landed back on the ground but the flames that Sasuke fired earlier suddenly came from behind him!


    Boom! Boom! Boom! Boom Boom! Boom! Boom!


    The fireballs exploded and the force was so great that it launched Hikaru towards Azumi, who''s currently waiting for Azumi with her army of shadow clones. All of them has a rasengan in hand!


    "I''ve been waiting for this! Take this!" Azumi shouted as she and the rest of her shadow clones attacked Hikaru with their rasengan.


    "Ultimate Rasengan Barrage!"


    Hikaru did not dodge the barrage of rasengan coming towards him as he was launched towards Azumi.


    WHOOSH!! BOOM!!


    A huge dome of chakra was created when Azumi''s and her clones'' rasengans directly hit Hikaru.


    As the dome of chakra slowly rescinded, they could finally see Hikaru''s figure.


    He stood there as if he was shocked. His current armor, which was Chester''s set, has been destroyed! Only his pants were left but the upper top was completely destroyed.


    "To be able to destroy my armor, how amazing!" *Clap* *clap* clap* Hikaru clapped but, suddenly, he threw up blood!


    "Tch, the rotating force of her rasengan barrage messed up some of my organs. I need to fix it soon." Hikaru took out an old radiant lifegem from his storage box before crushing it. It healed most of his damaged organs but some are slow at recovery.


    ''To be able to injure me this much, how wonderful! She must''ve figured out that, although my skin is very hard to pierced, my insides are not. Such a bright girl!'' Hikaru thought.


    "Improvised strategies, you guys are synchronized too well. But that matters not, now it''s my turn to go on full offensive." Hikaru said as the air around him distorted. He looked at Gaara and smiled.


    Sasuke widened his eyes and yelled to warn him, "Gaara! Run! His target is you!"


    "Too late¡­" Hikaru muttered as he appeared just under Gaara before he uppercuted him, launching him a hundred kilometre towards the sky.


    Hikaru then jumped towards Gaara.


    Now, they were both at the top of the clouds.


    "Let''s see you defend against this."


    He appeared on top of Gaara before punching him straight towards the ground, hard.


    Gaara fell from the skies like an asteroid, burning.


    He had his sand defense up but the heat just kept getting to him. He covered himself in a dome of sand.


    "Aaaaarghh!! Raaaaahhh!!" Gaara yelled in extreme pain.


    As he was about to crash towards the ground, Hikaru was just in the right position to catch him with one hand.


    BOOOOOM!! WHOOSH!


    The impact of Gaara falling from the sky created a huge crack on the ground. Thankfully, it was reduced because of Hikaru catching him.


    "I can''t have you die now, do I?" He said towards the unconscious Gaara. He then threw away the red haired boy towards the medics along with a divine blessing.


    "Make him drink that, it should heal him." Hikaru said to the medics, who catched Gaara along with the bottle of divine blessing.


    All of the people on the stand were in awe and shock. They''ve never seen anything like this, such strength, he may be a reincarnation of a god!


    The crowd roared in cheers.


    But the most shocked of all were the Daimyos. There''s never been a shinobi like this, ever. His pure strength alone can defeat armies, but if it''s true that he''s not even using his powers and other abilities, then this one is simply a monster in a human''s skin.


    "Gaara¡­" Temari couldn''t help but in tears as she saw her brother''s condition. Even though she was far away, she could see those terrible burn marks across his body.


    "F.u.c.ker, he''ll pay for that!" Kankuro cursed.


    "Everyone, I''ve finished making the seal!" Airi yelled from inside the bug dome.


    When Shino heard that, the dome of bugs that he made dispersed.


    "Finally! So where is it?" Hinata asked.


    Airi smirked and showed her 5 Talismans. They were all engraved with fuinjutsu.


    "This is all of them, it took me a little bit more time to make 5 of them. We need to be cautious, after all. We will surprise attack him with these, and if we''re lucky, we might just be able to use all these to bind him." Airi said as she gave each of them a talisman.


    All five of them were now ready, it''s time for Hikaru to lose!


    With Hikaru¡­


    Sasuke and Azumi were already low on chakra. Sasuke had to go beyond his limit to use Chidori three times but it didn''t work. They were powerless against him.


    "Is this the best you two can do? I''m over here, unarmed with no armor on, yet you two can''t even put a single scratch on my body? Even with your 3 Tomoe Sharingan, Sasuke, you still can''t beat me? Azumi, why don''t you try using the fox''s power? That should help you all defeat me, at least that''s what I think." Hikaru was mocking them. Their powerlessness, it was as if the training they did was nothing but a joke to Hikaru.


    After training with Kakashi for a month, Sasuke unlocked the next stage to his Sharingan, the 3 Tomoe Sharingan. He had to train harder than normal but it was worth gaining this power. Yet, it was still useless against Hikaru. He can''t even see his movements with his eyes.


    Azumi clenched her fists, no matter what she did, she still couldn''t catch up to him. She''s strong, she knows this, but Hikaru''s even stronger. She just wants to one day stand side-by-side with him on the battlefield. She feels like there are secrets that Hikaru is not telling her, she also wants to know that, so she could understand him better.


    If she can gain power through begging the Nine-Tailed Fox, then so be it.


    At least that way, he would acknowledge her strength.


    She took a deep breath before diving deep into her mindscape.


    With Hikaru¡­


    When he saw her taking a deep breath and closing her eyes, he knew that she would try to contact the fox and ask for its power.


    He was just about to stop her, since she could lose control of it and he blames himself for telling her to do that, but he was stopped by something. He looked at his shadow and there was another shadow connected to it. He then looked around and saw Shikamaru doing the hand sign for his Shadow Possession Jutsu.


    But Hikaru just ignored and continued walking towards Azumi.


    As he was walking towards Azumi, he felt something touch his back. When he turned around, he saw Temari and the others. Four of them were holding talismans.


    Then he realized he couldn''t move. There was something binding him.


    ''The seal!'' Hikaru thought, ''So they''ve completed it?"


    "You fools! What do you think you''re doing!?" Hikaru said.


    "We''ve binded you with a fuinjutsu seal, there''s no way you could escape right now!" Temari replied.


    "Azumi is currently drawing power from the Kyuubi! If I don''t stop her now-"


    It was too late. Red, menacing chakra bursts out from Azumi. It was full of hatred, the people around the arena could feel it. Its extreme hatred, it was directed at everyone.


    Three red tails made from the red chakra sprouted from Azumi''s behind. Her features started to look feral, her whisker marks turned dark and larger, her teeth grew sharper. Two long ears protrude from the red chakra cloak.


    "Darling, darling, darling, you''re proud of me now, right?" Azumi smiled sweetly, her eyes devoid of any pupils. It was like back then, when she was s.e.x.u.a.lly harassing him every night.


    "Azumi¡­" Hikaru muttered. With one push, he broke the binding seal.


    He has to be fast or Azumi might go to her fourth tail soon!


    ''Why the hell did I have to say that!? Goddamnit!'' Hikaru cursed inside his head. He looked around the stadium and saw that most of the people around them were scared, they were all terrified of her.


    Knowing that this situation could get worse, he just decided to win this and end all of this because this is definitely not going well.


    In a single blink of any eye, all of the contestants in the arena were knocked out except for Hikaru. He was not in his position from before, he was carrying Azumi like a tender princess in his arms. It seems like the chakra cloak finally rescinded when he knocked her out. He couldn''t use his mana or else, he will lose the exam.


    Now, the chunin exam has officially ended!

 Chapter 70 - 63

    Three days had passed since then. Out of all of them, only Hikaru was promoted to Chunin on the side of Konoha. While Gaara had been promoted to Chunin by his father while his siblings stayed as Genins. The Raikage didn''t promote Airi because he didn''t see her being that useful earlier in the battlefield. It was more like she was being protected, which seemed kind of pathetic in front of the Raikage.


    The Raikage left the village along with his shinobis but the Kazekage seems to have some other business with the Hokage.


    The other genins were quite bitter after they lost the chance to become a chunin but they still threw a party for Hikaru''s promotion.


    After that party, Hikaru and Azumi had a talk with each other.


    (Flashback, Two Days Ago)


    Under the light of the moon, Hikaru and Azumi sat on top of the rooftop of their house.


    Hikaru wore normal black pants and a black T-shirt. His long wavy black hair spread out as the wind hit his face. While Azumi wore her orange night-gown.


    "Darling, I''m sorry. I shouldn''t have used the kyuubi''s power. I almost lost control of it." Azumi apologized to Hikaru with her head down.


    Hikaru just smiled and patted her head before saying, "It doesn''t matter anymore. The reason your father sealed the kyuubi inside you was for you to use its power. You don''t have to apologize. Maybe one day, you''ll be able to control the kyuubi''s power to its fullest."


    "Un!" Azumi nodded her head cutely, happy that Hikaru isn''t angry at her.


    Hikaru then looked above the night sky, then said, "Do you want to know how the tailed beasts were captured so easily by the Shodaime despite their immeasurable strength?"


    "Hmm? Wasn''t that because the Shodaime was too strong for them?" Azumi asked, a little bit confused.


    "Indeed, the Shodaime was a very strong shinobi but that''s just partly the reason he was able to capture them. The tailed beasts, unlike humans, don''t know how to use their chakra efficiently. We humans can mold our chakra and turn them into what we call ''jutsu''. Intelligence living beings like humans is the only race in this world that can use chakra this way. But tailed beasts aren''t exactly living beings. They are created purely from chakra. That''s why they cannot use jutsus. But they have the bijuudama, which is a very powerful technique that can obliterate a country if they have enough time to prepare. But it takes too long to cast, that''s why humans can take advantage of that time and seal them."


    "The tailed beast inside you is the strongest out of all the others. But it was still captured and sealed by the Shodaime and the Yondaime. Imagine a tailed beast that can use techniques like us humans, if a thing like that really exists, then it would be unstoppable. What I am saying is, humans are the only beings that can truly use the tailed beasts'' true power and potential. But that is if the tailed beasts agree to partner with them." Hikaru explained. This is just his own theory, a tailed beast theory! Ahem.


    "Wah! If that''s true, then one day, I can use the kyuubi''s power freely?!" Azumi asked, amazed at that fact.


    "Yes, but you have to earn its trust." Hikaru looked at her and smiled. But he knew, even when that time comes, he won''t be there to see it.


    "Yosh, I have a new goal! To earn the kyuubi''s trust! This will be a huge step towards being the Hokage! Believe it!" Azumi shouted up in the air as she stood up and pumped her fist up.


    "Hah hah hah hah, of course." Hikaru laughed at her childish antics.


    (Flashback End)


    A few days after that, the slaves that Hikaru''s clones had saved finally arrived in Konoha along with the last remaining clone of Hikaru. After they left the ship to go on the land, they had to walk all the way to Konoha. There were hundreds of them, so it was hard. Most of them were children and there were few a.d.u.l.ts. If it was only the clone, he could''ve arrived in Konoha in less than a day. But these people aren''t like Hikaru, they are just normal human beings. They don''t even know how to use chakra, so it was hard for the clone after a while


    The clone had to rob a few bandit camps to gather money for their own survival needs, resulting in them taking more people because there was also people being used as slaves or s.e.x slaves in those bandit camps. They now have around 500+ people. Hikaru''s clone had to suffer continued stress because it was hard leading that many people. Along the way, they had to rob more bandit camps, and they would sometimes encounter jounin level shinobis. But they were easily taken care of by Hikaru''s clone. They now have 600+ people, which put a huge burden upon the clone. He had to take care of their basic needs, food, clothes, shelter and many, many more. By the time they reached Konoha, all the money that was stolen from the paradise island and the bandit camps were already gone. Not a single ryo was left.


    Hikaru met with the clone in front of the village gates after sensing hundreds of small chakra sources coming towards the village.


    The guards were tense, there were too many people. They decided not drop their guard, they may be enemies.


    "So you''ve arrived. What happened on your journey, seems like you''re a bit haggard? And why are there so many people?" Hikaru asked as he looked at the appearance of his clone.


    The clone kneeled down in one knee and reported, "I raided many bandit camps to gain enough budget to support all these people, but I came across many slaves and s.e.x slaves along the way, so I felt the need to help all of them. It seems like those bandits raided small villages to easily gain more wealth and women. Please, if you can, help all of them." The clone said as if he was pleading.


    "I am amazed, for you to survive this long. But it seems like your chakra is running low, you''re about to disappear soon. But don''t worry, I''ll help all of them." Hikaru promised.


    "I thank you, my creator." The clone then canceled itself and with that, he was gone in a poof of smoke.


    Suddenly, all the memories and experiences of the clone went to Hikaru. All the things he did for these people, it was as if he was a different person than Hikaru. All the kind things he did, the stress and the people he had to burden, all of those things were crammed inside Hikaru''s head. It was small but it managed to change his personality a little. He became a little bit more kinder.


    ''Can clones like this one gain a different personality than the creator? Such an amazing discovery, but I think I need to be a bit more careful when using them from now on. If this clone can discover a kind personality, then my other clones can probably take an evil personality in the long run. Huh, didn''t think it would get this complicated.'' Hikaru said inside his thoughts.


    Hikaru then looked at the people his clone brought. The majority of them were children, while a small part of them were a.d.u.l.ts. He can see that some of the children there have some kind of bloodline. There were some dojutsu wielders there too. Some have feral features, which seems to be some kind of bloodline. Kekkei genkai wielders are there too. It seems like Konoha won''t be experiencing bloodline limit shortage any time soon.


    Hikaru floated up in the air and the people stared at him in amazement. He then cleared his voice and enhanced his voice with mana before saying, "Welcome to Konoha. You people are quite lucky to have survived this long, but now, no more people with bad intentions will be coming for you. You are all under the protection of this village and me. No longer will you all experience hunger nor hardsh.i.p.s, my only condition is stay loyal to me. If someone here dares to betray me, I promise you, you wouldn''t get a peaceful death." He said that last part coldly, so they could see he''s serious.


    As he stared at them, he noticed that they were all dressed well. His clone seems to have bought them all nice clothes. From his memories, he saw that the clone stole a few hundred million ryo from the ship and got a billion ryo when they sold Daiki. But how did he squander all of that in a single month? That cannot be possible. Did they do something else?


    As he thought about, he suddenly caught a glimpse of what the people were wearing. They were all branded clothing. He suddenly remembered his clone''s memories. He saw that the clone never budgeted their money and got scammed by a lot. He even bought these people expensive food.


    Hikaru suddenly found the urge to kill that clone. How can his clone be so stupid? To buy all of these people expensi...ve¡­ Hey, isn''t he doing the same to Azumi? Maybe he felt some attachment to these people and decided to care for them like a family would. Hm, hm, that must be it.


    "Like hell it is!!" Hikaru shouted out of anger. Yellow lightning crackled from his hands and the clouds started to turn darker. The wind raged, all of the animals within 20 mile radius were all so terrified that they couldn''t move.


    Hikaru suddenly saw the chaos he''s creating and decided to calm down a bit.


    "Ahem, sorry for my sudden outburst. That was unbecoming of me." Hikaru said, he finally calmed down.


    The people down him were all terrified, some of them couldn''t hold it and fainted.


    "Carry all of those who fainted then follow me. We will be meeting the Hokage to assign you guys to your shelters. There are some vacant houses here but they''re not that big. I hope you guys aren''t against living in tents for awhile until we build a suitable house for all of you." Hikaru said.


    As he was about to turn around, a child no older than 9 came up. She had short black hair and brown eyes. She wore a dress that you would normally see princesses and nobles of countries wearing.


    "Um, Onni-chan, are you mad at us?" She seems to be quite teary, her round and cute pitiful eyes looked at him.


    Hikaru then landed on the ground and patted the child on her head before saying, "Of course not, the one I''m angry at is the one who brought you here. Which ironically is my clone."


    "Clone?" She asked cutely.


    "You can''t understand it yet, but some day, maybe you will." Of course she will, she has a kekkei genkai, too. There''s a hundred percent chance that she will become a shinobi.


    Hikaru then turned around and floated up in the sky.


    The people followed him obediently.

 Chapter 71 - 64

    Hiruzen sat on his chair with his hand rubbing his forehead. He looked in front of him and only saw Hikaru smiling at him as innocent as he can be. He rubbed his forehead again as he closed his eyes due to the stress he''s currently feeling right now.


    "So, what you are saying is that a month ago, you ordered two of your clones to go to the Island of Paradise while having one of the sons of our Daimyo turned into a little girl before selling him to the pedophiles in that island?" Hiruzen asked.


    "Yes." Hikaru''s short response.


    Hiruzen rubbed his forehead more and then said, "After doing all that, you took all the slaves and innocent people with you before destroying the entire island with an S-Rank jutsu you created? And this all happened behind my back?!" Hiruzen asked, becoming more and more distressed because of the situation.


    "Yup." Hikaru''s, again, short response.


    Bam!


    Hiruzen stood up as he slapped the top of his desk and yelled, "Do you know what you have just done!? The Brother of the Fire Daimyo was there along with other important nobles! It came to me that they all died a month ago, but I didn''t know it was all your doing! Thousands! Thousands of important nobles all died there along with powerful S-Rank Shinobis! The state capital of the fire country is currently experiencing massive panic, the nobles are all hiding in their houses and never coming out for the fear of a murderer killing them! There''s also been a decrease of budget from the Fire Daimyo, and it''s all because of you!! I wouldn''t even know what would happen to us if they learn about this!"


    Hikaru nervously scratched the side of his face and thought, ''I never knew the situation was this bad. I should''ve bought newspapers, that way I could''ve known what happened in the Capital.''


    "We''re doomed, Konoha is doomed! Doomed, I tell you!" It seems like Hiruzen can''t hold his mentality from breaking apart, he''s currently having a nervous breakdown right now.


    "You underestimate me too much, old man. If it''s the budget for the whole village, I can handle that. You know how powerful my abilities are, right? I can just use my genjutsu to fool the Fire Daimyo into giving us more budget than before, or if that''s not an option, I can introduce new ways of making our own resources." Hikaru said he was as calm as a cuc.u.mber.


    "It''s not that easy! If we messed up the budgeting of the ENTIRE country, it could lead to a public revolt. We could easily stop all of them with our shinobis, but the thing is, they could just leave the country and we cannot have a country without people. I would rather choose the second option, that way it will be more peaceful." Hiruzen said as he took pills to calm himself.


    Hikaru smirked and said. "Major Villages are just like military camps, we focus on the military instead of making resources. Am I right?"


    "Yes, we cannot produce our own resources, that''s why we rely on trades and the money that''s given to us by the Feudal Lord." Hiruzen replied.


    "Then, I alone can invade an entire Major Village and take all of the citizens there as laborers. We can then use them to make resources for us." Hikaru said with a smile on his face, as if the idea he just suggested is the most ''okay'' thing to do.


    Bam!


    Hiruzen slammed his hands on his desk and yelled, "No! That''s too barbaric! And wait, doesn''t that sound a lot like slavery!?"


    "Hah hah hah hah. Calm down, old man. That was just a joke." Hikaru laughed at his own joke.


    "Brat!"


    "Okay, okay, geez." Hikaru suddenly got more serious and the air in the room changed.


    Hiruzen, sensing the air changing in the room, turned to what he called, ''The Hokage Mode''.


    "As I said earlier, our village, Konoha, is a military village. Our main income comes from the Feudal Lord and the missions they are sending to us. Recently, I have made a wonderful discovery in my power that I can use to solve our money problem. I can create gold, and other stuff, like diamonds. I only discovered this a few days ago, so I still haven''t created much but I hope this counts." As soon as he said that, suddenly, dozens upon dozens of gold bars came out of nowhere.


    "I was gonna use these for my personal use, but I guess the village can have these gold bars." Hikaru said. He looked at the expression of Hiruzen and it was priceless. The poor old man couldn''t even speak.


    Hikaru could create these gold bars only because of his mana. To construct each of these gold bars, he had to have an equivalent mass of an object, which is why he used stones for equal mass. Thankfully, he studied enough chemistry to create these gold bars. That weird disembodied voice taught him this technique, saying that he shouldn''t waste his time acquiring currency. Hikaru asked why he didn''t just teach this to him earlier, and the disembodied voice only said that he forgot. This angered Hikaru, since he could''ve used all those times acquiring money grinding souls. It was truly such a waste. After that, Hikaru kept asking for the disembodied voice if he wanted to go at it. (Note: He meant fighting the voice. Crazy, right?)


    He suddenly saw Hiruzen''s soul leaving him but Hikaru just caught it back before putting it back in Hiruzen''s body.


    Hiruzen came back to life while panting and said, "I suddenly saw my wife and other dead family members waving at me from across from a river. What happened?"


    "You almost died." HIkaru''s short answer to his question.


    "Ah, that makes sense. Anyway, since you have a lot of these golds, then our money problem is solved for a while. But can you create, I don''t know, thousands of these?" Hiruzen said, he is completely calm right now.


    "Of course, I''ll give it to you tomorrow. It''s quite easy to create, after all." Hikaru smiled as he said that, it seems as if he had something to request of Hiruzen.


    Seeing that smile, Hiruzen gulped and said, "Fine, I''ll let you go to Sunagakure along with Azumi. But, just protect her at all cost. The Kazekage and his children are going home a week from now, we''ve had our talk. It seems like they are just bonding with each other."


    "Family bonding in another village, the Kazekage must be tired of what''s happening in his village. If this was any other village, they would''ve been dead." Hikaru said.


    "Don''t be too harsh on them, they''ve had their fair share of troubles too. Unlike Konoha, they have no godlike child that can do basically anything to save them from disasters. I think right now, they''re currently experiencing a shortage of water and food." Hiruzen said.


    "More reasons to go back to his village, is it not?" Hikaru said with a slight narrow of eyes.


    Hiruzen sighed and said, "Just let them be, Suna is no longer a threat to us."


    "Anyway, the people I''ve brought in can have citizenship of Konoha, right?" Hikaru asked.


    "Yes, It''s better than leaving them alone. But they will have to stay in tents for a while until we''ve built enough houses for them." Hiruzen replied.


    Hikaru just shook his head and said, "No, I''ll take care of their shelters myself."


    "That''s fine, if you do not have any matter to speak of now, you can leave." Hiruzen said.


    "Hai, hai, old man." With that, Hikaru vanished in thin air.


    "Disrespectful brat." Hiruzen muttered.


    (A Day Later)


    With an equivalent object''s mass, Hikaru can create anything. Well, not really anything. Just any mortal objects, like jewels or something.


    The only thing Hikaru did all day was find large stone rocks to transmute to gold. After doing all that, he managed to create thousands of gold bars. Of course, he did it all in a secret place, so that no one could see it. If the public comes to know about this ability of his, there is no doubt that countless people from other countries would be coming for him.


    After storing all of that gold bars in his storage box, he went straight to Hiruzen. Knowing that the Hokage''s office cannot hold that many gold bars, Hikaru and Hiruzen met up in a secret warehouse somewhere in Konoha and in there, Hikaru gave all the gold bars he''d created to Hiruzen.


    The Sandaime was so shocked when he saw that many gold bars, he almost died again. Thankfully, Hikaru was there to put his soul back to his body, again.


    Now, it''s night. After all of that work, there was Tayuya, who had fully made herself as their maid. And then Azumi, who comforted his body all night. Tayuya changed her attitude only to Azumi and Hikaru, but not to other people. And then, there was Kin Tsuchi, who Hikaru had caught after seeing her. He also made her as their maid, but she was quite clumsy. So Hikaru just made her the bodyguard of the house. She''s chunin level material, so she can protect their house quite well.


    This is the life Hikaru had always wished for. A comfortable life, even for at least a moment.


    Back then, he had no freedom. He was weak. But now, he''s the strongest in this world. He is a demigod who could easily lift mountains and split the seas. He could slaughter an entire Major Village and they wouldn''t be able to do anything, because he is strong.


    Strength and power are what''s important in every world. Hikaru has both of them, a privilege given to him by the system.


    He will never forget this, the system has given him everything he could ever ask for. But he wonders, where are the other two who used the system before him? And why would they refuse the system? There must be reasons and he wants to find it out, no matter what.


    Gazing at his ceiling as Azumi comfortably slept on his chest, a slight thought of his former came to his mind. The world he had long forgotten, the world he came from, the world he cursed, Earth. He will never return there, not until he''s powerful enough to destroy a world with a snap of his fingers. Growing stronger and finding out the mysteries behind the other two before him are missions he dedicated to himself.


    Zain and Kiran, his senpais.


    He rose his hand up in the air meaninglessly and thought, ''Where are you two? Will I ever meet you two? I really don''t know what happened, maybe an answer may come to me someday but it''s certainly not now.''


    He looked at his lover, Azumi, and said, "But right now, it doesn''t matter. What matters is now." With a tender look on his face, he caressed her face with his hand before kissing her on the lips. She snuggled even further to his embrace as he did that.


    (Meanwhile, back on Earth)


    "Are you ready, everyone?" A beautiful girl shouted from the stage in front of her countless fans.


    """Yes!!""" Their collective response.


    "Hai! The star Ena is now going to perform in front of her devoted fans! This is my thanks to you all!" The beautiful girl shouted.


    Her long silky black hair shined under the stage''s lights, her bright and beautiful eyes dazzled the audiences, her perfectly shaped face and body stole the affection of every male outside the stage. She wore a pretty pink coat and a white dazzling suit under it. She seems to be around the age of 16.


    That''s right, this is Hikaru''s little sister, Ena, who''s currently performing in front of thousands of her fans in a large stadium. She is now one of the most famous Idols in all of Japan.


    ''Nii-san, are you watching me right now? I''ve fulfilled my dream, to become a famous Idol. Continue watching me from there, I promise you, I''ll be even more famous!'' She promised inside her heart.


    [To be continued¡­]

 Chapter 72 - 65

    "Congratulations, Ena-chan. Another successful concert, eh?" A woman in her mid-twenties said to Ena.


    Right now, Ena and her manager, Akiko, are in their private van that Ena bought herself. Ena is currently checking her Twitter account and other social media accounts just to see the reactions of her fans.


    "Yes, it was a little cold on stage because of the weather this night, but still, it was a great event. Oh yeah, what''s the date right now?" Ena said as she scrolled down on her news feed.


    Akiko checked her phone for the date before she answered, "It''s December 23, right now."


    "Hmm, cancel all of my schedules between December 25 to January 5. I want to spend that time with my family. It''s going to be christmas soon, after all." Ena said without any care.


    "B-but the meeting with your fans is going to be in there. We can''t just ignore that." Akiko said worriedly.


    "I don''t care. If they''re my fans, they should understand that I have a life, too. Cancel all of them. I want to spend some time with Nii-san." Ena said stubbornly.


    Akiko just shook her head and sighed exasperatedly. Hikaru, after being hit by a car, was in a coma for almost 2 Years. A year ago, he woke up but he had no ability to think, or something like that. He couldn''t speak, couldn''t do anything by himself, and nothing they did could ever fix him. Everything in his body is functioning perfectly, the doctor who treated him said so, but it''s just like he returned to being a toddler.


    Ena and her family have been taking care of him for some time. After a few months, he was discharged from the hospital and was allowed to live with his family. But Ena wanted to return her brother back to normal, so she used any means to do that until she stumbled upon the supernatural stuff.


    One day, she invited a Shaman to see what''s going on with her brother, she was desperate at the time. That was the time she learned that the body of her brother had no soul, not even a piece of it. In short, what she could see as her brother''s body was nothing but a husk. The Shaman didn''t even know how Hikaru''s body was still alive, considering the fact that he has no soul whatsoever.


    Ena didn''t feel terrified, no, at that time, she felt sadness knowing that she can never get her true brother back. It''s not that she completely believed what the Shaman told them, but with everything going on like this, it might as well be the truth.


    (Scene Break)


    Ena and her manager separated after they arrived at her house, well, more like a mansion. After growing into a popular idol, Ena managed to buy a huge house for her and her family. That was almost a year ago.


    As she walked on her large garden, she started to think about her much younger years.


    When she was 12, she was praised to be a genius since she passed elementary school with little to no effort. She was enveloped by the praise of everyone around her, that she started to forget about her own family. But the one who had been hurt the most was her brother, because she would always brag about the things he couldn''t obtain in front of his face. It wasn''t intentional, it was more like trying to get his attention and get his praise.


    She loved her elder brother, very much so. He wasn''t popular, nor was he smart. No matter how many times she observed her brother, all she could see that he was average. But he had a hobby of letting his hair grow longer than it should. Sometimes, he would be mistaken for a girl because of his long hair.


    She laughed at that thought.


    But 3 years ago, she got more and more confident in herself that she started to take lessons for the Idol auditions. Of course, she passed the auditions but she only became a low-paying idol. She didn''t just suddenly grow that big in such a short time. But she made decent money off of it, and by the time that accident took place, she was already independent.


    Her older brother supported her, that????s something which she kept to her heart to this very day. No matter how much she annoyed or hurt him, he was always there, trying to support her. But along the way, she just forgot about him until that day came.


    The accident took place in the afternoon, the owner of a lamborghini was driving at a very fast pace. Her older brother was going back from school at that time, when he crossed the road, it happened. The owner of the car accidentally hit him and sent him flying 5 meters away.


    The accident was a hit and run. To this day, no matter what she did, she still couldn''t find who the culprit was.


    "I swear, I will find whoever did this to my brother. No matter what." Ena muttered to herself.


    She was being followed by her bodyguards, so they heard what she said but they just ignored it. This is just a common occurrence.


    When she reached the door of her house, it was opened by a little kid. She seems to be 6 years old.


    This is Hina, Hikaru''s other little sister.


    "Onee-chan, you''re back!" Hina joyfully said as she jumped up and down in excitement.


    Ena lifted Hina up and carried her like a baby.


    "You''re so heavy now, Hina-chan. How''s mama and papa doing?" Ena asked her little sister.


    "Mou, I''m not a baby anymore, Onee-chan!" Hina cutely pouted, "Mama and papa are in the kitchen, preparing dinner."


    Hina is a cute little girl with her black hair shaped like pig-tails. Her big and round black eyes shined just like her older sister''s. Her cute reddish skin brightened under the light of their house. She wore a little cute pink dress and nice little christmas socks.


    Their parents'' names are Meiko Hiroaki and Haruto Hiroaki.


    Her parents'' congratulated her for her successful concert, they were just sad that they couldn''t go to her concert because they had to take care of Hina at home. Hina wished she could go but she has a phobia called Enochlophobia, in which she has a fear of large gatherings of people. Her phobia started when she witnessed her brother''s accident back then. Coincidentally, at the time of the accident, Hina and her mother were shopping for their dinner when they saw a large crowd gathering in the middle of the road.


    They were horrified to find out that it was Hikaru who was laying on the ground, bloodyed over. Hina, at that time, couldn''t comprehend what had just happened. Her mind went into a state of panic when she was surrounded by dozens of strangers. They were all either taking photos of Hikaru''s unconscious body, while some were calling the ambulance or chattering in the background.


    Her mother rushed as soon as she could towards Hikaru, crying and screaming.


    Since then, Hina has never gone out of the house. When she was at the age where she could go to school, her parents just decided that it was probably better for her to be home-schooled. Because whenever she''s in a crowd, she would see her brother''s body laying on a pool of his own blood. She would suddenly just start screaming and crying. Her condition is severe but as long as she doesn''t go into crowds, she should be fine.


    Meiko on the other hand, developed a small fear of blood. It''s not as severe as Hina''s fear of crowds, but when she sees blood, she would be given a glimpse of her severely injured son.


    Haruto, their father, was concerned about what''s happening in his family. His son had been reduced to a vegetable, his youngest daughter is traumatized, his wife has also been traumatized, even though slightly. Thankfully, his first daughter seems to be taking things well. He was just as hurt as his wife when he saw the state of his son back then. They thought that he wouldn''t survive the surgery.


    Back then, they didn''t have enough money to pay for the hospital bills. But, mysteriously though, somebody paid for his son''s hospital bills. It was from an anonymous person, they didn''t say anything to his family. They were grateful to whoever this person was, but they didn''t delve in any longer. They were just glad that his son was successfully treated.


    After dinner, Ena and Hina decided to go upstairs to feed their older brother.


    They opened the door and it revealed a room covered with a soft wall and floor. Not a single hard was there except a TV, and in front of the TV was Hikaru''s body, staring at the screen of the Television intently.


    Ena walked towards him with a small folding table in her hands. On top of that was his dinner, which she is going to feed to him later.


    She squatted down and put down the folding table next to him before she patted the back of his shoulder.


    "Nii-san, it''s time for dinner." He didn''t respond to her. Not a single eye movement was seen, he only stared at the screen of the TV, which is showing her live concert earlier.


    "You''re still watching that, Nii-san? You''ll hurt your eyes if you continue staring at the screen so closely, you know?" Ena said as she tried gaining his attention towards her.


    But like before, he didn''t move as if he didn''t hear her.


    Ena took the remote from the side of the TV before turning off the TV.


    He blinked, as if he was confused why the Tv just suddenly turned off by itself.


    He turned his head around and saw that Ena was there.


    "Aahh, aahh, aahh." He just opened his mouth and made nonsensical noises from it. This is all he could do, "Aahh" is basically the only thing he knows to say along with "Eehh" and "Wahh".


    From all this, we can see that the impact of that accident on the Hiroaki Family is huge.


    Ena just wishes that everything will turn back to normal. But from what she could see, that will not be happening anytime soon.


    (In another place in Tokyo, In a hotel called Grand Hyatt Hotel)


    In the most expensive room of the Hotel, there stayed Yamanaika Shinohara.


    She wore a thin white robe as she went out of the bathroom after having a relaxing bath.


    Her long flowing golden hair reached her waist, her bangs were pushed side-to-side, showing her magnificent ocean colored eyes. She has a face perfectly shaped like an oval, her white glistering pink skin will surely dazzle any men in sight. She is quite tall, around 5''9. She is just 21 years old, and she is the daughter of one of the richest companies in Japan.


    And she was also the one who accidentally ran over Hikaru.

 Chapter 73 - 66: Senju Hunt

    Absolute control over elements using mana, to this day, Hikaru still cannot do that. He may control his flame to a certain degree but that''s it, he still can''t control other elements through mana the same way he controls his flame.


    That''s why, to boost his control over the elements, he will need to hunt down over five gods that control over the five elements here on the Elemental Nation. They are just Minor Gods, so it will be an easy hunt. Gods here don''t use chakra, they use mana, the same as him.


    But he will need to postpone his trip first. It''s been almost a month since the Chunin Exams and it''s almost Azumi''s birthday, October 10.


    He is currently hunting for Tsunade Senju to bring her back to Konoha, not for her to become the Hokage but to make her meet Azumi as her Godmother.


    Jiraiya, Orochimaru, and Tsunade were supposed to be Azumi''s godparents. But not long after they made that promise, they left. Jiraiya, because of his duty as the spymaster of Konoha. Orochimaru, well, we know how he turned out. And there''s Tsunade, who completely ignored her duty to Azumi because her lover and brother died in the war.


    Hikaru''s not gonna criticize her because if that happened to him, he might leave as well. But the thing that makes Hikaru mad the most was that she just left Azumi there, alone with the raging mob of Konoha.


    He also brought Jiraiya and Azumi along with him. The two of them forced him.


    Jiraiya and Azumi had formed a good bond, like a parent to their children. The toad sage can finally ignore his duty as the spymaster of Konoha because there is no more war and such coming to Konoha.


    Of course, Team 7 had to do some missions as well for the village. The one that really stood out amongst all of them was the mission to the Land of Snow. But Hikaru took care of it easily, he just flew towards the Land of Snow while his team was briefing about the mission, decapitated Doto, made Koyuki the Daimyo of the Land of Snow before he came back to his team. Of course there''s a lot more to it but that''s a story for another time.


    By the way, it just took him a full day just to do all of those. His team still hadn''t left the village ever after he was finished by that time. They got the reward directly from Koyuki herself and she said that she wanted to meet Hikaru again, which he just declined.


    Anyway, they have now reached Tanzaku Quarters, where they will be searching for Tsunade. Well, Hikaru just took care of it with his chakra sensor ability and quickly found Tsunade, who was currently running away from the small town.


    "She;s running away? Well, not a surprise there, she must''ve won at a gamble and whenever she wins something she will immediately know that something bad will happen. But you can catch her, right?" Jiraiya explained.


    Hikaru smirked and said, "Who do you think I am? If I want to catch somebody, no one in this world can escape from me. Just take care of Azumi, I don''t want Akatsuki doing something." As soon as he finished saying that, he vanished completely.


    "Darling is really amazing, isn''t he?" Azumi said in amazement.


    "Well, uh, yeah of course. So, are you guys really doing the thing?" Jiraiya asked with a nervous expression.


    "The thing?" Azumi tilted her head in confusion.


    "You know, the thing! Like, when a girl and a boy do things in bed." He knew this wasn''t something he should be asking his goddaughter, but he just really wants to find out.


    "Ah! You''re asking if Hikaru and I are having s.e.x? Yeah, we are." Azumi answered his question casually.


    Jiraiya suddenly looked like he aged over a decade, ''Minato and Kushina will kill me in the after life. Especially Kushina, she specifically said while she was pregnant that her daughter wouldn''t get a boyfriend before 18. I''m doomed.'' Jiraiya thought while crying inside.


    (With Hikaru)


    Tsunade and her apprentice, Shizune, were on the other side of the village. They are now escaping through the forest but this isn''t a problem for Hikaru.


    With great speed that surpasses the speed of sound, he arrived in front of Tsunade within seconds.


    He appeared in front of them while they were jumping on top of the trees, and so, they fell to the ground to their surprise.


    "Yo, Senju. I am Hikaru Hiroaki, nice to meet you." Hikaru greeted them with a very friendly expression.


    Tsunade and her apprentice quickly stood up and soon put on their guard.


    "Who are you?" Tsunade asked very cautiously. Even though Hikaru looks like a kid right now with very long hair, looks can be deceiving. She''d seen countless children murdering full grown shinobis back in the second great ninja war.


    Tsunade is a fair-skinned woman with brown eyes and straight blonde hair that parts above her forehead. Her hair has shoulder-length bangs that frame her face and the rest reaches her lower-back. She has a small violet diamond thingy on her forehead, which Hikaru quickly recognized as her Strength of a Hundred Seals. She wore a green-grass haori with the kanji of "Gamble" printed on the back, underneath she wears a grey, kimono-style blouse with no sleeves, held closed by a broad, dark bluish grey-obi that matches her pants.


    "Haven''t I told you my name just now? You must be going senile since you are already this old." Hikaru said to her directly.


    "Pretty strong words there, for a brat like you. Do you think I can''t take care of you easily?" Tsunade is now angry due to Hikaru commenting on her age.


    Hikaru chuckled and said, "Me? Taken care of easily by you? You must be having delusions, old hag. I can see your true appearance, don;t hide it." As soon as he finished saying that, Tsunade appeared in front of him with her fist already near his face.


    Hikaru easily blocked her punch with his right palm while still having that friendly expression on his face.


    Boom! Whoosh!


    Her punch caused everything close behind him to blow away. Hikaru can tell, she definitely didn''t hold back on that one.


    "For someone like you to have this much physical strength, congratulations. But... " Hikaru smiled a little more threateningly, "Did you really think something like this will hurt me? I''ll show you how much you lack."


    The next thing she knew, she was already throwing up blood and the boy she just tried to punch earlier was still in front of her with a dark and malicious smirk. The boy had punched her, but the strength of that punch, she didn''t know. But one thing she knew is that his punch is stronger than her earlier one.


    Hikaru punched her three more times in the guts before she finally got knocked out. She was already throwing up blood, evidence of his stronger physical capability.


    Shizune quickly rushed towards her master in tears.


    Shizune is a fair-skinned woman of average height and slender build with onyx eyes and jet-black hair; her hair is straight and shoulder-length with bangs that cover her ears and frame her face. She wore a long bluish-black kimono with white trimmings, held closed by a white obi, and open-toed sandals with low heels. She held her pet pig in her hands as she rushed towards her master.


    "Tsunade-sama!" She knelt down to try and heal her.


    Hikaru, still putting on that friendly expression, walks towards her as he says, "I can heal her, if you want to. I just have one condition, return to Konoha along with Senju-san over there. "


    "Konoha!? You''re from Konoha!? Then why would you do this to her!?" Shizune couldn;t help herself but yell at Hikaru in anger. She is normally calm and rational, but seeing her master in this state, she just couldn''t help but panic.


    "What do you mean? She attacked first, you know? What should I have done? Sit back here as she tries to pummel me to the ground? I might be technically invincible but insects who keep trying to annoy me are still annoying. Like, when a fly is hovering around you and tries to go over your ear, you''ll try to crush it to mincemeat, right? It''s just like that with Tsunade, she was being annoying." Hikaru said a little bit more coldly. He''s still mad at the fact Tsunade left Azumi in the village with all those who hated her.


    Shizune glared at him before saying, "Fine, we''ll go back to Konoha. Just heal Tsunade-sama." She gave in.


    "Perfect! We can now peacefully go back to Konoha without any trouble. So here." Hikaru tossed a bottle of Divine Blessing towards Shizune. She caught it easily.


    "Just let her drink that and she''ll be okay in an instant." Hikaru said.


    With a bit of hesitation, Shizune opened the cap of the bottle and poured it in her master''s mouth. Slowly, she can feel her master''s pulse becoming stronger and stronger.


    And with that, the hunt for Tsunade Senju is now finished.

 Chapter 74 - 67: Goodbye, for now.

    After taking care of Tsunade and her apprentice, Hikaru went back to Azumi and Jiraiya with Tsunade still unconscious.


    After having done all that, they all went back to Konoha.


    By the time they returned to the village, it was already at dusk. Hikaru and Azumi decide to return to their house after stepping foot on the village while Jiraiya and Tsunade will be meeting their sensei, Sarutobi Hiruzen.


    Two people were there, respectfully bowing down their heads. Tayuya and Kin were waiting for their safe return.


    Just as they returned, Azumi dragged him to their room since she couldn''t hold her urges anymore. They made out until she was satisfied.


    That night, Hikaru left his house to do some training. He has been practicing a new jutsu after copying Azumi''s rasengan. It''s basically the upgraded version of Rasengan, he''s gonna combine elements to his rasengan. Not just one element, but all 7 elements. He''s just doing this for Azumi, since no one in this village has ever finished the Fourth''s Technique.


    Of course, with such prodigious talents, he has already finished the technique. All he needs now is perfect timing and faster technique formation. After he''s done with this, he will give the scroll for this technique to Azumi on her birthday.


    This will also be his parting gift for her, he will leave this village after a few days have passed after her birthday. Right now, he is still too weak. Chaortos, the Olden God, is not just strong. She has a lot of amazing techniques, but the one that stood out the most was her ability to control the darkness. Once he starts fighting her, she is not the only one he will be fighting but also all the servants she created through the darkness.


    He will also need a lot of techniques, that''s why he needs to leave this village to discover a lot of things in this world. There are too many mysteries in this world, and all of it was caused by his predecessors.


    Only when he is powerful enough, he will be able to protect Azumi better. By defeating all Olden Gods, he will be able to have children with Azumi and start a peaceful life with her.


    A dream that he can achieve through his own hands.


    (Scene Break)


    A few days had passed since the return of Tsunade and it is now Azumi''s birthday. A lot of people came for her birthday and brought tons of gifts for her.


    Hikaru had thrown one of the largest events in Konoha, all for her birthday. He practically bought the entire Konoha just for her birthday party and all the villagers that hated her had no choice but to congratulate her.


    With his ability to make gold, not only is he the strongest person in the whole world right now, he is also the richest person. Even if someone takes dozens of billions in his bank account, that will only be compared to a drop of water. Of course, he also has a lot of connections throughout the entire world. Whether they be underground bosses or nobles of a major country, they were all connected to Hikaru somehow.


    Basically, Hikaru is the most influential person and also the strongest in the entire world right now. For other people, this would''ve been a great achievement for them but not for Hikaru since he had realized earlier that this is just one world, There is still an infinite universe just right around the corner.


    But all of his connections were all built in fear, if he were to leave this world, all of them would just move on their own accord. He cannot have that. So, he killed most of the dangerous ones to prove an example to the others that they are nothing but expendable tools.


    He had done all of this just this month.


    For the whole day, the entire village of Konoha celebrated Azumi''s birthday.


    Unfortunately, the Kazekage and his children already returned to their village and he and Azumi couldn''t go to Suna for their vacation because of other reasons, mainly because Azumi suddenly got sick at the time.


    Seeing the whole village celebrate her birthday, Azumi couldn''t help but get shy. In just three years since she met Hikaru, her life changed completely. Back then, she had to dig through the trash of other people and sell them to junk buyers just to get by, every single day. Especially at that time, when she met Hikaru for the first time. She was starving at the time and couldn''t afford to buy food for herself but her darling invited her to eat with him. He was the one who protected her when she was being attacked by those bullies back then. He gave her everything she could ever want.


    She just wishes she could do the same to him.


    (A Few Days Later)


    And here comes the day she dreaded the most.


    Her darling is leaving the village without her by his side.


    They are now outside the gate of the village as they stared at each other in the eyes.


    They were alone, just the two of them.


    "Don''t worry, Azumi. I''ll be back after I finished the things I needed to do. By then, I will acquire every power out there. I will return in less than three years, I hope you can train yourself, too." Hikaru said with a warm smile on his face.


    Azumi, on the other hand, had her face full of tears and snot, " B-but I-I w-won''t b-be a-able to see you every day. A-AND who will make love to me every night? Who will comfort me every time I''m hurt? Why can;t you just stay by my side forever?!" Azumi cried in her sadness.


    Sadness was also vivid in his eyes but this is a must so that he can grow even stronger, "I don''t want to leave you, I really don''t. But I have a duty I must fulfill. You cannot understand me right now because you are still inexperienced. Train with Jiraiya and Tsunade-san." He warmly patted her head and said, "I hope, by the time I return, you will have grown stronger by then. Emotionally and physically."


    Azumi wiped her tears and snots. She straightened herself and forcefully did a happy voice, "U-un! Return soon a-and safe!" She looked down towards the ground before she stared straight into his eyes and said, "I love you, Darling." She hugged him tightly, not wanting to let go.


    He had already told Jiraiya and Tsunade what to do, it''s only a matter of time before she is ready to become a full-grown sage.


    He could destroy Akatsuki very easily but he is not the one who''s supposed to do that. Azumi is still the Child of the Prophecy, so it is her destiny to bring peace to the world and he cannot destroy that destiny of hers, or the future will be uncertain.


    The Major Gods have contacted him before to not interfere, so he couldn''t do anything. At least, until he surpasses them all.


    ''Just you wait, I''ll break this destiny of yours. I don''t want you to suffer for the sin of this world. If given the chance, I will gladly destroy this entire world just for you. As long as I can grow stronger, nothing will be able to stand in my way.''


    "Goodbye, for now." Hikaru whispered into her ear before he kissed her in the lips. He then vanished without any traces.


    Azumi cried to herself as she felt Hikaru leave her.


    But she understood that if she just cried like this, nothing would happen, nothing will change. She wiped her tears and came back with determined eyes.


    "One day, I promise, I will reach you with my own hands."


    ( A Year Later )


    It''s been a year since the day he started wandering the entire elemental nation. He had already maxed out his stats and it''s stuck to just [99]. It seems like he cannot level up anymore until he defeats the Olden God in this world. So, he spent his time wandering and grinding for souls. He became careful of dying, since he cannot lose all of his souls permanently. He has just been grinding in the lower levels so that the enemies will be just enough for him. After grinding for souls and items every day, he can now summon 10 Black knights and 2 NPCs to fight for him. The second NPC summon he chose was Greirat the Thief.


    Greirat is just as trustworthy as Solaire, so all is good.


    But his sun bro has been weird lately. He''ll ignore it for now, something must be happening on the other side right now.


    Along the way, he has been destroying bandit camps left and right. They were as common as bugs but they were as weak as bugs.


    And right now, he is massacring a large bandit camp. There were at least a hundred bandits here, some were even shinobis. But he killed them all except for the leader.


    "Y-you monster! D-don''t come!!" The bandit leader screamed in terror as Hikaru slowly walked towards him.


    "I have good news and bad news for you. The good news is, I won''t kill you. The bad news is, I won''t kill you." Hikaru said to him with a sadistic smile on his face.


    "You know, sometimes in life, death can be a luxury."


    For the rest of the day, he tortured the bandit leader until his mind broke. And yet, he healed the broken mind of the bandit leader time and time again with his mana. But soon, the bandit leader just broke and his mind can no longer be restored.


    These bandits are the worst ones he''s seen yet. Not only did they kidnap women and children from small towns, they are also cannibals that feasts upon human flesh. The other bandits got it easier than the leader since Hikaru decided to kill them although they received a quite painful death.


    Thankfully, he managed to rescue most of the people that the bandits kidnapped. They were all in horrible states, even young children weren''t spared from their disgusting hobbies.


    ''At least in this way, I can be of help to other people. I''ll give them enough money to start off a new life, I just hope they won''t take their own lives because of this.'' Hikaru said inside his mind as he saw the states of the people here.

 Chapter 75 - 68: Meeting Itachi, 2 Years Later

    (2 Years Since he left Konoha)


    It''s been 2 years and Hikaru has grown stronger than ever. He cannot add stat points into his status but he can still learn a lot of things, like martial arts or the likes. He can now control all five elements perfectly, at least in this world.


    He learned that he didn''t have to kill the gods that govern the elements of this world, he just had to sign a contract with them. Of course, the contract only favors him and not them. The Minor Gods of this world are weaker than he thought. He could probably kill them all with ease, even if they try to group and kill him.


    He is also now slightly stronger than all Major Gods combined. There are only 5 Major Gods in this world, and that is Kami, Shinigami, Yami, and the two Fate Sisters. He didn''t bother counting the Minor Gods because there were too many of them, around a hundred or so.


    Hikaru, right now, is contemplating whether he should bring the entire Akatsuki to his side. If he does that, there would be no war happening anytime soon. But if he doesn''t, what will happen to Azumi? Should he let her take the burden of saving the entire world? Or should he just mess the plans of the gods?


    Well, he also love to f.u.c.k with people. Especially Gods, yes.


    Lately, his hair has been a bother to him. It''s now so long that it reaches the ground. Granted that he still hasn''t had his growth spurt but still, it''s annoying. Maybe he should cut it a little bit? Yeah, that should do.


    In front of Amegakure was Hikaru. He wore a plain white t-shirt and long black pants with a white coat over it. His long black hair seemed almost mystical as it floated slightly. He held his Black Lightning Samurai Sword before he cut his hair in half. He then collected the hair he cut off, since it is also a valuable material.


    I''ve never said this before but his hair has also grown much harder and tougher along with his skin after he decided to put some stat points in his [Resistance] Stat. It''s basically equal to titanite shards.


    He put them all in a plastic bag before he put them inside his storage box.


    "Now that''s finished, I can now see this so-called, ''Pain''." Hikaru said stoically as he strode onward to the village.


    After entering the village with his mana umbrella on so that the rain won''t touch him, he saw the state of the people in there. A lot of them were homeless, some had decent clothing but you can see depression within their eyes, but the children here in this village had it worst. He passed by a lot of them and he can see that they were being trained as soldiers of this village, I.e Shinobis.


    But right now, his goal is to meet Pain and Konan, not solving other people''s problems.


    It rained heavily as Hikaru felt the depressing atmosphere in the village. If he can talk this out with Nagato, then maybe everything can be fixed. At least he hopes so.


    He slowly walked in the middle of the village, trying to understand everything around him. As expected, there were no wealthy people here; only those who had powers could change at least something.


    Suddenly, within the range of his chakra sense, he felt a Kage Level individual somewhere. He rushed towards the person as he felt that this chakra is quite familiar, similar to that of Sasuke.


    When he arrived where that person was, he saw that he was in a candy store buying something.


    It was Itachi Uchiha, he was wearing his Akatsuki robe. And as always, with that stoic face of his showing no emotions.


    Hikaru saw that Itachi tensed slightly, and that''s when he knew he was found out. But Hikaru was not even hiding his presence, so it was normal for a shinobi like Itachi to sense him. Where is his partner, by the way?


    "So that''s Itachi in real life? Gotta say, he''s a lot cooler than I expected." Hikaru muttered silently.


    Itachi is a fairly tall man of fair complexion. He had onyx eyes, under which were long, pronounced tear-troughs. He had jet-black hair that was pulled back in a low ponytail and his face was framed with centre-parted bangs that extended to his chin; the ponytail and bangs grew longer over the years. His overall appearance is very similar to that of Sasuke.


    Itachi left the store holding a bag of what seems to be Poki, a very delicious chocolate delicacy. There were around quite a few boxes, around 20 or so.


    Itachi went to a dark alley, as if inviting Hikaru to come. So, he did. Hikaru followed Itachi until there were no more people in sight. Then Itachi turned around and said calmly, "Whoever you are, show yourself."


    Hikaru immediately appeared in front of Itachi, and he reacted almost instantly.


    ''Fast! I couldn''t even see which direction he came from.'' Itachi thought, mildly shocked.


    Hikaru stood in front of Itachi and bowed slightly before saying, "Nice to meet you, Itachi-san. I know that I''m rushing this but can you lead to your leader? I need to have a talk with him." Hikaru was respectful, he was watching his words.


    "A child like you, to be this strong, is almost frightening. But sorry, if you want to meet the leader then you should get past me first." Itachi said, he was serious now.


    Hikaru only smiled and said, "You think you can have the right to challenge someone such as I to a fight?"


    Itachi narrowed his eyes and said, "I see, you have already covered this entire area with genjutsu. But¡­" He activates his mangekyou sharingan, "In front of these eyes, your illusions are worthless!"


    He tried to break the genjutsu but he just found out he couldn''t.


    "Impossible! This shouldn''t be!" Itachi tried and tried again with his eyes but it was futile. No matter what he did, he couldn''t break the genjutsu.


    Hikaru smirked and said, "You think you couldn''t break through my genjutsu? Well, you can break it but it''s impossible to get out of it."


    "What do you mean by that?" Itachi still didn''t lose his cool.


    "Did you know? From your tries earlier, you''ve already broken some layers of my genjutsu." Hikaru said, his smile getting wider. For the infamous legendary Itachi Uchiha, he couldn''t even beat his genjutsu.


    "Stop lying, Stranger-san." Itachi said, his voice getting colder.


    "Oh, forgive me. I still haven''t introduced myself, my name is Hikaru Hiroaki." Hikaru said, his smile never left his face. He''s enjoying this situation.


    "About my genjutsu, you see, this technique of mine is probably one of the best out there! I can stack layers upon layers of genjutsu on top of each other so that no one can get out of it easily. I call this one The Thousand Layer Genjutsu!" Hikaru said as the world became even brighter. The entire village of Amegakure suddenly turned into the city of Anor Londo.


    "This genjutsu is my world, I can do anything here. If I willed it myself, I can make you live here eternally without a second passing in the real world!" Hikaru said as he floated up in the bright sky of Anor Londo, as if a god was rising to the heavens.


    Itachi was speechless. He couldn''t believe that someone with this ability is able to live in this world. But one thing was bothering him, and that is¡­


    Itachi''s eyes were shadowed by his bangs before he said, "Then, if you are this strong, why can''t you just unite everything in this world? Bring peace to this godawful world! Why can''t you just do it!?"


    "That is simple, because it is not my destiny to do it. Sure, I can help them but that''s it. Bringing peace to this world is, and will, never be my job to do." Hikaru answered his question immediately.


    Itach''s emotions are now erratic, "So this is the thinking of the strongest beings of this world? Just give the duty of peace to other people?"


    Hikaru looked down on Itachi and said, "No, that may hold some truth in it but it Is simply because it is simply hard to do. Tell me, if I could cure your sickness and let you grow stronger, would you be able to bring peace to this world?"


    Itachi thought about his words for a few moments before he came to a conclusion, "No, I cannot. Everyone has their own dreams and emotions, there will definitely be some who will try to rebel into a world full of peace. People will grow tired of it, and before long, grow weaker along with the rest of the world. In short, no one can lead millions upon millions of people to peace without guaranteed safety. Peace can never bring food to the table, I know that yet I still yearn for it. Then, is it true?"


    "True what?" Hikaru replied.


    "Is it true that there is someone destined to bring peace to this world?" Itachi asked, full of hope.


    "Yes, and you probably know her. Uzumaki Azumi, or used to be known as Uzumaki Naruto." Hikaru answered his question.


    Itachi looked up to the bright sky of Anor Londo and said, "So that''s how it is? Maybe that''s true, maybe it''s not. But if she could truly bring peace to this world, then I will help her with the best of my ability."


    "Hm, yes, that''s true. Here, drink this." Hikaru tossed a bottle of Diving Blessing at Itachi. "That should cure your sickness. Don''t ask where that came from, just drink it."


    Itachi drank it cautiously and slowly felt his past injuries healing along with his sickness. In a few moments, they were all gone. All his scars from training and battles he did were all gone.


    Hikaru canceled his genjutsu with a snap of his fingers. The bright light of Anor Londo was suddenly gone, all that was left was the depressing village of Amegakure.


    When Itachi came to his senses, he bowed his head in gratitude and said, "Thank you, I appreciate you healing my sickness. I don''t have anything to give you in return but please, take this." He gave Hikaru 5 boxes of Poki.


    "Poki? You seem to be more childish than I thought." Hikaru said as he smiled at the man in front of him.


    "By the way, that city you showed me in your genjutsu, what kind of people lived there? I''m quite curious." Itachi asked.


    "That place was more depressing than this place. It is where the fallen gods dwell, where they tried to keep the false illusion of powers of the gods. That place is now simply in ruins because of a man who desired the bright fire of nature."

 Chapter 76 - 69

    Itachi led him to their lair, where the rest of the Akatsuki currently stays. It was a dark and gloomy place covered with rain water. Ten huge fingers were erected in front of them and Hikaru could see the husk of the Ten-Tailed Beast behind the tall pillars of fingers. They were inside of a cave under the village of Ame.


    "Do you guys always stay here?" Hikaru asked Itachi, who was right beside him.


    Itachi shook his head and explained, "No, we don''t stay here all the time. You can call this place our meeting room. We have our own living quarters but it''s not that different from this place. We usually don''t stay in the village for too long since we have jobs to do, but this is a different occasion."


    "What kind of occasion?" Hikaru asked.


    Itachi then said with his usual stoic face, "New members are joining us, and two of them at that. 2 and half years ago, two of our members were mysteriously murdered by someone. After digging for some time, we found out that the one who did that goes by the name of Hikaru Hiroaki. Does that ring any bell?" Itachi looked down on Hikaru, who is currently sweating.


    They continued walking towards a hallway filled with torches, this somehow reminds Hikaru of Orochimaru''s lair.


    "Even though I''ve only known them for a short time, Deidara and Sasori were still my friends. Anyway, don''t feel sad about that, in our line of work our chances of dying are always higher than the average shinobi. They would''ve died later even if they didn''t die back then." Itachi continued.


    Hikaru felt quite uncomfortable, knowing that he killed the friends of Itachi. He just shook it off and continued walking in the hallway.


    "Weird, where are the rest of your teammates?" Hikaru asked, seeing that he couldn''t see a single person in here other than Itachi and himself.


    "Ah, they must still be out in the village, They are buying things for themselves, since it''s quite rare to have a break once in a while." Itachi said with his stoic face still there. Hikaru wonders if he even changes the look on his face.


    After a few moments of walking, they finally ended up at the end of the hallway. There were two doors in front of them, Itachi opened them and Hikaru finally saw Pain and Konan.


    Unfortunately, it seems like Pain''s real body is not here. They must be hiding him somewhere around the village. He was just there, standing on the ground with his back in front of them. He was using Yahiko''s body.


    He turned around and saw Hikaru.


    Then, silence ensued in the room. Konan was sitting on a chair, silently sipping from her tea cup filled with tea.


    Konan had short, straight blue hair with a bun, amber eyes with lavender eyeshadow, and a labret piercing. She wore the typical Akatsuki robe.


    Pain decided to break the silence and said, "That is unusual, I have seen all the pictures of all Jinchuriki, except for the nine-tailed jinchuriki, but I have never seen this one. Is he the nine-tailed jinchuriki?" Pain seems to be confused because Hikaru is emitting a huge amount of chakra, comparable to that of a tailed beast.


    "No, leader-sama. He is someone who just wants to have a talk with you." Itachi explained to Pain stoically.


    Pain then narrowed his eyes, directly staring down at Hikaru.


    Hikaru seemed to be annoyed by something and said, "You know, I hate people looking down on me, especially someone like you who has an ego as big as the heavens."


    Pain(Tendo) then frowned and said, "Your friend seems to have quite the mouth there, Itachi."


    Itachi said nothing, knowing things are about to get serious.


    "I have not come here for some idle chat, Nagato." Hikaru said in a cold serious voice.


    Hikaru suddenly felt that something was behind him and he was not disappointed. All the bodies of Nagato except for Tendo were all behind him, threatening to attack him if he misses his words.


    (Note: I''ll call Yahiko''s body as Tendo from now on)


    Tendo walked slowly near him and asked, "Who are you? How do you know my real name?"


    Hikaru just smirked and said, "Oh, I know a lot of things about you, Uzumaki Nagato. How you were trained by Jiraiya, how Hanzo betrayed your group and made you kill Yahiko, and how you met ''Madara'' and formed Akatsuki under his leadership."


    Back with Nagato''s real body, shock was evident on his face. Someone with all this knowledge should never exist yet here he is, a child who seems to know everything about him. He kept his cool and calmly decided to ask some questions from this child.


    "I''m sure you would like to ask some questions but that can save for later. I just want to talk about your godly ''plan''. Oh, and this five behind me? They''re quite the nuisance, so I''ll get rid of them." Hikaru said as he looked directly at Tendo''s eyes.


    Without doing anything, all five of Nagato''s bodies exploded out of nowhere.


    Seeing this, Konan tried to be cautious before trying to use her jutsu but Itachi appeared behind her faster with a kunai on her neck. After his illness was cured, he can now use 100 percent of his strength and the blindness caused by the mangekyou sharingan was gone without a trace. Previously, he could only use less than 40 percent of his strength due to his illness.


    "Y-you traitor." Konan managed to mutter out.


    "Move slightly and I''ll cut your head off." Itachi ruthlessly said.


    "Konan!" Nagato shouted and tried to use Tendo to help her but Hikaru blocked Tendo''s path and quickly tied Tendo with some invisible rope, incapacitating him.


    "Now, we can talk peacefully. I know this is extremely unnecessary but you have to understand, you might try to call your buddies. By the way, where are the two recruits you said, Itachi?" Hikaru said as he tied Tendo quite tightly.


    "I don''t know, they might be outside because I cannot sense their chakra. But they may have some kind of technique that can hide their presence, so beware." Itachi replied while keeping the kunai on Konan''s neck.


    "Tch, Shinra Tensei!" Tendo shouted suddenly and everything in the room was destroyed almost instantly by some kind of jutsu.


    But Tendo noticed that the invisible rope binding him is still holding him and even Konan now was tied up by that thing.


    He wasn''t planning on using his rinnegan in such a small space like this room but he had no choice, either he gets killed or he fights back. Seeing this enemy of his tie him up easily, it must mean that he is very strong, even for a god like him.


    Itachi appeared behind Hikaru unscathed, it seems like Itachi is stronger than Pain. right now. At least in their physical ability but between the power of their eyes, Pain is stronger.


    "So you''ve betrayed us, Itachi." Pain said, if you listen closely, his voice was seething in rage.


    Itachi shook his head and said,"I didn''t betray you for I''ve always not been a part of this organization. I''m a spy sent by Konoha."


    "Itachi!" Pain shouted his name in rage but he couldn''t do anything due to him being tied up by Hikaru.


    Konan kept quiet, she''s trying to think of a plan to get out of here. It was obvious that Pain''s powers were no match for that boy. Nagato''s real body is currently not able to fight, so the six paths of pain is the only way he could fight his opponents. They were too complacent, the enemy practically walked through the entire base without being hindered.


    Hikaru only smiled and sat beside Pain, then he said, "Hmm, do you really think that your plan to capture the tailed-beasts is going to work?"


    "Hmph, the only way peace can be obtained is through pain. If we can all share our pain, then everyone would be able to understand us. Only by showing them true pain can our peace exist in this world." Pain said quite stubbornly.


    "Do you really think that? Human emotions are much more complicated than that. You should know that, for you are human, too." Hikaru said to Pain.


    Pain slanted his eyebrows and said, "Tch, what do you know? You haven''t experienced true pain yet!"


    "That''s true, because I can protect my loved ones better than you." When he said those words, Hikaru basically stepped on Nagato''s dignity.


    Hikaru knew, talking like this won''t solve anything. He wanted to convince Nagato into joining his side along with the rest of Akatsuki but it seems like he just doesn''t have the same talent as Azumi that enables her to make her opponents into her allies. He doesn''t want to show much of his strength, to see if he could convince Nagato but it seems like it''s just not fated to be.


    "I don''t have anything to talk with you anymore, but mark my words. There will one day be someone who will change the way you think." After finishing his words, Hikaru and Itachi disappeared in thin air.


    After that, he released Pain and Konan from his mana rope. There was no use talking to them anymore, if he just always uses his powers to convince anyone to join him, then there will one day be a huge chance that they will betray him. Unless he puts some kind of slave contract into them.


    Nagato tried searching for him everywhere but to no avail, it seems like he has already left the village. There''s nothing more he can do, Akatsuki cannot reveal themselves to the world right now. Just one more year and they will make their move. They have obtained almost all the Jinchurikis identities except for the nine-tails. The only thing to do now is to earn more finance through various ways.


    Hikaru doesn''t want to interfere with Azumi''s fate and destiny. Unless there''s an absolute chance she would die, then he won''t do anything. He''s already changed so much, the gods of this world are already mad at him. But if they pissed him off, he would slaughter them all. Rules be damned.


    A few weeks later¡­


    He and Itachi are now traveling village after village, then they would search for anything that can increase Hikaru''s current strength. Hikaru had learned various martial arts throughout this entire nation but none of them were strong enough to suit his taste, maybe after traveling through other worlds, he would be able to learn some strong stuff. Maybe a world with creatures capable of using mana? He''ll search for that after he has defeated Chaortos.


    Right now, they are traveling to Sunagakure to see the chunin exams. They both wore black robes similar to the Akatsuki''s robe but without the red clouds and on top of their head were bamboo hats to keep their appearance a secret because Itachi is still a wanted man while Hikaru is now famous throughout the entire elemental nation due to him destroying countless bandit camps.


    They now call him the Bandit Slayer, Hikaru just facepalmed in their naming sense. That sounds like a chuunibyou''s name. He wanted a name like, Heavenly Sword Master, or Heavenly Shinobi of Destiny. But now that he thinks about it, that sounds more chuuni than "Bandit Slayer".


    This is embarrassing. To think the strongest person in the whole world right now wants a name like that.


    As Hikaru suspected, Itachi is really addicted to Poki. I mean, for the last few weeks, Itachi already bought over 10,000 Pokis! Itachi kept them all in his storage seal.


    Itachi left Akatsuki even though he had other missions to do there, because of one reason. Hikaru knows everything about the Akatsuki. He no longer had any purpose staying there, since he was just a spy. After all, he wanted Sasuke to kill him and gain his mangekyou sharingan but from Hikaru''s words, it seems like Sasuke has changed for the better.


    After thinking about the things he did for a long time, he realized that at that time, he should''ve told Sasuke everything. He regretted not doing that, it could''ve saved Sasuke much, much earlier.


    Maybe Sasuke is present in the chunin exams that''s taking place in Suna, right now. He would then find the right time to apologize, or make his appearance for that matter.


    As they walked through the endless sand of the desert, they still couldn''t see the village. They didn''t feel any heat due to Hikaru using his ice magic to cover them in a small icy wind dome. His ice magic is created between wind and water magic and extremely compressed water magic.


    As they traveled through the desert, they saw another group of people a kilometre away from them. Hikaru then saw a familiar shade of blonde hair in that group before he rushed towards them almost immediately.

 Chapter 77 - 70: The Reunion

    A month ago, other shinobis from other villages came to Konoha to participate in the chunin exams. After holding the First Round in Konoha, they then switch the location of the chunin exams to Sunagakure, since their village was supposed to be the one holding the exams.


    There were only three from Konoha who joined the chunin exams and they were Uzumaki Azumi, Haruno Sakura, and Uchiha Sasuke. The other people of their generation already became chunins a long time ago but they were too busy training for these past few years.


    Fortunately, their training had paid off. While Sakura''s overall skill as a shinobi is at Chunin level, she is now one of the greatest medical shinobi in Konoha, just below Shizune. It''s all because of Tsunade''s training that she was able to achieve this feat.


    Sasuke became one of the most powerful shinobis Konoha has right now, he is now a Jounin level ninja, surpassing even Kakashi. After Hikaru left, he decided to train under Kakashi and Gai. Gai taught him taijutsu while Kakashi taught him everything he knows. After some time, he was able to create the variants of chidori. Right now, he is on his way on creating a new S-Rank jutsu, which he is going to name, Kirin. His mastery over his sharingan right now can be said to be very good for a 15 years old like him, but he knows that his elder brother is still the superior one out of the two of them.


    Azumi is probably one of the best Kunoichi right now. She''s trained by Jiraiya and Tsunade themselves, and she also learned Tsunade''s chakra enhanced strength technique but only at a minimum level. Her chakra control isn''t that good, after all. With Jiraiya''s help, she was able to sign a contract with the summoning animals of Mount Myoboku. And in 1 year, she was able to learn the Sage Mode.


    Hikaru had forbidden Jiraiya from teaching Azumi on how to use the kyuubi''s chakra, since it could be fatal to her current body. But Jiraiya did it anyway, and oh boy, he almost lost his limbs trying to fight Azumi in her four-tailed form. Thankfully, Tsunade was with them at the time, so they were able to suppress the kyuubi-s chakra with the Shodaime''s necklace. Since then, Azumi would always wear the necklace in case something goes wrong.


    Her compatibility with Nature Chakra was so good that even the Sage of Mount Myoboku was amazed. He said that in a few years, she would be able to reach the perfect form of Sage Mode which the youngest son of the Sage of Six Paths used. They then trained her the Frog Kumite fighting style.


    And don''t forget, Hikaru had given her the scroll to change the nature of her rasengan, completing it.


    Her overall battle power and skills as a shinobi are around High-Kage level. She can go toe-to-toe with Jiraiya and Tsunade and still win. Without Hikaru in the village, she is currently the strongest in Konoha along with her teammates.


    In these past few years, Sakura had a change of personality. She''s mature enough to take care of her own problems but she still has this huge crush on Sasuke. She had repaired her broken friendship with Ino after apologizing to her, and since then they''ve been hanging out whenever they are free. She now wore the same clothes back then bu t bigger to fit her size.


    Sasuke developed a carefree attitude, he''s always laid back but when his fighting, he''s always serious. Sometimes, when he''s got nothing to do, he would close one of his eyes like his brother and stare at the nothingness. He wore the typical Uchiha shirt with a high collar with a long "V" in the middle of it, where he would rest his arm sometimes. He also wore an anbu pants that was modified slightly to fill in more ninja tools. Right now, he''s wearing a black poncho over his body right now. His raven hair shaped like a duck''s butt is still there.


    Azumi, right now, is wearing the same thing Naruto wore in Shippuden. First, her top shows some of her skin, like her belly-button and the curves she has right now, other than that, the rest covers everything. Of course, she''s the most eye-catching out of all of them, since she looks absolutely gorgeous with her long blonde hair tied into twin-tails. Her beautiful blue eyes dazzled under the sun of the desert, shining as if they were gems. She has a katana on the side of her waist with an orange handle and an orange sheath. On her back though was the Sunlight Straight Sword that Hikaru gave to her a few years ago.


    She has also been taught kenjutsu by Hayate and Yugao, two of the greatest kenjutsu masters in Konoha.


    And right now, all three of them were traveling towards Sunagakure in the middle of the endless desert. They''ve passed the First Round of the chunin exams but they still had to go to Suna for the Second Round.


    They''ve run out of drinkable water a long time ago, they have to reach Suna before they completely run out of thirst.


    As they walked on top of the hot sand of the desert, they suddenly felt chill all over their body. They were feeling cold in the¡­ middle of the desert? How is that even possible¡­?


    "A~zu~mi~chan~!" They hear a yell before Azumi is tackled by someone.


    They were immediately ready to fight whoever that was. The figure wore a completely black robe with a high collar and a bamboo hat.


    As they were ready to attack the figure in front of them, a sudden wind blew the bamboo hat from the mysterious person and they saw who it was.


    That familiar long black hair and black eyes with a tint of red in the middle, there was no doubt.


    This is Hikaru!


    "Fueh!? Darling!?" Azumi yelled in surprise.


    As if he didn''t hear her, Hikaru then continued to bury his face into Azumi''s deep mountain peak. Her perky b.r.e.a.s.t had grown, it looks like it is an E-Cup already.


    Sasuke and Sakura didn''t know what to do, so they didn''t disturb him.


    After a few moments of heaven, Hikaru finally let go of Azumi.


    "Ahahaha, it''s been too long since I felt those." Hikaru said as he scratches the back of his head.


    Azumi stayed silent for a few moments, before she tackled Hikaru this time. They both fell on top of the sand with Azumi on top of Hikaru. She laid her head onto his chest, hearing the familiar heart beat she''s used to hear. His body is still cold like always, but this cold feeling would always turn warm when they do it.


    "I''ve missed you for far too long, you know? Now, I won''t ever let you go." Azumi said, her eyes were completely pupilless.


    Hikaru smiled and rubbed her head gently with his hand and said, "I know, I know. I won''t leave for a while, so we will be able to bond for a long time." At the end of his sentence, Hikaru grabbed her butt cheek with his other hand and she blushed in embarrassment.


    "Uh, good to see you too, Hikaru." Sasuke said as he smiled at him.


    Hikaru turned his head towards Sasuke and said, "Oh right, you were here too. Itachi, how long are you going to hide?"


    Suddenly, another figure wearing the same black robe as Hikaru appeared with a bamboo hat on, appeared in the middle of them.


    He slowly took off his bamboo hat to look at Sasuke more clearly and smiled at his dear beloved brother.


    "Itachi¡­" Sasuke muttered, stupefied. He couldn''t believe it, the brother he has always searched for came in. Hikaru had told him everything about his brother, how he sacrificed his own happiness for the sake of the village, how he killed the entire clan because they were planning a coup d''etat, and how he left him, his only brother. He protected him in the shadows while he endured the life of a criminal. For Sasuke, his older brother, no matter how they look at it, is a hero. The one deserving the title of the Hokage more than anyone.


    "It''s been a long time, Otouto." Itachi greeted.


    "I¡­" Sasuke didn''t know what to do, this is the first time he met his brother after 6 long years. The image of the clan at that time was still vivid inside his mind, even right now. Countless bloodied bodies laid on the ground, they were all dead.


    Hikaru stood up along with Azumi and he dusted both of their clothes off.


    "Sakura, Azumi, come with me. We''ll give them the time to talk, it''s not our job to interrupt their reunion after so long." Hikaru said as he dragged the two girls away.


    "Thank you, Hikaru-san." Itachi said with gratitude as Hikaru quickly built a dome around the two of them before light orbs made of mana appeared inside to light the darkness of the hollowed dome.


    It was cold inside, but for trained shinobis like them, it was easy to endure it.


    "I¡­"


    "You don''t have to say anything, Sasuke. I know that at that time, I should''ve told you everything. I regret doing all that. Back then, I wanted to die by your hands. I had an incurable illness and I was getting weaker and weaker until Hikaru-san appeared and cured me of my illness. Now, I could properly tell you why everything happened the way it did." Itachi said. He looked at Sasuke straight in the eyes and said.


    "So please, would you kindly listen to your evil older brother''s apology?"

 Chapter 78 - 71: Havel Construction Company

    Silence ensued as Itachi finished.


    Sasuke sobbed in front of his brother inside the earth dome that Hikaru created.


    While he lived in luxury, his elder brother was suffering. He had to keep his Mangekyou Sharingan activated just to see almost normally because of his eyes deteriorating to the point of blindness. His brother was forced to be a criminal and ridiculed by the very people he was protecting. Unforgivable! He is a hero that no one deserved! Yet¡­ he was the hero we all needed.


    Pak!


    Sasuke held his cheek as he felt a stingy pain from it, Itachi had slapped him.


    "I can understand your hatred but don''t direct it to other people. Danzo and the elders are the ones needed to be killed, along with Uchiha Madara. They are the ones that truly need your hatred." Itachi said seriously.


    Sasuke looked down and silently said, "I know, but those people, they all sneered at you and hated you. Why can''t I hate them back?"


    "That''s because it would create even more hatred. But Danzo, the elders, and Madara are the ones directing the circle of hatred. Remember this well, Sasuke. Hatred will only create more hatred, and the circle of hatred would continue to spin unless someone stops it." Itachi explained in a serious manner.


    Sasuke knew his brother was right, if he continues this way, he will be amongst the ones who are spinning the circle of hatred. Hatred is a very powerful emotion, he had known from a very young age. It could make you misguided and everyone around you will be hurt.


    But for now, it doesn''t matter to him. If his own brother says so, then he must be right.


    He smiled at his brother and with his eyes full of tenderness, he said, "I understand, Nii-san."


    (With Hikaru)


    Ever since he came back, Azumi hasn''t let go of him. She kept holding on his left arm, like a lovesick girl. Well, she is anyway.


    From time to time, she would just adore his face and sometimes, she would smell his scent until she got tired of it, which never came. But even after all this, Hikaru wasn''t grossed out of Azumi. No, far from it. Like Azumi, he''s also lovesick. He loves her far too much to be grossed out of her.


    After leaving the two brothers alone, Hikaru took out the Ring of Favor and Protection and gave it to Azumi. He warned her to never take it off or it will break permanently. In the system, Rings from the shop can be enhanced as long as you have souls. The maximum level for enhancing rings is 10. This ring that he gave her has already been upgraded to the max level. It has 90% Health Boost, 80% Stamina boost, and 70% Strength boost. She''s basically two times stronger than before, and even she could see that.


    As soon as she put on the ring, she felt a sudden increase to her chakra, vitality, and stamina. When she explained to Hikaru what happened, he was quite surprised that it could also increase her chakra. Must be another effect of the ring he doesn''t know off.


    But that''s not all, her chakra control seems to have been boosted too.


    It seems like giving this ring to her was the right choice after all.


    Meanwhile, Sakura was quite jealous of Azumi. That beautiful ring, even she could see that that ring was made from expensive materials. And she noticed as soon as Azumi put on the ring, the increase of her chakra was felt by everyone near them. She was utterly jealous.


    (Time Skip)


    It''s been a few days and they''ve already arrived at their destination. After making up with his brother, Sasuke decided to have some bonding time with his elder brother.


    Azumi and Hikaru, though, f*cked like rabbits over these past few days. It''s been long time since Hikaru had s.e.x along with Azumi and they couldn''t help themselves this time.


    The second phase of the exams has yet to start, it was said that it will start in 3 weeks. So they have a lot of time to "bond" with each other.


    Sakura, on the other hand, was left out by her team. She tried asking her Sasuke-kun to stay with her but he just told her to shut up and left with his brother. For these past few days, she''s just been staying in an inn, not doing anything. She thought that she might go crazy, so she decided to go out and eat outside.


    Since the financial status of Konoha has been fixed by Hikaru''s golds, every citizen was able to live comfortably. The amount of money that the gold brought to the village could last them for about a decade. Unless something bad happens, they wouldn''t run out of money anytime soon. Right?


    Sunagakure was able to rise from their fallen financial stability by doing something only unique to them. Glass Making.


    By gathering large amounts of sand and turning it into glass, they were able to sell them all rather quickly since the demand for it was huge. Normally, no one would use glass windows or anything of that kind. But one construction company had been buying all of their glass, giving them a huge amount of money. Every month, they would make billions of ryo from just selling all of their glass to this famous company.


    The name of that company was The Havel Construction Company. Their logo is some kind of large pointy object, which they like to call a Dragon''s Tooth.


    Well, their name or logo doesn''t matter as long as they could make profits.


    With Gaara''s help, they were able to gather large amounts of sand. While his father, the Kazekage, has been busy making gold sand for golden windows. It seems like some nobles from the capital liked that kind of expensive thing.


    And from what they''ve seen, the houses and buildings made by this company were all beautiful art works. The Head of that company was someone named Kimimaro Kaguya. It was said that all employees of that company were shinobis, that''s why they were able to efficiently create houses that were beautiful.


    Also, with all the supplies of their sand, they were able to recently establish a trade with that company. Not only could they create glass with their sand, they were also able to create concrete and such, which turned out to be one of their greatest profits. But with all this god''s grace happening to them, other people have also targeted their sand. So, they''ve sent out many shinobis to guard the desert but, recently, this turned into a big problem.


    They were all stealing sand that''s in their land, but they soon found out that the one who sent them was the Wind Daimyo himself. Even though they knew that glass making was also the main income of the Wind Capital, the Kazekage couldn''t believe that someone was strong enough to threaten the Wind Daimyo to just give up on their land.


    But the Daimyo was persistent and tried stealing sand from the land. The capital of the Land of Wind was going through a huge loss of finance and after a while, the Nobles themselves turned to begging other nobles for money. Since only a huge amount of Nobles only live in the capital, they''ve never been exposed to hunger in their lives. The Nobles were all arrogant enough to think that their wealth would last forever. But now, they are all living in poverty.


    That''s right. All of this was because of Hikaru. He has established dozens of companies across the entire elemental nation, and the Havel Construction Company was made to help Sunagakure. That same company turned huge after a while after he introduced new ways of making houses and buildings, I.e modern buildings.


    He met Kimimaro coincidentally after a year had passed back then and he decided to accompany him for a while. After a month or so, Hikaru finally decided on what company he should make and decided to let Kimimaro handle it. Since he encountered many shinobi bandits, he made some of them his slaves and made them work their ass off in the company as their punishment.


    To help Suna even further, Hikaru decided to threaten the Wind Daimyo, which worked. But he, too, noticed that their movements had been suspicious lately. But if the Wind Daimyo refuses to his commands, Hikaru would then be forced to kill him as an example and put on a puppet in place as the Wind Daimyo. They are all easy to replace, Daimyo''s are nothing but tools for Hikaru to use anyway.


    He has also planted countless spies across every village in the elemental nation. He may not be omnipotent, but his eyes and ears are everywhere. No one can escape him, even if they try to run to the end of the world.


    (Time Skip)


    For 4 weeks, he and Azumi have been spending a lot of time with each other. That time may be short but it was the best he could ever ask for. A year from now, he would return to Konoha and live with Azumi for a while. After that, it''s going to be time to battle the Olden God.


    He was sad, but he and Azumi had to part ways since his journey is still not finished yet. They only stopped in Sunagakure for sometime for other reasons. Itachi also followed Hikaru and sadly left Sasuke but their journey was still not finished, he felt that if he followed Hikaru, he might be able to see the hidden wonders of this world.


    With one last parting words to their loved ones, Hikaru and Itachi left to go on their adventure.


    But before that, he has a Daimyo to kill.

 Chapter 79 - 72

    "Please! I''m begging you, don''t kill me!" The middle aged Wind Daimyo cried, begging in front of Hikaru and Itachi. The Wind Daimyo was a fat man with small eyes. He was bald and he was kneeling in front of the two of them, crying and bawling his eyes out.


    They were inside the living room of the palace of the Daimyo''s family. The room was wider than normal houses with a beautiful chandelier made of pure gems in the middle. The walls were painted with golden paint, the tables and chairs around them were made of gold. And on top of some tables, there were foods coated with edible gold. It seems like the Daimyo''s family had been living in luxury while the people in the capital were having a financial crisis.


    Hikaru stared down at the pathetic Daimyo kneeling in front of him, and coldly said, "Do you take me for a fool, Wind Daimyo?"


    "N-no, sir! I-I was just trying to-"


    Pak!


    With one slap, Hikaru sent him flying. He did not put any force in that slap, yet the Wind Daimyo was sent flying, even destroying the luxurious wall of the room.


    Since the Wind Daimyo was just a mortal, he couldn''t withstand that one "weak" slap from Hikaru and died almost immediately.


    Even though the capital was having a financial crisis, most of the people living there are nobles. Nobles are the kind of people that don''t eat cheap food, even if they don''t have any money. Yes, that''s the kind of situation they are facing right now. They have no food shortage, they''re just people who like expensive things.


    Look at the food of the Daimyo''s family, they were all coated in edible gold. Do you know how much is that? Just 1 normal size apple coated with edible gold could cost someone about 316,000 Ryo! But the average income of a normal family in this world could be estimated to about 1,000,000 Ryo per year! That''s like a 1/3 of their yearly income.


    These people are too used to living in luxury that they couldn''t even think of humbling themselves a bit.


    But now, the Wind Daimyo is dead and no one in the capital can quickly replace him at the moment. But that''s easy to solve for Hikaru, just put a clone of his as the fake replacement. Of course, this is not just any normal clone. It''s a Mana Homunculus!


    Mana Homunculus is the technique he created for stuff like this. He is basically making a homunculus that is smarter than normal clones. As you can guess, Homunculus are technically not clones but are beings that are capable of thinking for themselves but the thing is, they don''t have a soul and Hikaru can create any kind of person right now.


    The Homunculus would not acquire any of Hikaru''s abilities and would be like an infant when they are first created. The way they are created is by dropping a drop of his blood, and then multiplying the cells of that blood by using his mana and in about a month, he would have a newly born homunculus. But that is too slow, so he would have to use one of his limbs to create a homunculus for faster creation.


    Itachi stared at the dead body of the former Wind Daimyo and said to Hikaru, "Was that really necessary? Killing would only bring a loss of power and a lot of people would create unnecessary bloodshed to take the throne for themselves."


    "Don''t worry, Itachi. I have a plan for that." Hikaru said confidently, "I''ll be replacing the Wind Daimyo in a moment, we just need to destroy any evidence left behind by this fat bastard."


    "I understand." Itachi said to Hikaru with his usual stoic face.


    With a snap of his fingers, Hikaru watched the corpse of the Daimyo burn to ashes. His chaos flame right now is easily stronger than the black flame of Amaterasu.


    ''No matter how many times I witness it, his flame is clearly more powerful than my Amaterasu. I wonder how he got hold of such power.'' Itachi thought in slight awe of Hikaru.


    "Raaaahh!" Suddenly, a boy no older than 12 came out of the door with a knife in his hands. He was rushing towards Hikaru with the intent to kill. It seems like he witnessed his father''s death by his own eyes.


    Hikaru could also sense another person behind the door.


    The boy was quickly apprehended by Itachi. He took action because he knew that Hikaru would not hesitate to kill this boy.


    "Woman, come out from that door." Hikaru ordered with extreme authority in his voice.


    The woman behind the door had no choice but to come out. She was a beautiful woman, and Hikaru could hardly believe that she was in her mid-thirties. She looks like a woman in her twenties. But there was something strange, she has red vibrant hair and violet eyes. She wore the clothes of a noble and she was clearly afraid of Hikaru.


    ''Come to think of it, this boy also has red hair.. Does that mean they are from the Uzumaki Clan? No, I''ll investigate her later. If she lives, that is.'' Hikaru thought, mildly surprised. Uzumakis were rare to find, so you could understand his surprise. They may be somewhat related to Azumi and her mother.


    Hikaru stared directly at the woman''s eyes and she looked away in fear.


    "Tell me your name." Hikaru demanded.


    "I-I am Haruo Aiko, s-sir." The woman timidly introduced herself.


    "I meant your real name before you obtained your current one." Hikaru said, noticing that the name of the Daimyo was also Haruo.


    The woman bowed her head and apologized continuously before she said, "M-my real name was Uzumaki Aiko before I was sold by my previous parents to slavery." It seems like Aiko is naturally timid.


    "Then, how did you become the spouse of the Wind Daimyo?" Hikaru asked curiously.


    "T-the Daimyo took f-fancy of me b-back then and I-I became his concubine. T-that boy is one of my children to the D-Daimyo." She explained, although timidly.


    "Where are the others?" Hikaru is now very interested. If he could lead Aiko and her children back to Konoha, the Uzumaki Clan could rebuild itself again.


    "T-they are currently escaping from the capital." Aiko said, she had a sad look on her face.


    Hikaru did not look surprised by that and just created 5 shadow clones to chase after her children.


    "How many children do you have?" Hikaru asked.


    "S-six." She replied.


    He nodded to his clones and they disappeared from the room in a burst of speed.


    8 Uzumakis, including this woman, has now fallen into his hands. If he investigates more, he might find more Uzumaki in the elemental nation. A hunt, to say the least.


    ( A Month Later )


    It''s been a month since he killed the Wind Daimyo, replaced him with his homunculus, took his wife and children, and basically took over the entire Land of Wind. Of course, this information hasn''t been known to anyone except him, Itachi, and Aiko and her children.


    From this one month of hunting for Uzumakis, he found around 30+ Uzumaki. Some of them were sold to slavery, some were shinobis, and some were seeking revenge to the three villages that invaded their clan. He asked Aiko where her parents are but she just said that they adopted her and were not her real blood-related family.


    He has also signed a contract with the Yang God of this world. He can now control the Yang Element in this world. But it seems like the Yin Goddess is hard to find.


    Every mountain in this world was BUILT by someone or by something. They are usually housed by deities, like the gods. But the Yin Goddess was the only exception since she apparently lives in a small dimension she created herself. By the way, the Major God doesn''t live in these mountains, they live high in the land of the celestials. Minor Gods are like the civilians in the world of gods.


    Anyway, the Minor Gods and other deities like that old man, all live in the mountains they created. If a mountain is destroyed, the wrath of the deity living there would bring disasters after disasters upon the person who had destroyed their home. The home of the gods and deities are invisible to mortal eyes, so they cannot be seen.


    But Hikaru can clearly see them with his Ring of the Unseen.


    He asked Yang God where she may be, but he too doesn''t know where she is. The entrance to her dimensional plane is moving everywhere around the world every second that''s passed. It was basically hopeless, if Hikaru was a normal creature. Since maxing his current stats, he was able to travel a hundred times faster than the speed of light.


    He can basically travel 30,000,000 Kilometres per second. He can travel towards the sun in less than a second. But he might destroy planets if he tried using his speed because he cannot control it properly yet, even his real strength. Right now, he is a real planet destroyer. But that is also a problem if he decided to go all out. Not a single piece of this world will remain.


    Fortunately, he is able to control his strength to a minimum level. That''s why you aren''t seeing him changing landscapes from time to time.


    Anyway, he will give up on the Yin Goddess for now. She sounds troublesome. He decided to just learn the martial arts knowledge of this world for a while, it can become useful later on.


    He also gave Itachi a new weapon, an Uchigatana imbued with Chaos Flame and has been enhanced to +20. It is a very powerful weapon for mortals, and Itachi''s respect towards him has increased a lot, even though that''s just one of the weakest weapons he has. He''ll give him a more powerful one later, after he has grown strong enough.


    After finding all of those Uzumaki Clan members, he decided to hand them over to Kimimaro to train them properly. Kimimaro is probably the most capable subordinate in this time. He is also a Kage level shinobi, capable of matching the other Kages in battle prowess. But if you add the equipment that Hikaru had given him, then, even if all the current Kages faced him, they still wouldn''t be able to defeat him. He is certainly stronger than Azumi.


    Right now, both him and Itachi are traveling in the woods near the land of fire.


    They walked on the paved road slowly and steadily. The place was quite peaceful, if you look at them. The only thing destroying their image were the dead bodies of the bandits, covered in their own blood, behind them.

 Chapter 80 - 73: An Attack On The Leaf!

    (Time Skip)


    It''s been a year since he met Azumi and it''s now July 13.


    Recently, he''s heard news of Akatsuki making their move. Out of all the tailed beasts around the elemental nation, 7 were already captured by them. Hikaru could''ve helped them but he has another idea that would relieve them from their curse, I.e, their tailed beasts.


    As you know, Jinchuurikis are not like well in the elemental nation because of the beasts sealed inside them. They were all labeled as monsters, demons, and many other things. And all of that suffered throughout the rest of their lives. But, since the Akatsuki had already captured them and extracted their tailed beasts, he can now revive all of them. And his method of reviving them?


    Fighting the literal God of Death of this world, the Shinigami. It was mostly one sided though since the Shinigami was quite stubborn on not giving back their souls, since he already owns them. But Hikaru did not take that and beat him to pulp for an entire week without rest before he finally gave in.


    Kami and Yami were there too and tried to stop him but they only got their asses kicked, too. So, as to not get hurt anymore, the two goddesses decided to stay out of his way. They couldn''t use their full power since it would probably destroy most of their home.


    Now, he has their souls in his jars and he is making bodies for them. Hikaru wants them to help Azumi in the upcoming war but before that, he''s gotta reinforce some equipment for them. He''ll do that after he''s revived them.


    Also, as a punishment for being stubborn, he took Minato and Kushina''s souls from the Shinigami. He directly burrowed his hands on his stomach before he forcefully took out their souls.


    Right now, he''s just nervous since he''s meeting the parents of his girlfriend. Well, any guy would but he is much, much worse than just "any guy". He is currently designing their bodies through his imaginations with Itachi helping him. He is using his Homunculus Creation technique for their bodies and then he would put their souls inside those bodies.


    Anyway, it''s gonna take quite a few days to make those bodies. So both of them decided to return to Konoha and see what''s their situation.


    (Scene Break)


    Since he wasn''t rushing that much, they reached the village in a day.


    Yet, they only found ruins. Not a single thing was left of Konoha, only the Hokage mountain was recognizable. The village was a wasteland but they could sense other people who were alive. Some were very low on chakra and some were gravely injured.


    "What happened to Konoha¡­? I can barely recognize it!" Itachi exclaimed in shock.


    Itachi was on top of the front gate of Konoha while Hikare was levitating from the ground, his expression solemn.


    "The only person other than me and our subordinates that can do this is Pain, or Nagato. So, he has invaded the village, huh?" Hikaru said, not surprised by the destruction in front of him. He can feel both Sasuke and Azumi fighting Pain, and other Akatsuki members. It seems like both of them grew even stronger after he left.


    Sasuke is already on Kage level and has awakened the mangekyou sharingan. He can feel the chakra from his eyes radiating. While Azumi has perfected her Sage Mode and she can now use the Kyuubi''s chakra to a minimum level. It seems like she fought with the Kyuubi and took its chakra after its defeat. He doesn''t know how she did that but he felt proud of her achievements.


    But something is strange, Jiraiya should be in the village. Why isn''t he sensing him? And Kakashi and Hiruzen also, it seems like they''ve vanished from the face of this world.


    "Itachi!"


    "Yes, I know." Itachi disappeared in a burst of speed from the tree, and Hikaru could see him go towards where Sasuke and Azumi were fighting Pain.


    "Hmph, to have the balls to attack this village. Unforgivable. I have this village under my protection, to dare to invade it with so few people is insulting." Hikaru stated coldly, yet no one heard him. His murderous aura reached its peak but he quickly calmed it down, knowing that getting angry won''t get him anywhere.


    He pulled out 20 stones carved with images before summoning 20 Black Knights. They were all equipped with Halberds and were ready for war.


    "Go!" Hikaru ordered and they all rushed towards the center of the village. They were fast, faster than any Kage level ninjas.


    (Scene Change)


    The entire village was suddenly invaded by the Akatsuki just after they were reported of Jiraiya''s death. He infiltrated Amegakure, where they found evidence of Akatsuki making that place their base. He wanted to confirm whether it was true that his former disciples were the leaders of this Organization and it ultimately caused his death.


    They had no time to mourn for him, the Akatsuki and its leader suddenly invaded the village without any warnings.


    There are only a few Kage level shinobis in the village while Akatsuki has 7. They killed Kakuzu and Hidan after they killed Asuma. And surprisingly, Zabuza. They were surprised, since they thought that they''d killed Zabuza back then, they didn''t know he had an apprentice. They managed to kill Zabuza but Haku escaped to Akatsuki. They were hard to find and the only time they could find them when they were the ones hunting them.


    The Third Hokage died a few months ago due to old age, that''s why he couldn''t help them.


    Kakashi tried to fight Pain but he died when they all cornered him and he couldn''t escape.


    Right now, Azumi and Sasuke are having a hard time fighting these seven Kage level shinobis. No, make that 12. Pain also has his Six Paths Of Pain. They are really annoying to fight, since they just kept reviving and reviving.


    Even though she had her summons with them, it was not enough.


    She dodged another ice jutsu from Haku while counter attacking. Golden Chakra shrouded her entire body, this is the result of taking the Kyuubi''s chakra. Her strength had jump leap and bounds but it was not enough. She may have near infinite chakra but she can''t keep this up for long.


    She sensed another Akatsuki member coming form behind her, Kisame.


    "Hah! Die!" Kisame shouted as he tried shredding off her head but she just dodged it and quickly made a Rasengan before shoving into his face.


    Boom!!


    Kisame was launched into great speed but he suddenly stopped mid-air and stood up. His face was crushed by Azumi''s Rasengan but it regenerated slowly, just like her healing factor.


    "Heh, do you think this is enough to defeat me!? Hahahaha!!" Kisame mocked her as his face regenerated.


    "Tch."


    There''s also a reason for this. Kabuto, who was Orochimaru''s right hand man, joined Akatsuki with the intent of purposely making them stronger to kill a certain someone. Kabuto had somehow mastered the snake summon''s Sage Mode and also perfected sage mode, like Azumi. And right now, he has surpassed Orochimaru in intelligence. He managed to make the members of Akatsuki''s healing factors to rapidly regenerate when they take damage. Of course, this isn''t immortality. They can still be killed if someone cuts off their head. But it''s almost impossible to do that, since they always dodge any fatal wound.


    Suddenly, countless paper shurikens were thrown at her. She deflected all of them by using her chakra cloak, but another attack came from behind her. She used her Sunlight Straight Sword to deflect it.


    It was Haku, who''s holding a blade made from her ice.


    Three opponents were fighting her while Sasuke was fighting four. He is holding his own quite well with his Susanoo but Pain''s attacks seems to be breaking it.


    They were in a hopeless situation. Neither sides were losing nor winning. If this goes on, she might have a chance to kill them. But the problem is, they aren''t using that much chakra to conserve it. They''ve realized that slowly weakening them could be quite effective.


    ''I have to end this fight quickly!'' Azumi said inside her mind.


    "Chief!" She shouted at Gamabunta.


    "Haa!" Gamabunta attacked them with his large sword and they dodged it before Azumi made a Rasenshuriken in that short time.


    With her Rasenshuriken in her hand, she then threw it at the three. Of course, they tried dodging it only for dozens of clones to appear in a poof of smoke.


    "What?!" Konan shouted in surprise.


    The clones then formed their own giant rasengans before they separated and attacked the three of them simultaneously.


    Boom! Boom! Boom!


    "Yes! It worked!" Azumi said joyfully.


    She made that Rasenshuriken and used it as a catalyst for summoning the clones. Even if her chakra is apart from her, she could still control it in a way she wanted it to. This is the epitome of chakra control, at least in the mortal eyes.


    "You did a good job, Azumi-kun." She suddenly heard a voice!


    She looked around and not before long, she saw Itachi descending from the sky. He still wore that black robe along with his bamboo hat but his sharingan is activated this time.


    ''Itachi!? If he''s here, that means!'' Azumi excitedly thought inside her head.


    "Aaah!! What are these things!?" She heard a scream and she saw her beloved Hikaru''s knights. There were 20 of them! She saw them attacking the snake Kabuto and that guy who''s wearing a weird mask.


    They couldn''t fight back at all!


    Kisame was about to stand up when Itachi threw a kunai coated with his amaterasu and it killed him almost immediately.


    "These things are dangerous!" Kabuto shouted to Tobi.


    "No shit!" Tobi replied as he tried dodging another sword swing aiming for his neck.


    Pain did not look away from Sasuke and continued attacking him relentlessly.


    "Oi, oi, your comrades there are getting attacked, you know!" Sasuke said as he shot another arrow at Pain using his imperfect Susanoo.


    Even though Zetsu was not exactly the fighting type, he would sometimes use a surprise attack to distract him from Pain. Since he''s hard to notice, Sasuke was having a hard time sensing where he''s attacking next.


    Pain dodged the gigantic arrow and went to attack Sasuke with his Gravitational jutsu.


    "Shinra Tensei!" He shouted the name of his technique.


    Woosh!


    Crack!


    "Tch, my susanoo cracked again! This is the 10th time, seriously." Sasuke said, stressed out.


    Even though the entire Akatsuki were being attacked by these Knights wearing charred armors, Pain still kept his cool. The situation''s bad, he knows that but there''s no use panicking.


    ''The Kyuubi is strong and this Uchiha Brat is annoying. He keeps getting in my way whenever I try capturing the Kyuubi. I need to end this quick or those Knights would set their eyes on me. But I can do this, I''m a god after all.'' Pain thought inside his head quite arrogantly.

 Chapter 81 - 74: A Deal

    Hikaru levitated on top of the whole village with his eyes glaring at his enemies below. His black robe fluttered as the gust of wind hit him in the sky, his bamboo hat was gone. His long black hair can be seen mystically moving, as if it''s beyond the laws of physics.


    This is as much help as he''s going to give them. Itachi is already as strong as Madara, even without his equipment. His Black Knights are equal to all Yokai Lords, except for that old man. This invasion will soon be finished, even if he doesn''t do anything.


    But he''s currently pissed, since he thought he could meet with Azumi in a normal situation instead of this.


    He took out his Millwood Greatbow and proceeded to snipe Nagato''s Six Path of Pain, one by one.


    The Greatbow was two times the size of his body and it was completely black. The string of this greatbow is hard to pull since it has been reinforced with titanite. This greatbow of his is precious to him, since he had this before he even got this strong. Back then, he didn''t have much strength to defeat the monsters inside the system on his own. But with this Millwod Greatbow, he was able to easily grind souls since it''s so powerful from a long distance. But when the enemy got closed to him, he was basically f.u.c.k.i.e.d.


    Hikaru smiled sadistically as he pulled the string with the arrow on it. He lit the Millwood Greatarrow with his chaos flame before he shot it towards the Animal Path Pain.


    The giant arrow was launched at great speed, and it practically broke the speed of light. Nagato didn''t even notice it before the Animal Path Pain was crushed into minced meat because of the large arrow. The whole ground below him even broke under the force of that arrow.


    Everyone fighting below was shook!


    "What¡­ was that?"


    That was the collective thought of everyone in the destroyed village.


    All the people fighting stopped to look at what happened.


    Without any hesitations, Hikaru pulled his bow 5 more times before all the Six Paths of Pain were dead. Sasuke was even shocked to see the one he was fighting being crushed to mincemeat.


    Itachi didn''t have to look to see who''s shooting those arrows, it was clearly Hikaru having fun.


    Hikaru returned his greatbow back to his storage box and said while smirking, "Now, time to harvest a pair of eyes." He''s talking about the rinnegan that Nagato has.


    It was obvious that most of the people here were all dead, and the only thing he could do is to revive all of them with the rinnegan because it''s easy and efficient.


    Now, if only he could get Nagato to sacrifice himself to revive all these people. It''s basically his fault anyway why this happened in the first place, if he just didn''t attack this village, everything would''ve been okay.


    Without that rinnegan, Obito would be powerless and wouldn''t be able to do anything. That pair of eyes had caused everyone trouble to an incredible degree.


    Hikaru levitated down to the middle of the village, where they were all fighting. The entire ground in a 50 meter radius has been destroyed by those six arrows he launched earlier. It would''ve destroyed more, if he didn''t hold back 99 percent of his strength.


    As he descended from the sky, Haku immediately recognized who he was. She has healed most of her injuries earlier from Azumi''s rasengan but seeing the man who physically disabled her master, she couldn''t help but grit her teeth.


    She rushed towards him as he descended to the ground with her ice blade. She then tried to plunge her ice blade into his stomach only for him to deflect it with his finger.


    Pang!


    It made a metallic sound when his finger deflected her ice blade.


    But she didn''t stop there and continued rushing her attacks towards him.


    Hikaru was confused as to why this girl was so angry at him, it was as if he killed her family or something.


    Pang! Pang! Pang!


    Her attacks were futile and he only deflected them with his pinky finger.


    "I''m sorry, who are you?" Hikaru asked as he deflected another one of her attacks.


    "You dare ask me that! You almost killed Zabuza-sama back then! I''ll kill you!" She yelled at him.


    "I don''t even know you!" Hikaru said with an almost deadpanned face.


    He doesn''t remember Haku because, well, it''s been too long. As well as Zabuza, he completely forgot about them.


    Hikaru, being annoyed at Haku, decided to just knock her out. He''ll ask her later as to why she decided to attack him like this, he understands that she is his enemy right now, but for her to rage like this, he must''ve done something.


    Haku fell to the ground as she went unconscious due to the chop on her neck. Hikaru enveloped her in a sphere of mana to keep her locked in there until he decides to let her go.


    Hikaru then turned his eyes at everyone around him. There were 4 Akatsuki members left and they were very cautious towards him. He could see their bodies tense due to their fear.


    Deciding that enough was enough, he just said coldly, "Die, all of you." Within a second, all of their heads went flying. Hikaru was now holding an ordinary Uchigatana with no enchantments.


    Pain, Kabuto, and Konan had their heads decapitated but there was one missing. It seems like Obito escaped through his Kamui. Truly, how amazing this world is. Even he, a Pseudo God, still hasn''t got into space and time control yet. Their sharingans are truly powerful. He wondered why the gods of this universe decided to create something like that, a weapon that has the potential to kill them.


    Hikaru claps his hands and says, "Now that they are all dead, let''s get to cleaning before fixing what happened here. Anyway, I''ll be having a talk with the leader of Akatsuki. But first¡­" He grabbed Konan''s remains before he vanished in a burst of speed.


    The Black Knights were already gone, and the people that were watching the fight earlier were gobsmacked. This kind of conclusion in a battle is something they''ve never seen their entire lives. In less than a second, he killed all of them and without them seeing the attack.


    Azumi only smiled, knowing that her darling had already returned. While Sasuke heaved a sigh of relief now that those guys were dead but that masked guy got him thinking, why does he have the Sharingan? And it looked pretty similar to Kakashi. He''ll look into it later, he''s tired.


    Everyone in the ruined village yelled in victory, knowing they''ve survived another disaster. Their only problem now is fixing their broken village, which will be hard but it''s their home, they will do anything to fix their home.


    Meanwhile, with Hikaru¡­


    He had fixed the corpse of Konan and reattached her decapitated head. He also stole her soul, so that he can revive her later but if only Nagato agrees to his demands. You''ll see later¡­


    He had used his chakra to sense where Nagato was, and found him in a nearby underground cave. He saw that Nagato wasn''t low on chakra, so he might attack him as he went there.


    Hikaru was in a forest 10 Miles away from Konoha, and he was directly above Nagato.


    He carried Konan''s body with his mana, forming a small platform to lay her body on top of it. He then made a huge hand from his mana before digging out the entire ground above Nagato, just to enter the cave.


    After digging out another patch of dirt and stone, he finally saw Nagato.


    "So you''ve come, Chosen Immortal." Nagato stated, which shocked Hikaru as to how he knew about that title.


    Hikaru levitated down as he narrowed his eyes at Nagato before he spoke, "How do you know that title? I thought it was exclusive only to supernatural creatures."


    "Hah hah hah, " Nagato laughed dryly, "I have the rinnegan of legends, do you think I wouldn''t be able to see those unseen creatures? I did not tell this to others since they might just take it as a joke. And you''re asking how do I know this? Well, I have heard some rumors about it. The Return of the Chosen Immortal! Such a title! Hah hah hah!" Nagato added.


    After piecing things together, Hikaru got into the conclusion that Nagato has made friends with some of the Yokais.


    Hikaru then shook his head and said, "It doesn''t matter whether you know who I am or not, I have come to make a deal with you." As he finished his sentence, he brought down the now dead Konan from the platform he made with his mana.


    Nagato widened his eyes at the sight of the corpse of his dear friend.


    "What are you going to her body, you sick bastard!?" Nagato yelled angrily but he couldn''t do anything due to his body being weak already.


    "Woah, calm down, mister. I''m not going to do anything to her, I''m not into necrophilia, you know? What I just wanted was to make a deal with you." Hikaru said, surprised at the sudden outburst from Nagato.


    Nagato calmed himself and said, "Fine, what deal are you going to make?"


    This time, Hikaru smiled and said, "I want you to revive all the people who died in Konoha by your hands, and in return, I shall revive her myself and I will make sure that no harm comes to her."


    "Hmph, I can revive her myself. What difference does it make if you revive her? I can just choose to revive her myself and protect her myself. And what you''re asking is impossible, if I did that, I would die." Nagato said, seeing that he will get nothing from that deal.


    "It seems like you don''t understand, " Hikaru said, "I specifically said that no harm will come to her when I''m the one who revives her. But, if you revive her, I''ll kill her almost immediately along with you. In short, either way, you''ll just die." As time passes, Hikaru feels like he''s becoming more like a villain.


    Nagato spat on his face but he just dodged it. He then said, "So you''re basically threatening me, huh? I thought the Chosen Immortal was a great person, you???re just a sc.u.mbag."


    "Oh, and yeah, as a bonus, I''ll revive your other friend for you. What was his name again? Ah, yes, Yahiko." Hikaru made this on a whim to make Nagato more inclined to make this deal.


    Nagato widened his eyes. If he chose that option now, Yahiko and Konan could live their lives happily, even without him. But he made a promise to him, to save the shinobi world. If he dies now, no one would be there to save this world. A promise of an Uzumaki stays in a lifetime, and he doesn''t want to break that promise. But if his friends could live a happy life, even without him, he is prepared to sacrifice anything. Even his life.


    Hikaru saw that Nagato is still hesitating, so he thought of another great deal.


    "Then¡­" He got Nagato''s attention, "I''ll revive you along with your friends, and you three could live your lives happily. If you can revive all of the people who died in Konoha this day, I''ll make sure that no harm will come to you three for the rest of your lives." He''s basically saying "F.u.c.k you" to the god of death of this world, AKA, Shinigami. As long as he lives here, he''s basically a giant middle finger to the gods.


    Nagato knew this deal was far too good, something is not right.


    "How do I know you will revive me and my friends after I die?" He asked, speculating whether Hikaru''s words were to be trusted.


    Seeing this happening earlier, he decided to revive Konan in front of him. He took out a jar and inside it was a pure white energy; A soul.


    He took out the soul from the jar before inserting it in Konan''s body, and not long later, Konan suddenly opened her amber eyes and immediately, she sat up as she looked around.


    "Where¡­ am I?" She said.


    Nagato, knowing that Hikaru will keep the part of his deal, smiled.


    "Fine, I''ll revive everyone I''ve killed in that village now." He said before turning his tender eyes to Konan, "Forgive me, Konan. I''ll see you later, I promise."


    Nagato then clasped his hands together and performed his ocular technique.


    "Gedou: Rinned Tensei no Jutsu!"


    Konan was stunned, "Nagato¡­?" She then came to her mind before she ran towards Nagato, to stop him from killing himself. But it was already too late.


    Hikaru smiled, because now is the time to get Yahiko''s body and revive him.

 Chapter 82 - 75: Revival

    In the middle of the destroyed Konoha, the King of Hell suddenly emerged from the ground. The people suddenly feared that something bad might happen again.


    The King of Hell opened its mouth before releasing countless souls from its mouth. All the souls returned to their bodies, reviving them completely.


    The others saw the people they thought died, rise up. They were confused because they saw the enemy use this to kill people earlier.


    Slowly, everyone who died this day in the village was revived. Everybody just heaved a sigh of relief, knowing that they won''t have to mourn for anyone anytime soon.


    (Meanwhile, in an unknown place)


    The place was dark, no light could be seen anywhere. Kakashi woke up having a headache and when he opened his eyes, he saw nothing but the darkness. He tried using his chakra but later found out that he couldn''t use his chakra.


    "Where am I?" Asked Kakashi, who''s very confused right now.


    The only thing he remembers just before he ended up here was that he was fighting all the Pains at once. He managed to take down 3 of them but ended up getting killed by the Pain that uses gravity ninjutsu.


    (Note: In this fanfic, he is almost as strong as the sannins even without his sharingan).


    He extended his right hand, trying to touch something physical. He stood up and started walking with no clear destination. He felt as if his body was moving on its own. He walked towards something, not knowing where he will end up.


    1 Hour¡­


    2 Hours....


    3 Hours¡­


    Just as he felt that there was no end to this place, he saw something in the distance. A light lit by a bonfire. But he saw that there was someone else there, too.


    That person had a kind face with dark eyes which had deep lines running underneath them. He had spiky, silver-coloured hair that reached into the middle of his back tied in a ponytail and bangs that hung over his forehead protector. He wore a standard Konoha-nin uniform with a pair of gloves, flak jacket, bandages on his right arm, and the addition of a distinctive short white sleeve which had red edges and the standard crest of Uzushiogakure on it.


    He was just sitting on a log near the bonfire. That person then turned his face slightly, and smiled warmly before saying, "You sure have grown up, Kakashi!"


    Kakashi seemed to just smile to himself as he walked towards the bonfire. He then sat right beside that man and said, "It''s been a long time, father."


    "Yeah, and now that you''re here, would you tell me your tale?" Said Sakumo.


    "Alright, but it''s going to be a long one and I''d like to take my time." Kakashi replied.


    "Yeah, that''s fine." Sakumo said with a slight smile.


    Kakashi then looked upwards meaninglessly and said, "Now, where do I start?"


    (Back With Hikaru)


    After using the [Gedo-Rinne Tensei], Nagato promptly fell down with a smile on his face as his red hair completely turned into white. Konan rushed towards her fallen friend, just to see whether he was alive or not.


    "Now, now, please get away from him." Hikaru said, as he grabbed Nagato''s soul from passing towards Limbo.


    Konan cried as she held Nagato''s body closed to her. She then gently put down the corpse of Nagato and turned around to face Hikaru. She spreads her arm widely, just like someone trying to protect something.


    "I will not let you disgrace him any further! I''ll protect him, even if I have to put down my life as well!" Konan''s voice resonated around them. Her will to protect the dead body behind her was surely admirable, but¡­


    "You''re being a nuisance, sit down!" Hikaru commanded coldly before she felt a huge pressure on her back. She forcefully knelt down due to the heavy pressure but she still kept her posture, Hikaru saw that her face was not flinching, only her will to protect Nagato''s corpse was shown on her face.


    He face palmed at the stupidity of this woman. He was just about to revive Nagato but she just had to get in his way.


    "Tch, i didn''t want to use this." Hikaru said as he pointed his finger at Konan before an inch small yellow lightning bolt came out of his finger and charged at her at light speed.


    "[Paralyze]"


    The small lightning bolt hit her and she quickly fell down to the ground, unmoving. She was paralyzed. From time to time, yellow lightning arcs would flash around her body.


    Hikaru then walked towards Nagato, ignoring her. She tried moving to at least stop him but her actions were futile, since she couldn''t even move an inch. No matter how much Will you have, that is still not enough to resist absolute power.


    Hikaru knelt down to inspect Nagato''s body. Seeing that there was no other injury other than his malnutrition, he decided to fix his body first to a more normal way. But first¡­


    Squelch!


    He dug out both Nagato''s eyes, the rinnegan. He then proceeded to put them in a jar bottle, which was filled with water.


    "D...on''t you da...re¡­!!!" Konan managed to speak, even though she was paralyzed.


    Hikaru just ignored her.


    He then used his Yang Element to restore Nagato''s original eyes along with his nutrition. Nagato''s body turned back to his original state before he used the powers of his rinnegan, a young man who has a normal body unlike his previous state. Hikaru then put his soul back into his body, thus reviving him.


    Nagato opened his newly regenerated purple eyes, and sat up. He shook his head a little to get his head away from aching and then looked around his surroundings.


    "So you really kept the part of your deal, huh?" Nagato said with a small smile.


    "Of course but I had to take the Rinnegan away from you, I''m gonna use them for something later." Said Hikaru.


    "That''s fine, I have no need for them anyway. I''ll only have to train myself back to a proper fighter. By the way, what''s Konan doing there?"


    Hikaru turned to look at Konan before he turned back to Nagato and said, "She was being an annoyance. She tried keeping me from reviving you because she wanted to ''protect'' you from me."


    "Silly girl." Nagato said, laughing a bit. Konan tried looking away in embarrassment but found that she couldn''t, since she was still paralyzed.


    "Can you undo what jutsu you put her in?" Nagato asked.


    Hikaru just snapped his fingers and she was free just like that.


    "It''s good that you are fine, Konan." Nagato said warmly, with a smile so tender.


    "Yeah, I''m glad that you are back, too." She replied with a smile.


    Hikaru just stood on the sidelines, not wanting to ruin the moment.


    (Back with Kakashi)


    Sakumo was shocked to learn so many things about his son. And even at the end, he understood what he did to protect his comrades. He was ridiculed, shamed by the very village he was protecting just because he prioritized the lives of his comrades but Kakashi had understood that. He was just doing what''s right in his heart.


    Knowing that his son did not hate him, Sakumo smiled. He can finally move on to the next life, with his beloved wife.


    Sakumo stood up and said, "Well, it''s time to get going now. See ya, Kakashi."


    "Wait, what do you mean by that? Aren''t I also dead?" Kakashi asked, shocked.


    "It is still not your time. And just one thing, save your friend from the darkness." With those final words, Sakumo vanished completely.


    Then, out of a sudden, a beam of light descended upon him before he fainted again.


    ''Save your friend from the darkness? What does he mean by that?'' Kakashi''s last thoughts before he fainted.


    (Three Days Later)


    It''s been a few days since the invasion and Konoha is still in the middle of recovering. Tsunade is still bedridden, and Danzo is currently trying to seize the seat of the Hokage but they were all futile attempts. First of all, there are three Shinobis in the village that can easily take the seat. Azumi, Sasuke, and Kakashi. Second, there is also Hikaru, who is a monster in every meaning of that word. And third, the people of Konoha are against him since he didn''t even show up when the invasion was going on.


    He''s dream of being a Hokage is basically futile.


    Konoha has just been setting up tents with everyone''s help.


    And he also found out that the girl from three years ago that he rescued from that depraved island, has become the youngest Jounin right now. She''s just 12 years old. Her name is Tsubaki, no last name.


    But he found one disturbing thing, she is basically Azumi 1.5. He already has enough sins as it is, he doesn''t want to add a new one. Her obsessiveness was astounding, but not to the point of Azumi. She''s just idolizing him but to the point that she would attack anyone who dares to insult him, even if it''s just slightly.


    Though, if he leaves this unchecked, he might really have another Azumi.


    One more thing, the hotel that he paid to be built 3 years ago was also destroyed by this invasion and the construction manager ran away with the money out of fear. He''ll be hunting him down soon. Yeah, soon.


    Anyway, the recovery of Konoha is going well and the people are happily working together to repair their beloved village. Also, the people of Konoha came to recognize Sasuke, Azumi, and Hikaru, heroes of the village.


    They are now working on Itachi''s case with the council, about him slaughtering the Uchiha Clan. Out of all this, he is still a wanted criminal at the end of the day.


    But fortunately, he just have the right man to place the blame for the Uchiha Massacre; Danzo.

 Chapter 83 - 76: The Arrivals From Another Dimension 1

    After a few debates from the council, Itachi was put in a jail cell momentarily until they''ve decided what to do with him.


    Some Shinobi Clan were wary of Itachi, especially the Hyuga Clan. They know that if Sasuke and Itachi were to resurrect their clan, the Hyuga Clan would lose the position of the strongest clan in the village, even though they aren''t really the strongest.


    Sasuke tried to join in as the head of the Uchiha Clan but he was denied because a clan with only a single person in it, is not a clan. He wanted to protect his brother but without a Hokage, the council has the rights to make decisions for the village.


    But, for Hikaru, this was an opportunity to expose Danzo for who he really is, by framing him of the Uchiha Massacre.


    Two days later, Hikaru called a meeting for all the members of the council, including Danzo and the Elders. He has made his preparations and decided to do this on his own.


    All 10 of them sat at the round table, including Hikaru, who was sitting on where the Hokage was supposed to be. Sasuke and Azumi were standing behind Hikaru.


    He put his foot on top of the table, as if he was on his house. His attitude annoyed the Elders and Danzo, along with Hiashi but they couldn''t do anything, since Hikaru can kill all of them with a snap of his fingers. It was even a miracle that Danzo is still alive right now. If Hikaru wanted it, Danzo would''ve been dead by now.


    But for him, this is just a game. Hikaru cares not for politics, he just wants to humiliate Danzo before his ultimate demise.


    "Now, " Hikaru started, "I want to talk about the crimes of Uchiha Itachi. As you all know, it was said that Itachi massacred his entire clan to ''prove'' himself."


    "That''s right, so what''s there to talk about?" Said Danzo.


    Hikaru looks at Danzo and said, "You see, what if all of that was just a hoax made to frame Itachi? Someone who is extremely thirsty for power that he made a scheme to massacre an entire clan for his own self benefits?"


    "Are you saying that someone in the council decided to massacre a clan just for his own profits, Hikaru-san? On what basis are you talking about?" Hiashi asked, narrowing his eyes at Hikaru.


    Danzo already had an uneasy feeling about this meeting, but now that Hikaru said that, he can now see that he had fallen right into Hikaru''s palm. If he decides to excuse himself right now, at this moment, everybody''s suspicion would turn to him. He needs perfect timing to leave this meeting!


    Hikaru just laid his back on the chair and said, "Why, of course, our friend Danzo here. He was the one who massacred the entire Uchiha Clan with his army of puppets, am I right, Danzo?" An evil glint passed in his eyes.


    Danzo kept his cool and said calmly, "What evidence do you have that I killed off the Uchiha Clan?"


    Sasuke gritted his teeth, knowing the truth far too well. He was about to make a move but Hikaru just raised his hand to stop him. He calmed himself down, acting rashly right now would not benefit them right now.


    Suddenly, everyone saw Hikaru smiling widely as he said, "Hiashi, turn on your Byakugan and look at Danzo. Look at his right eye, specifically."


    Hiashi didn''t know why Hikaru said that to him but he did as he was told. And soon, he saw something in the right eye socket of Danzo. A Sharingan!


    Hiashi turned off his byakugan and asked, "Why do you have a Sharingan in your right eye socket, Danzo-san? And I have seen that eye before, if I remembered correctly, that eye is from Uchiha Shisui!"


    Everyone turned their eyes on Danzo, their suspicions has already fallen on him.


    Seeing that there was no escape, Danzo then yelled, "Root!" And 10 Jounin Level Root members came out of the shadow, and just as they were about to assassinate everyone, the root members found their heads rolling on the ground. And Danzo couldn''t move, he was restrained by Hikaru''s mana rope.


    In that short moment, he killed every root member in the room. He could''ve done that earlier but he wanted Danzo to humiliate himself.


    Hikaru was still there, sitting on his chair with his right root on the table.


    Everyone was shocked at the sudden turn of events but they all calmed down, since they also need to assess the situation first.


    "Hiroaki-san, what''s the meaning of this!?" Homura yelled.


    "As you can see, Elder Homura, Danzo turned out to be a criminal that needs to be brought to justice. And Sasuke, cut his right arm. You''ll see something really disturbing." Hikaru said to Sasuke and he obliged.


    Sasuke walks towards Danzo, slowly and threateningly. He then pulled out his sword, which was the Kusanagi, given to him by the Third Hokage after he became a chunin. It was said that Hiruzen investigated the destroyed base of Orochimaru after he was killed by Hikaru, and found this sword in there.


    Danzo sneered at Sasuke and said, "You''re just like every other Uchiha, sc.u.ms!"


    After hearing that, Sasuke cut Danzo''s right arm completely, along with the bandages.


    After that, he brought the arm to Hikaru.


    "Thank you for that." Hikaru then proceeded to unwrap the bandages off the arm, and lo and behold, 10 sharingans were implanted in his arm.


    And with that, Hikaru stood up from his seat and said as if he was announcing a freak show, "Feast your eyes upon this! He had made connections with Orochimaru a long time ago just to make this bizarre arm of his!"


    "I could''ve never thought¡­!" Hiashi said in shock.


    "I''ve expected as much." Shikaru muttered.


    "What kind of monster¡­!" Tsume said, shocked at the fact that Danzo really massacred the entire Uchiha Clan for this.


    "I should''ve known!" Inoichi yelled in anger.


    "What abomination!" Choza said in disgust.


    Shibi just kept quiet but he was glaring at Danzo with hatred.


    *Clap* *Clap* Clap*


    Hikaru was clapping because his plan turned out great, now he can freely choose when to publicly execute Danzo. But this is not going to be any regular execution, he will be destroying Danzo''s soul itself! That''s a fate worse than death!


    "Now that everybody knows what really happened, at least I think you''ve all guessed what happened, we will now decide when we will execute Danzo. And release Itachi for the crimes he didn''t commit!" Hikaru said.


    Shikaku then sighed and said, "Seeing that there was enough evidence against Danzo-san over here, there''s no choice other than to execute him. If Orochimaru was alive, we could''ve kept him as prisoner to interrogate him about the whereabouts of that snake but Orochimaru is already dead, courtesy of Hikaru-san over here. The time and date of his execution will be tomorrow, and I''ll have to inform the Feudal Lord about this. Troublesome, sigh."


    "That''s fine then, oh, and yeah, contact every Major Village to make a Five Kage Summit. A war is on the horizon, turns out, Kabuto didn''t really die when I beheaded him. He can use a piece of himself to regenerate over time, at least that''s what Nagato told me. Since he had mastered the forbidden jutsu, Edo Tensei, he can resurrect various powerful shinobis to do his bidding, like the Shodaime." Hikaru said.


    "What!? The Edo Tensei Jutsu has been mastered by someone outside of our village?!" Shikaku reacted almost instantly.


    "Just do what I told you, everybody will just take care of the rest. I''ve had my fun, now it''s time for me to leave." Hikaru said lazily, it''s no fun now that Danzo is already done for. But he has another reason for leaving, that is visiting his old friend''s grave.


    "W-Wait!"


    Hikaru then vanished.


    "Tch, troublesome. Do all of you really have to put all of this on me?" Shikaku complained, since he''s basically acting as a Hokage right now.


    (Half an Hour Later)


    "I''m really sorry, old man. I had to do what I had to do, Danzo was getting more bold as the time went by. I know he''s your friend and all but he''s not who he used to be, you should''ve known that when you were alive. In fact, you once told me that he tried assassinating you while you went out in the Forest of Death. I hope you can understand, if you can hear me that is."


    Hikaru talked to himself as he laid his back against the gravestone of Hiruzen. He had a bottle of alcohol with him, drinking while he talked to himself.


    He was grieving this way, everyday since he learned of Hiruzen''s death. He can resurrect him in perfect health but there''s one question in his mind, "Would he like to live again in this horrible world?"


    Hiruzen had seen countless things in this world while he lived. Whether they may be bad or good, the point is, he has had enough of everything. He''d just like to rest from now on, a peaceful yet endless slumber.


    Now that he thought about it, this is the first time he had lost someone. Someone precious to him, an old friend.


    "I think I can understand now why immortality is a curse. I hate¡­ this feeling. I feel so empty, sad, angery, and helpless. I have danced with death countless times yet I''ve never felt this before."


    "Is this the pain of losing someone?"


    " I thought that I could just revive everyone who had died, just messing with death all the time. But I guess, this is the reality of things."


    "I wonder, what are the feelings of the ones before me? Anger? Sadness? Bitterness? Guilt? Despair? Or just, everything?"


    Partly, he wanted to get back at Danzo for doing all those things behind Hiruzen''s back.


    In the end, no matter how much you want someone to live, they will just choose death. Because death can relieve you of everything, once you have experienced all there is.


    But, will Hikaru ever have the ability to die? Or, will he forever live in this timeless land?


    Only time will tell.


    But his destiny, his fate, is still hidden deep within the sea of mystery.


    There is so much untold of his story, and this is all just the beginning.


    So, are you ready?


    (Somewhere outside of Konoha)


    Two figures silently walked in the forest. One was short and the other was tall.


    The short one had spiky blonde hair, two whisker marks on each side of his face, a headband with the Konoha''s symbol in it, and bright blue eyes. He wore a black tracksuit with a fire symbol on the left b.r.e.a.s.t, a symbol that resembled a bolt in the back along the sides of his pants. He kept his tracksuit unzipped and inside of his tracksuit was a white t-shirt with a bolt tied to a string around his neck.


    "I told you to hide your headband, we can''t let it be seen by the people in this dimension." The older one said to the younger one.


    "Fiiiiine." The blonde haired kid took off his headband and put it inside his pocket.


    "There, you happy now?"


    Bonk!


    The older one lightly chopped the blonde haired kid''s head with his hand and said, "That''s now how you talk to your teacher!"


    "Ow!" The blonde haired kid rubbed his head due to the pain.


    The older one is a handsome man with his dark hair covering the left side of his face completely. He dons a black cloak over his body, and inside, was a long sleeve shirt with purple lining over it and long black pants and leather shoes. He also has a katana on the left side of his waist, the blade was covered by a sheath.


    "Hai, hai, Sasuke-sensei!" The blonde haired kid yelled.


    "Shut up, Boruto. Others might hear you, and from what I''ve seen, it seems like this dimension''s Konoha had been attacked by someone." Surprisingly, it was the older version of Sasuke.


    "Curse that Urashiki, if only he hadn''t done that, we could''ve gone back home!" Boruto muttered complaints under his breath.


    That''s right, in a last ditch effort, Urashiki managed to send them to another dimension at the expense of his life. Now, the two of them are left to figure out how to travel back to their home dimension, or Naruto will be left to fend off the enemies coming for him on his own.


    ''Just wait there Naruto, I promise I''ll be bringing your son alive!'' Sasuke said inside his head.

 Chapter 84 - 77: Earth

    Countless people showed in the middle of the village, while some stayed in their houses because of their injuries. In front of them was Danzo, all beaten up. It was clear that he had suffered torture before his final day. The civilians were confused as to why one of their Elders was about to be executed.


    There were large tents everywhere, this is where most of the people in the village stayed in since the progress of building back what was destroyed was taking too long. Also, they had to clean the destroyed buildings around the village. They can recycle the materials used to make those buildings but some stuff in there is just garbage, they can''t use those.


    Danzo was forcefully kneeled on top of a platform that Hikaru made with his Earth Element Magic. The platform was huge, 50 people could fit in there and still have room for more.


    The council, including Sasuke and Azumi, were there too, standing behind Danzo. Hikaru, on the other hand, is the executioner. He''s just right beside Danzo.


    The crowd was murmuring with each other, until Hikaru gestured for them to stop with his hand.


    He walked in the middle of the platform he made, just right in front of Danzo, who had lost all hope.


    "Ahem, as you all can see, Elder Danzo is being executed today. There is a reason for this, Elder Danzo had committed unspeakable and inhumane experiments on live humans along with the now deceased Orochimaru. He had also kidnapped children from orphanages to turn them into one of his Root Shinobis." Hikaru then looked down upon the people if they had any questions, seeing that they didn''t have any questions, he continued.


    "Root was an organization that operates almost the same as the Anbu Black Ops, but those who join the Root will have to discard any emotions or humanity left in them. Elder Danzo was the one who created this organization. The Third Hokage, Hiruzen Sarutobi, saw that this was a cruel thing to do to other people and decided to disband the Root. But Elder Danzo has been operating the disbanded organization behind everyone''s back."


    The crowd below him started to murmur with each other again, until Hikaru stopped them again with a raise of his hand.


    "Under the decree of the council, and for the good of the village, Elder Danzo will be executed through soul destruction!" Hikaru cruelly stated.


    Soul Destruction, that''s just a name he made up but it fits perfectly with his technique. He can destroy, or dissipate, mortal souls by will if he could get his hands on them. This is a very cruel punishment, since those who gets their souls destroyed, will no longer be able to reincarnate or repent for their sins in hell.


    Hiding in the crowd was the A.d.u.l.t version of Sasuke and Boruto. They dressed up as father and son, Boruto had to dye his hair black to look like Sasuke and also used makeup to hide his whisker marks. But he couldn''t hide his bright blue eyes. They had to do this, since if they just use Transformation Jutsu, they might get suspicion from those who could sense chakra.


    (Note: From now on, the older version of Sasuke is going to be named like this, Sasuke(A). And Teenager Sasuke will just be [Sasuke]).


    It was within Sasuke''s(A) expectation that things wouldn''t be similar to his home dimension, but he couldn''t think that there''s already so much difference here. His other self here was not going around, hunting Itachi. And right beside the council was someone who looked like Naruto but instead of a boy, it was a girl!


    And there''s an individual he doesn''t recognize, a boy with feminine features. Long black hair, almost pale like skin, black eyes, and quite tall for his age. Around 5''11. He wore platinum gold armor. It was weird, since he was certain that this kind of armor did not exist in the shinobi world. Only those samurai armors, like the one Madara wore in the 4th Shinobi War.


    Not only that, this boy seems to be revered around here. He heard the civilians say that this boy, Hikaru, can battle multiple Kage level shinobis and still win without breaking a sweat. And from what he can see with his sharingan, this boy has enough chakra to compete with any tailed beast.


    This boy is a very dangerous individual, from what he can see. He should be careful, or he might get in trouble with this boy.


    Suddenly, as if time had slowed down, he saw the boy look at him directly and smile at him.


    ''Not good!''


    Sasuke tried leaving the crowd but he found that he couldn''t move. Something was binding him! And it was the same for Boruto! They''ve been found out!


    If only he could use his Rinnegan but his chakra is still too low from his battle with Urashiki. At most, it will take a week to regenerate his entire chakra pool! If he uses his rinnegan now to travel to another dimension, they might just end up in some kind of warring era.


    He just has to calmly talk with that boy.


    Hikaru knew that there was someone here who could use a dojutsu similar to Sharingan, but he didn''t think that it could really be the Sharingan. He''ll have to talk to him later. And also, that boy has something strange inside him. It was like a bijuu but at the same time, it was not. And the right eye of that boy has some kind of dormant power, he''ll figure out later.


    First comes Danzo''s execution.


    "I will now proceed to the execution, please watch carefully. This is how Konoha will treat its traitors." Hikaru said as he walked near Danzo.


    "You can''t kill me because without me, Konoha will fall!" Danzo desperately said.


    The only reaction he got from Hikaru was a cruel smile, "You''re delusional."


    Then, he put his right hand on Danzo''s head before performing the soul extraction. Most of the time, he would hide his mana from plain sight but this time, everyone could clearly see it.


    The soul of Danzo.


    Half of it was darkened for some reason, it was like it''s corroding.


    Unknown to them, Hikaru had swiped a part of Danzo''s humanity, thus corroding his soul.


    With a cruel smile on his face, Hikaru shattered Danzo''s soul. No one would be able to fix what he just did, and even for him, fixing a soul is quite hard but not impossible.


    And with that, Danzo was dead. No longer will he be a threat to people. He''s dead, Hikaru has finally solved his anger, by killing Danzo. Even though half of his emotions are gone, he could still feel the pain of losing someone close to him. Danzo had betrayed Hiruzen countless times, and yet, that old man still forgave Danzo.


    But Hikaru is different, he is not as merciful as Hiruzen.


    (A Few Moments Later)


    After the execution, Hikaru left along with Azumi and Sasuke. But not before taking two unknown individuals with him.


    Sasuke(A) and Boruto couldn''t speak as Hikaru forced them to walk with some strange jutsu.


    Sasuke(A) was patient, knowing he has no power right now. Boruto though¡­ not so much.


    Hikaru and Azumi''s house was destroyed along with everyone else''s, so Hikaru decided to buy the largest tent that anyone could offer. But the biggest thing he could get was an average house size, because he would take up too much space in the village if he bought a big one. If only he was able to get the perfect control of Wood Element from the Wood Minor God, then he could''ve built a house by now.


    ''Stubborn bastard.'' Hikaru cursed inside his head after thinking about the Minor Gods.


    (Back on Earth)


    It is now 2021 on Earth. The serious pandemic called, Covid-19, has been going on for more than a year. Just after making a cure for it back in December, 2020, the Virus developed an immunity towards the cure in less than a month! It is now stronger than before. The deaths around the world because of that virus, could be estimated to be around 50,000,000 in more than a year. The cases of the virus are increasing but the current number they could give is around 200,000,000 cases.


    Scientists still couldn''t figure out how the virus mutated. The front liners around the world are dying, it was a sad year for humanity.


    Of course, there are also dumb people going out and not wearing face masks nor face shield around the whole f.u.c.k.i.n.g world. And not only are they not wearing masks, they are rallying for the stupidest reasons possible for mankind, "Not to discriminate against Pedophiles!" Like, what the f.u.c.k?


    Some people are now normalizing pedophilia, and most of them are racist to other races. People are dying all over the world and they think this is the biggest problem? In fact, it''s not even a problem!


    This was truly a sad sight for humanity. Scientists, Doctors, Government Officials kept telling the people not to go out without wearing a mask but they were stubborn. Even some people think that the Covid-19 is just a big "Government Conspiracy".


    Anyway, we''re not focusing on the world''s problem right now.


    Ena has been the most successful solo Idol to ever live right now. She makes 3 Million USD from just selling her albums. She has her own Youtube Channel, where she makes most of her music videos now. She has 35 Million subscribers in her channel alone, and almost all of them are japanese.


    Obviously, she is now one of the richest women in Japan.


    She rose to success smoothly with no troubles coming to her. She had made a solid footing in the industry, no one will be able to overcome her in terms of talent in the music industry. She has also become an Actress, starring in some popular Japanese Movies. She didn''t discriminate in the genres of the film. Horror, comedy, romance, drama, etc.


    Of course, with fame, comes the haters. They don''t criticize her, they just hate her for no reason whatsoever. They say things like, "Go and die in a ditch, bitch." and "You don''t deserve all that money, you''re just a greedy whore." These kinds of comments have been circulating all over the internet. It was obvious that they are jealous of her success.


    And honestly, it''s been getting to her. But they were not worth it, so she just ignored them.


    (Scene Change)


    For the Hiroaki Family, it was a sad day. July 27, 2021, 10:37 am. The day her father died. Haruto had been infected with the CoronaVirus. Ena tried all means to cure her father by employing doctors from all around the globe, yet, he still died. Fortunately, they didn''t get infected, even though he was near them.


    Ena, for the first time, took a break from her ongoing career in the media industry, not wanting to do anything right now.


    She holed herself inside her room, trying to overcome the grief of losing a father.


    And of course, the very next day, the media decided to publicize the death of her father, which turned into a big sensational news. Millions of people sent her gifts to comfort her through the mail. But some people decided to hate on her, even though she just lost someone very important in her life.


    (To be continued¡­)

 Chapter 85 - 78

    Bliss Hotel, a very famous 5-star hotel in Japan. The glowing golden lights of the hotel illuminated everything on its surroundings. Bliss Hotel is a very tall building, having 22 floors. The very top floor is the penthouse, where the richest of the rich stay in.


    And here stays the one who ran over Hikaru that day, 6 years ago. Her name is Emica Kogare, daughter of the chairman of the Kogare Group. She is 24 years old this year and she has become one of the directors of her father''s company.


    She is a cold and aloof woman. Her cold expression alone is enough to warn any man to stay far away from her. She is said to be a prodigy, coming on top in one of the most prestigious schools in the country. Her intelligence was also one of the reasons she was able to become one of the directors in the company at such a young age.


    Even though she has everything, the smarts, the heart of every men, and a very wealthy family, her father still cannot understand why she is supporting Ena Hiroaki from behind the scenes.


    Yes, in these 6 years, she has been the one helping Ena rise to the top of the Japanese Idols. The reason why Ena was able to smoothly sail to the top was also because of her, she was the one who kicked out the ones plotting against the young Idol. She also erased any traces of and controversies Ena may have, so that she can continue being an Idol.


    The reason why Emica is doing this is because of her guilt, the guilt of running over Hikaru that day.


    6 years ago, she was almost kidnapped by the enemies of her father. Accidentally, she ran over Hikaru, who was mindlessly passing through the road at the time. She wanted to help the young man but she was being chased, so she had no choice but to continue driving away.


    She managed to escape without any major injuries but the trauma she inflicted on that innocent family still haunts her, so she decided to help the little sister of the boy she ran over. Surprisingly, the girl, Ena, was talented. That''s also one of the reasons she managed to rise to the top, with her talents and Emica''s help behind her back, she was an unstoppable juggernaut in the media industry.


    Right now, Emica is taking a vacation from her job, even though it''s just in the middle of the year. But even then, she is still thinking of another problem. Ena had just lost her father, and some people on the internet won''t stop cyber bullying the poor girl.


    She''ll find a way to shut the mouths of those people, she''s just gonna take her time right now. The stress is getting to her right now, and it''s said to be bad for the beauty of a woman.


    She''s just laying on her expensive pool float bed while wearing a very revealing bathing suit in the middle of the night.


    If anyone can see her right now, they would pass out just from her beauty alone. Her white reddish skin, long blonde hair, oceanic blue eyes, her perfect oval shaped face, red juicy lips, her large sweaty b.r.e.a.s.t was bouncing every time she moved, and her curves were so s.e.xy that a man would have a nosebleed on sight.


    She was an absolute beauty, surpassing that of Ena. Even though Ena is a very beautiful and cute girl, she still cannot compare to a true a.d.u.l.t woman.


    But if Hikaru was here, he would just ignore her and think of Azumi. For him, Azumi is the most beautiful girl in the entire multiverse. Even if the true goddess of beauty shows up in front of him, he would also just ignore her. Every woman in the entire multiverse doesn''t mean shit in front of Hikaru, they might as well be dogshit in front of Azumi. Though he wouldn''t say nor think that, he''ll probably just ignore any of their advances.


    Remember, Hikaru''s face and body had changed, They were no longer the average japanese face, he is also a very good-looking boy. If not for his playful or sometimes cold attitude, a lot of women would''ve probably thrown themselves at him. But every girl that dares to take any advances on him gets a very cold look from him.


    He is not interested in any other girls or women, other than Azumi.


    (Note: I don''t know man, seems kinda simp to me).


    Anyway, let''s stop from the earth for now. Let''s see what''s going on with Hikaru right now.


    (Scene Change)


    Inside their tent were Sasuke(A), Teenager Sasuke, the disguised Boruto, Hikaru, and Azumi. They were all sitting at one table. There were plates on the table, in front of each one of them. In the middle of the table were pots of rice and curry.


    Boruto and Sasuke(A) had already been freed by Hikaru, so that they could eat. You know what they say, the more they are fed, the more they will sing.


    "C''mon, eat up. We''ll be talking this over while we eat." Hikaru said as he offered them to eat.


    Sasuke(A) shook his head and said, "It''s fine, I''m full. But my son, Boruto, is quite hungry. So if you don''t mind¡­.


    Hikaru smiled and said, "It''s fine, I already told you."


    Boruto''s smile brightened before he proceeded to dig in. While he was eating, Hikaru decided to talk with Sasuke(A).


    "So, I wanna ask, why do you have a sharingan? Are you an Uchiha? And why do you have an eye-patch on your left eye?" Hikaru asked rapidly.


    Teenager Sasuke got serious on this topic, because if there was really another Uchiha, it would greatly help rebuilding the clan.


    "You''re right, I am an Uchiha. That can explain why I have the Sharingan, right?" Sasuke(A) said. He doesn''t need to hide anything in this world, because this is not even his home dimension. That means, he won''t be messing any kind of timeline.


    "Yes, of course. Now, about that eye-patch of yours. Behind that, I can sense a very familiar presence, similar to the rinnegan." Hikaru said with a knowing tone.


    Sasuke(A) then smiled as he said, "I can''t really hide anything from you." Then, he took off the eye-patch on his left eye and it revealed his rinnegan. Unlike the rinnegan of Nagato, this one has six tomoes in it and two inner circles.


    "The rinnegan¡­! How can that be!?" Sasuke said, shocked.


    (Note: Alright, this is getting quite confusing. And I don''t know what to do).


    Hikaru widened his eyes slightly, before having a knowing look in his eyes.


    "I see, you''re not from this dimension, are you?" Hikaru said, slightly surprised at the fact that these two are from another dimension.


    Sasuke(A) nodded and said, "That''s right, Hiroaki-san. I won''t lie to you anymore, this boy right beside me is not my son but my godson. He is the son of a very close friend of mine, and I want to protect and return him at all cost. Since you are this strong, do you have a solution to let me and my godson go back to our dimension?" Sasuke(A) was quite hopeful that Hikaru might have a solution to their problem.


    "Is that all? I can send you back with no problem, as long as no problems occur." Hikaru confidently said.


    "Really!? That''s great!" Sasuke(A) joyfully exclaimed. Boruto and the others were quiet for a moment, because the only expression was an aloof one. It was weird that he can be this joyful.


    *Cough* "Anyway, here you go." With a single snap of his fingers, Sasuke(A) suddenly gained all of his chakra back!


    Hikaru gave Sasuke(A) 2 percent of his chakra, since the only thing Sasuke(A) needed was his chakra. Hikaru didn''t have to go to one of the gods in this world, just so he can transfer these two back to their home dimension.


    Sasuke(A) was surprised that someone can instantly regenerate someone''s entire chakra pool. It would''ve been more difficult, because he has a chakra pool 10 times larger than normal Kage level opponents.


    ''He is strong, stronger than any other Otsutsuki members. If I can go back with him, our problems would be gone in an instant. But he probably won''t come to my home dimension with me.'' Sasuke contemplated whether to bring him to his home dimension or not.


    Meanwhile, this dimension''s Sasuke is currently in a state of shock. He couldn''t believe that dimension travelling was even possible, and the one who came was someone from the Uchiha Clan! This has to be a coincidence.


    It seems like this will be a very long day.


    After some time, Sasuke(A) decided to stay in this world for one more day. It would be a benefit for Konoha if he could travel back and forth into this world. So, he decided to get to know the other people in this dimension''s Konoha.


    He found out that it was also the same for this world. The Akatsuki attacked the village in search of Azumi, this world''s version of Naruto. And Azumi and this world''s version of him fought the entire Akatsuki group by themselves. They were on a standstill until Hikaru came and the battle became completely one-sided.


    The people here said that Hikaru descended from the heavens with a giant bow and killed 5 of the Akatsuki members with each shot of his giant bow, before he then decided to come down and finish all of them.


    It was a one-sided slaughter.


    Sasuke(A) can see that a lot of people here have a lot of respect for Hikaru. If worse really comes to worse, he would have to transfer Himself, Naruto, their family, and the rest of his friends into this world, if the Otsutsuki really manages to conquer the land of shinobi. Even though not a lot of them are that strong, this Hikaru is currently even stronger than him.


    Right now, he is on his peak. He had regained all of his chakra but he still cannot see himself come close to Hikaru.


    That boy, even if the heavens truly fell, he would still be able to hold it with one hand while calmly killing his enemies. That''s the feeling he gets from Hikaru.


    (One Day Later)


    As Sasuke(A) was getting ready to leave along with Boruto, Hikaru suddenly came to their tent.


    (Note: Hikaru separated them from his tent and gave them another tent).


    And then, Hikaru said while standing coolly on the entrance of their tent, "Hey Boruto, do you want me to help you train your powers? Though, it will take a few days. Might that be alright, Godfather-kun?" He meant Sasuke(A), he said that because Sasuke(A) still haven''t told him his real name.


    "Hell yeah, isn''t that right, Sasuke-sensei!?" Boruto exclaimed happily while jumping all over the place.


    "Sasuke?" Hikaru was confused.


    "You idiot of a disciple." Sasuke(A) muttered, irritated.

 Chapter 86 - 79: Hikarus Madness (1)

    Who knew that this guy was actually the older Sasuke from another dimension?


    Hikaru was kinda surprised but he just said, "Meh," and proceeded to take Boruto away. He searched for Toneri with Boruto and found him peeping on Hinata, so Hikaru decided to teach him a lesson. After a few hours of beating him to pulp, he talked to him about training Boruto''s dojutsu.


    When Toneri inspected Boruto''s right eye and he was surprised to find that he had inherited the Otsutsuki''s genes far stronger than him, Toneri.


    Hikaru just pushed Boruto onto Toneri and said that he should train him. Toneri couldn''t refuse Hikaru''s demand, so he just kept his mouth shut and decided to train the damn brat.


    But there was something Toneri was confused about, there was another entity inside Boruto. An entity stronger than him. The entity inside Boruto was stronger than Otsutsuki Kaguya, from what he can see.


    Hikaru just said to ignore it for now, and if the entity inside Boruto decides to act up, kill it. And if Toneri couldn''t kill it, call him to kill it. It was that simple.


    Boruto didn''t quite understand what they were talking about, but he could see the gist of it. He would become stronger than he is, right now. He was excited to train and started to jump up and down.


    Toneri decided to first teach him Taijutsu, it was the most essential thing for a fighter to learn taijutsu properly.


    Hikaru then entrusted Boruto to Toneri and left to go somewhere, but not before telling Sasuke who Sasuke(A) really was.


    Sasuke, after knowing who Sasuke(A) is from Hikaru, decided to pay him a visit. It was awkward at first but as the time passed, the more they got along to each other.


    After learning what happened to his a.d.u.l.t self in his dimension, he suddenly realized how much Hikaru had changed him. If Hikaru wasn''t there 3 years ago, he would''ve turned out exactly as his other self.


    They talked for a while, and it seems like it was not ending.


    Anyway, Hikaru decided to go outside of the solar system for a day. You read that right, he went out of the solar system. He''s going to see how strong he is right now, by seeing if he could destroy a planet 10 times the size of the elemental nation.


    He searched for a few minutes in the almost blank space of the universe, trying to find a planet without any kind of lifeforms. He finally found one, a desolated planet.


    The desolated planet was completely frozen, there was no way a life can be created here. This was the perfect place for practicing, though he might''ve gone so far away from his home planet.


    By the way, he found many kinds of planets while searching for a desolated one. There were even planets capable of housing life, even without the reach of the sun. He was sure he saw intelligent lifeforms there, he might check it later.


    Anyway, he is now standing on the surface of the frozen, desolated planet. There wasn''t even a proper land here, the ground was harder than normal and it was so cold that he was sure it was below sub-zero. But it''s not affecting him, since he can now wield flame stronger than the flames of a star. He is coating himself in flame, so that the coldness of this planet wouldn''t be able to freeze his body.


    "Now, I wonder what will happen to this planet if I use 100 percent of my physical strength. Let''s see¡­" Hikaru said, curious.


    He clenched his fist hard before he punched the surface of the planet.


    "Hah!"


    And as he expected, the entire planet was destroyed in a single punch. He didn''t even use his mana, and yet this happened.


    After he destroyed the planet, countless chunks of that planet now floats in space.


    Now he has a new reason why he shouldn''t use 100% of his strength, he could destroy a planet!


    Even though he destroyed an entire planet, he was satisfied because he saw a very beautiful light show after he did that. It was the most beautiful scene he ever saw, he would try to bring here sometimes, just to watch him destroy planets.


    Now, to his next experiment. He would try to search a bigger planet than this one. He would use his mana this time to see how strong it is, but he felt that one planet wouldn''t be enough to see how strong his magic power is. Anyway, after this, he will search for planets with intelligent lifeforms in it. He would like to act god in front of them, it''s just more satisfying. He couldn''t do that in the elemental nation because he still has things to do there but a foreign planet with no connection to him whatsoever? Buy him a ticket, ''cause he''s definitely going to go completely crazy there!


    As he searched for a suitable planet to destroy, he suddenly saw a giant solid ice in the middle of the infinite space. Inside it, he could feel a faint heart beating. There was something huge there, because the solid ice is as huge as a small planet.


    "Hmm, I wonder what''s inside there. It might be a creature I haven''t seen yet? Heh, what am I saying? There''s a lot of creatures I haven''t seen, maybe this creature is sentient? Let''s see¡­"


    Normally, there wouldn''t be any sound in space but Hikaru is covered in his own mana sphere. So he could hear himself speak inside, just like an astronaut inside a spaceship.


    Hikaru touched the giant solid ice with his pyromancy, before it melted in a fast pace. Slowly, the creature inside was revealed.


    When Hikaru finally saw what the creature inside was, he was disgusted. This thing looks exactly as that alien in that movie predator, except it was larger than a small planet.


    "I''ve seen enough grotesque creatures in the system, at least leave my reality alone!" Hikaru said, as he burned the creature right in front of him to ashes in less than a second with his pyromancy.


    "Who made these kinds of creatures!? Whoever that is, they should eat cyanide and die. Fortunately, I don''t need to sleep, or else, I''ll be having nightmares for weeks. Bleh, I can''t get that thing''s image out of my head. I even saw it''s gigantic ding dong, swaying around. Disgusting piece of shit!." Hikaru whined inside his mana sphere.


    Anyway, he continued on his way, trying to find a planet to destroy.


    Even though he is this strong, the olden god, Chaortos, is a hundred times stronger than him. If that disembodied voice said, was true.


    A few moments later, he found another desolated planet, the same size as the previous one. It was also devoid of any life and also, frozen to the core.


    As Hikaru was about to destroy the planet with his magic, he suddenly remembered something.


    "Shit! A planet''s core is important in making an even stronger weapon called, Planet Destroyers. I should''ve harvested the core of the previous planet I destroyed! The gravitational pull in both planets are ten times stronger than the elemental nation, meaning that the planet''s core should be around billions of years old! I need to harvest this planet''s core with damaging it, but how? Oh wait, I know a method! That method might be quite difficult to perform, since it involves compression, and I don''t even know if it''s possible but it should be worth the shot."


    After thinking for a moment, he realized that this should be a win-win situation for him, If he could successfully compress the entire planet into a single matter, he should be able to craft an even stronger weapon with that compressed material!


    "If my theory is right, this should work quite well."


    Without a moment of hesitation, he covered the entire planet with his mana. And with a yell, he started compressing the entire planet with his mana. The whole desolated planet slowly started to crack, and Hikaru suddenly saw something he never thought was possible here. The entire planet is made of diamond! If he could compress it into a single matter, he should be able to make the best material ever in the entire universe!


    "Haaaaah!!!"


    He tightened his grip even further, and the planet started to compress even further!


    "Stronger! Stronger! Stronger!!!" Hikaru shouted as he compressed the entire planet!


    After a few hours, he was only half-way through. But he still has a lot of mana, so he should be finished in the next few hours.


    Unless someone disturbs his focus, he will be able to compress this planet into a single state of matter, a singularity!


    4 Hours Later¡­


    He is now done compressing it to a singularity.


    No matter how many times he looks at it, it is still the most beautiful object he''s ever seen. It couldn''t even compare to the most expensive jewelries he''s seen in his life.


    He couldn''t describe how beautiful it was. (Note: Neither can I).


    From now on, he would call this kind of object, The Singularity! He kept it inside his storage box though, it was too heavy to hold. It has the mass of an entire planet, what did you expect? A fricking ball?


    Hikaru exhausted 40 percent of his entire mana pool, just by doing that. But it was resolved easily by drinking a couple of Hidden Blessing.


    Suddenly, he found himself quite bored.


    "Hmm, what do I do now? Oh yeah! I''m going to a planet with intelligent creatures, then create havoc, f.u.c.k with some people, and become a god who''s worshipped there. I''ll be the superman there, if you ask me!" Hikaru talked to himself. This happens quite often when he''s alone, it''s just never been shown.


    "Alright, next objective; find a planet with intelligent lifeforms inside the Solar System! It''s too bothersome outside of a Solar System, since it''s too f.u.c.k.i.n.g cold out here." Hikaru said, feeling the cold already.


    And so, in a single burst of speed, he vanished at the speed of light, creating a supersonic that destroyed some of the smaller planets around his location.


    And the space remained deathly still, no sound was heard, not a single drop of pin was heard. Only the stars could be seen from far-away, other than that, there was no light.

 Chapter 87 - 80: Hikarus Thunder Dragon

    As Hikaru searched the entire solar system earlier, he found an interesting planet. It was the same size as his home planet, the Shinobi World, but the most interesting part was that it has a barrier covering the entire planet.


    The barrier was extremely tough but he broke it quite easily, ''cause, you know, he''s almost a god. He made a hole in the barrier and he went through that before fixing the barrier, so that no gods will know he''s here. Well, at least for now.


    As he tried sensing the gods in this world, to see how many there are, he only found one Major God and no other gods, not even a single Minor God was here.


    Now, this was strange. Because a planet with this many populations is supposed to have many gods, unless that planet is already desolated with no living beings in it. Moreover, it''s a goddess.


    "Interesting, let''s see what''s in this world. I guess I won''t be returning for a week, hehehe." Hikaru said as he floated down from the sky.


    As he descended from the sky, he saw a forest and decided to go there, so that no one would be able to see him.


    When he landed in the middle of the forest, he saw a large gate with nothing behind it. There was literally nothing around it, just a huge ass gate in the middle of the forest. It looked quite ancient, so he guessed that this must be a spatial gate.


    A spatial gate is a gate that delivers you to a specific location, if actually try to go inside it.


    Hikaru was about to check what was inside the door, when he saw the gate open suddenly and a boy, no older than 15, walks out. He wore a dark cloak as his top with nothing under it, and a black pants with many pockets in it. The boy had no other weapons but a great sword attached behind his back with a sheath as giant as the sword. The boy was not that tall, only around 5''9 and he''s quite slim but he looked quite cool, so Hikaru took a liking to him, even though he only had an average face, and short black hair.


    But there was something strange with this boy, well, first of all, he''s covered in blood all over his body. And second, he has a giant ass sword behind his back, what the hell!? Hikaru can understand if it was him holding that sword but for a boy with that stature? The damn sword is almost twice the boy''s height!


    "Oh¡­" The boy was quite surprised to see someone after a long time inside the dungeon.


    Hikaru just kept his cool and said, "Y-Yo! I''m Hikaru Hiroaki, what''s your name?" This is what he thought the most appropriate way to start a conversation. You have to understand, Hikaru isn''t very good with talking.


    Then, almost instantly after the boy heard his name, he took out his sword behind his back and pointed it at Hikaru, almost touching his face, as he said, "Why do you have a japanese name? Are you one of the summoned heroes? If you are, then the goddess must''ve something to do with this, right?"


    Hikaru was surprised with this kind of hostile attitude towards someone he just met. Seeing that they wouldn''t be able to talk if they tried fighting here, Hikaru just flicked the two meters tall great sword and it flew out of the hand of the teenager. The great sword was launched into the barrier of this world after Hikaru flicked it with less than 1% of his physical strength.


    "Wha¡­?" The boy was shocked.


    "Ahem, first off, I''m not one of those summoned heroes you''re talking about. Second, I have a japanese name because I''m japanese. And third, I don''t know jackshit about that goddess. I don''t even know why she''s the only god in this world!" Hikaru explained.


    The boy narrowed his eyes at Hikaru as he said inside his thoughts, ''Can I trust this guy? He''s strong, very strong, that''s for sure. With a single flick of a finger, he sent my 2 tons greatsword flying! Well, I guess I can trust him for now. If he''s this strong, he could''ve killed me earlier for my insolence against him. I guess he''s not one of those extremely arrogant strong people that I know off.''


    The boy bowed slightly at Hikaru, as a sign of respect, and said, "My name is Hiroshi Fuji. I''m sorry for my disrespect earlier, I was simply being cautious."


    Hikaru waved his hands at him and said, "Nah, don''t worry about it. But can you tell me what kind of world this is? You see, I just arrived here and I don''t know anything."


    Hiroshi shook his head and said, "I''m sorry, I don''t know either. Me, my classmates, and some random people were summoned here by the goddess of this world as ''Heroes''. I was disposed of in the lowest part of the most dangerous dungeon in the world. I barely managed to survive and come to the surface."


    Hikaru looked confused and asked, "Why were you disposed of? You''re pretty strong, from what I can see." What do you mean ''Pretty strong''? He''s stronger than all 5 Kages combined!


    At that question, Hiroshi''s face turned ugly as he explained, "I was disposed of because my Rank as a ''Hero'' was simply E-Rank! The rest of the people summoned with me had the Rank of B to S. The goddess treated me as garbage and decided to kill me off by sending me to the lowest part of this dungeon."


    ''I don''t know why I''m opening up to this person. He''s the same age as me, yet, he has this respected aura around him. Maybe it''s right to trust this person, after all.'' Hiroshi said in his thoughts, relieved.


    Hikaru thought deeply about this kid''s situation before he asked him one simple question, "Hey, want to come with me? I can help you in your journey to defeat the god of this world. What d''ya say?"


    Hiroshi was surprised at the sudden question but he simply said, "I''m sorry, but I don''t want anyone to get hurt because of me. If I have to, I''ll fight the goddess alone."


    Hiroshi said it with one of the strongest determination Hikaru ever saw in a person. He can say that his determination is second only to Azumi.


    Hiroshi then looked down sadly and said, "And I really want to return to my home, Earth. I want to prove to anyone who has ever wronged me that I''m stronger than them, that I''ve changed. I''m not the same timid boy from before, I want to prove my worth in front of the world, my home. You can agree with me, right? Hikaru-san?"


    It''s true that Hikaru misses his family, when at first he didn''t care. That hatred towards his family? That was simply a childish thing for him to do. A family is someone who will always love you, even if the world turns their back on you. That''s why Hikaru wanted to meet them again, and say one of the words he''s been meaning to say to them.


    "I''m sorry, for everything"


    That''s all he wants to say in front of his family, right now.


    "Yeah, you''re right." Hikaru said, quite sadly.


    Hiroshi then turned his back from Hikaru as he went towards the deep forest, alone. But just as he was to run full speed into the forest, he suddenly felt an arm resting behind his neck.


    "Even though I agree with you, I still want to insist on traveling with you. Let''s go! Hahahaha!" Hikaru yelled while laughing loudly.


    Hiroshi was surprised but he still asked, "But there''s a possibility that you can get killed, you know?"


    Hikaru stared at him for a few moments before he laughed loudly again, "Hahahahaha! Me? Die? I wish! Don''t worry, I''ve already danced with death countless times. You don''t have to worry about me dying. Just look ahead and never look back, that''s a motto I came up with! Hahahaha!"


    Hiroshi, after months of battling death in that dungeon, finally found himself a companion he can trust in. A companion, that is arguably the strongest person in the world right now.


    "Well, it''s your funeral. Hahahaha!" Hiroshi said as he laughed alongside his new-found friend.


    With all the noise they''re making, they didn''t notice that this forest was filled with monsters. Countless monsters. This is the forest dubbed as "The Forest Of Monsters". This is a home to all dangerous monsters. Ogre Kings, Orc Lords, Goblin Disasters, Elemental Wyverns, and many, many more.


    (A few moments later)


    And just as the two of them were traveling in the forest, they saw a village full of evolved goblins. Hobgoblins to Goblin Disasters. But the most dangerous one was the Goblin King, who stands above all goblins. He had a throne in the far back of the village, signifying that he''s the leader of this goblin village.


    (Goblin Slayer: Did you just say¡­ goblins?)


    Hikaru didn''t know what these types of goblins are but Hiroshi is familiar with all of them. He''s even fought with the Goblin Emperor back when he was inside the dungeon. It was a tough fight but he was able to beat them in the end. This should be a piece of cake for him!


    As he was about to go and kill all of the goblins for more exp, Hikaru suddenly stopped him.


    "Hiroshi, focus on saving the people down below this monster village. I''ll kill all of them. There''s a great amount of people under this village, around a few hundreds or so. I''m afraid that they''re all women, save them all." Hikaru said to Hiroshi.


    Hiroshi nodded and trusted Hikaru''s decision before he vanished in a burst of speed.


    Now, let''s how they''ll fare well against his thunder dragon.


    Even though he''s not in the Elemental Nation anymore, meaning that his control over the elements has decreased, he can still use all the elements he''s learned to control because he''s experienced it. The contracts he signed with the elemental gods in the elemental nation can only be used if he;s in the elemental nation, not in some other world.


    The contract only boosts his elemental attribute and his control over them. But even if he doesn''t have them, he can still control his elemental magic quite easily.


    Now, for the real show!


    Hikaru extended his left hand towards the sky and yelled, "Come down, Elemental Magic, Thunder Dragon!" His hand suddenly started crackling with blue thunder as the clouds in the sky made way for a giant eastern dragon to descend!


    That''s right, Hikaru is controlling the elemental nature of this world with just his magic power!


    *ROOOOOOAR!!!!*


    The Thunder Dragon roared, shaking everything in sight. The dragon he summoned was as huge as a mountain, making it even more frightening for every creature in sight.


    Meanwhile, Hiroshi was just about to unlock the cell where the women and children were kept when the ground shook. He didn''t know whether this was Hikaru''s doing or not, but the best he can do is use some of his magic power to protect the people down here. He''ll leave the fighting to Hikaru. He''s stronger than him, after all.


    Hikaru stood atop the thunder dragon, which was made entirely of thunder energy. It is a part of nature, a disaster to others but a god''s gift to the one controlling it, which is Hikaru.


    Hikaru smiled sadistically at the Goblins below him, who are running around and screaming, as he said.


    "Thunder Dragon, go."

 Chapter 88 - 81: A Refreshing New Sight

    "Thunder Dragon, go."


    Woosh! Boom!


    As soon as he said that, the giant eastern dragon took a fast dive towards the goblin village, and as result, killed countless hobgoblins and goblin disasters. There were a few that managed to survive the assault but they all had grave injuries.


    The Goblin King was unscathed, even though that dive was enough to take out most of the village. The Goblin King had armors on, they looked like some kind of metal. They were platinum white, and it was shining brightly under the bright sun. He also has dark skin, a long wrinkled nose, sharp green eyes that held intelligents within, and a shortsword right beside his throne. It''s also quite tall, three times the size of an average human.


    The Goblin King was enraged.


    It jumped up from its throne and landed on the ground with its sword out before it roared loudly at Hikaru''s thunder dragon with its sword pointing at it.


    "Ho, a worthless goblin not afraid of my elemental dragon? Let''s see, I still haven''t used 1/10 of this dragon''s powers. Hmm¡­ I think I''ll cancel my magic now. I just wanted to show off anyway." Hikaru said with a goofy smile.


    With a snap of his fingers, the giant eastern dragon he was standing on disappeared. He was left alone in the sky, levitating using his magic. He looked down on the Goblin King and said in a demanding tone, "Goblin King, " He got its attention, "Become my servant and I''ll let you live. Or else, I''ll kill you."


    The Goblin King stares at him for a moment before laughing hard.


    "Kakakakaka! Abudakk, guhabuyo kaya kaya koko!? Bukakaka, dong dong!" The Goblin King said some gibberish words that Hikaru couldn''t understand.


    (Translation: Hahahahaha! Weak human, you think you can make this king submit to you!? Don''t make me laugh!)


    It seems like this Goblin King can understand his language, or it couldn''t have managed to respond to it. Hikaru then extended his left arm towards the sky again and summoned a giant fireball the same size of a large mountain. Everything around him was burning, not even the ground was spared, even though he''s a hundred feet into the sky.


    "You really have the guts to laugh at me? But do you think this fireball won''t kill you?" Hikaru said, quite pissed. He landed in front of the Goblin King, with the fireball still up in the sky. It was as if the giant ball of fire was staring down at the Goblin King, making it tremble in fear.


    You see, the Goblin King only thought that Hikaru was a summoner. Summoners have no real physical strength and can only rely on their summons to battle for them, and seeing that Hikaru canceled his magic, it thought that Hikaru had run out of magic because of how big and strong that dragon is. What he doesn''t know is that Hikaru has a bottomless amount of mana inside him. That thunder dragon earlier? It didn''t even make a dent in his mana pool after he made that.


    And there''s one thing the Goblin King didn???t know, that dragon wasn''t a summon. It was entirely made of this world''s nature and Hikaru''s magic.


    Hikaru stood on the ground of the village he ruined. No one was by the side of the Goblin King. Only it alone dared to stand in front of Hikaru with might and determination in its eyes.


    It now knows that Hikaru wasn''t someone it could underestimate. That great fireball in the sky is the proof of that. The Goblin King was analyzing Hikaru, trying to see a weakness. From what it had seen, the "human" in front of it is a magician. There''s only one thing it could do when fighting a magician and that is going close-combat. Magicians need time to cast their magics, so that''s the only way in its situation right now.


    The Goblin King then activated many buff magics that warriors like it can do.


    Hikaru then saw how the Goblin King''s strength rose in a short moment after activating some third-rate magics. The Goblin King is almost as strong as Hiroshi now, but Hikaru could see that its mana was almost drained after activating a lot of buff spells.


    "Graaaaaahh!!"


    The Goblin King then charged at Hikaru at an amazing speed, even breaking the speed of sound. As soon as the Goblin King reached him, it soon found its head rolling on the ground. For a few seconds, the Goblin King saw Hikaru''s cold eyes staring directly at it before it died.


    The body of the Goblin King fell on the ground with a "thump". The head rolled down somewhere before stopping, and if you looked at it closely, you can see deep fear scarred into its face.


    Hikaru only snorted at the corpse of the Goblin King before his face returned to its normal expression.


    "A shame, he could''ve been a good servant. Anyway, how''s Hiroshi and the other people doing?" Hikaru then searched the entire area with his mana and found Hiroshi along with hundreds of people hiding underground, where the dungeon cells were.


    Seeing that they were safe, Hikaru called them out. He canceled the giant fireball, so that it wouldn''t hurt anybody. That thing is too f.u.c.k.i.n.g hot, after all.


    The dungeon cells were all under the goblin village''s chief''s house, which was the Goblin King he killed earlier. Hiroshi was the first to come out while holding a bunch of children on his arms. They were all dirty and only wore ragged clothes. Some of them had pointy ears, Hikaru immediately thought that they were elves.


    Then, one by one, the prisoners of the goblins slowly came out of the chief''s house. There were elves, demi-humans, and humans.


    Hikaru saw some men there too, it seems like his analysis earlier was wrong. They were probably used by the female goblins of this village, and that must''ve been horrible. All the hobgoblins he saw here were all ugly as f.u.c.k, there weren''t anyone decent looking. Even the goblin king was ugly.


    He then looked around for surviving goblins and saw quite a few. They were all begging him not to kill them, at least the look in their eyes did. But with one swipe of his hand, he beheaded them all. He will not spare any of these creatures, unless they were actually good creatures. He was still pissed that someone as weak as that Goblin King dared to laugh at his offer.


    After killing all of them, he kept their corpses inside his storage box. Maybe he could sell them later in a village, if he could do that, he''ll make a quick buck.


    After a while, all the people that those goblins enslaved were all in front of Hikaru. He then counted them all and there were 245 of them all combined. Hikaru had a headache, because how could he keep all of them alive and return them safely in their homes?


    He suddenly thought of something and decided to talk to Hiroshi.


    "Hey, do you have an idea how to keep them all safe until we deliver them safely into a town or something?" Hikaru asked Hiroshi.


    "Hmm, honestly, I don''t really know. We''re not omnipotent, at least I''m not." Hiroshi replied, deeply thinking about it.


    "If I''m not wrong, this is a fantasy world, right? Where there''s adventurers and stuff like that?" Hikaru said, he was onto something.


    "Yeah, so?"


    "Then, most of these people must be adventurers who''ve been caught by these goblins. All we have to do is ask them to protect the weaker ones, while we kill the monsters who get in our way. Although it sounds simple, it''s really hard in this situation. They are already quite broken from what the goblins did to them. Hmm, maybe there''s another way." Hikaru suddenly thought of a simple yet effective plan.


    He''ll create a mana sphere around them, large enough to fit all of them in, and just levitate them all from the ground as they slaughter monsters along the way.


    It was so simple, how could he have missed that?


    With a snap of his fingers, a huge mana sphere was built around them. And then, the mana sphere lifted them up while they were inside it. Some of them were quite surprised at the size of his [borg]. Some of them were magicians or archmages.


    The difference with the magicians and archmages in this world is that, Magicians are those who are only devoted to increasing their strength. Archmages are some kind of researchers, and would only use strategies to fight their opponents, since they have a lower amount of magic power than Magicians.


    (Time Skip)


    The power level in this world is divided into Tiers. From Tier 1 to Tier 13. In this world, there were only 10 who''ve reached the Tier 13, The Previous Heroes. But for some reason, all of them suddenly disappeared one day. That Goblin King he fought in the forest was Tier 10.


    It''s been a few hours since they destroyed that goblin village, and Hikaru and Hiroshi kept destroying more monster villages. Well, mainly Hikaru. Hiroshi wanted to stop, since the survivors they''ve been saving have increased. From 245 to 800. The amount of people they had in Hikaru''s [Borg] was 800.


    Hiroshi couldn''t do anything, and could watch helplessly as Hikaru destroyed another monster village to another. They did this until they got out of the forest.


    The amount of monsters Hikaru had stacked inside his bottomless box is countless. He could say that there''s around 10,000 in there. From Goblins to Ogre Kings to Wyverns. He''ll be rich.


    They were able to talk to some of the people they''ve rescued, since some of them were just captured and have never been touched by the monsters.


    After getting out of the forest, they discussed what all of them would do now. Hiroshi and Hikaru will be fine, but what about them?


    From what they''ve talked about while getting out of the forest is that Demi-Humans and Humans have bad blood between each other. In fact, there''s been wars between the Kingdom of Humans and the Kingdom of Beastmen.


    At that talk, Hikaru smiled menacingly. He''s quite blood-thirsty right now from all the killings his done earlier.


    After discussing for a while, they decided to go to the nearest town here. The town''s name is called "Unity". It''s a place where beastmen, elves, and humans live together in harmony. The Kingdom of Humans, Deagaia, had tried to close this town in the past permanently. But they didn''t expect that two powerful Tier 10 powerhouses would appear there. The two powerful Tier 10s were an Archmage and a Swordsman. The two of them managed to take care of the army sent by the Deagaia.


    (Note: The name of the goddess is Deagaia, the Kingdom of Humans is named after her).


    The soldiers sent by the kingdom were only around Tier 2 to Tier 5, which was weak compared to those two.


    Hiroshi could be around Tier 8 to Tier 9, and if Hikaru''s guess is right, Hiroshi could have another technique up in his sleeves.


    It took them a while to reach the town, Unity, because of the people they had. The Town of Unity is in the middle of the plains, so they were able to see it clearly from afar. The only kind of monsters around the town was Tier 1 Slimes.


    Hikaru has been observing Hiroshi for a while and noticed that he was still hiding something. A secret may be, but he wouldn''t like to be rude to just ask like that. A man''s secret is his secret, after all.


    The town of Unity was beautiful from the inside and the outside. The people inside the town were all living peacefully in harmony, and the Town was quite large, so it could probably house a few thousand more people before it rams out of space.


    Fortunately, most of the people they rescued from the Forest were all born and raised in this town, so they didn''t have a problem taking them in. In fact, as soon as the town guards saw the women, children, and other men with Hikaru, they immediately decided to check on their conditions.


    Hikaru was surprised, since this is the first him he''s ever seen something like this. Back in the Elemental Nation, villages would immediately point their Kunais at you if you weren''t one of them. But in this town¡­


    This was all too new for Hikaru. The guards even showed him kindness and humility with a smile. In the Elemental Nation, most of them would only see this as a bother. Almost all shinobi are cold and aloof, like they were all trying to act cool most of the time.


    Hikaru just accepted their kindness and went inside the village with Hiroshi, They left all the survivors in the hands of the people in here.


    It''s just refreshing to see something like this.

 Chapter 89 - 82: Blood Cloak

    He finally learned the geographical map of this continent. The continent is separated by four factions. Humans, Elves, Beastmen, and finally, the Demons.


    The Kingdom of Humans is located at the East of the map, The Kingdom of Beastmen is located at the West side of the map, and the Elves territory is located at the South. The Demonic Empire is located at the top of the map, North.


    The North had always been the coldest and harshest place in the continent. There are many mountains there, and because of the harsh weather there, the resources are too little. That''s why the Demonic Empire has been trying to attack the Kingdom of Humans, to get more resources, since Humans have the most resources out of all four of them.


    Humanity was on the verge of losing the war years ago against the demons, when they asked the goddess for help. The Summoned Heroes, they were the ones who turned the tides of the war. They managed to push the demons back to their territory, but that was until the Heroes mysteriously disappeared 10 years ago.


    Even though it was a "mystery", all the people in the land had a speculation that it was because the Heroes had started rebelling against the goddess. That''s why they disappeared so mysteriously.


    A day had passed since he arrived in this world. He wanted to see what kind of people lived in this world, and also wanted to see the adventurers guild. But Hiroshi was too tired from their journey out of that forest. So, Hikaru decided to sell some monster parts in some merchant guild. By some, he meant thousands of monster corpses. He didn''t manage to sell them all, since the merchant guild only had a limited amount of money.


    Like any other Isekai fantasy world, this world''s currency is divided into three coins. Copper, Silver, and Gold. 100 Copper coins can feed a family of three for a week, while 100 Silver coins can last them to the end of the year, and finally, gold coins. A hundred of gold coins can make a family of three live in luxury until the day they die.


    (Note: 100 Copper Coins = 1 Silver Coin. 100 Silver Coins = 1 Gold Coin)


    Hikaru managed to get 150,000 Gold Coins from all the monster corpses he sold. He still has half of those monster corpses, so he''ll look for another merchant guild to sell those to.


    (Also, Note: Hikaru knows the taste of poverty, so he''s always trying to get rich as much as possible. Even though he could just take anything away with his strength, it always leaves a bad taste in his mouth).


    So, Hikaru and Hiroshi decided to stay in an Inn for the night. Hikaru doesn''t need sleep, since he''s an undead. But Hiroshi is just a mortal, so he can still get tired if pushed enough.


    But it''s been a habit of Hikaru to enter the [Challenge] option in the system and fight the worst monsters every night. He can even solo Manus alone now, of course, only the Stage 1, 2, 3, 4 Manus.


    (I don''t if I ever explained this to you guys but the [Challenge] option in the System has an option on what level of opponents you want to fight. Like, a Stage 1 Black Knight is the same level as that Basic Black Knight in the Undead Burg. But it only grows from there. A Stage 2 is where you will fight 2 Black Knights two times the strength of the Basic Black Knight. It multiplies per stage, and that''s the same for Bosses. God, imagine fighting 4 Manus at once).


    Stage 5 Manus has five of them at the same time with 5 times the strength of a normal Manus. It was hard for Hikaru, and he almost died. Thankfully, Solaire was there to always save him. He''s the best bud of Hikaru, right now.


    Anyway, he grinded all night until morning came and the both of them decided to join the Adventurer''s Guild in the town.


    Hikaru then decided to wear his Ornstein Set, because he just likes to. Hiroshi had stars in his eyes when he saw Hikaru''s armor. It was just too cool.


    Hikaru showed up in the guild with that armor. He also has Ornstein''s Spear on his back right now, just to act like Ornstein.


    The moment the both of them entered, everybody inside stared at them with intense gazes, it was as if they were challenging the both of them.


    Hiroshi steeled himself and walked towards the counter, where they will be able to take the Adventurer''s exam.


    Hikaru observed the Guild and saw the Guild looks like a tavern. There were many kinds of people inside, sitting at the tables, while others were just standing with their backs against the walls. They all had a variety of weapons, to large greatswords to thin rapiers. Some had bows, while others had staves.


    The way they were dressed got Hikaru''s blood boiling, it was just like a normal fantasy world! This is too stimulating for any people that hasn''t experienced normal fantasy worlds like this. All of them dressed exactly like adventurers in the mangas he''d read in his free time back on earth.


    The Shinobi World and a Fantasy World are completely different!


    Meanwhile, the adventurers inside the Guild felt like they were being challenged by the newbie in front of them with that shiny armor of his. They all decided to release their killing intent at the newbie in front of them, to intimidate him.


    Hikaru was surprised to feel this many killing intent directed at him all at once.


    ''Now that I think about it, isn''t Killing Intent similar to energies like chakra? I have a very strong killing intent, maybe I would be able to manipulate it. Hmm¡­'' Hikaru said inside his thoughts.


    He''s right though, Killing Intent is just like any other energy powers like mana or chakra. If he can control it properly, he might be able to use another kind of power. It would probably be helpful to his fight against the olden gods.


    ''Alright, let''s try it.'' Hikaru thought.


    He closed his eyes and did not move for a while.


    The adventurers of the guild thought that he had wet his pants, when suddenly, they all saw a huge blood red cloak appear behind him. It covered him like a cloak, and it also had some kind of red fur in the neck area.


    Suddenly, the entire guild was filled with killing intent. Every Adventurer in the guild almost pissed themselves just from that killing intent.


    Right now, at this very moment, Hikaru has created a technique called "Blood Cloak". It''s a cloak created from his killing intent, it can also cause illusions to appear in the eyes of the enemy. Fortunately, he managed to hold back at the very last moment, or all the people on the planet wouldn''t have been conscious right now.


    He can use other techniques made from his Killing Intent as well, but they''re too harmful right now. He cannot control them properly, yet. This Blood Cloak of his is the only one he''ll use from now on, though it doesn''t work well with his Ornstein Set. He looks ridiculous, so he retracted his Blood Cloak for now.


    Hiroshi was only mid-way towards the counter when he felt Hikaru''s Killing Intent. It froze him on the spot. This was the most terrifying killing intent he''d ever felt. But as fast as it appeared, it was suddenly gone.


    Hiroshi managed to catch his breath and realized that he was sweating heavily. The other people in the Guild Tavern weren''t so lucky as him though. All of them almost passed out, it was only thanks to their experience that they were able to stay conscious in that short second that killing intent appeared.


    Hikaru then stoically walked towards the counter, with Hiroshi quickly following along. The girl standing at the counter was also sweating heavily, it was only thanks to her past experience as an adventurer that she didn''t pass out.


    Hikaru is also wearing Ornstein''s helmet, so they couldn''t see his face.


    He opened his mouth and said, "I''d like to become an adventurer. Just give me the entry exam and I''ll go there along with my friend here. Can you do that?"


    The girl didn''t dare to look at him in the eyes and just said, "D-Do you have an Identity C-Card?"


    "No." Hikaru''s short answer.


    "W-We need an ID to c-confirm your identity, or the guild won''t a-accept you." The girl said while adjusting her glasses.


    Even though she couldn''t see it, she can feel that the man behind that helmet is staring at her, and quite frankly, it terrifies her.


    "B-But, we can make an ID for you and your friend! I''ll talk with the Guild Leader right away!" The girl then ran off up towards the stairs.


    Hikaru and Hiroshil could only stare where she ran off. It seems like she was terrified of him.

 Chapter 90 - 83: Entry Exam

    After running off towards the Guild Leader''s office, the girl then came back after a few moments. She told the two of them to follow her to the Guild Leader''s office, and Hikaru agreed along with Hiroshi.


    As they were walking up the stairs, the receptionist girl was trying hard to break down in front of them. From what she''d seen, the one wearing that flashy armor is a very strong individual. She could say that he''s stronger than the Guild Leader, who''s a Tier 9 Magician.


    But the one thing that worried her the most was that thing, the blood red cloak that appeared behind that guy for a brief moment. It was emanating a lot of killing intent, as if it''s the very manifestation of that intent. She, herself, is a Tier 5 Assassin, so she could see what that cloak was made off. Even though she has no explanation as to why that happened, she is sure of something. That cloak was not made from any kind of material.


    As they turned to go to a hallway, which has no rooms other than a dark oak door at the end of the hallway, they walked towards that door.


    When they finally reached the door, the girl then politely bowed to them before going back to the counter, the reception.


    Hiroshi knocked on the door as he asked, "Can we come in?"


    "Ah, yes. Please." A male voice sounded inside.


    Hiroshi opened the door and walked in along with Hikaru.


    When they came inside, they saw a man in his late thirties behind a desk with doc.u.ments neatly assembled on top of it. The man has mid-length grey hair, slitted eyes, sharp thin eyebrows, long ears, and he was wearing a grey robe with a badge with the number "9" carved in it, signifying his Tier. He also had his staff right beside him. It was a thick long stick with a white sphere on top of it.


    The man then stopped what he was doing after the two of them came in and waved his magic staff that was right beside him, before two chairs suddenly appeared in front of the desk.


    "Please have a seat, the two of you." The man politely offered them


    "Thank you." Hiroshi and Hikaru said at the same time as they sat on the chairs.


    "Now, I won''t be talking too long, since I have a lot of work to do. We''ll skip the pleasantries. You two don''t have ID cards, am I right?" The man asked.


    They both nodded.


    "Well, that would be easy. 10 Gold coins should suffice for each of your ID cards. That''s a total of 20 gold coins. Do you have any coins on you right now?" The man asked politely.


    "Yes, here." Hikaru extended his right hand towards the man, the Guild Leader, before 20 gold coins stacked neatly appeared on top of his palm.


    The Guild Leader then took the gold coins and handed two cards towards them. It was their Identity Cards. There wasn''t really anything there, it seems like they would have to write their names there.


    Hikaru and Hiroshi then stood up.


    "I am grateful for your time. May I ask for your name?" Hikaru said quite politely as well.


    "Ah, I haven''t introduced myself, have I? My name is Alphonsus Ellsworth. As you can see, I''m an Elf. Anyway, I''ll be going now. I really don''t have time, so I''m sorry that I have to leave just after meeting someone as amazing as you." Alphonsus said, he was quite disappointed that he didn''t get to talk with Hikaru longer.


    Hikaru knew what he meant. There are different types of magic in this world, and the one Elves uses is Spirit Magic. They can communicate with the Spirits, and they can even see them while normal people can''t. Right now, Hikaru is wearing the Ring of the Unseen. He can see the spirits around Alphonsus dancing in joy as they tell him how amazing Hikaru is.


    The spirits look just like fairies, but there''s a difference. Spirits are ethereal creatures, while Fairies are creatures of high-powers. It was said that they are one of the closest beings close to godhood. Of course, there''s no proof of this, since Fairies haven''t been seen by anyone except the previous Heroes.


    After getting their blank ID cards, they will then have to fill it in with their names and register it at the guild counter, where they met the girl.


    After registering, Hikaru and Hiroshi then have to wait for the entry exam to begin. The entry exam just basically estimates the level of your strength and the examiner will put you in a proper adventurer rank.


    The adventurer rank is separated into 7 ranks. Copper, Iron, SIlver, Gold, Diamond, Platinum, and Mythical.


    Copper Rank is for people in Tier 1 to Tier 2, Iron Rank is for those in Tier 3 to 4, Silver is for those in Tier 5 to 6, Gold is for those in Tier 7 to 8, Diamond if for those in 9 to 10, and finally, Platinum if for those who''ve reached the level of Tier 11 and 12. But why was Mythical left out? It was said that only the previous Heroes reached that level, and maybe surpassed it! The Leader of the Heroes have said to be in the Tier 15, a myth that hasn''t been proven yet.


    Hikaru and Hiroshi waited in the Guild''s Tavern until the clock reached 12 pm. The newbies that are gonna take the entry exam then came into the Guild.


    There were 2 Examiners, a busty woman who only wore revealing clothes and a man who seems to be addicted to protecting women. Both of them were in the Tier 7, Gold Rank adventurers. The people that came in to take the entry test were amazed when they learned that, but Hikaru was only meh. They were weak, but even though that''s the case, they are still powerful in the Elemental Nations.


    Hikaru then started to think about intertwining the two worlds. If he can do that, it would be more beneficial to the Elemental Nation! They could all grow in power with the magic of this world. But there''s a problem. Currently, in both worlds, there are evil Organizations or Evil Cults spread all over the two worlds.


    He''ll have to take care of that first, and he''ll have to learn Space and Time magic to make a portal that goes between two worlds.


    The Examiners then led them to an open land built behind the guild. It was not large, and only capable of fitting 80 to 100 people. The newbies that were going to take the entry exam sat on the stone benches around it.


    There were a total of 30 people taking the exam, along with Hikaru and Hiroshi. They were all given slot numbers from the Examiners. Hikaru got 13 while Hiroshi got 7.


    The examiners then called the people taking the exam one by one in numerical order. Almost all the people taking the entry exam were all in Tier 3 or below, so they were either given the Rank of Copper or Iron. But there were those who managed to surprise the Examiners. Hidden in 30 newbies, there were 5 people in Tier 5 to Tier 6!


    The Examiners were overjoyed to get such people to join the Adventurer''s Guild. But as expected of their Tiers, they were arrogant or aloof people.


    The busty woman, who''s name is Harley Mor, was a fire magician. And the Male Examiner, who''s name is Alex Delt, has the class of a Paladin. He calls himself the White Knight who protects all women, which for Hikaru is really weird.


    "Alright, now that all of you have told us your Tiers, except for that Knight with flashy armor and mister who doesn''t know how to wear shirts, we can now start the entry mock battles. One by one, all of you will fight each of us. Just pick who you will fight between the two of us. First, number one, come front!" Harley called out and a black haired boy came out.


    He has a peculiar appearance, even out of all of them. Pitch black hair and eyes, super red lips, extremely pale skin, almost as pale as Orochimaru. He only wore a white shirt and black shorts. Around his waist were two short curved blades. His appearance screams he''s an Assassin.


    The boy then picked Alex as his opponent, which is not a good choice for assassins like him. Paladins has the ability to sense any incoming attack and dodge it. But black haired boy seems confident, if his stoic face is any proof.


    Hikaru just ignored them and started reading a book he got from the Tavern after asking for it from the receptionist girl. It''s a history book from this world, and he has to read this if he wants to learn more about this world.


    The very first thing that was mentioned in the book was that the world was created by the Goddess Deagaia. It was said that she formed the sun with her own hands, created the land, sea, and the sky and with the remaining land, she formed the moon. Obviously, this is a hoax. She didn''t form the sun, the universe did. And she? Created this world? That''s a big gigantic lie. Major Gods of her level shouldn''t be able to build a planet as lush as this planet with her powers alone. You would need several gods to form a planet with weathers and environments capable of housing life.


    She must''ve stolen this planet and had taken it for herself. That barrier guarding this world seems to be blocking her signal from getting caught by the other Major Gods. She''s in hiding, and she might be a fugitive from the Celestial World. A criminal.


    There''s a few ways to become a criminal in the Celestial World. Do something really terrible, or become a follower of the Olden Gods. In the celestial world, the Olden Gods are forbidden to be spoken about. They cannot be mentioned, not even by their own names. Hikaru knows that something must be happening behind the scenes, but he cannot do anything right now. The gods are currently in an invincible position. There are only a few beings that can destroy the entire Celestial World and get away with it, and they can be counted in two hands.


    One of them is definitely Kiran, and the other is Zane. That Disembodied Voice said to him that Zane is currently only second in power in the entire infinite multiverse. The Second Most Powerful Being!


    But he doesn''t know who the most powerful being is, even that Voice decided not to tell him. He said that it was still too early for him to know.


    As he read the book and thought about some things, the Examiner then called out Hiroshi''s number.


    "Number 7, please come out!"

 Chapter 91 - 84: Abnormal Status Skills

    Hiroshi stood up and started walking towards the two examiners after getting called.


    "Wish me luck!" He said to Hikaru while happily walking towards the two examiners.


    Hikaru smiled and nodded at him. He looked at Hiroshi and noticed that he didn''t have any kind of weapon, except for a small blade around his lower left leg, which is used for cutting pieces of monsters. He remembered that this guy had a large greatsword with him back then, which he just flicked away with his fingers. He still hasn''t given him anything in return for that, but it''s odd that Hiroshi still hasn''t gotten a new weapon.


    Melee Weapons are essential to Adventurers, even if you''re a long-ranged fighter. You see, there are times when long-ranged adventurers are forced into melee battles due to some situations. This is something that most long-ranged beginner adventurers always forget.


    While Hikaru is quite certain that Hiroshi is a melee fighter, he''d seen that from the forest, he still is hiding something from him. It might be a really interesting skill, or a weapon that he hid inside some sort of space storage or something.


    Well, he might be able to see it right now from this fight.


    Hiroshi steadied himself, trying to calm his pounding heart. After months of isolation inside that dungeon, he''s forgotten how to stay composed in front of other people, or how to talk to them calmly. Even before this, he was an introvert. He was always hiding inside his house, and the only times he would go out are when he has to go to school or when his aunt/uncle told him to buy something from the store.


    Communication is especially hard for him, and he would sometimes ignore people when they talk to him. And that''s the reason why some people in school got annoyed at him, thinking he was looking down on them. A lot of people hate him for his "cold" attitude, even some of the teachers. But he was academically smart, so the teachers couldn''t do anything to him. He would always score within top 10 in the whole school, if he remembered correctly. But that didn''t stop other students from mocking him, or sometimes, bullying him. He fought back, of course, but that only made it worse.


    Bullies think of themselves as "superior" to others, and would sometimes not realize that they are bullying someone. So, with Hiroshi ignoring them, they got mad and decided to physically hurt him, and when he fought back, they thought of it as him going against their delusional "superiority".


    He got in front of the examiners and they asked him who''s he going to pick to fight between the both of them. He picked Alex, the male examiner.


    He would''ve picked them both, but Hikaru would have no one to play with later after he''s done with them. He''s skills are what you can call, overpowered.


    He still hasn''t told Hikaru what his skills are, but his skills are abnormal status effects. Poison, paralysis, sleep and blindness. That''s his current magic skills, and he deduced earlier that he can still get more of those kinds of skills if he levels up more. They might not seem special, since most of the abnormal status skills in this world only have the percentage of working below 20 percent. But his skills work 100 percent all the time! They can even be shot from long-range!


    That''s why, even though he''s just a Tier 9 warrior, he can defeat beings that''re in the Tier 12 or 13! But that''s not all, since he can defeat beings that are more powerful than him, he got titles from his Status Screen that can increase his strength to Tier 9 to Tier 11! He''s currently level 89, only one level away from being a Tier 10 Warrior.


    Last time, he only used that greatsword for cutting apart monsters down that dungeon. Some monsters there were edible but most of the time, they had really tough hides. So he had to use that greatsword for cutting those edible monsters, so he could eat them safely.


    And, as a bonus, he managed to learn Greatsword Swordsmanship from swinging that greatsword around. His proficiency is only at [Beginner - Level 5] right now, but if he can get another greatsword to swing around again, he''s sure that it would be upgraded to [Intermediate].


    He and Alex were 10 meters apart from each other. Alex had his sword and shield equipped, with his white shining armor.


    Meanwhile, Hiroshi had nothing but a tattered dark cloak and a black pants. If you look at it, it''s really unfair for Hiroshi but that''s not really the case here. If he were to say something, Alex is at a disadvantage here. First of all, Hiroshi''s Tier is two levels higher than Alex. And second, no one can beat his abnormal status skills. One zap of his magic, and they''re either paralyze, blind, or poisoned.


    "Hey, why don''t you take out your weapon?" Alex asked, holding his weapon down.


    "There''s no need, I can beat you with my bare fists." Said by the seemingly cold Hiroshi.


    "Hahahaha! You won''t make into a fine protector of women if you don''t go all out!" Laughed Alex, who immediately assumed that Hiroshi won''t hesitate to drop kick a woman if they do something bad to him.


    ''What''s our battle got to do with protecting women?'' Thought Hiroshi, who finds it quite ridiculous. Women can protect themselves, they don''t need excessive protection from others.


    "Enough chit-chat, old man, start the battle." Coldly said by Hiroshi. He didn''t mean to sound cold, but that''s just the way he is. The only people he can avoid this habit with are his family and surprisingly, Hikaru.


    Harley whistled and said, "Man, that''s one cold kid. Anyway, the battle will start now!"


    "I''ll train you into a fine White Knight, gah-"


    He was cut off when he suddenly felt he couldn''t move. He was paralyzed! He tried his best to look at Hiroshi and saw his hand extended towards him. He couldn''t even make a sound. He felt his hands drop his sword and shield, while seeing Hiroshi slowly walking towards him.


    "I''m sorry, but I want to make this as fast as possible."


    That was the last thing he heard as he felt something knee his stomach, making him pass out.


    The other newbies watching the battle were in agape, the strong and gallant examiner was nothing in front of this kid! Even the Tier 5 Black haired kid earlier couldn''t beat this examiner. That means, this boy must be in a higher Tier than Tier 7!


    He might be able get the rank of Gold, or at best, a Diamond Rank!


    (Note: In this world, Diamond Rank Adventurers are quite rare. There are only less than 500 around the whole world, while Gold Rank is quite common to see).


    They might just be witnessing the birth of a legend¡­


    Hiroshi turned around as Alex fell to the ground with a thud, and walked away. He then sat next to Hikaru on the stone bench, and said, "He was quite weak, I''ve faced monsters at the same Tier as him but they were more skilled and resourceful than him. But even then, he still wouldn''t be able to put up a fight against me."


    Hikaru nodded in satisfaction just from seeing that skill of his. Honestly, he could say that Hiroshi''s ability is quite hard to learn just from seeing it once. He needs to see it 10 times just to learn it instantly, but he may be able to copy it in a few hours. Just one skill is that amazing, even from his standards. It''s silent, not flashy, yet it can produce results that can baffle normal people. He needs that kind of skill!


    Well, he might just create one just for the sake of it.


    Harley then called a medic from the Guild to heal the unconscious Alex Delt, and called another Gold Rank Adventurer to continue the exam. It''s not a surprise that some newbies might be able to beat an examiner, but normally they would be struggling. Yet, that kid beat him in less than 10 seconds!


    This might be a talent that can prosper the Guild even more! They''ve been trying to find really talented individuals that can be called prodigies to join the guild, but it''s been difficult since the Goddess'' Church keeps stealing most of them.


    They seem to be hungry for more power, so they keep giving out really enticing rewards for prodigies who would join the Goddess Deagaia''s Church.


    It''s already good that there''s five Tier 5 to 6 in this group, they would only get one of those every once in a while. But for such a genius to join the Adventurer''s Guild? He might be even compared to those new Heroes summoned several months ago!


    Harley handled the situation calmly and everything was gone back to normal once again. Another examiner was brought out, a Diamond Rank Adventurer who was passing by the Guild. He''s a Tier 10, so it''s quite impossible for other newbies to beat a Diamond Adventurer.


    His name is Adalius Navarel, a once poor boy who grew in the slums, who then turned into a Diamond Rank Adventurer. He has two young siblings, one of them is currently a Silver Rank Adventurer, and the other has been recruited by the Church as one of the Light Maiden. A title given to those with incredible affinity towards Light Magic in the Church.


    He is currently 25 years old, and he has mid-long light platinum hair, ocean-like eyes, a well shaped face devoid of any facial hair, white skin, and he''s quite tall, around 190 centimeters. He wore a white fedora hat on top of his head, a long white trench coat with a suit underneath it, long white pants, and he''s sporting sharp black shoes.


    Overall, he looks like a gentleman who would open the door for a woman. But the cold unfeeling look on his face doesn''t tell that.


    Harley was the one who fought the next 5 opponents before it was Hikaru''s turn to fight the examiners. He decided to blast less than 1 percent of his killing intent around the examiners and see how they would fare against it.


    Harley''s not out of breath yet from all those fights, but the moment that kid stood up from that stone bench, she felt like she was suffocating. She felt a killing intent like no other, not even a Tier 10 had this kind of killing intent!


    Adalius, meanwhile, was not so unaffected. He felt like this kid was testing them, and even though he felt weakened by that killing intent, he can still stand up. But the girl beside him wasn''t so lucky, she''s already kneeling down on the ground, her head almost touching it. She was about to pass out, when it suddenly all stopped!


    She was finally able to breath fine again, and even though she felt her legs go wobbly, she can now stand. She looks at their next opponent, and knew, she''s way, way, way, way out of his league!

 Chapter 92 - 85: Going back to the Elemental Nation

    Hikaru walks towards them while drawing his Dragonslayer Spear. This was the spear that Ornstein used, and this is also one of the strongest weapons Hikaru has. A single thrust of this spear can obliterate an entire mountain with ease. That''s just the power given to the wielder by this spear. But, you need to have enough physical strength to just carry this.


    Adalius narrowed his eyes at the walking Hikaru and said, "For a young child like you to have that kind of killing intent¡­ How many people have you killed?"


    Hikaru then stopped in front of the examiners and answered his question, "Ah, I can''t really remember. But I think, in these past 6 years, I''ve killed around 5000 or so."


    A golden colored pistol slowly formed on Adalius'' right hand and Immediately, Adalius had his gun, pointing on Hikaru''s helm.


    Hikaru didn''t even react and said to him as he pulled the gun closer to his helm, "Do you want to blow my brains out? Then do it, let''s see if you can really kill me. C''mon, do it."


    BANG! BANG! BANG!


    Without any hesitations, Adalius pulled the trigger three times.


    Almost everybody watching screamed in terror as Adalius shot Hikaru. Yet, when they looked at Hikaru''s helm clearly, there wasn''t even a wound nor a dent.


    Hikaru was still standing there like nothing, even Adalius himself was surprised. This gun of his is made entirely of mana along with the bullets, the stronger his magic, the stronger his shots. He is fully confident that he can shoot the largest tree in the world and his bullets would destroy it. But this kid, he survived without any wounds from his bullets in a point blank range.


    But that''s impossible! Not even a Tier 12 would dare to stand in front of his bullets.


    "Ho, so that''s how your gun is made, " Hikaru interestingly said, "Let me replicate that." He put his spear on his back and opened his armored covered left palm.


    Adalius was confused, why did he say that? Can he really replicate his magic? That''s possible, since he''s gun magic is not that unique. But that will still be quite hard, even he, Adalius, took one month just to create his gun. And only the ones who are really talented in the gunslinger field can do that.


    Yet, here he saw, a boy no older than 15, re-created his gun magic.


    Slowly, a black colt anaconda with golden lines flowing through it formed on top of Hikaru''s palm. This is a new addition to his arsenals of magic spells. He has a bunch of them, that''s why he had to write down on an empty book. All of his current magic spells and techniques were written in a single book because he sometimes forgot about some of them.


    Adalius just sighed when he saw the kid recreate his gun magic.


    "Prodigies really do exist." Adalius said, trying not to break in tears. All of his hard work back then is nothing in front of this kid. He was just about to turn around and leave, when he heard Hikaru say something that stopped him from his tracks¡­


    "Why are you leaving? I still need to shoot you, you shot me first, after all."


    Hikaru extended his left hand upwards with his newly formed magic gun before he pulled the trigger, and a huge amount of magic power was released!


    BOOM!


    He fired a single shot, and the five basic elements of magic came out of the gun and made a hole in the cloud up in the sky, and it didn''t even stop. But before it could really reach the barrier, Hikaru canceled it instantly.


    He then pointed his gun at Adalius and said, "So, are you going to run away, or not? And also, I don''t understand why you pointed your gun at me in the first place. Was it because I said that I killed five-thousand people? Well, for your information, all of them were mostly bandits and corrupted nobles from my land. And the rest are just members of an evil organization. So, as a payback, I''ll also point this gun at you."


    Five-thousand people? Pff, he''s killed more than that. Around 20,000, that''s his estimation. He did take their lives but they were all corrupted anyway. If he left them alive, they would''ve caused a lot more trouble. Their depravity knows no bounds, that''s what he learned after 3 years of seeing countless bandit camps.


    For him, creatures with intelligence are the most depraved creatures in the multiverse. If the history of Earth is true, then he''s most likely right.


    Adalius sweated, knowing his mistakes clearly. If that kid really fires that gun, he''s dead meat. Not even the goddess can save him from that. He couldn''t move due to fear, one shot from that gun can finish him. He saw that earlier, when he fired it at the sky.


    Suddenly, Hikaru laughed loudly, "Hahahahaha, you really fell for it! I''m not going to shoot you, you must''ve just guessed earlier that I''m some sort of a sadistic evil bastard. That "evil" part is not true, but me being sadistic is debatable. Anyway, I passed the test, right?"


    ''This brat¡­Sigh, I can''t really blame him. I shot him in the head, and if that armor wasn''t on, he might be dead by now.'' Adalius said inside his thoughts.


    "All right, you passed the test. I don''t need to fight you to know that I''m going to lose. I''m terribly sorry for earlier, I mistakenly thought that you were someone who murders for fun. That killing intent of yours was as powerful as those murderers I''ve seen in the deepest parts of this town''s prison." Adalius apologized.


    Harley, meanwhile, was staying silent so that boy won''t turn his attention to her. He might change his mind and attack her.


    (Note: Common sense in this world is quite, uh, how do I say this, special? Yeah, special¡­)


    After all that skirmish, the entry test went smoothly. Hikaru and Hiroshi got the rank of Diamond Rank Adventurers and as a celebration, the two of them took some missions that adventurers would normally avoid and went out to finish all of them.


    They hunted large Basilisks, Wyverns, Rouge Giants, Megalodon, Krakens, and all the dangerous stuff that would normally be avoided by most adventurers.


    In their adventures, they saw many small villages in need of help. Hikaru gave them all thousands of golds, and after that, they all treated him as a hero.


    (2 Weeks Later)


    After all of that, Hikaru decided that he would return to the Shinobi World for a day. He really wants to see Azumi, it''s been too long. After finishing all of their missions and experiencing a lot of things, they returned to the Town of Unity as living legends. The two of them were regarded in high regards by the people in the Town, no, not just this town, but the whole Kingdom of Humans!


    It seems like their exploits and adventures were heard by the people. The news reached far and wide because of the bards. Bards are people who sang to spread legends or stories.


    In just 2 weeks, all of this happened. Town after town, they traveled. Hiroshi almost forgot of his objective, to kill the goddess. He forgot because of all the fun he''s having while venturing with Hikaru. They killed large beasts threatening many populations, which turned them into living legends. Turns out, killing a Goblin Emperor is a feat not even the strongest adventurers have done. And they even killed a Mutated Demonic Ogre King, which is the first time that it was ever done by anybody.


    After returning to town, the first thing they did is submit their reports on the missions they''ve done before resting on a nearby Inn.


    Hikaru decided to tell Hiroshi that he will be leaving for a day to meet his lover. Hiroshi had no problems with that, since it''s been two long since he had a good rest. He''ll probably sleep for an entire day. Fighting for 2 weeks without rest can be quite mental straining. But Hikaru had no problem fighting for 2 weeks straight, he''s basically a killing machine if you think about it.


    So, he then left Hiroshi in the Inn and set out to go back to the elemental nation for a day. If he''s calculations are right, then it''s now August 3 back on the Elemental Nation. The Fourth Shinobi war is supposed to happen a month from now. But since he messed up the timeline so bad that it might start earlier than he expected, or longer than he expected.


    (Meanwhile, back on the Elemental Nation)


    5 Days after Hikaru suddenly disappeared, the 5 Kage Summit was called. The one who went as the acting Hokage was Itachi, since he''s currently the strongest in the village.


    After he was freed from his cell, he decided to meet his brother first. But he didn''t think that there was another Sasuke there, albeit an older one. He can say that the older Sasuke is older than him by a decade. It''s quite weird, since he''s supposed to be the older brother.


    Well, they just decided to talk about some things.


    Itachi is stronger than before, even with just his Mangekyou Sharingan, he''s definitely the strongest in the village right now. Without anyone to lead the village, Itachi decided to take the hat of a temporary Hokage. Of course, a lot of people had problems with this, since he''s just a recently released criminal. But they had no other choice, Konoha cannot look weak in front of the other major villages.


    Konoha is vulnerable right now, all of their buildings were destroyed by Pain''s attack and their Hokage is still fighting for her life right now.


    Then, just as they were discussing the Akatsuki in the 5 Kage Summit, Tobi suddenly arrived in the middle of them. He declared himself as Uchiha Madara, and said that if they don''t give him the 8-Tailed and 9-Tailed jinchuuriki, he will wage war against the whole world.


    They declined his ridiculous offer, obviously.


    But "Madara" then declared the Fourth Shinobi War.

 Chapter 93 - 86: He Shines So Bright

    Itachi led the great shinobi alliance along with the other kages against the 10-tailed beast, Madara, and Obito. The war was nowhere near its end, yet the great shinobi alliance was almost brought down by its knees by both Madara and Obito. Even Itachi could barely go against the combination of the two and the 10-tailed beast.


    The rest of the shinobi alliance are fighting against the minions summoned by the gigantic tree in the middle of the wide, open battlefield.


    After the five kage summit, Itachi was declared by Mifune to be the leader of the great shinobi alliance. The other four agreed, since Itachi is the smartest and the strongest out of all of them. Even the Raikage had to agree that Itachi is stronger than him.


    But even then, they''ve lost too much. If it wasn''t for the sacrifice of Shikaku, Inoichi, and Choza, they wouldn''t be here. The new generation of shinobis are fighting against this great enemy with some of the old generation, but they were still in a disadvantage.


    Itachi had to 1v1 Madara because the others are too busy with Obito and the 10-tailed beast. He was barely winning, even with all his strength. If only Hikaru was here, the war would''ve been over in an instant.


    Itachi had his Susanoo activated but it was still far too inferior against Madara''s full bodied and armored Susanoo. Only with great difficulty would he be able to block an attack from Madara, and he could barely damage Madara''s Susanoo.


    Even though Hikaru stated that Itachi was as strong as Madara, he only meant the past Madara. But this Madara has the rinnegan, mokuton, and the sage mode of Hashirama Senju. To be honest, it''s almost unfair for Itachi. He''s already low on chakra, his eyes are hurting from overuse, and this is all because of his Susanoo and his use of Amaterasu countless times against Madara.


    Bang! Crack!


    Itachi blocked another slash from Madara''s giant Susanoo swords with his Yata Mirror and counterattacked with his Sword of Totsuka, thus creating a crack on Madara''s Susanoo!


    "Ho, you''re strong for someone your age. You''re as strong as I was back then, 100 years ago. But do you think you can beat me at that state!?" Madara then slashed at Itachi again with his Susanoo at full strength, but he managed to block it again.


    ''I can''t beat him, he''s too strong for me right now. Damn it, if only I had a few strong shinobis by my side, we could''ve taken him down. We are at our weakest state; I need to create a way to defeat them!'' Itachi said in his thoughts, trying not to panic.


    Barrage after barrage of Madara''s Susanoo almost brought him down to his knees. He''s stuck on defense mode, unless there''s someone who could turn the tides of the battlefield, it''s going to be difficult to stop them.


    "Are you tired, huh!? C''mon, c''mon, c''mon, you bastard! You awakened my battle l.u.s.t, don''t stop now! Hahahahaha!!" Madara laughed as he continued his barrage of attacks onto Itachi''s Susanoo.


    ''Tch, this battle freak. For now, I''ll retreat. If I can regroup with Azumi and Sasuke, I''m sure we can figure something out.'' Itachi planned.


    The a.d.u.l.t Sasuke from another dimension has already left a week ago after Boruto was finished with his training with Toneri. He would''ve been useful here, but he cannot keep them here any longer. They have their own war to fight, and we have our own.


    The moment Madara stopped his attacks, Itachi canceled his Susanoo and ran towards the main battlefield, where Sasuke and Azumi are. He needs to preserve his chakra and his stamina, or he won''t be able to fight any longer.


    And as he expected, Madara followed him from behind, yelling at him to get back. He''s really a battle crazed person. If it was any other shinobi, they would''ve lost a long time ago from that monster. Well, Madara cannot be compared to Hikaru, who''s in a complete league of his own.


    He kept running until he managed to get reunited with his younger brother and Azumi. They were fighting Obito, who''s on top of the 10-tailed beast. Though, he can see that the situation is dire.


    Even though they expected that the war will be hard fought, they forgot one single variable. The Edo Tensei technique.


    Kabuto revived almost all of the strongest shinobis to exist. Even the Akatsuki was revived!


    Itachi could see that they were fighting a losing war, but they still have to try, or the deaths of all those people would be in vain! Itachi then fired an Amaterasu on Madara, who''s behind him. Madara dodged it, but by the time he turned his head towards Itachi, he was gone.


    Seeing that he''s opponent has retreated, Madara just decided to accompany Obito, destroying the wills and hopes of the shinobi alliance.


    His plan is near its completion, only those small fries are getting in his way but that would be fixed soon. His body is still in Edo Tensei, so he needs return his mortal body again and make himself the 10-tails'' jinchuuriki. After that, he will cast the Eye-of-the- Moon plan.


    Once his goal has been achieved, all the pain and suffering would finally be gone. None of that shall remain in his illusionary world, only bliss will remain. The unending dream of peace that he and Hashirama dreamt of, is not that far away now. It is now within his grasp, the ultimate peace.


    Azumi was fighting an akatsuki member, when Itachi appeared and sealed that reincarnated akatsuki member into his totsuka sword.


    Azumi was covered in her new version of chakra, a long cloak made of the fox''s chakra was behind her waving around with chakra energy lazily moving around like flames.


    "Itachi! Did you defeat Madara?" Azumi asked hopefully.


    "Unfortunately, I couldn''t. He was too strong for me. I was planning on sealing him into my totsuka sword, but I couldn''t. Madara is going to get his mortal body once again, and once that happens, that will be the time we''ll attack, during his moment of weakness." Itachi said to Azumi.


    Azumi nodded and proceeded to battle other Edo Tensei shinobis. Itachi then did the same but he preserved some chakra, so that he can fight again later.


    Madara appeared on top of the 10-tailed beast''s head, and sitting on top of it was Obito. He''s eyes surveyed the chaotic battlefield he himself created.


    "You''ve done a good job, Obito! Now, the only thing you need to do is revive me with the rinnegan!" Madara said, confident that his plan will work.


    "That''s going to be hard, considering I only have one rinnegan with me. The pair of rinnegan you gave to Nagato was stolen by someone, and Nagato and Konan are nowhere to be seen. This eye of rinnegan I have right now can barely control the juubi, if I try to revive you right now, I''ll lose control of the juubi and it would start attacking us too. We are at a disadvantage, too. If they come to know that that we can barely control the juubi, they''ll attack us head-on without caring for the casualties. I''m sure you can understand the rest, Madara." Obito said stoically.


    Since Hikaru took the pair of rinnegan that Nagato had, Obito had to create the rinnegan on his own using his own body. He needed to rush things and decided to put a ton of Hashirama cells inside him along with Madara''s. Kabuto then performed a surgery on him, which took about 24 hours. Yet, at the end of it, he was only able to create a single eye of rinnegan after all that suffering. But it was enough to control all the tailed beasts and control them.


    But the results were disastrous for his body. He cannot move from his position, or he would lose control of his control. He was only able to fight earlier because he only controlled a few tailed beasts earlier, but since he now controls the juubi, he can no longer fight on the battlefield.


    Obito could feel killing intent leaking out of Madara. He knows his angry, no, furious. After all those planning, this is the only results he gets.


    In the surface, they may be winning, but they are actually on the losing side. No, it''s better to say that the two opposing sides are tied.


    No one is winning, yet no one is losing either.


    Madara gritted his teeth, knowing that he will not be able to perform his eye of the moon plan. But getting angry over it would not bring him any benefits.


    Obito, though, did not tell Madara something else. He''s dying from just using the rinnegan. Since he forcefully awakened it, in such a short time at that, he''s body couldn''t take in the power of this rinnegan. He feels like he''s missing something, something very important for the wielders of the rinnegan.


    But right now, he''s body is destroying itself. Nothing makes sense anymore, for him. The only thing he wants now is to see Rin, that was his only dream. But from what he can see, they''re losing the war. Everyone is against him, not a single soul in this world is truly on his side.


    He realized that after he was defeated by that kid. Kabuto only wanted his body for experimentation, Madara only wanted him here to revive him.


    All of this just doesn''t make sense. But he''s ready to die. He''ll rot in hell, that''s for sure.


    This rinnegan of his will be destroyed along with his body.


    ''Hmph, at least I''ll have the last laugh. Forgive me, Kakashi, but this is how it should be.''


    As soon as he finished saying that inside his thoughts, his heart stopped beating. The rinnegan in his eye socket destroyed itself. Madara rushed towards him after seeing him fall down, just to get the single eye of rinnegan, but it was already destroyed.


    As if the time slowed down by itself, he saw something descend from the sky. It was already night, yet it was bright. It shined so bright, so bright that it blinded his eyes.


    The last thing he saw was those black eyes, shining under the moonlight.


    ''Ah, what was his name again...? Yes, I remember now... Hikaru...''

 Chapter 94 - 87: The War, Finished In An Instant

    As Obito fell to the ground, Madara tried to catch him and take his eyes, only to see it disappear right before his eyes. His face immediately turned ugly, anger rushed inside his body. Without the rinnegan, he will never be able to revive himself completely.


    Yet, as he raged over it, he suddenly remembered that without the rinnegan, no one would be able to control the Juubi!


    He instantly ran away from the head of the Juubi as he heard it roar with extreme rage. That roar cracked the ground around the Juubi, even Madara was almost pushed away by it.


    He landed on the ground, unharmed, and saw the Juubi moving towards the shinobi alliance. Every step of this beast vibrated through the ground, causing a small earthquake. The Juubi seems to be searching for something, or someone.


    With its singular eye, the Juubi scanned the shinobi alliance, searching for something. Which was once a part of it, a large portion of its strength. Then, its eye turned to Azumi.


    Inside her was its lost power. If it could get that once again, it would roam the land once again as the mightiest and undefeated.


    Just as it was about to move towards that human girl, it saw something up in the sky. Even though it was night, something seems to be shining brightly in the sky that it was enough to illuminate everything.


    Then, it saw something it feared. A giant sword as large as the sky was slowly descending towards it. The giant sword''s completely made of some kind of energy, that even it doesn''t know.


    It tried to run, but it was futile. It was too slow, and the giant sword hacked the beast into two. Then, it was slowly burned by the red fire that was accompanying the giant sword.


    And just like that, the ten-tailed beast died. But the giant sword did not stop and continued slashing the ground beneath the ten-tailed beast, creating a giant chasm!


    And then. Slowly, the giant sword dissipated.


    Up in the sky was Hikaru, wearing the Onstein''s set without its helmet. In his hand was a long-sword that he imbued with his mana. That giant sword from before was made from his mana, and it was coated with his pyromancy.


    He would''ve love to keep that thing as his pet, but he would have to take the Kyuubi away from Azumi, so he decided against it. The Juubi he saw was nothing but an incomplete form of itself, so he couldn''t tame it. It wasn''t a sentient being, it was just acting out of its instinct.


    He didn''t harm any shinobi from his attack earlier, he was only aiming for that beast and Madara. But it seems like Madara wasn''t able to completely revive himself, he''s just in his edo tensei form. If Hikaru could kill the user of that technique, he should be able to eliminate all of the revived shinobis that the Alliance is currently fighting.


    [Chakra Sense]


    Hikaru used his chakra sense to see who''s controlling the Edo Tensei jutsu, and he quickly found him. He was in some kind of cave, Hikaru could tell that it was a manmade cave because of all the designs in there.


    Since his enemy is really weak, he could use his mana for a long-ranged attack that will follow his enemy like a lock-on missile.


    Without any hesitation, he did just that and in less than a second, his enemy was dead. He didn''t really bother to care who that was, since it was pretty obvious who that was.


    He looked down from the sky and saw a lot of people staring at him in awe and fear. He didn''t really care about any of them, except for his friends from Konoha.


    He searched the entire field, looking for Azumi, and saw her in the middle of the alliance. Without missing a heartbeat, he appeared before her.


    It was so fast that no one could react before 5 seconds later.


    "Darling¡­" Azumi muttered in surprise. She immediately hugged him tightly, she did not even have any plans of letting him go.


    "Don''t worry, I''m back. I''m sorry for leaving just after a few days of returning to the village. It must''ve been tough for you, going through all that. But don''t worry anymore, I''m here. I promise, I won''t leave for a long time." Hikaru said tenderly as he felt Azumi''s warmth.


    ''Though I hope that Hiroshi won''t be angry, I''ll be staying here for a month. I thought that I would only stay here for a day but I didn''t think my brain would suddenly change. Heh, maybe he won''t be that mad.'' Hikaru thought carelessly.


    Azumi tried to bury herself into his body, but only got hurt because Hikaru was wearing an armor. So she could only go for a kiss in the lips.


    Hikaru just complied and kissed her back.


    Everyone around them were surprised that they were ignored this long. Even Itachi, who''s just right beside them. The situation was getting awkward because of how "lovey-dovey" these two were. Some were even jealous because they were all single.


    Hikaru grew up into a handsome young man, so a lot of kunoichi was getting jealous of Azumi. He looked just like the "Knight in Shining Armor" from their dreams when they were just children. That long wavy black hair, smooth white skin, dark eyes, and quite a tall figure. Some were even blushing from sight, and some were trying to openly seduce him with their looks.


    It hasn''t even a minute since Hikaru killed off all their enemies, yet they''re already doing this? This is nothing short of shameful.


    *Cough* Cough* *Cough*


    Itachi faked cough to get their attention.


    Hikaru and Azumi stopped kissing and turned their heads to look at Itachi simultaneously.


    ""What?"" The two of them asked at the same time.


    "You two should get a room. The war just ended, surprisingly fast too. Stop acting all lovey-dovey, we need to return to the base as soon as possible. Other shinobis will collect the bodies of our fallen comrades, and we and the leaders of each country will then have a discussion. There was a temporary peace treaty to defeat our common enemy, Madara, in case you didn''t know, Hikaru." Itachi explained.


    ""Tsk"" They both clicked their tongues.


    Itachi got a tick mark but he calmed himself and proceeded to take care of everything.


    Both Hikaru and Azumi complied to Itachi''s demands, so that this could all be finished quickly.


    Itachi handled the situation quite good. He assigned a group of shinobis to collect all their fallen comrades, and all the high-ranking shinobis that are in the Kage-level went towards their base.


    Itachi, Sasuke, Azumi, and Hikaru arrived there immediately along with the other 4 kages.


    Hikaru saw a familiar face there, the two Uzumakis he saw during the chunin exams were there. They were now fully grown teenagers, and they had this scholarly aura around them. It seems like they''ve learned a ton of new fuinjutsu techniques.


    Though he didn''t remember their name, he''ll just ask later.


    They arrived in a large room and in the middle of it was a large round table. The table has 5 chairs surrounding it, and each part of the table where the chairs were had a villages sign.


    Itachi sat on one of those chairs along with the other kages. It was obvious that all of them were tired, just looking at their faces was enough for Hikaru to deduce that. He even saw the Tsuchikage bending over because his back hurt so much.


    Then, they started the meeting.


    Bam!


    "Hokage, so you''re telling me that this brat ended the war in just a few seconds!? Do you think I''ll believe a load of bull, just like that!?" The Raikage yelled angrily while smashing his hands on the table.


    "Even if you don''t believe me, it will still not change the fact that he was the one who ended the war. I''m sure you saw that giant sword that covered the skies, am I right?" Itachi calmly said.


    All of them nodded.


    "That was his doing." He saw the Raikage was about to burst out again, and said, "I don''t have the energy to argue with you all, so shut your mouth."


    The Mizukage was amused at this scene in front of her. Especially in Itachi, the rumors were indeed true that all Uchiha have that kind of mysterious charm in them. Though, that boy right beside the Hokage looks like a hot guy himself. She might just target that little boy~


    Gaara, the Kazekage, then said, "Hokage, what do you think of the situation now? A lot of our forces died in the recent war, and the temporary peace treaty will soon be annulled. Is it possible to make the treaty permanent?"


    Itachi thought deeply about it, and finally said, "It won''t be a problem, since I think that if all of us agree, it will be possible. We five major villages, right now, needs a peace treaty. So that once someone attacks us again, like Madara, we would be able to prepare ourselves much, much faster than before. If it weren''t Hikaru-san, we would all be dead by now. And, don''t you all forget, we have almost all of the strongest shinobis in our side. It would be easy to invade your land, " When he said that, the air turned hostile, the Kages were directing their killing intent at him but he remained unfazed, "But we won''t do that. I''m sure all of you can see that we are in a dire state, most of our strongest Jounins were annihilated in the recent war. And sadly, some of our most important shinobis were killed too. So, this time, I''d like a permanent peace treaty so that nothing like this will happen ever again!"


    The Kages thought deeply about it. They know that a permanent peace treaty would bring nothing but benefits towards them. A lot of trading route would be opened towards other villages, and Konoha has the most trading partners out of all major villages.


    With almost of their strong jounins dead, the major villages have the risk of being attacked by a few minor villages to take their title as a Major Village. Some may even join together just to get rid of a single Major Village.


    But some of their old citizens still has this deep hatred towards other major villages, and at this point, it''s simply ridiculous.


    So, after considering all the pros and cons of having a treaty, the five Major Villages, for the first time since the warring era, declared a permanent peace treaty that will last for hundreds of years!

 Chapter 95 - 88: Hiroshi, the Criminal

    (The Other World, a month after Hikaru left)


    The town of Unity was in distraught because the two leaders they''ve been depending on were assassinated by one of the legendary duo adventurers, Hiroshi. He killed them mercilessly, even going as far as decorating the entire mansion in their blood. Even the children and grandchildren of the two weren''t spared. They were all butchered to the point that people of the town couldn''t even recognize them.


    It was a complete one-sided massacre.


    In just one night, the two 10-Tiers leaders of the town of Unity died in the hands of a Tier-9. It was a mystery how he did it but the town folks didn''t care, they only wanted justice for their kind leaders.


    Wanted posts were spread everywhere around the The Kingdom of Humans.


    And by this point, Hiroshi is a wanted criminal known throughout the continent. Killing two 10-tiers powerhouses is no easy feat, even the King of Humans was cautious about dealing with him.


    But it was said that Hiroshi lost an arm as he killed the two, so at least they can easily hunt him down. It''s only a matter of time before he is killed.


    That was 10 days ago, and he is still out in the world, freely venturing everywhere on his own. He was sighted everywhere but almost anyone who decided to hunt him down was either killed, or crippled forever.


    They only saw him alone, there was no evidence of his partner showing up. The infamous Hikaru, the Monster, was not with him. It seems like they separated at some point, but they keep on looking for Hikaru. In case they see him.


    Now, no one knows this, but the reason Hiroshi did what he did was because he saw something under that house. Something very disgusting.


    The entire family of that 10-Tier powerhouses was eating children of different races. Humans, beastmen, and even Elves. Apparently, they just love eating the meat of those smooth skinned children.


    Hiroshi saw all this when, one night, he decided to sneak in inside their mansion for some mission he accepted from the guild. It was an infiltration mission to see if that family was indeed kidnapping children. That mission was issued by one of the villages out of the Town of Unity.


    Well, he did find the children but they were all dismembered, butchered, and the parts that were not edible were thrown away like garbage. It was truly a disgusting sight to see.


    Hiroshi lost his mind and massacred almost everyone in that mansion, and he even bathed the entire mansion in their blood.


    Even though they might seem like good people, those two 10-tiers powerhouses were worse than demons.


    Though, it might''ve not ended like this if Hikaru didn''t leave him for such a long time. He doesn''t blame him, of course, since it''s not his fault. The only thing Hiroshi could do now is hide, until Hikaru returns.


    Right now, he''s heading towards the Demonic Empire. No humans would dare to go there, and even him is quite afraid of going there. But he has a higher chance of surviving there, especially right now, when he only has one arm.


    He let his guard down at the very last moment, and the Tier-10 Archmage managed to cut off his arm with a mana sword. Now, he hides the left side of his body, so that no one can see it. He carries his left arm inside his spatial bag, so that one day he may reattach it back.


    But right now, his only focus is on surviving. Fortunately for him, this kind of situation wasn''t rare back in that dungeon. So he''s used to it by now.


    Hiroshi sat inside the cave he made himself as the bonfire he made himself slowly burned to cinders, and he said to himself, "After I reach the Demonic Empire, then what? I need to plan what I am going to do, if Hikaru doesn''t come back."


    He kept it a secret, away from the guild, but he became a Tier-11 just after Hikaru left. But he hasn''t hunted monsters like he was with Hikaru for a month now. He''s stuck with just Tier-10, but he''ll be able to change that soon. The strongest person in the world is just, after all, a Tier-12 Demon Emperor. The King of Humans is also a Tier-12 warrior, but that''s to be expected.


    Even with all of his skills right now, it is still impossible for him to face millions of soldiers on his own. If Hikaru really doesn''t return, he''ll bide his time and get stronger until he is at the peak. Only then will he be able to fight back against the Kingdom of Humans.


    "I guess destroying the Kingdom of Humans is equivalent to putting a middle finger right in front of the goddess. But there are innocent people too, I might accidentally kill them if I''m not careful." Hiroshi muttered to himself.


    Then he just lied on the ground after thinking for a long time and quickly fell asleep. He''ll think all about this tomorrow.


    (Back with Hikaru, September 1)


    After the war ended, the five Major Villages decided to forge a permanent peace treaty. The Major Villages finally managed to have a rest and recuperate after all the enmity and hatred between the villages.


    Hikaru was celebrated as the hero of this world for killing the 10-tailed beast and ending the war. Hikaru donated hundreds of millions of ryo towards the families of the shinobis who died in the war. It was just out of pure kindness he did that, since he knows what happens in wars, He researched about it back then when he was still on earth.


    The families of the soldiers who died in world war 2 were left poor by the government. And some veterans who survived the war were left homeless, living on the streets and using the skills they earned from the war just to survive from their everyday life.


    It was sad, really. The heroes who protected the country back on Earth were left behind by the government, since all they have in their minds are for their own self benefits.


    Well, if he can return back to his original world, then he will try to help them. But that''s it, since too much help will make them dependent on you.


    He learned this a long time ago but, too much of something is always bad. That''s a lesson he wants to teach to his kids after all of this.


    Well, anyway, in this whole month all he did was spend his time with Azumi. They had fun, but one more big thing happened within this month.


    Azumi and Hinata had a fight, they were fighting over him. It seems like Hinata couldn''t take it anymore, since all she saw was Azumi and him being all lovey-dovey, and she snapped at Azumi one day.


    Well, things led to this and that, and now, he has two girls with him.


    Hinata evolved from a shy girl to an extremely cold woman. She''s always so expressionless around others, even with her family, but around Hikaru she''s like a little girl who''s shy and embarrassed around her crush.


    Hikaru really did not want to build a harem, but since it''s been like this, there''s no going back. Azumi and Hinata might go head to head to each other most of the time, but he can see that they aren''t really mad at each other. They''re just too shy to tell their real feelings, from what he can see.


    He took Hinata''s v.i.r.g.i.nity and had a threesome with the two of them, and now, they all live happily. It''s not complete but it''s the best one he has.


    Hikaru sat at the sofa, sipping chocolate drink while reading the sales graphs of his companies one by one. He''s made a lot of fortune that he can say that he can support the entire Konoha for a decade by himself. But he won''t do that, that''s just stupid.


    He might not be that good at marketing but he sure has found people good at that. Kimimaro is one of his CEOs. The Uzumaki woman from before, the one from the Wind Country, is now handling one of his businesses.


    Soon, he will be bringing the entire Uzumaki Clan back to Konoha. For that, he''ll have to expand the village. He''ll explain that to Itachi later, for now, he''ll have fun with his lovers.


    Hinata now lives with him along with Azumi, they all stay in the same room now, sleep in the same bed, showers in the same bathroom. Basically, 8 hours of their days are spent of having fun, like s.e.x.


    Konoha is still rebuilding itself but soon, it''ll become a utopia for most people.


    After Tsunade woke up from her coma, she decided to retire as the Hokage and permanently gave the hat to itachi. She said that she was too tired from being the Hokage. Well, nobody can blame her since the Hiruzen basically forced her to become the Hokage.


    Anyway, it is now peaceful in this land and they are all living in harmony with each other.


    Though, Hikaru might fight Toneri later, since that guy is too obsessed with Hinata.


    Oh yeah, the bodies of Azumi''s parents and the bodies of the former jinchuurikis of the tailed-beasts has been finished. Hikaru successfully made the bodies, though he''s quite scared facing Minato and Kushina.


    The pressure is just too much. If they learn that he had s.e.x with Azumi since she was 12, they''ll go on a rampage. But since it''ll make Azumi happy, he''ll revive them soon.


    Maybe today,

 Chapter 96 - 88: Revival of her Parents

    The current house Hikaru is living in, is the house he made through earth and metal magic manipulation. Back then, he didn''t know anything about building stuff like houses or huge buildings, but after some studying, he managed to grasp the basics and just built it from there. This is a house of modern design.


    He built it near the Hokage Tower, between the districts of the shinobi and commoner houses. Most of the designs of the houses around them were old japanese houses but Hikaru''s house really takes the spotlight.


    Hikaru made a bas.e.m.e.nt under the house, and it''s even larger than the house itself. This is where he will be performing the revival of Azumi''s parents and the former hosts of the tailed beasts.


    He called Azumi in, saying that he will finally be able to revive her parents. Of course, when she heard this, she was overjoyed. Now, she is going to be able to finally meet her parents and introduce Hikaru to them.


    Step by step they went down towards the bas.e.m.e.nt via stairs. Unlike most bas.e.m.e.nts, it wasn''t dark and full of garbage here. Contrary to that, it looks no different than their living room but the difference is that there are only bookshelves here and a long table in the end of the room. On that table were the bodies Hikaru created for Minato and Kushina.


    He decided that it is still not the time to revive the former tailed beast hosts. It''s going to be pretty troublesome if they get revived at the same time as Azumi''s parents. He''ll just revive Minato and Kushina for now, the rest comes later.


    The underground base was pretty big, around the same size as their living room. There were bookshelves attached to the walls along with some tables in the middle. The long table at the end of the room is the one where Hikaru put the newly made bodies of Kushina and Minato.


    The both of them walked towards the long table. Azumi was getting emotional, she can finally see her parents after all these years.


    The bodies of her parents were covered by some brown cloaks, and they were maintained properly.


    Hikaru stopped Azumi from her tracks, and so did he.


    "I''ll be putting their souls inside those bodies, you should step away a little bit." Hikaru told her.


    She nodded and complied.


    Hikaru then took two jars from his storage box, and inside those jars are their souls. He opened the two jars and captured their souls with his hands before putting them in the bodies he made just for them.


    After doing all that, it was now time to play the waiting game. It''ll probably take a few minutes for them to wake up, so for now, they''ll wait.


    Now, it was time to think how he''ll greet his soon-to-be parents-in-law. First impression is the best impression, so he''ll have to think of something!


    First, the clothes. You know as they say, clothes make the man. He''ll need proper clothing, like that of a noble.


    Second, since they''re the parents of his lover, then he''ll have to bring them gifts. He prefers rings. His mystical rings can bring forth numerous abilities, some of them can even make a normal mortal become a Kaga level shinobi in an instant. He plans to give that to Azumi later. Maybe rings that can increase their abilities, stamina, or health. He has countless of those anyway.


    Third, good manners. There''s not that much to explain but that''s normally the usual thing to do after meeting your lover''s parents.


    And fourth, strength and looks. Since their shinobis, they would probably prefer a strong and handsome boy as their daughter''s boyfriend. He has those qualities. He''s the strongest in this world right now, and no shinobi nor any beings right now can kill him in this world except for the Olden Gods.


    As Hikaru contemplated, time passed quickly, and before he could prepare, Minato and Kushina suddenly moved. They slowly got up, checking their surroundings.


    Azumi almost burst out in tears as she saw her parents for the first time in her life. Although Hikaru had already vanquished her loneliness from the past, there is still this part of her that wanted to meet her parents. The ones who loved her through and through.


    Minato and Kushina then looked at each other, before confusion took place on their faces. They were sure that they died when the Kyubi pierced their stomachs. Could they have been revived by someone?


    "Good afternoon to you two," Said Hikaru to get their attention, "Though it might be sudden, I revived the two of you. Don''t get me wrong, I did not use the Edo Tensei jutsu nor any kind of shady techniques. I revived the two of you for your daughter, but I''m sure you can already see it. Right beside me is Uzumaki Azumi."


    He''s not really good at this¡­


    They turned their heads towards the girl behind him, and saw the three whisker marks on each side of her face and finally, they recognized who that was. That 16 years old teenager is their daughter, the one they left behind when they died 16 years ago!


    With that, Azumi ran towards her parents and cried in their arms. For the first time in her life, she felt the warmth of her parents.


    And with that, things went smoothly.


    Hikaru prepared some food for them, and ate dinner with them.


    They learned that he was her boyfriend and they didn''t really have that much to say to it, except that he doesn''t hurt her. Though they later found out that Hinata and Azumi are sharing the same boy, and Kushina just lost her mind.


    He was berated all night and they took Azumi and Hinata away from him before they took another room besides his.


    He didn''t know how to feel. He feels like he just earned another pair of parents, though he doesn''t quite like that, he still accepted it since they''re Azumi''s parents.


    Kushina took the girls to another room, and left him and Minato in the same room.


    It just felt so unfair, he''s used to normally having s.e.x with Azumi every day and night. Guess this is his life now, sigh.


    Well, since he doesn''t have that much to do, he just went outside and took a stroll around the village in the middle of the night.


    As he strolled around the village, he suddenly remembered that it''s been a month since he left Hiroshi alone!


    He''ll need to go back there soon, there might be something fun going on that he''s not participating in. Like a war, or something. But there''s been something bothering him lately, it feels like something is telling him to go back there. Maybe it''s his intuition or just his gut feeling, but he feels like this is important.


    15 Minutes later, he made up his mind. After leaving a letter and two rings, kissing Azumi and Hinata on the lips secretly, he made his way towards that planet.


    He''ll just have to apologize later, for now, the fun begins once again!

 Chapter 97 - 89: Anger

    (One Day Later, At The Border)


    As Hiroshi was about to cross the border between the Kingdom of Humans and the Demonic Empire, he encountered 6 Diamond Rank adventurers.


    The Guild Leader and Adalius are with them. He doesn''t know who the other four are, but he knows that he''ll have to push himself just to beat the 6 of them.


    It was snowing heavily in the forest, this terrain can either be a disadvantage or an advantage for him. He could hide between the shadows of the trees, while calmly taking them out one by one.


    "Hiroshi, I didn''t think we would meet as enemies. Where is Hikaru? He should be with you, or did you two part ways?" Alphonsus asked while he took out his magic staff.


    "Why should I tell you guys anything? I''ve explained to the others that I had a good reason why I did that, but they didn''t listen to me. I know that the King issued a bounty on me. How much was it? Ah, yes, one million gold coins!" Said apathetically by Hiroshi.


    ???Well, if that is the case, then we''ll listen to your reason. But don''t expect us to believe you. No matter the reason, our town leaders were kind old people." Alphonsus said while his heart was raging with anger.


    They did not lower their weapons but they just stared at him, waiting for an explanation.


    So, he told them why he killed them but as Alphonsus said earlier, they will never believe him.


    The 6 of them pointed their weapons at him, and stared at him fiercely. Hiroshi knew that a battle with them was inevitable.


    "Is this really unavoidable, Adalius? We shared adventures with each other, why does it have to come to this?" Hiroshi said with melancholy, and then, he steeled his heart. Slowly, he forgot that small bond between them and there was only one thing in his mind, and that is to kill them.


    Adalius did not reply and just pointed his gun at him.


    Then, they charged.


    As if time slowed down, Hiroshi, with a melancholy look, chanted.


    ???Wide Range Spell: Paralyze!"


    Hiroshi snapped his fingers and everything in a 50 meters radius was paralyzed by his spell. This was nothing but a one-sided battle, in fact, it wasn''t even a battle.


    The six of them fell to the ground with thud. They couldn''t move, not a single word came out of their mouths. They couldn''t look at Hiroshi but they could hear him slowly walking towards them, and they could feel his killing intent.


    The last thing they heard was a silent draw of a thin sharp knife before everything went black¡­


    (At the Throne Room of the Imperial Kingdom)


    The throne room of the castle is huge, able to fit ten houses in it. There were long and thick pillars erected in each side of the throne room. At the very end and middle of it was the King of Humans.


    The King of Humans once fought side-by-side with the previous heroes back then before they mysteriously disappeared.


    The King has a majestic and carefully brushed beard. He has long blonde hair, blue eyes, sharp and narrowed nose. He has a dignified face, only fitting for a king. He wore a gold colored long sleeves noble coat, black trousers, boots made of gold leather, and covering them was his long red King''s red cloak.


    The name of the King is Kaimester Al Javiar.


    He sat on his golden throne while looking down on his noble subjects. They were all standing in front of him, all the heads of the noble houses in the Kingdom. At his side was all the S-Class Heroes. And the most powerful out of all the Heroes he summoned, Keiko Sumihara.


    Keiko wore an armor made of wyvern scales, covering every inch of her body. She had a stoic face, and her beautiful amber eyes coldly looked down on the nobles, observing them. She had a spear in hand, in case someone decides to interrupt this meeting. She also had short black hair, a heart shaped face, and a cutely shaped nose.


    This is Keiko, Hikaru''s previous girlfriend. They broke up 3 weeks prior before that accident took place. Though she did love him, after their break up, she didn''t really care about him that much anymore. Even though she heard that he was in an accident, she ignored it and pursued her academic life. And after a few years, she graduated from college with the highest degree, got a job in an amazing company, and rose through the ranks quickly.


    But who knew that she was going to get transported here?


    But in here as well, she rose through the ranks. She is the leader of the Heroes, highly looked upon by everyone, even the king. It can even be said that she''s already on par with the king, she is a Tier-12 Spear Master.


    And finally, after a lot of hard work, she finally became a high-ranking noble in the Kingdom. She''s neither evil nor good, she just ignores everyone as she rose through the ranks. She didn''t look at the ones who''re in need, she just wants what she earned.


    Because¡­ that''s how it is for everybody, right?


    Everyone ignores everyone and just continues with their lives, while turning a blind eye to the people suffering. She just decided to be like that, because there''s nothing wrong with that...


    ¡­Right?


    The King then spoke, "Now that all of you are here, let''s discuss what happened. The Diamond Rank adventurer, Hiroshi Fuji, suddenly slaughtered the Hedison Household for no reason whatsoever. Now, why''s that? Were there any signs of mental problems before that? Or was he just a straight up psychopath? Tell me!"


    (Note: Hedison is the last name of the both Tier-10 powerhouses. While there are many Tier-t0s around the world, the reason everyone is losing their minds that that family was massacred is because most of the offspring of the two were all talented geniuses in both magic and sword).


    One of his sons'' had a marriage contract on one of the girls in that household, and for someone to just kill them just like that, they must be trying to insult him, the King.


    "Your Majesty," One of the higher ranking nobles spoke, "There were no signs of any mental illness on that adventurer, but prior to the massacre, he received a private mission. It wasn''t from the guild, it was from one of the villages outside of the town of Unity. We have already slaughtered the inhabitants from that village after we got the information. From what we got, numerous children have been missing from that village and one of the villagers managed to see who the one kidnapping the children. The kidnapper had the crest of the Hedison Household, and they suspected that the Hedison Household had some hands on their missing children. They employed Hiroshi to sneak in the mansion and see any evidence of any kidnappings. Well, we all know what happened afterward." The nobleman was slightly out of breath after speaking that long.


    The King nodded and thought about his words. From what he heard, Hiroshi was a kindhearted individual. He would help the poor, while sometimes fighting with some hooligans. He was admired by everyone who knows about him, yet why did he do all of that?


    Maybe it was because of what he saw inside that mansion¡­


    Suddenly, the King''s eyes widened so large that everyone thought that it would pop out.


    That''s right! If we can investigate everything in their mansion, all of this would be solved immediately!


    As he was about to issue an order to investigate that mansion thoroughly, the door to the throne room was suddenly kicked open!


    Everyone turned their head towards the door to see the foolish person who dared to interrupt this meeting. They saw a young man, at the age of 16 or so, staring at them coldly. He wore normal black clothing, and all of them thought that this must be a commoner.


    He has long black hair, black reddish eyes, and a thin cold smile.


    "Guards! What are you all doing?!" One of the noblemen shouted, but someone pointed behind the teenager and saw a few headless bodies!


    Suddenly, they were all covered by some kind of killing intent. The killing intent was so strong that it manifested a physical form!


    Everyone in the room tried hard to just breath, even the S-Class heroes by the side of the King were breathing heavily.


    "So," The boy spoke, "All of you dared to frame my friend!?" Hikaru was hardly containing his anger, or else, they would all be dead by now.

 Chapter 98 - 91: Slave

    Hikaru decided to leave again because he''ll just get in the way of their familial bonding. Azumi needs their attention the most because then, she''ll be able to love them as a family. Hikaru would only get in the way, so, for the meantime, he''ll have his fun on that planet.


    But as soon as he stepped foot inside the town of Unity, a bunch of adventurers suddenly attacked him. He killed them all, of course, but he managed to hear that Hiroshi killed the people ruling this town. No, he did not just kill them, he absolutely slaughtered their entire family.


    But Hikaur knew that Hiroshi wasn''t that kind of a person, something must''ve happened there. He was about to calmly solve this situation, when he learned that the King of Humans issued a bounty on his head!


    He just lost it and went towards the imperial capital of the human kingdom faster than the speed of light. In less than a second he was there, standing in front of the door of the Imperial Throne Room.


    The guards tried stopping him, but he just beheaded all of them.


    Now, we come to this scene.


    Keiko just stood there, unable to move. She tried to move a finger but found that she couldn''t. She was trembling in fear by the very presence of that boy. She''s supposed to be the strongest, second only to the King, yet this boy gives her this much pressure that she''s trembling? Impossible!


    This must be some kind of trick! She''s the strongest out of all the summoned heroes, but why? Why can''t she move a single limb against that boy!?


    "So, this must mean that the Kingdom of Deagaia is going against me with this kind of pathetic strength? How pitiful." Hikaru coldly said as he looked down on the nobles and the King.


    One noble got angry at his comment and yelled, "Huh!? What do you mea-


    He was cut off when his head suddenly disappeared.


    All of the nobles backed away as they saw the nobleman''s headless body wobbling and falling to the ground. Blood spurted out of the headless neck of the dead nobleman and almost all of the nobles screamed in fright.


    That noble that Hikaru just killed was one of the highest ranking generals in the Kingdom, mind you, but he just beheaded him without doing anything!


    "Who told you to talk?" Hikaru said, not even bathing an eye on the corpse of the man he just killed.


    And then he manifested his killing intent like bloody tendrils and tied all of the nobles present in the room to the ground. All of their four limbs were suddenly tied by those bloody tendrils.


    While the King is a strong man, Hikaru is even a stronger man. The King sweated a lot, and he couldn''t even move like the rest of the Heroes. He couldn''t reach out for his sword, and only a little bit of despair filled him.


    Slowly, Hikaru walked towards the King ominously. The closer he got, the more the others felt like they were facing a death god.


    And, soon enough, Hikaru was in front of the King. Hikaru looked down on the sitting King before grabbing him by the throat.


    He got his face closer to him and said ominously and coldly, "From now on, King of Humans, I own everything you have. Your power, your family, your servants, your subjects, and your entire Kingdom. This is my punishment for you. And from now on, you are my slave and I am your master."


    With that, he sealed all of the King''s power. His mana was sealed away, and he''ll never be able to use it unless Hikaru allows him to.


    "You are now nothing but a normal man, slightly stronger than the average person, but still a normal man. You can never use your power unless I allow you to, remember that, Slave." Hikaru whispered coldly in his ear before dropping him to the ground, The King was breathing heavily and feeling out of strength.


    Without his mana, all of the previous injuries he got from the battle back then is starting to act up. He may be able to bear it for a few days but he will surely fall by then.


    Hikaru stepped on the former king''s head and sat on the throne while still stepping on his head. He rested his head on his hand and crossed his legs while arrogantly looking down on the nobles.


    "Hear me, nobles," He roared, "From this day on, I am the new King of this land! If there''s anyone who dares to step up, then do it now!"


    No one did, because all of them were tied to the ground except for the Heroes.


    He smiled in fake satisfaction and said, "It''s good that all of you understand. Hey you," He pointed at another noble, "Go outside and spread the information that I am the new King of this Kingdom. And also, cancel that bounty that my SLAVE issued a few days ago. And tell the whole kingdom that Hiroshi is no criminal, and he''ll become this Kingdom''s new crown prince."


    He removed that noble from being tied up, and instead of running away, he walked towards Hikaru and knelt down.


    The noble looked no older than 21 years old. He has short black hair, a knightly appearance, quite tall, quite handsome, and he was wearing some kind of armor beneath his noble clothing.


    "Your majesty the King, the people won''t believe my words unless I have some form of proof that you are indeed the new king of this land." The noble said respectfully.


    Hikaru was surprised that there was someone who''s so fast to change sides right away. This must''ve hated this former King, from what he can tell from the looks of his eyes.


    "Ho, tell me, noble, do you hate my Slave?" Hikaru asked, slightly interested.


    The noble hesitated a bit and said, "Yes, your majesty. One of his sons destroyed my village five years ago, and since then I''ve been trying to at least hurt the royal family. But since your Majesty decided to usurp the King, and humiliate him beyond belief, I''ve decided to pour my entire loyalty towards you, my King."


    Hikaru smiled, he was now fully interested on what''s happening. He just wanted to play as King until Hiroshi arrived and he became the King. But this development surprised him, slightly. It looks like he''ll have to continue this charade a little bit longer.


    "Hahahahaha, you are interesting. Tell me your name and I''ll bestow upon you the title of duke!" Truthfully, Hikaru doesn''t know how the whole system works here. But since most of the manga he read back on earth had the title of duke as the highest rank in the hierarchy, only below the King.


    The black haired noble lowered his head and said, "My name is Cristoff Bloodlaviline, at your service, my King."


    "Then, from now on, you are one of the duke in my kingdom. And just spread the news that I am the new king, and I''ll take care of the other things later. For now, I''ll wait for my friend to come. Now, go one, Duke Bloodlaviline." Hikaru lazily said.


    "Yes, your Majesty." Then, he ran off.


    Inside Hikaru''s mind¡­


    ''Woah, that was super embarrassing. But it was good that my ''Dark History'' managed to save me this time. God, I feel the cringe crawling throughout my body! And Bloodlaviline? Who names their family like that? What, a super chuuni? Ah, I''ll just sit here until Hiroshi comes. But it''ll take quite a long time before he comes here, but that''s fine. Because¡­ I won''t let anyone here go out. I''ll starve them all to death, hahahahaha! Die a dog''s death, you filthy nobles! Hahahaha, wait, not a ''dog''s death'', dogs are cute. Hmm, I''ll think of something later. I''ll just enjoy their suffering as much as I can.''


    He thought sadistically.


    These kinds of thoughts are what mostly fills his head. It was just never shown. Outside, he''s a cold and sadistic bastard, but on the inside, he''s still a sadistic bastard but more crazier. Countless deaths did that to him.


    Hikaru sat on the throne with the golden crown on top of his head. The Heroes by his side couldn''t move, he forbade them to. He didn''t care about them, they could all die for all he cared. Right now, he''s waiting, waiting for his friend to come.


    After a few hours, he got bored. So he started stepping on the poor old king''s head non stop, the force on his foot was just enough not to kill the old and shriveled king.


    ''This evil bastard¡­'' Everyone thought inside their heads. They couldn''t help but feel pity for the now-former king. He''s about to die, they thought, yet that bastard seems to enjoy the old king''s suffering. He hummed and smiled.


    Oh, that smile of his, it looks like from the devil himself.

 Chapter 99 - 92: Hikarus Torturing Method

    (One Week Later, In the Northern Part of the Continent)


    The sun shined brightly, blazing even, but the unimaginable coldness in the village made it impossible for the demons to feel the warmth of the sun.


    Only demons live in this village, if a human is ever spotted inside the village, the demons would literally tear them apart.


    In this village, a single tavern exists. There weren''t that many people inside and it was obvious that no one has cleaned this establishment for a long time now. Spider webs were everywhere, dust filled almost all the tables.


    Behind the counter was a demon. He has a slim body, black hair, blood red eyes, and pale white skin. He wore a clean white shirt, bow tie, braces and smart black trouser. He held an emotionless face, and he just stood behind the counter, waiting for his next customer.


    Then, the door of the tavern opened. It revealed a hooded man. He wore a mask beneath his hood. Footsteps sounded in the tavern as the hooded man walked towards the bartender to order something. He looks like he''s missing an arm.


    He sat on the chair in front of the bartender as he laid his hands on the table and said, "Give me something good to eat, preferably some eggs and bacon. And give me the most expensive wine in your establishment."


    The bartender listed all of his orders and said, "I''ll be right back." He then left to go to the backroom, where he prepares everything.


    Soon he came back with all of his orders. Two plates of eggs and bacon and the most expensive wine they have. Even though the bottle of wine still hasn''t been opened yet, the smell is already spreading throughout the tavern. It smelled sickeningly sweet and the smell of alcohol only got stronger when the hooded man opened it.


    He drank straight from the bottle and slowly got drunk while eating his lunch.


    And as he was eating, his eyes perked when he heard what the two demons were talking about behind him.


    "Hey, did you get the news about the Kingdom of Humans?"


    "What news?"


    "A new King has taken over the kingdom, not only that, he made the former King his slave. No one has yet to see him except for his representative. He said that he will wait for his friend to come back, until that happens, he won''t let go of the head nobles he holds hostage inside the throne room of the castle."


    "Wow, I haven''t been quite active lately on the news. But damn, that new King of Humans is quite savage, isn''t he? He acts just like a demon would!"


    "Yeah, but this can also mean to be very grave news for our demon race."


    "How so?"


    "That new King of Humans is way more powerful than the former King. There''s a good chance that our forces will lose in the next war."


    "I''m f.u.c.k.i.e.d, I''m part of the forces of our empire. By the way, what''s the name of the Human King?"


    The hooded man''s ears perked even more just to hear who the new King is.


    "I heard that his name is Hikaru, that''s all."


    The hooded man suddenly stood up, surprising everyone in the Tavern. The hooded man then said, "Hey boss, give me 10 more of that amazing wine of yours. I''ll be meeting my friend soon."


    The bartender did as he was told, and a few minutes later, the hooded man left. As the hooded man left, the bartender narrowed his eyes at him and looked at his customers. They all looked at each other and nodded.


    A feast would start soon, for this is the very first human to enter this village after a long time.


    As the hooded man left the village and walked into the thick and deeply snowed forest, the demonic residence of the village started gathering. This did not go unnoticed by the hooded man.


    He would''ve preferred to be someone neutral towards the demons, but since they''re coming towards him, wouldn''t it be disrespectful to ignore them?


    He took off his hood, revealing Hiroshi who had a little bit of facial hair on his face, and hid it inside his spatial bag, then walked back to that demonic village.


    When he came back to that village again, he saw hundreds of demons surrounding him in every possible direction there was.


    Hiroshi did not speak, and before the demons could speak, he used one of his skills to paralyze all of them.


    "Wide Ranged Magic, Paralyze."


    *Crackle* *Crackle*


    Now, all of the demons couldn''t move. One by one, he killed them with his dagger by stabbing them in the heart twice. It was bloody and brutal, but this was necessary. All demons have multiple hearts, making them harder to kill. But common demons only have two hearts, making this easy for Hiroshi.


    But, since demon hearts were expensive in the Human Kingdom, he would carve out some of them. The heart must be kept undamaged, or it won''t sell.


    Demon Hearts are ingredients for temporary strength potions, or if the alchemist is talented enough, they could make a strength potion that could permanently increase one''s physical strength. Although just a little.


    "Hmm, hmm, hmm." Hiroshi hummed as he proceeded to carve out another demon''s hearts. It was hard to not damage the demon''s heart, since it''s quite fragile. One wrong move might as well permanently damage a demon''s heart.


    But that''s it, if a demon loves, it''s supposed to be eternal. Once their hearts get broken, they either die or be consumed by their untamable rage.


    The example of this was the former Demon King''s daughter, who fell in love with the hero. But when she learned of the hero''s disappearance, she died of sadness. She is the shame of the demon race, falling in love with a human is an extreme crime towards the society built by the demons.


    Most Demons view humans as inferior creatures, because demons, from the moment they are born, already have the strength of a normal a.d.u.l.t human. Thus, they think that they''re superior than them.


    But, as strong as they may be, humankind has the blessings from the goddess, Deagaia. So they''re more or less the same.


    But demons cannot compete with humans on one thing.


    Depravity. Humanity is arguably the most depraved creature on this planet. They enslaved their fellow kin, eat them, **** them, experiment on them, and they would sometimes cause genocides.


    Throughout history, it''s been shown that humanity is indeed more depraved than demons, beastmen, and elves.


    Anyway, Hiroshi now embarks on his journey back to the Kingdom of Humans.


    Now, let''s see what happened to the nobles that Hikaru held hostage in the castle.


    (Imperial Throne Room of the Kingdom of Humans)


    It''s been one week, yet Hikaru still hasn''t removed their restraints. In this one week, they''ve learned that he, the new King, is a really sadistic guy. He loves torturing them by showing the foods he ate.


    You see, just after 3 days of not eating, they are already hungry as hell. They were losing their minds over the fact that they can''t eat, but Hikaru only makes that worse.


    Over the course of the week, Hikaru would magically take out some delicious food and eat them right in front of them, the nobles.


    Steak, whole turkey, chocolate, rice, and anything that was delicious, he brought them out. He even had a feast right in front of them, thus torturing them even further!


    The nobles had no choice but to give in, but even then, Hikaru still refused to let them go or feed them. The only person he fed was that new Duke he appointed, Duke Bloodlaviline.


    For a whole week, they didn''t eat nor drink anything. They have been surviving off their mana, but it would run out soon. And eventually, they would starve to death.


    Hikaru sat at the table he brought in the throne room, and said quite loudly for them to hear, "It seems like Hiroshi just heard of me being here, he should be here in another five days." He used his mana sense to watch Hiroshi''s adventure throughout the week he''s been here. He didn''t leave the Throne Room and only ordered servants to do things for him.


    It turns out, paying anyone with enough money can make them loyal to you for the rest of their lives.


    Normally, a servant''s salary is only just 50 silver coins a month. But since the day Hikaru took over, he promised them that he would pay each and all of them 10 gold coins every month from now on.


    Well, after that, let''s just say that they were beyond overjoyed.


    Of course, Hikaru didn''t take that money from his own stash, he took them from the King''s vault. He ordered Cristoff to go to the vault and give every servant in the castle 10 gold coins. And Hikaru gave Cristoff 1000 gold coins, this time from his own money.


    Cristoff seems like a talented guy. He can finish mountains of paperworks in less than 3 hours, and he''s also talented towards military strategies and combat style.


    And right now, all of the people inside the throne room, except for Hikaru, almost had a heart attack after hearing his words.


    This is literal hell for them right now¡­


    And in all this, Keiko is slowly recognizing who Hikaru truly was. But, for her, it was impossible that that guy is her ex.


    The Hikaru she knew was socially awkward, didn''t like talking to people, after his shifts, he would hole himself inside his house. And there is no possibility that this is Hikaru she knew, because her EX is still back on earth. The last time she heard was that he became a retard who couldn''t speak a single word.


    Meanwhile, Hikaru has long known who Keiko was. He just didn''t care enough about her. Keiko, from all those time he spent with her, is an extremely materialistic woman. No, materialistic is not the right word for her. She''s the type of person who would do anything to rise in a higher position in society, while stepping down on people like ladders on her way up.


    But he didn''t judge her. After all, he''s quite a hypocrite himself, right?

 Chapter 100 - 93: Cristoff Bloodlaviline

    Cristoff Bloodlaviline.


    He didn''t always have this name. His former name was Drake Laviline.


    He was born as a kind child. He helped around his village, whenever someone needed his help. His mother and father were also kind people, so kind that they would ignore their own son just to help other people.


    Like most commoners, his parents couldn''t read nor write. But Cristoff was different, he learned to read at a young age, excelled at sword fighting, and at the age of 15, he was as strong as a Noble Knight.


    So, as the most talented individual in the village, he went on a journey towards the Imperial Capital. But when he left his village, one of his fellow villagers pissed off the 7th son of the King. That son then massacred his defenseless village using the trained soldiers his father lent him. They justified that his village was filled with heretics who worshipped the demons, and the people bought it.


    Cristoff only got the news when he reached the Capital. Unbelievable hatred filled him, going as far as planning to assassinate the 7th prince. But he came to his senses when he saw his family and friends being paraded in the Capital, and how the 7th prince was so smug about it.


    He suppressed his hatred and changed his name to Cristoff Bloodlaviline, so that no one can recognize him. No one survived from his village, so he''s pretty sure no one will be able to recognize his face. But his name is a different problem.


    Using another identity, he registered in the adventurer''s guild, climbed his way to Diamond Rank after 2 years to grow stronger. He then became a noble by going to the Knight''s Academy, only available to those 17 above. After another 2 years, he finally became a full blown Noble Knight. They called him a prodigy, but the only reason he''s doing this is to get revenge against those that slaughtered his village.


    Noble Ranks are separated into ¨C Esquire ¨C Knight ¨C Baronet/Baronetess ¨C Baron/Baroness ¨C Viscount/Viscountess ¨C Earl/Countess - Marquess / Marchioness ¨C Duke/Duchess ¨C Prince/Princess ¨C Crown Prince/Crown Princess, and finally, the King and Queen.


    After becoming a noble, he finally saw what happens behind the scenes. The Capital may look good and pure on the outside, but underneath of all this fa?ade is the sea of corruption. It was deep and boundless, almost every high-ranking noble were all connected to slavery businesses, drugs, prostitution, human trafficking, and a lot more.


    Even the King was connected to all of this, it was nauseating for him to stay here any longer. But he has to fulfill his people''s thirst for vengeance, by infiltrating the noble ranks, getting the King to trust him, and finally, when the King has fully let his guard down around him, he''ll strike.


    But he has a long way to go, if he wants that to happen.


    Another 2 years, and he became a Viscount. Some Marchioness took a liking into him, and promised to convince the King to give him the title of Viscount if he did something for her.


    To become her play toy.


    Even though the Marchioness was 10 years older than him, he still accepted it. If he had to give his body to someone for something like that, then that was too cheap of a price to give


    Drugs and other kinds of dangerous substances were injected into him to be the perfect play toy for her. He suffered terribly from the side-effects of those drugs, but he didn''t give up. He continued moving forward, to get his revenge.


    And only when his revenge is fulfilled, can he finally meet his beloved people.


    The Marchioness loved him because of his unbreakable will, and because of those drugs that he took, he looked no older than 21, even after 4 years had passed.


    But then, that day came. After all of his planning, strategies on how to take down the royal family, he saw something he thought he''d never see.


    The King was being stepped on by somebody, and that somebody just smiled wickedly as he continued to step on the King''s head. The King became a frail old man, who couldn''t even speak nor move anymore.


    And when he saw that, relief finally washed over him. Even though it wasn''t him who took down the King, it still felt great just to see the high and mighty King being treated as a slave.


    He planned to commit suicide and finally meet his family and friends. His revenge is finished; he doesn''t need anymore. Even though the Marchioness did all of that stuff to him, he honestly quite liked it. The Marchioness is a beautiful woman, so being her play toy wasn''t really that bad, if you just take out all those drugs and stuff. But he cannot say that he didn''t harbor any malice towards her, because he saw what she did to other people. How she treated them, it was like they were nothing but animals.


    But he didn''t care about them anymore, for his long delayed rest has been delayed enough. He doesn''t want hatred to fill him inside as he takes his rest.


    But just as he was about to self-decapitate himself using his magic, the boy, the one who was stepping on the head of the King, called him.


    And, in a sudden flash, he saw his parents in front of him. They smiled at him and moved their lips slowly, so he can read what they are saying.


    "Don''t follow us just yet, live your life to the fullest." They said.


    Cristoff, after years of suffering, finally decided to truly live his life.


    Maybe serving this new King might not be bad¡­


    (Another Week Later)


    Hikaru idly reads the pages on the book he''s holding. He asked some of the servants for some good book to read, and they gave him this one.


    But he remembered one problem, he couldn''t read the writings of this world. Even though they spoke Japanese, their writings are way different than Nihongo. So, after a week of learning how to read, he finally got it and started reading this book. The butler of the Royal Family helped him, so it was quite easy for him.


    Oh, and he also imprisoned all the members of the Royal Family in the underground prison along with the nobles he captured. He''ll deal with them later after Hiroshi comes back. He was getting bored torturing the nobles mentally, so he decided to tour the castle and say hello to the people living in it. He just imprisoned the nobles in the underground prison of the castle, so that he won''t have to watch over them.


    All the servants in the castle were happy, and doing their tasks faster than before. But while this was going on, the people outside the castle were in chaos, especially most of the higher ranking noble families. Hikaru imprisoned and tortured the family heads of most of the noble families in the Capital.


    But no matter how they protested against him, it all boils down to one thing; he doesn''t care. The people, the commoners and the people living in the slums are completely fine. They didn''t really care who rules over them, they just wanted to live their lives.


    But even though he didn''t care, Hikaru is still somewhat a kind person. The tax was previously 10 Silver Coins per person in the Kingdom, but Hikaru found that that kind of tax wasn''t really that necessary, so he just dropped it to 1 Silver Coin. There''s still millions of people in the kingdom, so every month, he gets millions of golds from the taxes of the people, even if it''s just 1 silver coin per person.


    The Kingdom has its own agriculture, that''s why Hikaru didn''t worry that much. And the Kingdom isn''t even that poor, so Hikaru got confused as to why the government decided to put 10 Silver Coins per person in the Kingdom as their monthly tax.


    The Kingdom has a total of 150 Million Gold Coins in the vault, so it was really not that necessary to put that amount of tax. I mean, 500,000 Gold Coins are enough for the Kingdom to live for another year, so it confused Hikaru why Kingdom has that much money, too. So, after a little digging, he found out about the deeds the nobles and the Royal Family has done over the years.


    Now, he has another reason why he must treat nobles like that.


    Anyway, now he''s just reading a book while sitting on the throne of the King. No one was there, except him and the heroes. There were a total of 32 heroes in front of him, kneeling in fear. The S-Rank heroes can see that this man, or boy, is one heck of a monster.


    A majority of the heroes were in Tier 5 or 7, while S-Ranks were already Tier-10 and 11. Keiko is the strongest out of all of them, a Tier-12 Hero. She''s just below the previous King''s strength, making her the second strongest in the Kingdom back then.


    While the Higher-Tier Heroes understood their positions, some of the weaker ones were just plain trash.


    One of the delinquents stood up and said, "Oi, don''t you know who we ar-


    He didn''t even get to finish his sentence when the upper half of his body disappeared after it was burned to dust by Hikaru''s pyromancy.


    "Did I tell you to speak?" Hikaru said coldly, he didn''t even take his eyes off from the book he''s reading.


    The lower side of the delinquent plopped to the ground. No blood came out, since it was charred by Hikaru''s pyromancy.


    The Heroes shook in fear. Even though that guy was a delinquent, he was a Tier-6 Paladin. He can even fight those in a higher tier than him, but that new King just killed him in a snap of his fingers instantly.


    Suddenly, a commotion was happening outside the door of the Throne Room.


    Hikaru smiled and said, "So he''s here, finally. Took you long enough¡­"


    Bang!


    The door of the throne room was kicked open and it revealed a hooded person wielding a giant sword.


    "¡­Hiroshi."

 Chapter 101 - 94: A Visit to the Royal Academy

    Hiroshi smirked as he entered the throne room. He saw his classmates kneeling in front of Hikaru, making him smirk even more. Even the delinquents are kneeling in front of Hikaru, but near them is the lower body of a person. He didn''t recognize it, so he just ignored it.


    "So you''ve finally come, Hiroshi." Hikaru said as he closed the book he''s reading.


    Hiroshi walked towards him, ignoring his classmates. His smirk got even wider when he saw the crown on Hikaru''s head, and said jokingly, "Of course I''d come back, your highness."


    The summoned heroes were nervous because of how they treated Hiroshi back then. Back when they were just summoned, they all met the goddess, Deagaia. She was the one who judged their class and ranks. The ones who got an [E-Rank] were all immediately kicked out by the goddess. She said that she put them in the lowest depths of a very dangerous dungeon, a dungeon that has the only purpose of disposing of things that are useless to her.


    The D-Ranks were treated as garbage, the C-Ranks were tolerated in the group, B-Ranks were looked upon by the lower ranks, while A-Ranks were regarded as special figures within the group of summoned heroes. However, S-Ranks heroes were treated with care by the goddess herself, going as far as blessing them with various abilities and skills.


    There are 4 S-Rank heroes, 6 A-Ranks Heroes, 8 B-Rank Heroes, 5 C-Rank, and 9 D-Rank Heroes. Overall, there are 32 summoned heroes. But Hikaru killed one of them earlier, a B-Rank Hero. So there are just 31 Heroes now.


    But the thing is, there were originally 60 summoned heroes. 20 Of them were E-Rank, so they were disposed of along with Hiroshi. So now, there were only 40 heroes left. But the majority of them are D-Rank heroes. D-Rank heroes are treated like trash or slaves by other high-ranking heroes. Some of them died because of the extreme abuse they received from the other heroes.


    It was quite¡­ unsightly for the heroes that had a huge sense of justice.


    "Hahahaha, let''s talk about what happened after I left." Hikaru said, "Oh, and you heroes, all of you can get out of my face now. Your faces make me uncomfortable, because of how unsightly they are." he insulted them.


    "Yes, your highness!" All of them said while kneeling, and left through the opened door.


    Keiko turned to look at Hikaru one last time, and left with her fellow heroes.


    "So, what was the reason why you slaughtered them?" Hikaru asked, his expression was quite serious.


    "They were cannibals, that''s why I killed them. I''m sure you will understand, Hikaru." Hiroshi replied.


    "Hmm, of course. It doesn''t matter anyway." Hikaru said nonchalantly, "But I''ve been bored for quite awhile. I didn''t want to leave the castle since there were too many things to take care of, after taking the crown forcefully from that lousy king. Responsibility was being pushed towards me. Thankfully, Cristoff was here to take care of the mountains of paperwork that came after taking the throne."


    "Heh, that''s your fault. Anyway, let''s drink for now. I''ve bought some pretty good demon wines from the northern land, they''re pretty good, I tell you." Hiroshi said as he took out a two liter bottle of wine from his spatial bag. He gave the wine to Hikaru and took out another one for himself.


    "Since when have you been a drinker?" Hikaru asked as he opened the bottle of wine.


    Hiroshi opened the bottle of wine and drank straight from the base, then he replied, "Since the day I became a criminal. It''s hard being a fugitive, I tell you. I had to hide and hide and hide, ''till they find me. I continuously killed my pursuers, some of them were friends we made back in the guild. Then, the cycle kept rolling, like a never-ending joke."


    Hikaru also drank straight from the bottle, he wiped his mouth with his hand after drinking the wine and said, "Don''t worry, I''ll make all of them pay. Those nobles who framed you, and the people of Unity. Though they were ignorant, it was said that ignorance is a sin, that''s why they''ll die from it. The things I''ve done is just a start, this is where it truly begins."


    "So for now, let''s drink your sorrows behind, my friend."


    They cheered their bottles and drank their wine.


    So, for the rest of the day, they drinked various kinds of wine that Hikaru found in the castle. Hiroshi passed out after drinking too much, while Hikaru was still just fine. He has maximum resistance towards poison, that''s why the wine didn''t affect him.


    He had some servants bring Hiroshi to the most luxurious room in the castle, except for the King''s room. That''s his room.


    For the rest of the night, Hikaru wandered throughout the castle. He visited the underground prison, where he kept all the heads of the noble families.


    Now that he thinks about it, he''ll have to return these people back to their noble families. If he doesn''t, there would be no fun ruling this kingdom. These people are used to being superior, what will happen if he breaks their pride through and through?


    They would try to kill him or take over the throne over and over again, and everytime, he will be there to ruin their plans. This will be fun.


    And then, he''ll humiliate their descendants, the future of their noble families.


    For Hikaru, ruining their lives is quite fun. Most of the noble families in this kingdom are really, really evil people. Corruption runs throughout the entire kingdom, but that''s why Hikaru can justify his actions towards them.


    After taking care of those pesky nobles, Hikaru would then take care of the wars happening between the beastmen kingdom and the human kingdom.


    He will not end the war, mind you, but he will host something similar to the hunger games that will also replace all of these wars. That will be really fun.


    About the heroes, he''ll do something about them soon. The goddess of this world has been silent, she''s not making any move after he took over the throne. She knows who he is, what he is and what he''s capable of. That goddess used to converse with some of the priestesses in the church, but he heard rumors that the goddess had not been responding to them.


    Honestly, this world is just too much fun for Hikaru. He''s like a child getting a new toy to play with, a master puppeteer that controls all of his puppets.


    This entire world is just Hikaru''s play thing, a very expensive play thing.


    As Hikaru hummed in the darkness of the night while walking through the hallway, he smiled. His smile has a psychotic feeling into it, while having the essence of the devil.


    A truly crazy person now owns this planet. Hmm, I wonder what he''ll do with it.


    Tomorrow came, and Hikaru freed all of the nobles he caught, except for the Royal Family. They returned to each of their families respectively, but they were missing a few. Hikaru killed a few of them, because they were too annoying.


    Remember, these nobles don''t deserve any kind of sympathies. They''re the kind of people who would torture people out of fun, just because they''re commoners or slaves. Hikaru''s just using their logic against them, so it''s fair in a way.


    Hiroshi was still sleeping like a log, he hasn''t even woken up once after drinking all that wine.


    Since Hikaru is in a good mood today, he decided to visit the Royal Academy. That academy is where all the children of the nobles enrol, and from time to time, some commoners will be mixed in.


    He had Cristoff behind him as his escort. He hasn''t seen most of the capital yet, so he''s quite excited to show off.


    The headmaster himself welcomed him in front of the gate of the academy.


    "Good morning, your highness. Such a lowly one such as myself can never imagine that his highness would visit this academy." The headmaster flattered him.


    The headmaster of this academy is a short old man. He has long grey hair, brown eyes, a wrinkled face, long eyebrows, his ears were drooping, and he wore an old grey robe.


    Hikaru surveyed the school and saw that this is indeed worthy of its name. Tall thick walls surrounded the entire academy, a wide space for students to practice, and Hikaru can see the tall luxurious buildings inside the walls of the academy.


    "Cristoff, how are the grades here separated?" Hikaru asked him.


    Cristoff then replied, "The grades here are separated into first, second, third, and fourth years. Once a student graduates, they''ll have to choose what kind of class they''ll take. Most students choose being either a Wizard or an Archmage. Classes that have magic in it are considered special in the kingdom. All of them enrol in this academy at the age of 14, and graduate at the age of 18."


    "Hm, my gratitude." Hikaru said after hearing the explanation.


    "No, your highness. Such a lowly one like myself doesn''t deserve your gratitude." Cristoff kneeled as he said that.


    "Calm down, I''m just saying thank you." Hikaru tried to calm Cristoff, while having an exasperated look on his face. Most of his servants in the castle are like this. It''s like he''s some god or something. Sometimes, it just becomes pure cringe when they do that.


    Cristoff stood up again and Hikaru just sighed.


    Hikaru then turned to the headmaster and said, "Old man, can you take me to these fourth graders, I want to see how special they are. And if they''re lucky, I might teach them a thing or two about magic."


    "Yes, your highness."


    Hikaru hasn''t realized it yet, but the people of the Kingdom already regard him as their savior. 40 Percent of the population in the Kingdom are living in the slums, while 30 percent are commoners, and the rest are nobles. But since the day he dropped the tax to 1 Silver Coin per person, the people in the slums managed to save some of their earnings and rent a normal looking house. While the commoners are living happily because they have the budget to eat at good restaurants, buy gifts for their families, and save up for their medical problems.


    Most of what Hikaru did in the Kingdom changed people''s lives for the better.


    He is nothing short of a messiah to them.

 Chapter 102 - 95: Shio

    A Demon, that''s what they call her.


    She has had no name since birth, because the people thought that she was undeserving of it. The only name they call her with is Demon.


    She was born when the demons and humanity fought against each other The demons hanged many human corpses to show their military strength, and one of those corpses was a woman. Inside her was a fully grown baby, and that baby crawled out of her mother''s stomach when the demons sliced the woman in half from the lower waist.


    It was said that the heroes saved her from that hell.


    That was 18 years ago, and now that baby is a fully grown woman.


    She grew up in a poor orphanage, and even though that orphanage didn''t get enough funding, the matron was still nice to her. The matron didn''t discriminate against her and treated her the same as the other children in the orphanage.


    But that wasn''t the case for other people.


    She was an outcast, the only child who was born in that hell. All the children in the orphanage got adopted, only but her. Even then, she lived her life with a bright smile everyday.


    It was found out later that she had a talent for magic, so, at the age of fourteen, she was enrolled in the Royal Academy.


    Her early life in the academy was horrible. After learning who she was, or what she was, they all made fun of her. Even going as far as insulting her dead mother.


    It only got worse as the years goes by, and her life turned to living hell. Even though she was talented towards magic, the teachers and staffs ignored her. Many people spread rumors about her being a bad luck.


    Even then, she didn''t quit. She looked at life positively, and kept going. She believed that if she manages to graduate from the academy and receive a rare class, everybody would accept her. And so, she kept working hard, honing her magic skills and abilities through and through.


    Her talent continued to blossom to the point that the academy couldn''t ignore her anymore. She managed to become a Tier-5 Wizard at the age of 17, making her more special. She mastered all five basic elements to a certain degree, and became one of the best students in the academy.


    At the age of 18, she managed to become a Tier-7 Wizard. And everybody finally acknowledged her, and finally, only then was she happy. They finally accepted her.


    And this is when she finally learns the difference between "acknowledgement" and "acceptance".


    But that didn''t last long when she saw the eyes of the other students towards her. They stared at her with extreme jealousy, then they started spreading bad rumors about her.


    How she is becoming a full fledged demon because of her unnaturally large amount of mana.


    Demons have large amount of mana, that''s why they said that.


    She noticed it, but only recently she gained watchers that investigates her movement from the Goddess'' Church.


    They were watching whether she is a demon, or not. She knew that it''s only a matter of time before someone decides to make a fake report about her being a demon.


    She''s no longer naive, all of them would do that to her. Everyone is her enemy in this place, they wouldn''t accept her. Not now, not ever. The entire world is against her from the very start, from the very moment she crawled out from her mother''s guts and intestines.


    ''I guess it wouldn''t be bad to become a demon now, huh?''


    That''s what she thought.


    She''ll kill them, she''ll become the demon they wanted. If the world made her its enemy, then she will comply.


    With her magic power, she will kill them. She''s strong enough now. All of them wronged her, all of her suffering was because of them.


    If it''s a demon they want, then a demon she''ll be...


    *BOOM!!*


    (Scene Change)


    *BOOM!!*


    Hikaru looked up to one of the buildings and saw that it was on fire and a large part of it was destroyed. Students were screaming, and flying on top of that building was a girl. She was flying using the wind element, and in each of her hands was the fire element. She was shooting fire beams towards the students, killing them one by one.


    Hikaru only watched in amus.e.m.e.nt, while the headmaster watched in horror. Cristoff only watched from behind Hikaru with worried eyes.


    "Oh no! That demon finally showed her true self!" The headmaster shouted in horror. He was about to fly there with his wind magic, but he was stopped by Hikaru, who caught his leg in his hand.


    "Old man, tell me about that girl. It seems to be quite interesting that you call her a demon." Hikaru asked as held his left leg. He knew someone who has a similar nickname, and it''s his lover.


    "This is not the right time, your highness! She''s killing all of them as we speak!" The headmaster yelled, worried about his students.


    But Hikaru replied that chilled his bones.


    "Do you think I care? They called all die for all I care, just tell me why you people call her like that." Hikaru coldly and harshly said.


    ''So they were right, you''re just a heartless bastard!'' The headmaster thought angrily.


    Cristoff only stood on the sidelines, knowing full well that his majesty didn''t really care about other people. But for his majesty to ask about someone with that curiosity, she must be quite special.


    The headmaster looked between his students and the King, before he made his choice. He chopped off his left leg using his wind magic, he flinched a little and continued flying towards the top of the burning building. He healed it in mid-air with healing magic.


    Hikaru was a little bit surprised. Someone with that much determination, just to save those students. He threw away the leg towards the headmaster, hitting him in the head. The old man then slowly fell down to the ground, making Hikaru laugh a little.


    "Hahaha, that was hilarious. Imagine kicking your own head." He laughed. Cristoff, who''s behind him, was deeply disturbed.


    "But your highness, those students might die! If we don''t save them on time¡­!" Cristoff said to Hikaru worriedly.


    Hikaru glanced at Cristoff and said, "You don''t have to worry, here look." He made a giant hand made of mana by raising his own hand, and before Cristoff could blink, the giant hand had already reached the girl and was bringing her down towards Hikaru.


    The girl tried struggling out that giant hand but it was futile. Hikaru brought her in front of his face and observed her slightly.


    She had cute red bob hair, cute and round black eyes, smooth reddish skin, a permanent blush on her cheeks, and a cute little nose. She wore the traditional academy robe that is given to every student. Her robe was designed as pink and crest of fourth years in her right b.r.e.a.s.t pocket. She was short for her age, around 5''5.


    Hikaru smiled at her and said, "How can they call you a demon? You''re clearly just a cute little girl." He was taller than her by a large margin, that''s why he said that.


    Even though the girl was in a state of pure rage, she is suddenly attacked by a wave of embarrassment. Her heart started beating loudly in front of him, it was as if her heart was about to run away from embarrassment.


    "Huh, so you''re just like her," He means Azumi, "But you were not a pariah, but a girl that those foolish and stupid people thought to be a demon."


    The girl just killed a few of her classmates, yet his majesty is looking at her with such tender eyes. It was as if he was remembering something. Somehow, Cristoff felt a little pity towards the girl. It was obvious that those people thought she was a demon for some reason, and it''s not fun to be directed with all that unnecessary hatred. Maybe the reason she did that was because she was finally fed up with all her classmates looking at her like a monster, a demon.


    But this is not a rare occurrence in the Kingdom of Humans. Many nobles frame other people as demons to justify their disgusting deeds. The people allows them to do that because of that kind of reason. It''s a very disgusting thing to do to another human being, but Cristoff has grown numb to that kind of thing. He''s seen enough of that to be numb.


    The girl looks away and mutters, "Do you mean that?"


    Hikaru kept his sweet smile and replied, "Of course, uh, eh, what was your name?"


    "I don''t have a name." She mutters shyly.


    "Hmm, you poor thing." Hikaru then thought of something, "Then, from now on, your name is Shio."


    ''There is literally a building right there that''s just been burned by the girl he''s holding in his mana hand! And you''re in the middle of naming her!?''


    That''s basically what the students who are watching the scene are thinking. It was simply ridiculous how this King of theirs is favoring this demon over his own subjects. A few fourth year students just died! Most of them are in Tier-4 to Tier-5, making them talented in the Kingdom.


    But for Hikaru, it''s like he''s seeing a second Azumi. No, not in a romantic way, but some kind of nostalgia when he used to protect her when they were just children. Granted that he already had the mind of a teenager when he reincarnated here as a 9 years old child, but still.


    Well, he''ll help this girl and no one can defy him, unless they want to die.

 Chapter 103 - 96: Prelude To Chaos

    The girl-- no, Shio, for the first time in her life, someone treated her with no disgust on their face. Except for the matron in the orphanage, no one had treated her with kindness.


    But now, it would be taken away. She killed those students, and those law enforcers would arrest her and lock her in an underground dungeon. She''s sure that even the King wouldn''t save a murderer like her.


    "Why do you have that sad look on your face? C''mon, I''m not going away." Hikaru said, smiling kindly at her and carrying her gently in his arms.


    She looked away and said, "B-but won''t I be arrested for killing my classmates? The law enforcers in the Capital aren''t exactly kind to people like me."


    Hikaru went silent for a minute before he laughed a little and said, "Do you think that I''ll abandon you? Don''t worry about that, because from now on, you''ll be treated like a princess."


    "Fueh!?" She reacted cutely.


    He glanced at Cristoff and said, "Hey, from this day forward, Shio will be a princess of my kingdom. Announce that later."


    Cristoff took out a notebook and wrote something there before saying, "I''ve added it to the things I''ll be doing later. But your majesty, shouldn''t you be doing the announcement? You''re the monarch of this country, it won''t look good for your image if you have a lowly servant, like me, announce to the whole kingdom about such an important announcement. Appointing a commoner to become a princess isn''t exactly that common."


    Hikaru thought about it, then smiled and said, "It doesn''t really matter. And besides, you''re not exactly someone I look lowly at. You''re my loyal subject, am I right?"


    Cristoff then kneeled down and yelled, "Yes, your majesty!" He had tears pouring out of his eyes. To be appreciated by the King himself, it was an honor for someone like him.


    Hikaru just shook his head and thought, ''I should really get used to his antics.''


    He then looked around him and saw a lot of people staring at them, they are mostly students though. There were some teachers there, but Hikaru thought that they would be a lot stronger than this. Almost all of them are in between Tier-7 to 8. At least the headmaster is a Tier-9, but he''s supposed to be the strongest in the academy? What has the world gone to?


    ''Weaklings, all of them. Maybe I should change all the staff in school with powerful people? Adventurers should do it, I may be able to invite some diamond-rank adventurers to become the staff here.'' Hikaru said in his thoughts.


    He wanted to at least show off in front of all these people, but now his mood is ruined. He''ll take care about the staff changing later, but for now, he''s just going to wait in the castle for something exciting to happen.


    He''s just going to fight some bosses in the System, they''re the only creatures in this universe that can possibly kill him, or at least injure him. Maybe he''ll fight the Soul of Cinder next? He fought him once when he was weaker and died, but maybe he can defeat him now?


    Well, nothing''s going to change unless he tries.


    He held Shio in his arms as he turned around and said, "Let''s go, Cristoff." He then flew towards his castle while carrying Shio, and Cristoff followed along.


    The students were left dumbfounded, and some of the teachers were fuming. Most teachers in the academy are from noble families. The Royal Academy was bribed by the noble families to treat their heirs or family members better than most students.


    This entire academy is controlled by the noble families, making it virtually useless.


    The Royal Academy was supposed to be for all people to join, even the people in the slums, as long as they have enough talent. But the corrupt nobles decided to change that along with the former King. The Royal Academy is now nothing but a place for the younger nobles to hang out. It was even a miracle that Shio managed to become a Tier-7 Wizard under all this corruption, because most of the resources given to the academy by the monarch was all used for the betterment of the heirs of every noble family in the Capital.


    And the teachers and the headmaster get huge amounts of gold coins from the nobles after doing what they were asked for.


    That''s why the teachers were fuming, because once his highness decides to change something in the academy, they''re all basically f*cked.


    Hikaru didn''t care about those students who were killed because of one thing, they were all offspring by those nobles. He knew all about this before coming to the academy, and was about to teach them all a lesson. That was the meaning behind his words "I wanted to show off". Basically, he was about to spank every staff member on the butt in the school.


    But his mood was ruined when he saw the poor girl, Shio, like that. She just reminded him so much about Azumi that it was scary. Since taking her in wouldn''t harm him in any way, he decided to make her a princess of this Kingdom.


    (A Few Hours Later)


    Hikaru now sat behind his desk in the office of the King. This room is the workplace of the King, it''s where he does paperwork and stuff. But those things have already been taken care of by Cristoff, so this place is just for meetings and the like.


    In front of his desk was Cristoff handing some doc.u.ments to him while standing.


    Hikaru studied every doc.u.ment about the noble families in the Capital, and found something strange.


    Some high-ranking nobles didn''t do anything special for the Kingdom, and yet they''re the richest out of all of them. All of them had no special achievements, but they were high-ranking nobles. It was really bizarre for Hikaru, because these wealkings became nobles for no proper reason at all.


    "Cristoff, why are some of the nobles don''t have any good achievements towards the Kingdom, is it possible that they earned this position in the Kingdom because of their connections or families???? Hikaru asked.


    "Yes, your highness. Even though some nobles are plain useless and worthless, because of their familial connection towards some high-ranking nobles, they became nobles themselves. It''s something that has been taken as normal in the Kingdom, even though the people hated that kind of rule. These nobles are fat pigs living behind their names, but the former King didn''t do anything about them." Cristoff explained.


    Hikaru then thought deeply about it, then said, "Hmm, what are the chances of a civil war happening if I execute all of them for no reason?"


    Cristoff widened his eyes in shock, then he was pulled into a deep thought as he calculated the possibilities of a civil war happening, then he answered, "There''s an 80 percent chance that a civil war in the Kingdom will happen, if your highness decides to execute them." Hikaru was about to say something, when he added, "But we can lower those chances if we can catch them red handed on their crimes, or move them into a lower position and then execute them. But there''s another option, we can just assassinate them and no one would know."


    "Hahahahahaha!"


    Hikaru laughed madly as he thought of something fun.


    "What''s wrong, your highness?" Cristoff asked worriedly.


    "Hahaha, no, it''s nothing. It''s just that, why don''t we provoke them more? The more we provoke them, the more they will show their true colors. While some high-ranking nobles had made achievements to get to the position they''re currently in, there are useless nobles that achieved their position because they were related to a high-ranking noble. And the only way to cut them is to strip them off their position, but why don''t we add more to fuel the flames?"


    Cristoff gasped and said, "You mean¡­!"


    Hikaru stood up and turned around to look outside of his window, then said, "That''s right, let''s create chaos in the capital until we''ve flushed them all out. I''m gonna play them slowly until they break. After I''m done, all the nobles in the capital will be replaced. The old nobles shall be executed after I''m done with them."


    ''I would''ve never believed if someone else said that. But how is he going to do that? I''m quite curious.'' Cristoff thought.


    "But your highness, the casualty from creating a civil war will be around 30 percent of our total population!" He worriedly said.


    "Heh, did I say anything about a civil war? I''m just going to create chaos behind the scenes." Hikaru then took 10 pouches of gold coins and a paper, each pouch has 1000 gold coins in, "Use these gold coins to hire the best assassins and thieves. Order them to ruin every land of the nobles I''m going to list in this piece of paper. Tell the assassins that they shouldn''t kill anyone, because our goal for now is to ruin their lands. But if worse comes to worse, they''re allowed to kill to leave no witnesses. Do you understand?"


    ''Madness, this is pure madness!'' Cristoff yelled inside his head.


    "I understand, your highness. But do I tell them to steal too?" He asked.


    "No, they''re all allowed to steal anything and keep anything they stole. Do absolutely anything to ruin their luxurious lives!"


    ''He is really set on ruining the noble families'' lives, even going as far as whipping out 10,000 gold coins just to hire those people. But to ruin everything¡­'' Cristoff said in his thoughts.


    "But your highness, we still need more than this to hire people from the Assassins'' Guild and Thieves'' Guild. Another 10,000 should do it." He said.


    Hikaru just took out another 10 pouches of gold coins out of nowhere and said, "Tell me if you need any more, money is not a problem."


    Cristoff collected the pouches into his spatial bag and said, "No sir, this is enough."


    "Then you''re dismissed."


    "Yes, your majesty!" Cristoff then promptly left through the door.


    ''Soon, I''ll give the position of the King to Hiroshi. I should clean up some messes, so that Hiroshi can rule this Kingdom smoothly. There''s probably no item or ability to send him back to earth, so as his friend, I should make his life comfortable in this world. Heh, an a.d.u.l.t like me is friends with someone younger than me.''


    This year, Hikaru is officially 22 years old mentally.


    ''Now that I think about it, since when have I celebrated my birthday? I''ve even forgotten what the date was, it must''ve been somewhere around March.''


    From all the things he''ve been through, he has completely forgotten about his own birthday. Maybe dying over and over again messed up his memories? Well, he has no proof.


    Hikaru looked outside of the window behind his desk and thought, ''A lot of people are about to die, yet I don''t feel anything. I''ve really gotten used to killing, huh¡­''

 Chapter 104 - 97: How fun...

    And so, the chaos started with a single snap of his fingers.


    Countless nobles were robbed completely by the assassin guild and thieves'' guild. The businesses that the nobles had were ravaged and ransacked, but oddly enough, the employees working in those businesses were given a substantial amount of money. Those amount of gold coins were enough for them to live for 10 years without worrying about anything, they would probably start businesses for themselves.


    Of course, Hikaru did not attack the nobles who are really good people. Humble noble households are the minority, but there were still a few of them.


    And then, the proud nobles that were robbed were all left begging on the streets, They lost all of their properties due to the debts they''ve acc.u.mulated in such a short time, and those debts were also because of Hikaru.


    By destroying their livelihood, I.e their businesses, they could''ve gotten in a debt that they can at least pay off. But, the thing is, Hikaru did not just attack their legal businesses.


    He also attacked their illegal businesses, and a lot of people in the crime business were pissed off. And now, they, the trash nobles, could no longer earn anything because anything they earn will automatically be transferred to those criminals.


    Now, it is time for their "execution".


    Hikaru confiscated their lands due to their debts, and they were stuck living inside the Capital in small houses that they barely rented.


    Noble Households has a lot of people in them, around 10 to 20 people each household. They''re normally family members, that''s why, right now, in their small little house, mobs gathered around them.


    "Mama, I''m scared! A lot of people outside are cursing at us!" Says Regi Lars as he stared outside their window while hiding behind the curtain.


    This is the Lars Household, a noble family with a terrible reputation with the commoners. The Lars Family is a family of 5. The father, Harold Lars. The Mother, Hein Lars. The two twin daughters, Maya and Mala Lars. Then, Regi Lars, the oldest son.


    He is 22 years old, has no basic education, only knows how to fool around and drink, gamble, and play with women every single day. He''s basically the generic "Young Master" type. He has blonde hair, blue eyes, quite chubby appearance, and wore expensive clothing. But even with all this, he is still, in fact, quite ugly.


    But contrary to their trash of a brother, the two twin girls are talented towards magic. Maya is an archmage, while Mala is a Wizard. The both of them are 16 years old.


    Maya is a smart girl, she always aced her tests in the Royal Academy. She''s calm and collected in most situations, but now that their family is facing this predicament, she just can''t calm down. The mob outside this small house that they barely even rent are only equipped with farm equipment, or hammers that can literally smash their brains into mash potatoes. She has long blonde hair, bright blue eyes, perfectly shaped body, tall for her age, and quite small b.r.e.a.s.ts. She wore her uniform, which is a second-years'' robe, a pink robe with the number 2 crest on her b.r.e.a.s.t pocket.. She''s just about to go to the academy.


    While Maya is a smart girl, Mala is the opposite. She is a complete airhead who has no sense of direction. She just let her emotions control her, and is always in the present. She doesn''t think of the future or the past, she just wants to laze around and live a comfortable life. But she also has a serious side, which is rare to see. She has failed most of her tests, it was even a wonder how she could advance to Second Year.


    Mala has the same blonde hair as her sister, same blue eyes, same curves, and as tall as her sister. But, the thing is, her b.r.e.a.s.t is many times bigger than her sister''s.


    Both of them were just about to go to the academy, when a crowd of mob gathered in front of their doorsteps. They were yelling curses at them, and even their strict father has been left paralyzed by such things. While they don''t have their land and previous wealth, they were still nobles. Maya and Mala are baroness, their brother is a baron, and their parents are marquess and marchioness!


    These people think that they are the same level as them, but that''s not true at all! They still have their titles, they know that they can still rise to the top again with their titles.


    "I don''t know what to do anymore, Regi, my son. I''ve lost my precious jewels, and now, every noble woman will laugh at me. Look at us, we''re so poor! We can''t even afford bread, and the tuition fee for Maya and Mala''s education! Oh god, the tuition fee is 100 golds each." Heins muttered crazily.


    Regi slowly collapsed on the wall, despair had taken over his face. He knew that this is the end of their bloodline, even without any education.


    "Haha¡­hahaha...hahahahaha!" Regi started to go insane as he laughed with his eyes wide open while tears poured out of them.


    Harold sat at the table in the middle of their small house as he thought about something that could save their situation. Even if it''s a tiny hope, he''ll take it. He has nothing to lose anyway.


    Maya and Mala looked at each other, and they nodded knowingly. After they leave this house, they won''t go to school. They will leave the capital and just become adventurers in some town, preferably the town of Unity. Both of them are Tier-3s, so it probably won''t be a problem to become Copper or Iron rank adventurers. They could probably make a decent living while growing stronger.


    They no longer care for their family, even the airhead Mala can see that their parents and older brother are going insane.


    As they were all contemplating, suddenly, the mods outside stopped yelling. They could only hear the words "Your majesty!" or "Your highness!".


    Their father, Harold Lars, suddenly stood up and ran towards the door. He opened it and it revealed that the King himself was standing in front of their house.


    His majestic appearance completely entranced everyone. He wore plain clothes, a black T-shirt and white pants. But covering his plain clothes was the King''s robe that was made of a chimera''s hide.


    "Y-your majesty!" Harold kneeled down immediately out of fear. He was one of the nobles who were starved for a week inside that throne room, and he knew that this King of his can kill him as easily as breathing.


    Offending him right now is not the best choice of action.


    Hikaru then looked down on him and felt immense pressure from him. Cristoff, who was behind him, only stood still with a stoic face.


    "Harold Lars." Said Hikaru.


    "Y-yes, y-your majesty." He stuttered.


    "Tell me, would you do anything right now if I let your family live like they used to?" Hikaru asked- no, more like demanded.


    Harold was shocked, he never knew this cruel King would ask something like that. So he answered immediately with, "Yes, your majesty, I would do anything."


    He was no fool. He''s going to die anyway along with his wife, at least his son and daughters can live happily if he obeys his highness. He has nothing to lose anyway.


    Suddenly, he felt cold all over his body. He couldn''t lift his head because he knew he couldn''t do that, but he could feel the cold gazing stare of his majesty, the King,


    Hikaru smiled cruelly and said, "Then, go kill yourself with your wife." He dropped a knife in front of Harold.


    Time froze for him. He was prepared to do this, but it was still a shock for him. He would have to kill his wife and himself for his children, for him, that''s not a bad deal.


    He looked at his wife, who, in turn, looked back at him in fear. He picked up the knife that the King gave him, and slowly stood up. He then ran towards her,


    "N-no! Get away from me-- gak, blrgh¡­!"


    He stabbed his wife repeatedly in the throat, and tears poured out of his eyes. One last stab as he stared at his wife''s face for the last time. Snot, saliva, and tears poured out of his wife''s face. His clothes were stained by her blood, but he no longer cared.


    He then stood up and slowly turned around to look at Hikaru with a mocking face, "All hail his majesty, eh?" Then he stabbed his own head, and died.


    Hikaru only watched with an amused eyes.


    He would be doing this to other nobles, too.


    Truly, how fun...

 Chapter 105 - 98: A Warning to Keiko

    Hikaru continued "executing" them. Thousands died that day, but he didn''t care. He didn''t feel any guilt due to his justification that all of them were evil people, or it''s just that he was too used to this kind of thing.


    And so, he continued his regular routine of killing nobles and watching the people he dislikes suffer.


    And so, December arrived. This is his own calendar in this world, he''s been counting every single day he''s been here. The months in this world had other names. Like, December here is Dragon. While January is Slime. They just based the months off of the creatures that exist in this world, since they didn''t care that much.


    He gave Hiroshi 1000 Divine Blessings, so that whenever he''s extremely wounded he would be able to heal instantly. He healed his arm back and is now able to battle more efficiently.


    As all of this happened, Hikaru didn''t forget about the Royal Academy. He changed it completely from the inside out. He first killed the academy staff that tampered with other students'' grades just to kick them out, those were the poor students that came from commoner families. He beheaded the staff, along with the headmaster, and then he purged out the talentless students from the academy.


    He then changed the staffs with veteran Adventurers.


    And for an entire day, he searched the entire kingdom for talented children. He didn''t care if they were from a family of slaves, or from a family of nobles, he took them all in. It was easy finding them, since he can just use his mana sense to search for individuals with high mana energy. He found too many talented children, and even those who are talented with melee weapons.


    Of course, there are children that are way below the enrolling age. So, he gave them a pass that will enroll them into the academy without any problems.


    As he did all of those, his reputation with the people of the Kingdom skyrocketed. He was viewed as a kind and benevolent King. It was even rumored that a lot of people from the slums that became criminals, changed their ways and became kind people due to the King.


    Now, everybody can enroll in the Royal Academy even if they''re slaves themselves.


    But then, when they woke up in the morning, the King had already abolished the slavery businesses that were going around the Capital. The bodies of the slave merchants were paraded throughout the Capital, all of them were tortured to death.


    The King himself destroyed the entire illegal circles of wanted criminals, freed a lot of people that were suffering there, executed drug lords, more slave merchants, and any head of every illegal businesses that existed in the Kingdom.


    Before the month of Dragon came, the entire Capital was already purged.


    But it did not end with just that, the church of the goddess that was in the Capital, told everyone that the King is an evil being who will only bring destruction to everyone.


    But the people didn''t believe them and started rallying against them. Some fanatics were yelling crazy things about the goddess being angry, but the people of the Kingdom didn''t care. That King of theirs helped them more than the church could, and now they say that their King is evil?


    That is pure bullshit.


    And now, it came to this.


    (Scene Break)


    Hikaru floated atop the church with his piercing gaze. He knew that the church of the goddess was connected to crimes like human trafficking. Obliterating them now is the most efficient way to get rid of them for good.


    The church below him was huge. The church looked simple if they''re talking about decorations, but he knew that there''s something more under that.


    He narrowed his eyes as he saw people in white robes walking out of the church. There are a hundred of them or so. There was also a pope among them, but that means the head of the church personally came out.


    The pope was an old man with skinny features, sunken eyes, pale skin, long withering hair, and a tall figure. He looks like he''s about to die, but Hikaru knew more. That old man seems to be using the life force of others to fuel his own. But he can''t take away their youth, that''s why he looks like this.


    "What can we do for you?" The pope asked. His voice was deep and there was something wrong with his throat. He sounded almost like a zombie.


    Hikaru noticed that the pope didn''t say "Your highness" or "Your majesty". This old man must be an arrogant man, but Hikaru can change that.


    He floated down and landed in front of the priests and cardinals of the church.


    "Hmm, that worthless goddess of yours seems to have a talent for gathering fanatics for her." He said with the intent of insulting them.


    "Don''t you dar-


    *POP*


    The priest who spoke couldn''t finish his sentence when his head popped. Blood spurted everywhere, and the other priests started screaming in fear.


    "Aaaaahhh! Blood!"


    "Kyaaahh!"


    Hikaru smirked and said, "Speaking like that to me won''t help your church, you know? I came here today to destroy your church, and execute all of you for crimes of treason against the Crown. You know that much at least, right? Pope?"


    The pope glared at him and spoke, "You are far too arrogant, young King. The goddess will smite you for your sins!"


    "Hah! She? Smite me for my sins? Hahahahaha!" He laughed hard, "What sins are you talking about, pope? I am far stronger than your goddess, I can probably beat her with just my erect d.i.c.k! How laughable!"


    "You and your vulgar mouth!" The Pope yelled in anger.


    Hikaru didn''t speak any longer and, with a snap of his fingers, all the people around the Pope dropped dead on the ground.


    He then disappeared and appeared in front of the Pope. He grabbed the neck of the old pope, lifted him up, and said, "You feeble old man, a huge hypocrite like you shouldn''t exist. You accuse me of sins, yet did you ever look at your own sins? You are worse than me."


    *Cracked* *Squelch*


    Without any hesitations, he crushed the Pope''s neck into a bloody mess. The head of the Pope dropped to the ground along with the body but separately.


    He then took the Pope''s soul and destroyed it.


    He dusted off his hands and said to himself as he started flying, "Hmm, what should I eat for dinner tonight?"


    (Scene Break)


    Hikaru has been saving up to this day for a very special potion. That potion can allow him to turn into a human for 24 hours. Yes, you read that right, it''s a potion that can turn him into a human for a day. You may see this as useless, but the great thing about that potion is that his s.e.m.e.n can actually i.m.p.r.e.g.n.a.t.e someone. And there''s a 100% Chance guarantee that he will get twins, instead of just one.


    And there''s a 50% chance that he will get a triplet, a 10% chance that he will get quadruplets, and a 1% chance that he will get a quintuplet.


    All of this information was provided by the system. The only problem was the price, it was 1 Trillion Souls per potion. It was as if the system was trying to make him give up on the potion.


    The potion is called "A Taste of Humanity".


    And now, he has 1,100,000,000,000 Souls. It was more than enough for him to buy that potion, and he can finally i.m.p.r.e.g.n.a.t.e Azumi and Hinata later once he returns to the Elemental Nation. He''s almost done with this planet anyway. The only thing he''s waiting for is for the Demonic Empire and Beastmen Kingdom to form their treaty and invade the Kingdom of Humans.


    He''s already caught a whiff of what''s going on, he''s just waiting right now. He''ll destroy their armies and bring them into the depths of despair. He''ll force them to form a treaty with the Kingdom of Humans. He''ll leave the Elven Kingdom to Hiroshi''s hands, he is sure that Hiroshi will be able to form a treaty with them.


    Once peace comes, he''ll leave this planet and return to Azumi and Hinata. After that, he''ll wait for 9 month to kill Chaortos. He''s already done his preparations to beat Chaortos, and he made sure that he will win this battle.


    After all, he wouldn''t fight a losing battle now, would he?


    (Scene Change)


    The dark hero, Kyouga Sumitsu. He was a nerd who was once bullied by the delinquents in the school, now he''s the one bullying them. He became exactly like his bullies and bullied other people too. But he is an S-Rank hero, so they couldn''t do anything since he was favored by the goddess. He has short black hair, round face, small eyes, and a bob haircut.


    The healer hero, Saiko Matsunaki. She is looked down by the other S-Ranks due to her abilities being too useless, since they could just drink high-ranked potions. But she proved to be useful when they lost their limbs while fighting monsters. She could regenerate their limbs instantly with her healing magic, but at a cost. She felt the physical pain of the people she healed, thus causing PTSD. She feared healing people, because she knew that their pain would be transferred to her. But since she was weak, she was forced to eat a drug that will numb her nervous system at the cause of her brain being numb too.


    The group of heroes forced her to heal for them, and she is fed with that drug to cancel all the pain she''s feeling. She became an addict, and her brain turned to mush. Now, she''s nothing but a slave for the heroes.


    Then there''s the brawler hero, he personally discarded his name and named himself Death Rider. By his name, you can guess that he''s a weeb. He found that name cool and stuck with it. There''s nothing really special about him, except him being an S-Class. But, the thing is, he is a huge pervert. No, he doesn''t harass girls, he harasses boys. He would peek on them while they''re washing themselves, or he would touch them in inappropriate places. But even then, they couldn''t do anything. He was too strong.


    The boys in the group of heroes endured his s.e.x.u.a.l harassment towards them, since they couldn''t do anything.


    And Keiko Sumihara, the Spear Hero. We all know about her, so let''s move one.


    The heroes were planning to do a coup d''etat.


    Keiko was against it, since she knew just how powerful the King is but the others didn''t care. They said that the goddess is protecting them, so there''s no way they could get killed that easily. But Keiko knew, the guy, Hikaru, is not afraid of the goddess. The goddess hadn''t even contacted them since he appeared.


    The goddess was afraid of him, the reason is unknown to Keiko.


    These people are arrogant enough to think that the King will be defeated by them, when countless people have tried and they all failed. Even the Church was just destroyed earlier and the goddess still hadn''t done anything. It was as if she had abandoned them, and that made Keiko slightly despair a little.


    Without the goddess, the heroes will lose their privilege. But it seems like she''s still blessing them, but for how long?


    Keiko doesn''t care about her fellow heroes, but if they offend the new King in some way, they''re absolutely dead. It made no sense to her how stupid these children can get. They''ve already seen him kill a hero without even moving a finger, it''s just unreal how stupid they can get.


    She walked back into her own room in the castle, opened the door, entered the dark room of hers, and suddenly felt something restraining her. Some kind of rope was wrapped around her body and she couldn''t move.


    *Thud*


    She fell to the ground with a thud, and only then was she able to see who tied her up. She saw the King, Hikaru, lying on her bed with a book on his hand. He was extending his other hand and she saw a rope made of mana coming out of his hand.


    "Hmm," He spoke, "I really can''t believe you haven''t figured out who I am after all this time. I''m slightly hurt, Keiko-chan." He mockingly said.


    "W-what?" She reacted.


    He dropped the book he was reading and covered his face with his hands. He stood up and walked towards her until his feet were just about to touch her head, then he removed his hands from his face.


    When he removed his hands, Keiko was shocked to see a different face on Hikaru. Instead of the usual handsome look of his, there was the face of her ex.


    "Hmm, I don''t know if this is the right face, since I''ve forgotten about my previous face. But hello, Keiko-chan! It''s been almost 7 years since we''ve met, or was the time different on Earth?" Hikaru said while smiling.


    "Y-you¡­ h-how...!?" She can barely speak due to her shock at seeing him here.


    "Okay, let''s make this short. You see, I know about all that coup d''etat stuff your hero group is planning. I hope that you won''t join them, since we were quite close in the past after all. Killing you would put a certain amount of guilt in me, as we''ve shared a rather intimate relationship in the past. But if you''re really going to join them¡­" He changed his face back and squatted down to grab her neck. He lifted her up and closed the distance between his face and her face.


    "I''ll make you suffer, along with your buddies." It was obvious, the tone of his voice, the look on his eyes, and how his expression changed. He was lying about feeling guilty¡­

 Chapter 107 - 100: War On The Horizon

    Hikaru woke up with a headache after having that strange dream. He was in his bed and beside him was Shio. He observed his surroundings and noticed that not a single second had passed in reality!


    He sat on his bed and thought, ''What was that? Who was that girl? She said that I know her, but I can''t remember anyone who looks like her. Besides, there''s no way I would''ve forgotten someone as eccentric as her. There must be something I''m missing, something very important¡­ Is it the system? No, that cannot be! But that would be the only explanation I can muster right now. No, it is not the system. Because, why now? The system could''ve just introduced itself right from the very beginning, It just doesn''t add up.''


    He continued to brainstorm for any ideas on who that strange little girl is, but he found not a single clue about what she said.


    ''Ah, screw it. There''s literally not a single clue in my memories that could remember her. I''ll wait for the next time I enter that dream world again. But, even though I don''t know who she is, I am sure that that strange girl is a very powerful entity. For her to completely combine my dream world and her dream world together, she must have a very powerful psychic abilities, or at least something similar. I have to be careful from now on.'' He reminded himself.


    You see, he only noticed it earlier, but he was sure that that strange girl morphed that dream world on her own. From a grassy plain, into a winter plain, then to grassy plain again. She was playing games with him, and that last part where she kissed him almost shocked him. Well, she was a bad kisser, but that doesn''t matter.


    What matters right now is to find out who she is. An entity of a higher realm, or a creature that has ascended to divinity. He doesn''t know what her goal was, but he will find out sooner or later.


    As he focused on who that strange girl was, he suddenly noticed a huge amount of mana sources coming from each direction of the Kingdom. They were a bit far away, but from the speed they were going, they could reach the Kingdom in a few minutes!


    ''Hmm, enough about that girl, for now. Those mana sources must be the Demonic Empire and the Beastmen Kingdom''s alliance. They finally decided to attack, without a warning at that.'' Hikaru thought quite sinisterly.


    Usually, in wars between species, the attacking Kingdom, or Empire, must first warn the Kingdom they''re attacking about their attack. It was something the decision of the past Kings and Emperors, so they shouldn''t be able to avoid that. But, even then, they have the gall to attack a Kingdom that could easily wipe them out. Albeit they don''t know it yet.


    Hikaru stood up and equipped his Black Knight''s Spear, before going out of his room. He didn''t forget to give Shio a little peck on her forehead before leaving.


    When he went out of the door, he found Cristoff and Hiroshi waiting for him.


    "Your majesty, I saw the army of beastmen and demons from atop the castle tower. We need to evacuate the civilians, and prepare our army of soldiers to protect the Kingdom." Cristoff said with urgency in his voice.


    "I know, I felt them the moment they decided to stop hiding. Slaughtering them would be a piece of cake, but if we did that¡­" Hikaru stopped for a moment as he thought about the consequences.


    Hiroshi stood against the wall and said while crossing his arms, "The people from their nation would harbor more hatred towards humans, right?"


    Hikaru glanced at Hiroshi and nodded, "Yeah, humanity has done a lot of things towards them. And most of them were not pleasant. If we massacre that army now, it could ignite the first world war! Even the Elven Empire would be forced to join one side, and they would likely join the Beastmen Kingdom and the Demonic Empire alliance."


    Hiroshi had a look of dread on his face. He knew his friend could slaughter them all with ease, but the aftermath would be terrible. Elves and Beastmen are highly connected to nature itself, while demons are a mystery.


    So, if Hikaru decides to commit genocide to Elves and Beastmen, it would anger mother nature herself. Humanity might just go extinct if that really happens. Then, there''s fairies, the creatures closest to godhood in this world. It is said in olden tales that fairies once brought famine to demonkind because of something they did against nature, and the effects of that famine can still be seen to this day.


    "Your majesty, what should we do?" Cristoff asked worriedly.


    Compared to the both of them, Hikaru wasn''t really concerned. Why? Because he has the power to clear this mess.


    "Cristoff, Hiroshi, just stay in the castle. I''ll be going alone."


    "B-but your majesty!"


    "No, Hikaru''s right. We would only get in his way if we go to the battlefield, and we might get in the middle of the crossfire between him and the alliance." Hiroshi said to Cristoff.


    Cristoff backed down and just sighed. After all, he knows his majesty''s strength. He should be fine going against them.


    (Scene Break)


    Outside the Kingdom lies the Great Plains. The Great Plains is a vast plain that almost extends endlessly in the sight of humans. Around the great plains is a forest that is not infested by monsters.


    Right now, the entire Capital is surrounded by hundreds of thousands of soldiers from beastmen and demons. The citizens of the Kingdom already saw them and started running away, knowing that a war is about to happen.


    The beastmen roared with rage and demons looked at the capital with hunger in their eyes. And, in the very back of the army was the two leaders of this army The Demon Emperor and the Beast King.


    They sat on top of their horses as they chatted.


    "What a fine day this is, the thirst for vengeance that my kind has longed for centuries is finally coming today." The Beast King said as if he was reborn, his body thirsted for the blood of humans that killed their kind over and over again.


    "My kind''s hunger is finally being fulfilled today. As we discussed two days ago, I get to keep all the corpses of humans while you can take their riches." The Demon Emperor said to the Beast King.


    "Hmph, you don''t have to remind me. I know our deal well." The Beast King responded.


    "Look, the first human to appear." The Demon Emperor pointed at the front of their army.


    Hikaru observed the army in front of him. They were all equipped with armors made of silver, while few wore armors of higher qualities. They must be the generals. At the very back was the monarchs of each race, and Hikaru knew just what to do for this army to retreat instantly.


    He knew that there''s no need to talk to these people. They look like they''re ready to kill any human in sight instantly. Talking to them would be a waste of time.


    *Fwoosh!*


    Somebody threw a spear at him, and Hikaru just caught the tip between his fingers. Then, with little to no effort, he sent it back almost immediately to the one who threw it.


    It was a beastman with wolf ears. The spear that Hikaru threw back pierced the beastman''s armor, then pierced his skulls. The spear went through his head, making a large gaping hole in it!


    Hikaru had a wide smile on his face as spread his arms wide open and he yelled, "Come, don''t hold back, for all of you will feel true despair today!"

 Chapter 108 - 101: Killing Thousands

    Demi-humans, or beastmen, has always been a target of ridicule by humans. Their race were enslaved, forced to sell their bodies, drugs forcefully shoved down their throats, and many, many depraved activities.


    So, they rose against the humans and built their own Kingdom. But even then, that did not stop humans from torturing some of their kin for fun.


    The Beast King has a deep hatred towards humans as a whole. His one and only goal in life is to slaughter humanity to extinction. After many years, the beastmen managed to become equal footing to humans, and they did the same thing to them. They hunted any humans that dared to enter their territories, and some ate human meat.


    It was now their turn to become the hunters¡­ or so they thought.


    Turns out, the Kingdom of Humans summoned heroes from another dimension with the help of their goddess. And those "Heroes" defended humans, going as far as to kill the current Demon Emperor at the time.


    But then, the unexpected happened.


    The leader of the heroes, the Dark Hero, fell in love with the daughter of the Demon Emperor. When they learned of that, the very same people the heroes were trying to protect, rallied against them. They cursed their name, saying that the Heroes have been tainted with the evil energy of the demons. They became even more enraged when they learned that the Heroes were going against their beloved goddess.


    Humanity, unexpectedly, turned against the Heroes.


    The Heroes mysteriously disappeared one day, and no one knew why. It may be because they turned against the goddess, or they just hid themselves.


    That was only 10 years ago, yet the people have already forgotten what happened.


    And now, the current Demon Emperor and his demonkin.


    The Demon Emperor right now is a half-beastmen and half-demon. His parents were very powerful people in their Kingdoms, respectively. His mother was a demon, a succubus to be exact, and his father was a White Lion Beastman.


    He inherited his looks from his father, while he inherited his mother''s magical power. He has a white shaggy main, rough-looking face, fierce black eyes, and 2 times taller than a regular human.


    The reason he decided to invade the Kingdom of Humans was because of resources. Their Empire is running out of resources, and he had to think of something quick. His people were suffering due to the lack of food. He, the Demon Emperor, couldn''t bear to look at his starving subjects and decided to just invade the Kingdom of Humans.


    But he knew that his forces wouldn''t be enough, and he formed an alliance with the Beast King.


    The two races have something similar between them, and that all of them were forsaken by the goddess herself. Humans got the blessings from the goddess, giving them fertile lands to farm their crops, huge trees, many edible animals, and fertility. But the two races only had their strength and magic, even then they couldn''t make their land fertile by themselves.


    Humanity was blessed from the very start, and that irritated them even further.


    And now, it came to this.


    The two monarchs saw a single man in front of their army. He wore nothing but aristocratic clothes, and a long black halberd behind his back.


    He was smiling at them madly as he said, "Come, don''t hold back, for all of you will feel despair today!"


    That riled up their entire forces, and all of them attacked without the orders from their superiors. But that matters not for the two monarchs, they, too, are quite pissed that a single human dares to challenge them all on his own.


    They have an army of 600,000, while the Kingdom of Humans only have around 300,000. They have double the amount of their forces, so there''s no way they would lose.


    Yet, why do they have a bad feeling about this?


    Meanwhile, with Hikaru¡­


    He smiled inwardly as he thought, ''I wonder what reactions I will get from those heroes, once I''ve brought this entire army to their knees.''


    """""Uooooohh!!"""" The collective battle cries of his enemies.


    The earth rumbled and the people of the Kingdom saw what was happening outside of their walls. They fell into despair when they saw how many soldiers their enemy had. The citizens were evacuated into the underground shelter by the soldiers of the Kingdom, this was ordered by the King''s right-hand man, Cristoff.


    All of them knew that their King was fighting alone, but even then they still had faith that their King would be able to defeat them.


    Hikaru did not move, he only stared at his enemies.


    "As expected, they''re all weaklings." He said as time suddenly slowed down in his perspective.


    He waved his hand and thousands of his enemies lost their heads. He ran towards them as he drew his Black Halberd, and he slashed towards them a couple of times!


    With that, he returned back to his original position as time began to move again.


    The moment time moved normally again, many demons and beastmen fell to the ground, and all of them lost their heads.


    "Wha- What happened!?" The Beast King roared as he saw a hundred thousand of his army fall.


    "Tha- that''s simply impossible! How!?" The Demon Emperor reacted almost immediately.


    The army stopped their advancement when they saw their comrades fall to the ground. It was¡­ a gruesome sight. The outside of the Capital was painted in blood, heads were rolling on the ground, thousands of corpses were being pecked on by the ravens that suddenly appeared out of nowhere.


    There was only one explanation to this¡­


    "You! Who are you!?" The Beast King pointed at Hikaru, who had a crazy look on his face. While he was quite far-away from the Beast King, he can still hear him due to his heightened senses.


    Hikaru gracefully bowed, as if he was mocking them, and said, "I am the Monarch of this Kingdom, I simply killed some insects that dared to enter MY land."


    The Beast King exploded in anger and yelled, "Huh!? Who do you think you''re calling insects!? They were all precious soldiers that I nurtured myself!"


    The Demon Emperor remained in silence, even though everyone could tell that he was seething in anger. Thousands of his precious soldiers died, too.


    Suddenly, Hikaru started cackling madly as he said, "Hahahaha! Precious soldiers!? They''re mostly worth nothing in my eyes! Here, let me show you how weak they are!" With another swing from his Halberd, thousands died again in front of the two monarchs.


    Even though he wasn''t touching them directly, the force of each of his swings is enough to cut reality itself! He calls this, [Reality Slash]. This technique of his isn''t really a form of magic, it''s just that he''s physical strength is so powerful that he can grab reality now.


    "Monster¡­" The Demon Emperor muttered, "Beast King, what are you doing!? Order them to retreat now! All of us are no match against this monster!" He roared towards his fellow monarch.


    "But he''s just one man! With our numbers, we can defeat h-" He was cut off.


    "You imbecile! That "one man" can slaughter us all in less than a second! Do you know what he did earlier? He was able to slash through reality itself with pure physical strength! Use your brain for once!" The Demon Emperor yelled at the Beast King.


    "Hey, what are you two talking about?" A voice came from behind him, and it was eerily close.


    The Beast King widened his eyes.


    The Demon Emperor froze. He could feel his presence behind him. He felt as if he was about to die. His heart thumped loudly, his white mane started to wither and fall off from his body. His face grew a hundred years older. His skin was as pale as white. He felt like many years had passed, even though only a few seconds passed.


    He suddenly grew older in a few seconds due to fear!


    "Oi, I''m talking to you, Lion thingy." Hikaru said from behind him.


    The Demon Emperor turned around on top of his horse as he scratched the back of his head and nervously said, "Ahahah...hahaha, I didn''t expect for your highness to come here. You shouldn''t have, what if we dirtied your clothes? We were just visiting to go sightseeing, we will be retreating now. Ahahahahaha!"


    Hikaru grabbed both of their throats and said, "I have little patience for people like you. Give me one good reason why I shouldn''t kill the two of you right now?"


    The Demon Emperor then struggled, "Your¡­ hand¡­"


    Hikaru let go of his neck, then said, "I''ll give you a few seconds to speak, or I''ll send you to hell..."


    "Wai-Wait! We can negotiate! Uh, eh, uh, eh, how about forming an alliance! If we form an alliance, our respective Kingdoms can live in peace! We''ll open our trade routes towards your Kingdom! We Demons can make all kinds of potions, and anything alchemy related! We can trade you that!" The Demon Emperor said in panic.


    "How about the beastmen?" Hikaru turned his eyes on the Beast King, and released him from his grip.


    "What can you make?" He asked the Beast King.


    The Beast King looked at him with enraged eyes and said, "We''ll never surrender to you humans. You''ve taken a lot from us! We can never forgive all of you!"


    Hikaru''s eyes turned icy as he said, "Then, so be it." He raised his hand and the Beast King closed his eyes, waiting for his death.

 Chapter 109 - 102: Mad Toneri

    (Back on The Elemental Nation)


    It''s been a month since Hikaru suddenly left. His two spouses were quite mad when he just disappeared just like that, but they knew they can''t do anything. It''s not like they know where he is going.


    Konoha has flourished more than ever. After fixing the village after Pain''s attack, they expanded the village by at least two times. More and more people are coming to live in Konoha.


    Previously, there were only a hundred-thousand people living in Konoha, now it has been doubled to 200,000! In the future, many strong shinobis will emerge from Konoha, along with people that are talented in other fields of expertise.


    After the five major villages signed the peace treaty, numerous small villages also followed along. Throughout the entire elemental nation, the peace that everyone wished for, has finally been achieved. There are still a few rogue ninjas or so, but it will only be a matter of time before they are eradicated.


    But right now, even in the Era of Peace, Konoha still takes the spot of the number one powerhouse in the entire land. With S-Rank Shinobis like Itachi, Azumi, Sasuke, Tsunade, Kakashi, and many more, no hidden village can compare to them in terms of power. And not even talking about their hidden monster, a monster that everyone saw, a monster that brought the end of the great fourth shinobi war, Hikaru Hiroaki.


    While his name didn''t sound threatening at all for people who didn''t know who he was, the people of the elemental nation knew just how powerful he was. A human capable of cleaving the heavens, killing the Ten-Tailed Beast. Thousands of stories spread throughout the land, everyone knew of his name.


    In all those stories, there''s a single information that''s never wrong; that he is too powerful.


    As long as those shinobis are alive, no one would dare to touch the village of Konoha. Unless they want a true beating, that is.


    (Scene Change)


    "Ahn~ Hinata-chan!" Azumi m.o.a.ned as Hinata "ate" her p.u.s.s.y.


    *Slurp*


    They were having intimate yuri s.e.x on top of their bed. It''s been like this since Hikaru left so suddenly, and since they had a lot of pent up s.e.x.u.a.l frustrations, they decided to just make out with each other.


    Hinata "ate" her p.u.s.s.y until she came on her face, making a lot of mess. Hinata then moved on, she inserted her entire arm in Azumi''s hole so suddenly that the blonde hair girl''s eyes rolled to the back of her head.


    "Ahn~~ Hinata-chan!" She yelled her name due to pleasure.


    "C''mon, do me too." Hinata said in a sultry voice.


    Azumi nodded and made a clone, she then ordered the clone to do the same to Hinata.


    Hinata then faced her butt on the clone''s face, before the clone also rammed her fist into her p.u.s.s.y.


    She, too, rolled her eyes into the back of her head with her tongue sticking out.


    They didn''t stop pleasuring themselves until the sun had already setted. After noticing the time, they left the hotel room they rented solely for making out, and returned to their home.


    This was their routine everyday, since Hikaru suddenly left. They had no choice, they''ve been too addicted to this kind of pleasure. Hikaru, after all, "trained" Azumi since she was 12 for this kind of action.


    Normally, when Hikaru and Azumi have their special bonding time with each other, he would grow his p*nis up to 20 inches and 4 centimeters thick. He had the ability to change the sizes of any part of his body, making him a very desirable partner in bed. He can even change his form into a kid, or into an a.d.u.l.t. It really depends on him. For now, he likes the appearance of a 16 years old boy.


    When they entered their house, they saw Tayuya waiting for them. She bowed to them respectfully and then greeted them, "Welcome back, Azumi-sama, Hinata-sama. Kushina-sama and Kin are cooking dinner. Minato-sama has still not returned, he is still on a mission."


    After Hikaru left, they revealed to the entire village that the Fourth Hokage and his wife has been revived, but they didn''t reveal who revived them. They''ve been living a normal life so far, but Minato decided to return to being a shinobi. He''s been taking S-Ranks missions from the current Hokage, Itachi Uchiha.


    Those S-Rank Missions came from people needing help, like chakra beasts stampede or Krakens suddenly appearing in the underground sewers.Though, most S-Rank Missions came from royalties from another country, like guarding them until they reached their destinations. They''re quite easy, actually.


    Even though peace has been brought to the land, people with dark intentions are still around there, waiting in the shadows. S-Rank Rogue ninjas has been appearing lately. They''ve been invading small villages in groups lately, but they were still taken care off with a bit of difficulty.


    But there''s nothing to worry about this situation, not yet at least.


    "Ah, okay. We''ll be changing our clothes, they''re a bit sweaty." Azumi said as she and Hinata walked towards the stairs that lead to their room.


    Tayuya bowed again and returned to help Kushina and Kin.


    (Scene Change)


    "Hikaru, how dare you! I trusted you, yet you dare betray me like this!?" Toneri yelled to no one. He''s been trying to get over the fact that Hikaru took Hinata as his lover, even though Toneri has been in love with Hinata before him.


    He stayed inside his base, inside the moon.


    He''s sitting at his work desk with a crazy look on his face. He unraveled a wide paper, printed on the paper were all his plans to take down Hikaru, or at least kidnap Hinata.


    "Hehehehehe, hahahahaha!! Soon, soon! My plan to take Hinata as my bride while destroying that worthless planet of theirs will unfold! I just need a few months, and the Tenseigan will be completed! It''s too bad that the old man is dead, but I will make this somehow work. I''ve been planning to wipe out the entire shinobi civilization for months now, if it weren''t for that Hikaru!" He said his name with venom in his voice.


    It''s true that the moment he decided to stay here along with that old man, he has been planning to take the hand of Hinata for marriage. Since he was a child, his father would bring him to the elemental nation to observe the Hyuga Clan. His father once suggested that he should marry the heiress of the Hyuga Clan, so he took that to heart and has been planning that since.


    He is the last of his clan, the branch family of the Otsutsuki Clan. That old man that stayed with him on the moon was his uncle, his mother''s brother. He died of old age a few years ago, and since then, he''s been living here alone on the moon.


    Once he acquires the Tenseigan, he''ll be able to at least match Hikaru in terms of battle prowess. At least that''s what he thinks.


    While Toneri can indeed destroy planets, Hikaru is on another level entirely. A single punch of his that has no magic power in it can destroy a planet ten-times larger than the elemental nation. He can also compress a planet into something as big as his hand. So, yeah, there''s just no way Toneri would be able to win against him.


    It''s simply impossible.


    Not to mention his overpowered weapons that can destroy planets with a single swing, armors that can protect him from the strongest attack of a major god, rings that can amplify his overall strength.


    There is really no way Toneri can put up a fight against Hikaru. But, well, he''s already delusional at this point. He can no longer think rationally.


    It''s only a matter of time before he is killed, or destroyed by Hikaru.


    (Scene Change)


    (Back To Hikaru)


    The Beast King is a dog, a mutt. He wasn''t even of royal blood, yet he became the monarch that protects his people. He absolutely abhors humans, they were the ones who slaughtered his family after all. He was nothing but a peasant before he became the King, but with his hatred towards humans, he managed to grow powerful enough to become the King of the Beastmen Kingdom.


    He knew that he wouldn''t be escaping this today, even after all his hardsh.i.p.s to become the King of his people, he would still die a dog''s death.


    Hikaru raised his hand, ready to slap the monarch''s head off, when he suddenly heard a voice in his head.


    ''Please don''t kill them, they are my beloved children!''


    The voice sounded almost like the girl in his dreams, the one who played with him back then. The voice was shaking, as if it was scared.


    He stopped for a moment and decided that killing this mutt won''t be profitable. He''ll need someone to lead the entire Beastmen Kingdom, after all. He developed another plan, something *fun*.


    "Oi, Beast King, Demon Emperor. If you fight against two of my subordinates and win, I''ll let you two go along with your army. But if you don''t win, I''ll kill all of your people that are standing in my land right now. If you reject my offer, I''ll go to your Kingdom and trust me, when I go there, it won''t be a pretty sight." Hikaru said in a demanding voice.


    The Beast King gritted his teeth, who knew that his Kingdom and his army would be held hostage here today. It wasn''t even realistic, since no one in history has been able to do this. He wanted to reject it, but he had no choice. It was either his Kingdom or his life.


    "...I accept." The Beast King reluctantly accepted.


    "I, too, accept." The Demon Emperor also accepted without any reluctance.


    Hikaru clasped his hands with a beam of smile and said, "Very good, you two aren''t monarchs for no reason after all."


    "But since you guys might not take this seriously, I''ll do this." *Snap* With a snap of his fingers, all of their soldiers were suddenly inside the borgs that Hikaru made.


    "If one of you dares to break the deal, those borgs that your soldiers are in, will produce spikes that will instantly pierce them all over their bodies. So be careful of your actions, or they might just not live."


    "You¡­!" The Beast King wanted to rip that smile off of his face. He wanted to rip his head off, but he couldn''t, because he was too weak.


    The Demon Emperor didn''t speak, because there''s no doubt he''ll win. Before this guy appeared, he was the strongest person in the land. There''s no way he will lose to some humans.

 Chapter 110 - 103: Leaving Without A Word

    "H-How?" The Demon Emperor muttered while kneeling down in pain. Statics of yellow arcs would appear around his body every now and then, evident of Hiroshi''s paralysis.


    "It''s simple, it''s because you''re weak. Did you really think that you could beat a Tier 15 such as me? How delusional." Hiroshi said with contempt. Yes, he became a Tier 15 in just less than a month or so. Hikaru trained him in the harshest way possible, to him at least, and had him kill a bunch of powerful monsters; such as the King of Basilisks.


    With Cristoff, he just became a Tier 12 Warrior, so it was quite a difficult fight since The Beast King is also a Tier 12 Warrior. But in the end, he beat him thanks to the weapon given to him by his Majesty.


    Warriors are people who use any kind of melee weapon, like a sword or a dagger. Assassins fall into the category of a warrior.


    Both of the monarchs were on the ground, defeated. They didn''t think that other humans were able to get this strong, even the former King of Humans wasn''t this strong.


    Hiroshi looks down at the defeated form of the Demon Emperor and asked, "Demon Emperor, is it true that you have an item that could transfer me back to my world?"


    "H-Hehehe, you must''ve gone crazy. I don''t have anything like that, and even if I did, I won''t give it to you." The Demon Emperor sat up and looked at Hiroshi with steeled eyes, "Kill me now, isn''t that what you heroes are supposed to do?"


    "Hmph, don''t lump me in with those fools. I''m not like them." Hiroshi said as he turned around, and walked away from the defeated Demon Emperor.


    The Dog Demon simply laughed at his own miserable self. Even that guy deems him too weak to be killed. How shameful, truly.


    He turned his head to look at Hikaru, who''s comfortably sitting in mid-air, and said, "You, why do you not kill us so? I''ve been defeated by your subordinates, so as per our deal, you can kill me and my men now."


    Hikaru did not look at him as he spoke, "Heh, I''m not going to. It''s a waste to kill all of you. You see, the guy you just fought, Hiroshi, is going to become the King of my Kingdom in a few days."


    "What''s that gotta do with me?" The dog demon asked.


    "You are going to be there for him, no, not just you but your entire Kingdom will help him achieve his goals. To kill the goddess, Deagaia." Hikaru said while floating in mid-air.


    The mutt demon laughed at the ridiculity of this situation, "Hahahahaha! To attempt to kill the goddess is simply ridiculous, but I have no choice, do i?"


    "Of course you don''t." Hikaru simply said. Truthfully, he can kill the goddess anytime he wants, but he will leave that to Hiroshi. He already gave him a bunch of god slaying equipment that would surely help him kill that miserable goddess. While he dislikes that goddess, he also doesn''t hate her. After all, every living being has done something unforgivable. Even he, himself has done many unforgivable things, it''s just that he''s more powerful than most people.


    Hikaru, with a snap of his fingers, canceled all the borgs that he used to imprison all of those soldiers. He then said to the Demon Emperor, "Mutt, leave my land along with your buddy, the Beast King, and only come back when I, or Hiroshi, orders you to. Leave now, don''t test my patience."


    And leave he did. He and his soldiers retreated, along with the Beast King, but not before picking up the corpses of their fallen comrades. This was a huge blow to their morals and military strength. But even then they only had themselves to blame. Humans are indeed bad but that doesn''t mean they aren''t bad too.


    All living beings are bad in some way, it''s just that humans are smarter and wiser than most species in existence. Because of that, they become cunning, then their pride and greed takes over them, believing that they are superior to others. But that goes the same for demi-humans and demons. They aren''t that much different, except for a few things.


    And so, the war ended in less than an hour. Hikaru wanted to give the crown to Hiroshi immediately, he''s losing interest in this world. And besides, Hiroshi is already strong enough to defend this Kingdom on his own. And along with Cristoff, they''ll be invincible. The only problem is the heroes, they are getting too bold for their own good.


    Hikaru has to take care of them soon, or they''ll be a thorn on Hiroshi''s side once he takes the crown.


    And so, the next day, he demanded them in his throne room.


    All of the heroes were kneeling in front of him, but he can tell that they really hated him to the bone. Right now, this is where they die.


    "Do you all know why I summoned you all here? Heh, what am I saying? Of course you don''t, weaklings like you people are too dumb to comprehend my greatness." He was just riling them up with all this trash talk.


    They gritted their teeth, except for two, the Healer Hero, Saiko, and the Spear Here, Keiko. Saiko, because she''s currently mind f.u.c.k.i.e.d. Except she isn''t. You see, after tons of drugs were forcibly shoved down to her throat, she developed an immunity towards it, in the form of a skill. This skill granted her the ability to resist any kinds of drugs, and she managed to regain her sanity. She is just waiting for the moment to kill these worthless people, she will kill them for all they have done to her.


    And Keiko, because she is just confused at the moment. She doesn''t know how and why Hikaru is here also, didn''t he become a retard back on earth? So how is he here fully functioning and even smarter than most?


    "Hmm, what kind of death do you guys want?" Hikaru asked with a straight face.


    All of them paused for a moment, when they realized what he meant, They tried to escape, only to find that they couldn''t move. They were paralyze, but when? When were they affected without them noticing!?


    "All of you must be wondering how all of you were paralyzed without noticing, well guess no longer! Come out, Hiroshi." Hikaru yelled.


    And sure enough, Hiroshi came out from behind one of the erected pillars. He was staring at them coldly, the blade in his hands shining sinisterly as he approached them.


    "Spare Saiko and Keiko, you can kill the rest." Hikaru ordered.


    "As you say, your majesty." He jokingly said, before going for his first kill. The Dark Hero, Kyouga. He beheaded him and then went to another one of the S-Rank Heroes, Death Rider. From then on, it was a silent execution. No one managed to release a single sound due to his paralysis, so the entire throne room became a silent execution chamber.


    Hikaru only watched the execution in front of him with emotionless eyes. They were doomed to die from the very beginning, he''s just bringing their death faster to them.


    Now that all of those heroes are dead, it is time to pass on this crown to Hiroshi.


    (A Few Days Later)


    A huge number of people gathered in the plaza, where they looked at their King with reverence. He was announcing something, and for some reason, they had a bad feeling about this.


    "I won''t spare you any useless gibberish, today is the day that I, Hikaru The 100th King of this Kingdom, shall retire!"


    And instantly, a massive amount of people begged him not to retire. What if another tyrant becomes the King again? They will suffer for sure.


    "Silence!" Hikaru ordered and they instantly quieted down, "I will retire as your King, my subordinate will take over as the new King of our Kingdom! I welcome you, the 101th King of Deagaia, Hiroshi Fuji!"


    Hiroshi appeared by Hikaru''s side. He was wearing the King''s attire with the crown on top of his head. This attire was designed by Hikaru himself. This attire is designed to look exactly the same as the British King''s attire, long black pants and a red long sleeve coat. He looked like royalty now that he wore those clothes.


    Hiroshi, with his dominant arm on his chest, announced, "I may not be as great as his previous majesty, but I assure all of you that I will do my best to give all of you the lives you deserve! Please forgive me if I make mistakes sometimes, because I''m just a human, like you."


    There was silence for a moment, then an uproar next. They were shouting, "Long live, his majesty, the King!" Repeatedly.


    "WITH ALL MY HEART, I THANK ALL OF YOU FOR ACCEPTING ME!!"


    And with that, he successfully passed on the crown to Hiroshi. He''ll leave this world in a few days, he no longer has any business here. It''s not like there''s some absurdly strong monster that is capable of killing all life in this solar system in this world, right?


    Hiroshi found out the next day that Hikaru disappeared. He left him a letter and a ring. He said in his letter that this ring will boost his overall strength by 10,000%, but if he removes it, it''ll break instantly. He also left a gift for Shio, it was another ring that could boost magic powers by 70% and takes less mana when casting a spell.


    "So, this is it, huh? After all of that, after suffering for months inside that dungeon, I finally succeeded. But you, suddenly leaving just like that seems a bit rude to me. Heh, one of these days, I''ll find you." Hiroshi said with a determined smile as he pocketed his letter.


    In that letter, he said that if he truly wanted to meet him again, he''ll have to grow stronger than he is right now. Once he''s powerful enough, only then would he be able to find him.

 Chapter 111 - 104: Returning Home

    It has been quite peaceful for the entirety of the Elemental Nation. No wars, no hidden organizations ready to destroy the world, or any wandering 100 meters tall demons that can destroy mountains with a swift whip of its tail.


    But in the end, another threat emerged. Not from Earth, but from outer space.


    Toneri Otsutsuki, a being of immense powers. He appeared suddenly one day and kidnapped the Heir of the Hyuga Clan, Hyuga Hinata, along with her younger sister, Hyuga Hanabi. The five major villages wouldn''t have cared if some nobody got kidnapped, but this was no nobody. She is one of the lovers of Hikaru Hiroaki, somebody who could destroy any country he wants with a snap of his fingers.


    And also, Toneri wanted to destroy the Elemental Nation.


    Fortunately, even Toneri had to succ.u.mb against the might of Azumi, Sasuke, and Itachi. He just couldn''t beat three of the most overpowered shinobis of all time. And not only that, Itachi received a weapon from Hikaru back then. And he assures you, a single slash from that sword can cut the hardest chakra metals like a hot knife going through a butter.


    (Scene Change)


    "Hmm, it''s not much of a challenge fighting him. The only problem was his eyes, I think he called them [Tenseigan]." Itachi said, while sitting with his legs crossed on the surface of the moon.


    "Don''t get c.o.c.ky, nii-san. If you alone were to fight him, it would still be quite a difficult battle." Sasuke reminded him, while also sitting on the surface of the moon.


    "Ah, I should''ve brought some ramen. I''m quite famished." Azumi said as her stomach made a noise.


    Right now, the three of them were waiting for the rescue team from Konoha to get them from the moon. Toneri was in front of them, he was knocked out with bubbles of saliva coming out of his mouth.


    "I am really sorry to disturb everyone, if only I hadn''t got kidnapped by this guy." Hinata said apologetically while hitting Toneri in the head with her fist. She was wearing some kind of black dress.


    "C''mon, nee-san, it''s not your fault. It was this guy''s fault." Hanabi also hit his head with her fist quite hard.


    "Hn, don''t blame yourself too much, Hinata-dono. If we hadn''t saved you, Hikaru would''ve beaten me to pulp." Itachi comforted her.


    "Darling wouldn''t do that¡­ I think." Azumi said unsurely.


    As they were chatting on the surface of the moon, they didn''t notice someone landing near them. He has deep black eyes with a little tint of red in the middle, quite pale skin, long black hair that reached his waist and he wore aristocratic clothes. He wore a smile on his face, as if happy seeing them again.


    Slowly, Itachi heard someone approaching them and quickly stood up to face him, "Who''s there!?" He cried out, and widened his eyes when he saw who it was.


    "Yo, what''re you guys doing on the moon?" Hikaru asked, confused as to why they were here.


    "Darling!" Azumi happily yelled as she ran straight towards him, before hugging him quite tightly.


    "You''re finally back!" She ecstatically said to him.


    "Y-yeah, what are you doing on the moon, Azumi?" Hikaru asked again.


    "Un! Toneri kidnapped Hinata and Hanabi, then announced to the whole world that he''ll be destroying the Elemental Nation. Well, he couldn''t even beat the three of us, so there''s no way he could destroy the Elemental Nation anyway." Azumi answered with contempt at Toneri.


    He patted her head, and said, "You''re still as cute as ever. I apologize that I left so suddenly, but I hope your parents managed to use those rings wisely. I left a letter, if I remember correctly."


    She shook her head and said with a smile, "No, it doesn''t matter. You''re here, that''s what matters."


    He smiled softly at her, then said while running his fingers through her long smooth blonde hair, "Later, I''ll tell you stories about my adventures. For now, let''s go back home."


    Hikaru''s not gonna lie, it feels weird to say these words. He''s used to being somewhat of a tyrant to some people back on that planet. Saying sweet words to someone while smiling softly feels really weird. And on that planet, he released some of his psychotic tendencies. He killed hundreds of thousands of creatures in that world alone because they pissed him off. But this world, the Elemental Nation, it''s too peaceful. There are no evil organizations trying to rule the world, or beings even capable of beating him.


    As expected, he''ll have to move on to the next world. He''ll defeat Chaortos, then go to the next world. Besides, his fight with the olden god has been long overdue.


    "But I''m afraid I''ll have to leave once again in a month or two. It may take months, years, or even a decade before I can go back here. Are you okay with that, Azumi, Hinata?" He asked them. He also saw Hinata trying to approach him but couldn''t, he guessed that she was feeling shy.


    Azumi thought about it, then said, "One year, you''ll have to stay with us for a year before you go to your adventures. Besides, shouldn''t we be married already? What? You''re just going to leave again in another month? Not gonna happen, mister!" Azumi said with a demanding tone.


    He was stunned but he just smiled again and raised his arms in defeat, then said, "Fine, fine, I''ll leave in a year. By that time, the three of us are already married, I promise you that."


    A smile formed on her face, knowing that they would finally conceive their own child after their marriage. She was so excited that she started to mumble what she would do after having a child.


    "Let''s go get married this month! We''ll throw a huge party in the village, then I''ll invite all of our friends from outside the village!" Azumi excitedly said.


    "Alright, we''ll be having our wedding by next week. Sigh, but will your parents agree to that?"


    For a moment, Azumi looked unsure about that. But then she said, "I-I''ll find a way to convince them!"


    "If you say so, let''s get out of here first." With that, he made a mana borg that surrounded them. He controlled the Borg to fly, then he wielded it towards the Elemental Nation.


    (1 Month Later)


    And so, a month came by and a lot of things happened.


    First off, the three of them got married. A lot of people from outside the village came over to attend their wedding, though it was quite weird since they''re just teenagers. But that didn''t stop Hikaru from using that potion and, uh, "conceiving" their marriage. Anyway, long story short, both Hinata and Azumi are now pregnant, thanks to Hikaru by the way, and now they were temporarily laid off from all those Shinobi Missions.


    Second, he visited where the olden god, Chaortos, is sealed in. The place where she is sealed was inside a huge cave, and that cave just so happens to have some kind of magical protection around in it. And for some reason, that huge cave seems to be designed like an arena.


    Third, he killed Toneri, then took his soul and sealed it inside his "magical" jar along with Orochimaru. Those two souls will definitely fight each other, he just knows it.


    And now, he''s just grinding for more souls. There''s really nothing to do around here anyway. And besides, he had two pregnant wives to take care of. They''ve been having this "fit" lately, like they''re always angry.


    He did not know whether this was because of pregnancy, or they were just pissed off. And for some reason, their s.e.x.u.a.l urges are stronger than ever. He had to knock out Azumi once because she just wouldn''t stop "riding" him. It was getting chaotic around the house, and sometimes, Minato would look at him with a sympathetic look in his eyes. It was as if he found a comrade who could understand him.


    Oh yeah, it didn''t take long for his parents-in-law to accept him. He just bought Kushina 10 years worth of ramen and she was more than ecstatic. While he taught Minato thousands of different jutsus, and even gave him a weapon from the system so that he could protect himself, in case some big bad organization decides to show up.


    Although, Minato would sometimes not return for a long time from his missions. He would sometimes worry Kushina and Azumi, since many things out there could kill him. But Minato said that he was doing this so that he wouldn''t get rusty, since staying home in a peaceful environment would only further weaken his battle senses.


    Even though he was living happily with his own family inside Konoha, he still found the people of Konoha quite hateful. They were two-face bastards. He hated them, oh how he loathed them. They were more hypocritical than him. While they might look innocent, those people once drove Hatake Sakumo to committing suicide since he just failed one singular mission because he wanted to protect his comrade. But they had the gall to curse Kakashi behind his back when he was a kid because he prioritized his missions more than the life of his comrades.


    Long story short, the people of Konoha are hypocrites and he can still see that to this day. Sometimes, he can still feel one of them gaze at his wife with disdain. Well, that guy learned to look at other things when Hikaru beheaded him when he was sleeping.


    It''s now January 8, 11 months before he departs from this world.

 Chapter 112 - 105: The Last Shinobis From A Different Dimension

    Now, Hikaru wouldn''t consider himself a procrastinator but now that 4 years has passed since the day he returned to the Elemental Nation, he now understood that he is, indeed, a procrastinator. But you can''t blame him, he has 4 cute children now.


    Azumi had two children for him, both of them were twins, one is a boy and the other is a girl. Even though both of them looked almost the same, as far as calling them identical twins wouldn''t be an underestimation, but they had different personalities.


    His boy, he named him Taiyou meaning Sun. Taiyou is quite gifted. In the young age of 3, he was already able to read and write greater than any writer in the Elemental Nation, it was to say that most people thought of him growing up as a scholar. But he had a different goal in mind, he wanted to be a Seal Master like his grandmother. He is calm and collected most of the time, but sometimes he is incredibly cold to some people, he is also extremely smart for his age. He''s like Hikaru in that aspect. He has long red hair, black eyes, and is still growing.


    Then his daughter, Azumi named her "Emiyo". While Taiyou is calm and collected, she is the complete opposite of that. It seems like she was exactly like her mother when she was child, air-head, sometimes making a fool out of herself, but she is talented towards Shinobi Arts. Her dream is to become Hokage, like her mother.


    Azumi became the Hokage 2 years ago after she beat Itachi in a duel, but she later figured out that the job of the Hokage is to just sign doc.u.ments and paper-like gibberish. Even though she used her shadow clones to do the job for her, they would simply refuse to obey her command and just cancel themselves. To this day, she could still hear Itachi laughing at her misery.


    Anyway, Emiyo is just a bubble of sunshine. Her smile is enough to make Hikaru''s day better, even though he basically does nothing at home. He has near-infinite money in his bank. He can make millions of ryo in a few minutes just from one of the businesses he managed to successfully build from scratch, and Kimimaro is still managing most of them.


    Emiyo is 3 years old this year along with Taiyou. She has golden blonde hair, the same as her mother, deep blue eyes like her grandfather, and is still growing.


    Meanwhile, Hinata also gave him two children, twins again. They were identical twins, and both of them were girls.


    Riko and Rina, both of them were almost emotionless. Not completely emotionless, but they have this introverted personality that keeps them away from children their age. They''re like kuderes in that aspect, though they did inherit their father''s calculating personality. Every time they meet a new person, they would immediately analyze them and imprint their habits and personality into their little brain. Hikaru figured this out when he saw the both of them just staring at man like he was some interesting specimen in a laboratory.


    They both inherited their father''s black hair, but for some reason they also had white streaks across their hair. Hikaru doesn''t know where they inherited that, but that doesn''t make them any less cuter. They were as tall as most five year olds, making him wonder how tall they''re going to be once they grow up. Though, the most noticeable feature about them is their eyes. They have their mother''s lavender eyes in both of their right eyes, and they have a very special dojutsu in their left eyes. It would appear from time to time, but Hikaru noticed that they were very similar to Boruto''s right eye, only that the pupils were red and not sky blue.


    So, after he tortured Toneri''s soul a little bit, he managed to learn what those eyes were. They were called The Jougan, not even Toneri knows much about those eyes. He said that they were capable of sharingan abilities, like Kamui. But they also have many abilities of the Tenseigan. After that, he doesn''t know much. When Hiakru told him that their pupils were red and not sky blue, he asked him what??s up with that. But Toneri was surprised when he learned that, apparently not even him knows what the hell is happening.


    Though, Hikaru took note of the abilities of the new dojutsu after his daughters activated them accidentally. First off, it seems like those eyes can enhance the wielder''s physical capabilities and could do wonders at the cost of their chakra. He saw that once when his daughter, Rika, managed to lift a dumbbell ten times of her weight when they were visiting Rock Lee.


    And the second time he saw another ability was when they accidentally activated their eyes while they were at the restaurant that he owned, and he saw them shoot lasers out of their left eyes. It was¡­ shocking for all of them. In the end, Hikaru had to make special eye-patches so that they wouldn''t accidentally blast someone to oblivion.


    But he managed to figure out mostly where those came from, it was from Hinata and mostly from him. Those lasers that they shot weren''t made from chakra but from mana, that was quite surprising since Taiyou and Emiyo didn''t inherit his mana energy and he only sensed chakra in them. The both of them have enough storage to store their chakra in them, but in a small part of their body was a small storage for mana. They activate their special eyes from that small mana energy storage. Hikaru was planning on taking out their chakra and only keep their mana, but he learned earlier that that was going to be extremely painful and they might just die, so he decided against them.


    After all, it doesn''t matter if they were strong, smart, or not, as long as they''re alive and breathing, it''s fine.


    (Scene Change)


    It was morning, the sun was shining, the trees fluttered as the wind hit them gently, and the morning dews dropped to the ground and bloomed small flowers that would grow to the next generation.


    While the winds blew, a black portal appeared outside of the walls of Konoha. Three people emerged from it. The first one was a boy at the age of 16. He has sun-kissed blonde hair, a scar on his right eye socket, he kept it close at all times, and he was quite tall for his age. He wore the same cloak as a.d.u.l.t Sasuke, and he still wore the same clothes he had when he was 12 under the cloak, he also wore the same head protector Sasuke had when he left the village, which had a cut on it.. He was also full of injuries, as if he just fought a war.


    This is Uzumaki Boruto, the first child of the seventh Hokage and is also the one to receive the Jougan, "the cursed eye" as he calls it. He also has Momochi Otsutsuki''s karma, but now the both have formed some kind of symbiotic relationship between each other. He can use some of Momochi''s powers at the exchange of letting him live inside his body until he finds some kind of purpose.


    Then there was the black haired girl. She looked around 16, the same as the blonde boy. She has onyx eyes and long hair, and lets her bangs dangle over her headband protector. She wore a sleeveless red qipao dress with the Uchiha crest at the back, lilac colored shorts under her dress, dark purple stockings, black shinobi sandals, and long dark purple arm warmers. She also seems to be full of injuries, just like Boruto.


    This Uchiha Sarada. Tears came out of her eyes like a river as she just witnessed her beloved village and her parents die. Her father opened a portal to another world with the last of his chakra. There were supposed to be 10 of them coming into the portal, but her father just used the little chakra he had left to form this portal, and only the three of them managed to get in.


    Next is the unconscious person right beside them. He had light blue hair, thin eyebrows, and a pale complexion. He looked very handsome, as if he was made to be this way. He is tall, around 6''1. He wore the new version of Konoha''s flak jacket, which consists of more pockets and scientific protective seals around it, dark anbu pants and black shinobi sandals, and a headband protector.


    This is Mitsuki, Orochimaru''s "son". Out of the three of them, he is the strongest. He fought 10 Otsutsuki members at once just to protect Konoha, and he almost killed them all, if their reinforcement didn''t arrive. He had to fend off against 20 of them until he retreated due to his severe injuries. In the end, he met up with Boruto and Sarada and they were also on retreat. More and more enemies piled up, until Sasuke convinced them to go to a world where there were no wars or any threat at all.


    "Let''s go, Sarada. We have to meet Hikaru-san, Sasuke-sensei told us that in his dying words." Boruto said stoically as he held in all the emotions he''s feeling right now, and proceeded to carry Mitsuki on his shoulders and limped towards the village of Konoha.


    Sarada wiped her tears as she proceeded to hold in her emotions. She can do all the crying later, she has to stay strong right now.


    "Right." She walked right by the side of Boruto while her right leg limped throughout the way towards the village.

 Chapter 113 - 106

    Hikaru built a very wonderful house. It was big with lots of rooms inside, two stories tall, and has a modern design. It''s simply one of the best houses in Konoha.


    Right now, he is enjoying some time outside with Solaire. They are sitting on a bench as they drank some Estus and chatted.


    "Time is weird in Lordran, my friend. Even though you say that 4 years had passed, I only felt 4 months pass in Lordran." He took a sip from his estus flask, then continued, "Anyway, enough about time. My friend, The Chosen Undead, is quite the serious guy. Recently, he just rang the two bells and now is going to that damnable Fortress, where he will deal with those horrible traps. Honestly, I worry about him sometimes. He''s always dying left and right, he might just become hollow. Hah hah!" He chuckled a little.


    Hikaru took a sip from his Estus Flask and then replied, "Quite a brave friend you have there. He''ll probably die a hundred times before he finishes that Fortress."


    He noticed a long time ago that everytime he summons Solaire, there''s something different about him. He remembers everything about him and what this place is, but whenever he summons Solaire the time and place in his world is always different. For example, when he summoned him last time; he said that he was already at Anor Londo but now he''s still at Sen''s Fortress. It''s confusing to talk to Solaire sometimes, but he at least remembers everything about him and what took place in this world.


    Solaire finished the contents of his Flask and sighed, "It''s been a little depressing lately. I have traveled to many places, journeyed to the most terrifying place in the world, yet I still haven''t caught a single glimpse of my sun. Ah."


    He''s own Sun, that''s always what he talks about. Though, Hikaru can see that his friend is quite sad indeed. But he knew, Solaire would fail to find his own sun. He''s like Icarus in a way. He flew too close to the sun and burned his wings away, until he fell into the sea and drowned to his death.


    "I''m sure you''ll find it someday." Those words, they were cruel.


    "Indeed. Anyhow, I''ve stayed here for far too long. I''ll be going back to searching for my own sun." Solaire slowly disappeared as he said, "Don''t forget to praise the sun, my friend!"


    He disappeared and Hikaru was left alone sitting on the bench. He took one last sip from his Estus Flask, then stood up and walked towards his house.


    (At The Gate Of Konoha)


    Two Chunins guarded the gate. They were chatting with each other until they saw a few people limping over towards them. They were all severely injured, if the blood dripping from their every step is any evidence. All of them seem to be teenagers that just fought in a war.


    "Halt! Who are you people?" One of the guards asked cautiously.


    Boruto then pointed at his headband protector, which had the Konoha''s symbol. But he forgot one thing, that headband protector has a scratch in the middle of the symbol, which would make someone a missing-nin most of the time.


    "Are you a missing-nin from Konoha!? What are you doing here!?" Now, the guards were very suspicious of them.


    Realization dawned on Boruto''s face. He quickly thought of an explanation, and said, "No, you got it wrong. While I was fighting, someone tried to cut my face with a kunai, and being injured myself, I had no choice but to use my headband protector to block the attack. You can probably see my other teammate, he has Konoha''s Flak Jacket, see?" Boruto managed to make a very elaborate lie, and quickly.


    "Is that so? Oi Hiro, heal some of their injuries.!" One of the guards said as he took Mitsuki from Boruto and carried him on his back so that Boruto won''t have a hard time walking.


    "Got it." The guard named Hiro then took out a small bottle that seems to be filled with some kind of golden liquid.


    "Kid, open your mouth. Don''t look at me like that, this thing in my hand is a magical medicine. One drop and you''ll feel rejuvenated and some of your smaller injuries might heal quickly."


    Boruto did as he was told and opened his mouth, The guard poured one drop on his mouth, and instantly, some of his injuries started healing faster than what he could imagine! He felt some of his strength returning to him. Now he''s able to walk properly again.


    ''What kind of medicine is that? It''s like healing those potions in the video games I''ve played.'' Boruto thought in amazement.


    "What''s your name, kid?" Hiro asked as he let Sarada drink a drop of that golden liquid.


    "Boruto, Uzumaki Boruto." He answered.


    "Daiki Hiro, that''s my name. Now, let''s get you all to the hospital." Hiro said as he led them inside the gate of the village. But he left a shadow clone to guard the gates of the village.


    The other guard has been long gone. He carried Mitsuki to the hospital, since he seems to be the most injured out of all of them.


    (At Konoha Hospital)


    Sakura Haruno was working on some of her patient''s papers, when she saw a guard bring in an unconscious person in the hospital. He seems to be a Jounin, but she was confused since there wasn''t any Jounin Exam that happened recently. And from what she can see, he''s young, around 16 or 17.


    "I''ll leave him to your care, Haruno-san. Or should I call you Uchiha-sama?" The guard said jokingly before leaving the hospital doors.


    She just shook her head at his joke. She and Sasuke have been married for 4 years now. They have a 3 years old son they named; Uchiha Senichi. Well, little Senichi is now being taught of shinobi arts by Itachi and Sasuke everyday, since they have nothing to do anyways.


    She sighed and said, "Really now, such immaturity." As she was about to heal the blue haired boy, another guard came with two teenagers that seemed to be injured. She felt a headache coming, but she forced a smile and asked, "Now, who are these two?"


    "Haruno-san, these two are the companions of that blue haired kid. Well, I''ll leave them to your care now." Hiro said before walking out of the door.


    Sakura slumped her shoulders as she sighed again, "Do they really have to bring every patient to me? There''s other doctors in the hospital, you know?"


    Meanwhile, Boruto noticed something very interesting.


    ''Why are they so nonchalant? Three severely injured shinobis just wound up in front of your doorsteps, at least react a little! Well, I know that Sakura-san is an amazing healer, so at least we''re in good hands.'' Boruto said inside his head.


    The reason they don''t seem to care about this situation is because they know that no one is foolish enough to attack the strongest major village in the entire world. They have countless S-Rank Shinobis in their ranks. Even all the S-Rank Shinobis in the other 4 major villages combined wouldn''t match up to Konoha. And they have a monster who single-handedly ended the 4th great ninja war with a single attack.


    Every shinobi that day saw him defeat the invincible ten-tailed beast with a sword that covered the heavens. No one dares to put his name in the Bingo Book, because they know that they will be hunted down by Konoha Shinobis.


    And also, the real reason they don''t seem to care about their injuries is because of all the magical medicines that Hikaru gave to the Konoha Hospital. He called them "Divine Blessings". The hospital separated one bottle of divine blessing into five little bottles, so that every shinobi in their village can receive one the moment they become genins.


    Fortunately for the three of them, Sakura is a high-ranking medical-nin in the hospital, so she has around 3 bottles of Divine Blessings in her possessions. She doesn''t use them very much, since she was taught by Tsunade herself and has surpassed her teacher. But she''ll make this an exception, because they''re just kids.


    She took out three little bottles that contained 15 ML of divine blessings each and said, "Here, drink this. This should heal you all to the fullest. By the way, what''re your names?"


    "I''m Uzumaki Boruto, and right by my side is Uchiha Sarada. And the one¡­"


    "Wait, you''re an Uchiha?!" Sakura suddenly asked Sarada.


    "Yes, I''m an Uchiha, mo..." Sarada responded while trying to stop herself from calling the Sakura in front of her "mom". She knows that the woman in front of her is not her mother.


    Sakura narrowed her eyes in suspicion, then said, "Let me see your eyes."


    Sarada activated her sharingan, showing Sakura her 3 tomoe sharingan.


    Sakura gasped in surprise. She can''t believe it, because this just doesn''t make sense!


    Boruto doesn''t care whether he reveals information about them or not, because there''s nothing to lose anyway. Besides, this is still Konoha, his home, so there''s nothing to hide.


    "This¡­ quickly! Drink that and come with me, my husband is going to be overjoyed that there''s another living Uchiha!" She said to Sarada in joy.


    After drinking the small bottle of divine blessing, Boruto said, "Please wait, we need to meet Hikaru-san. We need to explain our situation to him!"


    "Hikaru? Well, he''s not doing anything today, so it might be okay to meet him. But why though? As far as I know, he''s never met any of you." Sakura said.


    "He did, when I was twelve years old. Even Sasuke-san was there when I met him." Boruto insisted.


    "Hmm, he''s never said anything about you guys, but okay. I''ll lead you guys to his house later, just drink that and rest a little." Sakura then opened Mitsuki''s mouth with her hands and slowly made him drink the divine blessing.


    Not a second later, he suddenly sat up, making Sakura yelp.


    "Waaahh! Don''t surprise me like that!"


    "Sakura-san? What''re we doing here? Boruto-kun, where are we?" Mitsuki asked, his head is still quite fuzzy.


    "Sasuke-sensei used the last of his chakra to send us here in this dimension. I don''t know if he is dead or not, I just hope he''s not dead yet. Maybe the version of Sasuke-sensei in this world has the same rinnegan abilities." Boruto explained to Mitsuki stoically, which reminded Sakura the way Sasuke and Itachi talk.


    Mitsuki digested the information he just got, and finally said, "I¡­ am quite confused. But how is your right eye, Boruto-kun?"


    Boruto touched the right side of his face and said, "It doesn''t hurt anymore. I might be abl- AAAAHHH!!" He suddenly screamed in pain as he felt something inside his eyeball moving. His eye was reconstructing, it was as if it was fixing itself.


    "H-hey! What happened to you!?" Sakura rushed to his side to check what''s happening, but Sarada stopped her.


    "It must be the magical medicine he drank earlier. His right eye is healing, so there''s probably no problem."


    This just got a lot more confusing, at least for Sakura.

 Chapter 114 - 107: A Plan To Capture The Otsutsuki Clan

    Boruto screamed in pain as he endured the pain in his right eye. This pain, it hurts more than the time he got his eye cut by his enemy. He kneeled down in pain and held the right side of his face with his hand. Sweat drips down from his face, his entire head feels like its going to explode.


    Suddenly, he heard Momoshiki''s voice inside his head.


    ''Fascinating, how can such elixir exist in this plane of existence? These lowly beings all have a small vial of them. Is there some kind of god living amongst them in this dimension?'' He said, obviously interested at the fact that all of the shinobis they''ve met so far have this "Divine Blessing".


    After a few minutes of that excruciating pain, his right eye finally calmed down. A little pain still lingers but other than that, it''s not painful anymore.


    When Boruto opened his right eye, the Jougan was already activated. His right hand suddenly developed a mark that spread throughout the right side of his body, until it reached his face, forming an angular and curving geometric pattern.


    "Boruto-kun, your karma''s activated. You should probably deactivate that." Mitsuki warned.


    Boruto got a surprise look on his face when he saw the curse mark activated along with his Jougan. He immediately deactivated it after Mitsuki warned him, and the mark regressed until it could no longer be seen.


    When he deactivated his Jougan, he realized that he can finally see in his right eye even without activating his dojutsu! Though, it still consumes a large amount of chakra. He''s just thankful that he is an Uzumaki, meaning he has a huge amount of chakra even without a tailed beast sealed inside him.


    "What¡­ was that?" Sakura asked, shocked.


    Boruto took a glance at Sakura and said, "That was my karma, a curse mark implanted by a stupid Otsutsuki..."


    ''Hey! I am not stupid!'' Momoshiki complained.


    "And in some way, I can use the dojutsu in my right eye more efficiently when I have it activated. My senses are also heigthened by many times over, along with my physical strength. But it consumes large amount of chakra, so I always have it deactivated." Boruto explained.


    "Hmm, you have a very interesting dojutsu." Sakura said, "And it''s similar to the dojutsu of Hikaru''s daughters, though they''re much, much more powerful. They can even shoot lasers with their dojutsu, how ridiculously overpowered is that?"


    "Really? M-May I ask who''s their mother?" A thin line of sadness escaped his voice as he already imagined who their mother is.


    "Oh, it''s the heiress of the Hyuga Clan, Hyuga Hinata." Sakura answered, "she and Azumi have been married to Hikaru for 4 years now. Time really flies, you know? Ten years ago, we were just students in the academy, now we already have children of our own."


    "O-Oh." Boruto missed his mother, very much so. She died the day the Otsutsuki Clan decided to take over their dimension''s elemental nation. Many people died, including Choji-san, Shikamaru-san, Ino-san, the five kages, and many important people in his life. All the tailed beasts have been captured by the Otsutsuki Clan. Apparently, they also have numerous ten-tailed beasts in their arsenals, and the nine-tailed beasts are going to be used to make another ten-tailed beast, again.


    Even though Kabuto-san revived a lot of strong shinobis, like all the previous Kages of every village, they still lost the war with those aliens. One by one, all the villages fell under the might of the Otsutsuki Clan. It was a losing war, that much they knew, but what else could they do? They had to fight back, they just had to.


    Sakura noticed the face that Boruto''s making, so she asked teasingly, "Hehehe, now I get it, you''re a pursuer of Hinata, aren''t you?" Boruto, Mitsuki, and Sarada choked almost immediately after she said that, "Heh, if so, you''re too late, she''s been taken already."


    "N-No, not that. Well, uh, how do I say this? Let''s go meet Hikaru-san so that I can explain our situation. You''ll understand later." Boruto stood up and went to the door, so he could escape this awkward situation.


    "Hey, wait for us, Boruto-kun." Mitsuki said as he immediately stood up and went after Boruto.


    Now, Sarada was left along with Sakura. Awkwardness silently covered the room, and she knew she had to get out of this.


    "So, let''s go to, uh, Hikaru-san''s house!" Sarada said, rather enthusiastic.


    "Hm, let''s go. I really don''t need to be present in the hospital anyway, since these little things," She gestured at the small bottle of Divine Blessings, "can heal anyone, no matter the injury."


    And so, they all went out of the hospital with Boruto still in an awkward state after hearing what Sakura said.


    (A Few Minutes Later)


    They arrived at Hikaru''s house, and they were mesmerized by the beauty of it. It looks like some kind of futuristic house, it was even better than the houses they''ve seen.


    *Ding* *Dong*


    They stood in front of the gate as Sakura rang the doorbell of the house. A little while later, somebody opened the gate and Hikaru greeted them.


    "Hmm? What are you doing here, Sakura? And who''s these three behind you?" He asked.


    "They asked me to bring them to you, apparently they have some kind of situation you have to know." Sakura explained.


    Hikaru took a better look at them, and recognized one of them, "Oh! If it isn''t Boruto, you''re all grown up now, eh? Where''s the other Sasuke?"


    Boruto looked away and said, "He died, I don''t want to admit it, but I think he died after sending us to this dimension." He did not want to say that, but deep inside his heart he just knew that his sensei, his second-father, is dead.


    "That''s rather¡­ tragic. I wished to meet him again, since he''s quite a cool guy. Come, we''ll talk inside the house." Hikaru said as he gestured towards them to follow him.


    (Inside The House)


    They were in the living room, sitting on the sofa. In front of them was a luxurious table. Hikaru bought all kinds of expensive decorations for his house, but he made sure not to buy anything glass, since it might shatter and hurt the kids.


    "Hikaru-sama, here are your drinks." Tayuya said as she put down the tray she was holding, and distributed the drinks around them. After she was done, she took the tray and went back to the kitchen to prepare today''s lunch.


    Mitsuki tried not to get surprised but he couldn''t hide it and asked, "Was that Tayuya? My father''s previous servant?"


    "Hm? Father? Your father is Orochimaru?" Hikaru asked, quite surprised. He couldn''t imagine that that snake will have a son, even after all he has done.


    "He is, Hikaru-dono. Though he might be gone by now." He replied.


    Meanwhile, Momoshiki is saying something to Boruto¡­


    ''Be careful, boy. That man is no pushover, his presence alone scares me. He could probably take on my entire clan with no problem, as much as I hate to say it. He must be the one who gave those lowly beings that divine elixirs. A godlike being like him, to be here in this plane of existence¡­ Remember to be cautious, boy.'' Momoshiki warned him. He tried to sound strong, but Boruto can hear the terrified voice behind that act.


    Hikaru glanced at him, and said, "I assume you''ve just finished talking to the creature inside you?" Boruto tensed, "Don''t worry, I know you mean no harm to me or my family. If you have been, you wouldn''t be sitting in front of me."


    Boruto sighed in relief, and said, "Hikaru-san, the reason I wanted to meet you is because I need your help. You''re strong, strong enough for Momoshiki to be terrified of you,"


    Hikaru raised an eyebrow and said, "And what is that?" He already guessed what he was going to say, but Hikaru wanted him to say it.


    Boruto steeled his eyes and strengthened his courage, before asking Hikaru, "Please help us retake our dimension! Our home from those Otsutsuki!" He wasn''t just asking him, he was basically begging Hikaru.


    .


    Hikaru sighed, then said, "I can''t, it''s not that I don''t want to, it''s just that I really can''t. The thing is, I can''t travel through dimensions." This is true. Hikaru cannot travel through other dimensions, because of the rules that disembodied voice made. Unless he seals, or kills, all of the olden gods, he cannot travel through dimensions. Though, he can travel through the entire universe.


    Boruto was devastated after knowing that fact.


    But Hikaru smiled, and said, "Now, don''t make that sad face. It''s true that I can''t travel through other dimensions other than this one, but that doesn''t mean that the others can''t. But even then, that still brings their safety. If they die there because the enemy is too strong, what do I say to their families? Do I tell them that they had to save another dimension, even though there are no benefits in doing that? They''ll be heartbroken, and you know how it is when your loved ones die. I can send them, if only you tell me; what benefits would we get if we save your world?"


    Boruto found himself stunned, not thinking this far. He thought that Hikaru-san was some kind of messiah that doesn''t need any kind of benefits to save his world. He berated himself for being such a fool. There must be something he can give to them, something he can offer. Technologies? No, they''ll have that in a few years time. An alliance? No, they''re too weak. He may have not seen it, but he knew that they have plenty of strong shinobis around here.


    He''s run out of options! He needs to think something, and fast!


    Suddenly, as he brainstormed, the voice of Momoshiki interrupted him.


    ''You do have sometime to give him, the tailed beasts.If you promise to give him all the tailed beasts in your world, then he might just budge. Even though I haven''t seen much of his personality, I at least have observed long enough to know that he is a collector. But he''s not as obsessed as the other collectors I''ve seen in my life. The only thing holding him back from stealing all the tailed beasts in this world is his moral compass. Just give it a try, boy.''


    ''Fine.'' Boruto replied back.


    Boruto then looked at Hikaru and said, "I have something to offer. If you help us, we''ll give you all of our tailed beasts!"


    "...!" Mitsuki was quite shocked, knowing that the tailed beasts are important to the Seventh. Naruto held them in high regards, and felt a deep connection with the tailed beasts, especially because he is a jinchuuriki himself.


    "Boruto! If we give him the tailed beas-"


    "I know, Sarada, I know. Dad would be upset, but this is our only choice." Boruto said with seriousness in his voice.


    "But¡­"


    Hikaru suddenly laughed, and said with an amused expression on his face, "Actually, we don''t really need any benefits from you guys. We''ll help you, as long as you don''t get in the way of us capturing the Otsutsuki Clan, alive. You see, I''m quite curious about their kekkai genkai. If we capture them alive, we can experiment on them, extract their DNA so that we can implant them to our shinobi, make them procreate with a human and create half-breeds like the Sage Of Six-Paths and Hamura Otsutsuki. So, what do you say?"


    Boruto was shocked. If he agrees to this, the Otsutsukis will suffer a fate worse than death. He bit his lip, if he doesn''t agree, then his family and home will be destroyed. So he only said on word, a word that will torture the entire Otsutsuki Clan for centuries to come.


    "Yes."


    "Lovely! We have our deal now. You and everybody in your dimension won''t interfere, once we''ve captured the Otsutsukis." Hikaru said, with a smile similar to that of a devil.


    "Yes, I know." Boruto agreed.


    "Now then, 3 days from now, the most powerful shinobis in this village will travel through your dimension with Sasuke''s rinnegan ability. And of course, they will be equipped with the most powerful spare equipment I have."


    Hikaru came up with this on the spot, since he knew how powerful kekkei genkai in the elemental nation. If he can get the Otsutsuki Clan''s DNA, especially the main clan members, they will be able to implant Otsutsuki genes into a genin, thus giving them powerful kekkei genkai. And also, they have ten tailed beasts, who wouldn''t want such things? He wanted to keep the one he killed in the 4th Great Ninja War as his pet, but it was too ugly, it was basically deformed beyond anything he has ever seen.


    He has trust in Itachi and Sasuke to lead those shinobis he will send with them. Of course, he will not send Azumi, there''s still a chance that she may get killed and he wouldn''t want that now, would he?

 Chapter 115 - Announcement

    So, I''m not going to write for a week, since I have a lot of things to do. Now, I''m not dropping this, I just need some time away from writing. It''s been too long, I''ve been writing for months now and I haven''t stopped since.


    And also, writing takes a LOT of brain juice. Once I finish writing one chapter, I get tired and dazed. My brain won''t work normally after writing 1500 words to 2000 words. In the mean time, I''ll be thinking about this fanfic, and whether I should write another fanfic or just stick with this one.


    And again, I won''t be dropping this, since I promised to myself that I won''t.


    And this will give me a lot of time to think about the plot, and how I should continue this. I''ve known for a long time that HXH, MHA, and Overlord are weak worlds, and Hikaru can destroy all of them with a single snap of his fingers. For the first time, I''ve regretted making such an overpowered MC.


    But! I have a new idea! Highschool DXD is a good world! It has gods, devils, dragons that can ACTUALLY force Hikaru to use more than 10 percent of his powers! Though, I know that he will actually be much, much stronger after he jumps through another world.


    So, to make things a little bit harder for Hikaru, I will make the powerful beings in DXD to be little bit overpowered overpowered. Like Azazel has enough strength to obliterate a planet, and the Biblical God has enough power to destroy an entire Galaxy, and Great Red to have enough power to devour the Universe! But Trihexa, well. I don''t know what power level I should put it into.


    I should probably read TONS of DXD fanfics, the good ones.


    But know that this is not my final decision, I might change my mind sooner or later.

 Chapter 116 - 108: The Expedition Team

    3 days later, the elite team of shinobis that he, himself, picked for their first expedition in another dimension has been assembled. The team he picked consisted of Sasuke, Itachi, Kakashi, Kimimaro, Minato, and a clone of himself that has all of his chakra. Turns out, a clone can travel to another dimension, or universe, but not the real one.


    They all wore his most powerful spare sets of equipment. He gave both of his lightning and flame katana to Sasuke and Itachi, respectively. Kakashi got himself Onikiri and Ubadachi, blades that used to belong to Kamui, one of the black hands. He gave Minato the Gotthard Twinswords, which once belonged to Gotthard, also one of the black hands of the king. He gave Kimimaro a Black Knight''s Halberd, which was also upgraded to +20. The Halberd is strong enough to cut a whole mountain in half, and separate seas with a single wave.


    His clone didn''t need any equipment, it might get lost there once it puffs out of existence. But his clone is very powerful, his strength is enough to lay waste on any planet. After all, the clone has 10% of his physical strength and all of his chakra. He has enough chakra to put the tailed beasts to shame, he hasn''t been slacking after all.


    He wanted to give them some armor sets, but they refused, saying that they''re more used to their clothes. They are shinobis, after all. They don''t need some heavy equipment that will hinder their movement.


    Hikaru just agreed with them with a sigh, and just gave them rings that would boost their overall strength by 1000%. All of them were already prepared, and are ready to go.


    (Scene Change)


    "I''m going to open the portal now." Sasuke said as he activated the rinne-sharingan in his right eye and opened a portal right in front of them.


    Right now, they were just outside of Konoha''s gates. The 6 of them wore rings that had red glowing gems on their fingers. That''s the ring that boosts their strength, and they had another ring on their other hands. This ring, however, is different from the last one. Hikaru has been studying time and space magic in this 4 years, and is now able to bend it to his will. He can make time slower, control space magic, and use it as weapons. This ring that he made himself is a space ring that can store stuff inside, even living beings.


    He gave them those rings so that they could use it to capture those Otsutsukis for experimentation. He named the ring "Storage Ring" and it can store an entire city in it. It''s also impossible to break it because he made the ring itself from titanite ores, and even the strongest Kage cannot break it. But if the ring indeed broke, it would become something akin to a black hole. That''s why he specifically requested that they bring back those Storage Rings to him, since it is dangerous if it lands on the wrong hands.


    "Are you sure you won''t say goodbye to your son and wife, Sasuke?" Itachi asked his little brother.


    Sasuke shook his head and said, "I have already said my goodbyes. Besides, it wouldn''t take us that long to save another world. We''ll be back before we know it."


    "C''mon you kids, let''s go. We have a world to save." Minato said quite enthusiastically.


    "It''s an honor to team up with the two previous Hokages. Hikaru-sama said that the two of you are very strong, and I would like to see it on the battlefield." Kimimaro said in a very polite way.


    "Yare, yare, why did Hikaru have to pick me? It''s going to be a pain in the ass to do this." Kakashi said lazily while taking out his favorite p.o.r.nographic novel. Even though Jiraiya is already dead, his legacy still lives on¡­ through his books.


    "Stop complaining, Kakashi. You''re easily one of the strongest shinobis in the village, since we have already implanted two perfectly functioning sharingans in your eyes. And those sharingans once belonged to Sasuke, making them very powerful." Hikaru''s clone said.


    Sasuke has already gotten his Eternal Mangekyou Sharingan, after receiving his brother''s eyes. Itachi, meanwhile, got his Eternal Mangekyou Sharingan after getting his father''s eyes. Fugaku, his father, had the ability to see the future of the choices made by someone close to him. That''s the reason why Fugaku and Mikoto knew about the Uchiha Massacre before it even happened, his father had seen through the future of Itachi''s choice, and that was for the Uchiha Clan to redeem itself through Sasuke.


    But even then, there is still his mother''s eyes. Sasuke plans to give them to his son after he awakens his Mangekyou Sharingan, which he hoped he wouldn''t. Awakening those eyes means losing someone very close to him, or an extremely traumatizing situation. No good parents would want their children to be traumatized just to awaken a power.


    After getting his brother''s eyes, Sasuke also awakened his rinne-sharingan in his right eye after the Sage Of Six Paths visited him and Azumi in the war. Turns out, the Sage Of Six Paths had two daughters, Indra and Akura. He was Indra''s reincarnation, while Azumi was Akura''s reincarnation.


    Hagoromo, though, wondered why Sasuke was a boy. But Madara and Hashirama were also men. The Sage just shrugged and forgot about it. But Sasuke didn''t know what to feel that he was supposed to be a woman, that''s a very weird thought.


    (Scene Break)


    Finally, after a few minutes, they entered the portal that goes to Boruto''s world. Hikaru wished them good luck before they disappeared.


    "Hmm, now that they''re gone, I have to prepare for my fight with the olden god after they return. From what Deus told me, Chaortos is 100 times stronger than me. I can defeat her very easily, and I would do just that. But Deus still hasn''t told me all of her ability, and he seems stubborn about keeping it a secret." Hikaru thought out loud.


    Chaortos, The Mother Of Darkness, is supposed to be stronger than that. She is supposed to be an olden god that could control the darkness in every universe with a single wave of her fingers. But she is not that strong right now, because of the seal she is in. The seal nerfed her powers and abilities by 99.98 percent, making her just 100 times stronger than him. He can easily counter that with rings that could boost his overall strength by 10,000 percent, and he has plenty of that.


    But this made him wonder, how strong were the Olden Gods in their prime? Could they create universes with a single snap of their fingers? Kill an entire universe with a flap of their eyelash? That''s a very scary thought, and it also amazed him to an extent.


    While is strong, he is not THAT strong. He is weak, he mused, and he knows that. But there is an important question here, how strong are the current gods? Are they as strong as the olden gods? Or severely weaker than the olden gods? But from what he had seen from those pathetic gods and goddesses he''d met, he chose the latter.


    Kami, Yami, and Shinigami are a lot weaker than him. He can probably take on hundreds of them and still not break a sweat. He is many times stronger than them, he can say that he is more than 1000 times stronger than each of them. It is simply unreal how weak they are.


    Also, Deus, the disembodied voice, told him that there are people who use these "Systems" throughout the multiverse. They are basically like the Dark Souls System, but a lot, lot, lot, lot weaker. Deus told him that if any of those "Systems" comes close to the Dark Souls System, they will be absorbed into the Dark Souls System, no matter how strong they are. Meaning, their functions and other things will be absorbed into his system, thus making new options.


    Now that he thought about it, didn''t he read those wuxia and xianxia novels back then? Maybe he will be able to visit those kinds of worlds. He didn''t like those novels, but he also didn''t dislike them. Their concept is great but repetitive. Like, every wuxia and xianxia novel always have similar plots and choices of words.


    Anyway, we''re getting off topic here.


    The systems he absorbs will be added to the Dark Souls System, and he is already getting excited about meeting these "System Users". He can''t wait to see how strong they are, and how he would slaughter them.


    He has developed a love for good battles. Call him a psychopath but killing enemies stronger than him makes him feel good, or in other words, proud. But maybe this is just because he knows that he cannot die permanently, and thus challenging enemies that are way above him. But that''s why he wouldn''t challenge the olden gods in a fair fight, because he knows that they have the ability to kill him permanently.


    Hikaru stood there, outside the gate, musing to himself. Then he disappeared silently, without anyone seeing how fast he had gone.


    (Scene Change)


    It is now nighttime in Konoha, multiple houses had their lights turned on as families ate their dinners in peace and harmony.


    At their dinner table, Hikaru and his family ate their food while talking to each other. He doesn''t have to eat food, but sharing a meal with someone is a very special thing.


    "Ne, ne, papa, Senichi and Shikanori played with me today. But Senichi is a real meanie! He kept beating me in the games we played!" Emiyo whined while pouting cutely.


    "That''s just because you suck at those games. Games for intelligent people are not really for you. Imagine playing shogi with Shikanori, daughter of our godfather, Shikamaru-san. Do you know how unwise that is, sister? And you played kunai with Senichi, son of another of our godfathers, Sasuke-san." Taiyou berated her.


    "Waah! Big brother is bullying me, papa!" She got down from her chair and ran towards Hikaru, who was watching the scene in front of him with amus.e.m.e.nt in his eyes.


    "Pfft, big sister really is a cry baby, aren''t I right sister?" Riko said to her sister.


    "Yes, indeed, sister. Big sister is a cry baby, unlike us." Rina boasted without much emotion in her voice, just like Riko.


    "Stop running around and talking while we''re eating, otherwise I''ll get angry." Hinata said in a fake angry voice.


    This shuts them up, and even Emito ran back to her seat.


    "Now, now, don''t get angry at them, Hinata. They''re just playing. Now children, eat your foods, and brush your teeth after. And we''ll tuck all of you in bed later. And then we''ll have a story time with each other, how about that?" Hikaru said.


    "Really, papa!? Yay!" Emiyo shouted, excited for later.


    Even the usually cold Taiyou had a happy glint in his eyes after hearing his father say that.


    "Hear that, sister? Papa will be showing us those fantasy worlds again." Riko said.


    "Yes, you''re right, sister. Papa will be showing us those dragons and monsters again." Rina replied.


    Seeing them excited warmed Hinata''s heart. This is a family she always wanted, a family without much bickering, or cold-blooded clan members saying what they should do. It''s unfortunate that Azumi is not here, she is busy with her Hokage jobs again. But that''s what Hinata was hoping for, she''ll be able to get Hikaru just for herself tonight. Azumi is always hogging their husband whenever she is home, but this time, Hinata will be enjoying herself.


    It was also unfortunate that Kushina, her mother-in-law, isn''t here. She is too busy showing Boruto around the village, the moment she learned that he is her grandson from another dimension.


    Hikaru, meanwhile, was contemplating whether he should leave for another world, or just stay here until the seal breaks. But if he can''t defeat Chaortos, he''ll be stuck in this power level for all eternity. Unless he defeats Chaortos, he wouldn''t be able to level up and grow stronger. But if


    he wants to protect his family, then he will have to grow stronger. He has taken into account that there is a chance that a godly being might just invade this universe, and if he is still this weak by that time comes, then his family will die but not him. Call him paranoid, but there is a chance that could happen.


    So, with a heavy heart, he decided to defeat Chaortos and travel to another world to grow stronger, stronger than he is right now to protect his beloved family.

 Chapter 117 - 109: The Skeleton King and Himawari

    (In The Other Dimension, 2 Days Later)


    It''s been a few days since they arrived in this dimension, and the moment their feet landed on the soil of this world, they planned to go their separate ways. Their goal is to capture as many Otsutsukis as possible, and that would only work if they split their team. Sasuke and Kimimaro went alone, while Kakashi and Minato travelled together. The clone of Hikaru and Itachi went to the giant floating palace in the middle of elemental nation, where they felt a lot of Otsutsuki.


    Kakashi and Minato said that they wanted to see if there are any survivors, and that is understandable, considering that more survivors means more shinobis for Konoha, their Konoha. Who knows, they might just find both Sasuke and Naruto, alive.


    Kimimaro and Sasuke decided to capture the most Otsutsukis. While Itachi and Hikaru''s clone wanted to fight the leader of these aliens.


    (With Sasuke)


    With a smirk, Sasuke rained down thousands of Kirin onto the Otsutsuki Clan members in front of him. After the countless rain of Kirin, every Otsutsuki was on the ground, charred to the point of death but Sasuke made sure that they did not die, he only weakened them for easy capture. He activated the storage ring given to him by Hikaru, and all of them were sucked inside it. He did not leave a single one, every Otsutsuki is important for the experiment they were going to do, after all.


    Sasuke grunted as he blocked an attack from an Otsutsuki. He knew the Otsutsuki was strong, but he was stronger. With a kick, the Otsutsuki who attacked him fell to the ground while vomiting blood.


    "Y-you hairless apes! I am Kamui Otsutsuki, and I will not allow you lower beings to just stomp us around!" The now identified Kamui, cried with the last of his strength. He can no longer move, the rain of Kirin earlier damaged him enough for that. His tattered clothing showed numerous injuries, and most of all, blood. Sasuke thought they were aliens, but aliens didn''t have red blood. It sickened him to know that these people decided to conquer every planet they saw, and enslaved every species they met.


    These Otsutsukis, they were not gods, they were just as human as them. Their blood confirmed that. With a kick to the head, he knocked out Kamui and stored him inside the storage ring.


    He looked around him, and saw this world''s Konoha in ruins. Not a single citizen of Konoha can be seen, and he frowned at that. He wanted to save this world''s version of him, the older Sasuke Uchiha and his family. He wanted to save them because he didn''t want the same thing to happen to his own family. It was a scary thought, at least for him, that someone might slaughter his family and he wouldn''t be able to do anything. He can imagine what the other him is feeling right, if he is alive that is.


    (With Kimimaro)


    "Sage Art: Throne Of The Skeleton King." Bones appeared before Kimimaro and formed a magnificent throne behind him. He sat on the throne as it floated to the sky. He rested his head on his hand, and looked down at the numerous Otsutsuki members in front of him, like a cold and calculating Monarch looking at his enemies.


    He wore a business suit, and it fit him perfectly. His long white hair stretched to his waist, and his cold vivid green eyes arrogantly looked down at them. But the most noticeable thing about him was his horns, they were made from bones, his bones, and his skin was as pale as white. He was using the Sage Mode, and this was the form he took.


    He raised his other hand, and the Otsutsukis tensed up. They couldn''t move, they were terrified of him. But not all of them, some were stronger than most. They rose up to fight the Skeleton King, but it was futile, for the Skeleton King is a cruel Monarch.


    "Sage Art: Wrath Of The Skeleton King." Kimimaro voiced his technique, and as fast as they can blink, millions upon millions of sharp bones appeared in the sky.


    And then, he brought his arm down.


    All of them fell towards the hundreds of Otsutsukis in front of him faster than the eye could blink. They tried to form some kind of chakra barrier, but it was simply futile. The Skeleton King showed no mercy as he left them all on the brink of death. His eyes simply gazed, his eyes contained no mercy.


    And then, he sighed and shook his head in disappointment, then said, "Is that really all? I thought more of them. The Otsutsukis are, simply, glorified humans. Hikaru-sama wanted me to bring them back alive, but it seems like I killed a few of them. I can''t hold back after all."


    His cold and stoic face did one thing that would''ve shocked some people. He smirked at his fallen enemies, his smirk contained arrogance, confidence, and most of all, pride.


    With a wave of his hand, all of the Otsutsuki members, whether they were dead or alive, were all sucked into the storage ring given to him by Hikaru. Fortunately, the time inside the storage ring is stopped and even with those severe injuries, those Otsutsuki people will still live, but as their lab rats.


    He looked around, and found only a wasteland with a lot, lot of bones sticking out. If his theory is correct, the land he is floating upon was once the lightning country of this dimension. He couldn''t find any life remaining, but they might be hiding. The people of this dimension, aside from the Otsutsuki Clan, must be planning to fight back. He knows how stubborn humans can be, and they might just be hiding in the shadows as they plan their counter-attack against their oppressors.


    "Hmm, is this the hairless monkey they are talking about? He certainly doesn''t seem much." A female voice sounded behind him, but he already knew about her presence before she even got here.


    He controlled his throne to turn around and face his opponent. He saw a white haired woman with two horns protruding from her forehead. He noticed that she had three eyes, her regular two eyes were rinnegan while the eye on her forehead was a rinne-sharingan. It looks somewhat different from Sasuke-san, but he can recognize a rinne-sharingan when he sees one.


    "Arrogant words, coming from someone so weak," Yeah, he''s been influenced by Hikaru-sama alright, "I can kill you within a blink of an eye. Why do you think that you''re strong enough to face me on your own?"


    The Otsutsuki woman looked at him in disdain, and said with disgust, "You hairless monkeys are truly arrogant. I don''t know where you came from, but you cannot escape the wrath of the great Izanami herself. I am Izanami Otsutsuki, remember my name, monkey."


    Kimimaro chuckled, but it didn''t sound pleasant, far from it. It was cold, his arctic laughter suddenly filled her ears.


    Then, he stopped. He looked at her, and suddenly, she felt pain from her chest. She looked down to see what was happening, and saw something so horrifying. Her bones were sticking out, they were escaping her body. She tried to contain it, but she found no control of her body. Her limbs started to move on their own, as if they had minds of their own.


    Cracking sounds came from her bones as they tried to escape from her body. It was painful, the most painful thing she has ever felt. Her bones ripped her skin, her spine moved like a worm, and then, she saw Kimimaro smirking at her with madness behind his oh so green eyes.


    Then, everything went to hell for her. With a sudden push, all of her, except for her skull, pierced her body from the inside and went towards Kimimaro. He controlled them like they were a part of him. She tried screaming but found that she couldn''t. She could no longer move, her body was a bloody mess. Organs were falling, her intestines simply plopped to the ground, and she could hear her heart beating its last.


    Kimimaro''s face was filled with anger as he screamed at her.


    "You arrogant, utterly worthless mongrel! The only one who can be arrogant in front of me and insult me like that is Hikaru-sama! And he never insulted me, never in the time I have known him has he ever insulted me! No one can insult me, except for my master!" He then calmed himself down, and added, "I should''ve captured you alive, but I was too angry. But I will take your eyes, Hikaru-sama will surely love them."


    She wanted to die. The pain, it was more than excruciating, she couldn''t think of a word that she could term this kind of pain. She didn''t want to feel it, but she was forced to. Then, she felt her mess of a body float towards the man who tortured her. And when she was closer to him, he plucked out her eyes, the three of them. She couldn''t scream, she wanted to, but she was already too broken for that, her body that is. She couldn''t utter a word because her vocal cords were destroyed too.


    The Skeleton King simply looked at her with disdain, then destroyed her head.


    Ah, she was finally freed from the worst few minutes of her life.


    (With Minato and Kakashi)


    They wandered around, trying to find a single glimpse of any Otsutsuki. But they realized, they have already captured all of the Otsutsuki in this location. And they can no longer sense any Otsutsuki, except from that castle that floated far from them.


    "Kakashi-kun, let''s find some survivors. Itachi can take care of the last of the Otsutsuki Clan. Who knows, we might find someone we''re familiar with." Minato said enthusiastically.


    "Sure, we might as well do that. And hey, come out now." Kakashi spoke lazily, as he detected someone spying at them.


    They were in the ruined village of Sunagakure. The village wasn''t entirely desecrated, but it was destroyed. They thought they wouldn''t find someone here, imagine their surprise when they sensed someone''s chakra signature. It was from any Otsutsuki, but they felt like they knew this kind of chakra signature.


    Slowly, from the building, a 14 years old girl walked out. Weirdly enough, she had two whisker marks on each side of face. She had shoulder length hair, oceanic blue eyes, and a Konoha Headband on her forehead.


    "And who are you, kid?" Kakashi asked.


    She narrowed her eyes, and asked the same thing, "That''s what I want to know. You look exactly as the Sixth and the one beside you looks exactly like the Fourth. Who are you people?"


    Kakashi had a confused expression on his face as he said, "Who''s the Sixth again?"


    She looked at them weirdly, and said, "How could you not know that? You two wear the headbands of Konoha, there''s no way you two wouldn''t know of Kakashi Hatake, the Sixth Hokage."


    "..."


    "..."


    "Nah, there''s no way." Kakashi was in denial.


    "Hahahaha! Kakashi as the Sixth Hokage, imagine that! He would''ve quit the moment he put on the hat." Minato laughed at his student.


    "Hey! That''s¡­ not true." Kakashi muttered, crestfallen.


    The blue eyed girl stared at them as if she was staring at two crazy people that came out of a mental asylum. She then asked again, "You still haven''t answered my question. Who are you two?"


    "Me? I am Minato Namikaze, the Fourth Hokage. And the one beside me is my student, Kakashi Hatake. Nice to meet you, miss¡­?" Minato answered.


    She then dazely answered, "Oh, I''m Uzumaki Himawari¡­ wait! What did you say!? There''s no way that you two are alive! Uncle Kakashi is dead, along with my grandfather! You two are lying!"


    Minato was taken aback, surprised at her sudden outburst. Wait, did she say grandfather? Is she his granddaughter in this dimension? That is certainly interesting, he has another granddaughter to spoil!


    "Ahem! You might not believe it, but I am Minato Namikaze. I am not from this dimension. Your, uh, brother came to us after this world''s Sasuke sent them to our dimension. Your brother asked for our help, and we obliged. My wife is currently pampering your brother in our dimension, in short, she is spoiling him." Minato said joyfully.


    "Wha? Uh, this doesn''t make sense! You look like him, just like from the pictures papa showed me. But this does explain it. But if you really are my grandfather, then show me his signature technique." She demanded.


    Minato smiled. He threw his kunai in the air, and teleported in a flash of yellow. And he landed gracefully on the ground while holding his kunai.


    Himawari showed a face of awe as she said, "Wow! That was amazing!" After a few moments, she calmed down, "C''mon, grandfather, uncle Kakashi. I''ll show you our underground base that uncle Gaara built for us!" She gestured for them to follow her, and they did.


    They followed Himawari as they runned.


    Kakashi then asked, "How many people survived?"


    "Hmm, I think more than 20 of us survived. My mother is one of them, but she is in a coma due to the injuries she got from fighting the Otsutsuki Clan. Uncle Sasuke is alive too, but he is in a deep coma due to his injuries and overuse of his chakra. The one leading us currently is Uncle Shikamaru, and we''ve been planning our counter-attack for a while. But then, we noticed that there were no Otsutsuki in sight in the perimeter, so they sent me as a scout since I''m the best at that." She said that last part with a little bit of pride.


    "Hahaha, you''re so brave, Himawari-kun. Most children your age wouldn''t have had the guts to scout a place that could contain a lot of your enemies." Minato complimented his, uh, granddaughter? Trust me, I''m not sure either.

 Chapter 118 - 110: The Four Major Deities

    The both of them followed Himawari until they reached their secret base. When they made it in there, they were surprised to see a lot of advanced technology gadgets and the like. The underground base was made from metal and marble.


    The moment they entered the base, they were met by Shikamaru himself, There he stood, older than before. He looked exactly like his father, without the scar on his eye. He wore a moka-colored coat, and under it were his pants and the new Konoha flak jacket. His eyes were steeled, like a veteran who''s already gone through wars.


    Minato could tell he was strong, but not on the same level as them. At the very least, Shikarumaru was a kage-level shinobi based on his chakra level.


    The Nara Clan Head narrowed his eyes, and said, "I heard about the two of you when we were talking telepathically with Himawari, and I''m surprised that Boruto managed to convince you people from another dimension to help us. But, what I want to ask is; why did you agree to help us? Did Boruto promised you guys some kind of reward?"


    Minato wore a friendly smile on his face, and replied, "Technically, we won''t be receiving any reward from helping you guys. Our motive is to kidnap a lot of Otsutsuki and turn them into our lab rats. The only thing we ask you guys is to not disturb, or stop us when we do our objective. Is that alright to you, Shikamaru-kun?"


    Shikamaru nodded, and then said, "If that''s the case, we have no problem. Our main objective is either eradicate them, or drive them off. But as you can see, our chance of doing that is slimmer than stopping Sakura''s obsession with Sasuke. Anyway, let''s go further inside. We have a lot to talk about." Then he sighed, "I just hope that with the two of you here with us, we can win the war against those aliens."


    "Hmm? Who said that there were only the two of us? There are six of us, if you include the clone that was sent along with us. Itachi-kun and the clone of Hikaru-kun will be the ones to defeat the leader of the Otsutsuki Clan. Our job is to capture the most Otsutsuki Clan members. So you have nothing to worry about, the Otsutsuki Clan is as good as dead." Mianto said with a bit of pride in his voice.


    Shikamaru had a shocked face when he heard that. Hundreds of thoughts were going through his head as he processed what was just said to him. If his theory is correct, these two defeated all of the Otsutsuki Clan members around the Sand Village. That would''ve been an impossible feat, but they came from another dimension, so he doesn''t know how strong the shinobis there.


    Then, there is their number. Only six? And one of them is a clone? He knows that they are strong, but there''s no way the six of them can defeat thousands of Otsutsuki Clan members. Even Naruto and Sasuke were barely able to defeat a few hundreds before they were taken down, but the reason for that was because of Kawaki, or Isshiki Otsutsuki. They were weakened to the point of defeat by Isshiki.


    The Otsutsuki are strong, even their weakest members are as strong as their High-Jounins. And don''t talk about the higher ups of that clan, they were monsters. Last time, when Momoshiki attacked a few years back, Naruto and Sasuke were barely able to kill Momoshiki, and that is with the help of the other 4 Kage. Now, all Kages, except for Naruto, are dead.


    Naruto has been captured by the enemies and their goal is to extract Kurama from its seal. Naruto managed to delay them from extracting Kurama, and has been successful so far. But for how long? Once they get all the tailed-beasts, they will be turned into some chakra fruit and will only boost the powers of those Otsutsuki.


    Shikamaru sighed from the headache he is feeling right now. He turned to Minato and Kakashi, and said, "If what you''re talking about is true, then we will leave the rest up to you. I''ll just be taking a break, it''s been far too long since I had one." Shikamaru sat on the ground and rested his back against the wall, "But be careful of Kawaki. He was the one who flattened our village, Konoha. And he was also the reason why Naruto and Sasuke were weakened enough to be defeated by some Otsutsuki."


    "Hm! I understand. Then, we''ll be going now. I believe that my friends have captured all the wandering Otsutsukis. I don''t sense them anymore through natural energy. Ah, Kimimaro-kun just turned someone from inside out." Minato said as Shikamaru felt natural energy suddenly coursing through the air.


    ''Of course,'' Shikamaru thought, ''The fourth hokage was rumored to have mastered the famed sage mode. Truly, life is always so troublesome.'' He said the last part because he, too, wanted to unlock the famed sage mode that Naruto was able to use as if he was just breathing. But fate is really an asshole. His summons told him he wouldn''t be able to use it, even if he trained for thousands of years because of one single reason; he didn''t have the talent for sensing natural energy. Of course, when he heard that, he only said three words, "What a drag."


    After saying some short goodbyes, they left. Minato just wanted to see if his, uh, granddaughter is safe in this secret base of theirs, nothing more. Now, it was time to regroup with the rest.


    (With Naruto)


    "Gaaaahhh!" He screamed in pain as Kawaki tried to extract the nine-tailed beast from his stomach.


    They were inside a palace, in the throne room to be exact. The Otsutsuki Clan has a literal goddess as their leader, Amaterasu Otsutsuki. She is their matriarch, and creator. She is, in her words, a major goddess. While there, Naruto heard her say that she had eaten countless chakra fruits, and the cost of those fruits were the other worlds that had life in it. They planted the chakra tree in many worlds, and each of those trees can drain an entire world''s life force and the life of every being living in that world.


    The reincarnation of Ashura was terrified to hear that, knowing that, this time, they are facing a literal goddess as their opponent. Kaguya only ate one chakra fruit and she was so strong that they were barely able to seal her, but now? Someone who has eaten thousands of chakra fruits? It was simply¡­ impossible.


    "Tch, this is taking too long." Kawaki said, an annoyed frown appeared on his face. "Mother, can''t you help me with this?"


    Amaterasu simply sat on her throne lazily and with her eyes closed. She opened her lazy eyes, and simply said, "No", and then closed her eyes again. Her voluptuous body simply sat on the throne as she began sleeping. The only reason she was here was because she wanted to see this world wither until nothing is left of it. Watching a planet wither is always exciting.


    ''F.u.c.k!'' Kawaki, or Isshiki, cursed inside his mind. He couldn''t say it outloud, or else he will be turned to meat-paste. Their matriarch, or "mother", is a glutton and a lazy woman. She hogs all the chakra fruit they obtain, and just sleeps every single day until they acquire a new chakra fruit. But they couldn''t complain, since they were far too weak to be even a threat to her "majesty". It''s simply ridiculous how such a powerful woman is so lazy that she won''t even help them doing a job that would help her eat her "precious" chakra fruit.


    Contrary to Isshiki''s thoughts, Amaterasu was indeed doing her job as the leader of their race. She is negotiating with the other major gods of this world, saying that she can offer them another world instead of this one. It was going so well¡­ when they suddenly refused. She heard them say that a part of the "Chosen Immortal" is in this world, and offending the Chosen Immortal means absolute death. She was confused, of course, since she doesn''t know who this "Chosen Immortal" is.


    She was trying to persuade them to leave this planet and go to the one she suggested, but Isshiki distracted her, and the moment she returned to converse with them again, they were already going towards her. They were going to kill her entire clan!


    She opened her eyes as fast as possible, surprising Isshiki.


    She said in a voice full of urgency, and then said in panic, "Isshiki! Call the others to return! Our race is going to die if we stay here any longer!" She stood up and sensed that the other major gods are nearing her already.


    Isshiki has never seen her panic, never in his life has he ever seen her like this. Then, he felt it. Numerous beings with strong energies were suddenly going towards them at a fast pace! And not only that, there were 4 beings with a presence as strong as his matriarch!


    "Amaterasu, to dare claim our land¡­ your fate has been decided by me, the Shinigami!" A voice with a deathly voice said with anger.


    "Hmph, if we didn''t take our time, you would''ve been dead by now." A cold and seductive voice filled with darkness said.


    "Sister, won''t you just leave our land? We promise to let you go if you leave. I don''t want unnecessary bloodshed." A kind and benevolent voice said.


    "I still don''t understand to this day, why are you Otsutsukis so obsessed with growing stronger by eating some kind of miracle fruits? All of us deities here have obtained our strength through patiently training ourselves." A young man''s voice said in a confused tone.


    The four major deities, Kami, Shinigami, Yami, and the Ruler Of All Yokai, Nurarihyon, have arrived!


    Kami has the appearance of a beautiful, benevolent woman with a beautiful face and body. She wore little, only some white cloth that covered most of her sensitive body parts. She has long flowing blonde hair with brown eyes, a beautiful shaped face, and a blue crystal attached on her forehead.


    Shinigami has the appearance of a reaper, wielding a large and deadly scythe. He wore a robe that hid his whole body and a skeleton mask that covered his face. His presence radiated death, eerily making Isshiki''s hair stand up.


    Yami has the appearance that is completely opposite of that of Kami. Instead of a beauty that made everyone calm their hearts, her beauty looked so seductive that even if a mortal man stares at her for a few seconds, he will fall in love with her body. She has black hair, dark skin, white eyebrows. Eyelashes, and eyes. She wore clothing that only a succubus would wear. A black skin tight suit, two bracelets on each of her wrists and legs, and a pendant that radiated darkness. And it was obvious that she wore no underwear under that tight suit, her erect n.i.p.p.l.es were proof of that.


    And finally, Nurarihyon. He has an appearance of a young man in his twenties, except for his abnormally long black hair that extended behind his head. He has piercing yellow eyes, black eyelashes and eyebrows, and pale skin. He wore a long black kimono with a katana in its sheath on his waist, and a smaller katana on the other side of his waist. He had his left eye closed with his left arm inside the gap in his kimono, he looked completely relax as he took a puff from his pipe.


    They floated on top of the palace with numerous minor deities surrounding them. They looked so overbearing and majestic that it almost seemed like this might be the end of the Otsutsuki Clan.


    Amaterasu had a nervous smile on her face as she said, "So¡­ what do I owe you guys on this pleasant day?"


    "Don''t play dumb, Amaterasu. We allowed your audacity for far too long! We have had enough." Shinigami said with his usual eerie voice.


    "But you guys were just about to accept my offe-"


    "Silence, wench! You were fooling us earlier, and no more will that happen again!" Shinigami barked.


    "Now, don''t be too hard on the poor young goddess. She was simply too ignorant of our world." Nurarihyon said, relaxed.


    ''Tch, all of you were just about to accept my offer of relocating to another world that is more interesting than this one. But then, this "Chosen Immortal" suddenly appeared, and all of you suddenly turned on me! Hypocrites! All of you!'' Amaterasu sneered at them inside her mind.


    "Please sister, go back to where you belong and don''t ever come back here. Shinigami will revive all of the people your clan has killed in this world, so that you will not incur the wrath of the Chosen Immortal." Kami said, almost begging her to just leave.


    Reluctantly, Amaterasu had to back down. She can''t win this fight, even with all of her clan members supporting her. She may be a lazy glutton, but it wouldn''t take a genius to see that angering them even more isn''t something she should do, unless she wants all of her hard work gone to drain.


    "Fine, even I know my limits. But what about my men? My clan members? I sense that many of them are no longer here, their chakra signatures are gone. I hope you can revive them, Shinigami." Amaterasu calmly talked to them, so that no more aggressive actions will happen.


    "Don''t you order me around, wench! I won''t revive them for you, or to be more exact, I don''t have their souls. But I sense that they are alive, but for how long? I don''t know." Death himself said to her.


    Amaterasu calmly took this information, and knew that there is no longer any room for a discussion here. Besides, making strong soldiers is easy, she doesn''t have to be angry right now.


    With that, they watched her as she left with her floating palace. They didn''t go after her, since the death of a deity is a trouble in itself. The Chief God would be angry at them if they killed her.


    Suddenly, as they floated in the sky, they heard someone clapping behind them.


    *Clap* Clap* Clap*


    "Well, this is certainly surprising. I didn''t think that a major god was our enemy, if I had known, I would''ve equipped my shinobis with far stronger gears. But it would still not have been that much of a problem. Now, are you guys my enemies?" Hikaru said while looking down at them as he floated in the sky.

 Chapter 119 - 111: The Infinity Stones

    He couldn''t believe it, Nurarihyon actually existed in this world! Well, he''s not the same as in the anime, but he looks and speaks the same. You can clearly see confidence, but not arrogance, oozing from his very figure. He was strong, the clone concluded. In his current form, he could probably take on the four of them with a little bit of difficulty. Remember, he has 10 percent of Hikaru''s physical strength and all of his creator''s chakra. But even then, all major deities use mana and not some other type of energy like chakra.


    All of the deities surrounding them shook in fear as they saw him suddenly appearing, except for the four major deities.


    Nurarihyon floated near him and bowed with his fist cupped, then said, "No, we are not your enemies, Chosen Immortal. It would''ve been quite an honor if we could meet your real form, sadly we couldn''t." He met his eyes and smiled brightly.


    The hundreds of yokais down them were wide eyed when they saw their leader bowing to someone. The Lord Of Pandemonium never bows, not even in front of the highest of gods. Yet he bowed to this nobody? What is happening?


    The clone raised an eyebrow, and said, "Then why did you not kill her instead? All of our problems would''ve been solved if you had just killed her."


    Nurarihyon shook his head, and said, "It''s not that we don''t want to, it''s just that it is against the rules. I''m sure the Chosen Immortal knows the rules of the gods. We can''t kill fellow deities, or we would be hunted and executed by the Chief God who governs us all. But as our apologies, Shinigami here would revive the mortals those Otsutsuki''s killed. And Kami would heal the people that were injured by them, too."


    The clone narrowed his eyes, trying to detect any lies on Nurarihyon''s face. He found no lies, and said, "Then, why didn''t you all intervene before things got so out of hand? Don''t tell me you were discussing some kind of deal with that goddess, did you?"


    Nurarihyon kept his composure, he already expected for the Chosen Immortal to be smart. But the other gods sweated, knowing for a fact that they were just about to accept the offer that Amaterasu made for them.


    "We were quite busy when they invaded, so we couldn''t detect them much, much earlier. If we did, we would have driven them off before a lot of mortals died. But as compensation for our severe tardiness, we would like to give you this." He extended his hand and suddenly, two glowing stones appeared on top of his hand, levitating. Their colors were blue and green.


    The clone raised his eyebrow again, surprised to feel a huge amount of power coming from those two stones. He then asked, "And these things are?"


    "Two of the six infinity stones of this universe. We usually don''t give them to others, but this is a special case. These two can bend space and time itself. The green stone is the space stone and the blue stone is the time stone. So, would you like to accept our compensation?"


    The clone knew that this was a bribe, and this is a bribe that he cannot refuse. Well, technically, he can, but he won''t. These two stones are important to have more control over space and time. The original will surely love these stones.


    The clone accepted the two stones, and put them inside his storage ring, then asked, "You said that there are six stones in this universe, right?"


    The Lord of Pandemonium put on a smile and replied, "Yes, I did."


    "Then, do these stones exist in my universe?" The clone asked curiously.


    "Absolutely, since these stones exist in every universe within the multiverse. But finding them is pretty difficult. No, REALLY difficult. The universe is vass and it is always expanding, so finding the six stones is like trying to find a grain of rice in a planet made of sand." Nurarihyon answered.


    Hikaru nodded. And now, he realized that there is nothing to do here anymore. This world is no longer in trouble, and all of the people killed by those damnable Otsutsuki''s are going to be revived by the literal God of Death. And he is sure that they have collected more than enough Otsutsuki members, and it is now time to go home and tell Boruto that his home is safe.


    "Hm, I''m grateful for the information. We will now go back to our universe. But if I hear that you guys did not follow your promises, I will personally destroy all of you, even if going against Deus'' rules." The clone warned, before disappearing in a flash of blue.


    The deities took a deep sigh of relief as they saw the Chosen Immortal leave. Truly, how stressful those powerful beings are. In just the presence of a mere clone, they started shaking their legs like scared chihuahuas in front of a lion.


    Nurarihyon took a sigh of relief, and turned around to his fellow major deities, and said, "Now, who said that I suck at negotiating?" He then erupted in a fit of laughter as he looked at them with disdain jokingly.


    Shinigami looked away, "Tch."


    Kami just raised her hands like she was giving up, and said, "Brother really never changes."


    Yami shook her head, as if disappointed at a child, "How immature, we barely escaped with our lives there."


    At that, everyone nodded grimly. While there are rules that limit the actions of every deity that exists, those rules don''t apply to the Chosen Immortal, and at the same time, deities aren''t allowed to hurt the Chosen Immortal or anyone close to them.


    And there is a reason why they can''t hurt and apply those rules to the Chosen Immortal, because when one arrogant deity killed the lover of the second Chosen Immortal, Kiran killed that deity brutally. One of the Chief Gods caught a whiff of this information, and tried justifying his actions by the rule book. And he tried killing the second Chosen Immortal along with a bunch of his friends.


    The day that happened, was the day the second Chosen Immortal invaded the palace of gods and slaughtered millions upon millions of deities. The only one who was able to stop him was the first Chosen Immortal, Zain. But Zain is no more, the kind and benevolent Zain has already lost his mind many years ago.


    That''s why, pissing off the third Chosen Immortal means death to them. Not only will that give Kiran justification to slaughter all of the deities that exist today, but that will also incur the wrath of the third Chosen Immortal, making the race of deities doomed.


    In the end, they could only put up with the antics of those Chosen Immortals. For gods, dying is not really permanent but for those that don''t have followers anymore, well, once they die, they will never be able to revive ever again.


    (Note: To make this more "vague" I won''t explain how gods are created, I will only explain that at the end of volume 1).


    (Time Skip, 3 Days Later)


    After finishing some things up, the 6 of them were now all ready to go home. But when they were just about to use the portal to go back to their home dimension, Naruto approached them and told them to let his wife and kids stay in their dimension for awhile, so that no harm will come to them while they are repairing the elemental nation.


    They agreed, since it won''t bring them any harm anyway. The now healthy Hinata and Himawari stood with them, ready to go. They have all of their stuff with them.


    Naruto was unwilling to let them go, but it was necessary, since he won''t know when the Otsutsuki Clan will be back again.


    The people that were killed by the Otsutsuki Clan were all resurrected, even the five kages. So it won''t take long to fix the elemental nation, now that they have a lot of people with them.


    Sasuke just told them to take care of his daughter, since he, too, will leave her to their hands. Losing a loved one is hard, that''s why he didn''t want to lose another. Sakura is strong on her own, so she will be fine while staying here.


    For Hikaru though, he didn''t get one of the things he wanted; the ten-tailed beasts. Because they just simply drove those Otsutsuki away from this planet. He wanted to keep those tailed beasts as his pets, but it seems like he won''t be able to. Well, no matter, there is always the Otsutsuki Clan in his dimension to slaughter.


    The moment they stepped foot into the portal made by Sasuke, they all disappeared.


    Naruto was quite sad to see his family go, but this is a must. Endangering his family is the last thing he wants to do. In that world, there are thousands of people stronger than them that are more than capable of protecting his family.


    ''Are you sure about this, Naruto?'' Kurama asked him, worried that his host might just fall into depression.


    "Yeah, they are my only family. I don''t want them to get hurt any longer, especially Hinata. Though it might be interesting to see my wife and the Hinata of that dimension meet with each other. I''m sure hilarity would ensure." Naruto said with amus.e.m.e.nt.


    (Back With Hikaru)


    Hikaru just finished grinding for souls and items in the system, when a black portal appeared in the middle of his living room. There he saw Sasuke, Itachi, his clone, Kakashi, and Kimimaro come out of the portal. They seem to be a bit tired, especially Kakashi.


    "I''m never going to another mission ever again. After this, I am retiring as a shinobi. Just send the reward money to my bank account, I''m going to take the rest I rightfully deserve." Kakashi said as he immediately left Hikaru''s house just after coming out of the portal.


    "Well, there he goes." Minato said, amused, "I''m also going to take a rest from shinobi work for a while, fighting those Otsutsukis really brought out the best of me. Oh, and also, here. I''m giving you back the rin-" When he took off the ring, it suddenly broke.


    "Ah¡­ whoops!" Minato scratched his head sheepishly. He forgot that once you have taken off that ring, it will break and turn to dust.


    Hikaru saw what happened to the ring and facepalmed. Seriously, his father-in-law is a really foolish man. Well it doesn''t matter anyway, he has thousands of those rings.


    Hikaru just shook his hands at him and said, "It''s alright, those rings are easy to obtain. Just give me your storage rings, and I will take care of the rest."


    All of them complied and gave each of their storage rings to him. Inside those rings are thousands of Otsutsuki Clan members, and they are all suspended in time. That means, time is not moving inside the storage ring and living beings that are on the verge of death will still live inside the ring.


    Hikaru raised an eyebrow when he looked at the two other individuals they brought with them. One of them looked exactly like his wife, Hinata, and the other looks like Hinata but younger and has two whisker marks on each side of her cheeks.


    "And who are these two?" Hikaru asked them.


    "Well, Naruto-san said that he wanted to keep his family safe by sending them here. I decided to bring them here for us to protect. I''m sure it would be easy for us to do that, at least." Itachi answered his question.


    "Well, the more the merrier, I guess." Hikaru just shrugged, "But where will they live?"


    "Well, I was thinking about giving them to the Hyuga Clan, if that''s alright with you. I''m sure the Hyuga Clan would take the both of them in." Itachi said, after some time of thinking.


    Hikaru nodded and smiled, "Well, that''s that. All of you, rest for now. Tomorrow we will start the experiments with the Otsutsuki Clan, I''m just disappointed you guys didn''t manage to capture their leader."


    Then, his clone reported to him, "Creator, I have information and items that would certainly be useful to you."


    The clone then dispelled itself, and Hikaru got the memories of his clone. Slowly, his lips started rising into a smile.


    In his hands, he held two particular glowing stones. They held a great amount of energy, making Hikaru freeze for a moment before he got used to the power in the stones. The memories of the other gods telling him about the infinity stones reminded him that there are 6 more stones in this universe. They all hold enough power to obliterate an entire galaxy.


    If he was any ordinary person, these stones would''ve obliterated him on the spot the moment he touched them, but he is more than ordinary. He is a man capable of obliterating an entire planet with a single punch with pure physical strength, he is able to compress an entire planet into a ball the size of his hand with the power of his mana alone, and not only that, he will be achieving godhood the moment he defeats that olden god, Chaortos.


    With a wide smile on his face, he said: "This is certainly interesting."

 Chapter 120 - 112: Resurrection Of Old Enemies

    In the underground lab that Hikaru built just for this moment, thousands of Otsutsuki Clan members kneeled in front of him as they all groaned in pain. He saw many of them with a lost limb or two. And they were all severely injured, the team he sent certainly didn''t hold back.


    By his side was none other than Orochimaru. He wore a lab coat with normal clothes underneath his coat. He had a smile on his face, as if the scene in front of him was very interesting.


    Hikaru decided to resurrect him because, as much as he hates to admit it, he is the only person qualified for this kind of job. Besides, he believes in second chances¡­ not really.


    For Orochimaru to not go rogue any longer, he gave him Seath''s Primordial Crystal, at least a small part of it. Now, he will no longer pursue immortality because he already has it.


    "Fufufu, how intriguing. Those wounds that they have would''ve killed a normal shinobi in less than seconds. But they survived it! Not only that, they are healing! But slowly. You sure about giving me all of these lab rats, Hikaru-kun?" Orochimaru said with a small smile on his face.


    Hikaru nodded and said, "Yes, as long as you make something capable of giving the genes of these Otsutsukis into normal shinobis, then we''ll have no problem. And might I need to remind you that the moment you betray me, is the moment your soul gets obliterated out of existence."


    Orochimaru laughed nervously, "Of course I wouldn''t do that. I''ve had enough of staying inside that jar while spending my time in the darkness." He spoke with a bit of fear in his voice. Truthfully, he doesn''t want to experience that ever again. He almost lost his mind after spending many years in that jar, the only reason he stayed sane was because, well, he''s a genius and a prodigy.


    And after spending years inside that jar, he developed a kind personality. Staying in that jar made him reflect on a lot of things, and thus gaining a bit of shame for all his done to those people he wronged. He has changed, in a way. While he wanted to gain redemption, he had to work for Hikaru for a while.


    He saw Hikaru wave his hand and mutter, "Great Heal, Bind," then a wave of blinding light engulfed his vision. He flinched for a moment before he regained his vision.


    He saw all the Otsutsukis that Hikaru captured all healed up, but they were also tied up by some kind of transparent rope. They couldn''t move but they tried struggling out of the rope but to no avail.


    "[Wide Weakness], [Wide Blindness], [Wide Paralyze]." Hikaru waved his hand again and chanted numerous debuff spells towards the struggling Otsutsuki Clan members. And then, there was nothing. All of them plop down to the ground with a thud with their mouths foaming and their eyes blackened due to his spell [Blindness]. They also couldn''t resists [Paralyze] because of his spell [Weakness], which weakened their strength to struggle.


    Orochimaru was smiling on the outside, but inside, he feared him. This scene in front of him gave him two feelings; awe and fear. Hikaru is a man of many mysteries. He can conjure thousands of those elemental spells of his and not break a sweat. He has more than enough power to decimate armies with a single flick of his fingers, enough power to reduce the famous ten-tailed beast into a mere puppy.


    Truly, he can''t fathom how such a man exists in this world. He''s a man that literally goes against nature herself, a man that can control the gods in his whims.


    Orochimaru chuckled at the scene in front of him. To think that these people were the ancestors of the famed Uzumaki, Uchiha, and Senju Clans. How utterly ridiculous. These people are less than dogs, by how their mouths foamed like children infected by some kind of rabies. Though, he can''t help but lick his lips at the thought of breeding those Otsutsuki women with male humans. Would another Sage of Six Paths appear? Or they would just be reduced to failed experiments? Either way, Konoha would get its powerful shinobis once these Otsutsuki women births half-human children.


    Hikaru was just about to leave, when he turned around to say something.


    "Orochimaru," Hikaru called, "Once the breeding program for the subjects finishes and they''ve birthed many half-Otsutsuki children, those children will be placed in a special orphanage that I have made myself. They will be fed and dressed well. Nagato, Konan, and Yahiko will be the ones to take care of them, along with the rest of Akatsuki members that I will resurrect soon. For now, see if there''s anything wrong with the subjects. If there is none, proceed with the experiments." Find authorized novels in , faster updates, better experience, Please click /book/traveling-to-the-world-of-anime-with-the-dark-souls-system_17253890906198605/chapter-112-resurrection-of-old-enemies_50952598366251660 for visiting.


    And then, he left through the stairs that went to the land above them.


    Orochimaru chuckled at how Hikaru is so blunt with things. Truly, he treats these Otsutsukis as if they''re just animals. Well, in his eyes, all of these Otsutsukis are just experimental subjects, nothing more, nothing less.


    Though, Hikaru seems to have a little soft spot for children. He noticed that he wanted the best for those children when he talked to him earlier, if making a dozen strong S-Rank Shinobis take care of them is proof enough. He wonders, how strong would Hikaru''s personal army be?


    (With Hikaru)


    He hasn''t been slacking at training his magic spells and resurrection spells, contrary to that he has been upgrading every spell he has. Especially the resurrection spells. With enough research, he was finally able to create bodies without taking that much time. Years ago, it would take days or weeks just to create a single body. Now, he can create bodies within minutes! With that much power in his hands, he decided to resurrect some Akatsuki members. Sasori, Deidara, Kakuzu, and Kisame. He wanted to resurrect Hidan but he realized that the jashinist is not actually dead, he''s just been buried alive under the Nara Clan Forest, though in pieces.


    You might be saying, "How can you control someone as unpredictable as Hidan, a Jashinist?" Well, you might be surprised. Jashin, Hidan''s god, is actually Shinigami! Shinigami actually has more than ten thousands of followers as Jashin. You see, when gods lose their followers, their faith, the gods would slowly lose their immortality, making resurrection impossible for them. If a god has the faith of his followers, they can resurrect no matter how many times they die. And Shinigami decided to use his powers as one of the gods of death to give fake immortality to his followers as Jashin. But it is a secret, no one else could know that he is doing, or else he will be punished severely by the Chief God that has jurisdiction over them.


    Well, Hikaru found out and decided to use his new blackmail material to convince all of the Jashinists to side with him. He gave them strict training for 2 years and now a majority of them are at least High-Jounin lever to Low-Kage shinobis, a dozen of them are High-Kage Shinobis. He has an entire army in his hands that could literally take over the elemental nation if he wasn''t here!


    And do you know what they call him in the Jashinists Church? The Heavenly Messiah. Oh yeah~! Though, they first called him The Messiah but he decided to add "Heavenly" in it. Things that have "Heavenly" in it sound cooler than anything, the same goes for "Emperor". For example, Heavenly Shit, Heavenly F.u.c.k, Heavenly D.i.c.k, Heavenly Ass. All of them sounded cooler with the title "Heavenly" in them. Even Heavenly Ass sounded e.r.o.t.i.c and cool at the same time, and it just reminded him of Azumi''s ass. Maybe he''ll visit her in the Kage Tower later.


    As he sat on the moon eating an apple, he stared at the majestic planet in front of him. It was gorgeous, majestic even. He still couldn''t understand how these planets are made, even with all of his strength and knowledge. They say that a planet starts as a dust smaller than a man''s hair, then it just grows from there. It sounds ridiculous at first, but with time moving as fast as it is, it is completely possible.


    He chuckled at his thoughts. Even then, does it really matter to know things? The more you know, the more mysteries it creates, then you''ll be searching for those mysteries and just find more mysteries. It''s better to just live nonchalantly, that''s what he thinks anyway. Ignore the people that think bad things about you and just move on into the future, there is no use thinking about them.


    He finished his apple and just threw it somewhere, before blasting off in a burst of speed towards the elemental nation, while keeping his heat and speed at a bare minimum to not just crash onto the planet and create supersonic waves that would kill 99 percent of the living creatures on the planet.


    (Night Time, Elemental Nation)


    "Yay, we''ll be having beef steak for dinner! Beef steak! Beef Steak! Beef steak!" Emiyo shouted in joy as she waved her chopsticks around.


    "Can''t you at least shut up for a moment, you glutton? You''ve been eating ramen ALL day long, at this rate, you''ll get fatter than Chokko." Taiyou said, annoyed at his twin.


    Emiyo pouted and said, "Hey! Take that back! I''m not a glutton! I just eat way more than others!"


    "That''s the same as saying you''re a glutton, stupid." Taiyou''s snarky remark.


    The children were at the dinner table, waiting for their parents and maids to finish preparing their dinner. While some might say that Hikaru is spoiling them too much, well f.u.c.k them. He''s their children, he could raise them however he wants.


    "Neh, neh, sister, look at big sister being such a glutton." Riko said in a monotone voice.


    "Yes, big sister is such a glutton, and she''s also fat." Rina replied, also in a monotone voice.


    "Not you two too!" Emiyo cried out.


    Then, Hinata and Azumi came out of the kitchen holding two trays full of beef steak. It almost seemed like they were having some kind of party with that much food, but no, they were just eating it for dinner tonight. Azumi and Emiyo are gluttons, after all.


    The two mothers saw their children fighting as they put the trays down. Hinata took action as soon as she was finished preparing.


    "Mou, stop fighting, the two of you. We''re having a peaceful dinner tonight!" Hinata told them with her byakugan activated.


    The twins looked sorry and said in unison, ""Sorry!""


    "Good, now sit properly or I''ll spank you two!"


    With that said, they both sat more properly than a high-ranking noble.


    Hikaru also came out of the kitchen holding two trays on each hand. The trays were filled with 4 two liter bottles of juice, each having a different flavor than the other. He also had a tray filled with expensive cups on top of his head. He had this happy emotion on his face as he faced his family, just another day of peace with his family.


    "Darling, be careful, you might just drop them." Azumi joked as she sat at the table.


    "Heh, me? Drop these? That''s quite impossible, my dear." Hikaru replied with another joke as he put the trays down on top of the table, then sat on his chair.


    "Now, let''s feast."


    And feast they did.


    They didn''t need to pray or any of that bullshit. I mean, they are literally in front of a man who can beat gods into submission, what can prayers do? Help them digest and shit?


    Meanwhile, Kin and Tayuya ate in the kitchen. Hikaru allowed them to eat with them, but the two girls were too shy for that. Shy, I meant having a crush on their master. There''s no doubt about it, they definitely have Stockholm Syndrome. Hikaru basically kidnapped them and made them his maids, so it is Stockholm Syndrome.


    While Hikaru has noticed their weird affection towards him, if them peeking while he is taking a bath is weird enough, he just doesn''t see them that way. They are just maids, nothing more, nothing less. Besides, Azumi would slaughter them the moment she learns about their infatuation towards him. She only allowed Hinata to be the second wife because she is a close friend of hers, if she wasn''t, Azumi wouldn''t have allowed Hikaru to marry another woman. The Uzumaki woman would have just killed her.

 Chapter 121 - I Am Asking

    So, did I ever mention the Chinoike Clan in this fanfic? I''m in the process of writing another chapter, and I need to know whether I have written about the Chinoike Clan or not. Otherwise, I''ll have to delete the chapter I''m writing. Find authorized novels in , faster updates, better experience, Please click /book/traveling-to-the-world-of-anime-with-the-dark-souls-system_17253890906198605/i-am-asking_50999987676432043 for visiting.

 Chapter 122 - 113

    At the park near the shinobi academy, parents watched as their children played with each other. Temari, Tenten, Sakura, and Hinata sat at the nearby stone table.


    Temari has been married to Shikamaru now for over 4 years, just after Hikaru and Azumi and Hinata''s wedding day. Since then, she''s been nothing but a housewife. She wants to be a shinobi again, but she has to take care of two lazy people, her husband and her daughter. She hates how Shikanori takes after her father''s lazy personality. Shikanori would do anything just to get away from things that require a bit of stamina, but even then she''s just 3 and half years old, maybe she''ll change?


    Temari was bored at home, so she brought her child to play with other children at the park.


    Meanwhile, after the war, Tenten decided to marry Rock Lee after he proposed to her in the middle of it. She and Temari are the polar opposite when it comes to their husband and daughter. While the sister of Kazekage has a lazy husband, Tenten has Rock Lee, who is really enthusiastic about exercise and many other physical things, like lifting a 3 tons dumbbell. Temari has Shikanori, who is just as lazy as her father, meanwhile Tenten has Rock Mio, who is just like her father, except that she inherited her looks from her mother.


    Tenten decided that Mio, her daughter, needed something else entirely other than exercising her young body to death, so she brought her to the park to play with other children her age.


    Sakura was on vacation from her job, so she decided to bring her son here so that she could chat with her fellow mothers. Besides, her husband and her brother-in-law are too busy sparring with each other. God, she wonders when Itachi will have a wife, all he focuses on are shinobi jobs and he is too awkward when it comes to romance, since it''s been years since he had a lover, and he, um, for a lack of a better word, killed her.


    It seems like Itachi has no plans to start a family of his own, yet. But that''s good for Sakura, since, most of the time, he leaves Senichi to her brother-in-law everytime she goes to her job. But Senichi tends to copy Itachi. He''s like a mini-Itachi, who dresses like him, combs his hair like his uncle, and sometimes would speak like Itachi, though in a cute way. Even then, Senichi can never be like his uncle.


    Hinata always brings her children to the park, but only Emiyo and Taiyou. Riko and Rina are too shy to go to the park with children their age, which saddens Hinata a little. But they were smart, since all they do is read books all day, and sometimes would annoy their father to play with them.


    Sakura sighed and spoke, "Work''s been too busy lately, I only have three days in my vacation. For some reason, many shinobi, especially the Jounins, have been getting severely injured while on the job. They say that the last thing they saw were blood red eyes with a slit in the middle. Sasuke has been investigating it, but he came out with no results. Then, just after bringing in some Jounins, one of them started to bloat before exploding. Thankfully, no one was hurt but since then we''ve been careful of receiving too many patients, or we just separate them."


    Stress was evident on Sakura''s face as she said all of that.


    "That''s rather shocking, for someone to attack the strongest village in the elemental nation." Hinata said, "It''s obvious that they are trying to injure a lot of our shinobi and when the hospital gets too flooded with patients, then they will strike."


    Sakura nodded, and said, "So you think so, too, huh? But what is their objective? Just to hurt a lot of patients? No, there must be something more, something more important than something like this. They could''ve just flooded the entire hospital with many patients with those time bombs, but they didn''t."


    "Maybe they have a specific target?" Temari asked, "For example, who was taking care of the patient that exploded? Wasn''t it you? Maybe you''re their target?''


    Sakura vehemently shook her head, and replied, "No, that''s impossible. There is no one who would seek to harm me, especially because I made no enemies when I was an active shinobi."


    Hinata thought about it, and suddenly gained an idea, then she suggested, "Maybe it''s because of your husband''s clan? You know, the Uchiha Clan made many enemies since the first, second, and third shinobi war. It''s no secret that many extinct clans out there are all the Uchiha Clan''s fault. A survivor of a dead dojutsu clan, maybe?"


    "Yeah, you have a point. I''ll tell all of this to Itachi-san later." Sakura muttered.


    Unknown to them, a pigeon landed on a tree. Its eyes, sharper than any humans around it. It was watching Sakura, her every movement, the twitches on her face, and the way she talks. A shiny glint appeared in the watchful eyes of the bird, before it briefly disappeared.


    (WIth Hikaru, A Few Hours Later)


    In their living room, heavy tension filled the air. Hinata and Azumi looked quite angry at him, while his children were crying.


    "So you''re leaving again?" Azumi asked, her voice filled with a sickening sweet tone.


    "Y-Yes, but not forever! I''ll be returning in about a decade or so."'' Hikaru said, nervous that his wife might just erupt. Find authorized novels in , faster updates, better experience, Please click /book/traveling-to-the-world-of-anime-with-the-dark-souls-system_17253890906198605/chapter-113_51000928274268966 for visiting.


    And sure enough, Azumi erupted like a hot and flaming volcano, "A DECADE!? Now, listen here, mister! You''ll be missing a lot of our children''s birthdays! They''ll be growing up most of their lives without a father, and you just want to leave!? For what!?"


    Hikaru was sweating, he needed a good reason right now! His wife might just murder him, as much as that sounds ridiculous. He really needs to beat the olden god, Chaortos, since Deus has been pressuring him to do it. The disembodied voice seems agitated, as if he was waiting for something from him. Besides, it''s just a decade. He''ll be back before they know it.


    But from their expressions, he can see that they are not all right with his decision.


    Just as he was about to speak, he felt reality and space and time crack a little. Then, he felt a familiar presence, an ancient one.


    "I might be able to explain, wives of the chosen immortal." The deep and ancient voice seems to mock the title.


    The voice sounded everywhere, making everyone except for Hikaru tense.


    ''Deus!'' Hikaru can recognize that voice anywhere, since he was too familiar with it. But how is he able to go out of his sealed room? Isn''t that supposed to be impossible?


    "No, it is not." Deus answered, as if reading his mind, "I can go out of that damnable room, but only for a little while, or the mana I''ve been saving up might just run out." Then his voice shifted into a bit more desperate tone, "I''m only here for one reason only, let Hikaru leave. Like Azumi, the Child of Prophecy of this world, Hikaru is also some kind of Child of Prophecy. It is his duty to vanquish the seven olden gods that still live in their seals, kinda like how your duty was to save the world. But the stake here is higher than you think, the Olden Gods are beings that can quite literally punch a universe into oblivion. It is his duty to defeat them, or seal them back."


    (Note: So, I know that Azumi and Hinata, especially Azumi, will be angry at Hikaru for leaving. But with Deus explaining all of this, they will no longer have any objections, since this means that Hikaru''s duty is something that holds an infinite amount of lives. And Deus has been getting agitated, since he is so close at meeting his child once again. You''ll know in the later chapters what I meant).


    Azumi and Hinata didn''t imagine that something like this was happening behind their backs. Though they knew that it was weird that Hikaru was this powerful, because it just defies everything they know. His powers, abilities, and inhumane physical capabilities, they were not normal.


    "It is a shame that he didn''t heed my advice, not to start a family. But I guess this is a trait that all chosen immortals have," Again, he mocks the title, "They start a family, then go on a rampage after their loved ones die. Especially Kiran, he has got some anger management to work on." He muttered, and noticed them wondering what he meant, "Ah, don''t mind me, I was just muttering to myself."


    Hikaru then said, "You can leave now, Deus. I can explain the rest myself. You''re scaring the children." He seems to be glaring at someone, but there was no one there. But it was true, his children were scared. They were shaking at the mere presence of Deus, even Azumi and Hinata couldn''t stop feeling tense.


    Then, after saying that, everything went back to normal.


    He turned around to see his wives staring at him, as if demanding some kind of answer.


    "As your husband, I am ashamed that I have hidden this for far too long. But I felt no need to tell the two of you, since it is not your burden to carry." Burden his ass, he would have defeated Chaortos many years ago after he reached his max stats, he just didn''t want to leave yet back then. But now, he felt the need for an adventure. An adventure to another world, he is already done with this world, after all. While some might call him a bad father, (Technically he is), adventuring to another world is quite exciting, to say the least. And besides, they can live the rest of their lives with all the wealth he has amassed over the years.


    He can still feel their intense gaze, so he just raised his arms, defeated, and said,, "Alright, I give up. 5 years, I''ll be back after 5 years of being away." Then he turned his eyes on his children, who are still shaking from fear, "I''m sorry that I have to leave, but your father got things to do. Don''t worry, I''ll be bringing back some souvenirs from my adventure. That''s a promise of a lifetime!"


    Emiyo raised her hand, and closed her hand except for her pinky finger, "Pinky promise?" She asked with teary eyes.


    Hikaru smiled at her childishness and entwined his pinky finger with hers, and said, "Pinky promise."


    Emiyo finally smiled and hugged him, "When you come back, buy me all the toys in the world! All of them!" She yelled excitedly.


    "Yeah, me too!" Rika practically yelled.


    "Hum, what sister said!" Rina also said.


    Hikaru nodded at their childish desires, but he paid it no mind, he will buy them everything, even the universe if they wanted it. He will buy every toy he sees in the next world he is going, for them.


    He looked at Taiyou, who is strangely quiet, and asked, "Don''t you want something, little sun?"


    After some time, Taiyou finally spoke, "If you''re going to buy them all the toys in the world, then buy me every book there is, every pen, and every writing equipment to where you''re going."


    Hikaru smiled, "Alright, knowing you, you''ll probably love fantasy books." In these kinds of situations, money can solve his problems, since they are just children. But Azumi and Hinata, well, needed more than that.

 Chapter 123 - 114: The Devourer Of Gods

    He had to say some farewells to his family and friends, because he will leave soon. He wanted to do this quietly, but not telling your friends that you''re leaving is the same as being a jerk.


    It wasn''t anything dramatic, they just accepted that he was leaving. The Shinobi Council was against him leaving, but they knew they couldn''t do anything. With Hikaru in the village, his presence is enough to put a heavy pressure towards the other shinobi villages out there. His voice in the entire world IS law, if he speaks, thousands would grovel at his feet. That''s how powerful he is.


    But as much as they want to tie him down to the village, doing that would likely put them in a bad position with Hikaru, they might as well risk their clans getting annihilated by him. From what they''ve seen him do, they at least managed to know that he isn''t that merciful towards people who dares to go against him.


    They mean if you just look at his family with hatred in your eyes, he will behead you on the spot.


    He''s not the most reasonable, that they can see.


    Anyway, Hikaru then said his goodbyes to his family. While some might say that leaving two good-looking women on their own is a bad idea, he isn''t that worried. He made sure that they will never forget the pleasure he gave them, and he also put a curse on Azumi and Hinata. Anyone who dares to look at his wives with l.u.s.tful gaze will die the most gruesome death in less than one hour.


    Anyone who dares to take anything from him will receive no mercy, that''s a rule he decided to abide by after many years of living in this world. While he trusts his wives, it''s better safe than sorry.


    He quickly got to Chaortos''s seal, in an unknown island in the middle of the sea which is also filled with thousands of dangerous beasts with different species.. This island can be considered a freak of nature, there were large trees that are 300 meters tall and 30 meters wide, and the surroundings will disturb his battle with Chaortos. So, with one quick [Mana Blast], he obliterated everything around him, even the giant volcano in the middle of the island.


    [Mana Blast] is a simple skill that even novice magicians can easily learn, but it is dangerous in the hands of someone like Hikaru. This magic spell releases a large amount of mana from the user and uses it to obliterate everything around him in a certain radius. With Hikaru''s mana reserves, he can probably blow up this entire planet with a single blast if he wanted to, and that would barely take a percentage of his mana.


    He''s that powerful.


    Now, nothing remained on the island. Not even the giant trees, those prehistoric animals that, for some reason, live on this island, and the wild life. Hikaru completely made the island a wasteland.


    This island is far from the continent of elemental nation, it is so far away that it would take decades before they discovered it.


    Now that everything is obliterated, Hikaru calmly sat in front of the seal of Chaortos. While he doesn''t hate her, it is simply his duty to kill them or seal them back. In the end, it would seem that the olden gods are the victims. They were sealed for billions of years while staying conscious of everything, and everytime they manage to get out of the seal, they are sealed back in again by some people that got some powers from a mysterious system.


    He sighed and remembered everything that happened so far, and how he got here, how he got so strong. When he first arrived here, he just decided to become strong and thought of nothing else. He was a fool back then, he knew that but he couldn''t help but laugh at his foolishness back then. He could barely resist the urge to cringe when he remembered the way he talked to the Hokage and the teachers at the shinobi academy.


    Seriously, why did he have to explain to them the lore of a game? Did he have some kind of brain damage? If he had, his estus flask would''ve surely healed it.


    He sighed as he stood up, then stared at the seal in front of him. It wasn''t similar to any seal he has seen before, this seal just took the appearance of a bonfire. It was warm but that warmness was also filled with something dark, something that would''ve scared the hell out of anyone.


    He could even feel his skin crawling.


    Then, a transparent screen appeared in front of him. It said:


    {Would you like to release the ancient being that resides in this seal? Yes or No?}


    Hikaru shook his head, and said, "No, not yet. I will equip the rings first."


    He then took out five rings that will boost his strength by 100 times each, which would mean he will get a boost worth 500 times than his normal strength. As soon as he put all the rings on his left hand''s fingers, he immediately felt the sudden rush of power and quickly fell to his knees.


    Veins appeared everywhere in his body as he tried to get used to the sudden increase in power. After half an hour, he felt his strength stabilize along with his mana. With this, he should be able to defeat Chaortos easily. He didn''t want to waste any time, so he quickly looked at the bonfire/seal again.


    {Would you like to release the ancient being that resides in this seal? [Yes] or [No]?}


    He pressed [Yes], and the air shifted.


    He backed away from the seal as dark miasma poured out of it. He steeled his eyes to see what monstrosity will appear in front of him, but it wasn''t something like that.


    Slowly, the dark miasma formed into something humanoid. Then, white pearly skin developed from that humanoid miasma, then the face, hair, body, and soon, she was once against back in the living world.


    Hikaru felt saliva drip off his mouth because the woman in front of him is anything but ugly. She was absolutely beautiful, the most beautiful woman he has ever seen. He dare say that she is more beautiful than his wife, Azumi.


    Her long smooth hair that is as dark as the abyss, with eyes the same color as her eyes, pitch black lips, thin and smooth eyebrows, and a face so beautifully shaped that he could barely hold himself back from being entranced. But the thing that took his attention was her n.a.k.e.d body. The only thing covering her private parts were the shadows that covered it. Her body was so arousing, large perky b.r.e.a.s.ts, a curved that could make every woman jealous, smooth and pearly arms and legs, and an ass that is perfectly shaped.


    He shook his head as he felt himself getting more and more entranced by her figure. If any men other than him had taken a look at her, they would''ve surely fell for her devilish beauty.


    But, as soon as he met her eyes, he saw it. The amount of madness behind her glassy eyes, and a crazy and broken smile slowly filled her face.


    "F-F-F-F-F-FINALLY! I AM OUT FROM THAT SEAL! HEHEHEHEHAHAHAHA!" Chaortos laughed, but it sounded nothing like happiness. Far from it, it sounded crazy, filled with madness that he couldn''t comprehend. But he detected something familiar in her voice, something he has seen many times in this world; the voice of vengeance. But who is she going for revenge?


    Then, she turned her eyes on him, her smile slowly rising, if that''s even possible, and sneered, "So you''re here to seal me back again, huh!? You damn creature!!! I will slaughter you!! For my brothers and sisters you slaughtered, I will kill you permanently!!"


    Then her powers exploded everywhere, and Hikaru had to cover his eyes from the sheer darkness of her mana. But the one thing he noticed was that her mana wasn''t filled with any kind of evil, it simply darkness. Then, he realized, darkness didn''t mean evil, it just meant that, darkness. But he can feel it, the darkness that everyone held in their hearts. It was filled with the desires of people, their sins. Greed, L.u.s.t, Pride, Gluttoney, Sloth, Wrath, and Envy, he felt them all. He didn''t know why, but out of all those sins, the one that stood out the most was her Envy. But why? What does she envy?


    He wanted to understand her as he felt every emotion she released from her mana.


    ''Why¡­?''


    He heard her voice.


    ''Why am I denied of freedom?''


    He heard despair.


    ''I envy them! I envy those who have freedom!''


    He heard anger.


    ''I envy those who squander it so easily!''


    She sounded more angry than before.


    "But that is not their fault," This time, he did not heard her in his head, but in front of him. He saw her pointing at him as she said with more hate, "It is your fault, you damnable creature!"


    She charged at him as she summoned millions of minions, and they all seem to be made of darkness. He would''ve sneered at her when she charged at him like that, but he could see that she is not in the right state of mind.


    She attacked him with a javelin made of her mana, and it hit him. He didn''t bother to dodge because he knew that it wouldn''t injure him. But he felt something as soon as that javelin hit him, it was hunger. Something that should''ve disappeared when he became an undead, it was not possible. Why did he feel hunger of all things?


    Suddenly, it dawned on him that the reason why he drooled at the sight of her wasn''t because of her womanly figure, no, it was because of something else. Something far more sinister. He hungered for her flesh, for her soul.


    ''It''s been so long since I felt this, more than a decade perhaps?'' He thought as he felt his hunger slowly taking over his mind, it was as if this was the first he saw something delicious that he was willing to sacrifice his mind for it.


    But why? Why now of all time?


    Hikaru grinned as he showed her his pearly teeth, his saliva slowly dripping at the sight of her, at the sight of her soul. With nothing but a wave of his hand, everything around him was obliterated, even her minions. Chaortos survived, but she was at the brink of death. Find authorized novels in , faster updates, better experience, Please click /book/traveling-to-the-world-of-anime-with-the-dark-souls-system_17253890906198605/chapter-114-the-devourer-of-gods_51044035535630695 for visiting.


    Hikaru wasted no time as he jumped towards. He pinned her to the ground, his hunger taking over him. She screamed as he sunk his teeth in her neck, and fresh white divine blood poured out. He ripped out the flesh in her neck as she screamed in pain, she tried telling to stop but he couldn''t. It was simply too delicious, the flesh and soul of a god that is.


    Slowly, he devoured her every being. Sickening biting sounds echoed loudly in the silent wasteland, with nothing but her screams filled it.


    She cried and cried, but he didn''t stop.


    His mind was taken over by his hunger, his hunger for gods.


    The hunger of the Devourer Of Gods.


    (In The White Room)


    "Ah, finally," Deus suddenly said, "I can finally meet my daughter once again. Ah, my daughter, how much you have suffered, but don''t worry, it will be over soon. I''m sure it''s pretty mad right now, considering I gave its host the ability to store the souls of gods inside his mindscape. You might hate me for being so weak, but, my dear daughter, from now on, I will be protecting you, Chaortos. And I will be protecting you from IT."

 Chapter 124 - 115: Merciless

    ''Where am I?" He asked himself as he floated in what seems to be the void. He saw nothing but darkness, but in that darkness millions, maybe even billions, of tiny shiny stars could be seen. It was bright, almost blinding, yet, at the same time, he saw darkness engulfing everything. It was as if two incompatible forces were trying to take over each other, they were trying to eat each other. But at the same time, he felt a strange sense of sereneness around him.


    He felt something changing inside him, inside his soul. He can feel it, the power overflowing inside of him. While the power of those rings were nothing but temporary, this one is permanent, it will never leave him.


    Divine power coursed through his body, strengthening it. He felt as if he could take on anything, but he knew that''s not the truth at all. He kept a calm mind as he closed his eyes and tried to control his unstable power.


    And then, he felt time pass. Seconds turned to minutes, minutes turned to hours, hours turned to days, days turned to weeks, weeks turned to months, and finally, months turned to years. Two decades had passed while he tried controlling the divinity inside of him, and finally, finally! He managed to control it, the unstable divinity.


    Then, his body started changing into something, something divine. He felt himself become a deity, a divine being. His power became more and more controllable as he conquered his divinity.


    Then, he woke up in a white room filled with fog. He heard a familiar voice, a voice he hadn''t heard for years.


    "So you''ve woken, I thought you would be sleeping a bit longer than 10 seconds." Deus sounded impressed.


    Hikaru couldn''t help but tear up as he finally heard a voice after 20 years¡­ wait¡­ did he say 10 seconds? TEN SECONDS!?


    "I assure you, it would''ve taken normal people more time than what you have experienced. They would''ve spent millions of years inside their mindscape, and thousands of years in reality to conquer their own divinity. You are an exception, for you are someone too talented. Your soul is extremely powerful, I might say. Your soul is as strong as mine, yet you haven''t unlocked most of its abilities, how tragic." Deus sounded amused as he said that.


    Hikaru kept his calm as he assessed his body, and felt everything was fine. His mana reserves and physical strength has increased by 100 times, without the rings.


    Speaking of the rings, he decided to keep them on. Right now, with his powers, he might even be able to obliterate an entire galaxy that is containing billions of planets, with the rings on of course. Without the rings, his power is just enough to destroy a hundred solar systems or so.


    But there was still one thing bothering him; he ate Chaortos. He ate her, flesh and all. But he can feel shards of a divine soul inside his mindscape, as if it was all broken to pieces.


    "Now," His attention turned to Deus, "You might be feeling shards of a soul inside your mindscape, but you don''t have to worry about that, that is just Chaortos''s soul. The moment you sunk your teeth into her flesh, you also broke her soul and absorbed it inside you. Right now, her soul is reforming inside your mindscape as we speak." Deus explained.


    Hikaru knew there was something more, "But what about that hunger I felt when I saw her mana? Was it your doing? DId you modify my body to be this way?" He wasn''t angry, he was just curious.


    "Yes," The disembodied voice said bluntly, "I was the one who gave you that ability. It''s an ability feared by all deities, even the olden gods. It is called [The Devourer Of Gods], and as the name implies, it can devour gods. But unless you''re not as strong as the deity, you cannot devour them. You have to be stronger, stronger than that to devour them."


    Even though heard the explanation, Hikaru still had to voice one more concern, "Will the previous thing happen again? Like when I saw her mana, I suddenly hungered for her, and my mind was taken over by this hunger."


    "Ah, I can understand your concerns, but you don''t have to worry. That is just a one time thing, it will never happen again. It was because you just awakened it, thus it went on a rampage. But now, you can activate it at your will. Granted that your mind will be taken over again once you activate it, but only if there''s a god in front of you." Deus explained patiently, he''s used to this kind of thing.


    Hikaru nodded in understanding, and said, "I understand. Now, I''m in quite a rush, so I would hope to go to the next world. Show me the list."


    A transparent screen appeared before him, and there, 7 worlds were presented in front of him. Though, the [Shinobi World] option was already darkened out.


    Hikaru then asked out of concern, "Can I still go back to previous worlds?"


    "Yes," Deus answered, "But you will have to defeat another olden god for that. As I''ve said years ago, you cannot pick another world without sealing or defeating the olden god in the world you picked. I know your concerns, but you will not have to worry. As my gift to you, 1 year in another world from now on will just be 1 week in the Shinobi World, where your family lives. Is that all right for you?"


    No, he was more than happy. He was overjoyed! That means he can go on an adventure for decades and only a few months would pass in the other world he is going! That would barely count any time for his family!


    Hikaru smiled and said, "Well, I am more than grateful for that. But, I might ask, what world do you reccomend for me to go to?"


    This is his list of worlds.


    ________


    {Shinobi World}


    Swords and Magic World With A Little Twist


    Dungeon Crawling


    Modern Sword and Magic World


    World Filled With Myths and Legends Find authorized novels in , faster updates, better experience, Please click /book/traveling-to-the-world-of-anime-with-the-dark-souls-system_17253890906198605/chapter-115-merciless_51069232481368770 for visiting.


    World Filled With Immortals (And arrogant young masters)


    A World Of Mysteries (HxH)


    ________


    Deus then replied, "I would recommend the one that says [World Filled With Myths and Legends], but be careful in this world, there are beings there that are capable of destroying that dimension''s universe. But with your abilities, you might be able minimize your deaths."


    Hikaru nodded, and quickly made up his mind, "Hum! Let''s see what that world has to offer!" He yelled entuisatiscally.


    He heard Deus chuckle, but only for a brief moment. He decided not to be bothered with it as a black portal appeared in front of him. He walked through the portal as he heard the disembodied voice telling him something.


    "Good luck, and try not to cheat at your wives that much."


    What was that? Nah, maybe it was nothing.


    (In An Alley In New York City, USA)


    A black portal appeared in the dark alley as the moon shined brightly in the night sky. A person came out of the portal, an asian man around his early twenties. He has waist-length black hair with streaks of white flowing down, crimson eyes, pale white skin, sharp jawline, and tall for someone like him. He wore expensive clothing, which doesn''t correspond with his surroundings.


    This is Hikaru. His looks had changed due to him becoming a deity, but he still had a few of his noticeable features, like his pale skin.


    He looked around and saw nothing but a dumb. He was in an alley in the middle of the night with trash just lying around. Which was strange, since there was a huge ass trash can just near the corner. But he saw that it was also full of garbage, he can even see shit-stained panties in there. God, he hasn''t been in this world for a few minutes and he is already close at regretting going here.


    Paying the dark and creepy alley no mind, he walked towards the corner to get out of the alley. He saw a few cars passing the road just outside the alley, so he just went out of the alley and observed his surroundings.


    Tall modern buildings, cars parked in front of those buildings, and some people walking with plastic bags in their hands. He noticed that the people walking on the sidewalk had western features, and they talked in a foreign language, though he noticed that they were speaking in english, so he concluded that he must be in America.


    There were few people on the sidewalk, but they all had tattoos and some kind of gothic makeup. While he hasn''t visited america or any other countries in his past life, he wanted to at least experience what it feels to live in a foreign country. And this is just the place for it.


    He walked towards the gothic teens that were talking with each other. They seem to notice him, so he waved his hand and said in broken english, "Hello, I quite lost, don''t know where I''m." He knew that he wasn''t the best at english, so shut up.


    There were three gothic teens in front of him, two of them were dudes and the other one was a girl. While he frowned at their tattoos, he didn''t want to bother them about it. It is their life, after all.


    The girl dropped her cigarette and stomped on it before she pointed somewhere without bothering to speak to him. Rude.


    He looked at where she was pointing and saw a sign that says: [Franklin Ave. Brooklyn}


    He didn''t need anymore and just said, "Thank you," Then he turned around to leave, when he felt a hand grabbing his right shoulder.


    He turned around towards them and saw one of the dudes smirking at him c.o.c.kily and handed out his hand as he said, "Hey chinese guy, we helped you, didn''t we? Then give us a few bucks, I heard chinese people are quite well off. Oh wait, we have to speak with your language, huh? Hey, ching ching chong! Hahahaha!"


    The other two laughed together with him.


    It didn''t take twice before the body of the teen exploded in a bloody mess. Hikaru didn''t even bathe an eye as he heard the organs of the teen plopped to the ground somewhere on the streets.


    He might not be that good at speaking english, but he understood a few things from the now dead teen''s words. It seems like they were rebels that has gone off far too deep into the business of the a.d.u.l.t''s world. He''ll have to teach them a lesson that they will take into their next life.


    The other two teens'' eyes widened in realization as they saw their friend explode just like that. Then fear took over their bodies as they felt his killing intent engulfing their bodies.


    Hikaru disappeared and reappeared in front of the male teen, before grabbing his head. He quickly absorbed the teen''s memories to quickly learn about the english language. He would''ve done this to criminals later on if these teens didn''t harass him.


    The body of the male teen plopped to the ground as foam came out of his mouth. His eyes were hollowed. Hikaru stole the teen''s memories, so he should be having amnesia right now. He will never remember anything, not even his own family.


    He got a quick summary of the male teen''s life. He is a rebel who left his home due to his parents disagreeing to things he''s done, like bullying a kid in school. The teen is just staying in his friend''s house, which was the guy he just killed. But it seems like this kid grew up in a nice household. Two parents with a steady income, and two older siblings who are already in college. Hikaru now understood the reason why he decided to rebel against his parents, because he had this unnecessary jealousy towards his older siblings. They were smart, while he was dumb. They were athletic, while he was just a slob. All of this brings him to just one emotion; insecurity. This is just insecurity, nothing more.


    He just ignored the teen''s memories and focused his attention on the girl. She''s on the ground, her body was shaking with tears coming out of her eyes.


    He leaned forward a little and grabbed her by the neck. She tried fighting back, she tried scratching her arm to make let go of her, but it was futile. His skin is harder than any kind of steel. His face was devoid of emotion as he asked in perfect english, "Now, I was just asking where I am and you and your friends insulted me. And look what happened to them." He gestured around them, proving his point, "Also, I was planning on sleeping in some abandoned building earlier, but when I stole that guy''s memories earlier, I saw that you are in a well off family. Mind if I sleep in your house for the night?"


    The girl knew that saying no to his request is a death wish. Even though she felt her oxygen leaving her by the second, she still managed to think quickly and nodded desperately.


    And with that, Hikaru smiled and said, "Good, now lead me to your home."


    He then dropped her and she fell to the ground with a thud.


    *Cough!* *Cough!* *Cough!*


    She coughed violently as she tried to gasp for air. Hikaru merely looked down on her as he demanded, "Move it, I don''t want to stay on this street any longer."


    She nodded at him as she stood up with shaky legs. And out of curiousness mixed with fear, she asked, "W-W-What a-are y-you¡­?''


    "Me? Well, you can say that I am a god. Now, chop chop."

 Chapter 125 - 116: Samantha Brown

    Samantha Brown, otherwise nicknamed by Hikaru "Emo Girl", didn''t know what to feel right now. Of course she is scared of the guy behind her, who easily killed her friends, but other than that she felt a little confused and shocked by the happenings earlier. The guy told her that he is a god, but she didn''t believe him, no gods would want to sleep in her house. And if he is a god, then why isn''t he in his own Holy Palace?


    But even when she had her doubts, she knew that questioning him is a dumb move. He can quite literally explode her from the inside out, and who knows what else he can do. Right now, she should just play along and report everything to the cops tomorrow.


    Hikaru followed her from behind with a smile on his face. She didn''t know that one of the perks of being a god is having the ability to read the mind of mortals, but he can turn it off whenever he wants. He just read her mind and immediately knew what she was thinking.


    If she plans to call the police tomorrow, she might as well go kill herself. Does she really think that someone of his caliber would willingly go to the police? Is she stupid or ignorant? He doesn''t even have to move to obliterate this entire continent to oblivion, and she thinks a few mere cops can subdue him?


    That is the funniest thing he has ever heard.


    Oh yeah, he had some rewards from defeating Chaortos from the system.


    [Congratulations on finishing the tutorial! How was it? Was it a good experience? Anyway, here are your rewards for defeating the weakest of the eight Olden Gods!]


    [Eyes Of Measurement: These eyes have one single purpose; to accurately measure the power level of any being it sees. But it also has an extra effect, it can see the names of the people, yet it is useless in a battle. These eyes will be automatically implanted into the host once the host has seen it. Do not worry, it will not hurt]


    Yeah, as it said, he can now see the power level and names of every person he saw. For example, this girl, Samantha Brown, has the power level of [7]. He doesn''t know if this is the average power level of mortals, he''ll check later if that is indeed true. Except for measuring the power levels of his opponents, this set of eyes is absolutely useless.


    [Upgrade Shop To Level 2: The shop has been upgraded, that means the system has added more items and equipment in the Shop! There are items there like the Elixir Of Immortality, but it doesn''t really give you immortality, it just gives you 1,000,000 years of lifespan. But for someone like you, that is absolutely useless!]


    This next reward is great, now he can browse through thousands of different items. There are items that he doesn''t recognize, and there are items he does recognize. But he rarely uses his weapons, since everything can be solved with a flick of his fingers. Unless there is a threat that could end his existence, he won''t use his, uh, World Destroying Weapons.


    [You now upgrade your equipment up to +100!]


    This is his next reward. Previously, he could only upgrade his equipment up to +20 but with this, he can upgrade them to +100. He doesn''t know how strong they will be, but he has a gut feeling that they will be stronger than he can imagine.


    [Next Reward! You can now Kindle up to +100 and receive 1000 Estus Flask!]


    Is this even necessary anymore? Estus Flask is practically useless now, he has hoarded millions of divine blessings in his Bottomless Box. He''s not lying, he literally has millions of Divine Blessings. But he can''t ignore the fact that Estus Flask is practically infinite. But the same goes for his Divine Blessings.


    [Soul Of Chaortos: You have done something that not even the previous two have done before! You have claimed the soul of an Olden God! But it is currently shattered right now, you will have to wait for 10 Years for it to be completely repaired! If you are able to wait that long, you will receive myriads of Chaortos''s abilities!]


    Now, he didn''t know what to do with this. In a way, he has the soul of Chaortos, but he also can''t use it. It''s like a worthless reward, unless he managed to repair it. Meh, he just has to wait for a decade, it''s not that hard.


    [Darkness Manipulation: An ability that was originally from Chaortos, but since you have devoured her with your [Devourer Of Gods] ability, you have received it from her. You can now summon minions from the darkness, and wield it like the most dangerous of weapons! While you can manipulate the darkness to your will, it also costs a huge amount of mana, so beware or you might just faint from mana exhaustion]


    And the list ends there. The system could''ve rewarded him with much more useful stuff, but it didn''t and instead gave him useless eye power. While he wasn''t picky, an eye power that could only gauge your opponent''s overall power level isn''t really useful in battles. What''s he gonna do? Stare at his enemy like a stupid motherf.u.c.ker and tell him his battle power? That''s not useful, that''s just stupid.


    Without him noticing, time passed and both of them arrived at Samantha''s house, or more like a building. Her house is a building that has 10 floors and 10 rooms each floor. And it also seems that the condominium building that her parents own is quite luxurious.


    The building looked dazzling under the night sky. Golden lights flared everywhere around it, trees were scattered around it, clean patches of grass, and a large swimming pool behind it. It was gorgeous. They also had a parking lot on the left side of it, which he saw that almost all the cars there were quite expensive. There was even a red lamborghini, which reminded him of his death in his previous life. Find authorized novels in , faster updates, better experience, Please click /book/traveling-to-the-world-of-anime-with-the-dark-souls-system_17253890906198605/chapter-116-samantha-brown_51115152929510782 for visiting.


    Samantha hesitated to enter the building before walking in along with Hikaru.


    The man guarding the gate greeted her and said, "Welcome back, Samantha. Your parents have been looking all over for you."


    She snorted and said rudely, "Hmph, then they should''ve looked further."


    The guard didn''t mind it though, as if he was used to this, "I assure you, your parents looked far enough. Your parents and siblings are having dinner at the moment, it would bring great joy to your family to know that you have returned this early of the week."


    Samantha just grunted and the guard opened the gate, before she and Hikaru walked in.


    This was the moment the guard noticed Hikaru, and he had to ask, "Excuse me sir, who are you?"


    Samantha turned around quickly to explain who he was with the lies she had created to hide him at the moment, but Hikaru was faster.


    He smiled at the guard charmingly, and winked at Samantha mischievously, and said, "I am actually her boyfriend, but I can guess that she didn''t say our relationship to her family. I would like to meet them to know them a bit."


    She almost had a heart attack when she heard him say that, and tried to speak up but felt that something was blocking her from speaking. She saw Hikaru smile at her playfully, as if he was enjoying this. She just looked away, not wanting to get any more of his attention to herself. If she opposed him, he would kill her like how he killed her friends.


    The guard clapped his hands and said, "Oh, that''s great! The young lady has been known to turn down many of her pursuers, but the reason must''ve been this! This would really bring great joy to her parents!"


    Hikaru didn''t know if this was a guard or not. If he remembered correctly, guards don''t talk like this. He has seen the guard''s power level, and it''s only in [49], which is 7 times stronger than the girl. It seems like this guard has been trained quite a bit. He must be some kind of soldier from the navies, or a mercenary. Also, the name of the guard is quite weird [Oliver Brown]. He is a member of the Brown Family, but why is he a guard here? Is there some kind of story here? But when he inspected a little closer, he saw that the guard is quite young, maybe around 20 or so. But his eyes were deadly, like a warrior who has gone through battles.


    "Yes, but babe here said that she didn''t want me meeting her family, so I just forced her!" Hikaru said.


    "Hahaha, that is what exactly the young lady would do!" The guard said quite happily.


    Samantha couldn''t hold it anymore and said, "Let''s go, ignore Noah. We have to meet my parents, remember?" She just decided to play along.


    Hikaru nodded and waved at Oliver goodbye, before he noticed that she did not call him Oliver but instead "Noah". Now, that brings more suspicion towards the guard. Who is he? Is he a member of the Brown Family? Or he just has the same last name? But he is sure, things are getting interesting.


    When the "couple" left, "Noah" brought out a walkie-talkie, and whispered to it, "The plan will be launched at the end of the week, be sure to bring all of your equipment, the Brown Family has a lot of bodyguards around them at all times."


    He then heard someone on the other line saying, "Roger that." Then he pockets it.


    He looked at the building of the Brown Family with anger in his eyes as he whispered to himself, "Your time has come, mother and father. My revenge shall be fulfilled."


    The moon shined over him as an ominous glint passed his eyes.


    (With Hikaru and Samantha)


    As they walked on the courtyard, the emo girl couldn''t help but grumble under her breath, "Why did you have to tell him that we''re a couple? Now my parents will also misunderstand."


    "Relax, I was just playing with you. By the way, aren''t you traumatized by now from what you''ve seen? I mean, I just killed a friend of yours. The other guy might as well be dead." He asked, because normally in this kind of situation, people like her would''ve been shocked and traumatized to the core.


    She snorted and said, "H-Hmph, I only knew those two for a few days and I''ve seen a lot of gore in my life. It''s not the first time I see someone get their insides, well, out. I''ve seen them in the underground fighting rings in the city."


    "Oh, that''s interesting. So what''s a 16 years old like doing in places like fighting rings?" Hikaru asked curiously.


    "When a rich kid like me becomes associated with the a.d.u.l.t''s world, there''re things that are bound to happen. And I''m not 16, I''m 17." This time, she said in an angsty tone.


    "There''s not that much difference in one year. Quite the emo girl you are, I''m sure your parents are proud of you." He said with a bit of sarcasm in his voice.


    She brooded even further as they walked on the patch of grass, and said, "Tch, I''ve got more things to worry about than worrying about being my parents'' good little girl."


    Then, as they walked, she realized that she had been talking to him casually! This might not mean anything, but this is someone who can kill her faster than the eyes can blink!


    "Oh, don''t worry about me being angry at you. I just got a little pissed that your friends had the gall to insult me, so I killed one of them. I would''ve killed you, if I didn''t need any comfy bed to lay down to. Gods don''t sleep after all." Hikaru said as a matter of fact.


    She sighed in relief, knowing that she gets to keep her life. Wait, why is she sighing in relief? Shouldn''t she be begging for Hikaru to kill her, ''cause that''s kinda her thing. She''s an emo girl who''s bored with life, who is also depressed.


    Heh, would you look at that, she cares about her life after all. After all of that cigarettes, alcohol, drugs that she has been doing for a year now, she still cares about her life. She doesn''t know why, but she felt a little safer with Hikaru by her side. He is warm, like a mother embracing her child. Maybe it was true that he''s a god. Who knows.

 Chapter 126 - 117: World Domination it is!

    While standing in the middle of their living room, Samantha fidgeted at the gaze of her family. He really went and said it.


    "Wow¡­ I didn''t think big sis would have an asian boyfriend. He''s also handsome beyond belief, I''m quite envious to be honest." Her little sister, Olivia Brown, said with clear interest in her eyes.


    Her little sister is 14 years old, only 3 years younger than her, and is a valedictorian at her school. That means her grades have never dropped below A+ and is also a young athlete who has won the middle school track and field championship this year. She has an astounding IQ of 150, making her a real prodigy in the making.


    As for her appearance, she has her blonde hair is styled bobly, blue round eyes, thin eyebrows, and a little bit of pimples here and there. She wore glasses since her vision has been ruined because she kept staying up late to read those novels of hers. She wore some comfortable clothes, like a yellow soft pajama and black half-top.


    "Why am I even here? I want to return to my room now, just tell me when he leaves." Her little brother, Benjamin Brown, said while standing up.


    Her little brother is a real introvert. He barely goes to school anymore, though he always shows up at school every exam day to do his exam. And everytime they saw his grade, they noticed that they were all the same, B-. He keeps it at an average B-, just enough to pass. He''s 12 years old, 2 years younger than Olivia. They suspect that he is also a genius like Olivia, but it wouldn''t make sense for a kid to hide his grades. Every kid wants their parents to be proud of them.


    As for his appearance, he has short blonde hair, his blue eyes having some eye bags underneath, and a little bit pale. He wore a dark hoodie with black sweatpants to suit his taste.


    "Benjamin James Brown, get your ass back here!" Her mother, Emma Brown, yelled at him with his full name. He winced and grumbled under his breath, before sitting down in the middle of his mother and older sister on the couch.


    Her mother looked at Hikaru apologetically, and said, "I''m really sorry for my son''s attitude. I don''t know what happened to him, but he was not always like this."


    "Mah, maj, I''m used to kids that have bad attitudes. If I didn''t, I wouldn''t be here. Your daughter can get a little moody at times, after all." Hikaru said nonchalantly.


    Her father then asked, "How old are you, Hikaru was it?"


    "I''m 22 years old, though I don''t know my birthday, so I just counted my age every time a year passes." He replied while not lying and lying at the same time.


    He is technically 29 years old, mentally that is.


    "Heh, I didn''t know my daughter was into men older than her." Her father, William Brown, teased her a little.


    "Hmph." She just looked away with a snort.


    William barked in laughter as he saw her daughter''s face getting red. It''s not everyday he sees his daughter''s face in this household, after all. She''s always with her "friends" doing things that a teenager shouldn''t be doing.


    "So, mister Hikaru, why were you here again?" This time, Olivia asked.


    "Oh, that? My house burned down along with all of my stuff, so I had nothing to stay for the night. Coincidentally, my boss just fired me earlier because I offended someone. So I thought of staying in Samantha''s place to pass the night. If it''s that all right with all of you." Hikaru calmly elaborately lied, he''s a shinobi after all.


    Samantha couldn''t help but sneer silently, already knowing that''s a lie.


    Emma covered her mouth as she heard tragedies after tragedies happening to this young man, and said worriedly, "Oh, that''s not good! Do you have any relatives that you can stay in tomorrow?"


    He shook his head, and said, "No, I''m afraid I don''t, I''m an orphan after all." He''s not lying this time, technically he is an orphan.


    ''Well, that explains why he doesn''t know his birthday.'' William thought.


    "O-Oh¡­ poor you, but don''t worry! Me and my husband will let you stay in our building until you''ve found yourself a job!" Emma said with tears in her eyes after hearing all of that, though her husband still hasn''t agreed to that. Find authorized novels in , faster updates, better experience, Please click /book/traveling-to-the-world-of-anime-with-the-dark-souls-system_17253890906198605/chapter-117-world-domination-it-is!_51156640719758230 for visiting.


    "But Emma¡­"


    She turned to her husband to glare, "Shut it, William."


    "Yes ma''am¡­" He hung his head low.


    That''s¡­ rather convenient. But he didn''t really need to stay here for more than a week, he''ll probably be able to sell all of his transmuted gold, they''re rarity is the highest after all. He probably has 10,000 gold bars in his inventory that he can sell tomorrow. But he won''t sell it all, he will probably sell them one by one, since the people here might get suspicious. But even then, he didn''t really care about their suspicions, he is powerful enough to sink the entire continent of america without lifting a finger, so why should he worry about those?


    After chatting with them for a bit, he was finally offered a room on the penthouse floor. He and Samantha will be staying in that room together, since they''re a "couple". He loved the look of horror on her face as her mother said that. She almost begged her mother not to do that but Hikaru petrified her movements with a simple look, and then controlled her body to do his bidding.


    It was funny to see her drown in despair as they shared a bed together, since her parents ordered the staff to remove the other bed in the room so that they could share a bed together. Her father was against them staying in one room, but her mother was the matriarch of the family, so her words were laws, and her father couldn''t do anything other than give up.


    For Hikaru, this was simply amusing. Emma is a little too easy to fool, William is a coward, an introverted mysterious son, and a prodigy daughter who is good at everything. Then there is Samantha, when even if she''s a failure, her parents still loved her like a daughter.


    It was fun for him to see another family interact with each other, especially since they are an american family. This is the first time he has interacted with Americans, because Americans in his area back in his previous life were quite rare.


    As he laid on the bed with Samantha by his side, albeit she has her back turned against him, he started to think about his family. He has promises to fulfill, two to be exact. His promise with his children, and his promise with his wives.


    Now that he thinks about it, he remembered giving Azumi and Hinata male genitals while also keeping their own female genitals. You know, so that they can have some "fun" until he returns. He already knew that his wives were Bi-S.e.xuals, basically likes both women and men. Besides, he has female friends in Konoha who are still not married, or not in a relationship. For example, Ino Yamanka, she still doesn''t have any lover of some sort. She''s a famous bacheloress, since her seductive beauty alone is enough to be on par with Azumi. And he still hears that she still has some sort of interest in him from when they were young genins.


    She was also his waifu back in his previous life, but that''s another topic for later.


    "Hey, emo girl, stop brooding. I know you''re awake." He said to the girl beside him.


    He heard a "Tch" before she sat up and turned her head to look at him.


    "What?" She asked in a tone full of distaste towards him.


    "I don''t really know why you''re like this, when you have such a good family. You have rich parents, rather normal siblings, and a normal household, yet you act all rebel-like. I mean, you''re even doing drugs. Now, that''s illegal, missy." Hikaru said without looking at her while still laying his back on the bed.


    Her eyes widened when she heard the last parts, and asked, "How do you know that? Not even my parents know that I''m doing drugs!"


    Hikaru looked at her with a smirk, and said, "I have some tricks up my sleeve."


    She sighed and hugged her knees as she looked down, and said, "You know, I used to have an older brother," From that sentence alone, he knew that there was drama, "My parents were neglectful of him, all they focused their attention on was their already booming business. When they had me, my brother was the one who took care of me due to their neglectful attitudes. But one day, when he was going out to buy me some milk from the convenience store, there was a cop chase. Three cops were going after a snatcher, but one cop thought that he was smart and shot the snatcher with his gun, but my older brother, who happens to be there at the time, was the one who took the bullet, " She was bitter and sad, that''s what he noted, "The bullet entered his head, and he died. I was three years old at the time, but I could still remember it clearly. How my mother wept, how my father barked orders to find the cop who shot my brother, and I just stared at his casket, not knowing what to do. Since then, I hated my parents. If they didn''t neglect my brother and I, that incident wouldn''t have happened. He would still be alive, not six feet underground."


    She didn''t know why she was telling him this, maybe it was because he asked? Or maybe it was because she wanted to tell someone about this?


    Hikaru is not the one to prive other people''s secrets, he just didn''t want to, that''s why he hasn''t fully scanned her brain to see her memories. But, pissing him off can guarantee you that he would not hold back.


    He has seen hatred many times back in the elemental nation, numerous people were affected by this. Hatred is something no being can escape, even if you''re an all-powerful being. He, too, has fallen victim to hatred. It was back then, when he was undergoing his three years journey on the elemental nation. He had seen numerous bandits pillaging small villages, raping whoever they l.u.s.ted after, and enslaving people, then treating them harshly. He felt hatred towards them at the time, knowing that that was wrong, everything that they were doing was wrong to him. But then, he developed something over the years, something that made him a little bit more free.


    You can never judge someone, even when they have done the worst of things. Why judge them, when you are no better? He has also killed many, numbering over hundreds of thousands. You can hate, but never judge them. What do you know? You might''ve become just like them if things were so slightly different.


    But even then, he IS a hypocrite. He breaks his own rules from time to time, and rebuild them just like that.


    He nodded at her with understanding in his eyes, knowing the full reason why she hated her parents, or rather why she became a rebel. He did not judge her, because he was the same back then. Though, situations were different back then.


    "I understand. I have seen your kind many times, those who hate the wrong people. Your parents, while being neglectful, they didn''t mean it. They were working so that all of you could have a better life than them, which is what''s happening right now. If I understand correctly, that is." She was about to protest, when he shut her with a raise of his finger, "Don''t blame your parents, blame the one who killed your brother, is what I am saying. Hate the cop who murdered your brother, hate him, hate him, until you no longer feel anything, and when that time comes, remember those who love and care for you, then return to them with a full blown smile on your face. When you have finally felt happiness, visit your brother''s killer. It''s your choice whether you want to forgive him or not, it''s your choice, after all."


    She was shocked, having heard those words from him, the one who killed a friend of hers earlier. He is a murderer, but he has a heart, he was able to understand her unlike other people. He gave her a nice and sweet smile that she was so drawn to it.


    His words struck her the deepest. Those words were not meant to comfort her, but for understanding and an advice. An advice that would stick to her for a lifetime.


    Now, Hikaru isn''t the one to give words like this, especially since this girl is a stranger to him. Well, not that stranger. She is a nice girl at heart, but this world corrupted her, this loathful world. He hasn''t even stayed for a day in this world, but he had already felt it, the corruption of this world. It is in the air, their very essence sickened him. He could use Senjutsu, that''s why he felt all of that sickening essence.


    Humans, even in a different world, are the same. The voice of those who suffer whispered to him, begs him for a release from this world. They were somewhere in the world, being tortured by their tormentors.


    He didn''t know how to fix this more peacefully. He could just wipe them out and end all of Humanity''s unnecessary suffering, but that won''t mean anything under than genocide.


    He''s not Hitler, he would do things differently.


    But what can he do to end their suffering without killing them? Without that much death count? World Domination is an option. He could just unite every country of humans into one, single banner. But it''s easier said than done. There are creatures here that made some parts of the human world into their own territories, he can feel them all after all. While scanning the entire world is rather tempting with his newly gained ability, divine sense, there would be no fun. He wanted to have fun before returning to his family.


    It is dangerous to go against other powerful beings, but who is he? Isn''t he Hikaru, someone who, before he became a deity, played with gods like they were his toys?


    Then, he will choose the riskiest of things.


    World Domination it is!


    But first, he needs money¡­ and more money.

 Chapter 127 - 118: Gold Mines

    It''s been 3 days since he arrived in this place, and he has gained a little bit of knowledge about this world. He learned a little bit of history from one of the local devils here¡­ yes, devils exist in this world, along with fallen angels, legit angels, dragons, and gods. Well, from what he gathered from torturing that devil''s soul is that this world is governed by many factions.


    But the most eye-catching factions are the three factions, who had been at war with each other for thousands of years. These three factions are the devils, fallen angels, and those legit angels. But he also learned that they''ve been at peace with each other since the war greatly reduced their kinds.


    But what he is most interested in are the gods. He wanted to know if they are real gods, like the ones he had fought. Though, when he heard of their strength from that devil he captured, he was disappointed. A Minor God is capable of at least destroying numerous continents, but with enough magic power, they might even destroy a whole planet, and a Major God is capable of destroying a planet if they wanted to.


    But the gods in this world are weak, super weak. They could only destroy one continent at a time, and their power to create is as weak as their power to destroy. But the most powerful of gods is the biblical god. It is said that he created this universe, but Hikaru knew that that is a lie. Creating a universe requires a balance of powers to destroy and create.


    But the Biblical God died, he DIED. A god doesn''t die, they merely resurrect, unless they don''t have followers anymore. But from what he has seen, thousands of his churches have been erected all around this world. And he also has millions of followers, maybe even hundreds of millions! The Biblical God shouldn''t have died.


    But Hikaru came up with a theory. The Biblical God didn''t die, no, it was impossible from someone as influential as him. He hid himself from the eyes of the world, meaning; he faked his death. But the question is why? Why would he have to hide himself? Maybe he is weakened?


    He realized that he needed more knowledge than this, knowledge about this "supernatural world".


    Anyway, the devil, who proclaimed that he was a member of the devil clan "Phenex", was burned to death by his pyromancy. Even the devil''s soul was obliterated into nothingness. The "Phenex" Devil no longer had any uses for him, so killing him was the best way to maintain secrecy until he is ready to reveal himself.


    Even though he could probably take on the entire world, both the supernatural and human world, he has still taken the extra faction of REAL deities. Deities like Kami, Yami, and Shinigami. He has yet to meet those deities, but he could feel their presence in this world. The worst thing is, there is also a Chief God present in this world. He can sense them, albeit hard.


    Anyway, the devil dropped a small luxurious rectangle box made of what seemed to be pure gold. When he opened it, he saw 12 chess pieces.


    This is the Evil Pieces that "Phenex" devil was talking about!


    Though, Hikaru didn''t know what to do with these. He heard from that devil that you have to inject your very essence to this Evil Pieces for them to work in the intended way.


    So he did, but instead of injecting his essence, he injected a huge amount of darkness magic into the evil pieces. He didn''t care if they break, he could just hunt another High-Rank devil, after all.


    Normally, evil pieces are red in nature to symbolise devils, but when he injected his darkness magic into them, they turned pitch black with an aura of darkness emanating from them.


    His plan was world domination, so he would need servants. Each of these pieces will become his general that would lead thousands of soldiers to fighting the entire world. Even though he could probably take on the entire world with his current strength, but where''s the fun in that? A little bit of Kingdom Building wouldn''t hurt. After all, he has all the time in the world.


    (Scene Change)


    He should''ve left a while ago, but he grew quite fond of this family in such a short time. They were fun to hang out with, and they were kind. Though, uh, William seems to have a really shady kink. He didn''t want to talk about it, since he saw William being whipped by Emma, and he was enjoying it.


    Anyway, besides that, everything was normal. Benjamin and Olivia go to school, and Samantha is trying to fix her personal habits and attitude to get close with her family once again. She quit smoking and doing drugs, albeit he had to force her. She also changed her looks to look like her family again.


    Her parents and siblings has blonde hair, while she dyed her hair black. She didn''t know why she did that, it might be because of her rebel attitude. So, she washed the black dye off her hair to become a blond again.


    She is slowly changing into someone her family didn''t recognize, but they knew that this is a great thing.


    But, even as she changed herself, she still doesn''t want to return to school. Hikaru can understand that, even he himself doesn''t want to return to school. School is boring and costly.


    Even if you graduate from college, all you will have is a diploma and a huge ass debt. Oh wait, sorry, not just those two; there is stress, depression, and the urge to ill yourself to be released from this world.


    School isn''t fun, many things restrict you from doing things you do everyday. It''s been literally hundreds of years since the school system was created and they haven''t changed, not one bit. School doesn''t bring out the talent in you, it brings out the servitude out of you. They want you to serve someone once you graduate. School was literally created to make factory workers, how the f.u.c.k did it gain so much popularity?


    Elementary School, everyone can understand that, but c''mon, highschool, too? That''s just overkill.


    Hikaru didn''t understand why people are grovelling in front fo the school system just for their children to gain education. In this day and age, you can just search the internet and find the things you want, even if its 2008. Yes, it is 2008, July 9 in this world.


    The thing is, High School doesn''t teach you to become someone successful in the future, it teaches you to become a factory worker. If you want to be successful, just do Youtube or something. Maybe E-Sports, you just have to be good at certain games like COD.


    (Anyway, enough about my rant)


    Hikaru sat at the table as he ate with the Brown Family.


    Emma started a conversation, "So Hikaru, we will be going to go to the mall later. All of us will watch movies there, would you like to come with us?"


    "Mhm, I wanted to see some movies myself. What''s the movie?" Hikaru asked.


    "It''s The Dark Knight, Ben wanted to see it." She said as Benjamin nodded while chewing some food.


    "Is it about a man who has a bat fetish?"


    "Basically," This time, Samantha answered.


    Benjamin glared at both of them, but said nothing.


    "Shush, your brother wants to see it. If you don''t want to, go grocery shopping or something." Emma shushed the both of them.


    "As long as I get to buy something I want, then I''ll do the groceries." Samantha said.


    Hikaru nodded and said, "Then I''ll come with you, I don''t really like superhero movies."


    Emma nodded and handed them a credit card, "This card contains 10,000 dollars, you two love birds can go wild."


    "Mom!" Samantha cried out, embarrassed.


    The two of them were seated by each other, so Hikaru put his arm behind her and held her right arm as he said, "What? Don''t be shy." He winked at her playfully.


    She glared at him and looked away, knowing that she had no way of winning against him. He is just too good.


    After finishing their lunch, they all left the building to go to the mall. They were wearing their clothes for occasions like this.


    For the rest of the day, Hikaru and Samantha explored the mall, and bought anything they wanted. Money was no problem for Hikaru, he just sold 1000 pure gold bars in the black market, after all. Yes, he found a black market in New York.


    His gold bars weigh around 5 Kilo each. So each of his gold bars is worth 300,000 dollars, but he managed to sell 1000 gold bars, how much do you think that is? Any guess? Well, let me tell you, it is 300,000,000 Dollars. He is effectively a millionaire. But he drew a lot of attention towards him from doing that kind of stunt, and that is exactly what he wants. Gaining the attention of rich people from the black and underground market is something he planned for.


    Soon, they will take action, either by force or coercion. They are interested where he found such a large amount of gold bars, so they will follow him, investigate his background, until they find themselves in the middle of his claws.


    His goal wasn''t just selling his gold bars, no, his other goal is to create his own justification to steal from those people. If they try to force him to say where he found those gold bars, he will have a justification to pillage everything they own. By everything, he means EVERYTHING.


    So come, my cute little gold mines. Come in front of my fangs as I devour all of you mercilessly.


    (Two Days Later, July 11, Night Time)


    He couldn''t help but smirk as he found his predictions coming true. He is in a mountain range, walking through the forest as the moon shined itself upon him. Then, he sensed thirty or so mercenaries, each of them having the power level of [200]. Though he noticed that they weren''t humans, they were not fallens, devils, or angels either. They were abominations, he can feel it.


    He stopped in his tracks as he yelled, "Come out, all of you!"


    And come out they did. The thirty mercenaries appeared in a burst of speed, surrounding him in every direction.


    "Hikaru, a seemingly normal man. Four days ago, you sold one thousand gold bars in the black market. Our employers are interested if you can, ah, "share" where you got all of that." A tall black man said quite menacingly, but for Hikaru, it was like a worm was threatening him with its little and puny voice.


    "So, are you the leader?" He asked, looking at them.


    "I am, what about it?" The tall muscular black man replied.


    Then, as if everything suddenly went red, he felt his vision blur as he dropped to the ground and threw up some blood. And the last thing he saw was his men being slaughtered brutally with some kind of sharp tentacles.


    (A Few Minutes Later)


    He groggily opened his eyes as he felt a little bit numb. He looked around and saw that he was still in the forest, but he heard something metallic dangle when he tried to move. He looked at his body and observed it, and then noticed that he was tied to a cross with all of his limbs cut off!


    He felt extreme excruciating pain, but he ignored it. He has experienced the torture of experimentation since he was a child, he could endure this.


    "Oh, you''re awake? Quite disappointing not to see you struggle and scream bloodyhell as you stare at your own crippled body." He heard the voice of his target.


    "So, you defeated all of us. How surprising, since it isn''t everyday that the fierce Black Dog mercenary group is defeated by someone like you." He said emotionlessly as he forcefully tried to calm himself down.


    Hikaru appeared in front of him with an annoying smile that slightly pissed him off.


    "So, even when you know that your comrades had died and all of your limbs cut off, you still have the capability to stay calm. Quite a leader, if I say so myself." He praised the man. It is not everyday he praises someone of their capabilities.


    "I presume you kept me here to extract information out of me?" He asked.


    Hikaru shook his head, and said, "No, I''ve already extracted a lot of information from your memories, I just wanted to see if you would fall into despair once you wake up. You see, despair is kinda my thing, ya know? When I see someone fall into despair, I would compare my despair to their despair. It''s a hobby I gained."


    "You''re one f.u.c.k.i.e.d up man."


    He grinned, "I know, I''ve always known since my first hundred deaths that I was already f.u.c.k.i.e.d up. I mean, you can''t expect someone who has died for thousands of times to stay sane. I am insane, but at least I can control it. I just pity those who cannot."


    "Are you going to kill me, or just talk like an idiot in front of me?" Before the man could even inhale his own breath, he was already headless.


    Hikaru stood in front of the limbless and headless corpse in front of him, still smiling.


    "A shame, I was planning on making you one of my generals. You just had to insult me, didn''t you?"

 Chapter 128 - 119: Angel Lovegood, and Meeting Of The Two Gods

    Angel Lovegood is someone you can call, contrary to her name, an evil bitch.


    She was raised by two kind parents that took care of her every need, but they were poor and could barely afford their necessities. She didn''t despise her parents, she loved them, but she loved something more.


    Since young, she has been fascinated by these objects called "Jewelries". They were beautiful, the prettiest she has ever seen besides herself. They were as perfect as her, as beautiful as her. She loved them, she wanted them. But she knew that without money, she wouldn''t be able to get them. Those beautiful, precious objects were so close, yet so far from her reach.


    When she turned 16, she became the prettiest girl in school. She looked cute, innocent, and lovable, but hidden in that fa?ade is a very despicable human being.


    She had lots of jewelry in her room, but the way she managed to get them wasn''t the prettiest. No, she did not sell her body, those pathetic men are below her. Instead, she became a con-woman. Through lies and deceit, she gained money to buy those precious jewelries, her object of obsession.


    With her beauty, she cheated people out of their money. With her innocent act, everyone fell heads over heels for her.


    But for her, this wasn''t enough. Scamming people out of their money is impractical. No, what she needed to do is get herself a rich guy who will give her everything she wanted. But those stuck-up rich young men all had brains, they didn''t want a gold-digger like her.


    So, without any other options, at 21 years old, she became a caregiver for old rich people. It was hard for someone as perfect as her to clean old people''s shit, but she needed to do this if she wanted those jewelries. She was young and beautiful, perfect even, that''s why it was so easy for her to seduce an old dying man into giving her all of his wealth when he died. Thankfully, the old man didn''t have any remaining family members.


    The wealth that the old man acc.u.mulated was huge, it was around 30 Million Dollars if she wasn''t mistaking.


    Since then, she has been a rich woman. With her wealth, she bought the most expensive and beautiful jewelries out there. But she wasn''t dumb, she needed to grow HER wealth. She wasn''t a genius of any sort, but she was a cunning and beautiful young lady.


    With her money, she hired a successful entrepreneur to teach her about business, as much as she disliked doing that. For 5 years she learned how to basically make money out of thin air, not literally of course. Even her entrepreneur teacher praised her for her talent for business. And since he had nothing to teach her anymore, he resigned. Sad as it was, since she grew fond of her teacher, she left it at that.


    With her knowledge for business, she built a small business that centered around selling jewelries with five employees working for her. She wasn''t a college graduate, but a degree isn''t really needed to start a business.


    Then, her small business slowly grew to become one of the biggest Jewelry Companies in New York. She didn''t forget about her parents, of course. Now they live in a nice house, ready for retirement. She was an only child, because her father suddenly became infertile when they had her.


    Now, at 32 years old, she has a net worth of 600 Million dollars, making her one of the richest women in the entire country of America.


    She is beautiful, having many pursuers is proof of that. She is a millionaire, someone who is superior to the average human. She is special, she knows that. She is different from other people; she is the most special in the entire world. No one comes close to her superiority; they could only bask under her superior presence.


    She has one of the most successful jewelry companies in the world, and yet, all the deeds she''s done for her to stand this high is something she is proud of. Yes, she is proud of this, proud that she cheated an old dying man into giving her his wealth, proud that she was a thief, and proud that she was a con-woman.


    She is special.


    Yet, how? How can someone as pathetic as a man suddenly takes out 1000 gold bars with the weight of five kilograms each bar? She has eyes all over the black market, that is how she knew about that. That man, in just a span of a few hours, became a millionaire! He sold those gold bars for 300 Million dollars! While she worked her ass off for more than a decade to get like this! This is unforgivable, no one bests her. She is superior to every human being in this world! She is THE CHOSEN ONE!


    (Scene Change)


    Now, Hikaru had seen a lot of arrogant people in his life, or undead life, but this one must be the most arrogant person in the entire world right now. Who believes themselves as the chosen one anyway? He has read her head, that''s why he knew about her personality.


    She is a narcissist, a thief, an arrogant woman, and a very vile bitch. Now, he views everyone equally. If they did something wrong, at least to him, then he will kill them. That''s not any different from what he is going to do right now. She was the one who sent those mercenaries to him, so since he decided to take everything away from her, she is going to be his slave.


    He teleported inside her room in the mansion she is living in currently. He observed her as she slept on her bed with nothing on except with a bunch of jewelries laying around, there was even a vertical shaped diamond stuck deep within her v.a.g.i.n.a. It is a very disgusting sight, but also kind of arousing.


    Anyway, he''s not going to judge someone''s s.e.x.u.a.l preference, it''s just that, at least be with someone who Is actually alive. But this doesn''t change anything.


    He took a loud step towards her, which woke her up.


    She sat up drowsily, and said, "Kelly, I told you to not disturb me when I''m resting." She rubbed her eyes and took out the diamond from her v.a.g.i.n.a.l region, which earned a m.o.a.n from her.


    Hikaru didn''t take his eyes off of her and said, "Unfortunately for you, I am not Kelly."


    When she heard that, her eyes widened as she stared at the figure in front of her. It was a stranger, but she was somewhat familiar with that face.


    "Who are you!? What are you doing in my room!?" She yelled as she covered herself with the blanket that was lying around.


    Hikaru chuckled, then said, "How could you not know who I am? You sent those mercenaries, after all. The Black Dogs, was it?"


    Now, she is afraid, but she wouldn''t show it, not in front of this pathetic man.


    This time, his eyes glinted dangerously as he said, "I wouldn''t call someone like me a pathetic man. After all, I am your new master."


    Before she could ask what he was talking about, his hand was already on her face. She couldn''t speak, it was as if something was blocking her throat. He lifted her up with only one hand. She couldn''t struggle, something was stopping her. She was paralyzed.


    "You know; it was a dumb decision to offend a god like myself. Since you dared to call me a pathetic man, then I would make your life a living hell. Your soul will watch me as I make a mess out of your physical body, the people you deem close to you will disappear from this very reality, and this body of yours will be mine along with your worthless soul. Also, everything you own is mine now, even this jewelry company of yours. So, goodbye, Angel Lovegood. You certainly didn''t own up to your name."


    Then, everything went black for her.


    (Scene Change)


    She woke up later. Unlike most of the time, she didn''t feel any drowsiness or did she feel tired. She felt energetic, but the scene in front of her almost made her throw up.


    She was in front of a television, a large television, and the show that was presenting in front of herself is her body being defiled by three men that looked exactly the same. No, it was her body, but she was here, so how could that be? Is that a recording?


    Then, one of the men that was defiling her body looked straight at what seemed to be the camera, and said, "Since your soul has already woken up, then you can clearly see that we are currently raping your body. Though, we are only clones of our creator, so don''t worry about getting knocked up, but even our creator is infertile. Anyway, as our creator said before, you will watch your physical body as we make a mess out of it. Our creator certainly doesn''t joke around."


    She couldn''t comprehend any of this, she felt as if this was a joke, but she couldn''t look anywhere else. She couldn''t move her head, or her body. She only watched the three men that looked exactly alike **** her body as if it was a toy.


    (Note: Basically, they are shadow clones of Hikaru)


    She couldn''t think straight; her mind had gone haywire the more she watched her body get defiled by these men.


    "No..." She muttered, "This couldn''t be it¡­ I am the chosen one of this world¡­ I am special¡­ no¡­. I am someone who will change the world¡­ for I am special¡­ no¡­ no¡­. no¡­. NO¡­ NO¡­ NO, NO, NO, NO, NO!!!"


    She broke down to pieces.


    (Next Day, 6 Days Since He Arrived In This World)


    Hikaru sip from a cup of coffee while he sat down with the Brown Family. His face was full of tranquility, as if nothing happened. He put a large amount of chakra into those clones, so that they won''t disperse for about a year.


    "So, Hikaru, have you found a job yet?" William asked without taking his eyes off from the newspaper. He''s been pestering him to find a job, but Hikaru knew that he didn''t need a job.


    "Hmm? I don''t actually need the money, I have a lot of money in my bank account," Especially after taking that woman''s identity and taking away all of her wealth, "I have around a few million dollars in my account, so I don''t need a job right now."


    All of them had their mouths hanging when he said that.


    "B-But y-you have been staying with us for almost a week now! Shouldn''t you have rented, or bought another house?" William asked, quite shocked at the revelation.


    "Of course I could''ve, but staying here with my cute and lovely Samantha is the best thing!" Hikaru said with a bright smile as he pulled Samantha closer to him, she grunted a little.


    "Wow, brother-in-law here seems rich." Said Olivia.


    "Brother-in-law already? Weren''t you just calling him ''Hikaru'' earlier this day?" Benjamin said.


    She ignored him as a new light glinted ominously in her eyes.


    "Such a great young man, you are certainly more than compatible for Samantha. But I feel that she is quite inadequate in front of you." Emma said with a chuckle.


    Samantha huffed and just ate her food.


    "But I do feel ashamed that I''ve been staying here for free. If you agree, I will be buying the room that me and Samantha have been staying these past 6 days." Hikaru offered.


    She instantly agreed, "Of course I agree, who would ignore such a profitable business deal? That room is only for VIPs, since this is the penthouse floor. That room will cost you 7 Million dollars, are you sure you could afford that?"


    He chuckled, "Consider it done. I will write you a check later. For now, I will be going out for a walk. There''s something I want to check out."


    And with that, he stood up and left after finishing his food. He didn''t actually need to eat, but it was just to show courtesy to the Browns.


    Earlier, just after his talk with Emma, he felt two foreign energies somewhere around an abandoned building, which is quite far from here. But with his speed, he reached that building in less than a second. When he arrived there, he felt them. The two had a little bit of divinity in them, and only those with divinity can become gods, like him, but these two weren''t gods, they don''t have enough divinity for that. They were strong, at least in this world''s standard.


    He used his illusion to hide himself as he flew on top of the building, where those two energies met.


    He then heard them chatting.


    "Brother, is this really necessary? Do you really think that a child I haven''t met in years had stolen your master bolt? Do you really think that a demigod at the age of 16 can steal something under the nose of the King of Gods?" He heard a man''s trangquil voice.


    The other one snorted, "Don''t give me that, Poseidon. I have seen a lot of teenage demigods do more impressive stuff other than stealing my master bolt."


    "But that was different! Those were your children! My children have been docile for centuries! Albeit one of my children became the ruler of Atlantis, but still! You have no proof, no evidence that my son has stolen your master bolt, Zeus!"


    If he wasn''t dreaming, then these two are Zeus and Poseidon, two of the most famous greek gods.

 Chapter 129 - 120: The Revenge of the Neglected

    Zeus sneered, and said, "Do you really think I''ll believe that? You and my son tried to overthrow me once, and I''ll be damned if I let that happen again! I''ll give you a month to bring me back my master bolt, and if you haven''t given it back to me by then, you will have a war in your hands, Poseidon." Then he promptly disappeared in a flash of lightning.


    Poseidon sighed and slumped his back on the ground, then said, "If only I didn''t try to overthrow him back then, this wouldn''t have happened. Brother is too cautious whenever I am near him, and he is too overprotective of his throne. Tch, how am I going to inform Percy about this."


    He regretted trying to overthrow Zeus, and he has no excuses for it. He was a bit too greedy back then, and wanted the throne for himself along with Apollo. They failed, quite spectacularly of course. Zeus completely obliterated the both of them, he was just too damn powerful! It''s almost unfair how powerful the God of the Sky is compared to all of the other Greek Gods.


    Zeus can even take on their uncle, Atlas, on a stalemate! It would even take 6 gods just to seal Atlas, and their brother managed to get on a stalemate with their uncle! It''s almost unbelievable, but they guessed that sometimes, reality can be unfair to gods too.


    "You seem troubled," A male voice sounded on his right.


    "Yeah, it has been tough fo- wait! Who are you!?" He quickly stood up to look at the one who talked to him.


    There sat in front of him was a male, seemingly at the age of 20 or so, has long dark hair with the end of his hair highlighting bright white hair. He wore normal clothing that could barely be different from the average man. From his looks, he seems asian, a japanese to be specific. He wore a smile on his face, as if a kid who just saw the latest new toy in a market.


    He bowed slightly as he said, "Hello there, god of the sea, I am who you can call a god as well. A deity, but stronger than you and your family of greek gods, though I have been just a god for about 6 days. I''m a newborn in terms of being a god, but I''m more of a god than you."


    Poseidon didn''t like how he just said all of that without breaking his smile. It was as if he was looking down on him from just how many he said the word "God".


    "And what''re you doing in our territory?" He asked calmly, not wanting to piss off another god.


    "I just arrived here, actually. I don''t even know much about this world, and this universe. But seeing greek gods here, I can guess a few theories. Anyway, I decided to reveal myself to know more about this world, and gods are the most informed species in the entire world. I want to know more about this world, and if you oblige to do just that, I will owe you a favor. How about that?" Hikaru said, trying to strike a deal with the greek god.


    He could just, you know, extract Poseidon''s memories and learn what this world is, but by doing that, he will have to absorb thousands of years of memories. He''d rather save himself from a very painful headache, thank you very much. Besides, he can probably make them his friends, and maybe strike a few "meetings" with the beautiful goddesses here. Kami and Yami were beautiful, at least more beautiful than his wife, but they didn''t strike as women who satisfy their l.u.s.t by having an intercourse with men. They were lesbians, but that''s a different story for another time.


    For the god of the sea, he didn''t take the young god''s words seriously. After all, what can a newborn god give him, an old god who has experienced everything that this world has to offer?


    Hikaru smirked in his head, having read the older god''s mind. There''s a plethora of things he can offer. A very powerful weapon that could outclass the master bolt, or adding 1 millions years of lifespan to his.


    Suddenly, Poseidon widened his eyes, and said, "You read my mind, didn''t you!?"


    "I''m quite surprised, you sensed that? Well, if you didn''t, I wouldn''t have treated you as a god. I am capable of more things. I can give you the throne of the King of Gods, if you want. Just give me the information I need about this world, and I''ll owe you a favor," This time, he smirked, "That one favor from me is the most precious treasure you''ll ever gain in your lifetime. So, what is your decision?"


    Poseidon, though, is now acting cautious towards the young god. It''s obvious that he is dangerous, just from how he read his mind earlier. He still didn''t take his words seriously, out of how ridiculous it is.


    "Say, who are you? A normal young god wouldn''t have been able to read my mind." He asked, more cautiously than before.


    Hikaru sighed, and said, "I guess you wouldn''t believe me unless I show some of my powers. Very well." With a snap of his fingers, time stopped. Everything in the world stopped moving, except for the two of them.


    "Wha- what are you!?" Poseidon screamed frantically after sensing that his brothers and sisters also stopped their movement. This is dangerous, this man might just be related to his father, Kronos.


    He shook his head, and said, "No, I am not related to Kronos, so don''t misunderstand. I am only here to gain more information about the other side of this world, where the myths and legends live."


    If he doesn''t take him seriously now, he''ll have to show more "flashy" techniques. For example, dropping a meteor at the size of this planet.


    Thankfully, this single act of his finally managed to convince Poseidon, "Fine! Okay, I believe you! Just drop this time stopping thing of yours."


    And with that, Hikaru turned everything back to normal.


    "Now you believe me? Well, better than never, I guess. So, about those infos I need¡­"


    Poseidon really wanted to get out of here. This man just stopped time as if it was nothing, and reversed it without any problems. Even his father didn''t have this much control over the law of time! This young god could easily kill him! Albeit he will resurrect in a few years, the same when Kratos killed them all, but still! Resurrection can be a bit of a pain in the ass.


    "I''ll inform you about the things that happened over the years, but it''s a long story. Would you be willing to chat with me for a long time?" He asked.


    Hikaru nodded, and said, "Of course, I''ll just have to make a call." He took out the latest Iphone, an Iphone 3G, and called back to the Brown Family, Emma picked it up, and he explained that he won''t be returning ''till tomorrow, so their deal will be postponed.


    He hung up, and said, "Now, let''s make a proper place to chat." With a snap of his fingers, everything around them shattered like glass, and now they were stuck in an empty space.


    The older god was shocked. He created a dimension with a snap of his fingers! That was unheard of! He realized that the situation might be more dangerous than he could imagine. If he could convince this young god to side, or at least be friends with their pantheon, then no one will be able to attack them for a LONG time. Especially the other pantheons, and the chinese gods. Chinese gods are even more arrogant and stuck up than the greek gods. Even humans have believed for centuries that they were benevolent, but no, all gods and goddesses are d.i.c.ks and assholes.


    "How long is your story going to take anyway?" He asked, just to make sure.


    "It will be long, maybe around 5 days if you want the complete story." The older god replied.


    Hikaru nodded, and snapped his fingers once again, "I have changed the ratio of time in this dimension box I created from the outside world. Basically, five days here is just one day in the outside world. I use this from time to time when I train some of my abilities."


    "Good to know¡­" He muttered. This is even more f.u.c.k.i.n.g ridiculous. If anyone had the ability to change the ratio of time, then that person would''ve been the most powerful being in a short time. He feels a little jealous, seeing that someone has this kind of broken ability. Yes, he knows what "broken" is, in terms of mortal understanding. He has played a lot of mortal games, like that game that came out last year "Final Fantasy: Crisis Core". That game has one of the saddest endings in all of video game history, he still wept at the scene where Zack fought thousands of soldiers and died with his honor intact. It was just too beautiful.


    Anyway, we''re getting out of topic here.


    "Oh yeah, I haven''t told you my name, have I? I am Uzumaki Hikaru, nice to meet you, god of the sea."


    That is his official name in this world, at least in papers. A few days ago, he forged a new identity. It was fake, of course, but no mortal will be able to discern it from real or fake. He is just that good. Anyway, Uzumaki Hikaru fits him more, it just rolls off the tongue.


    The god of the sea nodded, and started to give information to Hikaru.


    Bit by bit, as time passed, Hikaru gained knowledge of this world, and how the supernatural worked. He also learned that Kratos also once existed in this world. Just like in the games, he slaughtered a lot of deities. They resurrected, of course, but they were never the same. They were weaker than before, but still strong enough to pass as deities.


    (Scene Change)


    It was night. The cold breeze passed by the trees, making them rattle a little. Silent shadows ran all over the forest near the Brown Family''s condominium. They were getting close to the building, all 7 of them.


    And when they finally arrived at the gates, Oliver was there to greet them. His smirk rose. He wore a dark robe with one black wing protruding from his back as he said, "The time has finally come, mother, father, you two will die tonight for my revenge. And then, I will finally be able to rest."

 Chapter 130 - 120: An Unfortunate Ending For The Fallen

    The night was as cold as the sleeping Leviathan. Silent footsteps hastened their steps inside the Brown Family''s building, their bloodl.u.s.t slowly growing stronger. Four figures murdered the guards at the lobby, without any hint of struggle. Another four figures flew towards the top of the building, where the Brown Family lives.


    They broke through the balcony of the room where Emma and William slept in. Their lazy figures moved around from now and then as the curtain lazily moved around due to the aircon inside.


    One of the four figures that landed on their balcony sneered with anger evident in his eyes. He steeled himself, he held in all of his mercy as he summoned a holy spear in his hands. His anger was directed towards his neglectful parents. All this time, he suffered through countless experiments and all they were doing here is have a happy life!? Unforgivable! They should be suffering! Suffer just like he did!!


    One of his fellow brothers tapped his back to calm him down, which worked slightly.


    "Do not let anger cloud your eyes, brother. You can kill them, but we will have to get the girl first. The reason we are here is to steal her Sacred Gear, The Light Of The Fallen One. This sacred gear is important for us, if we can get that gear, we can turn ourselves into full fledged Fallen Angels. Do not forget that, Oliver."


    The Light Of The Fallen One, a Sacred Gear so important that every user it has ever had, had been hunted by every faction in the world, especially the Grigori. This Sacred Gear can turn someone into a fallen angel, and is said to be the gift of gods to his fallen children, but humans who have ever had this Sacred Gear have a unique hatred for Fallen Angels. Some way or another, the holder of this sacred gear will find some kind of hatred towards the fallen angels, as if they were fated to hate them.


    But of course, the holder isn''t weak either, in fact, they become a fallen angel themselves with 12 Wings. The holders of this sacred gear only appear every few hundred years, so it''s rare. Once the holder activates the sacred gear, they gain the power of an Ultimate-Class being, which makes them even more rare. Once that happens, well, fallen angels have to scurry away to avoid the wrath of the fallen one.


    He growled slightly and said, "I know, I will never forget that. My revenge doesn''t end here, all of the fallen angels besides us will die!"


    His brother nodded, proud, and said, "Then let''s go."


    The only reason they know who the next holder is because of one of their members, who can see the future through their sacred gear. That person is the only one who has a sacred gear out of all of them, so they have to protect that person at all cost.


    Likewise, all of them are the result of the Fallen Angel Experiment. It''s an experiment conducted by the fallen race to extend their numbers way faster than the devils, but of course, like every experiment related to kidnapping thousands of children, it failed and left them with half-humans who only have one black feathery wing. This experiment was conducted behind the back of their leader, so it would be a problem if they just appear in front of Azazel''s door and say that they experiment on thousands of mortal children, and "some" of them died but they created half-lings.


    So, what was their best solution to this problem? Slaughter all the children related to the experiment, of course!


    Fifty of them survived, but that was it. They had no home to go to, no food to feed themselves, and were all left dying on the streets. They were still children, no matter what race they were. Slowly, one by one they starved to death until only 30 of them were left. It was thanks to her, their leader, that they were able to live. In their most desperate of situations, she unlocked her sacred gear, The Future Seeing Eye. With that in her hands, they performed few petty thieves to survive off the streets, and then, their base of operation grew.


    They are currently one of the largest underground Empires in the underworld. And by underworld, he meant the corrupted world of humans, where they sell drugs, human trafficking, prostitution, and every possible immoral act you can imagine. They were disgusted at first, but they persevered through the toughest situations until they became what they are today.


    "If the world won''t show mercy to them, then they wouldn''t either."


    That is the rule they have taken upon themselves. That rule is what they live for. They will never show mercy, not to a human, a god, a devil, or the biblical god himself. They are freer than anything in this world!


    (Scene Change)


    *Bang!*


    Oliver broke down the balcony door, which woke the couple up.


    "Who are you people!?" William shouted, though he is still a bit dizzy.


    Oliver smirked under his hood, and revealed himself, "It seems like you have forgotten me, father."


    William and Emma had the look of shock on their faces, this is Noah! Their guard! But there was something different, his hair and eyes were different!


    "Noah! What are you doing here!?" Emma asked while yelling, feeling a bit scared herself.


    Oliver spread out his left arm and a single black feathery wing at the length of a man appeared behind his back, and said, "I am not the guard who you know as Noah, I am Oliver! I am the result of your failure, and neglective attitudes! I am the one who strived from the deepest pits of hell¡­ just to exact my vengeance!" His holy spear glowed menacingly along with his sharp blue eyes. His golden blonde hair highlights under the influence of his holy spear.


    Oliver¡­ Oliver¡­ Oliver¡­B...r¡­.o...w...n.


    Emma covered her mouth out of shock as she pieced things together. She couldn''t believe, because that very idea is ridiculous.


    "Is that you¡­ Oliver dear?" She said softly but with fear from her voice.


    "Yes, mother," He scoffed at that, "I am your long dead son, Oliver! But don''t get me wrong, I am not here to have a reunion party. No, I am here for Samantha. Give me my little sister, and I''ll at least spare my other two siblings."


    Emma broke down, his words hurt her more than he can imagine. She couldn''t believe it, after so many years, her son finally came back. But his eyes, it was different from the last time she saw it. It was cold and devoid of mercy. The only emotion she saw was anger, anger towards her.


    William tried to comfort his wife, before turning towards the one-winged man, and said, "You! Don''t pretend to be my son, he died years ago!"


    "Get this over with," His brother, Simon, ordered.


    "!!"


    With steeled eyes, he rushed towards his former father in the blink of an eye, and before they knew it, his holy spear had already plunged through William''s heart. His body fell on the bed, dyeing it with his crimson blood.


    Emma took a moment to take in what just happened, before everyone heard a bloodcurdling scream but it was cut off when Oliver created another holy spear and plunged deep into her chest.


    "WILLIA-- Gah!!"


    He didn''t care whether they died or not, his hands mercilessly took his parents'' lives and he felt nothing¡­ but why are there tears dripping down from his face?


    He quickly wiped them before turning around to face his group, "I am finished, let''s move on."


    Simon nodded and walked past him, before tapping his shoulder and saying, "Good job, we''ll take care of the rest."


    Oliver''s eyes widened at those words, so he insisted, "But I ca--"


    Simon cut him off, "No, you can''t. Your mental state right now is unstable, since you have just killed your biological parents. You might make some decisions later that will jeopardize our mission, and by doing so, our dream of becoming full-blooded fallen angels to exact our revenge will disappear in a flash, just like a very delicate bubble."


    Oliver tried to insist, but he can only nod his head silently, knowing that arguing with Simon will be a waste of time. There was no need for anger in an organization, or it would cause problems.


    "I am glad you understand. Now, Abraham, Kain, come with me. Oliver, go out and scout if anyone is able to mess up our mission." Simon ordered simultaneously.


    All three of them nodded.


    The two followed him, while Oliver flew out of the balcony to breathe some fresh air. Simon ordering him to scout outside is basically a very useless mission, since their leader predicted that this location and time would have no supernatural creatures roaming around, thus they were safe.


    Just as he was about to relax a little bit, he felt something tightening around his neck. Then, he slowly ran out of oxygen. He tried to look at his attacker, and only saw a pair of red eyes and a shade of black. Then, with little to no effort, his attacker crushed his neck, effectively killing him.


    As his bodiless head fell towards the ground, he used his last breath to look at the person who killed him. Standing in the middle of the sky was a man with long black hair with the end of it highlighting his white end. His crimson and cold eyes didn''t even glance at him, as if his life was that of an ant.


    And the other was another man but he couldn''t take a good look at him, because everything went to black.


    (Scene Change)


    Hikaru couldn''t be anymore upset. He just sensed Emma and William''s lifeforce disappear when he was in the middle of learning about Kratos, the Literal God Slayer, and was also a game from his old world. It was interesting, but Emma and William dying took his attention away and knew that if he didn''t get there fast, the other three would die.


    So, he broke the dimension he created and rushed as soon as he felt the air outside. Of course, he held on Poseidon, and dragged him all the way here.


    He killed that one-winged guy, and entered their room. There, in the middle of their bed, lied Emma and William, dyed in their own blood.


    "This is?" Poseidon asked.


    "Mortal friends I made so that I wouldn''t get bored, and It would really be a shame if they died." A little bit of their souls still lingered around this room, so he grabbed those and used them to absorb their souls'' lost essence.


    After a second, their souls were good as new. Now, he just has to fix their body.


    He pointed his left hand at them with a talisman on his hand, and muttered, "[Great Heal Excerpt]"


    And it shined brightly, before it slowly dimmed.


    Their bodies were now good as new, which is only expected of his spell.


    "What are you doing?" Poseidon asked, "Are you trying to revive them? Hades will be mad! America is the domain of us, the Greek Gods! Hades will definitely sense something''s wrong later if you revive them!" He was panicking, knowing that Hades has a very short fuse.


    But Hikaru only replied, "Don''t worry, he won''t notice a thing. Besides, what can he do?"


    Poseidon had no response for that, immediately knowing that it was the truth.


    With a wave of his hand, the two souls instantly entered their newly healed bodies.

 Chapter 131 - 121: Meeting With The Foundation

    (2 Days Later)


    Everything was resolved quickly. Hikaru killed all of the half-fallen angels that invaded the Brown Family''s building, and he wiped out all of their memories about that incident. Now, they live a normal life without any supernatural things disturbing their life.


    Hikaru also decided to wipe their memories about him, it was safer this way. Eventually, he will make an enemy of the entire world and then when the people figure out that they are somehow related to him, the Brown Family will die just like how Miki died from Devilman. And by then, he won''t be able to hold back. Of course, he can just protect them with his powers but he is not omnipresent, something might happen that will kill them.


    Humans, devils, angels, and gods, they are all the same. They are ruled by their emotions, and he is also affected by his emotions. But humans are cruel, crueler than devils. Break them enough and they will become devils themselves. That''s how humans are, their cruelty knows no bounds. The moment they find out about the supernatural world, humans will fear them, then start to fight that fear, and then, war would ensue.


    Humans are weak, but they make up with their intelligence. They have made nuclear weapons capable of killing Ultimate-Class beings, especially the Tsar Bomb. When all things fail, there is no doubt that humanity will try to use their self-destruct button, I.e their nuclear bombs, just to take out the supernatural world along with them.


    From Poseidon, he learned many things. In these few days, both of them have been inside Hikaru''s self-made dimension that has a ratio of 1/10, and Poseidon has been teaching him many things. Things like the power levels of the devils, angels, and fallen angels.


    Basically, Zeus is just as powerful as Sirzech, the Leader of all devils. Beelzebub is as strong as Poseidon, while each of the other two maous are as strong Hades. The other gods of Olympus are Ultimate-Class beings.


    There are only a few demigods that could go tow-to-tow with a god, and all of them have died centuries ago.


    (10 Days Later)


    It''s been 19 days since he arrived in this world, and the news traveled far and wide because the ownership for Angel Lovegood''s company has been transferred to him along with all the stocks held by the shareholders. No one knew why Angel did that, only he knew.


    Then, mysteriously, Angel Lovegood died. Of course, she did not die, that was only an empty corpse he created. The real Angel Lovegood is currently being tortured endlessly by his clones.


    He did not make his face public since it would disturb his everyday life in the mortal world.


    Poseidon didn''t use the favor he gave him but instead kept it until something came up. But Hikaru knew that the old goat must be planning something. Either to keep him by their side, or a weapon capable of destroying the world. But he couldn''t care less, he has his own agendas and they have their own.


    Right now, he stayed inside a first-class hotel. He is currently making his own chart for the power level of the creatures in this world.


    He has studied them secretly, while kidnapping a few. The supernatural knew nothing about him, but he knew everything about them.


    After a few trips to heaven, hell, and the domains of gods, he was finally able to create his own ranking system for every creature in this world.


    [Hikaru''s Ranking System:


    Tier 1: 1 - 9


    Tier 2: 10 - 99


    Tier 3: 100 - 199


    Tier 4: 200 - 399


    Tier 5: 400 - 799


    Tier 6: 800 - 1999


    Tier 7: 2000 - 9999


    Tier 8: ???


    Tier 9: ???


    Tier 10: ???}


    Basically, Tier 1 beings are mortal creatures like humans, Tier 2 are Low-Class beings, Tier 3 are Mid Class Beings, Tier 4 are High Class beings, Tier 5 are Half Ultimate-Class beings, Tier 6 are Gods/Maou/Seraph beings, and Tier 7 are Super-Class beings like Sirzech and Zeus. Tier 8, Tier 9, and Tier 10 beings has not been observed, so he has no evidence of their power levels.


    Anyway, an interesting organization visited him yesterday, they call themselves the "SCP Foundation", and they wanted to secure creatures like him. He was just amused by their attempts but he was also interested in them, so he said that he will go with them the next day.


    They tried to force him, but a quick show of his powers stopped them. He heard one of those white robed figures that he might just be a "Keter-Class", whatever that means.


    After his show of power, they agreed but they will stay outside and he did not stop them.


    Now that his chart is finished, he will go with them right this moment.


    He opened the door to go outside of his VIP room, and there they were, pointing numeries guns at him.


    The white robed old person in the middle of them walked towards him and said, "I assume you have finished what you were doing?"


    He nodded and said, "Yeah, so now I''m ready to go with you guys. Where is your base situated again?"


    The white robed person seemed confused as to why he asked that, and said, "Is that necessary? The location where we detain the SCPs we find is in Bloomington, Indiana. Did that satisfy your curiosity?"


    Hikaru nodded with a smile, and said, "Oh, my curiosity is still growing as we speak. This foundation of yours seems interesting, but I really want to go to your base quickly. So, without further adieu," he touched the head of white robed old man and absorbed the information about their base, before he let go and snapped his fingers.


    The old researcher was stunned, along with the rest of the soldiers he brought with him. They were no longer in the hallway of the VIP floor of the first class hotel, but instead inside their underground base.


    "What in the name of¡­?" He muttered as he looked around, seeing his colleagues looking at him with surprise.


    They were in a hallway inside the underground base, square squeak clean tiles covered the floor with walls painted completely white. Numerous researches, old and young, gathered around them. They were all curious how they got here.


    The old researcher looked at Hikaru, and asked, "Did you just teleport us here?"


    "Hm? Yes. Why use vehicles, when you can just teleport?"


    (Scene Change)


    They detained him inside in what seemed to be an interrogation room. A single metal table attached to the ground, along with two metal chairs. A one-sided windom, and four cameras in all corners of the room. And one metal door that leads to outside.


    A young researcher opened the door, holding a notebook and a pen.


    He sat in front of him, before he started to talk, "Hello, uh, Uzumaki Hikaru-san? Did I get your name right?"


    Hikaru nodded, and said, "Yeah, good japanese there. How many languages have you learned?"


    "10, Hikaru-san." The researcher replied.


    "10? For a human, that is certainly impressive." Hikaru praised.


    "You flatter me, Hikaru-san. Now, I hope I''m not being rude, but I want you to answer some questions. It''s important for the Foundation to learn about your existence, if you''re willing to cooperate."


    "Don''t worry, I am equally curious about your Foundation, too. After this, can I meet some of your SCPs?" Hikaru said.


    The researcher looked at the window, before a voice from the outside said, "We promise you that you will meet them, but for now, please answer our questions."


    The young researcher then said, "As you''ve heard, Hikaru-san."


    "Hmm, fine. Now, let''s get to business."


    The young researcher took a glance inside his notebook, before asking, "Almost 20 days ago, did you murder a teenager by the name of Tim Gale?"


    "I don''t know about the name, but I did kill a teen many days ago. He insulted me, but I guess that doesn''t justify my actions, yeah?" Hikaru replied.


    The young researcher nodded, and said, "I would''ve looked at you with disgust, if it wasn''t for the evidence of arson we''ve discovered from that teen. Tim Gale burned down an orphanage a month ago for the sake of fun, but we guess that he was under the influence of illegal drugs and alcohol."


    "Well, no need to thank me." He cracked a joke.


    The young researcher chuckled a bit, and said, "Anyway, our next question is; did you live with the Brown Family for some time?"


    "Yeah, but I erased their memories of me. As powerful as I am, I am not omnipresent. I will make many enemies soon, so that''s the best way I can protect them." He replied with a bit of a sad tone in his voice.


    "My apologies. What enemies were you going to make?"


    "Many kinds of creatures, devils, angels, fallens, gods, and many other supernatural creatures." He replied.


    The young researcher, stunned at his words, said, "Excuse me? Supernatural creatures? Devils and angels exist? Are your words true?"


    "Yes, in fact, I met with Poseidon twelve days ago. By the way, some kind of war is brewing in Olympus, so I suggest you guys don''t go near America for the time being, that''s their territory." Hikaru said, enjoying his conversation with the researcher so far.


    The shocked young researcher turned his head towards the window.


    A voice from outside then said, "We are as surprised as you are. If this information is true, then there might be more entities that could wipe out humanity in just hours. Hikaru-san, can you please elaborate more of the creatures you speak of?"


    Hikaru turned his head towards the window and said, "Of course, but you will have to let me meet all of the SCPs you have contained without any troublesome things." While he could just break this base of theirs and take all of the SCPs with him, these people are more interesting than anything else. They are cold, but not cruel. They are kind in their hearts, though their cold exterior wouldn''t show that. But some of them seem to be in a happy mood.


    Outside, the researchers talked with each other before coming to a conclusion.


    "We have agreed, so please elaborate." He said.


    "Hm, where do I start? Firstly, there are the devils. They mix themselves around humans everyday, and some of them enslave humans for fun. Fallen Angels are pretty bad, but not as bad as devils. They are mostly neutral, but they were the fiercest creatures back in the Great War of the Three Factions. Angels are as you know, kind and benevolent creatures. Indeed, they are kind and only listen to their leader, which is currently the Archangel Michael. Oh yeah, did you guys know that the Biblical God is dead? Pretty shocking, right?" He explained. The last part surprised them.


    He continued his explanation.


    (2 Hours Later)


    He finished his explanation, and all of them were satisfied. The young researcher in front of him kept writing notes from every word he said.


    "That''s not all of it, obviously, but let''s save that for another time. Even though I''m a god, even that is quite mentally exhausting." He said, which shocked them even more.


    "You''re a god!?" The young researcher asked.


    Hikaru glanced at him, and said, "Yeah, but I''m a new god. I just obtained my divinity 20 days ago. Oh, but I''m not old, I''m just around my mid-twenties or so."


    Outside, numerous researchers have gathered and talked about the new information they just got for a very cheap price. Now that they have knowledge about the supernatural world, they will be able to investigate it more properly. The only supernatural world they know about was the myth about the Scarlet King and other gods, but now they have concrete evidence about their existence. It came from the mouth of a god, so there''s no way it''s a lie.

 Chapter 132 - A Slight Goodbye

    As you''ve read on the title, I''m gonna have a break from this horrible fanfiction that I''ve somehow created without much thought.


    From the very beginning of this fanfic, it was just meant for fun and stuff like that. Then, for some reason, it blew up for a bit. Now, the first 20 or so chapters were written on my previous phone, so it was undoubtedly horrible, and almost every one of you, my readers, reminded me of that.


    No matter what you say, this fanfiction is a failure of mine. But I''ll just put it on hiatus, for now.


    I want to write something new, something that''s actually good.


    This current fanfic is just about my mc blasting people, planets, and anything that can be blasted. It''s bad, and you know it too.


    If I get bored of the next thing I write, then I''ll just return to this to, at least, finish it.


    I''ve written 200 thousand words since I started this fanfic, and normally, people in my house would''ve called me a madman for continuing this fanfic.


    I assure you, I never and have never shown this to anyone I personally know.


    This fanfic is basically the culmination of my desires, which is not bad since all fanfictions are fueled by desires, one way or another.


    But the line gets blurry when you release these desires into your reality, I.e my life. I think I said this in the author''s note in my previous chapters; I slapped my 20 years old niece on the shoulder and she now hates me forever.


    However, that is not all of it. She does hate me, for a good reason too.


    After I slapped her on the shoulder, the next day, she started yelling many words at me for every action I take. She called me trash, garbage, and a waste of space. I can take all of that, but it ended when she told me to kill myself. Of course, I did not react the first time she said that, but she continued telling me to go kill myself.


    So, I snapped. I called her a whore, a bitch, and many words I would normally not yell at her. We got into a heated shouting curses and yelling cusses. (Of course, I did not mean those words).


    Now, fast forward to the present time, she still hates me. In fact, she avoids me and never looks at me in the eyes.


    I felt guilt for talking to her like, do you know why? Because I believe that writing my mc, who is the complete opposite of me, to be overbearing and arrogant, and I also tried to portray myself as Hikaru.


    It was a blunder on my part. I blame myself for not stepping out that foolish delusion before the bridge between the two of us completely broke.


    And to this day, I still cannot apologize to her. My pride won''t let me do so. It''s a real bother, to be honest. My pride won''t let me take action for myself and those around me. It''s becoming a menace.


    I''m currently trying to learn Uncle Iroh''s philosophy, you know, Zuko''s uncle from Avatar?


    It''s hard to be humble, especially when you have too much pride inside you.


    Anyway, I hope you have enjoyed this fanfiction series to this chapter, and I hope, one day, I will be able to return to writing this again.


    I''ve learned many things since I wrote this story, so thank you for reading and I wish you the best of luck in this horrifying, yet beautiful journey of ours!

 Chapter 133 - Chapter-122 Atanti-ql-Paneu

    "Hikaru-san, this is Scp-682. We call it; The Unkillable Lizard. For the sake of humanity, we have to kill it as soon as possible but everything we do to it has been a complete failure because it can develop an immunity to everything thrown against it, and we fear that using a nuclear weapon on Scp-682 will just make it develop an immunity towards to it, which will be the end of humanity as we know it." The young researcher that had a conversation with him earlier, explained as they stared at the computer screen in front of them with Scp-682 just lazily lying on the ground with his body full of numerous injuries that would''ve killed normal creatures.


    Hikaru gained an interest towards this creature after he heard about it from two researchers talking about it. A creature that could develop an immunity to anything? It is also as intelligent as humans? That is absolutely amazing! He could add it to his peerage and have it become one of his generals!


    Though he is also curious about the young girl they call "Scp-053". Apparently, she is the manifestation of death and can kill anyone within a certain radius around her. She has also "tamed" Scp-682 and was able to just draw around its body, which is pretty surprising for Hikaru, since he just saw soldiers of the foundation try to kill it and fail with many causalities.


    He guessed that this SCP Foundation is full of creatures he can add to his darkness peerage.


    His darkness pieces will turn any creatures into dark beings with their most powerful sin being enhanced by the pieces. They will retain their original appearance and abilities, but their race has been changed and they will have more powers in their arsenals.


    For example, if Scp-682 became one of his generals, it will gain the power to control darkness a little bit, enhance its physical capabilities and endurance by a hundred folds, gain mana if it doesn''t have mana already, and make it basically immortal if Scp-682 is not already immortal.


    It is also noted that Scp-682''s can shrink to the size of a dog or grow big to the size of godzilla, which is a big problem for the Foundation.


    Hikaru stared at the screen of the computer with great interest. The giant lizard was still alive, and by no small amount that is a small deed.


    He is basically drooling at the aspect of such wrathful creatures being his mount, although many creatures in the universe can probably greater than this creature but still, it''s a cool monster.


    "Can I meet it personally?" He asked the young researcher, who''s name is Thomas White, right beside him.


    Thomas was taken aback by that, because no sane person would want to meet a creature like Scp-682 but then he remembered that this person is a god, so he said, "Yes, but just be sure you can take care of yourself."


    "Yeah, don''t worry." He can blast this whole planet into oblivion, what can a mere lizard do to him?


    Thomas was about to turn around to open the door and leave with Hikaru to go to the cage of Scp-682, when he turned around a little to see the self-proclaimed god gone. And behind him, the screen of the computer showed Hikaru in front of Scp-682.


    He¡­ didn''t know what just happened, when suddenly he remembered something.


    "Ah, yes, he has the power of teleportation." He just decided to watch the interaction of Hikaru with Scp-682.


    He called his colleagues to watch with him.


    (With Hikaru)


    He stared at the hard-to-kill-reptile to take a look at its power lever, and Scp-682 also observed him out of complete wariness but he quickly looked away out of fear.


    [ Name: Atanti-ql-Paneu


    Power Level: 2200]


    ''Ah, a Tier 6 being. An Ultimate Class power level, he is weaker than I thought he was but that will change once he becomes my general.'' Hikaru mused.


    Scp-682 did not dare to look at him, not even glancing at him anymore. It just knew by instincts that this "human" in front of him is no human at all. He doesn''t reek of death nor life, only emptiness. But it reeks of power and complete authority. While humans cannot sense creatures like this one in front of it, every creature in the wild would''ve completely ran away before even seeing a glance at him.


    Scp-682 stood up a little and bowed its head in front of Hikaru.


    He smiled, and said, "Atanti, was it? You''re quite an amazing creature, and do not take my praise lightly. I am here for only one thing; become my general and you will gain untold amounts of power! Stronger than any creatures you have faced! Even stronger than a god!"


    Atanti didn''t care about this "human" knowing his name, but it was amazed by how much force and authority was in Hikaru''s voice. This¡­ being must''ve been a monarch for some time, a king of millions. Find authorized novels in , faster updates, better experience, Please click #%!d(string=17253890906198605)/chapter-122-atanti-ql-paneu_%!d(string=51509208411072148) for visiting.


    But what does he mean by being his general?


    "I see that you''re quite confused, so let me explain it to you. I want to recruit powerful creatures with large amounts of potential, and you have that potential. You have the potential to be one of the most powerful creatures in this universe! So I am here to recruit you to become my general and lead my soldiers, Atanti-pl-Paneu! Though I still don''t have any soldiers for you to lead, but I will soon." Hikaru explained.


    It didn''t know what this being is talking about, but it loves interesting things and becoming a general for this being is interesting. But he is only a steed for her, his rider is still inside this facility, still stuck in the body and mind of a child.


    It took a bit of effort, but Atanti managed to completely stand up and bow in front of Hikaru.


    "Then, my king, " It felt like that''s appropriate for his new master, "Can you please recruit someone? She is my rider, one of the few creatures known for spreading Death. I can also recommend a few for you to recruit, Conquest, War, and Pestilence." It''s rough and deep voice echoed throughout the containment room, which the researchers heard behind the monitors of their computers.


    Hikaru perked up, knowing those names immediately, "Conquest, War, and Pestilence? And the one you are talking about is, ah, Death? So, the Four Hors.e.m.e.n Of Apocalypse? Huh, what a coincidence. Then you must be the Pale Horse. But why are you not pale just like in the stories?"


    He has known about those four in the years he traveled the elemental nation back then. Conquest, War, Plague, and Death. Those four were the most common things you would see in the entirety of the elemental nation. Konohagakure was peaceful, but outside of the village was a world full of endless and bottomless nightmares. He saw many small villages fight for conquest, wars brought drought, many people, even children, starved due to famine, and then thousands died because of some unknown plague.


    He saw children as thin as sticks, a.d.u.l.ts fought for a single loaf of bread, and mothers were forced to prostitution just to have enough money to feed their children, which brought them more children.


    Even now, when the 4th Shinobi War finished 4 years ago, many still live in miserable lives due to the fact that some people have ambitions to conquer a small village or a land.


    It''s really stupid how humans in the Elemental Nation think that war will fix anything. It just brings more hatred, then vengeance, and repeat.


    "My old form vanished when my rider disappeared, that''s why you can only see this current form of mine. My rider was reincarnated many decades ago, yet her body never grows older. Unless my rider awakens, I cannot leave this place." Atanti explained, enlightening him.


    "Then why do you seek to kill them? The humans, I mean." Hikaru asked with a bit of confusion in his voice.


    It sneered, or at least he thought so, and harshly said, "Humans are pathetic creatures, they are fools and stupidity only erodes them. The biblical god created them, embraced them with love, and yet they were fooled by some toothy serpent to betray his trust. I only kill them for some fun and enjoyment to pass time." Though it didn''t show it, Hikaru could hear a bit of jealousy in its voice.


    He decided not to delve further in its mind, lest it becomes distrustful towards him.


    Some of the researchers listening to their conversation were fuming at the words of the lizard. It has killed thousands, and yet it has no shred of guilt in its voice.


    Thomas only watched and listened carefully, writing some notes in his notebook from time to time. This is a very important moment for them, a chance to find some breakthrough to the endless mystery of the SCPs. This is no time for anger.


    Hikaru didn''t really care, humans are just one of the infinite amounts of races in the multiverse. Killing these humans wouldn''t affect this universe. He understood humans, because, in a way, they are the closest creatures to demons. They devour anything in their path, kill innocent creatures without a shred of remorse, and would always attack their own kind.


    They are pathetic in a way also.


    They struggle everyday just to live for their tomorrow.


    But, the thing is, tomorrow is not a promise, it is just a hope. A hope that you will live for tomorrow.


    They are so weak that they could die from a piece of rock being thrown at them.


    Yet, in a way, their struggles are kind of poetic.


    Anyway, his real goal for now is world domination and he wants to find his own generals to conquer this world.


    His second plan is to disable their nuclear weapons, so that they won''t have any way to fight back. And then, the finishing blow: Announce his presence to the entire world and let them see his overwhelming power.


    Hikaru took out a dark pawn piece and inserted it into SCP-682''s head. Then, the giant lizard exploded into dusts of black particles before slowly reforming.


    It slowly transformed into something different.


    First, it skin became pitch black before it was covered by a mane so dark that it canceled out light, and then SCP-682''s skin and mane slowly started to become whiter than snow.


    And finally, there it stood, a pale lizard with the features of a lion, four long feet standing straight with its head proudly rising up. Its giant body slowly grew before it was 10 times larger than before, breaking the roof of the containment room, revealing the afternoon sky. Two small wings sprouted from its head, making it look somehow angelic.


    Its majestic form practically roared for attention.


    He saw its power level slowly rising until it stopped at [44,000]. This being in front of him is now stronger than both Zeus and Sirzech combined when they are in their base forms! Maybe even stronger!


    Now, it looked exactly like in the legends. The pale horse, except the only thing missing was the sickly figure on top of it. He''ll have to get his new general''s former master, Death herself.


    Atanti-ql-Paneu bowed in front of him with the utmost reverence as it said, "My king, please take my utmost gratitude for returning me to my glorified form. This white form of mine shall be seen in every battle you face from here on out, and along with my rider, that is my oath! Death to those who face you! Death to those who dare to defy you! And Death! To those who will dare to betray you!"


    The earth under the now albino lizard crushed due to the sheer force of its limbs. The containment room that contained the lizard was now destroy because of the sheer intensity of its deep and rough voice.


    The researchers watching this scene unfold through the computers in their watch room were all scared shitless. Whatever Hikaru gave to that lizard was a very dangerous object! They can practically feel fear and despair slowly crawling up to them from just seeing its new form!


    It grew 10 times larger, its strength grew stronger than before, and the energy reading they are feeling from SCP-682 is way off the charts! It is basically a new deity now!


    They just hope that Hikaru won''t let that thing loose.


    (Scene Change)


    He didn''t understand why Atanti''s power level grew that much, since it should''ve just increased its power by tenfold. But then he remembered that it also gained the power to wield Mana Energy, or basically, Magic, after absorbing the dark pawn piece.


    He decided that Atanti is now a Tier 9 Being, but he doesn''t know where that ends. He''ll decide later, he''s got better things to do.


    "Let''s get your rider, she must be around here somewhere. I''ll ask those researchers."

 Chapter 134 - 123: Lady Death

    Thomas and all the other researchers saw what had just transpired, and now they know that Hikaru is a very dangerous individual. He might as well be an SCP!


    He was able to enhance SCP-682''S physical capabilities by many times! And not only that, SCP-682 managed to obtain a mystical power that releases darkness all over it. If SCP-682 is released into the outside world, it will be the end as they know it. Billions of humans would die, continents would be sunk into the ocean floor.


    But it seems like SCP-682 is loyal to Hikaru, so they''re safe¡­ for now.


    The researchers were close at labeling him an SCP, since everything he has ever done was by no means normal in human standards. But labeling him as an SCP might offend him and cause a strife between him and the Foundation, so they decided against it. From what they have seen, Hikaru is a very prideful individual but that''s expected of a god.


    While SCP-343 is an extremely benevolent individual, he is also prideful to the point of arrogance. But by no means the researchers disliked him, in fact they loved him and looked upon him as someone they can lean their back on. Every time they had a problem of their own, the researchers would go to SCP-343 for counseling. They already depended on him, the self-proclaimed god of all gods.


    (In The Watch Room)


    Hikaru ordered Atanti to shrink to the size of a rabbit, and it obliged. He did that so that they can go through the facility without causing much trouble, though he can guess that this was not enough, because the researchers were looking at them with extreme wariness.


    Thomas walked up to him, and said in a voice full of fear, "You know... you don''t have to flaunt SCP-682 in front of us, right? All of us are extremely scared right now... including me."


    Hikaru just laughed and said, "Hahaha, you don''t have to worry! Atanti is very docile right now, ain''t that right, Atanti?"


    *Growl!* Find authorized novels in , faster updates, better experience, Please click #%!d(string=17253890906198605)/chapter-123-lady-death_%!d(string=51599215339557877) for visiting.


    The now small albino beast growled at them with a very dangerous glint in its eyes, causing all of them to back off far-far away from them.


    "Hahaha, see? He''s not dangerous at all!" Hikaru said, while knowing fully well how dangerous Atanti is.


    Thomas just wiped the sweat on his forehead, and said with his voice already on edge, "Please stop scaring us, some of us here have extreme fear towards SCP-682!"


    "Fine, fine. I just came here to ask you guys where SCP-053 is, I really want to see her." Hikaru said nonchalantly.


    Thomas just sighed and decided to lead Hikaru towards the room where they keep SCP-053. He led him there because no one would, his colleagues are too afraid of SCP-682 to do that. Their fear is justifiable, of course, because they''ve seen the reptile kill thousands of Foundation Members in the span of years it has spent in this facility.


    Some of the thousands who died, he knew. The people among the casualties were his friends from back when he was still in High School. Out of all of his friends, he was the only one who became a scientist in the Foundation, while all of them decided to become Elite Soldiers of the SCP Foundation.


    But even then, they were by no means weak. In fact, they were all assigned in the most Elite Team of S.W.A.T the Foundation has, or had¡­


    Since they were the Elite of the Elite, they were assigned to the most dangerous of missions. One of them was about containing the breach of SCP-682, and that''s where all of their lives ended. They died at the cost of SCP-682 being contained.


    But he didn''t blame it all to the hard-to-kill reptile. All of his friends were prepared to die when they took upon that mission, and so is he.


    They arrived at the room where SCP-053 was contained.


    A one-sided glass wall was erected in front of him, and behind that is a little girl, who seems to be only at the age of 4 or 5. Her "room" was covered in childish decorations, toys were scattered all over the room, plushies were situated all around her, and a metal plate is front of her, all kinds of sweets were in that plate.


    It seems like the little girl was enjoying it, not even noticing their arrival.


    As for her appearance, the little girl had mocha-colored bob hair and a cute and bubbly face. She wore a dress with flower patterns all over it. She is at the average height for a kid her age, around 100 cm.


    She played with her toys while chewing her lollipop.


    Thomas opened the glass door for them to enter, and Hikaru went inside along with SCP-682. The young girl turned her head towards them before she stood up happily, and ran towards Hikaru with an excited face.


    "Wow! A bunny is on top of your head! Can I pet it?" She asked nicely, while doing the puppy-dog eyes.


    That''s right, Atanti sat on top of Hikaru''s head while looking down on the little girl.


    It jumped down, landing by the girl''s side.


    "I''ll play with her for a little while, my king." It said before the little girl rushed towards it and hugged it like the cutest thing in the entire world.


    "Yay! Bunny will play with me!" She yelled with joy evident in her voice.


    Hikaru didn;t know why Atanti did that, but he didn''t bother. To pass some time, he decided to do a little bit of upgrading. He hasn''t had a good weapon to use since he became this strong, albeit no enemies of his would survive his fists, he still wants a good weapon he can show off.


    He looked over the entire weapon section of the shop to see any cool weapon, but the only thing he saw were blades and such. Katana-type weapons are getting a little bit too dull for him, he wants something new. But in the end, he couldn''t find any. There wasn''t anything cool there, at least for him.


    As he thought about it, didn''t he just want a cooler look? How about creating a transformation technique like Super Saiyan! Though it won''t increase his overall strength, it will make him look cooler. He already has an idea for his new form!


    Elemental God Form! This form is where he basically jam all five basic elements of the elemental nation and create a cool transformation, though he won''t try it out for now, since he is inside a child''s room and he would blast everything in a 50 mile radius into oblivion if he does that.


    (Half-An-Hour Later)


    "My king, we''re done. I hope I did not cause any inconveniences." Atanti said in his bunny-like form.


    "Don''t worry, I managed to think out of a new power because of the boredom you caused me. Anyway, is she asleep?" He asked, seeing the little girl laying on the floor with drool coming out of her mouth as she slept.


    "Yes, as you can see. I hope that her powers have not affected you at all, my king." It said.


    "Stop calling me ''My King'', it''s kind of cringe to hear. Just call me Hikaru-san, or Hikaru-sama. I''ll be fine with that." The small albino reptile nodded, taking note of that, "So, to answer your question, no, her powers have not affected me at all. Or even if it did, I have not felt it. Anyway, is it okay to put the piece inside her now?" Hikaru said, revealing a dark pawn piece on his hand.


    Atanti nodded with its small head, and said, "Yes, she is perfectly ready."


    "Mmhm." He nodded.


    He walked towards her, and the moment he reached her, he put the pawn piece on top of her forehead, before it was absorbed just like what happened to Atanti.


    She immediately exploded into pitch dusts of black particles, covering the entire room from the outside before a second later, the dusts slowly gathered in one singular place until they formed the shape of a young girl at the age of 14.


    The now older girl looked completely different from her earlier younger self. Long pitch black hair replaced her previous brownish hair. Her face became more mature, more a.d.u.l.t-like. Gone was the innocent and bubbly face of the young girl, now it was replaced with more sharper features like her eyes. The pupils of her eyes were now pitch black also, making her look somehow creepy and yet, mystical. Thin black lips formed a sweet, sweet smile.


    She now stood at the height of 163 centimeters. The flower dress she wore earlier was not gone, it was replaced by a gothic dress with nothing but a simple design of darkness. On top of her head was a white tiara, it seems to be made of tough and shiny bones.


    Then, slowly, a scythe made of bones slowly formed in her hands. At the end of the handle was an hourglass seemingly filled with black dusts.


    "I seem to have awoken," She spoke. Gone was the childish voice, replaced by a very elegant and lady-like voice.


    She turned her eyes at Atanti, and asked, "How many centuries has it been, my steed?"


    Atanti replied with, "It''s been millenniums, my lady. I haven''t counted the years since you died in the great holy war, butI still remember your graceful moves as you slay many gods with each of your strikes, I am just glad you have returned to the world."


    Hikaru didn''t know how an innocent little girl transformed into this ojou-sama girl. For f.u.c.k sake, she speaks just like them! Her looks are exactly the same as those Ojou-sama girls in those anime he watched back in the days!


    He has no problem with that, of course, but it would''ve been funny to see Atanti being ridden by a very young child.


    And then she turned her head towards him, and asked, "And who are you? Are you my new vassal? I guess not, you''re too powerful for that." Her face looked confused, "Hmm, I guess I should introduce myself first. My name is Death, please call me Lady Death."

 Chapter 135 - 124: Poseidon, my friend!

    (A Week Later)


    It''s been 26 days since he arrived in this world, and he spent a week with the SCP Foundation.


    He is already a known entity inside the Facility because of the abilities he had shown them. Teleportation, immunity to most SCPs, physical capabilities that go way beyond that of humans, capable of travelling faster than light, and so on.


    He befriended the Foundation, or technically, he forced them to be friends with him.


    He met the 05 Council just after he made SCP-053, or Lady Death, to be in his peerage. They were¡­ pissed, to say the least. They were angry that an SCP-like individual is just doing everything it pleases in the Foundation, but they changed their minds afterwards after he teleported into their rooms, and threatened them all individually.


    Of course, he branded a curse in them. That curse will make them loyal to him no matter what he says, or do. He basically has control over the entire SCP Foundation, though he won''t let the researchers and other people know that.


    He extracted a lot of information from their memories, and he basically knows a lot about this world and the anomalies living in it. Their knowledge was so vast that he had to extract knowledge from their memories periodically.


    The 13 individuals controlling the Foundation are basically super enhanced creatures, and all of them are nearly immortal. They all looked young, but they were all already thousands of years old. And most importantly, they have lots and lots of money! They all basically have trillions of dollars with them! And one of them nearly has a quadrillion dollars!


    So, with their money, he ordered them to buy all the toys, books, and pens they could get their hands on in the entire world every single year!


    Though, logically, doing that will cause numerous shortages of those items in the entire world, so he just postponed that plan until he is about to leave this world.


    He still has time before he meets his children and wives again, after all.


    But he did take a huge chunk of their wealth with him, around 50 percent. They could only do nothing but look at him as he smiled at them with wads of cash and thousands of doc.u.ments containing lands and property in his hands, waving it at them mockingly.


    They could only forcely smile back politely.


    (Scene Change)


    After recruiting Lady Death and Atanti into his peerage, he went and found more SCPs to put in his peerage. Basically, the only SCPs he is interested in are Shy Guy and the Plague Doctor, due to the fact that they are two of the Four Hors.e.m.e.n of Apocalypse.


    Plague Doctor, or SCP-049, is Pestilence.


    Shy Guy, or SCP-096, is War.


    And like SCP-053, they all had their memories wiped out due to the Great Holy War thousands of years ago.


    And they were all cursed to have some kind of mental disability by some God after they reincarnate into another being.


    (Flashback)


    When SCP-096 was one of the Four Hors.e.m.e.n of Apocalypse, War, he was a very prideful individual. His battle strength, endurace, and speed were his best attributes. And he was a man of focus, commitment, and sheer f.u.c.k.i.n.g will when it comes to something he cares about. His strength on the battlefield was unmatched, even gods fall to their knees when they see him.


    Since War was a prideful individual, he never hid his face. His face always looks down on his enemies, even when he is losing.


    But when Hikaru found him in his containment cell, he was a crying mess. That was weird, since Lady Death told him that you can never see War cry. He once shed his tears when his comrades died, but you can never see him cry for no reason.


    But this¡­ thing just cries for no reason. It wails like a baby. Its inhumane figure covered its face with its long and thin arms, bloody pale skin and bald head were its only features.


    It was the complete opposite of what she told him.


    Lady Death only stared at its figure with pity. Such a prideful man turned to such a creature, it was an insult to them, the four hors.e.m.e.n of apocalypse.


    Hikaru looked above its head to see its power level.


    [Name: War]


    [Power Level: 1600]


    Barely acceptable, but okay.


    He never really knew how putting his pawn piece inside them awakened their previous memories, but he was just glad that it worked.


    He reappeared in front of SCP-096, then looked at its face without any fear. It glanced at him for a second, before it roared and jumped at him but without even moving a finger, the pale creature crashed to the wall of the containment room, causing the building to shake violently!


    *Boom!*


    The pale creature tried to stand up, but found that it couldn''t. It could only screech softly like a dying beast.


    "Hmm, quite weak but we''ll work on that later. For now, it''s time for you to awaken." Hikaru said while walking towards the fallen creature.


    He placed a pawn piece on top of its head, before it was absorbed, then SCP-096 exploded into dusts of black particles. The entire room was covered by the particles, before it slowly gathered in front of Hikaru.


    It formed the shape of a large tall man with crimson hair that nearly resembles that of a lion''s mane, a huge black armor that was two times the size of Hikaru, he held two giant greatswords that''s almost the size of his body, and sharp eyes that of a warrior, unlike before.


    "Did you awaken me¡­?" War asked.


    And this is the day he met War, one of the Four Hors.e.m.e.n of Apocalypse.


    (End Flashback)


    A huge castle floated up in the sky, just above the SCP Foundation. But normal people couldn''t see it, since Hikaru coated it with an illusion. Only gods with full divinity can break his illusion, but even them would have a hard time doing it. Find authorized novels in , faster updates, better experience, Please click #%!d(string=17253890906198605)/chapter-124-poseidon-my-friend!_%!d(string=51641905720652902) for visiting.


    Hikaru sat on his throne while reading a book, though he was bored. There hasn''t been anything cool going on since the day he got three out of the four hors.e.m.e.n.


    Turns out, Conquest had her soul destroyed by someone, so he was disappointed that he couldn''t get all of four of them.


    He got Pestilence, or SCP-049, by his side after talking to him for a few hours. I will bore you with the details, so let''s not talk about that.


    Anyway, the three of them decided to stay by his side since he basically saved them. War became the most loyal out of the three of them, he was like a warrior that serves his master through the battlefield. He would have a spar with War from time to time, though he would always win without a scratch, and War would be full of injuries. He would heal him, of course.


    Lady Death became somewhat of a shut-in. She was fascinated by this era''s advanced civilization, so she decided to buy a lot of games to play, expensive sweets to eat, and a large room in the castle filled with large amounts of books. She comes out of her room whenever she is called, and other than that, she just stays in her room all day long.


    Then there''s Pestilence, the "Plague Doctor". His personality is something along the lines of "You don''t bother me, I don''t bother you." He just shuts himself inside his own personal library to read. But even if his personality is like that, he still answers his calls.


    Pestilence''s appearance changed from a plague doctor''s clothes to a medieval aristocrat. His clothes consisted of a long dark coat, a dark tunic, and a white legging. He has the face of a handsome british man, long smooth dark hair that reaches his neck, menacing green eyes, maybe around 6''3 tall, and like Lady Death, he has pale white skin.


    He is basically a dark and edgy guy who just sips tea and reads books all day.


    Atanti, well, he is lazy. He just sleeps throughout the day, which he has no problem with.


    Hikaru sighed on his throne as he thought of his current peerage members.


    One is a bundle of joy, two are dark and edgy shut-ins, and the other is just a lazy beast. He needs to find more peerage members that somehow resembles a humanoid figure.


    While he has the knowledge and memories of the 05 Council, he still has a hard time accessing it due to the fact that it causes him headache. So he decided to seal it for some time. That''s why he can''t use it to find more peerage members, which is a f.u.c.k.i.n.g shame!


    Anyway, now he turned his attention towards the supernatural creatures like those gods. Maybe he can ask the greek gods for some cool and epic creatures? I mean, they basically rule the entire greek mythological creatures like the centaurs or cyclops.


    Having made his decision, he told all of them via telepathy this:


    "I will be meeting with the greek gods, alone. Do not, I mean, DO NOT cause any trouble, for now! All four of you!"


    All of them heard it, and all of them replied with telepathy also:


    "Don''t you worry, my master!"


    "Yeah, yeah, just bring me back something good."


    "What did I say about disturbing me? HMM?"


    "Don''t worry, Hikaru-sa-an."


    See what he means? One of them is outright disrespecting him! HIM!


    It''s like he''s taking care of 4 children that''s not his!


    He sighed one last time, before planning his amazing entrance in front of the greek council.


    (Currently, With The Greek Gods)


    All twelve greek gods and goddesses sat on their throne as they looked down at the 3 mortals in front of them. They were all in their giant forms that are 20 times larger than a regular human.


    Each of their seats had their symbols carved into them. Pillars were erected behind them, the large hall of gods was filled with silence as Zeus stare penetrated them.


    Percy, while kneeling down, offered the thunderbolt in front of Zeus.


    "My king, I have returned with your master bolt, but I did not steal it! Luke Castellan, son of Hermes, swore his loyalty to one of the Titans, Kronos! Kronos then ordered him to steal the master bolt, but I succeeded at retrieving it back!" Percy explained.


    Zeus turned his eyes on Hermes, and said, "Is this true?"


    Hermes, with a sad look in his eyes, replied with, "Unfortunately, it is true. The boy grew to hate me, along with the rest of us gods."


    Zeus nodded before turning his eyes back on Percy, and said, "You have done well, young demigod. For your great contribution to retrieving my master bolt, would you like to wish for something? But you can''t wish for immortality or any kind of wish that has connection to becoming a deity, other than that, you can wish for anything else. Infinite wealth, I could give you that."


    With his eyes on the ground, Percy wished for something else, "I wish for my mother to be brought back from the dea-"


    *CRACKLE!* *POP!* *BOOM!*


    A loud sound outside of mount olympus boomed, and then a voice was heard.


    "Poseidon, my friend! I have come for another favor!"

 Chapter 136 - 125

    The roof of the hall of gods flew out, as if it was cut by something incredibly sharp. On top of the gods was a young man with waist-long black hair with some strands being white. His blood red eyes full of playfulness, and his mouth, smiling at Poseidon like he had just met an old friend.


    He wore a black overcoat with a turtleneck, black jeans, and a black fedora hat.


    He slowly descended in front of the gods, when Ares vanished from his seat and appeared in front of him with a long sword pointing at his neck.


    "Who are you? Why did you trespass on our land?" He asked, aggressively.


    "Woah, woah, back up, big guy! I''m just meeting up with Poseidon." Hikaru said with his hands up.


    Ares then looked back on Poseidon, and asked, "Is that true, uncle?"


    Poseidon, still sitting on his seat, albeit a little nervous, then replied, "Yes, he is, uh, an acquaintance of mine. Though, I bid to ask, why did you have to cut the roof?" He was a little confused as to why he did that, truly.


    Hikaru scratched his head sheepishly, "I thought that would make a great entrance, but from all your annoyed faces, I guess not."


    Zeus stood up, then, with his booming voice, he yelled, "Enough of this! Who are you and what do you want!?"


    Ares, with his sword still on his throat, said, "Answer my father! Or perish!"


    Poseidon really wanted to stop this, but some kind of force is stopping him from standing up. He looked at Hikaru and saw him winked at him for a moment.


    Oh no.


    Hikaru flicked the tip of the sword ever so slightly, and, along with Ares'' arm, it flew off to outer space.


    Shocked, Ares couldn''t dodge when Hikaru made a blue transparent whip and used it to wrap around his neck. With a flick of his hand, Ares was dragged towards the ground with a velocity of 1 million meters per second and as soon as he hit the ground, the mountain of Olympus shook so hard that all of the gods and goddesses almost fell off their seats, while Percy, Annabeth, and Grover fell on their butts.


    "Ooh, that gotta hurt!" Hikaru quipped with a laugh.


    A big and deep hole was made in the ground, unsure if Ares is even alive anymore.


    Zeus, realizing what had just happened, flared his lightning aura out of rage.


    "You dare!?"


    With his master bolt in hand, he flew directly towards Hikaru with an intense rage. As he flew, he threw his master bolt towards Hikaru with a speed faster than the speed of sound¡­ but he caught it with his bare hands, and with little to no effort, he crushed it to pieces.


    "Hmm? What kind of useless weapon is this? It broke, for some reason." Hikaru said out loud, which angered Zeus even more when he realized just what happened to his favorite and second-most powerful weapon.


    "You little shit! I''ll kill you for breaking my master bolt!" Zeus raged, all rationality was lost.


    That took Hikaru a moment, before he asked incredulously, "That useless weapon was your master bolt? Well, whoever made that must''ve been a pretty bad blacksmith. Hahahaha!"


    "Die!" Zeus rushed at him, full of rage. Without any weapon, he decided to use his fist.


    With his full strength, he tried to punch Hikaru!


    The wind blew, forming a small hurricane that almost made the three mortals with them shake, shivering in fear. Athena used a magic spell and formed a force field that protected the two demigods and the satyr.


    Hikaru, with a face now full of boredom, just flicked Zeus'' fist and broke it almost immediately. The Sky God''s arm made numerous cracks, blood spurted out, and now his right arm is broken.


    The other gods were now concerned, obviously they have no way of fighting this newcomer. If even Zeus, arguably the strongest out of all of them, can''t even defend himself from a simple flick of his fingers, then they are f.u.c.k.i.e.d!


    Because even the titans would have a difficult time defending against the Sky God''s punch at 100 percent strength! Though they knew that Zeus still haven''t accessed his [Divine Form] that multiplied his overall strength by four times, they still knew that they would lose for some reason. It was as if some kind of innate feeling that they knew they would lose if they fought against this newcomer.


    Zeus clutched his now broken arm, and said after calming himself a bit, "Who are you? And why are you doing this?"


    "I just wanted to meet with Poseidon for some favors, but I saw that you guys were too easy to aggravate, so I decided to mess with you." He took out two bottles of divine blessing, and toss it towards Zeus and he caught it, quite confused as to what they are.


    "Those things will heal the two of you to full strength, a little apology for your injuries. Hahaha!" He laughed, then released Poseidon from his paralyzed state.


    Instantly, the God of the Sea stood up and appeared instantly by his brother''s side, "Brother, you should drink those. Hikaru might be a bit playful, but he won''t lie about that¡­ I think he won''t lie about that. Anyway, I''ve known him for some time, so I know you can trust him. I''ll go and talk to him about what he was here for, and you and nephew can take the time to rest."


    Zeus was a little uncomfortable that Poseidon, for once, would be the one to take charge of the situation but he complied and flew down to his son, to heal him.


    Poseidon then glared at Hikaru, "Why did you have to do that? My standing with my brother is already soured, but you made it even worse! You''re an acquaintance of mine, and that would make my brother grow more paranoid and be on guard whenever I am around!" He made it so that no one but Hikaru would hear him.


    "Mah, mah, don''t worry! Here, " In a sudden bright light, he made a solid lightning sword with his lightning magic, "This thing here is a culmination of millions of thunderbolts gathered and compressed in one place, give this to your brother and I would assure you, he would be overjoyed."


    That''s right, he made an overpowered sword in less than a second!


    This lightning sword is basically capable of commanding the nature of lightning, thunder, or basically anything that has electricity circuiting through it. Though it won''t be able to make the creator of it yield, since Hikaru made it that way.


    This lightning sword that is shaped like a long sword with a black and white metal body, with lightning coursing through it, can also cut anything in its path for 20 times only, and then it would have to re-charge within a place abundant with electricity.


    Fortunately, Zeus is basically made of lightning, so he will be able to re-charge it how many times he wants.


    Poseidon''s face beamed up slightly, though this offer raises one question, "What''s the catch?"


    Hikaru smiled slightly, "Sharp as always. Give me the information about the hydra and Typhon, I want to enslav-- I mean, make friends with them."


    Now that got Poseidon confused, but it didn''t matter, since he would receive that amazing sword. Though that got him wondering for a minute.


    Typhon is basically the father of all monsters, well, almost all anyway. It once tied against Zeus in a fight, though it was defeated and cast down to the underworld, Hades'' domain.


    It is also the youngest son of their sweet ol'' grandmother, Gaia.


    The father of all monsters is a grisly monster with a human''s head and hundreds of dragon limbs for its lower body. It was the stuff of nightmares for most old greek gods, including him, because its unrelenting evilness and power are enough to put any god besides Zeus to their knees.


    That monster also had a wife named Echidna, who is still on the run from the gods. Even now, there were many sightings of her lurking around the Shinto Territories and raping young strong males to reproduce more of her unsightly children. There is also a rumor that Yasaka''s husband was kidnapped by Echidna, though there was no evidence of that.


    The Greek Gods couldn''t hunt down Echidna even if they wanted to, because the Shinto Gods are vastly more powerful than them and Greek Gods are banned from Japan since Zeus decided to take advantage of some poor women in Japan.


    The Greek Gods are also banned from many mythological factions¡­ all because Zeus couldn''t keep his pants up and decided to take advantage of a lot of women.


    "Typhon is trapped in the underworld, my older brother''s domain. The Hydras can mostly be found in the familiar forest, where young devils go to. I advise you not to go there, or you might just start a war with the devi-- and he''s gone. F.u.c.k.i.n.g Great!"


    He couldn''t help but grumble under his breath, but at least he left the sword. It''s floating in the air, though he still couldn''t help but still resent him.


    The Hall of Gods was just renovated a week ago!


    Meanwhile¡­


    Percy tried to calm Annabeth down, even though he is also scared to the point of pissing himself. It''s not everyday you see gods fighting each other!


    (Currently, in the Familiar Forest)


    Ah, the Familiar Forest. Young devils come here to get their pokem-- familiars. Sometimes, they would have too much ambition and try to get the strongest familiars, which always resulted in them being killed. Find authorized novels in , faster updates, better experience, Please click #%!d(string=17253890906198605)/chapter-125_%!d(string=51670516628510343) for visiting.


    The Forest is always calm, but when young devils gather around, they make a lot of noise.


    And especially now that the young heiress of the Gremory Clan has come to the Familiar Forest to get her newest Peerage Members a familiar.


    "Yuuto-kun, Koneko, are you both sure about these familiars? You can never exchange it for another unless it dies, you know?" Rias said.


    Even though she was just 12 years old, you can already see she would grow up to be a wonderful woman. She has long crimson hair, blue eyes, skin as smooth as a porcelain stone and as soft as a pillow. She wore a white dress with little to no decorations on them. She wore a pair of slippers and a small weaved hat.


    Koneko, currently ten years old, carried a small kitten within her arms. She cradled it like a baby, though she still nodded when Rias spoke to her. She has neck-long white hair and golden eyes, her height was passable for her age. She also wore a white dress that is similar to her hair. Two white cat ears protrude from atop of her head. It would twitch from time to time.


    Yuuto Kiba''s familiar is a small golden bird that has the beak of an eagle and the body of a sparrow. It''s sharp eyes contrast to its small body. It would squawk to get the young boy''s attention.


    "Yes, absolutely. I will name him Jack, after the main character of that one pirate movie." He said, and the small sparrow-like bird nodded, satisfied with its name.


    "...This one''s name is Shiro." Koneko said silently, but was just enough to be heard by Rias.


    "Good for you, Koneko! It looks just like you!" Rias said to her cute peerage member.


    "...Thanks." The young Nekoshou said.


    She then turned to Kiba, and said, "The name you chose also sounds good, too, Yuuto-kun!"


    The older woman then spoke.


    "Young miss, since you have finished getting them familiar, I think it is time for you to return home." Grafiya said stoically.


    Grayfia is a beautiful young woman appearing to be in her early twenties with back-length silver hair that features a long braid on each side with small blue bows at the ends, while the rest is let down which ends in twin braids and red eyes.


    "Hmph, you''re no fun, Grafiya-Onee-chan! I want to explore more of this forest!" Rias cutely pouted.


    "Your father said that you would say that, so he told me to ban you from watching anime and reading any manga or light novels if you keep up with this atittude." Grafiya said sternly.


    Rias slumped her shoulders down, and just gave up.


    The older woman nodded in satisfaction before activating a teleportation spell, but as they were about to leave, a man passed by behind the nearby trees.


    Now, that was weird since it was stated that the Gremory Clan would take control of this forest for a day.


    She paused for a moment to see who it was.

 Chapter 137 - This is getting old

    This is getting old. I always write notes like this to warn you guys that I''m going on a hiatus.


    As of currently, I''ve decided to put this fanfic in an indefinite hiatus. It''s just tiring to see people complain about my previous failures, which is fine since it helps me grow as a writer, but it''s just tiring. Always and always, readers would share their complaints on how bad this and that.


    I especially dreaded seeing paragraph comments from the earlier chapters because I know that they are completely shit.


    Maybe it''s depression kicking in? I don''t know, maybe I''m not depressed. Maybe I''m just stressed, worried about my future, or anything like that.


    Hey, why not all of them?


    I know all of you reading this have many problems in your life, so I know you know how I feel since I''m just a teen.


    I''ve been exposed to the horrible nature of this world since I was a child. Hypocrisy is present everywhere, lies, and many, many more. I don''t know if some of you ever had the experience of walking miles every single day while carrying a basket full of products that was made for you to sell, but it''s tough out there. No one would care even if you''re covered in rain as you try to at least sell one more, asking every stranger you see. Cars would passed by you, people would ignore you, and then there would be at least one person compassionate enough to give you a towel to wipe yourself but you would reject it for the fear of something you don''t know.


    I just feel so stressed, forgive me for complaining too much.


    I don''t know what I''m complaining about, I have a pretty good roof on top of me, a bed to sleep on, and is able to eat three times or more a day.


    Maybe I''m just a fool? I don''t know.


    Anyway, I''m writing a new one, an original novel, so if you care much to see it, I''ll post it after I''ve written at least 30 chapters. Maybe it will take me a month? I don''t know, but as always, thank you for reading this far.

 Chapter 138 - 126: Tiamat

    As soon as he stepped foot on the land of the forest, he sensed many creatures that would be considered myths in human civilizations.


    *Rustle* *Rustle*


    He saw mythical creatures staring at him in confusion, but then they ran away when they noticed the smell of danger in him.


    He ignored them, since they were pathetically weak. But he sensed a creature that is stronger than all of the creatures in this area, and even though it has dragonic features, he was sure that this reptilian creature is not a hydra. It might be a dragon.


    He wanted to just fly over there really quick and enslav-- tame that creature and just be done with it, but he decided to take his time to appreciate nature for a bit.


    He walked through the woods while humming a song called "First Love" by Utada Hikaru. She was his idol back when he was a child in his previous life, and not to mention she was absolutely beautiful, for him at the time at least.


    As he strolled through the forest like he was just walking in his own backyard, he noticed a bright shade of red through the corners of his eyes. He saw a crimson haired child, and noticed immediately that she''s a devil. There was also a silver haired woman dressed in some kind of maid costume and two other children with her, though he can see the silver haired woman looking at him with cautious eyes while forming a guarding position to protect the three children behind her.


    "Who are you?" The silver haired woman asked warily.


    "I''m Hikaru, I was just strolling to pass some time until I go meet the giant lizard that lives somewhere around her. So you don''t have to mind me." He then turned around.


    He was about to walk away, when huge ice spikes sprouted from the ground behind him, attacking him directly towards his head.


    He didn''t bother looking at him and just let it hit him.


    And just as he expected, the ice spikes shattered when it tried to pierce his skin.


    The silver haired woman tensed even more and shot hundreds of ice needles towards him, but all of them shattered upon contact with his skin!


    He sighed, and turned back to Face the silver haired woman again.


    ''I guess I will have to show off some of my power.''


    Why is everybody attacking him so suddenly nowadays?


    "You know, you could''ve just ignored me and walked away, right? I really don''t want to start some kind of fight with you devils, but if you insist," He snapped his fingers, and thousands of black giant rasengans the size of mountains appeared in the sky, and then he finished, "this happens!"


    The three devil children behind her shivered in fear, so she teleported them back in their home so that they won''t get injured from this battle¡­ at least she''s thinking this is a battle.


    "Ho, so you sent those kids away? Smart choice, and dumb at the same time." He mocked her, "You could''ve just surrendered and I would walk away. Is this what they call the sin of pride that you devils have? How utterly stupid!"


    The silver haired woman had an evidently annoyed face, "Insult me how many times you want, but it doesn''t change the fact that you have trespassed into our territory while the young sister of the current Lucifer and her peerage was here!"


    Hikaru just shook his head and just brought his finger down, thus those thousands of balls of energy were brought down towards her one by one!


    She coated her fists with enhancing magic and deflected each of those giant balls of energy the moment they came close to her!


    *BOOM!* *BOOM!* *BOOM!*


    10 of the giant rasengans that Hikaru made exploded somewhere far away the moment the silver haired woman, or Grayfia as he saw her name on top of her head using his special eyes, deflected them all!


    Thousands of trees were uprooted by the force of her punches and the descending giant balls of energy!


    He was quite disappointed when he saw her panting a bit, so he stopped the barrage of giant energy balls towards her.


    She had the power level of 8500, so she must be a noble in the underworld, where the devils live. Now that he thinks about it, isn''t he in literal hell? He must''ve done something bad in his past life to be here! (Note: A joke)


    "Is that the best you can do? You''re weak, and you must have already realized that I could''ve just killed you on the spot the moment you focused your attention on the balls that I made, right?" Hikaru said without any contempt in his voice, just disappointment.


    She wiped some sweat dripping off her face and said, "You''re¡­*pant*¡­ joking right? I''m not even the least tired!" She lied.


    She is almost hitting her limit. Those giant energy balls were no joke, just one of those could''ve obliterated a city in the devil territories! This guy is strong; she can see that now. She should''ve surrendered the moment she got the cue earlier.


    Anyway, she has to buy some time before her master/husband comes here. She hates to admit it, but she hopes that guy ignores his duty as a Maou and comes to rescue her.


    Hikaru just sighed, and said in a voice full of boredom, "You''re boring." With another snap of his fingers, the giant energy balls in the sky vanished without a trace. He turned his back around, and left with these words:


    "Try becoming strong, you might be able to last a few minutes against me. Jeez, I didn''t know you were the wife of the current Lucifer! I can certainly enjoy messing with you devils, but before my peerage is full, I won''t do it for now. Train yourself, because in the future, this world shall know despair!"


    Then he left without even looking back at her. It was insulting, but she knows when to stand aside. Whatever he meant with his words doesn''t matter, what does matter is that he''s a very dangerous individual! Even her husband would think twice before fighting her, but this guy''s magic power seems to know no limit! Even she would find it difficult to create those many energy balls! But now that she thought about it, those weren''t just normal energy balls, those things were made of chakra.


    She has to tell this to her husband about this!


    She teleported away immediately.


    (With Hikaru)


    She was¡­ pathetically weak. Normally, those with 5000 or more power level will have the strength to at least resist him a bit¡­ well, who is he kidding? Even those who have around 100 Million power levels wouldn''t be able to put a scratch on him.


    Either way, devils are weak in his eyes. He might have War battle the entire Three Factions later in the future, just for fun. Who will win? Someone who is multitude stronger than the strongest leaders of the world? Or Three Weak Factions?


    That does seem fun, so he''ll do that.


    For now, he is focusing on finding more peerage members. If that dragon doesn''t join him, he''ll kill it so no one gets it.


    He''ll take things slow, like a game of Shogi. One by one, they will fall.


    And at the end, he''ll stand supreme.


    (At Tiatmat''s Cave)


    In one certain part of the familiar forest, there stayed a dragon.


    The dragon has a body as dark as night and wings as red as the crimson twilight. Its cold white eyes, commanding, it''s every move, dominating.


    The great dragon king laid asleep inside its cavern. Every snore it released, the wind would blow. Even when it was asleep, any creature could feel its commanding presence.


    This is the strongest creature in the familiar forest, Tiamat, The Chaos Karma Dragon! The only female dragon amongst the five dragon kings!


    The cave it stayed in was huge, larger than any castle. Tiamat owned a quarter of the familiar forest due to the deal she striked with Sirzech, and as her side of the deal, she will have to bow to anyone who can conquer her to be in their peerage. But no one could ever make her bow down her head, for there was no one strong enough. She is, after all, as powerful as the Maous and only below to the Two Heavenly Dragons, Ddraig and Albion.


    Suddenly, her right eye opened intensely as she sensed an unknown being in front of her.


    She lazily stood up and said in a booming voice, "Who dares to intrude to my domain!"


    "I do." A calm, unshakable voice said.


    She looked down, to see a man. He had black and white hair as dark as her scales and as white as her eyes. He had eyes as crimson as her wings. He wore modern clothing and a few jewelries here and there, which brought her eyes to the rings on his fingers. They excluded very powerful presences, and that means they are incredible treasures.


    But the most noticeable thing about him was his power, it definitely exceeded hers. His presence almost made her bow to him, which is a very new thing for the thousand years old dragon king.


    "I know I''m an eye candy, but please stop staring at me. It''s very uncomfortable." The man said with a bit of playfulness in his voice.


    "¡­Why did you intrude to my domain, unknown god?" She asked.


    He chuckled, "Why, because I''m here to make you part of my peerage. You''re more magnificent than I thought, now I''m really wanting you more."


    The unknown god then snapped his fingers, and the environment suddenly changed into a grass plain, which stretched as far as the eyes could see. There was a lake, but it was no ordinary lake. The lake was as red as blood.


    The unknown god clapped his hands, and said, "I''ve created this dimension, just for you. If you join my peerage, I will give this whole dimension to you, and only I, you, and my peerage can enter it. You can have unlimited food here, look."


    With a snap of his fingers, the world was filled with giant steaks, already cooked to perfection. She salivated, her inner carnivore couldn''t help but drool at the sight of this amount of food.


    She calmed herself down, and said, still doubting him, "Do I really just have to join your peerage and nothing else?"


    "Yeah, don''t worry. I won''t call for you until we have to invade the human world and make myself god of gods." He said with a straight face, which even she was surprised about.


    Every time someone wanted to make themselves, quote on quote, "God of Gods", they would usually say it in a grander voice. But this guy just said it like nothing, as if it had no meaning to him.


    "Why would you want that? I really don''t understand how you gods think, because us dragons don''t want to pursue that kind of thing. It takes too much work." She said, quite confused.


    He frowned a bit, then chuckled, "Because it''s fun. And besides, it''s time for humans to rise. Like a benevolent god, I will bless them with powers beyond their imagination and then wage war against the supernatural world, at least that''s what I want. It''s fun to see weaker beings than myself fight over something stupid, though I could just create a really small planet at the size of a soccer ball and create small humanoid creatures to populate the place. Really isn''t that hard, I''m trying that soon."


    Tiamat just laughed, "You''re mad, but I guess it''s time to do crazy things with my long life. Get It over quick, I want to sleep soon."


    He held a pawn piece in his hand, which is strangely colored black, and before he flicked it to her head, he said, "By the way, my name is Uzumaki Hikaru. And soon, I will be known as the God of Gods."


    Then, he flicked it, and the moment it made contact with the space between her dragonic eyes, it was absorbed dramatically.


    And then, she exploded into a dark dust of particles before it slowly gathered in one place.


    The dust slowly formed into a shape of a dragon ten times larger than Tiamat.


    Tiamat''s body became darker than the twilight night, her wings became crimson red with a blue outline, her long majestic tail was then covered by the flames of black and white, and when she opened her eyes, it became dark with an outline of white.


    *ROOOOOAR!*


    She roared to the sky, and dark flames came out of her mouth.


    She turned her eyes on Hikaru, and roared in excitement, "What¡­ is this power!? This incredible power! I can feel myself growing stronger than before! I feel like I can conquer the entire world!"


    [Name: Tiamat]


    [Power Level: 1,800,000] [Previous Power Level: 18,000]

 Chapter 139 - 127: Little Planet

    (A Year Later, November 10, 2009)


    Much time has passed since his arrival in this world, and nothing has changed except for his peerage. They''ve grown stronger.


    [Name: Pestilence]


    [Power Level: 1,600,000]


    [Name: Death]


    [Power Level: 1,200,000]


    [Name: War]


    [Power Level: 2,600,000]


    [Name: Atanti-ql-Paneu]


    [Power Level: 900,000]


    [Name: Tiamat]


    [Power Level: 3,000,000]


    That''s all the members of his peerage for now, because some people just don''t want to be in his peerage, so he killed them. For example, Typhon, The Father Of All Monsters, refused his offer and insulted him, so he blasted Typhon into little pieces. He was a shitty bastard anyway.


    His peerage has grown stronger, but not that much because they are all lazy except for War. But all of them are enough to conquer the entire world already, so he''s not complaining that much. Though he punishes them from time to time whenever they disrespect him.


    Anyway, nothing major has happened yet and he''s just chilling in his own invisible castle that''s floating in the air.


    "Ah, I''m so bored!" Hikaru whined while laying on his large and comfy bed.


    His room is designed like a medieval royalty room but it''s velvet colored, so that it has that edgy feeling in it. He also has all the advanced gadgets in his room that came from the SCP Foundation. For example, he has a phone that is better than the future Iphones, having 100 Terabytes of storage, a battery that lasts for weeks to come, and is also extremely durable. You could drop it on top of a building and it won''t have a single scratch on it.


    He could also play games in it, though there are no good MMOs at the moment.


    And since there were no good MMOs, he decided to fund all of the game creators all over Japan to create the most amazing MMORPG game ever! Though, even with all the money he provided them, it will take around 4 years for it to be finished, so it sucked. If he remembered correctly, they are currently working on a virtual reality game that''s called "Sword Art Online" or something, and the virtual console, "Nerve Gear."


    The head of the project is someone named, Kayaba Akihiko, 21 years old. He''s a brilliant scientist who has made many achievements since the age of 16, so he''s the right choice for this. Though, he read Kayaba''s mind and learned that he was planning to make the game a f.u.c.k.i.n.g death game. But Hikaru was fine with that, because why not?


    Also, the reason he chose Japan is because it currently has the greatest technologies out of all the countries out there. Japan is known for being creative and he''s Japanese, so it was an easy decision to make.


    He wanted to advance time by using his Time Manipulation ability and by using the time stone, but he decided against it since it will be too easy if he did that.


    Oh, right, he hasn''t been slacking off also. He grinded for souls for many hours a day to level up, and even that wasn''t enough to get him to max level, he''s not even half-way there! It''s been a year, for f.u.c.k sake!


    ________________


    Name: Hikaru Hiroaki


    Race: Undead Deity


    Level - 770


    Exp Required For Next Level - 500 S.e.xtillion


    Attunement - 120


    Endurance - 120


    Strength - 120


    Dexterity - 120


    Int - 120


    Faith - 120


    Resistance - 120


    Souls - 100,000,000,000,000,000


    ____________


    He basically have more than enough power to destroy the entire universe in seconds, which is really bad since he still can''t quite enough control his strength, so he created another small dimension of his own and trained there to control his powers, which destroyed that dimension countless times, but he did it and won over his strength.


    Right now, he''s just relaxing a bit after such a stressful year.


    (Scene Change)


    War intensely watched the bowl of cereal in front of him, filled with coco crunch. His intense stare shook the bowl of cereal, the other people at the table with him started to get annoyed.


    A noble-looking man with dark clothing sat at the table, his eyebrows furrowed, annoyed. He gently and elegantly took a spoonful of cereal into his mouth, then said, "As best as always. Hm, I think I should add a little more sugar into it."


    The man, Pestilence, took a spoonful of sugar and put it into his cereal bowl, then he mixed it.


    A young teen wearing a gothic dress with an umbrella by her side then remarked, disgusted at his behavior, "You''re disgusting, why would you even put that much sugar? Do you have a sweet tooth or something? Be like me, I''m only eating fresh, organic food."


    "By fresh and organic, are you talking about that dense monstrosity sitting in front of you?" Pestilence pointed at the black substance in her bowl.


    "Ah, shut it! You''re just unhealthy, that''s why you are insulting my vegan food!" Lady Death harrumphed.


    He sneered as a response, "You call that vegan? That''s literally made of hydra lungs covered with kraken blood and mixed with chopped dragon heart! That''s the complete opposite of vegan!"


    She looked away bashfully, "H-Hmph! S-Sure! I-I may have used a few non-vegan meats, but that doesn''t mean it''s not vegan!"


    "What do you mean it''s still vegan!? The entire point of the word VEGAN is that you only eat plants and the likes! No matter how much little meat you have in your food, that is still not vegan! What have you been stuffing your brains into!?" Then, he realized something, and Lady Death''s face suddenly went white, "Wait¡­ are you still believing the lies in that website, facebook? Are you still attending that worthless meeting about flat earth and the free speech community?"


    She immediately started stammering, "N-No! O-Of C-Course N-Not!"


    "You are, aren''t you? This time, you''re really f.u.c.k.i.e.d," Normally, Pestilence wouldn''t use vulgar words just like that, but this time, it is completely understandable, since Hikaru hated whenever she goes to those meetings about flat earth and the free speech community, which is usually filled with self-entitled f.u.c.kers.


    "Hikaru will kill you, and revive you, and kill you again! War! Let''s go! We need to escape before Hikar¡ª" He didn''t finished his words when he felt someone behind him. He stared at the other two sitting with him at the table, "He''s behind me, isn''t he?"


    They both nodded slowly, fear was evident on their faces.


    "Did I hear that correctly, hmm? Little Death, start running, now!" Hikaru''s enraged voice resounded throughout the entire castle, even Atanti caved in when it heard that.


    War and Pestilence sneaked away immediately using their individual abilities, while Lady Death scurried away almost instantly.


    Then, Hikaru vanished in a sudden burst of speed, destroying the entire dinner room.


    (Scene Change)


    This is why he hasn''t been finding more peerage members this year, because they are as troublesome as children in steroids.


    Lady Death is so gullible that she will believe almost everything told to her by some people! Like, for some time, she believed that the Earth was flat due to some stupid people telling her it is, and even when he brought her outside of Earth''s atmosphere for her to see that Earth is not actually flat, not caring whether they are seen or not, but she just said that what she was seeing was nothing but an illusion! Absurd! F.u.c.k.i.n.g absurd!


    He has never met someone so air-headed!


    And then there was the time when she decided to rebel against him like an angsty teenager!


    He had to beat some sense into her, killing her so many times and then reviving her repeatedly.


    War is a dumb man, but not that dumb. He just lacks common sense, but he''s learning. Mainly, all he does every day is learning battle tactics and strategies to make him a better general. Then, he would spar with some of his creations that''re as strong as him. And then there''s the time he made a hole in the moon, so Hikaru had to fix it up.


    Pestilence doesn''t cost him any trouble at all, he normally just goes out of his room in the morning to eat some breakfast and then he goes back to his room to read some philosophical books, they are usually about Aristotle or Confucius.


    Pestilence can speak in all languages, but unlike Devils who are gifted with the innate ability to understand all languages, he instead learned it through reading countless books and learning them all with patience and perseverance.


    And then, there''s that indestructible lizard, who just sleeps every day and is somehow able to grow stronger while sleeping. Hikaru would usually blast the lizard with some nuclear weapons, so that it can gain an immunity towards it.


    Oh yeah, there is Tiamat, who''s also very lazy but also very strong. She is currently one of the strongest dragons out there, stronger than the two Heavenly Dragons, Ddraig and Albion, but lower than Great Red and Ophis.


    Hikaru has been intense with her training, using his creation ability. He created soulless copies of her so that she can fight them to train herself, though she would usually end up beaten up.


    Now, you might be asking, "Why can''t Hikaru just use his own creations to become his peerage members?" Well, soulless puppets aren''t really that fun. He usually wants someone with more emotions and personality. Even though he can create living beings, he can''t just get their personality and emotions quite right. He''s still studying how to create living beings that can think for themselves.


    And right now, at midnight, he is currently experimenting how to create living creatures by creating a small planet at the size of a soccer ball and putting small living human beings in it.


    Emotions and personality usually comes from the soul of a person, so he decided to rip a small piece of some random bystanders'' souls. One male and one female. He''ll recreate the legend about Adam and Eve, so it will be funny to watch.


    In his room, on his desk, there float a small planet almost similar to earth except the arrangement of the lands are different. There are only three huge continents, but they will move every million years or so. There are many plants and animals that''re in this little planet, so that the two little humans he will create won''t starve.


    With a snap of his fingers, two a.d.u.l.t microscopic humans appeared on the little planet and with a flick of his fingers, the two small pieces of souls flew towards the two microscopic bodies, thus giving them the ability to think and feel emotions.


    This time, Hikaru smirked. He shall play god for the day¡­ well, he is already a god, so that doesn''t make sense.


    (Scene Change)


    We don''t know why we''re here in this world.


    We just woke up in some kind of green land, filled with nothing but tall brown objects.


    Then, a voice rang inside our head.


    "The two of you shall be named, Adam and Eve. The one with the long hair is Eve and the one with the short hair is Adam. The two of you shall be the first two of my creations, but beware. This world that I''ve created will be full of danger. Many of my other creatures will try to kill the two of you, so try to survive as long as possible."


    "Who are you?" Adam asked like a curious little child.


    "I am your creator, your father. I created you for a reason, so do not waste it." Then, many rectangle objects appeared in front of them, "These objects are called Books, they will help you create tools to survive and how to reproduce. You just have to open them, and you will instantly understand the words inside them for I have given the two of you the ability to read, so be well to pass that to your future children."


    Then, Eve spoke up, "But father, why should we try to survive in such an unfair world? They are out there to kill us, while we just want to live!"


    "Do not question me!" This time, his voice was a lot colder.


    "You are my creations, so you will survive, trust me. I have given the two of you enough knowledge to survive with those books. This may be the first and last time we will talk, since I have other affairs to go to. If you two manage to survive well, I will give you a very special gift. Now, chop, chop, and get to work!"


    "Yes, father!" Adam said.


    Adam has pure white hair, white eyes, a well, toned, and muscular body with six packs and he''s also very hung. He is tall, around 6''5 but he doesn''t know that yet.


    Eve was the embodiment of beauty, her peerless white skin shining under the rays of the bright light on top of them, her well refined body with huge assets. She has dark hair, blue eyes, heart shaped face, and a very beautiful face.


    Eve was shaking in fear, knowing that there are creatures out there that are trying to kill them. For some reason, she could already think like a full grown woman though her mental capacity is that of a child.


    "We need to work now, Eve, if we don''t, we might lose our precious lives given to us by our father. I''ll be reading these so called "books" and you should, too." Adam said, quickly making his mind. He didn''t know why, but he felt the need to act strong so that Eve would calm down.


    It was like an instinct.


    (Scene Change)


    Hikaru made five microscopic weapons that are extremely powerful, for Adam and Eve that is. He put all of those microscopic weapons randomly around this entire little planet. Though it will be almost impossible for some microscopic creature to obtain those weapons because they are all guarded by his own creations, "Weapon Guardians".


    For now, he decided to speed up the time in that little planet around 1 year for 1 minute. The little planet is currently orbiting around his own small sun. The little planet is currently inside a transparent barrier that activates a weak illusion that shows the sun and blue sky during the day, and the moon at night.


    "Maybe that''s enough for now. I''ll be grinding for souls, for now." He said, and teleported to his bed and laid there before he fell limp. He is now killing monsters for more souls, so that he can level up more.

 Chapter 140 - 128: "Ill kill you... you monster!"

    Adam and Eve continued to hone their survival skills after their almighty father left them, and managed to read all the books their god gave to them. They became knowledgeable about procreation, smithing, farming, and many more.


    Most physical labors were given to Adam, while Eve studied this thing called "Science" through the books that their almighty father gave to them.


    Through sheer hard work, they were able to create a village with only 7 houses in it after a few years. They also made walls to protect them from the beasts that are always hunting them, but it doesn''t do much against them.


    They mastered the art of farming, thus managing to farm vegetable seeds in a few farming lands they took for themselves, and they also mastered the art of hunting and gathering, thus they were able to hunt animals like deers and capture domesticated animals to become their livestocks. It was hard for them, but it was worth it.


    Now, they just have to get to procreation, and this was easy since all they have to do is stick Adam''s p.e.n.i.s into Eve''s v.a.g.i.n.a, then everything would work itself out. They just hope that their offspring won''t have any disabilities like the thing they read on the book.


    (Note: Technically, they''re siblings but they don''t need to know that).


    And now, 60 years later, they are now weak and have around 50 children or so. They had s.e.x every year since they first did it, now they have many offsprings that can continue on the bloodline and their legacy.


    They died ten years later, and now the village has the exact population of 93 people. 30 percent of them were the result of 3 decades of inbreeding, and it would continue on like that for many years, but they didn''t have any kind of disabilities due to some tweakings Hikaru did to their DNA.


    He didn''t like the nature of humans where they get disabilities when they breed with a blood-related family. It was a useless thing, he really doesn''t get why gods would make humans like that. Though, don''t get him wrong, he''s not exactly l.u.s.ting after his sister back in his previous life¡­ well, maybe a little¡­ just a little¡­ yeah.


    Anyway, fast forward to 600 years later, kingdoms were born. There are hundreds of thousands of humans inhabiting this world now, and, well, some people didn''t exactly agree on some things, so now they learn the meaning of WAR!


    There are only two kingdoms, The Twilight Kingdom and The Sunlight Kingdom.


    They used to be one, but now they are divided into two because of some disagreeing that they had. The people of the Twilight Kingdom wanted to conquer the world since they thought that the world rightfully belonged to them, while the people of the Sunlight Kingdom just wanted to live normally and believe that the almighty made them for a greater reason other than conquering. But, in the end, they all entered the battlefields of war. It was either to be killed, or be a killer, for them.


    The war started 20 years ago, and is still going on ''till to this day.


    The people of the Sunlight Kingdom were losing the war because they were exiled from their original kingdom, Sunrise. The Sunrise Kingdom was their home when the two sides weren''t divided, now they just build tents that were made of the objects around them. They have no permanent location and are always on the move, with thousands of people in their population.


    They are all just hiding now, most of their trained men died while battling the Twilight Kingdom''s forces. They cannot fight them in their condition, so they had to run away to some place far from their enemy. You can say that they are nomads now.


    The Twilight Kingdom has basically won the war, but they weren''t content of that. They wanted to see their enemies burn, so they continued to hunt the people of Sunlight until there were no more of them.


    Hundreds of their people died every single day, it was only because of the King of the Sunlight that they were able to fend off most attacks. The King of Sunlight was the previous Crown Prince of the Sunrise Kingdom and the King of Twilight Kingdom was his father, the previous King of the Sunrise Kingdom.


    The crown prince didn''t know what happened to his father. His father used to be so kind and gentle, a person who followed their ancestors'' belief. But everything changed when his father, the king, found a certain weapon of mass malice. It was a Scythe that they found somewhere within the deepest parts of the most dangerous forest of this region.


    Countless wild beasts filled that forest, but they were curious what was inside at the time, so they went inside of that forest and found a scythe as tall as two men withs its blade longer than a tree and has a curve that shined dangerously under the light.


    But there was a very dangerous creature there, guarding the weapon. A black dragon that breathed black flames.


    He didn''t know what came over his father, but with the few hundred men they had, they charged with their roar of battle. They defeated the dragon in the end, but lost over 97 percent of the people they had.


    His father, though, wasn''t worried about that. He only cared about that weapon, that damn weapon! Maybe it was that weapon''s fault that everything went so awry? He should''ve destroyed it when he had the chance!


    (King of Sunlight POV)


    The horse, it''s extremely tired. I know you can''t go on any longer, but please bear with me. I need to escape for my people''s sake, all of them died back there and I am the only one left.


    I begged my horse not to stop, for I am the only hope of my forsaken people. God, almighty, if you''re there, I beg thee for help! I am their hope, but you are my only hope! I cannot escape this siege without your help, God, Father, Almighty! Anything will do!


    Not for long, my horse collapses on the ground. I got up to feel something hurting right around my right leg. I looked down, only to see my feet broken.


    ''I can''t die like this!'' I said in my thoughts, despair becoming so apparent.


    I limped just to run away without turning my head back to my horse. I felt sorry for her since she has been with me since I was but a snot-nosed brat, but I can''t give up now. I am my people''s hope, I will avenge their deaths!


    The forest seemed so calm, so quiet. There were no animals, only the wind rustling by the trees, my heavy breaths, and my right leg being dragged on the ground by me as I desperately tried to run away. They''re there, my enemies, my father and his men.


    I didn''t really expect for my father to chase me and my people in person, but I guess reality is often surprising.


    *gasp* *gasp*


    Blood trickled down my face along with my sweat. Pain''s evident all over my body, but I didn''t give up. I could never betray my people''s trust!


    I hear them, their horses neighing, their swords being brandished, and my father ordering his men to find me.


    I quickly hid behind one of the trees, hoping that my father would never find me. I tightly gripped the sword on my waist, not lowering my guard. I hear their horses running on the paved road, then it becomes quiet. Deathly whispers of silences covered my ears, my heart thumping loudly.


    Then, I heard breathing right beside me. My heart tightened as I saw my father''s face right beside me, with a smile that sent chills to my spine. His dark, obsessed eyes frightened me but I quickly pulled out my sword but he was faster. A blade so sharp was on my neck, it was long and curved. I saw that it came from my left, the Scythe!


    "What are you doing here, Roddrick?" My father''s chilling voice sent another chill to my spine, "Come with me, my son, let us return to our dearest home. Your mother is waiting for you."


    I felt anger rushing in my body, how dare he say that!?


    "King Farnock, Monarch of Twilight, haven''t you done enough? You have slaughtered my people! You butchered them like animals, and now you talk like my mother''s alive!? I know what you did! You killed my mother! That''s one of my main motives why I rebelled, don''t you remember!?"


    My fathe-- no, this monster smiled more widely than before, as he said, "What are you saying, my little bolt?" Bolt was my nickname, he made that when he saw my blonde head, "Your mother''s alive and well in our home, she''s waiting for you to return~! If you follow me back home, I''ll forget all~ about this rebellious attitude of yours~."


    I need to escape, he''s going to kill me!


    But he has me by the neck, he could kill me anytime he wants.


    Please, Almighty Father, if you are there, help me! I''ve been loyal to you this whole time! I''ve been praying every single day! At least, just for this one time, answer my prayers!


    I begged and begged him for help, but no response came. I felt dread covering my body, then I felt the scythe being retreated. The moment I felt that the scythe was no longer right by my neck, I immediately stood up and bolted away from this monster I used to call my father and his men.


    But something hit the back of my neck, and I fell to the ground, slowly losing my consciousness. In one moment, I saw his face gazing down at me and his scythe being held by his left hand tightly. His face is that of a smiling devil, not a single shred of kindness hid in his eyes of deep abyss.


    "I''m sorry that I''ll have to take you back home by force but bear with me, Roddrick. Soon, we''ll be back home and your mother we''ll be waiting, just like always." I heard him say before everything went dark.


    (??? Days Later)


    How many days has it been since I''ve been put in this hellhole?


    Every day the monster I used to call as father tortured me. My mother''s remains were just right beside me, also chained up. It was dark in here, not a single shred of light was given for my eyes to feast on. I haven''t gazed at the light for so many days, ah, how I missed it. The light of the sun, the fresh breeze of the windy plains against my face, and my people who laughed brightly and happily beside me. Now, all of that is gone. Not a single chance have I been given since the day I have been captured to take it all back.


    I just wanted peace, was that so hard to ask? I never craved for war, my only desire was for my people to live happily with bright smiles. But he took it all away!! I will kill him! That monster that hides within my father''s skin, I will slaughter him! I will not leave a single piece of him intact! And then, after I''m finished with him, I''ll kill everyone who followed that monster! Every single one of his followers will die by my hands!


    I will not leave a single one alive!!!


    I became like a mindless beast, drowned in vengeance, l.u.s.ting after my enemies'' blood. All of my faith for the almighty, gone, only hatred remained.


    My despair became none, my fear and sorrow turned me to a monster, just like him.


    (End POV)


    Hikaru had just gone back from his 11 hours of grinding, when he felt something wrong within the small planet he created. He felt a large amount of malice continuously being exerted by someone. Now, he won''t be worried if this came from a normal person since he has felt many kinds of malice in his life, but this is being released by someone who''s a million times smaller than a regular person, that''s why it''s slightly worrying.


    Without delay, he took a closer look at the person releasing that malice.


    (Roddrick''s POV)


    He tried struggling out of his chains, to no avail. His legs, arms, even his neck were chained. Countless whip slashes in his body would''ve been visible if it weren''t because of the darkness surrounding him.


    Even though his rage consumed him, his body failed to do the same. He was, undoubtedly, weakened to the point that a mere child is capable of killing him. Back then, when he was the crown prince, he was untested in combat for he spent his life honing his battle technique. Not even the generals of his father could defeat him in a one on one combat, but now? Look how pathetic he is, how WEAK he is!


    He didn''t like being weak because he had seen numerous brave men dying while fighting the most dangerous of beasts, like tigers, lions, giant lizards, dragons, and even a simple deer is capable of killing them. This was a harsh world they live in, where thousands of dangerous beasts lurk every corner of the world.


    Being weak in this world means death.


    But even when he was one of the strongest, his mother was there to curve his pride. He became a proper man because of his mother, then when she died in his father''s hands, he led his people away from the followers of the monster he used to call his father.


    His struggles slowly got weaker, as his body loses its strength. He no longer had any faith that his god will save him, only his hatred burned weakly.


    Then he heard it.


    "Hmm, so hundreds of thousands of small humans have been created in just 11 hours? Fascinating, Adam and Eve surely bred like rabbits."


    Who are you?


    "Me? You''ve called me by many names, but you can call me Hikaru."


    Please elaborate, I''m tired of vague sentences.


    "Hmm, then you can call me, The Almighty."


    The¡­ Almighty¡­?


    "Yes, I am the one who created all of you, well, at least most of the creating part was your ancestors'' doing. I''ve just been idling around."


    Have you been listening to my prayers?


    "No, as I have told you, I''ve just been idling around." Find authorized novels in , faster updates, better experience, Please click #%22i''ll-kill-you...-you-monster!%22_51965662234468221 for visiting.


    Huh¡­ then, are my prayers to you just some worthless performance?


    "Oh, no, it isn''t. Your prayers weren''t just some worthless performance, you proved that you have been faithful to me from the start. Like it or not, you are my child. Everybody on this planet I''ve created is my child."


    Then, would you count it as betrayal that I''ve lost all my faith in you?


    "No, no, because it''s also my fault that you became like that. But, even though I have not been a responsible god, I''ll give you a single wish. Anything you want, I''ll grant it."


    I silently stared at the ground of my prison, I couldn''t believe what was happening. Am I really talking to my god? Or am I just having crazy delusions? What is it?


    *Chuckles* "No, you are not having a crazy delusion. You are talking to me, so state your wish now."


    Then, if this is indeed true, I want power, more than enough power to overthrow my father, rid this world of its corruption, and build everything from scratch! Almighty Father, God, The One, grant me this wish and I shall do everything for you! Even if you ask me to kill myself, I''ll do it just for this wish!


    "Jeez, fine, you don''t have to say it like that. I''m cringing here, you know? Anyway here."


    Slowly, I was filled with overwhelming power. It surged so much that everything around me exploded in smithereens!


    I felt my previously weakened body grow stronger than before!


    But even then, the only thing in my head is vengeance, nothing more.


    I smile in insanity as my eyes become bloodshot, "I''ll kill you¡­ you monster!!"

 Chapter 141 - 129: Ramen

    "Wow, look at him go. He''s destroying landscapes with the power I gave him, I hope he saved enough women to procreate. Well, not my problem anymore." With a wave of his hand, he transferred the small planet and its sun and moon in a dimension he just created, isolating it forever.


    He decided to fill that small planet he created with mana, and left a law that humans can only use magic and not science. With science, they can f.u.c.k things up since, even though he hates to admit it, science has far more potential than magic in terms of f.u.c.k.i.n.g shits up.


    They can just use magic for some basic, everyday stuff like cooking or laundry. They will never evolve into a civilization full of science and shit, they will have magic! With mana, they will be able to use it far more safely than science because of one thing; it''s less complex. Without that much complexity in it, magic can either become a dangerous weapon or a very versatile "world" saving tool. He is sure that the microscopic humans he created would use mana for war, but he honestly doesn''t care as long as they don''t create a spell that is as powerful as a nuclear bomb in a microscopic world, or a microscopic human similar to that.


    Roddrick, even with all of his power, is still a mortal and thus would just be able to live up to 80 to 120 years. That''s one of the laws he put just earlier in that world he created, so that no one would be able to figure out more of the nature of magic.


    Also, no microscopic human he created would be able to become as strong as Roddrick because that is also one of his natural laws put in place.


    Anyway, he''ll wait for a month to see what happens in that small world.


    (Scene Change)


    Pestilence stood numbly as his legs started to wobble, his eyes wide, his face, paler than normal, and he was sweating.


    Why is he like that you ask? Well that is because of the large dragon in their training hall. It''s a bright green western dragon with a tail as long as the tallest of trees, wings spread afar like east to west, and a mane as green as the twilight leaves. But there''s one small detail in the dragon''s chest, it was carved out. There was no heart in there, it was hollowed.


    "You killed Midgardsormr for your breakfast!? Are you f.u.c.k.i.n.g mental!?" He broke out of his stupor and yelled at Lady Death.


    She just looked away with her arms crossed haughtily, "Hmph, it''s not like anyone is going to miss that overgrown dragon. And besides, he insulted me and called me a child."


    "That''s no reason to kill one of the five dragon kings, you dumb, falt-chested, loli-like woman! You know he doesn''t want us to attract attention right now for amus.e.m.e.nt purposes, right?" Honestly, Pestilence cannot take Lady Death''s attitude any longer. He would''ve prefered her as nothing but a stupid and ignorant child rather than this haughty woman.


    The gothic woman''s eyes suddenly went enraged and butted her head against Pestilence, and screeched, "Huh!? What did you just say you rage quitter, d.i.c.k sucking, gay-looking, emo-looking piece of shit of a man!?"


    "I said what I meant, you entitled bitch!" He fired back.


    "Ho, do you really wanna go at it, f.u.c.k.i.n.g prick!?" She asked "nicely".


    His eyes glinted dangerously as he said, "Remind me who''s stronger between the two of us? HMM!?"


    *Woosh!*


    Then, as their individual auras exploded, War came in between them and then pushed them all with a quick palm attack.


    *Bam!* *Bam!*


    They both crashed into the walls of the large training hall, with War barely even tired. His large figure then turned around as he said, "Stop fighting, or I''ll get serious. The two of you know the consequences, right?" He said that last sentence with a glare, then walked away.


    Pestilence got up with a quick push against the ground, and Lady Death just stood up like nothing.


    "Jeez, you really don''t know how to hold back, don''t you, you ruffian?" Lady Death said while picking up her gothic-designed umbrella.


    Pestilence just said nothing and teleported to his room, he''s probably not going outside of his room for a while. This happens when he''s in an extremely bad mood, which is what''s currently happening. It would be hard to pull him out of his room, since he would lash out if someone even touches him in the fewest of seconds.


    Meanwhile, news about Midgardsormr''s disappearance, especially because Asgards have always been keeping a close eyes on the giant dragon since the moment it was birthed. Even Odin was shocked when he heard that the large dragon that only slept lazily deep in the oceans, disappeared so suddenly.


    Has one of the factions captured the young Dragon King? Or was it killed?


    Many things were going on inside his head, when he heard from one of the servants of the dragon king that Midgardsormr was confronted by a young and gothic looking girl and was defeated in battle without the young girl even bathing an eye.


    He wouldn''t have believed the servant''s words, if Forseti, The God of Truth in Asgard, hadn''t confirmed it for him. If there was indeed someone like that, then the only one that comes to his mind is the Ouroboros Dragon, Ophis, but why would someone as powerful as her have any use for a dragon weaker than her? If it''s not Ophis, then there is no culprit he could think of.


    Maybe someone used transformation magic to hide their identity? Yeah, that could be it. He''ll look into this incident a little further. If there is indeed someone as powerful as someone like that, then the ranking might change soon. There are only a few beings that could defeat a dragon king so easily.


    (Scene Change)


    (With Hikaru, 10 Hours Later)


    Looking at the dinner table, Hikaru''s eyebrow couldn''t stop twitching.


    He turned his eyes at the two by the table with him, and asked, "So, why are we having pizza for dinner again, hmm? This is the 6th time this week!"


    On the table were 6 boxes of pizzas, with each of them having one flavor.


    War scratched his head sheepishly, and apologized, "I''m sorry master, I don''t know how to cook, in fact, none of us can cook a decent meal. We always had servants back then to cook our food for us."


    Hikaru then snapped, "What have you all been doing for the past year!? Can''t you learn a skill or two!? What''s so hard about that, huh!?" He calmed himself, and just sighed, "I don''t really have to eat, so just enjoy yourselves."


    He stood up, and was about to leave, when he turned back to say, "And also, I will be changing the destination of this floating castle of mine to a dimension I created earlier. All of you won''t be able to leave, since ONE OF YOU has been causing trouble outside. Even though I''m strong, there are still beings out there that could completely obliterate me, like the species of celestial beings I''ve just found, the Celestialsapiens."


    Both the member of his peerage were confused, evidently showing it on their faces. There should be no beings capable of defeating their master, yet there is a whole race of them?


    "Celestialspaiens? Can you please elaborate more, master?" War asked.


    Hikaru''s face then turned serious as he explained to them what they are, "They are creatures capable of destroying and creating an entire universe in a matter of seconds. They can transfer all living beings in this universe into a replica universe and no one would notice a thing, that''s how powerful they are. I can probably beat one celestialsapien in a one on one duel, but I''ll still be killed. Though, I can always revive."


    The two listened attentively, trying to understand more of these mysterious beings.


    "I don''t know much about them since I''ve just recently discovered them, but I know that they have are more developed than any civilizations in the entire universe, maybe even pass other universes! Even though we are still neutral with them, that is only for now. They are not aware of our existence. And I believe that there are other more powerful beings in this universe other than them, and these powerful beings are even more dangerous than the celestialspaiens, even though they are weaker, because of one thing, most of them are conquerors and warlords in the currently ongoing galactic wars between five type-3 civilizations. They may not pose a danger to me, but all of them can shred any of you to the last atoms."


    "Wait, galactic wars?" Lady Death said, confused.


    Hikaru nodded, "Galactic Wars are just like the wars here on Earth, but in a bigger and greater scale. Each foot soldier of theirs can destroy a planet in less than a second, some can even destroy a solar system. That''s why I''ve been experimenting on how to create a civilization so that I could have my own army of super powerful beings capable of shredding the entire universe to its last atoms, but it''s been mostly failures since I started but I''m getting there."


    "Also, they are just like us, they have emotions and sentience, that''s why they are more of a danger to us than the celestialspaiens; they are far more ambitious and greedier, while celestialspaiens just live their lives in a very peaceful manner."


    Then, his eyes became colder than before, and said, "That''s why you guys shouldn''t cause any trouble unless those galactic warlords and conquerors notice our existence. We are anonymous at the moment, but that''s because no one in this world has managed to build any technologies on par with type-3 or type-4 civilizations. Though, I suppose you two don''t know what type-3 and type-4 civilizations are, right?" They nodded, "Then get your ass up and study all about science!"


    He promptly left, leaving them in a state of shock from the knowledge they''ve just been given. Beings capable of destroying the universe and defeating their master with ease? Heck, they couldn''t even touch their master when they had a spar with him! Don''t even talk about universe-level super beings, they can''t even travel in the known galaxy without any protection towards the coldness of outer space!


    The two of them suddenly had the motivation to train to grow stronger, so that they won''t just be some kind of ants when those beings show up!


    (With Hikaru)


    With but a snap of his fingers, the entire castle he made disappeared from this dimension and was transferred in a dimension he created. He was left alone, floating on top of the base of the SCP Foundation with his black overcoat fluttering in the night wind.


    He discovered the celestialsapiens prior this month. He hasn''t made contact with any of them with the fear that he might start something he can''t control. Yes, he also feel emotions like fear, he''s not an unfeeling killing machine.


    Right now, his only goal is to grow stronger, so that he could match those beings in terms of power. He''s just 1 level away, 1 level away from surpassing any being in this universe in strength, though it''s getting harder grinding for souls. He has to fight enemies in the system almost as strong as him, so that he could earn more souls faster to grow stronger.


    It''s hard, but he can manage. It''s just that, he would die sometimes and lose all the souls he grinded for many days. If he didn''t lose the souls he grinded back then, he would''ve been far stronger now but noooooo, he just had to die because of a single mistake!


    Sometimes, he would be so mad when he lost his souls that he will travel in space and just destroy some planets or solar systems, and they would sometimes have living creatures on them. Imagine losing 500 Quintillion Souls that you grinded for weeks, and lost it all because you tripped on some debris in the arena and got yourself beheaded. That''s just f.u.c.k.i.n.g bad, am I right?


    Anyway, he''s going to find some beings that has potential to become stronger to join his peerage. Maybe he should kidnap some gods to join his side? Nah, almost all of them are more arrogant than he is. He''s too lazy to fix their attitudes.


    Oh right! He''s floating on top of a facility with thousands of information about strong beings! He also noticed that there''s a strong aura hiding itself inside a dimension box within the facility. How could he forget about them?


    In less than microseconds, he vanished in thin air.


    (Time Skip)


    It''s been 10 days since he tried to find someone to join his peerage, and he failed in most parts. First of all, he is very cautious, so no one can join his peerage without absolute loyalty towards him, and second, there are only a few creatures on this planet that can fulfill his requirements for a peerage member. They must be someone who could grow as strong as War, Pestilence, Lady Death, Atanti, or Tiamat. And they must be as loyal as well. There''s also the fact that they must not insult him before they join his peerage, or they will die a very terrible death.


    Anyway, he is currently staying in a hotel in Kyoto, Japan. There are many Yokais here, some of them are cute and some of them are just downright horrifying. Nurarihyon also exists here, though he''s old and already weak. But he has a grandson who might have enough potential to join his peerage, which is great. As long as he doesn''t insult him, that is.


    You see, most "powerful" beings insult someone before even knowing who they are. That''s what always happens to him when he tries asking them to join his peerage, and all of them died with their souls destroyed. He also noticed that he already has a name in the supernatural world, they call him by the title of "Crimson Demon" because he has been killing various "powerful" beings all around the world because they insulted him. He has noticed that he gets very irritated when someone tries to hurt his pride, which is now bad since he can''t control his killing spree.


    It must be because he ate Chaortos and took on some of her sins, wrath and pride. And the frightening thing is? Many of the seven deadly sins might appear in him soon, since greed has been more evident lately due to the fact that he had been gathering large amounts of money for no reason at all.


    He cannot control his deadly sins, and that is horrifying to think about since with this much power in his hands, he could probably wipe out the entire known galaxy if he goes out of control one day. This must be controlled.


    He sat at the table in the restaurant in the hotel, and many other guests were there too. Most of them are just rich people, and some are just people who had enough money to check-in a very expensive hotel. Well, neither of them are his problem as long as they don''t bother him.


    The restaurant each serves people one room just for them, and in that room is a complete set of heater, tatami floor, and a table where he sat.


    He sips from the cup of tea the waiter gave him, and it is delicious. Now, he doesn''t need any sustenance like food but many meals out there are just superb, like burgers or hotdog in a bun. This expensive restaurant has a very delicious ramen, and ramen always reminds him of his wife, Azumi. She''s so addicted to ramen that she would never survive a day without one.


    He ordered the ramen they served him, which cost him around 12,000 Yen. This ramen might just be the most expensive ramen in Japan, since he has never seen a ramen that cost that much in his life.


    While waiting inside the room the restaurant gave him, he just played around with his powers, bending time and space around him from time to time just to pass time. Then, he smacks himself in the head, which caused a loud shockwave throughout the room, because he remembered that he could just multiply the time all around this planet so that he could have his ramen faster.


    So, he did it with a snap of his finger. And milliseconds passed, a waitress, who''s wearing a yukata and geta, opened the sliding door with a tray in her hands.


    "I''m so sorry for being late, there are just so many customers this night." The waitress said while taking off her geta so that it won''t dirty the tatami floor, then entered the room.


    "It''s fine, I didn''t wait that much." Hikaru said, smiling towards the waitress, who blushed while putting down the tray on top of the table.


    Hikaru observed the ramen, then was joyed when he saw that it was perfect in every way, almost resembling Teuchi''s ramen back in Konoha.


    He took a large wad of cash stacked in 10,000 Yen notes, and gave it to the waitress, "Here, I''ll give you my tip. Share this with the chef who cooked this ramen."


    The waitress hesitated, then asked, "S-Sir, we don''t accept tips here. If you would like, you could just praise our chef."


    "But you need this, right?" He asked, and the waitress gulped while looking at the stack of 10,000 Yen in his hand.


    "Your little sister is in the hospital, your father is a drunkard, and your mother left you when you were very young, aren''t I right?" He said calmly, and the waitress was shocked.


    "Don''t worry, just accept this tip, and don''t forget to share this with the chef who cooked this." Hikaru said nonchalantly, as if he didn''t just read someone''s mind.


    Even though she was very hesitant, and a little bit cautious, she still took the money. It was for her sister, even though the man earlier just described the things in her life very accurately. That man might just be some crime lord who knew about her, but even then, she''s all out of option at this point. She doesn''t have anyone to lean her back on, especially her drunkard of a father. He is lazy because he got his leg amputated due to some accident in a construction site, always drinks alcohol every day, but still, he was a very good father towards her and her little sister. He is still kind; he never orders her around but he just drinks his life away. She''s sad about that fact.


    Meanwhile, Hikaru didn''t care about her life situation. He was just impressed at the ramen in front of him that he just gave out 1,000,000 Yen without thinking. Still, that money doesn''t even take a percent in his stash of money, in fact, you won''t even notice that it decreased.


    He ate the ramen slowly to savor its taste. It was almost as delicious as Teuchi''s ramen that he might just hire the chef who cooked this ramen.


    As he ate the ramen, slurping noodles every now and then, he didn''t notice something, or someone, falling towards where he was at light speed.


    The unknown entity then pierced into the roof of the room, directly towards Hikaru''s table. The entity then crashed onto Hikaru''s table, specifically where the ramen is, and the ramen was ruined, splattering to the ground.


    Hikaru sat there, a little surprised, then reality hit him when he saw the table in front of him was no longer there and instead, someone who''s inside a child-size silver armor with bright blue metal-like wings. The person inside the armor revealed their face when the helmet disappeared, showing a child with silver hair and hazel eyes.


    "Damn it Azazel, couldn''t you have hit me a little softer?" The child said, nonchalant about breaking into someone''s peaceful dinner.


    Hikaru had veins bulging in his forehead, which is strange since he is an undead, and then grabbed the brat''s head from behind, almost crushing it.


    "Ho, you''ve got some guts for disturbing my dinner. So, how do you want to die?"

 Chapter 142 - 130: Illusion

    He had never felt fear before, only hatred and the thrill of fighting. He hated his father, but developed a love for fighting after going through several life and death situations. Fear was irrelevant, he ignored that feeling whenever he wanted because fear is for weaklings only. Fear is something that will only make you weak and ignorant, just like how most beings in this world fear the unknown. That very same fear will turn them into irrational beings, but why now of all time he has to feel it?


    Hikaru''s eyes dangerously shined as he gripped the back of the boy''s head tightly, almost crushing it in his hand. The boy had no idea why he felt so much fear towards this unknown man when he didn''t even know him. He tried to struggle his way out, but only resulted in futility as no matter how many times he tried to hurt the man''s hand so that he would let go of him, it was just like hitting a titanium vault with his bare hands. He wouldn''t budge.


    "You know," The man spoke, "nobody ever had the guts to ruin my meal except for my wife, and yet here you are, stomping on my ramen. So, let me ask you again, how would you like to die?"


    "Tch, I don''t even know you! Why would you even kill me!?" The boy asked, trying to buy time for his mentor to come. His mentor must be hovering around here, waiting for him to return after punching him, but his mentor will realize that he''s taking too much time to return and would go down to help.


    Or, he could just do this, "You old geezer! Come and save your apprentice for f.u.c.k sake! I''m getting killed here!" The silver haired boy yelled out of desperation.


    Hikaru only snorted at the boy''s futile attempts, and said, "Hmph, no matter who your master is, you won''t be able to escape your fate. Now, die!"


    *Splat!*


    With a quick tightening of grip, he crushed the skull of the silver haired boy. The boy''s body limply fell down on the now destroyed ground with blood spurting out of his neck. He then reversed time around the room, and within a few milliseconds, the ruined room from earlier became good as new!


    But of course, the boy was still dead even though he regained his head. He put the soul of the boy in a jar and was about to put the body into his storage box to revive him later and torture him, when he felt someone teleport inside the room. They also put a barrier that covered the entire room.


    "I don''t know who you are, but killing my apprentice is the same as starting a war with me and my faction." A voice full of silent rage sounded behind him.


    Hikaru turned around, and he saw a man standing in front of him with the door behind the man. He is a tall man appearing to be in his twenties with an average build, black hair, golden bangs and black goatee. He wore a sun flowered shirt and a pair of shorts. He looks like he is on a vacation, which is understandable because this hotel has an artificial beach built inside it.


    [Name: Azazel]


    [Power Level: 20,000]


    Hikaru already figured who this guy was the moment his eyes landed on him, because he had stalked the entire fallen faction, devil faction, and angel faction before to obtain information about their power levels and how he should put a [Tier] in them, but he has to throw away that Power Level Tier List because he just recently discovered the existence of beings with billions of power levels. He''ll remake his Tier List later, after he stalks the cosmic beings.


    "Azazel, huh? Didn''t know you trained a brat." Hikaru said, really uninterested whether a war would happen or not.


    Azazel narrowed his eyes, and said, "You''re acting so nonchalant about this. Are you so confident that you can take on an entire faction on your own?"


    "Well, yeah."


    "What faction are you from? Devils? Angels? Or from the Shinto Faction? No matter, I''ll find out anyway." Azazel was angry, but he''s not the type to just suddenly lash out. No, he takes this calmly and manipulatively. He isn''t the leader of Grigori for no reason.


    Hikaru actually didn''t care. If he wanted to, he could just wipe out every fallen angel that exists on this planet within seconds. But since he is not a mindless murderer (Yeah, keep telling yourself that bud) he''ll try to compromise by striking a deal.


    He then said with his mouth having a slowly growing smile, "I know you don''t want war, Azazel. Nobody, likes war, well, maybe except for some. But the thing is, you''re tired. You''re already so old. How old are you? A couple thousands? So, let me strike you a deal."


    Azazel isn''t new to this kind of game, but he honestly has no idea what this guy is striking a deal for. What is his goal? Is he afraid of starting a war?


    "No, I''m not afraid of starting a war. I just don''t like killing millions just to do something. I already have so much weighing on my conscience." Hikaru said.


    What the? Can he read¡ª


    "Yes, I can read the minds of everybody, no matter how powerful they are."


    Well, this is embarrassing.


    The atmosphere in the room went from "Super intense shit" to "Shit, this is too awkward!"


    "Ahem, so what''s the deal you''re gonna make?" Azazel just ignored the awkward atmosphere and just asked him.


    "In return for reviving this boy and giving him back to you, you''ll have to join my peerage." Hikaru said, simply smiling because he couldn''t contain his excitement.


    Azazel looked surprised when he heard that, then said, "So you are a devil!"


    Hikaru shook his head and had an expression of disgust as if he just heard the most revolting sentence ever, "No, I am not a devil. I''m not that weak. I am a God, and these chess pieces are just evil pieces that I took from a high-class devil and modified it into my own. These things work differently than their pieces, but yet, the same."


    "Oh¡­" Azazel muttered, taking a mental note that this guy is definitely more prideful than the original Sin of Pride himself. He decided to weigh the pros and cons of becoming a member of his peerage, when he suddenly realized that he doesn''t have enough information about what will happen to him once he becomes one of his peerage members.


    "Hmm, there are many pros and cons of becoming a member of my peerage," Hikaru said, gaining Azazel''s attention, "firstly, you will grow ten times stronger than before. Your strength, agility, endurance, and the amount of mana you have will also be multiplied. And then, you will gain the ability to partially control darkness. And, by becoming a member of my peerage, you will gain access to thousands upon thousands of my weapons that could destroy an entire world or my armors that can block an attack from an asteroid ten times the size of this planet."


    Wow, he''s drooling just thinking about being in his peerage. Especially those equipment, he could collect some of them and do research to create more of them. But there''s still one question lingering in his head; is this deal legit?


    "Oh, don''t worry about that," Hikaru said after hearing his thoughts, "you''ll surely receive those things if you become a member of my peerage. And not only that, you will also take back your apprentice! Don''t you want that? Power within your finger tip, capable of ruling ALL three factions, and possibly becoming even more powerful than the one who created the current you! Think about it!"


    Azazel was already thinking to accept the offer, when he noticed something very odd, "Don''t try enticing me with sweet words, I am thousands of years old! I know this game of sweet words because I played it with Lucifer many years ago!" He was angry, not at Hikaru but to himself for almost falling into this guy''s sweet trap.


    Hikaru looked at him strangely, and said, "Are you mental? I am just stating facts of what will happen once you become a member of my peerage. I don''t use ''sweet words'', I''m too lazy to even bother doing that. But hey, if you don''t like being in my peerage, you know you could just die, right?"


    Suddenly, the surrounding changed. Everything became chaotic. It was bright, the brightest he has ever been. He felt the extreme heat hotter than Amaterasu''s fire and he felt his body being burned alive. He was dying but slowly.


    "What''s happening!?" He panicked, because he has never been this close to dying. Even in the war between the three factions, he has never been this close to dying, ever!


    "This is the sun of another solar system." A voice above him said.


    Azazel looked up and saw the same guy, Hikaru, who offered him to be a member of his peerage.


    "What have you done!?" He yelled.


    Hikaru replied with an answer, "I took away all your powers, strength, and even your wings." As a proof of that, he took out a small glass container, containing a dark light, orange ball, and a small twelve set of wings, "I am absolute, that''s why I took away everything that made you ''Azazel''. The biblical god should''ve chosen his people well, for I am disappointed that no one from the supernatural world has realized that all of you are being controlled by higher beings, I.e the Gods that I know."


    Azazel knew he really has no way out of this. He felt no strength to even lift his arms, and his body is slowly being burned alive by the fire of the sun. He thought he would have escaped this sun if he had all of his powers, but he realized that he would''ve died as well because this guy exists.


    But, before his last moments, he wanted to ask him something, "Why are you doing this?"


    Hikaru thought about it, and said, "Hmm, no reason, really. I guess it''s because you offended me somehow? Heh, it doesn''t matter what my reasons are because I am powerful. Listen well, as long as I am this strong, I can do anything I f.u.c.k.i.n.g want to. Only a select few can harm me, and only one race in this universe can kill me! I stay in that world that you call Earth because I want to rule it, for them to obey me, and for them to become stronger! I want to raise my own army of super beings that could annihilate any galactic empire! And why am I doing this? Because¡­ it''s fun."


    Even his brother, Lucifer, wasn''t like this bad. It''s like he thinks of other beings other than himself as lowly, worthless, and pathetic. This god, this guy, is insane. Even "crazy" isn''t enough of a word to explain just how insane he is.


    "Don''t get me wrong, Azazel. I don''t look down at other creatures, I only hate their weakness. But that weakness is what made them cunning and master strategies. They could survive for millions of years even without any super strength or magic, because they are weak. I was weak once, so I know how they feel. That''s why, even after dying for countless times, I continue to persevere because I no longer want to be weak. Even now, when I''m this strong, I am still weaker than other beings that could create a multiverse with a snap of their fingers. I am weak, but I''m not that strong either. In the end, it''s just because they''re stronger than me and I''m weaker than them." Hikaru clarified.


    Azazel could no longer hear his words, because he had sunk deep into the ocean of flame that is the sun.


    A disappointed sigh came out of Hikaru''s mouth, and then, with a snap of his fingers, everything became normal and he returned to the restaurant of the hotel with Azazel having no visible injury in sight. But he was lying on the floor with his eyes widely open but he was unconscious due to the shock he felt when he "died" in that sun.


    "He couldn''t even survive an illusion of that level, really now, how absolutely pathetic." Hikaru sighed, then grabbed the white haired boy''s corpse, and healed his body back to perfect shape, then put his soul back.


    The boy woke up half-an-hour later in a hotel bedroom with a headache. He suddenly felt something missing within him, and then he noticed that the divine dividing was gone. His sacred gear was gone! He couldn''t hear the dragon''s voice anymore! What happened to him!?


    He felt a little dizzy in the head, maybe it has something to do with his sacred gear disappearing?


    "Oh, so you''re awake." He heard a familiar voice, he looked around and saw the familiar face of his master coming out of the bathroom, freshly bathed. But there was something strange about him. For example, he no longer has blonde bangs and now has pitch black hair. He doesn''t have his goatee anymore and seems to have gotten younger. His amber eyes changed into eyes as black as his wings.


    "Geezer, I¡ª"


    "I know, your sacred gear is gone, right?" Azazel said.


    "Do you know something about it?" Vali asked.


    Azazel scratched the back of his head, and said, "Well, we have joined someone''s peerage."


    That took a few seconds for his words to sink into Vali''s head, then the boy shouted, "What!? What do you mean WE!? You know I don''t like serving anyone, especially a devil!"


    "Relax, he''s not a devil. He''s more of an evil incarnate who can play with anyone''s life easily." Azazel casually said.


    Then, a can of a soda hit the back of his head and a loud shockwave occurred that shook some of the items in the room. Azazel was completely fine, except for the small bump that was created after the can hit his head.


    "Who said you can call me an ''evil incarnate''. I''m the kindest person you would ever see in your lifetime."


    "Ouch! That hurt, you know!" He yelled at someone from his left, and Vali turned his head to his left to see someone coming in from the balcony.


    "Not my problem." It was a guy who seems to be in his twenties with long black hair with some strands of white hair around his head, red eyes, pale skin, and around 5 ''11 in height. He wore a white top and black pants with a black overcoat.


    The guy looked at him, and said, "You''re awake, good. Your master over here decided to join my peerage after he saw how powerful and awesome I am. And since you are his apprentice, it is only your duty to follow your master''s steps. That''s why you''re currently one of my pawns, so be happy. I don''t waste my pieces on ungrateful people. Anyway, you''re gonna train with War tomorrow."

 Chapter 143 - 131: A Long Ass Chapter

    (A Month Later)


    *Clang* *Clang* *Clang*


    Sparks flew everywhere whenever Vali tried to hit War with his black spear.


    Vali wore the scorched armor of the black knights of Lordran. Two horns protrude from the top of the helm, designs so neat of the chest plate, the gauntlets let him move his hands as free as if he never wore it, and leggings that made metallic sound in every step.


    Like an experienced warrior, Vali, with his amazing speed, suddenly appeared in front of War with his spear ready to stab the older warrior in front of him with the force of a meteor! But War blocked it with the just the tip of his finger, stopping the spear instantly.


    Yet, Vali was not finished yet. He jumped away from War and then shot up, almost crashing to the ceilings. Using the ceilings of the training room, he then used all the forced his legs could muster and pushed himself to go towards War with extreme speed that it left a shockwave that almost destroyed the ceilings! With his spear pointing towards War, he plunged the spear into War''s chest that''s covered by a golden armor which had the helm designed like a lion.


    "Heup!"


    The shockwave that occurred upon contact between them destroyed the floor and everything around them, yet War simply took the blow head on, not even flinching for a second. He pointed at Vali''s forehead with his hand while the younger warrior''s spear clashed upon his armor, and flicked Vali''s forehead and then the white haired boy flew across the training room, only stopping when he crashed into the titanium wall.


    A deep hole was created in the wall, and smoke filled Vali''s vision. When he finally came out of that hole, he was holding his head as if he was in pain. He took off the helm and threw it away out of haste, just to ease the pain he was feeling.


    "Aaaaaahh! Shit, this hurts way too much! Couldn''t you have been a little softer, you f.u.c.k.i.n.g old man!" Vali yelled a stream of curses towards War, and the older warrior only stayed stoic.


    From across the room, War only said, "You are a warrior, am I right? Then you can take at least this much. The Spartans suffered much more than this when they were your age, and they were only humans. Even when their bloodline had all but ended, their strength is still feared even among the supernatural. They were only humans, yet you can''t even do a quarter of what they can do when they were your age. How pathetic!"


    "Shut it! I am already stronger than any Ultimate-Class being! Can''t I just take a break? I''ve been training for almost a month now!" Vali complained, after immediately shortening the distance between him and War just after a couple of steps.


    "A warrior does not complain! A warrior can take on everything that life throws at him! You are a warrior!! War said, trying to at least shut Vali''s complains.


    The white haired boy only muttered curses. He then readied his spear, its edge shining under the light of the training room.


    But then, War took off his helm and smiled at Vali, "But maybe you could take a little break. It has been 12 hours since you started training today, after all."


    "Finally!" Vali cheered happily, before instantly running out of the training room to get some snacks and watch some TV to relax.


    Now, don''t get him wrong, he still loves fighting but not when he loses for like every round. He is still a child, after all. Every single day since the day he became one of Hikaru''s pawns, he trained harder than anyone his age. Every day, he was covered in his own blood and sweat while shakily holding the spear that Hikaru gave him.


    The first time he got his equipment, he struggled to even move while wearing it. Every piece of the armor weighs a total of 500 Kilograms each, and the black spear was around one ton. They were the heaviest things he had to wear in his life, but it helped him grow his physical strength even further. Due to his genetics as the great grandson of Lucifer himself, he was able to grow stronger quicker than any devils the same age as him.


    While he does complain whenever War kicks his ass, he doesn''t dislike the training. It makes him grow stronger than ever before, and this is all for the sake of getting revenge to his father and grandfather. Oh, how he loves to slaughter the two of them and spread their innards all over the place.


    He had abandoned his other goal, which is to best Great Red, and instead replaced it with another goal; become stronger than his master, AKA, Hikaru.


    He found out that his master is even stronger than Great Red, if the light show of him destroying a solar system wasn''t enough proof of his strength. Hikaru is by far the strongest being he has seen in his life. Azazel can''t even bring himself to look at Hikaru''s eyes without feeling fear towards the powerful being.


    But the most surprising part was how submissive War, Pestilence, and Lady Death were towards Hikaru. They literally couldn''t speak his name without trembling a little. Those three are the three most powerful beings he has ever seen in his life, even Super Devils can''t compare to their strength. Most "powerful" beings in this world aren''t even as strong as War''s finger, and that''s even an understatement.


    He had gotten along with the giant lizard living under the caste, since it reminded him a little of Albion. The lizard is kind towards him for some reason but he''s going to complain about it since they are now best buds! That lizard is strong though. It could destroy a mountain with a swipe of its claws, but its strength is nowhere near to his master''s strength.


    Anyway, he''ll take a break before he goes to rest, since he is going to train again tomorrow.


    (With Hikaru)


    "Damn, even this is a bit of an overkill."


    Arriving at Stage 1,000,000, he stood up to see a million Black Knights, waiting to kill him.


    Now, each and every single one of them are 1/100 as strong as him. They could probably slice him in half, if he isn''t careful.


    Right now, he equipped no equipment and only came barehanded. He trusts his skills as a fighter, and his overpowered magic spells.


    With a snap of his fingers, he muttered, "Celestial Borg," and a transparent blue barrier surrounded him. Like hawks, the black knights circled around him like a predator staring at its prey. Unfortunately for them, it seems like the role is reversed.


    The arena he was on is a large stone land that stretched farther than the eyes can see. It''s a flat land, so it will be easier for the black knights to move around. But the thing that caught his eyes the most were their formations. Tens upon tens of thousands of archers were at the very back, while black knights at the front had huge shields that he has never seen before. At the middle of their formation were the black knights equipped with melee weapons like the giant black great sword, longsword, spear, and short sword.


    All of them looked menacing, but that didn''t stop Hikaru from creating a giant sun in the sky that was almost as big as the sun. The heat murdered their armors, but they felt no pain, only the robotic commands of the being that created them.


    Hikaru then brought down the sun, engulfing the entire arena with light and heat.


    After a few seconds or so, the light went down and all of the black knights were gone, not even ashes remained.


    "Hmm, that worked well." Usually, most of them would be able to survive that and immediately attack him so that he won''t have the time to cast that spell again. He created that spell when he wanted to know how to create a sun, he named it, "The Nearing Sun". Normally, this spell wouldn''t even kill a quarter of those black knights, but since he was able to level up his INT Stat, he now has stronger magic power.


    Looking at his rewards, he smiled.


    [Rewards: 100 Quintillion Souls, Black Knight''s Summoning Stone *100, Black Knight''s Halberd *10,000, Black Knight''s Greatsword *10,000, Black Knight''s Longsword *10,000, Black Knight''s Short Sword *10,000, Black Knight''s Great Bow *10,000, Black Knight Armor Set *2000, Divine Blessings *100,000, Black Knight Gladiator''s Duel Blades *10,000, Anti-Demon Fighting Style Book *10, Junk *1,000,000, Undead Feces *1,000,000]


    He immediately threw away the junk and feces that appeared as his reward. You see, whenever he dips his hand into the bottomless box he touches other items, and feces are just gross. They are basically undead shit from undead who ate food and never really had the function to digest it, then it turns into Undead Feces. Fortunately for him, he does have the function to digest, except he doesn''t get any nutrients, the food just disappears whenever it goes down his throat.


    Anyway, point is, it''s disgusting and he doesn''t want his hands, or any of his body part, near it.


    He nodded at the rest of the rewards. He basically has millions of Black Knight Equipment just sitting in his bottomless box, or storage, and he can better equip his army with these weapons and armors. They are not upgraded, since he''ll have to upgrade them one by one and that''ll take way too long, but they are powerful equipment and no army in the entire galaxy would be able to beat his future army once they are well coordinated and strong enough to actually face some of the fiercest war lords in the universe.


    But he hasn''t actually built his army yet, he is just currently training his generals, I.e his chess pieces. War, Pestilence, Lady Death, the giant lizard sleeping in his bas.e.m.e.nt, and Tiamat are barely even qualified to be proper generals for him. He had seen what some galactic empires could do. Even their civilians have the power to destroy mountains, and look at his group. In terms of power, his group loses without him.


    Vali can''t even beat War, though it''s only reasonable for him not to since War has more than 3,000,000 power level while Vali only has around 16,000 or so. If he calculated right, War is almost 300 times stronger than Vali.


    Currently, he has the Sacred Gear, Divine Dividing. He took it from Vali because he decided to bring this back to one of his children, Taiyou maybe? Yeah, Taiyou is more calm and collected, even surpassing Shikamaru''s son in terms of intelligence. Though, they are still growing, so some things might change in the future.


    Once he finds the Boosted Gear, he''ll give it to Emiyo because he thinks that she is much suited for the Sacred Gear. She is as energetic as her mother, when her mother was a child. Trust him, he knows how "energetic" Azumi was, and still is. Anyway, Emiyo is hot blooded and will probably do rash things like saving a village or something without knowing the details behind why the village was attacked in the first place.


    Emiyo will be perfect for the title of the "Red Dragon Emperor" but he''ll change it into the "Red Dragon Empress". He''ll castrate the dragon if he has to, just to achieve that title for his sweet daughter.


    Somewhere, in some place, a red dragon shuddered.


    (Scene Change)


    The little planet he left alone for a month had turned into something he might call "A Really Shitty Place". Turns out, more than 40,000 years had passed in that little planet of his and, how do I say this, the church that Roddrick built after slaughtering a bunch of people that was dedicated towards him, Hikaru, as their god have been filled with a bunch of popes that are really into kids. Now, that church was dedicated for him by one of his people, and pedophiles roam that church? This is blasphemy towards him! He''ll go down there immediately and kill those f.u.c.k.i.n.g shits! He created them and he can f.u.c.k.i.n.g destroy them, that''s for sure!


    The small planet orbited around a small sun that was 10 times bigger than the small planet. There were two small moons that he created for the little planet. Under that small solar system, he created, was a grass plain that stretched as far as the eyes can see.


    The small solar system he created was inside a barrier that engulfed them with darkness, with the small sun being the only light that brightened them. He plans to add more planets soon, but not now. He has something to do, and that thing is to strangle all the popes to the death.


    As he was just ready to shrink himself to a microscopic being and jump into that small planet he created himself, he sensed something. It was despair, coming from a little boy in that little world.


    He zoomed his vision into that world, only to see 5 thugs surrounding a boy and a girl. The boy shakily held a dulled long sword against the five a.d.u.l.t thugs, while the girl hid behind him. Now that he looks closer, those thugs weren''t really thugs, they looked like priests.


    (Artorias POV)


    I need to escape with Ruth! If I don''t, they''ll capture and do unspeakable acts towards her!


    The five priests in front of me smiled like vile creatures of the wild, like goblins. They all had hungry looking eyes, but they were not looking at me but at Ruth.


    I''m scared, no, terrified to fight against them but Ruth is my friend, and friends are always there for each other!


    "Be a good boy and just give us the girl and we''ll let you live. We''ll forget that this happened, okay?" One of them said. I saw their eyes licking Ruth all over the place, and I instantly got mad.


    "S-Shut up, you filthy priests! If only all of you didn''t exist, then our lives would''ve been better!" I screamed at them while shakily holding the dulled sword my father had.


    "Tch, let me kill him, Airon. He''s talking just like my pop, and I hate that."


    The one named Airon just nodded nonchalantly, and said, "Just don''t hurt the girl, she''s an important object for the pope. Maybe once he''s finish with her we''ll get our turns."


    The more I listened to their conversation, the more I got angry at them. These are the people my parents bow down to? Laughable, they are no priests, they are vile beasts that don''t have the same privilege as I, a human, have. But what can I do? I don''t have any strength nor power to use to defeat them, but I have to protect Ruth!


    I saw the one who said he wanted to kill me, slowly walked towards me. He licked the blade he took out from the sheath by his waist, and said, "Hehehe, I''ll make this as painful as possible, boy. You''ll regret having been birth into this world after I''m done with you! Hah!"


    The priest attacked with the blade, which I clumsily blocked with my dull sword.


    *Clang*


    While I held the handle of the sword, my hands felt numb after clashing with the priest''s blade. He''s strong, but if his strength is just like this, I can probably beat him.


    The priest smirked, then said, "You''re probably thinking that you could beat me, right, boy? Well, let me tell you something, there''s a reason why most people fear us."


    The priest spread lifted his arm, and spread his hand widely before a ball of blue flame appeared on his hand, "And it''s because of this, magic! Everyone is afraid of us because we have magic! Not even a hundred farmers can best one of us priests because we have magic! A single spell can obliterate an army of trained soldiers! Heh, now that I''ve opened your small eyes, die!"


    "Artorias!" Ruth screamed.


    He shot the blue fire towards me. As the ball of fire slowly engulfed my vision, my life flashed right before my eyes. I saw the moments when my parents trained me to fight with the sword, when they trained me how to hunt in the wild. Is this really how my 11 years of life is going to end? It''s kinda unfair, really. These vile beasts will probably live a long life with luxuries in their entire life, while most people in this world will die starving somewhere. I hate this world, I hate the one who made it, I hate, I hate, I hate them all!


    If only these priests would disappear from this world¡­ If only I had that kind of power¡­ maybe¡­. Just maybe¡­ I wouldn''t die here.


    I closed my eyes, readying myself, and after a few seconds, nothing happened. I didn''t feel pain, nor anything like that. I opened one of my eyes to peek, then opened both of them as I stared at the scene in front of me. The ball of fire was in front of my face, but it was suspended in air. Now that I looked around me, everything stopped moving.


    I saw the priests, and they weren''t moving while they were standing up. But even then, they still have this vile look on their faces. I just want to kill them¡­ maybe everything will be over once I killed them.


    "Boo!"


    "Aaah!"


    I yelped in surprise as I heard a voice behind me. I turned around to see an a.d.u.l.t man wearing strange clothing with this uncomfortable smile on his face. But there was something wrong; his feet weren''t touching the floor.


    "Why, hello there, Artorias, was it? I see that you''re about to die. Let''s not beat around the bush, so I''ll introduce myself. I am the one who created this world, the one you said you hate. I was about to just kill all the priests in this world when I saw what has happened, but then I saw your name. Artorias isn''t a common name, for it is a name of a warrior. A warrior who once stood against the abyss, but in the end was overcome by it. Then he became a warrior who was caught by the abyss but still fought the enemies that he swore to fight to protect his people, and then he fought another warrior from the distant future, who bested him with great difficulty even when his arm was broken. He was called, Artorias, The Abyss Walked." That smile grew even more wider; it was as if he was looking at a toy.


    "Why are yo¡ª"


    I was interrupted by him, "Now, you might be asking why I am explaining this to you; it''s because I want you to become the next Abyss Walker!"


    "What?"


    "I know that you''re still a child, so I''ll give you a training book that contains all of the previous Artorias''s fighting style and a long sword that''s two times bigger than your small, puny body. I will then grant you a single blessing. Choose from these three; Superhuman Strength, Large Amount of Mana, or Both?"


    "I still don''t understand what''s happening." I said honestly.


    "Choose now, or have this chance be gone forever from your life." He said, still keeping that eerie smile.


    "Uh, both?" I said, unsure as to why he would put such a great option there.


    "Good choice! I knew you weren''t stupid!" The self-proclaimed creator of this world snapped his fingers, and everything exploded in white.


    (End POV)


    (With Hikaru)


    He giddily made a box of popcorn appear in his hands while having a flat screen TV on top of a table sit in front of him. This TV is connected to Artorias''s vision, so Hikaru would be able to watch the boy''s life just like a movie.


    "I thought I wouldn''t be able to get something out of this small planet, but that was not true, at all! I have a free TV Series in my hands!" Hikaru said, while trying to control his excitement.


    The reason he is this excited is because he knew that this boy is some kind of anime protagonist, but the great thing about this is that the boy will live his life without any kind of script, unlike animes these days.


    He had a remote that is connected to that little planet. This remote has the power to pause that world, change the POV into someone else other than Artorias, and some more.


    Then, he made the ground below him a concrete floor that was around 20 meters in diameter or so. He also created a sofa two times longer than his body, so that he could lay down whenever he wants. A box of ch.i.p.s that he kept inside his bottomless box, some large bottles of soda inside a cooler, tons of popcorns, and then he changed his clothes into sweat pants and a comfortable hoodie.


    And for the finishing touch, a body pillow of Azumi dressed in maid costume.


    "And¡­ here we go." He said, then turned on the Flat Screen TV and pressed record, showing Artorias''s POV.


    (Artorias POV)


    I woke up to something exploding in my face. It felt hot, but it was tolerable. When the blue flame faded, I saw the five priests looking at me in shock. I wondered why, until I realized something. The thing that hit me was the blue fire from earlier! I wasn''t even hurt when it hit me! I looked at my arms, only to see bulging muscles in my thin arms. I am wearing a cheap shirt that my parents could only afford with their money, and blue pants.


    I saw my hair dangling in the corner of my eyes, only to see It has become azure. And my hair was long, already reaching my shoulders! I wasn''t like this earlier!


    Then, I felt something heavy behind my back, so I reached out for it, only to feel a leather pole, then realized that it was a handle of a weapon. There''s a sword in its sheath, tied behind my back! What the hell is going on!?


    "Artorias¡­ is that you?" I heard Ruth''s voice from behind me, so I calmly turned around and smiled at her.


    "Of course, who could I be other than your friend? You''re so silly sometimes, Ruth." I said to her, just to calm her down.


    Then, suddenly, I felt something hot hit my back. I turned around, only to see the priest holding a blue flame, saying, "Don''t be arrogant, boy, just because you managed to take a hit from me, master of fire, Halam!"


    Right, these guys are still here.


    I confidently looked at them, and said, "I don''t feel losing today!" Then charged towards them with no weapons. It was rash, I knew that, but I felt invincible! I felt like I could take on the entire world right now! Is this power given to me by the creator of this world? It doesn''t matter, what does matter is that I now have the power to change the world for the better! To change it into a world where Ruth can live peacefully! Ruth is my friend, and I will protect her for the rest of my life!


    I bulldozed right through the five of them, I felt their bones crack when we made contact. I was like a tanker, every move I made was filled with power behind them. I was about to move once more, when I turned around and saw that they weren''t moving anymore.


    When I saw their broken corpses, I didn''t feel any guilt, only exhilaration. I killed them, the vile beasts that tormented everyone in this village, I killed them! They are no longer here! If I kill the other vile beast sitting on his throne right by the church, then this village will be free from their grasps!


    Yes, these beasts are no humans, they are worthless, unchained beasts that should be slaughtered like livestock in a farmhouse! No mercy shall be given to these beasts!


    I didn''t notice it, but at this moment, I had the smile of a feral beast, ready to kill its prey; I.e the church. The church, they shall die by my hands!


    "A-Artorias¡­ are you okay?" Ruth asked from behind me, her voice filled with worry for me.


    I turned around towards her, I saw her flinched but I didn''t know why, and I said, "Of course, Ruth. I''ve never felt any better! I have saved you from these beasts, how could I not be okay? Don''t worry, Ruth, soon, all of them will be gone. No one shall torment you, ever again!!"


    I gripped her hand tightly, with a smile that could only be equaled by these beasts but I didn''t know that, at the time, I was plunging deeper into the abyss.


    "Artorias, you''re hurting me." Ruth said, trying to get my hand off hers.


    I let go of her, and apologized, "I''m sorry. Did that hurt? Let''s go home and have you patch up."


    "N-No, I''m fine. Artorias, what happened to you? You seem so obsessed with something, is something wrong?" Ruth asked, still having that worried tone in her voice.


    Unknowingly, I still kept that smile as I said softly, "As I''ve said before, I''m fine. There''s nothing to worry about, Ruth. You''re such a worrywart, silly."


    "I-If you say so. Come, let''s go home before everyone finds out about this." Ruth said as she grabbed me by the hand and led me towards our "secret base" in the nearby mountains.


    (Scene Change)


    Every kid in the Village of Gahalla has a secret base of some kind, it''s just that Ruth and I took it a little further and made a base in the nearby base of a mountain just around the village. No one knew about this base except me, my mother, and Ruth.


    Ruth is an orphan, and she has always been hiding in the corner shyly while reading a book. Everybody in the orphanage bullied her because of she was different from the others. While everyone had bright colored hair, she had black hair, just like mine, or used to, since my hair mysteriously changed into azure blue.


    I met Ruth when I saw her alone outside of a forest, reading the story of Roddrick, The First. I always fancied that story because of how awesome and cool Lord Roddrick was. But I didn''t believe in the God, or the creator of this world until I saw him myself. He gave me this strange power for some reason, saying that he wanted me to become the next abyss walker.


    Anyway, Ruth and I got along because of our similarities. I, too, like reading books because they hold great amount of knowledge. Some old people were saying that we have become too addicted to these books and told us that back in their days, they had to memorize everything and rely on books. I call that bullshit, I''m sorry mom for my language, these old people are just relics of the past. Books were created since the start of time, but they were only popularized 80 years ago, which is just a ton of shit.


    Every day I would come to the orphanage where Ruth was staying in and played a lot with her. Some kids my age taunted me for playing with the weird girl, but I beat them up black and blue that they came crying to the patron. I flipped them the bird, then continued playing with Ruth.


    Days passed back then, and when my parents saw that I was happy with Ruth, they decided to adopt her, so that we''ll be able to play at home. But don''t get me wrong, she''s my friend and forever will be my friend. In law, we are siblings, but to me, we are friends.


    But then, the day came when the church began to kidnap children, especially girls. They were about to take Ruth away from me, so I ran away with her. My parents were the ones that were ready to give Ruth to them, just so they could leave us alone, but I didn''t give a damn. I don''t want to give my friend to those vile beasts, they should not be able to exist, and even breath the same air as I do! They are just worthless monsters that should be gutted and killed by wolves!


    Unfortunately, not everyone had the same opinion I have. They respect these vile beasts, instead of hating them.


    I ran away with Ruth but they caught up to me in no time.


    Now, after killing them with the newly acquired power the creator gave me, I escaped to the secret base in the mountains, where no a.d.u.l.t venture too deep into because of the wild beasts that lurked here. Wolves, bears, badgers, tigers, and even lions live in this mountain. But Ruth and I are agile because we are just little children, and we could hide from them every single time.


    We arrived in our secret base. It is an underground base with wooden logs and planks supporting the surface from falling down on us. We have a chest in here that we built together, it''s full of stuff like weapons, some leather armor we stole from the town blacksmith in the past, and other stuff like wooden weapons that we could use for protection.


    There are also meat jerkies hanging from the metal wires we set up, so that it would dry up and we could eat it. But from time to time, ants would try to eat them, so we used anti-ants'' repellant that we bought from the magic store for 10 copper notes.


    The good thing about this repellant that it doesn''t affect the meat jerkies, only the ants.


    While we call this our secret base, this is more like of a home to us than my parents'' house. My parents are busy people, and are always working. The only reason they adopted Ruth was because they wouldn''t worry about me beating up other kids in the orphanage for bullying Ruth. And it saves them the headache of worrying about me whenever I go to the orphanage alone to play with Ruth.


    Don''t get me wrong, my parents are good people, it''s just that they are too brainwashed by those beasts from the church.


    I put down the long sword that I think the creator gave to me, and studied for a moment before looking at what Ruth is doing.


    Ruth grabbed a meat jerky that was hanging on the metal wires and ate it, "T-This should calm me down a little." Then, she sat on the log that we dragged inside to become our chair, and said, "What are we going to do now, Artorias? They are hunting us, no, me so that they could satisfy their wicked l.u.s.t. I''m scared, I don''t know what to do." She held the meat jerky firmly. She was afraid of what will happen in the future.


    I kneeled down in front of her, and said, "Don''t worry, Ruth, I will protect you forever. No matter how much time has passed, I will lay my life down just for you. So, please, don''t worry and relax. I''m here, aren''t I?"


    She smiled at me, all her worries gone, and said, "Thank you, for always being there for me."


    I hugged her, and said, "I''ll be there for you, always."

 Chapter 144 - 132: Sabotaging Sirzechss Businesses

    It was night when he heard many people shouting their names, awakening him.


    "Artorias! Ruth!" They yelled out.


    Artorias quickly went up the ladder he made to peek on what''s happening on the surface, and saw many of his previous fellow villagers holding torches to light up their way. As fast as he could without making any noise, he covered their entrance with some dried up leaves to cover it and then blew out the candle inside their base so that no one would be able to find them.


    (Artorias POV)


    How did they know that we ran to this mountain!? That''s impossible, unless¡­ my mother told them. Yes, that''s a possibility. But even then, while she knows that we have a secret base in the mountain, she doesn''t know the exact location. If we just keep quiet until they leave the mountain, then we will be fine. I promised to protect Ruth, I''m not backing down now. Damn those beasts of the church! I''ll slaughter them with the new strength I receive from the creator when I have the chance!


    I immediately woke up Ruth. She looked still sleepy but I covered her mouth and said, "People from the village are searching for us, we need to stay quiet for now. We''ll leave the moment they leave the foot of the mountain. We''ll go to Leiron Village, which is 5 mountains from our village. I heard they have an Adventurer''s Guild there, I could join the guild and earn money for the both of us while, at the same time, train myself. They are also protected by the Kingdom of Sorcery since the son of the Village Chief is a Tier-4 Sorcerer, so the church won''t be able to reach us there. What do you say?"


    Ruth nodded with a smile and said, "I''m fine wherever we go, as long as I''m with you, Artorias."


    I hugged her, and with a smile that resembles hers, I said, "Thank you, Ruth. Just those words are enough to back me up."


    I let go of her and stared at her for a moment, before I immediately got to packing our stuff. We worked together to pack our stuff in the leather bags that we made ourselves some time ago after hunting a deer for its skin. But even then, these leather bags are not that big and we could only carry so much. So, the only thing we packed were the food and a sharp knife for Ruth, in case some situation pops up.


    The food we had could only last us in less than 3 days, and travelling to Leiron Village would take about a month or so. I will have to hunt some animals to cook and eat while we''re travelling. Then there are monsters in the mountains that could kill us, but we only have to worry little about that because we''ll be going around the mountains so that we could avoid the deeper parts of the mountains, which houses hundreds of different species of monsters. Some of those species have the bloodline of the legendary dragons, and every creature that has the tiniest drop of a dragon''s blood can become legends among legends. That is how powerful those legendary creatures are.


    The moment the sun rose, the people from the village retreated back to their respective homes due to tiredness from searching for the children all night long.


    Ruth and I each took 4 hours of sleep so that we won''t be tired from today''s journey. The instant we noticed that there were no villagers searching for us anymore, we immediately went to the surface and then took the way towards the Leiron Village.


    We knew that this would be a long and difficult journey, but we believe that we can survive this. If we couldn''t, we would never be able to survive the rest.


    As we tread around the mountain, we knew that we would never be able to return into our village. This is our first step into our freedom, into our peace. For Ruth, I will burn down the church and reclaim our peaceful life.


    No matter who stands in my way, I will cut them apart.


    (End POV)


    (Scene Change)


    "Meh, too boring." Hikaru said while lazily lying sideways with the remote in his hand, pointing at the TV in front of him.


    "Too dark and gritty for my taste, I want something more mature and have some s.e.x vibes, like those American movies where they show tits. Maybe I should make this world an only female''s world? That would be s.e.xy, and then I''ll make all of the women as beautiful as my dearest wives! Nah, too much work and they would self-destruct on their own because there won''t be a man. I''ll just endure watching anime shows."


    As he said that, he suddenly had an enlightenment, "What if I fund the most famous anime studio to make good anime shows for me? I can certainly do that! Then, they''ll be able to release episodes faster than before! Good idea, Hikaru!" He patted himself on the back for having this "brilliant" idea.


    He stood up and cleared up the place with a single snap of his fingers, before leaving the dimension he created, thus leaving the little planet completely alone. But he forgot to do one thing, and that is fixing the time in the small solar system he created.


    You see, to watch Artorias''s life, he had to turn off the [525,600 in 1 Minute] thing. Basically, he forgot to turn on the [1 Minute is 1 Year] thing on that world, thus the little planet will rotate around its sun the same time Earth does. Which means, if Hikaru returns to inspect the little planet again in a few days, only a few days would have passed in the little planet also.


    Since Hikaru has a short temper right now due to the darkness he absorbed from Chaortos a year back, he will be pissed when he realizes what he just forgot to do.


    (Scene Change)


    The moment he got back to Japan, he called upon the 5 Council to fund the most popular anime studio with 5 billion dollars to pump a lot of anime shows for him. The 05 Council had no choice but to do that, and after half-an-hour of discussing the deal with the current president of the said studio, who introduced himself as President Ryohei Takahashi. They returned to him and said that the president of the studio must know his tastes for anime, so that they could make it for him.


    He said, "I want an anime with lots of depths, good animation, a bit edgy kind, characters that have proper developments throughout the series, oh, oh, and use a lot of gore when somebody dies. Don''t, and never, censor it, or I''ll be bankrupting their entire studio with lots of sue allegations that the people will definitely believe. And also, have lots of nudes in the anime. I don''t care if it becomes hentai, just make sure to broadcast it everywhere, so that others can watch it too. And tell him to not worry about some officials going crazy over this, I''ll silence them all. Got it?"


    "Yes, sir. I''ll tell him what you said right now with extreme accuracy." A child''s voice could be heard from the phone. This is the child prodigy who secretly found a way to create the elixir of immortality back in medieval times. When he was born, he could already talk and think for himself. He found out that the people around him were weird, at least to him, so he never talked to any of them and became known as mute. Neglected by his parents, he burned down his entire village with corrosive oil that burned wider than any oil. He made that oil when he was five.


    His name is Deimon Answerus, and he has been alive for more than hundreds of years and still looked like a child. While the elixir immortality was worth it, at the age of 13, he killed hundreds of millions of people just to claim their souls for his own selfish desires. That''s right, he was the one who made the rats spread the bubonic plague, which was named "The Black Death''''. He did that to create the "elixir of immortality", which just absorbed the life force of every soul he sacrificed to it. One soul gave him two years'' worth of life force, and imagine that he claimed millions of souls for this sick and twisted desire of his.


    Anyway, he''s immortal, incredibly smart, and joined the 05 Council many years ago. He is currently Hikaru''s slave.


    After explaining the things Hikaru said to President Takahashi, the president immediately agreed, since Deimon showed him what he could do to his studio with a little bit of magic trick, using nothing but a small phone. He hacked the entire studio, that''s what he did.


    Soon, the president could only nod at the orders of Hikaru. While some of the things he asked were difficult to do, they would be able to do it for the sake of that money. Just a percent of that amount could make any of them live the rest of their lives in some luxury house.


    But the president knew that double crossing this "Hikaru" person would kill his business, and by extension, him.


    After that, Hikaru went to some nearby hotel called "Kyoto Sirzechs Hotel". Just the name was a clue of who owns this hotel. Anyway, he didn''t really care and just went inside to check in one of the VIP Rooms in the hotel, only to find out they were full.


    He asked the hotel clerk why, and she just said, "The owner of the hotel went to have a vacation along with his family and friends in the VIP Rooms. We are terribly sorry for the inconvenience."


    Holding the urge to wipe this country off the map, Hikaru forced a smile and took out a case full of cash, around 1,000,000 dollars, then whispered to her, "Convince your boss to open a VIP Room and I''ll give you this money."


    But the clerk only held a stoic face in front of such a large sum, and said, "I''m sorry, but money doesn''t matter to us. If you would like, we would offer you a hotel room close to the luxurious designs of the VIP Rooms."


    Hikaru was surprised for a moment when she refused his offer, when he realized that he was talking to a devil. He saw that all of the staff here are devils, which means human money doesn''t matter to them. They are already getting paid much more by the devils they work for.


    But he has a backup plan for this kind of situation. If you can''t bribe them with money, then you can bribe them with something else.


    Behind his back was his left hand, and in his hand grew a blue fruit excluding an aura of mana. It was concealed to everyone, except for the female clerk.


    He handed the fruit in front of the table, and he said, "I know you devils like this fruit because I have studied your genes with magic and whatnot to make this fruit that will instantly make you hunger for it. This will boost the mana inside you and make your magic stronger."


    The female clerk was the only one able to see the fruit, and no one other than her could see it. When she laid her eyes on that fruit, she knew she had to have it as soon as possible. Something inside her was screaming for her to grab it and eat it as fast as possible, but due to the effects of her training, she was able to control herself.


    She still held a stoic face while she said out loud for everyone to hear, "Sir, please get out of our establishment. You are not allowed to bribe employees here, and this is our first and last warning; leave."


    Now he is really considering whether he should wipe Kyoto off Japan''s map, or let it live to see another day. This clerk purposely said that out loud to embarrass him, which is now her second biggest mistake. Her first mistake was refusing his offer.


    The people in the lobby of the hotel all looked at him because of what the clerk said. He''s barely holding the urge to massacre everyone in this establishment. But he still had another option, and that is hypnotism.


    He didn''t even need to do anything. Just a quick look at her eyes, she immediately went dazed and became engulfed in his hypnotism magic.


    This magic of his is just like geass from that anime, Code Geass. A single look of his eyes can hypnotize anyone weaker than him, but it cannot hypnotize anything that has no mind of its own. He can rewrite anyone''s mind with this magic ability and plant a new set of memories that will make them absolutely loyal to him. But he really can''t call this "hypnotism" due to that latter fact, it''s more like deleting someone''s memories and replacing it with fakes.


    Maybe the name "Delete and Rewrite" is more fitting for this ability.


    He made this because of no apparent reason, at all. This is a fun ability to use. Imagine if a galactic warlord sees his army bowing down to the opposite party, that would be a hilarious sight to see.


    Anyway, now this clerk is loyal to him and would forever do anything for him.


    "Now, go call your boss. I''ll talk to him myself." He ordered.


    The clerk only nodded numbly, "As you wish, master."


    She dialed some numbers to the nearest telephone, and when it rang, she gave it to Hikaru.


    He grabbed the phone and waited as it rang, then after a few seconds, someone picked it up.


    A female teen''s voice could be heard, "Hello, who is this?"


    Hikaru then replied with, "Ah, could you bring that telephone to someone called, Sirzechs Lucifer? I want to talk to him, please."


    "Okay." The teen replied, then he heard her say, "Lucifer-sama, someone wants to talk to you." He heard the phone being handed to someone.


    "Hello, this is Sirzechs, who is this?"


    "I''m Hikaru, I want to stay in a VIP Room but I heard you and your family have taken them all. I''m not a party pooper, I just want a good place to stay in. Money is not a problem."


    "I''m sorry, but I cannot give one to you because all of them have been occupied by other family friends. But you can still check in some good rooms we have, there are many of them still vacant."


    Why can''t everyone just cooperate quietly?


    "I''m not requesting for the room; I am demanding it. Can''t you guys just share a room?"


    Sirzechs frowned, and said through the phone, "Please don''t be rude, I''m trying to be as respectful as possible. We really don''t have any VIP Rooms available at the moment, please just pick a normal hotel room. It''s best for the both of us that way."


    More and more, Hikaru got irritated and finally had enough.


    "Fine, I''ll just buy the entire hotel."


    He immediately hung up on Sirzechs and threw the phone away, then took out his own phone. He called upon the 05 Council again, and said, "Deimon, buy the Kyoto Sirzechs Hotel! And yes, right now! I want it in less than a minute."


    Deimon, still calm and collected, replied, "Affirmative, sir. But can you extend the time to 10 Minutes? We just investigated the hotel and it''s harder to crack than other hotel companies. If you want to own the hotel, it''ll take 10 Minutes, but if you want to bankrupt it, then that will take around 1 Minute at most."


    Hikaru thought about it for a moment, and finally said, "Strip it of everything. I realized that this hotel doesn''t really have any value to me. Bankrupt it until it no longer makes any money, and find any hotels around the world that have the same owner, and make them all swim in trillions of debts."


    The people around him looked at him as if he was some kind of lunatic, but in the end, they just ignored him, thinking he was just some crazy individual. He left after a few minutes, and then everything went haywire. The electricity in the entire building went out, the water was cut off, and hundreds of people that checked in the hotel suddenly went down to the lobby to check out.


    It didn''t even take an hour for the entire hotel to become an abandoned building. The employees were all that''s left in the building along with the current owners of the hotel.


    Meanwhile, Sirzechs sat dumbly on his sofa as he looked at his phone. The hotels and establishments he built around the world were all stripped of everything. Not even a single penny was left. And not only that, he is also trillions of dollars in debt. His human money was being drained from his numerous bank accounts all around the world, it was as if some mysterious force was taking everything from him.


    Then, he realized something, "Does this have to do with the man who demanded a VIP Room earlier?"


    While this isn''t that big of a problem, it is still problematic that an unknown being had drained him of all his money¡­ human money, at least. He still has most of his money back in the devil''s world. But even then, how could someone go as far as bankrupting hundreds of famous companies all over the world because they were rejected for a hotel room? How petty is that guy?


    Grayfia sat next to him while laying down the tray that has two cups of coffee on the table, and said, "Should I hunt down the one who did this?" Find authorized novels in , faster updates, better experience, Please click #''s-businesses_52249702900496155 for visiting.


    He shook his head, "No, you shouldn''t. You almost died a year ago. The man who almost killed you back then might still be in the devil world, that''s why I decided to throw father''s birthday in the human world and not in the devil world. But I didn''t think something like this would happen, is it possible that the man who attacked you was also the one who did this? I don''t know a single person that would do something like this."


    "I don''t know, but whoever did this might be a strong being. No one can do this kind of thing in less than an hour, not even us." She said.


    "Yes, that''s why we need to find the one who did this as soon as possible. The security camera footage from earlier didn''t contain any of his image, it was as if he was never there. Everyone at the lobby at that time forgot who he is, and doesn''t even have an image of what he looks like. We don''t have any clues regarding this man, but if there''s a slight chance that the one who attacked you and the one who did this are the same person, you should draw his face and spread it all over the devil world so that anyone who sees him would be able to report to us immediately."


    She nodded, and said, "Understood, I''ll do it immediately." And then she casted a teleportation spell and disappeared, leaving Sirzechs alone.


    Alone, he had more time to think. He had already sent his family and friends back to the devil world, because the party had been canceled.


    Now, the only thing he has to do is wait.


    (Scene Change)


    (January 12, 2010)


    It''s been a month since he ruined every business that the Gremory''s had. If they try to build another business, it will immediately fail spectacularly due to the fact that the 05 Council is monitoring them 24/7. He''ll never let them build another business in this world, no matter the cost.


    While this, to put it simply, is a waste of his time, he''s just too irritated at the fact that someone actually dared to refuse him. There''s this voice in the back of his head, telling him to completely ruin them. But he has been able to stop himself from doing that, so far.

 Chapter 145 - Announcement Of A New Novel, Im not going to drop this.

    Guys, I did it, I finally did it! I made a new novel! If you can, please read it. I want to know your opinions of it, but it''s just the first chapter. I don''t know yet. Find authorized novels in , faster updates, better experience, Please click #''m-not-going-to-drop-this._52274850202441187 for visiting.


    And if you like the first chapter, please drop a few stones.


    I''m not kidding this time, I''m going to be a bit of a money grubber because I really want to monetize my new novel in three months or so. If I earn money from that novel, then I won''t be a failure anymore. My mother would be proud of me and I would be able to move out of my mother''s house at the age of 21 or so, unless she buys a property and build a house there.


    The name is "Getting Stronger While Using My Clones".